eles ae

OF THE

COUNCIL AND OFFICERS

OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL

SOCIETY OF LONDON.

1909,

COUNCIL.

His Grace Tar Duxe or Beprorp, K.G., President.

GrorcE A. Boutencsr, Esq.,

F.R.S., Vice-President.

Prof. J. Rosr Braprorp, M.D.,

D.Sc., F.R.S., Vice-President.

Lt.-Col. Str R. HavetocK-

CHaruss, K.C.V.O., M.D.

AurreD H. Cocks, Esq., M.A.

THe Rr. Hon. Toe Haru or

Cromer, P.C., G.C.B.

CHARLES DRUMMOND,

Treasurer.

FREDERICK GILLETT, Esq.

F. Du Canr Gopman, Esq.,

D.C.L., F.R.S., Vice-Prest-

dent.

Tae Marquis oF HAmiLton,

M.P.

Ksq.,

Sypnry F. Harmer, Esq., M.A.,

Se.D., F.R.S., Vice-President.

Sir Epmunp G. Lover, Bt.

EK. G. B. Meape-Watpo, Esq.

Prof. Epwarp A. Mrncutn,

M.A., Vice-President.

P. CaAumers MircHert, Esq.,

M.A., D.Sc., Hon. LL.D.,

E.R.S., Secretary.

W. R. Octtyie-Grant, Esa.

ALBERT Pam, Esq.

OLDFIELD THomas, Esq., F.R.S.

A. Trevor-Barrysr, Esq., M.A.

A. Smita Woopwarp, KHsq.,

LL.D.,F.R.S., Vice-President.

Henry Woopwarb, Esq., LL.D.,

DIRS)

PRINCIPAL OFFICERS.

P. Cuatmers Mircnenn, M.A., D.Sc., Hon.LL.D., F.R.S.,

Secretary.

Frank EK. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S., Prosector

R. I. Pocock, F.L.8., Curator of Mammals and Reptiles, and

Resident Superintendent of the Gardens.

D. Sera-Surrs, Curator of Birds and Inspector of Works.

Henry G. Purmmer, M.R.C.8., Pathologist.

F. H. WatersHouss, Librarian.

JOHN Barrow, Accowntant.

W. H. Coxz, Chief Clerk,

LIST OF CONTENTS.

1909, pp. 545-952.

May 11, 1909.

Mr. R. H. Burne, M.A., F.Z.8. Exhibition of specimens of

adaptive structures for the respiration of air in some

Aquatic Invertebrates and Tropical Freshwater Fishes .

Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.L.S., F.Z.S8. Exhibition and description

of the skin of an undescribed local race of Monkey,

Cercopithecus tantalus alewandri ..........0.0ccececenveeeeeees E

Mr W. F. H. Rosenberg, F.Z.S. Exhibition of a Rook

oul a Evang cvavopsmmelll ovllll fee cacesobosdageoorcnosane nce ase sAenone:

1. Contributions to the Study of the Equide.*—I, The

Differentiation of the Three Species of Zebras. By

Prof. Wintram Rrpeeway, M.A., Sc.D., F.B.A., LL.D.,

IEG sel ies net ee SAE occ he On eR Coie RE one Mer eee

2. Contributions to the Study of the Equide.—II. On

Hitherto Unrecorded Specimens of Hquwus quagga. By

Prof. Witu1am Riverway, M.A., 8c.D., F.B.A., LL.D.,

HDT EMD eens neroar ge sere soe tacit rs soya Sera dase ee aa cae

3. Contributions to the Study of the Equide.—III. On

a Portion of a Fossil Jaw of one of the Equide. By

Prof. WinniaAM RipeEeway, M.A., Se.D., F.B.A., LL.D.,

MTG Ge A ts cerita drs Aly chic pan PMMA to peu ee Ae

4, Ona New Race of Deer from Sze-chuen. By R. LypEKKeEr.

(iE levtge ja NTN eI RA eRe RS Code ass ean or facet ee

5. The Batrachians and Reptiles of Matabeleland. By

HS Cy Cru Be ue Ze Suaeneene nae rates oe ant cc ics foes aces eens

* See also p. 798.

a 2

547

563

586

588

590

May 25, 1909.

The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s

Menagerie during the month of April 1909

@eaoeceecescvece

Mr. J. Lewis Bonhote, F.L.S., F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and

remarks upon, examples of hybrid Ducks

My. L. Harding Cox, F.Z.S. Exhibition of a living specimen

of the Amblystome sJeseyss ects 4:5 tc ev NORE RR ettRt easTotetaae ove ein cet

Mr. R. Lydekker. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, the

photograph of a young Stag from Sikhim ..................

1. On the Skull-Characters in the Southern Sea-Elephant.

TB? its JUNADIISIRTSIR, ood con coords aos sessadeose comodo ou sboseno sees acs

2. On the Skull of a Black Bear from Eastern Tibet, with a

Note on the Formosan Bear. By R. LyDEKKER

3. The Anatomy of the Olfactory Organ of Teleostean Fishes.

By REL eB URNES MWA NZ. SO a rcscanresnncts dene encetee

4. Description of a new Species of the Genus Alpheus Fabr.

Page

599

600

607

610

from the Bay of Batavia. By J.G.pz Man. (Plate LXX.) 663

June 15, 1909.

Mr. H. W. Unthank, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks

upon, a skull of Sphenodon with abnormal nasal region

The Secretary. Exhibition of the ears of an Elephant from

the Guaso Ngishu Plateau, east of Mt. Elgon, British

Mast Athrica inc Ss geces singe s asl hcok cas ee egee ad ee nd oan eee ee

Mr. J.C. White, C.I.E.,C.M.Z.S8. Exhibition of photographs

of a young living specimen of the Takin (Sudorcas)

Mr. R. Lydekker. Exhibition of photographs of a spotted

nll Asemiae Ore Tee yaNAIO IRON SYENIN aooobosscansoqooenddcondéos

Mr. Oldfield Thomas, F.R.S., F.Z.S. Exhibition and de-

scription of a new Rat (Ototylomys guatemale) from

Glatt eimalla ia cuss vis ces ve lctaletoeie setae oaeneh watee cele eee eet

Dr. F. Wood Jones, F.Z.S. On a theory of Atoll formation.

. 666

667

. 668

668

671

Dr. R. Broom, C.M.Z.S. Exhibition of an unborn feetus of

Chrysochloris hottentota, and two young specimens of

CRO SUGE TCE AS osc, n.as Ds aR tS Seka Naar el Mp) See. cerEaRIOS

Dr. R. Broom, C.M.Z.S. Exhibition of the skulls of two

S. African fossil reptiles—Lycosuchus vanderrieti and

J ETWONRODS GO OOO ocRBB BME tna © bo cindpig SoAA SOHUBOMHOnO HuONSnDE ANSABaS

1. On the Organ of Jacobson in Orycteropus. By R. Broom,

Diser CME Sip (Plate: TiXeXde) eee... os. ae ease cence

2. On some Points in the Structure of the Lesser Anteater

(Tamandua tetradactyla), with Notes on the Cerebral

Arteries of Myrmecophaga and on the Postcaval of

Orycteropus. By Frank E. Brepparp, M.A., F.R.S.,

TvAcoen LEIKONSOO KO) TINS) TSOONEII YE Apcoeddacobdcedansdouae oneo>"

3. On Decapod Crustacea from Christmas Island, collected

bys Dr CSW. Andrews, Hangs. EEZS S| By Wade

Cumin Iasi, i yZes (lellenie IDOE) 5 eanacstcossnenn

4, An Abnormal Individual of the Echinoid Amblypneustes.

By H. L. Hawkins, B.Se., Mark Stirrup Scholar in the

UWiniversityaol, Manchester yptcnctes canes. iaceldaetee er ce

5. The Decapods of the Genus Gennadas collected by H.M.S.

‘Challenger. By Sranury Kemp, B.A. (Plates

AT OST TAD Te ENG Wicca cL Ss re ich oles Seen VAN me

6. Notes on a Young Walrus (Odobenus rosmarus) recently

living in the Society’s Gardens. By P. CHALMERS

MircHett, M.A., D.Sc., Hon. LU.D., F.J.S., Secretary

(5® was) (Swereriye —(eleyis) bp. ONGI9) Sendouogdocconeacooonedad

7. Notes on the Viscera of a Walrus (Odobenus rosmarus).

Iii lei, Jal, IBGE, LYNE LY Sash cbocnben y.os5docooucaeccoroane

November 9, 1909.

The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s

Menagerie during the months of May, June, July,

August, and September, 1909................0--eseeeeeceeeees

The Secretary. Exhibition of the frontlet of a Mishmi Takin

(Budorcas taxicolor). Also of a carved wooden figure

lea) Naka). ap arsigsavieienpieplslakinue vicarieg ys Se leoeliees tr Reger

Page

679

680

683

703

714

718

739

Prof. E. A. Minchin, M.A., V.P.Z.S. Exhibition of micro-

scopic preparations of the Cysticercus-stage of a Cestode

found in the body-cavity of rat-fleas (Ceratophyllus

SGSCLULUWS) Finaidaae ew R cia. shlen'e, <a'si<innisie slo ee MEE RERE EERE eee enc aes

Dr. Robert T. Leiper, F.Z.S. Exhibition and deseription of

a new Nematode Worm (Lagochilascaris minor) from

METTLE ase cet « c aaekiciapien niche a een Rees cea ok eae RE

Mr. R. Lydekker. Exhibition of an old coloured print of

the chief room of Bullock’s Museum ..................000005

1. Some Living Shells, their recent Biology and the Light

they throw on the Latest Physical Changes in the

Karth.—l. Mya arenaria. By Sir Henry H. Howorrn,

IGOR El Ors DK OR De miGl sions 1h, Atehe seasdgaascsousaas bocoo000e cen

2. The Asiatic Fishes of the Family Anabantide. By

C. Tart Reean, M.A., F.Z.8. (Plates LX XVII—

TAEXGTONG. WP ita aca cete ab laietre ae Sallths « Hoes RRM OSI ANSe bc ORO eM GRRE gS

3. On a Small Collection of Mammals from Egypt. By

Uo Dinats Tsxessoscounoh Wie, INGIDEShs IDYAisy snqasenobaneosnnee

November 23, 1909.

The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s

Menagerie during the month of October 1909 ............

Prof. William Ridgeway, M.A., D.Sc. A letter from, correcting

an error in his paper on ‘The Differentiation of the

ANGE) (S)OOGUES Oh VAS NERS sa sasecaceatica gasses 950 ageHboqasnseS

Dr. F. D. Welch, F.Z.8. Exhibition of photographs of a

male Gayal (Libos frontalis) living in the Society’s

Gearlens fiche s.« -c sesae ters sige eclepitegiosie bee tearm cert > sere easter

Mr, William Bickerton, F.Z.S., M.B.O.U. Abstract of a

lecture, illustrated with lantern-slides, on the nesting

haunts and habits of the five species of British Nesting

WOrws. tsiabssncessc si vtes ce tacuesatessovevenn4aule cen eeeeeeermeen

Page

741

744

745

767

788

798

800

Vil

1. An Account of the Geographical Distribution of the Mar-

supials and Monotremes of South-West Australia, having

special reference to the Specimens collected during the

Balston Expedition of 1904-1907. By G. C. SHortTRIDGE.

. Notes on some Amphipoda from the North Side of the

Bay of Biscay. Families PLeustipa and Hustrip#.

By Mrs. EK. W. Sexton. (Plates LXXX. & LXXXI)...

3. Notes on some Aberrations in Oriental Lepidoptera, and

on a new Form of Huschema from Sumatra. By Lt.-Col.

J. Mancoum Fawcrerr. (Plate LXXXII.) ...............

4. Note on the Cetacean Sotalia borneénsis, By RK.

HG WeDo RBA ers calet Ac bn olay. feeds ASR ee oA Rts citaleeate

December 14, 1908.

The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s

Menagerie during the month of November 1909 .........

Mrs. R. Haig Thomas, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks

upon, some skins of Hybrid Pheasants ..................+5.

Mr. D. Seth-Smith, F.Z.S. Exhibition of a photograph of,

and remarks upon, a nest built by a pair of Tufted

Umbres (Scopus umbretia) in the Gardens..................

Dr. H. B. Fantham, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon,

microscopic preparations and sketches illustrating the

life-cycle of the Protozoin Himeria (Coccidiwm) avium,

parasitic in the alimentary CanallotmGrouseleceeereee

Dr. GC. W. Andrews, F.R.S., F.Z.S. Exhibition of a photo-

graph of the Robber Crab (Birgus latro) on Christmas

Island, with an account of its habits. (Plate LX XXIII.)

Dr. R. T. Leiper, F.Z.S._ Exhibition of the original specimens

of the Nematode Worm <Acanthocheilonema dracuncu-

TDA ES COW WOM ee ee eee eS One Suna

1. On Change of Colour in a Specimen of Mellivora ratel

living in the Society’s Gardens. By Dr. F. D. Wetcu,

FZ SU segs ey Taaly exe nll teae Dn Lie AY Lad as § Bl TN el con eae ARE GLa

Page

803

848

884

885

886

887

889

Vili

. A Comparative Examination of three living Specimens of

felis tigris sondaica, with Notes on an old Javan Male.

By AD rhe. WIETCH:, 0129: ocx cane eee eee eer ney ere renee

- The Nesting Habits of the Tree-Frog Phyllomedusa

sauvagu. By W. EK. Acar, M.A., D.Se., Glasgow

(Waniversitiy... oC aite XOXO XGINV)\ -eaenepeen ney nee. eee nee

. Marine Fauna from the Mergui Archipelago, Lower

Burma, collected by Jas. J. Simpson, M.A., B.Se., and

R. N. Rudmose-Brown, B.Sc., University of Aberdeen :

Mapreporaria. By Rutu M. Harrisonand MarGarer

Pootz. (Plates LXXXV. & LXXXVI_)..................

. Marine Fauna from the Kerimba Archipelago, Portuguese

East Africa, collected by Jas. J. Simpson, M.A., B.Sc.,

and R. N. Rudmose- Brown, B.Se., University of Aber-

deen: Mapreporarta. By Ruta M. Harrison and

MARGARETUPOOTE sc: dasanccctee ysaneetencndeen eter eee meee

. Some Notes upon Boa occidentalis and Boa (Pelophilus)

mudagascariensis. By Franx KE. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.,

Wash, LEIOSSC HOTS HOHE) SOG? Jonsrosoccussensosaoboacadsscs

. Notes upon the Anatomy of Monkeys of the Genus

Pithecia. By Frank E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S8.,

LEROSSCUOP 10) WAG) SOE gaoandcec cogspondnasecnonsnoanooonansss

. On the Ophidian Genus Grayia. By G. A. Bounencrr,

BH EUSte WEP AZ. Pec eaeasseaeaniee. creme menace oan

Page

892

893

897

913

918

928

944

ALPHABETICAL LIST

OF THE

CONTRIBUTORS,

With References to the several Articles contributed by each.

(1909, pp. 545-952.)

Page

Acar, W. E., M.A., D.Sc., Glasgow University.

The Nesting Habits of the Tree-Frog Phyllomedusa

SRUUAGLIN Aaa bel lXONOXSINV i) tenes slsehn cies enicae aia asseele-: 893

Anprews, Dr. Cuartes W., F.RS., F.ZS.

Exhibition of a photograph of the Robber Crab (Birgus

latro) on Christmas Island, with an account of its

habitsy ie Plate XOX): Serceteies. a ceecaeetercisetee cote 887

BEDDARD, Frank H., M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.8., Prosector to the

Society.

Y On some Points in the Structure of the Lesser Ant-

eater (Zamandua tetradactyla), with Notes on the Cerebral

Arteries of Myrmecophaga and on the Postcaval of

ORY CUCRO PLS PM: Me hate pe mrgnuicele wi ata srtaneinlseniasen GN Stet auntie 685

Some Notes upon Boa occidentalis and Boa (Pelophilus)

WUCUAGUSCUTVEIESOS arp orsiajos) \anleieeyeectes kee to tem cies = 4 celcteetnacie ss 918

.. Notes upon the Anatomy of Monkeys of the Genus

TOS OCU MBO SES Ol iB SERED CH DOG Oreos TSC SOC EC AOM AY ORT AREOD MEIC 928

BICKERTON, WiLLIAM, F.Z.S., M.B.0.U.

Abstract of a lecture, illustrated with lantern-slides,

on the nesting haunts and habits of the five species of

British Nesting Merns, .....:.0150.cocmenrereee oes eee nen: 800

Bonuorte, J. Lewis, M.A., F.LS., F.Z.S.

Exhibition of, and remarks upon, examples of hybrid

DOAN aos ba ictacsgote eBtettn eae cis = <class relate sense 598

On a Small Collection of Mammals from IDCAT OR popaeno 788

BouLencer, Grorce A., F.R.S., V.P.Z.S.

Onthe Ophidian\Genus Gage eee en eae eee 944

Broom, Rospert, M.D., D.Sc., C.M.Z.S.

Exhibition of an unborn fetus of Chrysochloris

hottentota, and two young specimens of C. asiatica ...... 679

Exhibition of the skulls of two 8. African fossil

reptiles—Lycosuchus vanderrieti and Bauwria cynops ...... 679

On the Organ of Jacobson in Orycteropus. (Plate

TORO NUT igh ee eet. ciclo ectiicisiiyct seein sence soeeer eae ceaae mmct actine 680

Burne, Ricnarp Hicarns, M.A., F.Z.S.

Exhibition of specimens of adaptive structures for the

respiration of air in some Aquatic Invertebrates and

tropicalshreshwe bershishesire-cateeeeere eee ee ace ee rere 545

The Anatomy of the Olfactory Organ of Teleostean

HIishes, SRe eestor. sc. dthtetc..lumacti ters ee eeeeee nee ote... Aes ame 610

Notes on the Viscera of a Walrus (Odobenus rosmarus). 732

Catman, Wituiam T., D.Sc., F.Z.S.

On Decapod Crustacea from Christmas Island, collected

by Dr. C. W. Andrews, F.R.S., F.Z.S. (Plate LX-XII.). 703

CuussB, Ernest Cuaruss, F.Z.S.

The Batrachians and Reptiles of Matabeleland ......... 590

Cox, L. Harpine, F.Z.S.

Exhibition of a living specimen of the Amblystome ... 599

Dr May, J. G.

Description of a new Species of the Genus Alpheus

Fabr. from the Bay of Batavia. (Plate LXX.)............ 663

Fantuam, Dr. Haroup B., F.Z.S., Protozoologist to the

Grouse Disease Inquiry.

Exhibition of, and remarks upon, microscopic pre-

parations and sketches illustrating the life-cycle of the

Protozoén Himeria (Coccidiwm) aviwm, parasitic in the

ailicnaermeaey: eanel OF CHOU coooasacssasacnnecessueoonooebooneoe 886

Fawcert, Lt.-Col. J. Matcoum.

Notes on some Aberrations in Oriental Lepidoptera,

and on a new Form of Huschema from Sumatra. (Plate

HEY NONO NOT) ofeatetis siete aco lacteris aulsicgtsaile els ctr seeenatetieete no elena 880

Harrison, Rutu M., and Poot, MARGARET.

Marine Fauna from the Mergui Archipelago, Lower

Burma, collected by Jas. J. Simpson, M.A., B.Sc., and

R. N. Rudmose-Brown, B.Sc., University of Aberdeen :

MapreporaRiA. (Plates LXXXV. & LXXXVI.) ...... 897

Marine Fauna from the Kerimba Archipelago, Portu-

guese East Africa, collected by Jas. J. Simpson, M.A.,

B.Sc., and R. N. Rudmose-Brown, B.Sc., University of

Aberdeen ; MADREPORARIA ........0..cccceceecetecenesereneees 913

Hawkins, H. L., B.Se., Mark Stirrup Scholar in the

University of Manchester.

An Abnormal Individual of the Echinoid Ambly-

DIVCDESTES® + EN Ua Sten Aen Teen e iciees Saat caer male alot oteas Cncalsciae 714

X1i

Howorth, Sir Henry H., K.C.1.E., D.C.L., F.R.S., F.Z.S.

Some Living Shells, their recent Biology and the Light

they throw on the Latest Physical Changes in the

Hartly MyGGnenarid ic... cee eee eae ee eee eee

JonEs, FREDERICK Woop, M.B., B.Sc., F.Z.S,

Onyaltheorysor eStollGormatlomneeseeeeeee rere en aaaeeeree

Kemp, STANLEY, B.A.

The Decapods of the Genus Gennadas collected by

H.MLS. ‘Challenger.’ (Plates LXXIII-LXXYV.) ......

Leer, Dr. Ropert T., F.Z.S., Helminthologist to the

London School of Tropical Medicine.

Exhibition and description of a new Nematode Worm

(Lagochilascaris minor) from Trinidad ...............0.+0208+

Exhibition of the original specimens of the Nematode

Worm Acanthocheilonema dracunculoides Cobbold .........

LyDEKKER, RIcHARD.

On a New Race of Deer from Sze-chuen. (Plate

TAS ar selairscs ucholeteiaiotents tate rete aie cie hic ocrar't acral eere Serva tee ORO

Exhibition of, and remarks upon, the photograph of a

NAGIUAN? SHV? BROT SVN OUTTN “Ssonneauas shan orodsscusdsudsnoss Ice o2¢

On the Skull-Characters in the Southern Sea-Hlephant.

On the Skull of a Black Bear from Eastern Tibet, with

a Note on the Pormosan Bear ...2-...esensaceressssscscsauns a

Exhibition of photographs of a spotted bull Tsaine or

Bantin from: Siam iia sue seccenereridseneaecsr scien acc cores gener

Exhibition of an old coloured print of the chief room

of Bullock’s Miuseum: 3 aces ete cee ee cea eee eee

Page

745

671

718

742

889

588

599

600

607

668

xii

Man, J.G. pe. See DE May, J. G.

Minouin, Prof. Epwarp A., M.A., V.P.Z.S.

Exhibition of microscopic preparations of the Cysti-

cercus-stage of a Cestode found in the body-cavity of

rat-fleas (Ceratophyllus fasciatus) .......cecceeeereeereeeneeees

MircHeiL, P. Cuautmers, M.A., D.Sc., Hon. LL.D., F.B.S.,

F.Z.S., Secretary to the Society.

Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie

during the month of April 1909 ...............eseeeee sees eee

Exhibition of the ears of an Elephant from the Guaso

Ngishu Plateau, east of Mt. Elgon, British East Africa...

Notes on a Young Walrus(Odobenus rosmarus) recently

living in the Society’s Gardens. (Plate LXXVI.) ......

Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie

during the months of May, June, July, August, and

September, 1909 .............eseeeneeeecesneeeee esse es esee ese sees

Exhibition of the frontlet of a Mishmi Takin (Budor-

cas tawicolor). Also of a carved wooden figure of a

EEN RIU0 saoddadbSoadeld ticks dhocoeceu bos obs pHacoUshGtoRaouesscungoBEadgase:

Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie

during the month of October 1909 ...................0sseeeee

Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie

during the month of November 1909 .................000s00-

Pocock, Recinatp I., F.L.8., F.Z.8., Curator of Mammals

and Reptiles, and Resident Superintendent of the

Gardens.

Exhibition and description of the skin of an undescribed

local race of Monkey, Cercopithecus tantalus alexandri ...

Page

741

597

667

730

739

74]

798

884

XIV

Pootr, MAarcaret, and Harrison, Ruta M.

Marine Fauna from the Mergui Archipelago, Lower

Burma, collected by Jas. J. Simpson, M.A., B.Sc., and

R. N. Rudmose-Brown, B.Sc., University of Aberdeen :

Mapreporarta. (Plates LXXXV. & LXXXVI_) ......

Marine Fauna from the Kerimba Archipelago, Portu-

guese East Africa, collected by Jas. J. Simpson, M.A.,

B.Sc., and R. N. Rudmose-Brown, B.Sc., University of

Aberdeen’: MADREPORARIA, |. paeeree nas soe -aacercan: «acct aa

Regan, C. Tats, M.A., F.Z.S.

The Asiatic Fishes of the Family Anabantide.

(GE Phas) MbpOC VAI DPOMIDG "Fah ose gacopb oes (ie? Saas nt te

RipGeway, Prof. Witiram, M.A., Sc.D., F.B.A., LL.D.,

Litt.D.

Contributions to the Study of the Equide.—I. The

Differentiation of the Three Species of Zebras ............

Contributions to the Study of the Equide.—II. On

Hitherto Unrecorded Specimens of Hquus quagga.........

Contributions to the Study of the Equide.—III. Ona

Portion of a Fossil Jaw of one of the Equide ............

A letter from, correcting an error in his paper on

“The Differentiation of the 'Three Species of Zebras” ...

RosEnBERG, WiLuiAM F. H., F.Z.S.

Exhibition of a Rook with an abnormal bill ............

Sera-Suiru, D., F.Z.S., Curator of Birds and Inspector of

Works.

Exhibition of a photograph of, and remarks upon, a

nest built by a pair of Tufted Umbres (Scopus wmbretta)

in. ‘thie. Gardlemsiy ga\aitriai te ote cicarctercien Sane ie loa eee ae ce

Page

767

547

563

586

798

546

Sexton, Mrs. KE. W.

Notes on some Amphipoda from the North Side of

the Bay of Biscay. Families PLeustip# and Eustripa.

(CEIENGSS TOO 04 IPO. OF) i so cooaneebbbucueeebeoe noCEEOUSRUA

SHORTRIDGE, G. CHESTER.

An Account of the Geographical Distribution of the

Marsupials and Monotremes of South-West Australia,

having special reference to the Specimens collected

during the Balston Expedition of 1904-1907...............

SmirH, D. Seru-. See Sera-Smiru, D.

THomAs, OLDFIELD, F.R.S., F.Z.S.

Exhibition and description of a new Rat (Ototylomys

Guacenalce, inom Guiatemalagevenpees: caer oecone eer ee eee

Tuomas, Mrs. R. Hate, F.Z.8.

Exhibition of, and remarks upon, some skins of

Hsteypo reid @ belteaiseuitis) a. tine anna soko ieniiaer acteis nse hice eaytotaeraenensae

UNTHANK, Hersert Wi ke Zas:

Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a skull of Sphenodon

COVA OMNay aT). Tose TeeeaLONN AO saneenenee one oeeenaacesaesouanonr

We cu, Dr. Frepericx D., F.Z.8.

Exhibition of photographs of a male Gayal (ibos

Jrontalis) living in the Society’s Gardens..................00.

On Change of Colour in a Specimen of Mellivora ratel

living; im the Society's Gardens®...........-.....-..2:.0..50.-0-

A Comparative Examination of three living Specimens

of Felis tigris sondaica, with Notes on an old Javan

Page

848

803

669

884

666

800

889

xvl1

Wuits, Joun Craupr, C.1.E., C.M.Z.S.

Exhibition of photographs of a young living specimen

Gre eaves ALY Lar (PHOT AIS) Rae ape nodonagonen: codadodonegaae. sane rsenc

Page

Plate

LXIX.

LXX.

TAXOXae

DXXEM.

LX XIII.

LXXIV.

LXXV.

LXXVI.

LXX VIL.

LXXVIII.

LXXIX.

LXXX:

LXXXI.

LXXXIT.

LXXXIII.

LXXXIV.

LXXXV.

LXXXVI.

Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1909.

hist OF ERATE S:

1909, pp. 545-952.

Page

Sze-chuen Hangul (female), Cervus cashmirianus

TIL CEU LIEN staat EBM paar aes Steichen a eee al ect ences 588

Alpheus ehlerstide Man ............ Weeeeovcons 663

Organ of Jacobsoniin Ojycteropus 22.50. 0s. see 680

1-3. Lioxanthodes alcocki.

6,7. Hyastenus andrewst.

1-6. Gennadas parvus.

1-4. Gennadas bouviert.

1. Gennadas parvus.

nadas intermedius.

CH MTUOS COO on aabeohoncvousoneooboeses

Young Walrus (Odobenus rosmarus)

1. Betta rubra. 2. B. macrophthalma. 3. B. akar-\

ensis. 4. B. fasciata. 5. Polyacanthus signatus . .

Betta tenata. 2. B, fusca. 3, B. macrostoma,

AN bee UL OLCOTACSE lol dant ivi wrstct-4e peti ahah

Trichopodus pectoralis, 2. T. leert. 3. Tricho..

gaster sota

1-7. Parapleustes gracis Buchholz.

pleustes grandimanus, Chevreux ..............

33-45. Eusirus biscayensis Bonnier. 46-48. Rhacho- 848

tropis rostrata Bonnier. 49-65. Rhachotropis |

XLII BYNES) cere Ser ete ACP aReP cc Bae aca ee

Aberrations in Oriental Lepidoptera ..............

Robber Crabs (Bogus latro) climbing a Sago-

palm

4, 6. Sesarma murrayt.

Sh We Teh ONaear sone ub

7-12. Gennadas intermedius. >,

5-11. Gennadas calmani . . |

2. Gennadas scutatus. 3. Gen- -718

4,5. Gennadas calmani. 6, 7. |

eee eee eee ew

8-32. Sym-)

ol ole lio» si ialior e]ieiiniraiailalia\ 0) (#) (olathe) siieliel la} ialiviielielieiei eileilulrs(ve) io) aie

1. Nest of Phyllomedusa sauvagit.

Dissected from the side

Dy Je sauvagn, 2.

and

y i

fs,

rd : oh

fo a. e-

ASEM J

LISTE OF TEXT-FIGURES.

1909, pp. 545-932.

Page

AOR Gmevae Zebra Ce gus Greve) aya dae a gneaste as ee ieee. « 548

LAME he Mout Ae brai(drsebna)\ Sank seas 6 ce ons ee. ER 548

NOON ARGUS9Ae WTO crencray altars wae ake coca ay Wake abe ree cs 049

Jee 26 GOT RON AION HOE WOE ROTTLOD)Y VAte en © Macc na ORIG hina SIO Cas 590

WAa) ee. ourcnelien(Chapmian’s: yariety));)).. ss oeicise ses se ese.) 551

AG EEE AOU CHOUIISN ei Vek. sytiusnNCWs ictons, isle els asthc capat Snares tei Mie eaateatte he 552

LAGE Shinran, Grevy Zebra e) ya 4.oess ei cps senso ssketaitees 593

HAZ S ameotiGmeviya Zebra (iemeale)iac diss samecies ose aie oes 554

14S TS kangoiGrant!s) Ze bray (vale) x. sec etal ae ceie cietem i teteie saree 555

128) Sina GUN) Ae ore (Gene) 8 ona poooouohonooeoAne 596

150-152. Skins of Grant’s Zebra (male)..............00005. 597-509

amo kiniom Grants Aebra, female) trai cmcdiac hcl eee: eel: 560

Wod loon Slans of Grantis)Zebra(male) fe... 5.0. 02-2. 561, 562

NAG. JORIS DOO Reno Moonen ooo SiC Bone Rito j OR bor ASE oote O64

lo hep Bascl@maseas (females. ob peiscusise eels elenlsapaeiaboal sie): 565

loss the Vienna Qnavea (female) 5 oo yccus > senses isla ens = 568 ©

INS a Ulivey dl Prevaver GR Keoatlcomo. sabpeno fhe sees oo dcomen ae: 569

160, 161. The Stockholm (Sparrman’s) Quagga.............. 570, 571

1G. he) Wiesbaden @nacca7s(male) Siee cree tte bello ase 572

163. The British Museum (Grey’s) Quagga (male) .............. 575

16, Bemuale Qmmeten, iscsi Slee easccananssonndasoocdsoue 575

Gowelhe widunibume ly Quaint | rai ces ere ecieisiree 576

NGS, Whe Ibeyalen Ghee, (MD) chaleeccos + sbhoocrenenonucscaan O77

Page

Ge UherRanis G)nacca eee ne BREEN CY icarh Gens: boc Aaa oS ce Om 57

lesiRher Berlin Quagvar(emeale) wancmccie cere nC eer Tenet 578

169. The Munich Quagga.......... DEO A 0°0.0606 6 Sierra Sa eheekale 579

iO MheyAmsterdamuGuacca. vce. eee eRe nea stebileos 579

171. The Cape-Town Quagega foal ........... Eyota NE dev dot 580

li2iylead often’ Qimagca ie...) neron eRe ae clair heen 58h

iio: MEd wards’ (Qa pated. 5.0c:t)3.0 sae ee eee one Seer ee 582

ia Dherktnowsley Quaceas ae nism terns Se Meee ont oie 682

175. Quaggas from Cornwallis Harris’ picture ..............008+ 583 .

IG. Nsord: Mortonis: Quacca cen aa eRe ee eL eee eerie 583

lid. Buttons) Qua gear rears sc kite MeN itech ner eae eae ue 584

178. Quagga from Hamilton Smith’s drawing ............ eects 585

179: Danrellts @uagea eee ere Pts licen ap aE REG, Ber eA mE a 585

180. Quagga from Cornwallis Harris’ drawing .................. 586

181. Fragment of a fossil jaw of one of the Equide .............. 587

182. Moun Shout Stage ei ieee cts cg eerie Cireie el tame e ear aee 600

183. Palatal aspect of skull of male Falkland Sea-Elephant ...... 602

184. Palatal aspect of skull of male Macquarie Sea-Elephant..... . 604

185. Palatal aspect of skull of male Crozet Sea-Elephant ........ 605

186. Palatal aspect of skulls of Ursus torquatus, U. t. macneilli, and

Cab Sf OWMOSANUS ets oe os oe ais tne eek eee GReTL I . 608

187. Palatal aspect of the lower jaw of the same three skulls...... 609

188. Gadus eglefinus. ‘The relation of the nostrils to the super-

ficial bones of the face, and diagram of olfactory chamber in

loneiiidina Ese ction, variate iter eee ee ee eee 614

189. Gadus eglefinus. The relation of the nostrils to the deeper

bonestoneble tae aiscysy sat cterter tte is eee meee et 615

180. Motella tricirrata. Shape and position of the plincrory

chamber, and diagram of cross section of the rosette........ 616

191. Merluccius vulgaris. Position of olfactory chamber and nasal

SG Sao oc de San seo oo eeu dod 25 to counsaaooaetend 56886 O68 617

192. Salmo salar. Position and form of nostrils, olfactory cavity,

and nasal sac, and diagram of nostrils, olfactory chamber, and

a0 Sacunelonontidinallsection meee emer ene cere ao (II)

193. Coregonus oxyrhynchus. Diagram of nostrils, olfactory chacher

and nasal sac in longitudinal section ...........--..-.... 620

194. Gymnarchus niloticus. Olfactory organ, from the side ...... 622

196. Diagram of nostrils and olfactory chamber of Tinea vulgaris

in longitudinal section, and a similar diagram of the olfactory

OUSENIR CI ZIRE RU Sonia Sid nano Od ued oconsoaUd Not oe O28

196. Clarias lazera. The olfactory organs from above, and Hossa

ot the lamine Gf the rosette «1522. .2.0--- 2005. ae Beene 624

197. Malapterurus electricus. The olfactory organs,........... 55 20

198. Lsoav luctus. Diagram of olfactory organ in longitudinal

SOCHION Gh. os sticwas day ielamits Secw eee ees nik ache meee eee Dare 629

ro to bo bo bo

XX1

Page

. Scopelus crocodilus. Position and form of nostrils and olfactory

chamber, and diagram of the laminze of the rosette ........ 630

. Anableps microlepis. Position of the nostrils, and the nasal

cavity in its relation to the neighbouring bones of the face .. 631

Orestias lesueurt. The nostrils in their relation to the super-

ficial bones of the face, and the form and position of the

OEKOGIAY CAVMAT Shope cones osooosn Bichiepeuacsi.c.wepricaagana ty scare 3 Oar

Fistularia sp. Right olfactory organ showing relative pro-

portions of olfactory and indifferent areas of the nasal cavity. 633

The right olfactory organ of Belone vulgaris, from above, and

the right olfactory organ of Hemzrhamphus, from the side .. 634

. Mugil chelo. The olfactory organ, in position, from the side,

Ral OTN AOS coopeeolodo veo ssduenodmedsogococens eels 635

Ophiocephalus marulius. The left olfactory organ, from the

side and from above, also a diagram of the olfactory

Menrnn i Boe, 0) ss oh Sisk) obey onesee coe! ise ohcvetedoualonahons ates aRAUay rere RNS 637

Sphyrena cameroon. Position of the olfactory organ and

nasal sac relative to the bones of the face, and diagram of

the olfactory chamber in longitudinal section.............. 638

Capros aper. Left olfactory organ, from the side, and surface-

TION Ole Een MOSGrUS) yea ys acchaun ses us aena ares Grabs Marat suse allel roan 640

Berya delphinus. Left olfactory organ, from the side ...... 641

Pagellus centrodontus. Olfactory organ in position, from the

side and from above, also a diagram of a lamina of the

ORGIES ARB Se DEG OOS DOU Dts Gcioe hoe ae been Ro race EOITG 644

. Zeus faber. Left olfactory organ, from the side, showing

Rlomnonimnall WOSMGOI SG oogoeseooanubecgoceddededuanoaGusaS 646

. Hippoglossus vulgaris. Position of both olfactory organs, from

the ocular side, and the left olfactory organ, from above .. 647

. Rhombus maximus. Nostrils of the blind (zight) side, olfactory

organ of the ocular (left) side, in position, and olfactory

organ of the blind side, in position, 1GRON MIDONTE oodoonuccc0dd 650

Cyclopterus lumpus. Left olfactory organ, in position, and

diagram of valvular posterior nostri] ................+0. 655

. Sphenodon skull with abnormal nasal region........ ey aeiheraeks 666

. Right ear of an Elephant (Llephas africanus peeli) .......... 667

. Young male Takin (Budorcas taxicolor whitet) ....... iol Wahake)

. Spotted Bull Tsaine from Siam ..........+.-6--.+004-- ag. OOD

. Cerebral arterial system of Myrmecophaga jubata............ 686

. Three pieces of small intestine of Tamandua tetradactyla .... 690

, lishwere ont Dirge “Ne Reick oc ocagoons 60 co ooU oo UuRt OU apo 2 692

. The spleen of Tamandua tetradactyla...... Saale at ateree ide te 693

223. A portion of the heart of Tamandua...... orobeos . 694, 695

. Diagram of persistent right posteardinal (?) of Tamandua .... 699

. Postcaval veins of Orycteropus............ Sint ttl tre ana nena 5 CON

6. Lateral view of test of an abnormal Amblypneustes .......... v14

Xxil

Page

227, Adapical view of test of an abnormal Amblypneustes ........ 715

228. Apical system of an abnormal Amblypneustes .............. 716

229, 230. Abnormal ambulacra of Amblypneustes ........ 0.020005 ay

231. The thoracic vena cava inferior of a Walrus........ aan tonal 733

282. Clitoris and prepuce of a Walrus, seen from the side ........ 785

235. The ovary and ovarian sac of a Walrus, seen from the dorsal

ASPECb swe eee atone Ste Ge rote he bread tome eee ree by eee: ae narra 736

234, Bile and pancreatic ducts of a Walrus and their mode of entry

OES NS) roSsINOE CMIEGIS-SAC, oc occcacecoocoonvansucocoee 737

239. bullock ssMnseumiy22)iecacl lynne iinet ae 744

236, 237. Lateral and dorsal views of shell of Mya arenaria ...... 753

238, 239. Lateral and dorsal views of shell of Mya truncata ...... 754

240, Lateral view of left shell of young Mya truncata............ 754

PAD Neal SICK OE AM OCTRADEN UO Bato odcscbdovoonaabonssaanancos 755

PLONE) OMG GURUICUUE, os) do odo uscesocassoa6sedopbbeoesc (05

Puls) abies Oi UO UOICTUG,, FIR, OWN so oon00850oder4ca500a0se 758

244, Map showing present range and probable former range of

West Australian mammalian fauna....................:. 804

245. Map showing Mammalian Faunistic region of Western

AUG inal: sree kinins sh Se. ah ele Paes ie ee San00% 805

246. Map showing distribution of Macropus giganteus .......4-. 806

247. Map showing distribution of Wacrupus robustus cervinus .... 808

248. Map showing distribution of Macropus robustus erubescens.... 809

249, Map showing distribution of Macropus rufus ............05 810

250. Map showing distribution of Macropus trma ..........00- S11

251. Map showing distribution of Macropus eugenit.............. 812

252. Map showing distribution of Macropus brachyurus .......... 814

253. Map showing distribution of Petrogale lateralis and P. 1,

Wachee ren bs Mee saeco on wean eee ee Soe CHE on 815

254. Map showing distribution of Onychogale lunata ............ 816

265. Map showing distribution of Lagostrophus fasciatus and L. f.

GUD UBINAS obo jo: BNR Bie dU ae OE che RY CR EE A 817

256. Map showing distribution of Lagorchestes hirsutus, L. h. ber-

UCT Ore NaN OB CCL ACM Asis Bh eit GG.6 OO HoE 4 51ob.0 000K O 820

257. Map showing distribution of Bettongia penicillata .......... 821

258. Map showing distribution of Bettongia lesuewrt and B. 1. grayt. 823

259. Map showing distribution of Potorous platyops ..........++ 824

260. Map showing distribution of Potorous gilberti .............. 825

261. Map showing distribution of Tarstpes spenser@ ........... $27

262. Map showing distribution of Dromécia concinna ...........- 828

203. Map showing distribution of Psewdochirus occidentalis........ 829

264. Map showing distribution of Trichoswrus vulpecula .......... 82

265. Map showing distribution of Thalacomys lagotis ..........+. 832

266. Map showing distribution of Isoodun obesulus ..... 00000000 834

267. Map showing distribution of Perameles bougainville? and P. 6.

TOSIOS Nein a shin's S00 60.0 RA aR RO Oh frase dnc 8390

XXI1

Page

268. Map showing distribution of Cheropus castanotis.........5.. 836

269. Map showing distribution of Dasynrus geoffroyi fortis ...... 837

270. Map showing distribution of Phascogale flavipes leucogaster .. 838

271. Map showing distribution of Phascogale calura ....... ieee 640

272. Map showing distribution of Phascogale penicillata .......... S41

273. Map showing distribution of Phascoyale upicalis and P. bliyhi . 842

274. Map showing distribution of Smenthopsis murind ..........5. 843

275. Map showing distribution of Sminthopsis crassicaudata ...... 844

276. Map showing distribution of Myrmecobius fasciatus.......... 846

277. Map showing distribution of Tachyglossus aculeatus ineptus .. 847

278. Second gnathopods of the female of Lusirus biscayensis

VOMIT weaysis peg ets i olo.e se PRE Es nus chee Nese aR SOO

279. Fourth perzeopod of the male of hackle opts Ween ? Boeck .. 875

230. Nest of Scopus umbretta in theSociety’s Gardens .......... 886

281. Interior of anterior half of larger lung of Boa occidentalis .... 919

282. A portion of the larger lung of Boa occidentalis ........ 5 BY)

283. A magnified representation of the end of the bronchial erties

inthe same lune... .... sielesvataueneuse sree BO onmoonoeoonaec we

284. Two isolated pieces of the dorsal nonin of pba Poaaacen lensis 924

Deamon livernior Hua occedendilis ine aan eee a wee ees ea eal

DAG, [BRM OF JRA PHOEBE) 050.0 doobo conv vedocnacccounaonbce 930

287. Larynx and a portion of the trachea of Pithecra pithecia ...... 951

288. Hyoid and larynx of Pithecia pithecia viewed from the ventral

SMINIGD 5 oconncoocconeser aoe SE Sed ED Obs DI ee 932

289. Hyoid and larynx of Pithecia pithecia viewed laterally ...... 933

290. Crecum and adjacent regions of gut of Pithecia pithecia ...... 934

29 eC recummandscolonton Lichkeca pithecid sn... 2) see eee 935

292. Liver of Pithecia pithecia seen from abdominal surface ...... 936

293. Interior of right ventricle of Pithecia pithecia .............. 938

294. The commencing aorta of Pithecia pithecia, Cebus fatuellus,

and Colobus guereza ........--. Sep HiGoD uo. gio Ph airesiaain 959

DO meen Ol Gi: /2G07 GUC) .catile = tere wis as eie a spale dletia teeters bays i ta or sie 945

296. Diagrams showing changes in markings with age of Grayia

OO E68 coe BUR Done ORO ORG bed mye be nip eioneve 947

297. Head of Grayia Suess Shon pS were se OS oie Scars 949

298. Diagrams showing changes in markings with age in Grayia

STAVILIDD. 5 SiO cn ch dc etatce oA CARERS RIO OO NE RE PRR RE OIC I, 1G saan Ba)

» JoLeRGl OF CROING: WKONIDOE oonnn bok Chon canons sobooogoeuD Eo. 951

NEW GENERIC TERM

PROPOSED IN THE PRESENT VOLUME (pp. 545-952).

Lioxanthodesi(Crustacen))avacesnc ese tse aden eee ee eee ereieee 706

KRRATA.,

P. Z. 8. 1909 :—

Page 564, line 2 from bottom, jor ‘Science Progress’

read ‘ Knowledge,’ vol. xxv. p. 220.

Page 601, line 23 from top, for leoninina read leonina.

PROCHKEDINGS

OF THE

GENERAL MEETINGS FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY

OF LONDON.

1909.

‘Pages 545-738,

Part III. conTAINING PAPERS READ IN

MAY anno JUNE.

OCTOBER 1909.

PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY,

SOLD AT THEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER SQUARE.

LONDON :

MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO,,

PATERNOSTER ROW.

aa , [Price Twelve Shillings. ]

LEST OF CONPEN-ES.

1909, pp. 545-738.

* May 11, 1909.

Page

Mr. R. H. Burne, M.A., F.Z.S. Exhibition of specimens of adaptive structures for the

respiration of air in some Aquatic Invertebrates and tropical Freshwater Fishes...... 545

Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.L.S8., F.Z.S. Exhibition and deseription of the skin of a well-marked

undescribed local race of Moukey, Cercopithecus tantalus alexandri .......+.4+++++s 545

Mr. W. F. H. Rosenberg, F.Z.8. Exhibition of a Rook with an abnormal bill .......... 546

1, Contributions to the Study of the Equide.—I. The Differentiation of the Three Species

of Zebras. By Prof. Witttam Ripenway, M.A., Se.D., B.B.A., DL.D., bitt.D...-..... 547

2. Contributions to the Study of the Equide.—II. On Hitherto Unrecorded Specimens of .

Equus quagga. By Prot. Witttam Ripgeway, M.A., Sc.D., F.B.A., LL.D., Litt.D. .... 563 -

3. Contributions to the Study of the Equide.—IITI. Ona portion of a fussil Jaw of one of

the Equide. By Prof. Wruttam Riogmway, M.A., Sc.D., F.B.A.. LL.D., Litt.D. .... 586

4. On a New Race.of Deer from Sze-chuen. By R. Lypugxer. (Plate LXIX.) ........ 588

5. The Batrachians and Reptiles of Matabeleland. By BE. C. Cuvss, F.Z.S.-...........- 590

May 25, 1909.

The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society's Menagerie during the month of

BAP MBO sarc Metis Fe, a 2ate re ate fa CR Rcelne ee ee aide eR ee ee eee [ieee nee 2 Oa

Mr. J. Lewis Bonhote, F.L.S.,F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, examples of hybrid

PAD )WG sco Sais ap Oram UO 3.6 dag on Ades Anos asaey +S eas sles cearaitieoyerenere 598

Mr. L. Harding Cox, F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a living specimen of the

PNT hifcieh (Shake Serra AAO coi CeO Caen, OokceMsooNodeaman anes wea og or 599.

Mr. R. Lydekker. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, the photograph of a young Stag from.

SHAME SoOecOO ny Aan obo unaeto eae So08s etse pave ee see sisa rs RRP Rae. OO 4 sto 599

1. On the Skull-Characters in the Southern Sea-Elephant. By R. LyppgKER ............ 600

2. On the Skull of a Black Bear from Eastern Tibet, with a Note on the Formosan Bear. By

AR, YDERR eR yee ees c ss: eee eager eee eee eet sos aa Eda ON SO oho 607

3. The Anatomy of the Olfactory Organ of Teleostean Fishes. By R H. Burne, M.A., F.Z.S. 610

4. Description of a new Species of the Genus Alpheus Fabr. from the Bay of Batavia. By. is

J-G. op-Man, (Plated XXe) sans 07s tee Upon ae eee Seen etnies ele 663

Contents contimued on page 3 of Wrapper.

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

GENERAL MEETINGS FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS

OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.

(May to December, 1909.)

May 11, 1909.

Prof. EK. A. Mincutn, M.A., Vice-President,

in the Chair.

Mr. R. H. Burne, M.A., F.Z.S., exhibited a series of specimens,

from the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons, of adaptive

structures for the respiration of air in some Aquatic Invertebrates

and tropical Freshwater Fishes.

Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.L.S., F.Z.S8., the Superintendent of the

Gardens, exhibited the skin of a Monkey, representing a well- -

marked undescribed local race of Cercopithecus tantalus, which he

proposed to name Cercopithecus tantalus alexandri in honour of

Capt. Boyd Alexander, F.Z.S., who had brought the specimen

from Lake Chad and presented it to the Society. He said :—

“The colour of the upper side of this specimen is speckled

greyish green, the coloured annuli in the hairs being less green

than is usually the case in Nigerian examples of C. tantalus, but

as in the latter it becomes richer on the crown of the head; the

face is wholly black and the white brow-band is well marked. The

whiskers, however, are very long, as in C’. ethiops of Abyssinia

and the Upper Nile; but instead of being wholly white, as in

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1909, No. XXX VITT. 38

546 ON A ROOK WITH AN ABNORMAL BILL. [May 11,

that species, the hairs are slightly stained with yellow and very

indistinctly speckled apically. Owing to the whiteness of the

whiskers the brow-band is not so sharply defined at its extremities

as in typical C. tantalus, where the whiskers are not only much

shorter but are markedly stained with yellow almost throughout

their length. The hairs of the sides of the neck are also long and

mostly white, but towards the apex yellowish and speckled with

black. On the arm and leg the greenish tint dies out of the

hairs well above the elbow and knee, and it only extends for a short

distance upon the root of the tail; the rest of the arms and legs,

the hands and feet, and the upper side of the tail being grey. As

in typical C. tantalus, the inner sides of the limbs, the under

side of the body and of the tail are white, with a patch of rusty

hairs upon the pubic region; and, as in C. tantalus tantalus and

C. ethiops, there is a conspicuous tuft of whitish hair on each side

at the base of the tail above the ischial callosity.

‘Although the length and whiteness of the whiskers give

this monkey a striking superficial resemblance to C. ethiops, it

appears, as might be expected from its locality, to be most nearly

allied to C. tantalus, being at once distinguishable from C. ethiops

by the absence of white hairs from the lips and chin. Never-

theless, it is in a measure intermediate between the two species,

and to a great extent justifies my surmise (P.Z.8. 1907, p. 733)

that the two will be found to intergrade.

“ C, tantalus is now known to be represented by three races ;

namely, the typical C. tantalus tantalus from Nigeria, C. tantalus

alecandri from Lake Chad, and C. tantalus budgetti* from

Bathyaba on the eastern shore of Lake Albert in Uganda. The

last-mentioned differs from the others in having the whiskers

much more decidedly speckled, and in the large size of the red

patch and the more fiery colour of its hairs on the pubic area.”

Mr. W. F. H. Rosenberg, F.Z.8., exhibited a Rook in which

the upper mandible had overgrown the lower to a remarkable

extent. Thisabnormality had evidently been caused by an injury

to the tip of the lower mandible having deprived the upper one

_ of the opposing surface necessary to check its growth.

The bird was shot by Mr. Percy I. Lathy, F.Z.S8., F.E.S., on

February 7th, 1909, at Nazeing, Essex. Mr. Lathy shot it out

of a flock, and did not notice anything peculiar till he picked the

bird up. ‘The bird was in good condition, so that it could not

have had the ditficulty in feeding which one might have expected

from the excessive prolongation of the upper mandible.

Length of upper mandible 70 mm.; length of lower mandible

51mm. Normal length of upper mandible 55 mm.

* Pocock, P. Z.S. 1907, p. 733.

1909. ] ON THE DIFFERENTIATION OF ZEBRAS. 547

The following papers were read :—

1. Contributions to the Study of the Equide; i. The

Differentiation of the Three Species of Zebras. By

Prof. Wintiam Ripceway, M.A., Sc.D., F.B.A.,

Tis). Like Dees

[Received April 21, 1909.]

(Text-figures 140-155.)

I propose to describe ten skins of Zebras from British East

Africa, the interest of which consists partly in the fact that they

were all shot expressly for me, and that an exact record of the

locality and the altitude was kept in each case. They have thus

a far higher scientific value than the ordinary specimens in our

museums, which have for the most part been obtained from

sportsmen or traders, who could give no accurate information

regarding the provenance of the specimens. I must express my

gratitude to the Rt. Hon. Alfred Lyttelton, K.C., M.P., who

when Secretary of State for the Colonies authorised the officials

of British East Africa to assist me in obtaining zebra skins, and

to my friend, Mr. C. W. Hobley, C.M.G., Assistant-Commissioner

at Nairobi, who kindly undertook to see that the instructions of

the Secretary of State were carried out, and on whom devolved

all the trouble of packing and despatching the specimens.

But the skins have a further value, since they demonstrate

that the individuals of the same species vary in coloration from

locality to locality, and that it is useless attempting to make

species or subspecies out of animals which are mere local varieties.

Finally, we may reason from what these skins demonstrate as

taking place in a given area that the same differentiation has

taken place in the coloration of all the Equide from Northern

Europe and Asia down to Cape Colony, a lesson which applies

equally to the whole animal kingdom, man included.

Zoologists are generally agreed that all existing Zebras fall into

three main species: —Hquus zebra, or the Mountain Zebra,'formerly

very abundant in Cape Colony, Z. burchelli, and L. grevyi, though

Dr. Matschie treats as true species certain varieties of the

Burchell family. Mr. Pocock has shown that all the varieties of

the Burchell Zebra seem to shade off into the better marked

specimens of the now extinct Quagga of Cape Colony, whilst

Prof. Ewart has shown that a bridge can be found between the

Mountain Zebra and the Burchelline family, through Crawshay’s

variety of the latter.

The chief characteristics of the three species may be briefly

enumerated.

The splendid Grévy Zebra, found in Somaliland, Shoa, and

* Communicated by Dr. P. CoatmERS MircueE t, M.A., ee E.Z.S.

548 PROF. W. RIDGEWAY ON THE {May 11,

Text-fig. 140.

Grévy Zebra (Z. grévyi).

Text-fig. 141.

The Mountain Zebra (EZ. zebra).

Seek

1999. ] DIFFERENTIATION OF ZEBRAS. o49

British East Africa as far south as the River Tana, is covered

with narrow stripes (text-fig, 140), and its ears are more ass-like

than those of the other two species, though its feet are more like

those of the horse. In many specimens there are small stripes

coming out from the dorsal stripe over the croup, but there are

distinct variations in coloration between the Somali, Shoa, and

British East Africa specimens.

The Mountain Zebra (text-fig. 141) is also striped all over its

body and legs, but the stripes on the haunches differ completely

from those of the Grévy species, whilst a chief characteristic is

the small stripes on its croup termed its “ gridiron.”

Text-fig. 142.

Ward’s Zebra (Baringo).

In a skin procured from Mr. Rowland Ward, Prof. Ewart found

an animal almost the same as the South African Mountain Zebra,

which he named Ward's Zebra. There is some doubt as regards

the provenance of this skin. It first appeared to have come from

Somaliland, but I embodied in my ‘ Origin and Influence of the

Thoroughbred Horse’ (p. 508) a note from Prof. Ewart stating

that it came from the Lombori Hills, which form the southern

edge of the Naivasha Plateau near the Uganda Railway in

British East Africa. Of its provenance I will say more later on.

550 PROF. W. RIDGEWAY ON THE [May 11,

My illustration (text-fig. 142, p. 549), by the kind permission of

Messrs. Rowland Ward & Co. and of Mr. R. Lydekker, F.RB.S., is

from the latter’s ‘The Game Animals of Africa,’ fig. 23, p. 65.

In the Burchelline group the enlargement of the stripes seen

on the haunches of the Mountain Zebra is found all over the body.

The stripes are far larger and fewer in number, whilst in many

varieties shadow stripes are seen, the vestiges of the closer

striping still surviving in the Grévy and Mountain species.

Text-fig. 143.

E. burchelli (var. granti).

The most northerly variety of this species is Grant’s Zebra

(text-fig. 143) found all over East Equatorial Africa. As we

advance southwards we find it shading off into Chapman’s variety

found in the Transvaal, in which the legs are no longer striped

down to the hoof (text-fig. 144), whilst in the typical Burchell

Zebra or Bonte Quagga of the Orange River Colony the legs and

the under surface of the body are free from stripes (text-

fig. 145, p. 552).

1909. ] DIFFERENTIATION OF ZEBRAS. 551

The Crawshay variety of the Burchell Zebra found in Nyassa-

land, so far as colour is concerned, as Prof. Ewart has pointed

out, is the bridge between the Burchell and Mountain Zebras, as

it has black stripes close together, and small stripes on the croup,

resembling the “ gridiron” of the Mountain Zebra and recalling

the small stripes in some Grévy Zebras.

Text-fig. 144.

E. burchelli (Chapman’s variety).

It is now universally held that in the Grévy Zebra we have

the oldest type of coloration of the Zebra family, though I have

argued elsewhere against the doctrine formerly held that in its

skin we have the primeval livery of the ancestor of all the

Equide. In coloration at least the other two species are more

recent than the Grévy.

I here figure ten skins, two of Grévy’s Zebra, and eight of

Grant’s variety of H. burchelli. Text-figs. 146 & 147 show the

552 PROF, W. RIDGEWAY ON THE [May 1],

skins of a male and a female Grévy Zebra shot by the late

Mr. A. H. Neumann at Euaso Nyiro at an altitude of 3000 ft.

Both specimens lack the small stripes commonly found in speci-

mens from Somaliland and Shoa, and which correspond to the

“ sridiron ” of the Mountain Zebra. Text-figs. 148 & 149 show the

skins of a male and a female of Grant’s variety from Baringo

(3000 ft.). The former shows faint, the latter more marked

vestiges of the croup or “ gridiron ” stripes, thus showing a slight

approximation in colouring to the Grévy and Mountain Zebras.

Text-fig. 145.

LE. burchelli (Bristol).

Text-figs. 150 & 151 exhibit two skins (male) from Laikipia

(5800 ft.). Text-figs. 152.& 153 give the skins of a male and a

female from Uasingishu (6500 ft.). Next comes that of a male

from Kinolop (7500 ft.), whilst text-fig. 155 is that of a male

from the north end of the Aberdare Range (8000 ft.). The last

has longer hair than the rest. The variation in the skins from

different localities and altitudes is obvious. This is jin accord

with the testimony of that excellent observer, Mr. A.H. Neumann,

who (‘ Elephant-hunting in East Equatorial Africa,’ p. 372)

1909. | DIFFERENTIATION OF ZEBRAS. 553

notes in reference to a zebra shot in one loeality that “along its

back were spots or blotches instead of distinct stripes,” and he

remarks that there are many local varieties of the same species.

He told me also that in the area just referred to, all the Grant's

Zebras he met had this blotching on the back. In this respect

they seem to resemble my two skins from Baringo.

Text-fig. 146.

Grévy Zebra (male); Euaso Nyiro (3000 ft.).

Can we discover the region where the differentiation of all three

species gradually took place? It ought to be where all three

species once overlapped or still overlap. This would rule out South

Africa, for no animal of the Grévy type has ever been found in

those latitudes. But in the northern part of British East Africa

in the region round Lake Rudolphand Lake Baringo the Grévy and

Burchelline Zebras are found overlapping as far south as the Tana

554 PROF, W. RIDGEWAY ON THE [May 11,

River, below which the Grévy species, as is stated by Mr. A. H.

Neumann, does not occur. On the other hand the Burchell type is

never found in Somaliland or Shoa, where the Grévy species seems

to be the sole zebra, and where its nearest neighbours are the

Somali and the Abyssinian Asses. It thus extends further up than

the other zebras in North-east Africa. But in the region round

Text-fig. 147.

Grévy Zebra (female) ; Euaso Nyiro (3000 ft.).

Lake Baringo where the Grévy Zebra overlaps the Burchelline,

at least one specimen of the latter is known to possess a functional

premolar, a feature common in Grévy Zebras, and a peculiarity

which is a survival from Pliocene forms such as £. sivalensis of

India and LZ. stenonis of North Africa and Southern Europe.

Two of my skins (text-figs. 148 & 149), both from animals shot

at Lake Baringo, have small stripes or spots indicating vestiges

T9098] DIFFERENTIATION OF ZEBRAS. 550

of such small stripes as those found on the croup of Crawshay’s

Zebra from Nyassaland, and which resemble the small stripes

on the croup of many Grévy Zebras and the “gridiron” of the

Mountain Zebra.

Text-fig. 148.

Grant’s Zebra (male); Baringo (3000 ft.).

Thus at Lake Baringo we have a point of contact between the

Grévy and the Burchelline Zebras, not only in coloration but in

osteology. Now if we could find a zebra of the Mountain type in

that same area we might not unreasonably infer that in this

region we have the point from which the various species of zebras

had radiated.

956 PROF. W. RIDGEWAY ON THE [May 11,

I have not been as yet able to get a specimen of Ward’s Zebra

from this area, But, on the other hand, Mr. C. W. Hobley not

long since wrote to me the substance of a conversation which he

had with Lord Delamere, the well-known big-game shooter. The

latter told Mr. Hobley that he had sent home to Mr. Rowland

Text-fig. 149,

Grant’s Zebra (female) ; Baringo (8000 ft.).

Ward the skin of a zebra, which some one had named after

Mr. Ward. This animal Lord Delamere said he had shot at

Baringo. We have thus at last got the true provenance of this

very important specimen from the mouth of the sportsman who

shot it.

1909. ] DIFFERENTIATION OF ZEBRAS. B57

But as Ward’s Zebra is virtually the Mountain Zebra only locally

varied, I submit that it was in the northern part of British Hast

Africa that the differentiation of the three species, not only in

colour, but also in osteology, had begun.

Text-fig. 150.

Grant’s Zebra (male) ; Laikipia (5800 ft.).

Tn this area there are lofty mountains, elevated plateaus and

low-lying swamps, as well as hill country with abundance of

grassy patches in it. Is it to these different types of country that

the differentiation in types may be due?

558 PROF, W. RIDGEWAY ON THE | May 11,

I had remarked in reading Mr. A. H. Neumann’s excellent

book, ‘Elephant -hunting in Equatorial East Africa,’ that

although both Grévy and Burchelline Zebras are found in the

same country and not unfrequently together, yet on the whole

Text-fig. 151.

Grant’s Zebra (male) ; Laikipia (5800 ft.).

Grévy Zebras live in low-lying grounds with a thin vegetation of

prickly shrubs, whilst the Burchelline species lives commonly ata

higher elevation and where there is more bush and richer pasture.

But on the mountains and plateaus of this area the conditions

1909. | DIFFERENTIATION OF ZEBRAS. 599

are much the sameas in the mountainous regions of South Africa,

where the Mountain Zebra was formerly abundant.

Text-fig. 152.

Grant’s Zebra (male) ; Uasingishu (6500 ft.).

I had an opportunity of talking over this view with

Mr. Neumann, who approved of it, and in confirmation told me

that he had visited the great. swamp at the upper end of the

Euaso Nyiro River, and in the low-lying lands there, although it

was within the geographical area occupied by the Burchelline

Zebras (Grant’s variety), he never found any of that species,

560 PROF. W. RIDGEWAY ON THE [May 11,

though the Grévy Zebras were abundant. I had previously noted

in Col. Swayne’s valuable paper (P. Z. 8. 1894) that in Somaliland

the Grévy Zebra lives in a like environment. He found them

first at Durhi, about 300 miles inland from Berbera. These

zebras are very common in the land of the Rer Amaden and

Text-fig. 153.

Grant’s Zebra (female); Uasingishu (6500 ft.).

Malingur tribes. ‘The country there is covered with scattered

bush over its entire surface, and is stony and much broken up by

ravines ; the general elevation is about 2500 feet.” The zebras

“were met on low plateaux covered with scattered thorn bush and

glades of durr grass, the soil being powdery and red in colour with

1909. | DIFFERENTIATION OF ZEBRAS. 561

an occasional outcrop of rocks. J saw none in the open flats of the

Webbe Valley, and they never come near so far north as the

open grass plains of the Haud, Durhi south of the Fafan being

their northern limit.”

Text-fig. 154.

Grant’s Zebra (male) ; Kinolop (7500 ft.).

On the high plateaus it is quite possible that Ward’s Zebra, or in

other words the Mountain Zebra, was differentiated. Mr. Neumann

told me that he knew three or four localities where it might be

quite possible to find the Mountain Zebra, and it was his intention,

when he went out again, to make a diligent search for such.{ = |

That animals living at a high elevation have to adapt themselves

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1909, No. XX XIX, 39

562 ON THE DIFFERENTIATION OF ZEBRAS. [May 11,

totit, is shown by a skin (text-fig. 155) of a Grant’s Zebra shot

on the Aberdare Range about 8000 feet high. The hair of

this skin is much longer than that of my other skins from East

Africa. Mr. Neumann had hunted over that range, and seen a

Text-fig. 155.

Grant’s Zebra (male) ; north end of Aberdare Range (8000 ft.).

few Grant’s Zebras there ; they did not live on the top, but only

passed up and down over the edge of the plateau.

I may point out that just as the Burchelline Zebras from the

most northern point where they are met keep changing from

locality to locality (as is demonstrated by my skins from East

1909. ] ON UNRECORDED SPECIMENS OF THE QUAGGA. 563

Africa) until they passed into the Quaggas ef Cape Colony, so on

the north the Grévy with its ass-like ears comes closer in that

respect to its neighbours, the asses of Somaliland and Abyssinia,

whilst its hoof resembles that of the horse more than those of the

other zebras. The difference between its hoof and those of the

two other species may be due to the fact that it is not a

mountain animal, but always keeps rather to the low and often

swampy ground,

2. Contributions to the Study of the Equide; ii. On

Hitherto Unrecorded Specimens of Equus quagga. By

Prof. Wintiam Ripe@Eway, M.A., Se.D., F.B.A., LL.D.,

breed Des

[Received April 21, 1909.}

(Text-figures 156-180.)

In view of the scantiness of our existing material for arriving

at any conclusions respecting the now extinct 2. quagga, which

once roamed the plains of Cape Colony in vast herds, and was

found in Orange River and Griqualand West, it is most important

to make known any yet surviving specimens which have hitherto

escaped the vigilance of zoologists. In my ‘ Origin and Influence

of the Thoroughbred Horse’ (pp. 438-9, figs. 131-3) I was

enabled to publish the head and neck of a Quagga, preserved in

the Elgin Museum (to which my attention had been called by my

friend Dr. Duckworth) (text-fig. 172, p. 581). This specimen

shows a white ground-colour in the middle of the forehead like

the typical specimen described by Edwards in 1758 (text-fig. 173,

p: 582).

I.—By the kindness of another friend, Mr. R.C. Punnett, F.Z.8.,

Fellow of Gonville and Caius College, I am now able to describe

and figure for the first time an entire specimen hitherto

neglected by zoologists. This specimen is preserved in the

Naturgeschichtes Museum at Basel, and for the photograph from

which the illustration (text-fig. 157, p. 565) is taken as well as for

the description I am indebted to the great kindness of Dr. Fritz

Sarasin, the Director of that Museum. The specimen (a female)

was presented to the Basel Museum in 1864 by a missionary

called Gysin, who resided at Silo (Shiloh), Cape Colony. The

fact that in this case, as well as in that of the Elgin specimen,

we have some indication of the locality where the animal was

killed is of considerable importance, Inasmuch as few of the

other specimens as yet known have any provenance.

Dr. Sarasin writes as follows:—‘‘ The ground-colour of the

centre of the forehead is not white and not lighter than the

ground-colour of other parts of the face and neck. The colour

of the stripes on head, neck, and back is bright chestnut (‘ hell

kastanienbraun, ‘brun marron clair’). The colour of the non-

* Communicated by Dr. P. CoatmERsS MircuEtt, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S.

39*

564 PROF. W. RIDGEWAY ON [May 11,

striped hinder parts is bright brown (‘hellbraun,’ ‘ brun clair’).

There is a broad dorsal stripe of a deep maroon (‘dunckel

kastanienbraun’) colour, bordered on each side by a small stripe

of yellowish white (‘ gelblichweiss,’ ‘ blanche- -jaunatre’) colour.

The hair of the tail is Orig cream (‘hell créme’). The under-

parts of the body are of a ‘créme-blanchatre’ colour, so also are

the legs, but getting darker towards the feet.”

This new specimen has a peculiar interest, for it differs from all

the others known, and may serve to bridge over the gulf between

the Quaggas of Cape Colony and the Burchell Zebras.

Text-fig. 156.

HE. burchelli (Paris) ; north of Cape Colony (about 1820).

Mr. Pocock has well pointed out that the current descriptions

of the Quagga are made up by blending together animals of

different types, whilst he and Mr. Lydekker have suggested that

the Quaggas figured by Edwards (text-fig. 173, p. 582), by Harris

(text-fig. 180, p. 586), and Hamilton Smith (text-fig. 178), may

be subspecifically distinct from the one photographed by York (text-

fig. 164, p. 575), the last known living example of its race, which

survived in the Zoological Gardens until 1872. Mr. Lydekker

(‘Science Progress,’ 1902, pp. 220-2) proposed names for two

new subspecies. (1) #. quagga greyi, under which fall the British

1909. | UNRECORDED SPECIMENS OF THE QUAGGA. 565

Museum (text-fig. 163), Amsterdam (text-fig. 170), Edinburgh

(text-fig. 165), and Tring (text-fig. 159) specimens; the last being

(he thought) that really photographed by York. (2) He applies

the name /#. quagga lorenzi to the famous Vienna specimen (text-

fig. 158). But Mr. Lydekker is now very doubtful whether the

division into races 1s justifiable, although it is possible that the

Vienna specimen may be distinct, and “‘ despite certain differences

in regard to the width and backward extension of the stripes, and

also the relative proportions of the white and fawn areas,” he is

Text-fig. 157.

The Basel Quagga (female) ; Silo, Cape Colony, 1864.

“ disposed to regard the quaggas figured by Edwards, Harris, and

Hamilton Smith, as representing the same type of animal. ‘

Mr. Pocock has added a third subspecies: ZH. quagga daniella

(text-fig. 179, p. 585).

Mr. Pocock has argued that the Burchell Zebras and the

Quaggas of Cape Colony are only subspecifically distinct, and he

includes all the varieties of the Burchell Zebra as well as the true

Quaggas of Cape Colony under the species #. quagga.

Whether these two types of animals were specifically or sub-

specifically distinct, the relationship between them was extremely

close. Furthermore, it is generally admitted that the Vienna

Quagga, of all the specimens hitherto published, comes nearest to

- the true Burchell Zebra.

566 PROF. W. RIDGEWAY ON [May 11,

But a glance at the illustration of the Basel Quagga will show

that it comes still closer to the Burchell Zebra than the Vienna

Specimen, and it may be taken as virtually filling the gap which

hitherto has existed between the true Burchell Zebra and the

Quaggas of Cape Colony.

It would seem that we must be careful not to make species or

subspecies too hastily, for it may turn out that slight local

differences in the environment may cause a difference in the

coloration of animals which are practically one and the same

in type. This, indeed, can be put beyond all doubt by the series

of skins in my own possession, which I obtained from British

East Africa (supra, pp. 547-563).

II.—I will next describe another specimen of HL. quagga. It

has long been known by hearsay to those interested in the

subject, but, so far as I am aware, it has not been described or

figured by any of our leading authorities on the Hquide. Sad to

say, 1t is the only specimen of the true Quagga preserved in the

Museums of South Africa. For, although the Director of the

Bloemfontein Museum, in reply to my inquiries, informed me

that there was in the Museum a skin of the true Quagga, when

the photograph, taken for me by a local photographer, arrived,

the skin turned out to be probably that of the true Burchell

Zebra. But as the legs had been trimmed off, it is by no means

certain that it is even that of a true Burchell.

However, in the Cape Town Museum, there is a genuine relic

of the true Quagga, which, by the kindness of Dr. L. Péringuey,

the Director, Tam able to describe in his words and to figure from

a photograph kindly sent to me by him. Dr. Péringuey writes :—

“T very much regret to say that the extinct Quagga is

represented in the collection by a foal only. The skin was never

properly mounted, and the animal looks somewhat grotesque,

but I dare not have this relic taxidermised. The animal was

procured from the Beaufort West district ‘of the Cape Colony

cirea 1860. It is rufous-brown, the stripes whitish, but

slightly mingled with rufous, or rather tawny, on the edges.

The animal is 110 cm. from nose to the root of the tail, 68 em.

at the shoulders, 70 cm. at the hind quarters; the length of the

head is 30 cm. from the muzzle to the centre of the ears. The

remarkable feature of the foal is the great length of the hairs;

those bearding the lower jaw are 3 cm. long. On the facial part

there are four distinct stripes and many outer, ill-defined ones.

These show distinctly in the photograph.” (Text-fig. 171, p. 580.)

I here figure all the chief specimens of the Quagga which I have

been able to find in the museums of Europe and Africa, except

that at Turin * and those said to be at Mainz and Frankfurt-on-

* I obtained, but too late to reproduce, a picture of this specimen, by the kindness

of Dr. L. Camerano, who published it (Atti d. R. Accad. d. Scienze, Torino, vol. xliii.

pp. 3-6, pl.).

1909. ] UNRECORDED SPECIMENS OF THE QUAGGA. 567

Main *. I have arranged all the specimens in a series according

to the amount of striping in each speciinen. ‘This will serve to

show the relation of the Basel Quagga to those already familiar.

Whenever I could ascertain the provenance of the specimen and

its date, I have given it. The sequence shows that the process of

self-divesting of the stripes from the hoofs upwards, which we can

trace in the Burchelline Zebras from Grant’s variety in North-

east Africa downwards (text-figs. 144-8, supra), continued in

operation amongst the Quagegas of Orange River and Cape Colony.

Scanty as the evidence is, it renders it clear that if we had more

specimens we could trace every stage in the process and we would

find, that as in British East Africa the Zebras vary from area to

area, So was it also with the Quaggas of Cape Colony. In addi-

tion to the reproductions of the extant specimens in museums as

well as York’s photograph of the female Quagga which lived in

the Regent’s Park from 1851 to 1872, I have reproduced the chief

pictures of Quaggas drawn from living specimens. There has

been in the past much discussion as to whether the drawings of

Edwards, Cornwallis Harris, Hamilton Smith, and Daniell are

trustworthy, because the animals pourtrayed differ in coloration

inter se and also from the extant museum specimens. But a

comparison of the illustrations from the pictures with those

from the extant specimens, and from York’s photograph, and the

descriptions of such men as Cornwallis Harris, will convince

the reader that the pictures of Edwards, Harris, Daniell, and

Hamilton Smith, though differing from each other, and from

some of the extant specimens, show forms quite in keeping with

what might be expected in other specimens of Quaggas.

Cornwallis Harris, who had studied the Quagga from life in

its haunts (‘ Wild Sports of Southern Africa,’ p. 48), has left us

in his ‘ Portraits of the Game Animals of Southern Africa’

(1841) a picture of an animal (text-fig. 180, p. 586) with less

striping than Daniell’s (text-fig. 179). Harris was drawing from

animals that he saw around him, and had he not seen such

variations, he would have given us an animal striped like the

skin drawn by himself (text-fig. 175, p. 583). Again Hawkins ay,

in his drawing from life of the Knowsley quaggas (text-fig. 174),

shows animals of different degrees of striping. But his picture

is in accord with the evidence of the extant skins.

TIT. The Vienna specimen (text-fig. 158, p.568),a female. This

specimen has been fully described by Dr. Lorenz (P. Z.S. 1902,

vol. i. pp. 32 sqq.), with an illustration taken from a photograph

made for Dr. Lorenz by Herr Custos Marktanner, of Gratz, from

whose negative the photograph here reproduced is also taken

(having been obtained for me by Dr. Karl Toldt, of the Vienna

* Mr. G. Renshaw (Nat. Hist. Essays, 1904, p. 192) gives both in his list, and

one at Berne (p. 191). But the Director of that Museum tells me that this is a

mistake.

+ ‘Gleanings from the Menagerie and Aviary at Knowsley Hall’ (J. E. Gray and

Waterhouse Hawkins: Knowsley, 1851).

568 PROF. W. RIDGEWAY ON [May il,

Museum, in 1906). The specimen was procured by Ecklon in

1836 (who had purchased for Munich its specimen in 1835).

IV. The Tring specimen (text-fig. 159). Dr. P. L. Sclater,

¥.R.S., described and figured this specimen (P. Z.8. 1901, vol. i.

p. 166). My illustration is from a photograph given by the

Hon. Walter Rothschild, M.P. to Mr. R. I. Pocock, who has

kindly allowed me to embody the following notes on this im-

portant specimen (pp. 569-70). Dr. Sclater stated that this

Text-fig. 158.

The Vienna Quagga (female), 1836.

specimen was the animal which lived in the London Zoological

Gardens from 1851to 1872. Iam also indebted to Mr. Pocock for

the facts relating to the history of this specimen and its supposed

identity with either the quagga which died in the Regent’s Park

in 1864 (Sir G. Grey’s specimen) or the one which died in

1872. The question is fully discussed (infra, pp. 572-5) where I

treat of the British Museum specimen and that photographed by

Fred. York.

“The chief points to be noticed about this Quagga are the

following. The general colour is practically the same as in the

1909. | UNRECORDED SPECIMENS OF THE QUAGGA. 569

type of L. guagga greyi in the British Museum, that is to say, the

stripes are dark brown, the interspaces paler creamy brown, the

belly and legs whitish with a dark rim above the hoofs and dark hair

at the back of the fetlocks. The stripes on the neck are moderately

broad and some of them at least are double. The lower half of

the shoulder is unstriped ; and on the anterior portion of the body

behind the shoulders the stripes are short, but posteriorly they

become progressively longer and retain their distinctness as far

back as the hind-quarters, exhibiting most clearly in the posterior

Text-fig. 159.

The Tring Quagga.

half of the body the backward inclination so characteristic of so-

called Zebras of the Burchelline group. The last long stripe that

is visible slopes backwards from a point a little in front of the

stifle-joint towards the root of the tail, and appears to represent

the stripe in a specimen of Chapman’s Quagga which Prof. Ewart

called the ‘‘intermediate flank stripe.” Below this the hind-

quarters seem to show traces of at ieast one abbreviated stripe,

recalling the abbreviated stripes on this area in typical #. qguagga

burchelli.

“Tt is the persistence and distinctness of both the vertical and

oblique stripes on the body that make the Tring Quagga excep-

tionally interesting. In these particulars, coupled with the width

570 PROF. W. RIDGEWAY ON [May 11,

of the interspaces between the stripes on the body and neck, it

more resembles some of the recorded examples of H. quagga

burchelli than any of the extinct Quaggas hitherto described and

figured. It surpasses even the Vienna specimen in the cogency

of the evidence it supplies of the closeness of the affinity between

the extinct and existing members of this species. Apart, indeed,

from its browner tint, due to the lightening of the stripes and

the darkening of the interspaces, I cannot detect one single im-

portant character in which this Quagga differs, for example, from

the specimen of Burchell’s Quagga in the Bristol Museum.

Text-fig. 160.

The Stockholm (Sparrman’s) Quagga, 1775.

“Tam greatly indebted to Mr. Rothschild for giving me more

than one opportunity of examining this Quagga at Tring and also

for_very kindly supplying me with a photograph of the’ animal

from which Prof. Ridgeway has had the subjoined block prepared.”

V. The Stcckholm specimen (text-figs. 160 & 161). This

specimen has a peculiar interest, as it is not only the oldest extant

specimen, but is the ‘full-grown fetus” brought home by

1909. ] UNRECORDED SPECIMENS OF THE QUAGGA. 571

Sparrman in 1775*. For the two illustrations I am indebted to

my friend Prof. Dr. Linnberg, the Keeper of the Natural History

Museum, Stockholm, who has also given me the notes here

embodied. Text-fig. 160 is from a photograph taken before the

dust of a century was removed from the animal. Text-fig. 161 is

from a painting made by the Stockholm artist Mr. 8. Ekblon for

Dr. Lénnberg of the specimen after it was cleaned. Dr. Lénnberg

has most generously put this picture at my disposal, and he tells me

Text-fig. 161.

The Stockholm (Sparrman’s) Quagga (from a painting).

that ‘it represents a careful copy of the pattern of the right side,

which is not fully identical with that on the left” (represented by

the photograph, text-fig. 160). “The light patch on the rump in

the photograph is due to the fact that the specimen had not been

fully cleaned when the photographer had it.” In answer to my

query Dr. Liénnberg writes that “the brown of the stripes may be

a little bleached, but only a little; the light ground colour is of

Sparrman gives its measurements : “from ears to tail 31 inches; height at loins 22.”

572 PROF. W. RIDGEWAY ON [ May 11,

course not altered. Sparrman says in his narrative that the

colours of this foetus were ‘fresher,’ ¢. e. brighter, than in full-

grown animals of the same kind.” The exact locality is not

mentioned, but Sparrman relates that he saw the first quagga at

Swellendam, and in this connection he mentions this fcetus,

although he says only that he brought it home “ from the Cape.”

VI. The Wiesbaden specimen (text-fig. 162) was bought in —

1865 from Frank, the Amsterdam dealer, for one hundred florins.

Jt isa male. The provenance is simply “South Africa.”

Text-fig. 162.

The Wiesbaden Quagga (male), 1865.

This information and the photograph I owe to the kindness of

Dr. Lampe, Custos of the Wiesbaden Museum.

VII. The British Museum specimen (text-fig. 163). Mr. Ly-

dekker (‘ Guide to the Specimens of the Horse Family (Equide),’

p. 34), writes :—‘ The species is represented in the collection by

the mounted skin and the skeleton of a male formerly living in

the Zoological Gardens, Regent's Park. That animal, which was

one of the last survivors of the species, was presented to the

1909. ] UNRECORDED SPECIMENS OF THE QUAGGA. 573

Zoological Society by Sir George Grey, K.C.B., in 1858, and lived

in the Menagerie in the Regent’s Park till June 1864. The skin

is exhibited in case no. 38 in the lower mammal gallery, and the

skull on the opposite side of the same case.”

Between this specimen and that at Tring there has been much

confusion. In the P. Z.S. 1901, vol. i. p. 165, Dr. P. L. Sclater,

F.R.S., stated that the female Quagga purchased on March 15th,

1851, by the Zoological Society died on July 7th, 1872, and was

sold to Mr. E. Gerrard, and is now in the Zoological Museum at

Tring. A photograph of this animal taken during its lifetime

Text-fig. 163.

The British Museum (Grey’s) Quagga (male), 1858.

(1870) by York is reproduced on p. 166 of the volume just cited.

Mr. Pocock accepted this statement as correct and reprinted it in

his paper on the Cape Colony Quagga (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7)

xiv. p. 324, 1904).

The Hon. Walter Rothschild, M.P., then wrote to Mr. Pocock

to tell him that he had bought the Tring Quagga from Gerrard

in 1889, understanding that it had been received in exchange

from the Dresden Museum. Mr. Pocock wrote to Mr. Gerrard,

and he informed Mr. Pocock that it camefrom the Leyden Museum.

574 PROF, W. RIDGEWAY ON [May 11,

Mr. Pocock wrote to Dresden, and the then Director replied that

the Dresden Museum had never possessed a Quagga, and had never

sold one to Gerrard either before, during, or after 1889.

All doubt on this matter is removed by the following letter

from Gerrard to Mr. Pocock :—

Natural History Studios,

61 College Place, Camden Town,

London, N.W.,

June 12th, 1909.

Dear Sir,

The Quagga I sold to Tring was one I bought from

Mr. Frank of Amsterdam. It was an old mounted specimen, and

I remounted it. JI do not know where Frank got it. The

Quagga which died at the Zoo was made into a skeleton. The

skin was bad. ‘The skeleton is in the British Museum.

Yours truly,

Epw. GERRARD.

Dr. Harmer, F.R.S., on recently examining the specimen in the

British Museum and comparing it with the animal shown in

York’s photograph, told me that he doubted if they were one and

the same animal.

Mr. G. Dollman has kindly sent me the extract * from the

Museum Register. It puts beyond doubt that the specimen is

Grey’s which died in 1864, years before York’s photograph.

Mr. Gerrard is therefore wrong, and so is Dr. Renshaw 7, who

states that the Museum specimen is the animal which died in

the Gardens in 1839.

The statements prove the following conclusions :—

(i) In 1851 the Society purchased a female Quagga which died

in 1872.

(ii) The skin was not preserved being in a bad state, but its

skeleton was mounted, though it is not that now in the Natural

History Museum.

(iii) In 1858 Sir George Grey presented to the Zoological

Society a male Quagga which died in 1864. It is the mounted

skin, skull and skeleton of this male which is now in the British

Museum.

(iv) It is certain that York’s photograph represents a speci-

men which was living in the Regent’s Park. But as this photo-

eraph does not represent the stuffed specimen in the British

Museum (Sir G. Grey’s male), it must represent the female

specimen bought in 1851, of which the skeleton was preserved

but not the skin, which was in too bad a state.

(v) The Tring specimen is neither the female specimen which

was in the Gardens from 1851 to 1872, nor the male presented by

Sir G. Grey in 1858 and which died in 1864. It is the skin of a

quite different animal.

(vi) Thus through the efforts of Mr. Pocock and Dr. Harmer’s

* The entry runs: ‘64.7.2.3, Reg. no. Hguus quagga, male, stuffed skin and

skeleton, purchased of the Zool. Soc. (Sir George Grey, 1858).”

+ Nat. Hist. Essays, pp. 186-7.

1909. ] UNRECORDED SPECIMENS OF THE QUAGGA. 575

sagacity we are enabled to add another specimen to the list of

Quaggas preserved in our museums. Most fortunate it was that

York photographed the female Quagga in the Gardens, for

although her skeleton may be preserved in some museum, all

record of her external appearance would have been lost.

VIII. The Female Quagga photographed by York (text-

fig. 164). For this illustration I have to thank the Director of

the British Museum, who has permitted me, with Mr. Lydekker’s

approval, to reproduce the fig. 22 in the ‘ Guide to the Specimens

Text-fig. 164.

Female, Rezent’s Park (1851-72). Photographed from life by F. York.

of the Horse Family’ (p. 33). From what has been said under

“The British Museum specimen ” supra, it is clear that York’s

photograph, taken (1870 or 1872) from the only living quagga

ever photographed, represents the female which lived in the

Gardens from 1851 to 1872, and not the specimen now in the

British Museum.

IX. The Edinburgh specimen (text-fig. 165). The Edinburgh

specimen has no provenance except Cape of Good Hope. It was

purchased by the University of Edinburgh for their ‘“ College

Museum ” during the year ending June 1818, for the sum of one

guinea, and it was afterwards transferred to the Royal Scottish

576 PROF. W. RIDGEWAY ON [May 1],

Museum, where it now is along with the rest of the old College

Collection. I am indebted to the Director, Dr. Dobbie, F.R.S.,

and to Mr. G. P. H. Grimshaw for the photograph and information.

Text-fic. 165.

The Edinburgh Quagea, 1818.

X. The Leyden specimen (text-fig. 166) is from a photograph

kindly given to me by my friend Dr. F. A. Jentink, F.M.Z.S., the

Director of the Dutch State Museum of Natural History at

Leyden. The animal was shot near Steenbergen by Dr. van

Horstok on June 15th, 1827. The skeleton of this fine animal

(male) is ikewise in the Leyden Museum.

XI. The Paris specimen (text-fig. 167) is from a photograph

kindly given to me by Dr. Trouessart, the Director of the Paris

Natural History Museum, to whom I am also indebted for the

following account :—‘ Le quagga est venu (vivant) lors de la

création de la ménagerie du Muséum de l’ancienne ménagerie du

Roi & Versailles en 1793. A cette époque Vindication ‘ Cap de

Bonne Espérance’ semblait trés suffisante.” Dr. Trouessart has

since published the specimen with an illustration in the ‘Bulletin’*

of the French National Museum.

* 1906, xii. p. 449.

1909. | UNRECORDED SPECIMENS OF THE QUAGGA. 577

Text-fig. 166.

ee ee I an ne ome nf be

The Leyden Quagga (male), Steenbergen, 1827.

Text-fic. 167.

The Paris Quagega, 1793.

Proc. Zoou. Soc..—1909, No. XL. 40)

578 PROF. W. RIDGEWAY ON [May 11,

XII. The Berlin Quagga (text-fig. 168), a female, is that which

died in the Berlin Zoological Garden in 1875. The skull and

skeleton are also in the Berlin Museum as well as two other

quagga skulls. Dr. Matschie, who kindly gave me the photograph,

Text-fig. 168.

The Berlin Quagga (female).

informs me that the specimen has not been fully described.

He considers that it belongs to the same type as the Vienna

(#. lorenzi). ‘The ground-colour is burnt-umber; the bright

stripes are very bright brown (sehr hell braun).”

XIII. The Munich specimen (text-fig. 169).—The illustration

is from a photograph kindly sent to me by Dr. Hertzog, the

Director of the Natural History Museum. The specimen was

purchased by Ecklon in 1835, who in the following year procured

the Vienna specimen.

XIV. The Amsterdam Quagga (text-fig. 170).—The illustration

is from a photograph kindly given to me by Prof. Dr. Kerbert.

The specimen has been described and discussed by Mr. Lydekker

(P. Z.S. 1904, vol. i. p. 430, text-fig. 86).

1909. ] UNRECORDED SPECIMENS OF THE QUAGGA. 579

s Text-fig. 169.

The Munich Quagea, 1835.

Text-fig. 170.

The Amsterdam Quagex

sac.

40%

580 PROF. W. RIDGEWAY ON | May 11,.

Text-fig. 171. ‘

The Cape-Town Quagega foal, Beaufort West, about 1860.

XV. The Elgin Quagga (text-fig. 172).—I published this head

and neck in my ‘Origin and Influence of the Thoroughbred

Horse’ (pp. 438 & 9, figs. 131-3), 1905.

1. Edwards’ Quagga.—The illustration (text-fig. 173, p. 582)

is from the drawing made by G. Edwards himself ‘“ from the living

animal belonging to His Royal Highness the Prince of Wales” in

1751, and published in his ‘Gleanings of Natural History,’ London,

1758, p. 29, pl. 223. This drawing was reproduced and discussed

by Mr. R. I. Pocock (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Nov. 1904).

The figure is that given in my ‘Origin and Influence of the

Thoroughbred Horse,’ p. 72, fig. 38.

1909. | UNRECORDED SPECIMENS OF THE QUAGGA. 581

Text-fig. 172.

Elgin Quagga: Kingwilliamstown, 1861.

2 and 3. The Knowsley Quagzas (text-fig. 174, p. 582).—My

illustration is from their portraits by Hawkins (supra, p. 567) in

the ‘ Knowsley Menagerie.’ The two animals ave shown on one

picture. One is more striped than the other, but the skin (text-

fig. 175) might belong to a similar animal.

4. Cornwallis Harris’ Drawing of a Quagga Skin (text-

fig. 175), ef. p. 567. It is reproduced from the ‘ Portraits of the

Game Animals of Southern Africa.’

5. Lord Morton’s Quagga.— My illustration (text-fig. 176)

is from a block made from Agasse’s drawing for my friend

Prof. J. Cossar Ewart, F.R.S. (‘Penicuik Experiments,’ p. 65).

582 PROF. W. RIDGEWAY ON [May 11,

This animal belonged to Lord Morton in 1821 (see Phil. Transac-

tions, 1821, p. 21). (Cf. ‘Origin and Influence of the Thoroughbred

Horse,’ p. 457.)

Text-fig. 173.

Edwards’ Quagga, 1751 (from Edwards’ drawing).

Text-fig. 174.

The Knowsley Quaggas, from Hawkins’ drawing.

1909. ] UNRECORDED SPECIMENS OF THE QUAGGA. 583

Text-fig. 175.

_ From Cornwallis Harris’ picture

(‘ Portraits of the Game Animals of Southern Africa’).

Text-fig. 176.

Lord Morton’s Quagga, 1821 (from Agasse’s drawinz).

584 PROF. W. RIDGEWAY ON | May 11,

6. Buffon’s Quagga.—My illustration (text-fig. 177) is from

that in Buffon’s ‘ Histoire Naturelle,’ vol, x. p. 112 sqq., pl. u.

(1787). The description of the quagga there given and the

drawing from which the engraving was taken (here reproduced)

Text-fig. 177.

Bufton’s Quagga: from Gordon’s drawing.

were obtained from a Mr. Gordon, who (dans le pays des Bosjemans

fort éloigné de toute habitation) made a drawing from a young

Souk 8 eb YOUN

quagga, which he had cut off from a herd of females with their

foals, and which followed his horse (p. 115).

7. Hamilton Smith’s Quagga (supra, p. 567). (Text-fig. 178.)

1909. | UNRECORDED SPECIMENS OF THE QUAGGA. 585

Text-fig. 178.

iy Ree

ys 4 Bate alla

Hamilton Smith’s drawing, 1840 *.

Text fig. 179.

Daniell’s Quagga: from a drawing anterior to 1804.

* Horses,’ pl. xxiv.

586 PROF, W. RIDGEWAY ON THE [May 11,

8. Daniell’s Quagga.—The illustration (text-fig. 179, p. 585) is

a reduced facsimile from the drawing by Samuel Daniell in his

‘African Scenery’ (1804-8), no. 15. The picture has been

reproduced and discussed by Mr. Pocock (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,

Nov. 1904).

9. Cornwallis Harris’s Quagga (text-fig. 180) is a reproduction

of Harris’ drawing in the ‘ Portraits of the Game Animals of

Southern Africa’ (supra, p. 567).

Text-fig. 180.

From Cornwallis Harris’ drawing.

This survey of the extant skins and the pictures of the Quaggas

of Orange River and Cape Colony, and the comparison of the

illustrations with those of the Burchelline Zebras, leads irre-

sistibly to the conclusion that every area has its own variety due

to environment, that we must be slow to make new species or even

subspecies, and that Mr. Pocock was right in maintaining that

the Quaggas of Orange River and Cape Colony were not specifically

distinct from the Burchelline Zebras.

3. Contributions to the Study of the Equide ; iii. On a

portion of a fossil Jaw of one of the Equide. By

Prof. Winttiam Ripcrway, M.A., Se.D., F.B.A., LL.D.,

Litt.D.*

| Received April 21, 1909. ]

(Text-figure 181.)

By the kindness of Mr. A. C. Hollis, secretary to the High

Commissioner of British East Africa, through my friend Mr. C.

W. Hobley, C.M.G., Assistant-Commissioner at Nairobi, I am

* Communicated by Dr. P. Coatmers Mrircuent, M.A,, F.RS., F.Z.S.

1909. | FOSSIL JAW OF ONE OF THE EQUID. 587

enabled to publish a most interesting fragment of the fossil jaw

of what was undoubtedly one of the Equide. It was found in

1906 ‘*by a Mr. W. A. Macgregor in the Morendat River near

Naivasha.” Mr. Macgregor gave it to Mr. Hollis. Iam informed

by Professor Gregory of Glasgow, who has worked in British

Hast Africa, that the gravels of the Morendat are late Tertiary.

The fragment here shown (text-fig. 181) is the fore part of the

under Jaw. Unfortunately it does not extend back beyond the

diastema and include any of the premolars or molars, but five of

the six incisors survive and also the canine on the vight side, the

canine and second corner incisor on the left side being lost.

Text-fig. 181.

Fragment of a fossil jaw; River Morendat, British East Africa.

Allowing for the loss of a small portion, the breadth across the

jaw at the corner incisors is exactly two inches. The distance

from the corner incisor to the canine is very small, not more than

a quarter of an inch. ‘This specimen is very interesting as it 1s,

so faras I know, the only fossil remains of a mammal as yet

obtained from British East Africa, and at the time of its discovery

was the first from any part of East Africa. But the Germans

have lately made some discoveries. ‘The only mammal fossil from

Central Africa as yet known, is a fossil tooth of a giraffe.

Close to the area where it was found there still survive repre-

sentatives of all three species of Zebra—JLH. zebra or the Mountain

Py) 588 MR. R. LYDEKKER ON A [May 11,

Zebra, Grant’s variety of Burchell’s Zebra, and Grévy’s Zebra;

and it is not improbable that in this jaw we have a relic of an

ancestor of one or more or of all these species.

Is it possible to form any estimate of the size of this animal,

which I propose to call Z. hollisi ?

Let us compare the few measurements which we can make with

those of its living relatives. The distance across the four com-

pletely surviving incisors in the fossil is one and three-quarter

inches. The same measurement in my skull of a Grévy stallion

gives two inches, and in that of my Grant stallion two and three-

eighths inches. The interdental space between the canine and

the nearest incisor in the fossil #. hollist is about a quarter of an

inch, im the Grévy three-eighths, in the Grant nearly an inch.

Thus, so far as these very inadequate measurements indicate,

the animal was more like the Grévy Zebra than the Grant, an

inference quite in keeping with the view that the stripe-system

in the Grévy is much older than in the Burchell family of

Zebras.

As regards the actual size of the Hquzs hollisi, we can form no

estimate from the jaw measurements. Thus the Grévy stallion,

the measurements of the jaw of which J. have just cited, stood 4 feet

94 inches (14:13 hands) or just the height of the true Libyan

horse, that is the small ‘“ Arab” not increased in height by

crossing with Asiatic horses. On the other hand, the Grant’s

Zebras of East Africa seldom reach more than 4 feet 2 inches

(12:2 hands), yet the measurement of the front of the jaw in the

latter is distinctly larger than that of the Grévy stallion. Thus

from the present scanty data, we cannot form any estimate of the

height of 4. hollisi, for although the front of the lower jaw is

much smaller than that of H#. grant, it is quite possible that it,

like the Grévy Zebra, may have been a much larger animal.

4, On a New Race of Deer from Sze-chuen.

By R. LyDEKEER *.

[Received April 8, 1909.}

(Plate LXIX.+)

Shortly before his death, I received from the late Mr. J. W.

Brooke a communication regarding a so-called ‘“‘ white deer”

inhabiting Sze-chuen, which was stated to be no albino, but,

in my correspondent’s opinion, a new species. In February of

the present year, Captain Malcolm McNeill called at the Natural

History branch of the British Museum, and informed me that he

had just returned from Sze-chuen, where he had seen a small

party of these deer, out of which he succeeded in shooting a hind.

* Communicated by permission of the Trustees of the British Museum.

+ For explanation of:the Plate see p. 590.

PZS.1909 P1l.LXIX.

CMP-EFEJ Miles aC ° Imp

SZE-~-CHUEN HANGUL (FEMALE)

CWA oe ASU EePAN WS = WAG NE Phy E

1909. | NEW RACE OF DEER FROM SZE-CHUEN. 589

Of this hind he brought home the skin, skull, and limb-bones,

which have been secured for the British Museum and form the

subject of the present communication. Captain McNeill described

the deer as being nearly the size of a Wapiti; and this estimate

seems to be approximately borne out by the skull and skin, the

former of which, although immature, is rather larger than the

skull of an adult red deer hind. Unfortunately, Captain McNeill

was unable to furnish any information with regard to the form

of the antlers of the stag.

The general characters of the skin indicate a deer akin to the

Hangul (Cervus cashmirianus) of Kashmir and Kishtwaz. The

coat is, for instance, of the same dense and close character, with

the individual hairs ringed with dark and light in their terminal

halves, so as to give a speckled appearance to the body-fur.

There is the same narrow white area on the buttocks, bordered

by a darkish band, which is continued down the middle line of

the short tail, and there is a similar dark mane on the neck,

continued as a dark line for some distance down the back.

‘The Sze-chuen deer is, however, a much lighter-coloured and a

more fully speckled animal than the typical Hangul. The

general colour is grey fawn, becoming paler on the limbs, of

which the backs and inner sides are nearly white. ‘The individual

hairs on the body have also a greater number of light rings; and

the speckling is as well-developed on the flanks and neck as on

the back, whereas in the Kashmir Hangul the speckling is almost

obsolete in the regions first-named. In both forms the tips of

the hairs are, however, always light, although on the flanks and

neck of the Kashmir stag these tips are but little paler than the

general body-colour. On the back the dorsal stripe of the new

deer stops short a little behind the shoulder, instead of continuing

as a more or less distinct line to the rump. The Sze-chuen deer

lacks the white under-lip of its Kashmiri relative; but, on the

other hand, the whole throat is much lighter than the general

body-colour, instead of being quite as dark, or darker, in the

stags, at any rate, of the typical Hangul. Then again, the whole

of the under-parts of the Sze-chuen deer are dirty white, whereas

in the Kashmiri animal the abdomen alone is white, while the

lower surface of the chest is darker than the back. Certain

differences are observable in regard to the extent of the white

and black of the buttocks when the Sze-chuen skin is compared

with those of the Kashmir Hangul in the Museum, but these

may be merely individual. The gland on the hind cannon-bone

is pale chestnut in the new deer, and thus shows out, against the

grey fawn, much more conspicuously than in the typical Hangul.

The skin of a second hind in the possession of Captain McNeill

agrees in all essential characters with the specimen described.

So far as the present specimens go, the Sze-chuen deer may be

defined as follows :——

“Alhed to Cervus cashmirianus, but much paler and more

profusely speckled; the general colour being grey fawn, becoming

590 MR. E. C. CHUBB ON BATRACHIANS [May 11,

whitish fawn on the throat and limbs, and the speckling as fully

marked on the neck and flanks as on the back. No white on the

chin; but the whole of the under-parts dirty white, instead of

merely the abdomen. Dark dorsal line stopping short about the

middle of the back.

For the present, at any rate, I propose to regard the Sze-chuen

‘‘white” deer as a race of the Hangul, under the title of Cervus

cashmirianus macneilli. The occurrence in Sze-chuen of a repre-

sentative of the Hangul is paralleled by the occurrence in the

same province of a local race of the Sambar.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE LXIX.

Cervus cashmirianus macneilli, from the type female trom Sze-chuen in the

British Museum (Natural History).

The Batrachians and Reptiles of Matabeleland.

By E. C. Causs, F.Z.8.

[Received April 28, 1909. }

The following list is based entirely upon material in the

Rhodesia Museum, Bulawayo, and is intended to give some idea

of the Batrachia and Reptilia inhabiting this region, although it

cannot claim to be more than tentative, for as soon as extensive

collections are made in various parts of the country there will, no

doubt, be many species to add.

The localities vary in altitude between 2000 and 4500 feet ;

the latter figure representing the height of Bulawayo.

Tn a previous paper dealing with the Mammals of this area *

an allusion was made to the probability of the various geological

formations supporting distinct faunas, and this appears to be

borne out to a remarkable extent by the lizards, no single species

of which has as yet been found common to our twol principal

local formations, viz., granite and schist. Below is given a list

of those forms which I have had an opportunity of observing in

their haunts; it is arranged to show their habitats according to

these two formations.

GRANITE. SCHIST.

Homopholis wahlbergii.

Pachydactylus affinis. Pachydactylus bibronit.

Agama kirkit. Agama distant.

» atricollis.

Platysaurus guttatus.

Gerrhosaurus validus. ' Gerrhosaurus flavigularis.

Mabuia quingueteniata. Mabuia striata.

» varie.

* P. Z. 8. 1909, p. 113.

1909. ] AND REPTILES OF MATABELELAND. 591

The Matabele names are given wherever it has been possible to

ascertain them with certainty, but the natives are not so well

acquainted with the names of lizards and snakes as they are with

those of mammals and birds. In reading these, it must be

remembered that ‘c,” “q,” and “x” represent clicks, as in Zulu.

Among the numerous donors of specimens to whom the Museum

is indebted, should be specially mentioned Messrs. R. Edge and

G. Dally for collections made in the vicinity of Bulawayo.

I must express my warmest thanks to our Vice-President,

Mr. G. A. Boulenger, F.R.S., who has been good enough to

examine the collection and confirm or correct my determinations.

BATRACHIA.

1. BuFO REGULARIS Reuss.

a. Bulawayo.

6, c. Crombie’s Store, 16 miles 8.E. of Bulawayo, 18 Oct. 1907.

d. World’s View, Matopos, April 1908.

‘¢ Txoxo ” 1s used for all frogs and toads.

2. Buro CARENS A. Smith.

a. Bulawayo.

b-e. Crombie’s Store, 18 Oct. 1907.

f. Kana River, 20 Nov.. 1907.

3. PHRYNOMANTIS BIFASCIATA A. Smith.

a. Bulawayo, 3 Dec. 1907.

b. Shangani River, 28 Nov. 1907.

ce. Gonda’s, Shangani River, 3 Dec. 1907.

4, BREVICEPS MOSSAMBICUS Peters.

a-c. Bulawayo.

d,e. Near Gwamayaya River, 21 Nov. 1907.

5. RANA DELALANDID D. & B.

a—c. Bulawayo.

d. Gwamayaya River, 13 Nov. 1907.

6. RANA ANGOLENSIS Bocage.

a. Bulawayo, 6 Sept. 1907.

6. Crombie’s Store, 18 Oct. 1907.

c, d. World’s View, Matopos, April 1908.

e, f. Gwamayaya River, 13 Nov. 1907.

A number of tadpoles were taken with “6” on Oct. 18th.

7. RANA ADSPERSA Bibr.

a-d. Bulawayo.

e. Gwamayaya River, 22 Nov. 1907.

592 MR. E. C. CHUBB ON BATRACHIANS [May 11,

8. RANA MASCARENIENSIS D. & B.

a. Swena’s, Gwamayaya River, 22 Nov. 1907.

9. PHRYNOBATRACHUS NATALENSIS A, Smith.

a. World’s View, Matopos, April 1908.

b-r. Kana River, 20 Nov. 1907.

s-a. Gwamayaya River, 13 Nov. 1907.

10. CASSINA SENEGALENSIS D. & B.

a. Kana River, 20 Nov. 1907.

11. CHIROMANTIS XERAMPELINA Peters.

a. Victoria Falls.

This species was observed to change colour in different, lights

after the manner of a chameleon, though to a less degree.

RHPTIULIA.

OnE Ton 1A.

1. CINIXYS BELLIANA Gray.

a. Near Shangani River, Nov. 1907.

6, c. Essexvale, March 1909.

“ Ufutu ” is the name applied to all tortoises.

2. STERNOTHARUS NIGRICANS Donnd.

a. Near Gwamayaya River, 22 Nov. -1907.

5. Near Gwelo River, 24 Noy. 1907.

3. TESTUDO PARDALIS Bell.

a, Near Gwamayaya River, 23 Nov. 1907.

EMYDOSAURTA.

4, CrocopiLUs NiLoticus Laur.

The crocodile is common in most of the rivers.

*‘ Ingewenya.”

LACERTILTA.

5. LYGODACTYLUS CAPENSIS A. Smith.

a. Bulawayo, 24 Oct. 1907.

6. HomorpHonis WABLBERGI A. Smith.

a. World’s View, Matopos, April 1908.

b. Mazeppa Mine, Gwanda.

The first example was obtained from a hole in the trunk{of a

tree; the species is probably arboreal.

1909. ] AND REPTILES OF MATABELELAND. 593

7, PACHYDACTYLUS BIBRONT A. Smith.

a. Bulawayo.

6. Springvale Farm, 16 miles S.E. of Bulawayo, 10 June 1907.

This is our commonest gecko; it is usually found in houses

and huts.

‘* Amacanda-pobolo.”

8. PacHybactyLus AFFINts Bler.

a. Rhodes’ Park, Matopos, April 1908.

9. AGAMA ACULEATA Merr.

a. Bulawayo, March 1907.

All our species of Agama possess the property, to a greater or

less extent, of changing their colour.

10. AGAMA DisTantr Bler.

This is the commonest Agama at Bulawayo. It runs about the

ground during the heat of the day, and at other times lives in

holes, usually under stones, where its eggs are laid during

October and November.

11. AGAMA KiIRKII Bler.

a,b(d, 2). Mt. Silozi, Matopos, April 1908.

c-e. Khami River, Oct. 1907.

Lives among the rocks and is commonly found on granite kopjes.

12. AGAMA ATRICOLLIS A. Smith.

a—f. Bulawayo, Sept. 1907.

Arboreal and common.

Umiulos

13. ZonurRus corpyLus Linn.

a. Bulawayo, 27 Sept. 1907.

14. Puarysaurus euTratus A. Smith.

a-g(d,6 2). Mt. Silozi, Matopos, April 1908.

h,i(2 2). Colleen Bawn Mine, Gwanda, Dec. 1908.

Found only on the granite kopjes where it is fairly common.

15. VARANUS ALBIGULARIS Daud.

a. Bulawayo, 3 Feb. 1908.

6. Bulawayo, March 1909.

Found among rocks on granite kopjes and also on trees.

“ Tmbulu.”

16. VARANUS NILOTICUS Linn.

a. Bulawayo, April 1907.

6. Yg. Bulawayo, 8 March, 1908.

Almost entirely aquatic.

Coal) xc vee

Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1909, No. X LI. Al

594 MR. E. C. CHUBB ON BATRACHIANS [May 11,

17. NucrRAS TESSELLATA A. Smith.

a-c. Bulawayo.

18. IcHNOTROPIS LONGIPES Blgr.

a. Bulawayo, 28 Sept. 1907.

6. Khami River, Oct. 1907.

19. GERRHOSAURUS VALIDUS A. Smith.

a. Mt. Silozi, Matopos, April 1908.

6. Empandene, Aug. 1908.

Lives among rocks on granite kopjes.

“¢ Tsiqusa.”

20. GERRHOSAURUS FLAVIGULARIS Wiegm.

a-e. Bulawayo.

jf. Empandene.

Fairly common, may be seen running about the ground among

the grass during the warm part of the day.

“* Tsiqusa.”

21. MABUIA QUINQUETANIATA Licht.

a, 6. Hellenvale Farm, near Bulawayo.

c. Khami River, Oct. 1907.

d-g. Colleen Bawn Mine, Gwanda Dist., Dec. 1908.

h. Empandene.

Commonly found among boulders of granite kopjes.

22. MABUIA VARIA Peters.

a. Khami River, Oct. 1907.

6, c. Colleen Bawn Mine, Gwanda Dist., Dec. 1908. .

d. Kmpandene.

Found only on the rocks and on granite kopjes.

23. Masuia striata Peters.

a-d. Bulawayo.

e, f. Rhodes’ Park, Matopos, April 1908.

Usually seen on the walls of buildings, in the sun, catching

flies. Very common at Bulawayo.

“ Umbankwa.”

24, LyGosoMA SUNDEVALLI A. Smith.

a. Bulawayo, 13 Sept. 1907.

RHIPTOGLOSSA.

25, CHAMALEON DILEPIS Leach.

25 A, CHAMELEON QUILENSIS Bocage (parvilobus Bler.).

Common, though not often seen on account of their assimilative

coloration to the surroundings.

““ Unwabu.”

1909. ] AND REPTILES OF MATABELELAND. 595

OPHIDIA.

26. TYPHLOPS DELALANDI D. & B.

a, 6. Bulawayo, 20 Oct. 1907.

27. TypHLors MucRusoO Peters.

a, b. Bulawayo.

c, d. Matopos.

Var. VARIUS.

e-l. Bulawayo.

Both varieties are very common at Bulawayo.

‘“ TInyorka umshlaba.”

28. GLAUCONIA SCUTIFRONS Peters.

a-h. Bulawayo.

“ Tnsunula.”

29. PyTHON sEBz Gmel.

a. Fort Usher, Matopos.

6. Springvale Farm, 16 miles $.E. of Bulawayo.

c. Syringa.

Commonly found in the hilly country.

“ Tnshlatu.”

30. Boopon LinEAtTUS D. & B.

a-m. Bulawayo.

nm. Shangani River, Nov. 1907.

o. Gwamayaya River, Nov. 1907.

31. LycopHrpium CAPENSE A. Smith.

a-c. Bulawayo.

d. Metetsi.

The Bulawayo examples represent form A of the British Museum

Catalogue, while the specimen from Metetsi agrees with B.

32. SIMOCEPHALUS CAPENSIS A, Smith.

a. Bulawayo, 13 Dee. 1907.

6. Filabusi.

“ Tnyanda izulu.”

33. PsEuDASPIS CANA Linn.

a. Yg. Bulawayo, Jan. 1908.

34, CHLOROPHIS IRREGULARIS Leach.

a. Victoria Falls, 16 Sept. 1908.

35. DAsyPELTIS SCABRA Linn.

a, 6. Bulawayo.

4]*

596 ON BATRACHIANS AND REPTILES OF MATABELELAND. [ May 11,

36. TARBOPHIS SEMIANNULATUS A. Smith.

a. Bulawayo.

37. LeproprrRA HoTAMBa@IA Laur.

a. Mazeppa Mine, Gwanda, 1 Nov. 1907.

38. TRIMERORHINUS TRITENIATUS Gthr.

a-k. Bulawayo.

Fairly common in the neighbourhood of Bulawayo.

“¢ Umshlwazi.”

39. PSAMMOPHIS SUBTHNIATUS Peters.

a. Bulawayo, 18 Sept. 1907.

6. Railway Terminus, Matopos, 6 July, 1907.

The latter was caught in the act of swallowing a lizard

(Agama sp.).

40. PSAMMOPHIS SIBILANS Linn.

a, 6. Bulawayo, 5 Aug. 1908.

c, Swena’s, Gwamayaya River, 23 Nov. 1907.

d. Near Gwamayaya River, 24 Nov. 1907.

4], 'THELOTORNIS KIRTLANDI Hallow.

a. Bulawayo, 21 May, 1907.

6b. Khami River, 21 April, 1900.

c,d. Empandene, Aug. 1908.

“ Ukotikoti.”

These specimens seem to combine characters of divisions A and

B of the Brit. Mus. Catalogue, having the heads distinctly marked

and the black blotches on the necks present.

42. DispHoLipus Typus A. Smith.

a-e. Bulawayo.

“ TIndlondlo.”

43. APARALLACTUS CAPENSIS A. Smith.

a. Bulawayo.

44, KLAPECHIS GUENTHERI Bocage.

a. Bulawayo.

b. Deka, about 50 miles south of Victoria Falls.

45, Nata HAIE Linn.

a—b. Bulawayo.

c. Springvale Farm.

d. Railway Terminus, Matopos.

Blackish-brown examples, ““C” of the Brit. Mus. Catalogue,

are by far the most common, and the natives call them

“Tmamba.” This name is used by the Zulus for Dendraspis

1909.] THE SECRETARY ON ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 597

angusticeps and it is evident that the Matabele, who are of Zulu

descent and migrated from Zululand some 50 years ago, have

mistaken the dark variety of Vaie haie for that species.

Var. ANNULIFERA, Peters.

e. Bulawayo.

J (portion of skin). 15 miles south of Bulawayo.

“ Tlunga.”

46. NAIA NIGRICOLLIS Reinh.

a-c. Bulawayo.

d. Mazeppa Mine, Gwanda.

e, f. Deka.

I know of several instances here of this species spitting at

people who have attacked it.

“ Tpimpi.”

47, ASPIDELAPS scuraTuS A. Smith.

a. Empandene, Aug. 1908.

48. CAUSUS DEFILIPPII Jan.

a. Bulawayo, 9 Dec. 1907.

49, Brivis ARIETANS Merr.

a. Bulawayo.

Very common.

“ Tbululu.”

50. Brris cAuDALIS A. Smith.

a, b. Bulawayo.

May 25, 1909.

Dr. S. F. Harmer, M.A., F.R.S., Vice-President,

in the Chair.

The Secretary read the following report on the additions

made to the Society's Menagerie during the month of April

SOS) B=

The number of registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie

during the month of April last was 243. Of these 116 were

acquired by presentation, 15 by purchase, 91 were received on

deposit, 6 in exchange, and 15 were born in the Gardens.

598 MR. J. LEWIS BONHOTE ON HYBRID DUCKS. [May 25,

The number of departures during the same period, by death

and removals, was 161.

Amongst the additions special attention may be directed

to :-—

One Burchell’s Zebra (Hquus burchelli) 3, from S. Africa,

presented by F. A. R. Zurcher, Esq., on April 1st.

One Eland (Taurotragus oryx) §, born in the Menagerie on

April 3rd.

One Cape Ant-bear (Orycteropus capensis), from S. Africa,

purchased on April 17th.

One Black-fronted Bulbul (Pycnonotus nigricans); one Red-

capped Lark (Zephrocorys cinerea), presented ; and two Levaillant’s

Barbets (Zrachyphonus cafer), new to the Collection, one Martial

Hawk-EKagle (Spizaétus bellicosus), deposited with other 8S. African

Birds by Major Boyd Horsbrugh, F.Z.S., on April 15th.

Mr. J. Lewis Bonhote exhibited an example of a tetragen duck,

which he had bred in his Aviaries, containing Wild Duck

(Anas boschas), Spotbill (Anas pecilorhyncha), Australian Duck

(Anas superciliosa), and Pintail (Dajfila acuta). This bird was of

the F, generation, 2. e., it had been bred from brother and sister

and was remarkable in that, to all outward appearances, it was

almost indistinguishable from a pure bred Wild Mallard.

According to Mendel’s Law it was to be expected in theory that

such a bird should appear, but in practice the chance of all the

Mallard characters appearing in any one individual was very

remote, and the fact that they had all appeared in this bird was a

striking confirmation of the truth of Mendel’s Law even in a very

complicated case.

The only difference to be noted between this bird and the pure-

bred Mallard was the rather more defined and Pintail-like vermi-

culations to the flank-feathers.

Mr. Bonhote also exhibited a pair of pentagens of the F,

generation. These contained the blood of the following species:

Anas boschas, A. pecilorhyncha, A. superciliosa, A. melleri, and

Dafila acuta. As yet they showed no tendency to infertility, but

on the contrary proved more fertile than several less complicated

crosses. The matter had become too much involved to draw any

deductions from their plumage, but it would be noticed that the

Mallard seemed to predominate. They were interesting, however,

as showing to what extent cross-breeding could be carried among

certain species, the hybrids proving fertile to at least the 4th

generation since the last cross with a pure species.

Many hybrids, as was well known, were unfertile, but with those

that proved fertile in the first generation, infertility was generally

reached in the 3rd generation (F,)—that is to say the 3rd

generation from the last cross with a pure species ; in some cases,

1909.] ON THE PHOTOGRAPH OF A YOUNG STAG FROM SIKHIM. 599

however, the F, generation proved fertile, but as yet no young of

the F, generation had been reared.

Infertility was usually accompanied by loss of colour.

Pedigree of birds exhibited. —

WES SS) IP x Wil

MS x PM

PMS x Z MxS PxXM

| salle :

PF, PMSZ xX PMSZ X Mell. M MS <x PM

| els eke

1d, 205 X 208 209X210 M* PMSZ Mell. x PMS

| ue

| | | a

F233 i 231 232 X 227 | ~pMsz Mell.

| |

F, Unfertile. 6 young. 5 gens. 6. 5 gens. 2.

None reared.

* Apparently.

(Those underlined were the specimens exhibited.)

Mr. L. Harding Cox, F.Z.S., exhibited a living specimen of

the Amblystome or transformed Axolotl, and drew atteution to

the following distinguishing points of the terrestrial batrachian,

viz.: alteration in dentition, possession of lungs and eyelids,

absence of gills and crest, and variation in colour.

Mr. Lydekker exhibited the photograph (text-fig. 182, p. 600)

of a young Stag from Sikhim, now living in Nepal, which had

been lent by Mr. David Ezra. This photograph Mr. Lydekker

believed to represent the Shou (Cervus affinis); and if so, it

was the first picture of that deer which had been submitted

to the Society since Brian Hodgson’s time. The stag depicted

is noticeable on account of its large ears, thick mane, large

rump-patch, and rather short, thin tail. It is in winter coat;

and the general colour is approximately the same dark brown

as that of the Hangul (0. cashmirianus), while the rump-patch

is white, as in the latter. Im the large size of this rump-

patch, as well as in the big ears, the Sikhim deer is, however,

decidedly Wapiti-like.

600 MR. R. LYDEKKER ON THE SKULL-CHARACTERS [ May 25,

The photograph agrees fairly with a picture of a young stag in

Hodgson’s sketches, which is probably also in the winter coat.

A sketch of a stag in the same series is redder, with no distinct

rump-patch, and may represent the summer coat.

Text-fig. 182.

Young Shou Stag, from a photograph lent by Mr. D. Ezra. _

The following papers were read :-—

1. On the Skull-Characters in the Southern Sea-Hlephant.

By R. LyDEKKER *.

[Received May 15, 1999. |

(Text-figures 183-185.)

The distribution of the Southern Sea-elephant (for which,

following Sir W. H. Flower t, I retam the name Macrorhinus

leoninus, despite the objection that may be raised against the

origin of the generic designation) suggests the existence of several

local races. The species occurs, for instance, on the island of San

Juan off the coast of Chile, and in the Falklands; and itis quite

* Communicated by permission of the Trustees of the British Museum.

+ Proc. Zool. Soc. 1881, pp. 145 et seqq.

1909. ] IN THE SOUTHERN SEA-ELEPHANY. 601

conceivable that the same race may inhabit these two localities.

On the other hand, it is scarcely likely that Elephant-seals would

migrate from the Falklands to Tristan d’Acunha on the African

side of the South Atlantic ; 3 and it is therefore probable that the

representatives of the species from the latter island are racially

distinct. The same remark will apply to the Elephant-seals of

the Kerguelen, Crozet, and Heard groups in the south of the

Indian Ocean; while yet another race is probably represented

by those inhabiting the Macquarie and Chatham groups in the

New Zealand seas.

The idea that there may be several local forms of Sea-elephant

is by no means new. It was adopted, for instance, by Dr. J.

E. Gray on page 180 of the fifth volume of “ Griffith’s Cuvier,”

1827; the Macquarie Island form being designated JZ. proboscidea,

while the name JJacrorhina patagonica was proposed for the

Falkland race, and Desmarest’s titles ansoni and byroni were used

respectively for the Sea-elephants from Juan Fernandez and the

Tinian Islands, the latter being in the Ladrone group, north of

Australia. Again, in the MWonatsbericht of the Berlin Academy

for 1875, p. 395, Dr. Karl Peters proposed the name falclandica

for the Falkland, and kerguelensis for the Kerguelen race.

As regards these various names, it may be mentioned that the

Phoca leoninina of Linneeus is based on a specimen brought from

Juan Fernandez by Lord Anson in 1744, which was exhibited for

many years in the British Museum. All that now remains of this

type-specimen is the anterior portion of the jaws, which is pre-

served in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons, where it

was transferred in 1809 *. The specimen is too incomplete to give

any idea of the distinctive skull-characters of the typical Juan

Fernandez race.

Of this race, namely J. leoninus typicus, Peron’s Phoca probos-

cidea and Desmarest’s ansoni are synonyms.

With regard to Gray’s patagonct, this was founded on a young

skull figur ed by F. Cuvier t, which is stated by Gray to be convex

with the brain- cavity | more extended and the nasal region shorter

than in “J/, peronti,” while the cutting-teeth number only 4.

This, owing to the immaturity of the type, T regard as an in-

gndiniont dieses iption. On the other hand, he. falclandica of

Peters, based on the specimen figured in Pernetty’s “‘ Histoire

dun Voyage aux Isles Malouines, “fait en 1763 et 1764, avec des

Observations sur le Détroit de Magellan et sur les Patagons,”

appears to be valid; and the name M1. falclandica is therefore

available for the Falkland Sea-elephant, if this be distinct from the

typical race. The J. kerguelensis of Peters cannot be regarded

as more than a nomen nudwm, and the same is the case with

Desmarest’s P. byroni, even if an Elephant-seal occurs in the

Ladrones. There is also the Phoca elephantina of Molina, but

* See Flower and Garson, “Cat. Osteol. Specimens, Mus. R. Coll. Surgeons,”

pt. 2, p. 217.

+ Mém. Mus. Paris, iv. pl. xiv. fig. 2

602 ~ MR. R. LYDEKKER ON THE SKULL-CHARACTERS [May 25,

this evidently relates to the Chilian species subsequently described

as IW. angustirostris.

Text-fig. 183.

Palatal aspect of skull of Male Falkland Sea-Elephant. About + nat. size.

From specimen in Museum of R. College of Surgeons.

After this much of introduction, I turn to the proper subject

of this communication, which relates to skulls of the southern Sea-

1909. ] IN THE SOUTHERN SEA-ELEPHANT. $03

elephant now in the British Museum. These include two males

from Macquarie Island presented by the Hon. Walter Rothschild,

a male from Chatham Island obtained by Professor H. O. Forbes,

a female from the ‘“‘ Antarctic Seas” obtained during the voyage

of the ‘Erebus’ and the ‘Terror,’ and a male from the Crozet

group. With these, by the courtesy of Dr. A. Keith, I have been

able to compare an old male skull from the Falklands preserved

in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons, being the one

on which the above-mentioned paper by Sir W. H. Flower is

based. ;

In comparing these skulls I find that the most satisfactory

distinctive characters are afforded by the palatal surface, and it

is to this aspect that attention will be chiefly restricted.

Great difference obtains in regard to the proportions of the

length to the width of the skull in the different local forms, as is

shown in the following table :—

Falkland. Macquarie. Crozet. Chatham.

Basal length ......... 20 ins. 18ins. 165ins. 16:3 ins.

Maximum width ... 15 14 14 1le7

Length of palate ... 11 9°5 9 8D

WihdthvOneedonme -e4. Wc 6°3 6°5 Oak

Taking first the Falkland race, which, as already mentioned,

may be identical with JZ. l. typicus, but which it will be convenient

o call MW, 1. falclandicus, the skull (text-fig. 183) is characterised by

its relative length and narrowness. The palate is also long and

narrow, nearly flat in the palatine region, but becoming suddenly

hollowed on the line between the 4th and 5th cheek-teeth. The

palatines themselves form a long median suture; the process of

the pterygoid is small; and the premaxille are long, and

V-shaped. As additional features may be mentioned the relative

narrowness of the condyles, and the circumstance that the lower

border of the anterior zygomatic root projects considerably behind

the posterior aperture of the maxillary foramen.

A second skull in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons

from the Falklands agrees in essential characters with the above.

Turning to the two Macquarie skulls, which are practically

identical, we find the general proportions not very different from

those of the Falkland specimen, but the palate (text-fig. 184,

p. 604) is much more hollowed *, and this throughout its whole

extent. Then, again, the inter-palatine suture is shorter and the

pterygoid process much larger; while the condyles are wider, and

the lower border of the anterior zygomatic roof does not project

behind the hind aperture of the maxillary foramen.

For the Macquarie race, as typified by the figured skull (B. M.

No. 1.6.22.1), I propose the name I. /. macquariensis.

The natural supposition would be that the Sea-elephant from

the Chatham Islands would be identical with the one inhabiting

the Macquaries ; and this appears to be borne out by a skull of

** T use the term hollowed in place of vaulted as being more convenient.

604 MR. R, LYDEKKER ON THE SKULL-CHARACTERS | May 25,

the former in the British Museum (No. 94.11.17.1), which is that

of a young male. Its dimensions are given in the fourth column

of the table. Thisskull agrees in general characters with the two

Text-fig, 184.

Palatal aspect of skull of Male Macquarie Sea-Elephant. About + nat. size.

From a specimen in the British Museum.

Macquarie specimens, but differs by the much less deep incision of

the central portion of the supraoccipital. Since, however, this is

1909. ] IN THE SOUTHERN SEA-ELEPHANT. 605

a feature which may apparently be due to immaturity, I associate

the specimen with the Macquarie race.

Text-fig. 185.

Palatal aspect of skull of Male Crozet Sea-Klephant. About + nat. size.

From a specimen in the British Museum.

Coming to the Crozet skull (text-fig. 185), this is shown by the

table of measurements to be broadly distinguished from the two

preceding races by its shortness and width; the maximum

zygomatic width being equal to that of the skull of the Macquarie

race which is 13 inch longer, while the palatal width of the Crozet

606 SKULL-CHARACTERS IN THE SOUTHERN SEA-ELEPHANT. [ May 25,

actually exceeds that of the Macquarie skull. To this difference

may be added the almost complete flatness of the palate, the

longer inter-palatine suture, the much more slender’ pterygoid

process, the U-shaped palatal aspect of the premaxille, and the

extremely narrow condyles.

For this race as typified by the figured skull I suggest the

name MV. 1. crosetensis, of which Peters’ undefined J/. kerguelensis

is probably a synonym. The immature ‘Erebus’ and ‘Terror’

skull, said to be that of a female, may belong to this race; the

greater prominence of the tympanic region as compared with

the Crozet specimen, being not improbably a feature due to

immaturity.

As the result of the foregoing comparisons, our information with

regard to local races of the Southern Sea-elephant, as definable

from skull-characters (and, with the present material, I can find

no others of any value), may be summarised as follows :—

1. Macrorhinus leoninus typicus. Juan Fernandez.

Skull unknown. A

2. M.1. falelandicus. Falkland Islands. Perhaps inseparable

from typical race.

Skull long and narrow; palate flat behind and hollowed in

front; palatine suture long; pterygoid process small; palatal

aspect of premaxilla V-shaped.

3. M.1. macquariensis. Macquarie and (?) Chatham Islands.

Skull of the same general type as in the preceding, but the

palate markedly hollow throughout, the palatine suture shorter,

and the pterygoid process longer. Condyles wide.

4. M. crosetensis. Crozet and (?) Kerguelen and Heard

Islands.

Skull short and wide, with the palate almost flat, the pterygoid

process very slender, the premaxille U-shaped, and the condyles

narrow. ‘This race is said to be the largest of all.

In addition to these there may be a distinct race inhabiting

Tristan d’Acunha. I know nothing of the Sea-elephants of the

South Shetlands.

Although the Californian Sea-elephant (J/. angustirostris) does

not properly come within the purview of the present communi-

cation, | may take the opportunity of mentioning that the fore

part of a skull at present in the British Museum shows such

difference in the palatal region from all the races of the Southern

form, that on this ground alone the Southern and the Northern

Sea-elephants appear entitled to be regarded as_ specifically

distinct.

[Since this paper was read Mr. Rothschild has informed me

that he has evidence to show that the San Juan and Chilian Sea-

elephants are identical, and that migration formerly took place

between the San Juan and the Guadaloupe. Island animals. If

this be so, L presume angustirostris would be regarded as a

synonym of leoninus, while falclandicus would become the

substantive name for the Southern species. |

1909. ] THE SKULL OF A BLACK BEAR FROM EASTERN TIBET. 607

2. On the Skull of a Black Bear from Eastern Tibet, with a

Note on the Formosan Bear. By R. LyDEKKER *.

[Received May 1, 1909.]

(Text-figures 186 & 187.)

On page 198 of the ‘Fauna of British India: Mammalia,’

Dr. Blanford states that the Himalayan Black Bear is unknown

in Tibet ; and it is for that reason he employed for the species

the name Ursus torquatus instead of U. tibetanus (or thibetanus,

as it is spelt by F. Cuvier).

The British Museum has, however, the skull of a female of

this species from the mountains of Sze-chuen, which was collected

by Berezowsky and obtained by exchange with the Tring Museum

in 1896. This, of course, is no proof that the species occurs in

Eastern Tibet itself, although it affords a strong presumption

that such may be the case. Decisive evidence on this point 1s,

however, afforded by the skull and skin of an old and presumably

male bear of this species shot by Captain. Malcolm McNeill, some

distance to the westward of Ta-chien, in Eastern Tibet, which

have been submitted to me for determination. The skull has been

secured for the Museum. The skin, which is in winter coat,

differs from that of any Himalayan specimens of U. torquatus

that have since come under my notice—and I have handled a

good many—by the greater length and softness of the hair. The

skull (text-fig. 186 A, p. 608), as compared with a full-grown

and probably male, but rather younger, Himalayan specimen of

the same approximate length (text-fig. 186 B), is characterised

by the much smaller size of the cheek-teeth, as will be apparent

from the following measurements and the accompanying text-

figures.

Himalayan. Tibetan.

Basal length of skull’ ...-...22..----2.:.-: NOUS ams, 79) aE

Maximum zygomatic width of do. .. 6°5 6-7

Length of last 3 upper cheek-teeth ... 2°6 2°13

re cag WYRE WMOVENE syeckoocoere 1153} 0:98

Warclislate.;| %;, a Be eT Tose 0-7 0°6

beneath) 5) esilowereheelk-—teethy a2 sf 2°18

Die er Lowiersmno lates ryan. aro 0°8 0°61

AWaiGlila. Sea ean ep bist a 5 AR 0°6 0-42

‘Length of penultimate lower molar... 0°9 0:8

In this table it will be noticed that the Tibetan skull is rather

broader, both actually and proportionately, than the Himalayan

specimen. As regards the cheek-teeth the most important feature,

* Communicated by permission of the Trustees of the British Museum.

608 MR. Rk. LYDEKKER ON THE SKULL [May 25,

next to the conspicuously smaller size of the last three, is the

narrower form of the third lower molar of the Tibetan skull

which consequently, as shown in text-figure 187 A, appears to be

both longer and narrower than the corresponding tooth in the

Himalayan specimen.

Text-fig, 186.

Palatal aspect of skulls of Ursus torquatus (A), U. t. macneilli (B), and U. t. formosanus (C). About + nat. size.

In the skull of a female Black Bear from Assam recently offered

to the Museum the cheek-teeth are of practically the same size

1909. | OF A BLACK BEAR FROM EASTERN TIBET. 609

as in the Tibetan specimen, but the palate is much wider, as is

shown by the following measurements :—

Tibet. Assam.

Length of six upper cheek-teeth ...... 3:9 ins, 3:9 ins.

es last 3 upper cheek-teeth ... 2:1 2:0

Width of palate between m2 ......... 1°5 ley

This relative narrowness of the palate in the Tibet skull is

borne out by the above-mentioned female skull from Sze-chuen,

in which the length of the space occupied by the last three cheek-

teeth is 2°3 ins., while the palatal width between m 2 is only 1°25.

As the Sze-chuen skull certainly belongs to the same race as the

one from Tibet, and as its teeth are rather larger than those of the

latter (in which the palatal width between m 2 is 1°55 inches), it

indicates that the narrowness of the palate in the female is quite

as important a feature of the Tibetan race as is the small size of

the cheek-teeth and the relative narrowness of the third large

molar in the male. In both sexes the palate is distinctly vaulted,

whereas in the typical Himalayan race it is nearly flat.

Text-fig. 187,

A. B. C.

Palatal aspect of the lower jaws of the same three skulls. About 4 nat. size.

Letters as in text-fig. 186.

These features seem to justify the recognition of a distinct

Tibetan race of U. torquatus, for which the designation U. t.

macneilli will be appropriate, the male skull forming the subject

of the present paper being the type.

Now that the Himalayan Black Bear has been shown to occur

in Tibet and Sze-chuen, it might be argued that the time has come

for the re-instatement of the name tibetanus ; but since the typical

Proc, Zoo, Soc,—1909, No. X LIT, 42

MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE __[ May 20,

race is Himalayan, it appears to me that it will be best to follow

Dr. Blanford’s usage and retain the name U. torquatus. As I

have on a previous occasion shown that the Bruang (U. malayanus)

ranges into Sze-chuen *, we have now evidence of the occurrence in

that province of two species of Black Bears.

Before concluding, I may refer to the type skull of U. formosanus

of Swinhoe +, which is contained in the British Museum Col-

lection (No. 70.2.10.9). That this skull indicates a bear specifically

identical with U. torquatus appears to me indisputable—in the

sense in which I regard species. At the same time, it is so much

wider and shorter than the skull of U. torquatus typicus that it

must, without hesitation, be regarded as representing a distinct

race, with the designation U. t. formosanus. This will be apparent

from the following measurements :—

typicus. formosanus.

Basalvleneth rot steals sj. cece cece mr 10°15 ins. 9-1 ins.

Maximum zygomatic width of do. ... 6°5 6:95

Length of last 3 upper cheek-teeth ... 2°6 2°25

The Formosan skull (text-fig. 186, C) is distinguished, moreover,

by the absence of any distinct bevelling away of the outer side of the

talon of the last cheek-tooth, which in consequence has nearly parallel

sides. The last lower molar (text-fig. 187, C) is broad and short,

so that it appears more rounded than the corresponding tooth of

typicus, and thus very different from that of macneilli. In its

shortened and wider form the skull of U. ¢. formosanus makes a

slight approximation to that of U. malayanus, which, however, is

broadly distinguished by its still greater expansion, the excessive

size of the palate, and the smaller cheek-teeth, more especially the

last.

3. The Anatomy of the Olfactory Organ of Teleostean Fishes.

By R. H. Burne, M.A., F.Z.S.

[Received May 10, 1909. ]

(Text-figures 188-213.)

The coarse anatomy of the olfactory organ in the Teleostean

Fishes seems to have received too little attention. Reference to

the leading old and modern text-books (Milne-Edwards, Owen,

Giinther, Cambridge Natural History, Parker and Haswell,

Wiedersheim, Gegenbaur, &c.) leaves the general impression that

apart from a few isolated cases, the organ is remarkably constant

and consists of a pair of simple concavities upon the fore-part

of the face opening to the exterior by a pair of nostrils and each

containing a greap of olfactory laminz arranged rosette-wise

* Vide P.Z. 8. 1906, p. 907.

+ Ibid. 1864, p. 380.

1909.] OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 611

above the termination of the olfactory nerve, such variation as

occurs being mainly confined to details of the nostrils.

Although this impression is no doubt in part due to the natural

tendency of text-books to lay too great stress upon the condition

found in the usual teaching type which in this case is generally

a Gadid, a study of the original papers dealing with this particular

organ shows that the work done upon it has been neither large

in amount nor particularly extensive in scope.

The following is, I think, a fair statement of the present state

of our knowledge of the coarse anatomy of the Teleostean Nose,

and of the chief sources from which it is derived :—

Owen * and Milne-Edwards f mention that in the Mackerel

and Anarrhichas there are certain accessory nasal sacs

in connection with the true olfactory chamber which

act as compressible reservoirs by means of which, as

in the case of the pituitary cecum of the Lamprey, a

current of water is driven through the olfactory

chamber by the movements of the jaws and opercula in

respiration.

1876. Sophie Pereyaslawzeff ¢ published a preliminary paper on

the olfactory organ of Fishes, and in it described in

detail the coarse and fine anatomy of Solea impar and

Lophius piscatorius. The full paper seems never to

have appeared—a matter for regret, for from the list

of genera and species mentioned in the preliminary

paper as the material upon which the work was done,

it would evidently have been a valuable contribution to

the subject.

1884, Blaue § in a most important paper on the olfactory mem-

brane in Fishes and Amphibia gives short descriptions

of the coarse anatomy of the olfactory pit and rosette

in several species of Teleostei. The descriptions so far

as they go are good, but as they are incidental to the

true subject of the paper and only deal with the anatomy

so far as it 1s necessary for the purpose in hand, they

are naturally imperfect. However, in this paper there

is a certain amount of information upon the form of the

olfactory chamber and rosette in Belone, Haxocetus,

Trigla, Hsox, Umbra, Cottus, Gobius, Gadus.

1887. Wiedersheim |! writes a full and interesting account of a

series of stages in the degeneration of the olfactory

organ of Plectognaths, tracing its transformation from

a simple concavity of the normal type to the condition

of a split tentacle in which the olfactory membrane is

fully exposed. The species described are Tetrodon

* Anat. Vertebrates, vol. i. p. 329.

+ Lecons sur la Physiol. T. xi. 1874, p. 475.

t Inaug.-dissert. Zitirich, 1876.

§ Arch. f. Anat. 1884, p. 241.

|| Festschrift vy, Kolliker, 1887, p. 73.

42%

612 MR. R. H, BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [May 25,

nigropunctatus, T'. immaculatus, T. papwa, T. pardalis,

and Diodon maculatus.

The same subject has been treated by Tate Regan

(Proc. Zool. Soc. 1902, vol. 11. p. 292).

1889, Bateson * in a paper on the sense-organs and senses of

Fishes, besides some highly interesting physiological

notes which will be referred to more fully later on,

gives details of the structure of the nostrils and olfactory

rosette in various common species of Fishes, pointing

out (1) the tubular character of the anterior nostril in

the few fishes that hunt their food by scent (JJotella,

Cobitis, Solea, Conger, Anguilla, Lepidogaster), (2) the

valvular mechanism of the posterior nostril in certain

Flat-fishes, (3) the main types of structure of the

rosette—elongated (Eels), oval (the majority of Fishes),

or circular (Cotéws), and an exceptional type in which

the leaflets are arranged in parallel series in a single

row (Pleuronectes, Hippoglossus).

1894, Solger Tt briefly describes the olfactory chamber of the

Stickleback, stating that the nostril (as in many

Pharyngognaths) is single and that the olfactory

chamber proper is extended downwards to the buccal

membrane by an accessory sac lined with indifferent

epithelium and by its alternate expansion and con-

traction synchronously with the respiratory movements

causing water to flow in and out of the true olfactory

part of the cavity.

1899. Kyle + describes in several species of Pleuronectids (Hippo-

glossus, Pleuronectes, hombus, Solea, Cynoglossus)

accessory nasal sacs in connection with the true olfactory

chamber and lays stress on the fact that in these Fishes,

with the exception of Solea and Cynoglossus, the sacs

secrete mucus and are not simple reservoirs for producing

water-currents by their alternate expansion and contrac-

tion. He mentions, however, (but without description)

that such simple reservoir sacs do occur in several

other families (Blenniidz, one sac; Labridz, one sac ;

Scorpeenide, two sacs), and concludes generally that

accessory sacs are confined to semi-sedentary as opposed

to migratory Fishes.

He further describes, and this forms an important

part of the paper, a direct and apparently normal

connection between the accessory sacs and the mouth

in a single specimen of Cynoglossus.

In addition to the above papers which deal entirely or mainly

with the nose, descriptions of this organ in isolated genera are

* Journ. Marine Biol. Ass. vol. 1. 1889, p. 229.

+ Zcits. Wiss. Zool. Bd. lvii. 1894, p. 186.

+ Journ, Linn, Soe, vol, xxvii, 1899, p, 541

1909. ] OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 613

probably to be found scattered about in monographs, dealing

with special genera. The only one, however, to which J am able

to refer is the detailed description of the olfactory organ of the

Plaice by Cole and Johnston *.

Some few years ago when a Catalogue of the Sense-organs

in the Museum of the College of Surgeons was in preparation,

my attention was directed to this subject of the anatomy of the

Fish nose, and from the few dissections then made it soon became

apparent that variations upon the fundamental ground plan are

far more numerous and general than the ordinary sources of

information would lead one to suppose. Since then I have

collected notes upon this subject, as occasion offered, and in doing

so have kept four main objects in view :—

(1) To see how far the fundamental part of the olfactory

organ (a concavity in the face, containing an olfactory

rosette) is constant in its form and in its position relative

to the bones of the skull.

(2) To see how far the variations observed accord in their

occurrence with authoritative systems of classification and

so are to be regarded as of taxonomic importance.

(3) To explain so far as possible the action of such variations

of structure as appear to be of functional importance.

(4) To see if any connection can be traced between variations

in the nose and the general habits of the Fish.

The Fishes dissected belong to 32 families and 51 genera,

representing to some degree most of the larger divisions of the

order. They are mostly the common Fishes of the market,

supplemented by some exotic forms from the College stores,

for the identification of which I am much indebted to Mr.

Boulenger, F.R.S. In the following descriptions the Fishes have

been arranged in order according to Boulenger’s system in the

Cambridge Natural History, with the exception of the Ana-

canthini which have been taken first, out of their proper place

in order that the simple unspecialised nose of the Haddock may

serve as a standard of comparison for the rest.

ANAGANTHINI.

GADID&.

Gadus weglefinus (text-figs. 188 & 189).

The nostrils (text-fig. 188, A, p. 614) lie in front of the orbit

in an area of soft skin bounded above by the nasal and frontal

bones and below by the lachrymal. A line passing through both

slopes from in front downwards and backwards at an angle of

about 45° to the horizontal. The anterior nostril is circular and

bordered by a low tubular lip elevated posteriorly to form a hood-

like flap, by which in forward progression water would be deflected

* L. M. B. C. Memoirs, No. viii. Pleuronectes. 1901.

614 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [May 25,

into the nostril. The posterior nostril is larger than the anterior

and of more oval shape; it is bordered by a low lip. Between the

two is a narrow bridge of skin. The nostrils open into either

end of a pit (olfactory chamber) which is oval in surface-view but

semicircular in vertical section (text-fig. 188, B). The cavity

of the pit is almost completely filled by a series of leaflets (the

Text-fig. 188 *.

ik .

SS zane

SE AT TA

% SN

Gadus eglefinus.

A. The relation of the nostrils to the superficial bones of the face.

B. Diagram of olfactory chamber in longitudinal section.

olfactory laminee) arranged radially along the sides and’ posterior

end of a linear axis which in front is attached to the anterior lip

of the anterior nostril. The lamine are attached to the axis and to

the floor and a considerable extent of the side walls of the olfactory

* For explanation of abbreviations in the text-figures see p. 663.

1909. | OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 615

chamber. The free edge of each is produced in the middle (as

in Elasmobranchs) to form a “linguiform process” and can thus

be conveniently divided into mesial, central, and peripheral

segments.

Beyond the area covered by the rosette the lining membrane

of the chamber is smooth. The epithelial wall of the olfactory

chamber is separated by a layer of loose connective tissue from

an outer dense fibrous capsule continuous with the general

subdermal tissue of the head, the whole being to a considerable

extent surrounded by lymph spaces. The entire organ lies in

a hollow in the ethmoid (text-fig. 189) just above and behind the

ethmo-palatine articulation and is in no direct relation with

either the buccal membrane, jaws, or Jaw muscles.

Text-fig. 189.

Gadus eglefinus.

The relation of the nostrils to the deeper bones of the face.

The olfactory tract passes through the skull by a foramen in

the lateral ethmoid below the anterior end of the frontal scute

and at once joins the olfactory bulb which is connected to the

deep surface of the rosette by short nerves.

In the Cod (Gadus morrhwa), Bib (G. luscus), and Whiting

616 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [May 25,

(G@. merlangus), the olfactory organ differs only in minute details

from that of the Haddock. For instance, in the Whiting the

nostrils are relatively further apart and smaller, and the flap

upon the hinder edge of the anterior nostril is not quite so high.

Motella tricirrata.

The olfactory organ, though formed upon the same plan as in

the above described Gadids, differs in the following particulars :—

The nostrils are relatively smaller, more widely separated and

situated nearer the extremity of the snout, the anterior being not

Text-fig. 190.

“PN.

E.MX.L ER.

' OL.N

' 1

Motella tricirrata.

A. Shape and position of the olfactory chamber.

B. Diagram of cross section of the rosette.

far removed from the upper lip. The valvular posterior border

of the anterior nostril is modified to form a long tentacle, a

circumstance that no doubt partly explains the forward position

of the nostril. The olfactory chamber and rosette have a long

oval form in agreement with the greater distance between the

nostrils. The peripheral segments of the leaflets of the rosette

1909.] OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 617

are but slightly developed, leaving smooth an appreciable area of

the floor of the olfactory chamber around the rosette.

The relations of the olfactory chamber to the skull are also

peculiar (text-fig. 190). It lies above the head of the maxilla, and

is thus far in advance of its usual position in the hollow of the

ethmoid, although the foramen in which the olfactory bulb lies

perforates the lateral ethmoid at the usual spot. An olfactory

nerve of unusual length is in consequence interposed between the

bulb and the rosette *.

The abnormal position of the olfactory chamber may be partly

explained, as suggested above, by the fact that the tentacle

developed in connection with the anterior nostril would be most

advantageously placed near the extremity of the snout, but it is

also in part due to a shortening of the skull between the orbit

and the maxillary process of the palatine.

Merluccius vulgaris.

The nostrils occupy much the same position as in the Haddock,

but are set quite close together, like those of the Salmonide, which

in fact they closely resemble. The anterior nostril is circular, the

Text-fig. 191.

Merluccius vulgaris.

Position of olfactory chamber and nasal sac.

posterior nostril crescentic and embracing the anterior with its con-

cavity ; both are wide open. There is no upstanding flap upon the

hinder margin of the anterior nostril, but the integument between

the two is prolonged into the cavity of the olfactory chamber,

forming a curtain (as in the Salmonide) to conduct water

* Tt may be noted that here, and in all other cases observed, the olfactory nerve is

very considerably larger than the tract by which the bulb is connected to the brain.

618 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [ May 25,

entering through the anterior nostril into the heart of the

rosette.

The olfactory chamber occupies a similar position relative to

the bones of the skull, as in the Haddock, but slightly lower down,

so that its lower border rests upon the retractor of the maxilla

(text-fig. 191, p. 617). Its anterior part, ventral to the rosette, is

produced forward to form an accessory sac that passing forward

deep to the dorsal parts of the lachrymal bone dips beneath the

maxillary process of the palatine into the space included between

this bone, the head of the maxilla, and the vomer.

The cavity of the olfactory chamber and accessory nasal sac

was filled with an unusually large amount of mucus. Apart from

a mucus-secreting function, it seems highly probable from its

position that this nasal sac would act as an aspirator bulb, being

compressed both by the movements of the head of the maxilla

and by the swelling of the jaw muscles upon and near which it

lies. This action must, however, be slight at the best, for no

bubbles escaped from the nostrils when the jaws were forcibly

closed under water.

The rosette is circular and is composed of about 28 lamine,

each of which is transversely pleated and has a claw-like outline

due apparently to an exaggeration of the linguiform process and

the almost complete suppression of the peripheral segment.

Summary.

In the Anacanthini examined (Gadide) the olfactory organ

is of a simple type and shows great uniformity. It is, in brief,

a hemispherical depression, opening to the exterior by two

nostrils and containing a rosette of lamine for the lodgement

of the olfactory epithelium through which a current of water is

deflected during forward locomotion by an upstanding flap upon

the hinder border of the anterior nostril. The Hake stands

apart from the other examples not only on account of its nostrils

and rosette which are of a different, somewhat Salmonid, type,

but also by the possession of a well developed nasal sac accessory

to the true olfactory chamber. The modifications in the Rockling

are of minor importance brought about apparently by changes

external to the olfactory organ rather than in that organ itself.

MALACOPTERYGII.

SALMONID&.

Salmo salar.

The nostrils lie close together (text-fig. 192, A) upon a level with

the top of the eye and about halfway between it and the snout

the posterior in close connection with the central of the three

anterior circum-orbital scutes. Both are elongated dorso-ventrally,

the anterior being a narrow slit, the posterior more oval. The

1909. } OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 619

bridge of skin between the two is raised to form an upstanding

flap and is also prolonged into the nose cavity nearly to its floor

Text-fig. 192.

Salmo salar.

A. Position and form of nostrils, olfactory cavity, and nasal sac.

B. Diagram of nostrils, olfactory chamber, and nasal sac in longitudinal section.

(text-fig. 192, B), forming a pliant curtain to conduct water entering

by the anterior nostril through the laminz of the rosette.

The olfactory chamber ovcupies the usual position in a hollow

620 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [May 25,

in the ethmoid cartilage, but its parts posterior to the rosette

are extended beneath the three anterior scutes of the circum-

orbital ring, forming a laterally flattened accessory nasal sac pro-

longed above and below along the anterior contour of the orbit

(text-fig. 192, p.619). This accessory sac is bounded by the orbital

ring externally, by the ethmoid and palatine bones and cartilages

internally, by the adipose eyelid posteriorly, and by a pad of

fat lying on the buccal membrane in front. When the maxilla

is retracted towards the eye the cavity of this sac is compressed

by the pad of fat.

The rosette is attached to the floor of the olfactory chamber

directly beneath the nostrils, and is composed of from 12-14

transversely pleated claw-shaped lamine that radiate from a

short central raphé attached anteriorly to the front wall of the

anterior nostril.

The posterior lamine of the series are far larger than the

others and project freely into the posterior nostril.

Osmerus eperlanus.

The olfactory organ is in all essential points similar to that

of the Salmon, but when the mouth was closed forcibly under

water no air bubbles escaped from the nostril, as might have

been expected from the form and_ position of the accessory

cavities.

Coregonus oxyrhynchus.

The olfactory organ is essentially similar to that of the Salmon.

Text-fig. 193.

Coregonus oxyrhynchus.

Diagram of nostrils, olfactory chamber, and nasal sac in longitudina section.

V.,"valve.

The anterior nostril is, however, surrounded by an upstanding

1909. ] OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES, 621

conical lip and is separated by a deep gutter from the front edge

of the posterior nostril, which is raised to form a valve-like

flap that probably covers the posterior nostril in inspiration

(text-fig. 193).

CLUPEIDA,

Clupea harengus.

The nostrils are very similar in form, mutual relations, and

position to those of the Salmonide examined, particularly to

those of Coregonus. The olfactory cavity is also closely similar,

being produced towards the orbit to form an extensive though

laterally flattened sac, which is prolonged both above and below

the eye. The lower border of the sac is compressed by the upper

edge of the mandible when the mouth is closed.

Clupea sprattus does not differ from the Herring.

CHIROCENTRID&,

Chirocentrus dorab*.

The olfactory organ is essentially the same as in Clupea

allowing for alterations in the form of the cavity due to the

relative shortening of the space between the ethmo-palatine

articulation and the orbit. The olfactory Jamine are also less

strongly defined than in Clupea and sink more gradually at the

periphery of the rosette area into the general lining of the nasal

cavity.

Mormyrip2.

Mormyrus sp.

The nostrils lie about halfway between the eye and the snout

set obliquely, the posterior some few millimetres behind and

slightly below the anterior. Both are simple perforations, the

anterior minute and circular, the posterior larger and oval, with

a slightly swollen border.

The olfactory chamber is circular and laterally compressed ;

its floor (mesial surface) is completely covered by a circular

rosette. There are no accessory sacs.

The rosette consists of from 12-16 lamine radiating from a

well-marked median raphé connected in front with the anterior

lip of the anterior nostril. The individual lamine are low with

a swollen and gently convex free border.

Gymnarchus niloticus.

The olfactory organ is much the same as in Mormyrus though

its cavity is more elongated and has a considerable empty space

between the rosette and the posterior nostril (text-fig. 194). The

anterior nostril also is surrounded by a short tubular lip elevated

* For this specimen I am indebted to Col, C. E, Shepherd,

622 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [May 25,

behind to form a small valvular flap similar to that of the Gadids

and Carps.

Text-fig. 194.

Gymnarchus niloticus.

Olfactory organ, from the side.

Summary.

In the Malacopterygii examined, a distinction can be drawn

between the Mormyride and the other families. In the former

the olfactory organ is of a peculiarly simple type as regards

nostrils, cavity and rosette. In the latter (Salmonide, Clupeide,

Chirocentride) there is great uniformity and a relatively high

degree of complexity. The nostrils are similar in form, position,

and detailed relation to the bones of the circum-orbital ring and

are modified, though imperfectly, to direct a current of water

through the leaves of the rosette. There is, however (except

possibly in Coregonus), no means of confining the inflow to the

anterior nostril. The olfactory chamber is extended by an

accessory sac with a similar form and position in all the genera

examined and directly affected by the movements of the jaws.

The laminz of the rosette though few in number are large and of

characteristic claw-like shape.

OSTARIOPHYSI.

CYPRINIDA.

Tinca vulgaris (text-fig. 195, A).

The nostrils lie close together near the mid-dorsal line of the

face about midway between the eye and the snout. In their

general characters they somewhat recall those of the Salmonide.

Both are circular and wide open. The anterior is bordered by a

tubular lip, the hinder parts of which, including the whole area

between the nostrils, are prolonged upwards to form a projecting

hood and also inwards within the olfactory chamber as a curtain

that divides this cavity transversely intotwo. By this combination

of an external hood and an internal curtain water would be

1909. } OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 623

deflected, during the forward progression of the fish, through the

anterior nostril down amongst the lamine of the rosette.

Text-fig. 195.

A. Diagram of nostrils and olfactory chamber of Tinea vulgaris in

longitudinal section.

B. A similar diagram of the olfactory organ of Abramis brama.

The olfactory chamber occupies the usual position with regard

to the bones of the face, and lodges a rosette of 30 or so lamin

radiating in the usual way from a linear raphé. The linguiform

process upon the free border of each lamina is peculiarly long and

narrow, especially in the hinder parts of the rosette where they

form a tuft projecting freely into the posterior nostril.

An essentially similar condition of the olfactory organ was

found in Misgurnus fossilis and in Labeo zoneus.

Abramis brama (text-fig. 195, B).

In this genus also the olfactory organ is essentially similar to

that of Tinea with, however, the rather important absence of a

hood-like extension of the posterior lip of the anterior nostril.

SILURIDA,

Clarias lazxera (text-fig. 196, p. 624).

The nostrils lie upon the dorsal surface of the face, the anterior

at the end of a short tube overhanging the upper lip, the posterior

at some distance (about twice the diameter of the eye) further

back. The upper and under margins of the posterior nostril are

produced to form thin membranous lips, that would act as valves

to prevent inflow of water by this nostril to the olfactory cavity.

At its anterior corner is a long nasal tentacle.

The olfactory cavity extends from nostril to nostril but is

separable into two distinct segments—(1) an oval chamber in

which lies the olfactory rosette, with its long axis directed from

the anterior nostril backwards and to the mid-line, and (2) a

624 MR. R. H, BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [May 25,

smooth vacant cavity leading from the outer and hinder part of the

first segment to the posterior nostril, The addition of this empty

accessory sac to the olfactory chamber proper, in which les the

rosette and the possession of valvular lips by the posterior nostril,

suggests that in some way water is drawn forcibly upon the

olfactory rosette through the anterior nostril. At first sight the

Text-fig. 196.

Clarias lazera.

A. The olfactory organs from above :—On the left the nasal cavity opened;

on the right the relation of the olfactory organ to the skeleton.

a. The muscle connecting the hinder end of the palatine bar to the cranium.

B. Diagram of the laminz of the rosette.

mechanism by which this is effected is not apparent, the jaws

which in Fishes are the usual agents in such actions being

evidently not so in this case. An examination of the rest of the

skull in relation to the nasal cavity makes it clear, however, that

an intermittent current of water could be, and probably is,

produced automatically by the movements that take place between

1909. ] OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 625

certain bones when the maxillary tentacles are swung forward.

This can best be explained by reference to text-fig. 196 (right

side).

- root of the maxillary tentacle is supported and stiffened by

the rod of bone that represents the maxilla (MX) which at its

proximal end articulates at right-angles with another rod of bone

(the palatine bar), that lies in the longitudinal plane and hinges

about the middle of its length upon the outer end of the lateral

ethmoid. From the free posterior end of the palatine bar a large

muscle («) fans out towards the floor of the skull and is there

attached. Another muscle (the retractor maxille) takes origin

from the floor of the skull to the outer side of «, and running

directly forward is inserted by a slender tendon upon the maxilla.

The outer parts of the accessory nasal sac lie above and in close

connection with the palatine bar in front of its hinge point.

In action the muscle « swings out the anterior end of the

palatine bar which in turn rotates the maxilla into a longitudinal

position shooting the point of the tentacle forwards. The reverse

movements to bring the tentacle to rest result from the action

of the retractor maxille. It will be apparent that owing to its

close connection with the palatine bar the outer part of the nasal

sac will follow its movements. When this bone swings outwards

the sac will be dilated, and when it returns to rest, compressed,

causing a stream of water alternately to enter the anterior nostril

and to be expelled from the posterior or more probably from both

nostrils.

Thus upon structural grounds alone it seems quite clear that

when the fish is on the alert it is enabled to bristle its tentacles

and sniff by means of one and the same mechanism.

In general appearance the rosette is very similar to that found

in the Hels, being of considerable length and composed of a large

number of laminez set at right-angles to a median raphé. Each

lamina (text-fig. 196) has a simple convex free border without a

linguiform process.

Malapterurus electricus (text-fig. 197, p. 626).

The nostrils are situated in much the same position as in Clarias,

though relatively closer together. The anterior lies at the end of

a short tube the posterior wall of which 1s prolonged to form a short

pointed tentacular process. In a similar way the posterior nostril

is guarded in front and at the sides by an upstanding hood-shaped

lip.

Fhe olfactory chamber is a simple flattened circular cavity.

The rosette is oval and occupies only the inner half of the chamber

leaving the outer half vacant.

The cavity is thus separable as in Clarias, but to a less degree,

into an olfactory chamber lodging the rosette and an accessory

sac between the rosette and the posterior nostril. The relations

of the vacant part of the cavity to the supporting bones of the

Proc. Zoot, Soc.—1909, No. XLITI. 43

626 MR. R. H, BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [ May 25,

maxillary tentacle are similar to those observed in Clarias, and

there is little doubt that in a similar way it follows the move-

ments of the palatine bar and acts as an aspirator bulb, though

probably in a feeble way, to produce water currents thro ugh the

leaves of the olfactory rosette.

Text-fig. 197.

METH. ys.

Malapterurus electricus.

The olfactory organs shown as in text-fig. 196.

MX.T., maxillary tentacle.

Pimelodus sebe.

The nostrils are very similar to those of Clarias though the

posterior is smaller, not so distinctly valved, and not connected

with a tentacle.

The olfactory chamber is a narrow oval cavity stretching from

nostril to nostril and is completely occupied by a long oval Fosotte

fastened to its floor. Its outer wall lies parallel to, but not in any

connection with, the palatine bar, and although the movements of

the tentacle are effected by a mechanism similar to that in Clarias

and Malapterurus, there can be little or no movement com-

municated to the walls of the olfactory chamber.

Silurus glanis.

The nostrils are essentially similar to those of the other

Siluroids examined, The anterior lies at the end of a short tube

the hinder margin of which is produced as in Malapterurus to

form a short tentacular process. The posterior lies some consider-

able distance (at least twice the diameter of the eye) further back

and is a longitudinal slit bordered by valvular folds.

The nasal cavity occupies the space between the nostrils and is

separable into an anterior half, lodging the rosette, and a vacant

posterior half.

1909. ] OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES, 627

So far as could be seen the passage of water through the nose

is quite independent of the movements of the bones of the skull

and is probably due to the action of cilia, though this leaves

unexplained the use or meaning of the vacant prolongation of the

nasal cavity and the valvular borders of the posterior nostril.

The rosette is similar in form to that of Clarias but the laminze

have well pronounced linguiform processes.

GYMNOTID#.

Gymnotus electricus.

The nostrils ie towards the point of the snout upon the upper

surface of the face, the anterior at some distance (rather more than

the diameter of the eye) in front of and below the posterior. Both

are small round apertures, the posterior flush with the surface, the

anterior with a swollen border scarcely prominent enough to be

called a tube.

The olfactory chamber is a simple flattened cavity of oval or

diamond shape in surface view and so placed that its short axis

forms the line connecting the nostrils. It is completely filled by

a rosette of some 20 claw-shaped lamine arranged around a central

axis, and lies directly upon the premaxilla in such a position that

its walls could be little if at all affected by the movements of the

neighbouring bones of the skull.

Summary.

In the Ostariophysi examined the olfactory organ of the Carps

is entirely different from that of the Siluroids,

In the Carps the organ is of a simple character and very

constant in structure so far as observed, differing only in un-

important details. In no instance were there sacs accessory to

the olfactory chamber, and when there was any mechanism for the

production of water currents in the nose it had the form of a flap

of skin standing up behind the anterior nostril to deflect water

into it in forward progression.

The Siluride on the other hand show a distinct leaning towards

the Eels in the structure of the olfactory organ, The anterior

nostril tends to be strongly tubular and the posterior is frequently

valved. The rosette is more or less elongated and consists of a

relatively large number of parallel lamin.

A tendency is also observable in this family towards the

development of an accessory sac in extension of the true olfactory

chamber which in some instances by movements of certain bones

of the face can be contracted and expanded, thus giving rise to

water-currents within the nasal cavity.

In the Gymnotide the olfactory organ, although peculiar, more

nearly resembles that of Siluroids and Eels than that of the

Carps.

43*

628 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [ May 25,

APODES.

ANGUILLID&.

Anguilla vulgaris.

The anterior nostril lies at the end of a short tube upon the

upper lip not far from the mid-line; the posterior is a simple

circular perforation situated close in front of the eye.

The olfactory chamber occupies the area between the nostrils,

broadening gradually behind and terminating in a rounded end to:

the mesial side of the posterior nostril. Its floor and mesial side

are covered by an olfactory rosette in which the laminz lie at.

right-angles to a linear raphé that runs from the anterior nostril

to the hinder end of the olfactory chamber. The individual

lamine are triangular in outline.

Conger vulgaris.

The Conger agrees in all essential particulars with the Eel as

regards the perature of its nose.

‘The olfactory nerves are of enormous size, which accords with

Bateson’s observation that the Conger is one of the few Fishes

that hunt by scent. He also states that the water current in

the nose is due to the movement of cilia in the tubular nostril.

MuURAZNIDA,

Murena tigrina.

The olfactory organ is very similar to that of an Eel or even

more to that of a Siluroid (e.g. Pimelodus). Both nostrils are

situated at the extremity of a short tube, one projecting forwards

above the snout, the other backwards above the eye.

The olfactory chamber is a simple oval cavity lying between the

two nostrils and occupied by an elongated oval rosette.

Murena zebra had an olfactory organ of precisely the same

character, except that the cavity and rosette were shorter and

rounder.

Summary.

In this group the examples seen show a very strong similarity

in the structure of the nose and a close resemblance also (through

the Murenide) with that of Siluroids. The anterior nostril (and

sometimes the posterior) is strongly tubular and the cavity and

rosette are elongated.

HAPLOMI.

EKsocip&.

Esou lucius (text-fig. 198).

The nostrils le close together upon the slope of the forehead

about one quarter the distance from the eye to the snout facing

upwards and forwards. The anterior is circular, of relativ ely

large size (about a quarter the diameter of the eye) and flush

with the surface. The posterior is crescentic, with the concavity

1909. |} OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 629

directed forward. The anterior border of the narrow bridge of

skin between the two is sharply deflected into the nasal cavity.

The olfactory chamber occupies the normal position with regard

to the bones of the skull, and isa shallow oval cavity corresponding

to the area covered by the nostrils. Its floor is covered by a

peculiarly insignificant circular rosette in which the lamine are

low folds of the mucus membrane differing amongst themselves

in importance and radiating from a central boss situated directly

below the anterior nostril and without any connection with its

anterior lip.

Text-fig. 198.

Esox lucius.

Diagram of olfactory organ in longitudinal section.

A description of this cavity is given by Blaue.

The organ lies well above the range of any pressure that might

be caused by the swelling of the adductor mandibule, but probably

currents of water are deflected into the cavity of the chamber

during forward progression by the tilt of the nostrils towards the

front and by the downward bend of the bridge between the two

nostrils.

SCoPELIDA.

Scopelus crocodilus.

The nostrils are simple circular perforations in a smooth area

of skin lying as usual between the lachrymal and nasal scutes.

The posterior is four times as large as the anterior and is separated

from it by a narrow bridge of integument.

The olfactory chamber is globular and lies partly within the

usual hollow in the ethmoid cartilage, but extends also over the

maxillary process of the palatine and the head of the maxilla.

This somewhat abnormal position is due to the extreme antero-

posterior compression of the front part of the face.

The lining membrane of the chamber is deeply pigmented

except upon the rosette, which is brilliantly white in contrast.

The rosette is of very unusual form (text-fig. 199, A), being

linear with its axis lying in the plane of the two nostrils. It is,

however, composed as usual of a series of laminz arranged along

the sides and around the posterior end of an elongated central

630 MR, R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [May 25,

raphé. The individual lamine (text-fig. 199, B) are very small,

especially in the length of their attached base, and are acutely

pointed.

Text-fig. 199.

PN.

Scopelus crocodilus.

A. Position and form of nostrils and olfactory chamber.

B. Diagram of the lamine of the rosette.

CYPRINODONTID2.

Anableps microlepis.

The posterior nostril lies just in front of the lower part of the

eye. It isa vertical slit, and is apparently valved against ingress

by the thinness and flexibility of its posterior lip. The anterior

nostril lies at the end of a short tube overhanging the edge of the

maxilla about its centre (text-fig. 200, A). Forcible closure of

the mouth under water caused air within the nose-cavity to bubbie

from the posterior nostril, indicating the presence of accessory

sacs in connection with the olfactory chamber. Dissection shows

that the nasal cavity is in fact separable into two parts—one just

within the anterior nostril occupied by a simple oval rosette, and

thus the olfactory chamber proper, and another between this

and the posterior nostril lined by smooth membrane and extending

forward deep to the rosette across the maxillary process of the

palatine and beneath the maxilla to the hinder edge of the pre-

maxilla. This second portion of the cavity is an accessory nasal

sac whose state of compression depends upon the movements of the

premaxilla, and acts as an aspirating mechanism for the production

of water currents in the nose-cavity. The action of the jaws when

1909.] OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 631

the mouth is opened and closed is peculiar. When the lower jaw

is depressed by the action of the gular muscles the premaxilla is

strongly protruded by the forward pressure of a hooked process of

the coronoid border of the mandible (text-fig. 200, B, c’) upon the

hinder margin of the premaxilla. By this movement of the pre-

maxilla the membranes between it and the palatine are stretched

Text-fig. 200.

Anableps microlepis.

A. Position of the nostrils.

B. The nasal cavity in its relation to the neighbouring bones of the face.

(’, hooked process on the coronoid border of the mandible that

protrudes the premaxilla.

and the nasal sac distended. Closure of the jaws by the contraction

of retractor muscles inserted upon the premaxilla and the coronoid

process of the mandible is accompanied by a retraction of the pre-

maxilla and the compression of the nasal sac. In this mechanism

632 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [ May 25,

the maxilla is comparatively fixed, its lower end forming the fulerum

upon which the premaxilla swings backwards and forwards.

Orestias lesueuri.

In this species the olfactory organ is of the same type as in

Anableps, though differing from it in detail. The anterior nostril

is not tubular but is a simple hole, minute and easily overlooked,

lying near the anterior margin of the maxilla towards its upper

extremity. The posterior nostril on the other hand (text-fig. 201, A)

isa large oblique slit in front of and above the eye and is bordered

posteriorly by a valvular flap, which is separated from the parts

behind it by so deep a gutter that at first sight it might be taken

to be the posterior nostril, and the true nostril mistaken for the

anterior, simulating such a pair of closely applied nostrils as those

of the Herrings. The nasal cavity is essentially similar to that of

Anableps, but the accessory sac is not so large and passes inwards

around the posterior border of the maxillary process of the palatine

and not forwards towards the premaxilla.

Text-fig. 201.

Orestias lesueuri.

A. The nostrils in their relation to the superficial bones of the face.

B. The form and position of the olfactory cavity.

L., ligament between the ethmoid and palatine.

Movements of the jaws had but little effect apparently upon

the contents of the nose-cavity, but when the operculum was

raised and lowered air-bubbles could readily be expelled from the

posterior nostril. This effect seems to be due to the movements

of the maxillary process of the palatine. This bone is attached in

front in the usual way (though loosely) to the maxilla and at the

root of its maxillary process by a long ligament to the lateral

ethmoid. As the gill-cover is opened the maxillary process of the

palatine rotates inwards and backwards around this ligament as a

1909. ] OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 633

pivot, compressing the accessory nasal sac that rests upon its

posterior and inner surfaces. The jaw movements may possibly

also be of some little assistance in the compression of this sac, but

those of the gill-cover appear to be by far the more important.

The rosette is very feeble and consists of a series of low pleats

radiating from a central boss.

Summary.

In Zsow and Scopelus the olfactory organ is quite simple with

open non-specialized nostrils and plain cavity. It differs in the

two genera chiefly in the form of the rosette, which in Hsouw is

circular and very poorly developed, in Scopelus linear and sharply

defined with strong though small lamine.

In the two Cyprinodonts the organ is of a quite different and

more highly specialized type. The anterior nostril may be tubular,

the posterior is valved. The nasal cavity is complicated by the

presence of an accessory sac of characteristic form and position,

‘which from its position is capable of being compressed by the

bones of the face. The rosette is feeble and in Orestias resembles

in some particulars that of the Pike.

CATOSTEOMI.

FISTULARIID®.

Fistularia.

The nostrils are two plain oval perforations in an area of soft

skin situated close in front of the eye between the frontal and

lachrymal bones. The posterior is narrow, with its chief axis

Text-fig. 202.

Fistularia sp.

Right olfactory organ showing relative proportions of olfactory (R.) and

indifferent (N.S.) areas of the nasal cavity.

longitudinal, the anterior about three times as large. The bridge

of skin between the two is about equal in breadth to the long

axis of the anterior nostril. The olfactory chamber is oval but

very shallow. It lies upon the bones of the skull (lateral ethmoid)

and extends backwards some distance beyond the posterior nostril,

634 MR. R. H, BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE — [ May 25,

its front half only being occupied by the rosette. The lamine of

the rosette are very feeble and resemble those of the Pike.

GASTROSTEID A.

The olfactory organ of Gastrostews has been described by Solger.

He states that it has in connection with the lower part of the

olfactory chamber an accessory nasal sac. One nostril only

is present. It has the form of a short tube, situated in the

normal position between the nasal and lachrymal scutes.

PERCESOCES.

ScOMBRESOCID# (see Blaue).

Belone vulgaris (text-fig. 203, A).

The olfactory organ of this species has been described by Blaue.

The chief peculiarity in it is that the olfactory chamber is a

simple open pit, from the centre of which protrudes a solid

mushroom-shaped boss, representing the usual laminate rosette.

Text-fig. 203.

A. The right olfactory organ of Belone vulgaris, from above.

B. The right olfactory organ of Hemirhamphus, from the side.

L.C., lateral-line canals in the lachrymal.

Hemirhamphus (text-fig. 203, B).

The olfactory organ is very similar to that of Belone, but the

central boss is relatively smaller.

1909. } OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 635

Exocetus volitans.

The olfactory organ is similar to that of Hemirhamphus. It is

worthy of notice that in Hemirhamphus and Hxocetus the tubules

of the lateral line that traverse the lachrymal bone open directly

into the lower part of the olfactory chamber. This probably

indicates that the single opening of the olfactory pit is not primi-

tive, but a secondary modification, the original openings having

spread to include within the pit what at one time was the external

surface of the face.

MuGILipé&,

Mugil chelo.

The nostrils le about halfway between the eye and the

snout, bounded as usual by the lachrymal and nasal bones. The

anterior nostril is circular, with a short tubular lip higher behind

than in front. It is separated by a bridge of skin about twice its

Text-fig. 204.

Mugil chelo.

A. The olfactory organ, in position, from the side.

B. The same, from above.

diameter in breadth from the posterior nostril, which is a vertical

slit protected from ingress by a thin, transparent valvular exten-

sion of its anterior border.

The olfactory chamber is oval and of the same length as the

space between the nostrils. It lies in the usual hollow in ‘the

ethmoid behind the maxillary process of the palatine. Its hinder

parts, which are unoccupied by the rosette, extend for some little

636 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE _[ May 25,

distance beyond the posterior nostril, and here are dilated above

and below the ridge that carries the olfactory nerve to the rosette

to form two large accessory sacs. The upper sac (ethmoidal)

bends forward beneath the ethmo-maxillary ligament parallel to

the upper margin of the olfactory chamber, and fills in all the

space available between the mesethmoid and the backward process

of the premaxilla. The lower (lachrymal) sac, after passing down

upon the lateral ethmoid, expands in the space between the

lachrymal bone, the palatine arcade and buccal membrane, and

the maxilla.

It will be apparent from the close relations of these sacs to the

bones of the mouth that their expansion or contraction will depend

upon the movements of these bones. This is particularly the

case with regard to the ethmoidal sac, which is greatly expanded

as the premaxilla shoots forward in the protrusion of the jaws

and compressed as it is retracted. The effect of the movements

of the maxilla upon the lachrymal sac is less apparent, although

the sac is visibly compressed by the hinder margin of this bone

as it swings back during the closure of the mouth.

By forcibly closing the mouth under water it is possible to

cause the ejection of a stream of air-bubbles from both nostrils.

The rosette is oval, slightly pigmented, and not very strongly

defined. Its lamine have the normal radial arrangement around

a linear raphé attached in front to the anterior wall of the

anterior nostril. The individual lamine (of which there are

about 30) are bluntly claw-shaped.

OPHIOCEPHALIDS.

Ophiocephalus marulius.

The nostrils lie between the upper anterior border of the eye

and the snout in an area of soft skin between the nasal and

lachrymal scutes, separated from each other by a space equal to

the diameter of the eye. The anterior nostril is a simple per-

foration at the end of a tube overhanging the premaxilla, the

posterior a circular hole flush with the surface of the head close

in front of the frontal scute.

The nasal cavity consists of two divisions, an olfactory chamber

proper occupying the anterior half of the space between the two

nostrils, and an accessory sac comprising the parts of the cavity

between the rosette and the posterior nostril, and extending

forward deep to the true olfactory chamber to the backward

process of the premaxilla.

The rosette is quadrangular in shape and consists of a series of

laminee set parallel to one another in the longitudinal plane.

Hach lamina (text-fig. 205, C) has a gently curved free margin

without linguiform process. The accessory sac is so closely applied

to a considerable part of the backward process of the premaxilla

that it necessarily shares in the movements of this bone, being

compressed when it is retracted, expanded when it protrudes. It

1909.] OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 637

thus no doubt acts as an aspirator bulb to produce water currents

through the leaves of the olfactory rosette.

Text-fig. 205.

Ophiocephalus marulius.

A. The left olfactory organ, from the side.

B. The same, from above.

C. Diagram of the olfactory lamin.

638 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [May 25,

SPHYRENIDA.

Sphyrena cameroonit.

The nostrils lie in an area of soft skin above the lachrymal

bone at a quarter the distance from the eye to the snout. The

anterior is a small round hole, the posterior a vertical slit concave

posteriorly and valved against ingress by the thinness of its

backwardly directed anterior lip. The bridge of skin between

the nostrils is rather broader than the posterior nostril is long,

the latter being eight times the diameter of the anterior nostril.

Text-fig. 206.

Sphyrena cameroonii.

A. Position of the olfactory organ and nasal sac relative to the bones

of the face.

B. Diagram. of the olfactory chamber in longitudinal section.

M., the muscle fragment mentioned in the text.

The olfactory chamber lies beneath the nostrils and is occupied

by a well-defined rosette. Its ventral parts are extended down-

wards and forwards under cover of the lachrymal bone to form a

long flattened accessory nasal sac, which extends from the ethmo-

lachrymal articulation to the anterior end of the lachrymal bone.

The rosette is of the normal oval type. It consists of about

30 strongly convex lamine (text-fig. 206, B).

It is difficult to suggest the use of the accessory sac, as the

specimen observed was in a fragmentary condition; but the

presence of a piece of muscle and tendon (probably the retractor

maxille) upon the lower border of the lachrymal and underlying

the accessory sac, suggests that it may very likely be used as an

aspirator bulb, compressed either by the swelling of this muscle

or by the upward swing of the maxilla when the mouth is closed.

1909. | OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 639

Summary.

In the Percesoces the olfactory organs show a wide range of

variation in the above examples of the different families observed.

In the Scombresocidee they are of a quite peculiar and charac-

teristic form, unlike that seen in any other group of Teleostei.

In the Mugilide a very distinct type occurs in which the olfactory

chamber is enlarged by two accessory empty sacs, closely resem-

bling in form and position the accessory sacs found in the majority

of Acanthopterygi. In Ophiocephalus the general structure: of

the nose and the position of the single accessory sac in connection

with it bear a considerable resemblance to that of the Cyprino-

dontide, differing however in the form of the rosette, which is of

a type found elsewhere only in certain Pleuronectids. In Sphyrena

there is yet another type of nose, with a large and very simple

accessory sac stretching forward like that of Merluccius or Zeus.

ACANTHOPTERYGII.

PERCIFORMES.

PERCIDE,

Perca fluviatilis.

The nostrils, which le high up on the face slightly nearer the

eye than the snout, are both circular apertures of some little size

—the posterior flush with the general surface, the anterior sur-

rounded by a low tubular lip, They are separated by a bridge of

skin about twice the diameter of the posterior nostril in breadth.

The olfactory chamber occupies the usual hollow in the ethmoid

and corresponds in length to the area between the nostrils. It is

occupied by a prominent oval rosette of some fifteen large lamine,

with strongly convex and swollen free margins.

Above and below the rosette the nasal cavity is dilated to form

a pair of accessory empty sacs, the upper of which runs inwards

and forwards beneath the ethmo-maxillary ligament into the spaces

between the mesethmoid and the backward process of the pre-

maxilla and deep to the maxillary process of the palatine. The

lower dilatation extends in a similar way between the lachrymal

scute and the palate to the maxilla. Both these accessory sacs,

although in comparison with those of many other genera of

Acanthopterygu poorly developed and but indefinitely marked off

from the true olfactory chamber, evidently belong to the same

type and are in a similar way affected by movements of the pre-

maxilla and maxilla as the mouth is opened and closed, giving rise

to water currents in the olfactory chamber.

LATRIDE.

Latris ciliaris*.

The olfactory organ closely resembles that of the Perch, although

* This specimen was obtained through the kindness of Col. Nicholson.

640 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [May 25,

smaller and with less strongly developed accessory sacs, the upper

(ethmoidal) one being represented by a mere recess above the

hinder part of the rosette, and the lower (lachrymal) extending

forward only as far as the root of the maxillary process of the

palatine.

Neither of the sacs seems to be within reach of the direct effects

of the movements of the jaws.

The rosette is not so strong and definite as in the Perch. Itis

of the usual oval type and consists of about 30 lamine, each with

a well-formed, almost claw-shaped linguiform process.

CAPROIDA.

Capros aper.

The nostrils lie in a similar position to those of the Perch, the

anterior within an area of smooth skin, the posterior closely

surrounded by scutes (text-fig. 207, B).

The anterior nostril is a small and simple ovalaperture, with its

long axis vertical ; the posterior, which is four or five times as large

as the anterior, is pear-shaped, with its swollen end directed

forwards. The bridge between the two is less than the length of

the posterior nostril in breadth.

Text-fig. 207.

Capros aper.

A. Left olfactory organ, from the side.

MD. position of the coronary border of the mandible

when the mouth is shut.

B. Surface-view of the nostrils.

The nasal cavity is disposed much as in the Perch, but the

rosette is relatively smaller and the lachrymal accessory sac larger

and far more dilated ventrally towards both the head of the

maxilla and the hinder end of the lachrymal scute.

The ethmoidal accessory sac is comparatively small, being a

small forward extension of a general dilatation of the olfactory

chamber above the rosette. It probably is not of much service as

1909. | OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 641

an aspirator, although it can undoubtedly be compressed by the

retraction of the premaxilla.

The lachrymal sac, on the other hand, is evidently most

effective in producing water currents in the nose, for its lower

border is extensively indented by the coronoid border of the

mandible when the mouth is closed.

BERYCID.

Beryx delphinus.

The nostrils lie about halfway between the eye and the snoué

towards the dorsal lime of the head, surrounded by the nasal,

lachrymal and frontal bones. Both are large, oval, and widely

Text-fig. 208.

Beryx delphinus.

Left olfactory organ, from the side.

PA.PY., palato-pterygoid arcade.

$.0.E., supraorbital extension of the nasal cavity.

open, the anterior about half the size of the posterior. The

bridge of skin between the two is relatively narrow and is pro-

duced as a transverse curtain into the cavity of the olfactory

chamber.

Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1909, No. XLIV. 44

642 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [ May 25,

The rosette which covers the floor of the olfactory chamber is

sharply defined and very prominent, like that of the Perch. It is

composed of about thirty claw-shaped transversely pleated laminze

arranged in the usual way radially around the hinder parts of a

linear raphe.

The whole of the olfactory chamber above the rosette is dilated

to form a peculiarly capacious ethmoid accessory sac, that extends

backwards into two hollows beneath the anterior end of the

frontal, inwards between the backward process of the premaxilla

and the mesethmoid, and forwards between the palato-premaxillary

and ethmo-maxillary ligaments and the greatly elongated head of

the maxilla.

In a similar way the wall of the olfactory chamber below the

hinder end of the rosette is expanded beneath the lachrymal bone,

forming a pear-shaped lachrymal nasal sae that rests partly on

the palatine and partly upon the buccal membrane between its

anterior border and the maxilla.

The hinder part of the olfactory chamber is also produced

backwards beyond the posterior nostril to form a narrow conical

sac above the eye within the hollow between the lower edge of

the frontal and the lateral ethmoid. The resemblance should be

noticed between this posterior extension and that seen in the

Salmons and Herrings.

The ethmoid and lachrymal sacs are strongly compressed by

the movements of the premaxilla and maxilla when the mouth is

closed.

MULLIDA.

Mullus barbatus.

The nostrils are inconspicuous, but occupy a similar position

upon the face to those of the previously described Perciformes,

although separated by a considerably broader bridge of skin. The

distance between them is due in large part to a tubular extension

of the nose-cavity between the olfactory chamber and the posterior

nostril. The anterior nostril is a small round hole, the posterior

a narrow vertical slit, opening backwards and valved against

ingress by the thinness and flexibility of its backwardly directed

anterior lip.

The olfactory chamber is expanded above and below the olfac-

tory rosette to form a pair of accessory sacs similar to those of the

Perch, but longer and more slender and separated more definitely

from the olfactory chamber itself. Although occupying the

normal positions between the premaxilla and ethmoid and near

the hinder border of the maxilla, these sacs, owing probably to

their small capacity, do not seem to be greatly compressed by the

movements of these bones—at least, no air-bubbles could be driven

from the nostrils by forcibly closing the mouth under water.

The rosette, as in the other Perciformes, is oval and very

prominent. The lamin are few in number and, like those of the

Perch, have a sharply convex free border.

1909. ] OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 645

SPARIDA.

Pagellus centronotus.

The olfactory organ is comparable to that of the Perciformes

previously described, particularly to that of Jullus, but is in

every way better developed.

The nostrils have a similar position and form, differing only in

the tact that they are relatively closer together and that the

posterior is protected from ingress by a special valvular fold (text-

fig. 209, C, p. 644) attached to the inner surface of its posterior lip.

The olfactory chamber is almost completely filled by a very

prominent oval rosette of the normal type, in which the individual

lamine have a sharply convex free margin. The cavity is not

prolonged between the hinder margin of the rosette and the

posterior nostril, but above and below the ridge that carries the

olfactory nerve to the rosette are a pair of clearly defined oval

apertures that lead into ethmoid and Jachrymal sacs of a similar

character to those of J/ullus or other Perciformes, but larger and

more markedly differentiated from the true olfactory chamber by

the narrowness of their channels of communication. The position

of the olfactory chamber and accessory sacs with regard to the

bones of the skull is similar to that previously described, the

lachrymal sac lying beneath the lachrymal bone upon the palatine

and the buccal membrane and reaching forward to the strongly

convex posterior border of the maxilla, and the ethmoid sac

occupying the usual position between the ethmoid and the back-

ward process of the premaxilla. From their position both sacs,

and especially the lachrymal, must be strongly compressed during

the closure of the mouth.

Summary.

The olfactory organ shows a strong general resemblance in all

the members of the Perciformes examined, accompanied by an

interesting series of variations tending towards more perfect

specialization.

The nostrils occupy in all a very similar position, rather high

up on the face not far in front of the upper border of the eye.

In the simpler forms (Perca, Latris, Capros, and Beryx) they

are both widely open, in Mullus and Pagellus the posterior is

valved. In all the olfactory chamber is dilated beyond the actual

olfactory area, the dilatation showing a gradual differentiation

into two clearly defined accessory sacs, one related to the ethmoidal

region in such a way as to be compressed and expanded by the

movements of the premaxilla, the other lying upon the palatine

bone and the buccal membrane, and responding in a similar way

to the movements of the maxilla or (Capros) mandible.

Within the groupa line can be drawn between Perca, Latris,

Capros, and Leryx on the one hand, where the accessory sacs,

although differing in size, are still but little cut off from the

olfactory chamber, and in which the posterior nostril is not valved,

44*

644 MR, R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE _[ May 25,

Text-fig. 209.

1909. ] OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 645

and Mullus and Pagellus on the other, in which the posterior

nostril is valved and the sacs open into a definite part ofthe

olfactory chamber by restricted orifices.

A parallel specialization is also observable in the differentiation

of the jaw-muscles in these two groups.

SCOMBRIFORMES.

SCcOMBRID.

Scomber scombrus.

The nostrils lie in the posterior half of the distance from the

eye to the snout separated by a bridge of skin 8 mm. or so in

breadth. The anterior nostril is a small and quite simple circular

hole, the posterior a vertical slit about 4 mm. long, and valved

against ingress by the thinness and flexibility of its backwardly

directed anterior lip.

The olfactory rosette is prominent and sharply defined, and

lies as usual directly beneath the anterior nostril. It consists of

about 30 claw-shaped laminz arranged as usual radially around

the hinder parts of a linear raphe.

The olfactory chamber is dilated posteriorly and below to form

an extensive though very shallow accessory sac, which is divided

into upper and lower parts by the ethmo-lachrymal articulation,

the upper part passing beyond the posterior nostril to the anterior

and upper edge of the orbit, the lower extending downwards and

forwards upon the palatine bone and buccal membrane to the

upper border of the maxilla, by which it is compressed when the

mouth is closed.

ZLEORHOMBI.

ZEIDE.

Zeus faber.

The nostrils lie close in front of the eye, near the dorsal mid-

line of the face. Both are wide open and of large size, the

anterior being a circular aperture about 3 mm. in diameter, with

a thick but low tubular lip higher behind than in front, and the

posterior a large bean-shaped opening (7 mm.x4 mm.) lying

close behind the anterior, and partly embracing it with its concave

border.

The rosette, which is plainly visible through the posterior

nostril, is prominent and sharply defined. It consists of a

Explanation of Text fig. 209 (see opposite).

Pagellus centrodontus.

A. Olfactory organ in position, from the side.

B. The same, from above.

C. The valve (V) upon the hinder lip of the posterior nostril, in section.

D. Diagram of a lamina of the rosette.

BM., buccal membrane. R.PMX., retractor premaxilla.

646 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [May 25,

swollen cushion-like base, from the surface of which protrude

the apices of about thirty sharp-pointed laminz. attached to a

linear central raphé in the usual way. Owing to the abnormal

structure of the face the olfactory chamber does not occupy

the usual hollow in the ethmoid, but lies higher up in a cavity

between the backward process of the premaxilla and the upper

part of the ethmoid, separated by a prominent ridge from the

cavity of the ethmoid, within which it would normally be

lodged.

Text-fig. 210.

Zeus faber.

Left olfactory organ, from the side, showing abnormal position.

The anterior parts of the cavity below the rosette are produced

forward above the same ridge of bone towards the expanded head

of the maxilla, forming a large finger-shaped accessory sac, filled

with mucus and separated by a large lymph-space from the

deeper parts of the skull.

This accessory sac, except for its position with regard to the

facial bones, is In many ways very similar to that of MWerluccius,

and it should be noted that both were filled with mucus.

PLEURONECTID#.

Hippoglossus vulgaris.

The olfactory organs are situated on either side of the head,

that of the right in front of the interorbital ridge, that of the

left just to the left of the dorsal line of the body.

1909.]

OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES.

Text-fig. 211.

Hippoglossus vulgaris.

A. Position of both olfactory organs, from the ocular side.

B. Left olfactory organ, from above,

648 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [ May 25,

The anterior nostril is tubular with the hinder lip raised to

form a narrow leaf-lke appendage; the posterior is a small circular

open hole. They are separated by a bridge of moderate breadth

(about three times the diameter of the posterior nostril).

The rest of the nose differs somewhat on the two sides of the

head. On the right (ocular) side the olfactory chamber is broader

than long, and contains a correspondingly broad rosette, in which

the lamine, which are about twenty-five in number, lie longitudi-

nally and parallel to one another. The individual laminz have

a sharply angled free border. The hinder margin of the rosette

is attached by its middle to the posterior wall of the olfactory

chamber by the membranous fold that carries the olfactory

nerve, but on either side of this attachment it forms the free

anterior border of an oval hole that leads into an accessory sac.

The nasal sacs in form, position, and mode of connection with the

olfactory chamber resemble the ethmoidal and lachrymal sacs of

other Acanthopterygians (e. g. Pagellus). The ethmoidal passes

upwards beneath the ethmo-maxillary ligament into the space

between the mesethmoid, the backward process of the premaxilla,

and the maxillary process of the palatine; the lachrymal extends

downwards and forwards in a similar manner deep to the

lachrymal and the overhanging lachrymal process of the lateral

ethmoid to the hinder border of the maxilla, lying upon the

palatine bone and the buccal membrane. The sacs are compressed

by the movements of the premaxilla and maxilla in the closure of

the mouth. Upon the blind side the nose is essentially similar,

but owing to the rotation of the face the form and position of the

accessory sacs have become somewhat distorted.

Both saes lie above the maxillary process of the palatine, being

rotated forward on either side of the olfactory chamber, and lying

side by side in the hollow of the ethmoid that also lodges the

olfactory chamber, The ethmoidal sac is the larger of the two

and reaches the backward process of the premaxilla ; the lachrymal

sac terminates in front above the root of the maxillary process of

the palatine.

Pleuronectes platessa.

The olfactory organs of the Plaice are quite similar to those of

Hippoglossus*, except that the posterior nostrils are surrounded

by a thin upstanding valvular lip. Their topography has been

described in detail by Cole, if anything with too great elaboration,

for the accessory sacs are not strictly speaking subdivided into

the definite sacculations described by Cole, but are simple pear-

shaped bags fitting into the interstices between the different

bones with which they come in contact, and capable, when the

bones are stretched apart, of being completely smoothed out,

leaving no trace of permanent subdivision.

* A rosette with longitudinally arranged lamine has been recorded (Bateson) for

three species of Plewronectes besides P. platessa.

1909. ] OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 649

Rhombus maximus.

The olfactory organs lie on the ocular and blind sides of the

head in positions quite similar to those of HMippoglossus. ‘The

nostrils on the ocular side resemble those of Hippoglossus, except

that the anterior nostril is less strongly tubed and the posterior

nostril relatively larger. Upon the blind side the anterior nostril

is surrounded by a very characteristic flat circular leaf-like ex-

pansion (text-fig. 212, A, p. 650). <A similar flap is mentioned

for the Brill (2. levis) by Bateson (/. c. p. 231), and, as described

later, occurs also in the Whiff (Arnoglossus).

The olfactory chamber, on both sides, is oval and lodges an

oval rosette in which the laminez radiate in the usual way from a

linear raphe.

Upon the ocular side the hinder end of the olfactory chamber

gives origin to a pair of accessory sacs comparable in every way

to those of the ocular side of Hippoglossus.

Upon the blind side there is only one accessory sac which has

the position and general relations of an ethmoidal sac, and com-

municates with the olfactory chamber by a wide opening above

the hinder part of the rosette.

Arnoglossus megastoma.

The nostrils are similar to those of the Turbot (Bateson, /. ¢.

p- 231). Upon the ocular side the olfactory chamber is oval and

exceedingly shallow, and is occupied by an oval rosette consisting

of poorly developed radiating lamine.

An opening in the dorsal anterior part of the chamber leads

into an ethmoidal accessory sac that lies, like that of the Turbot,

upon the expanded head of the maxilla, reaching as far forward

as the ethmo-premaxillary ligament.

Upon the blind side the olfactory chamber is in connection

with one accessory sac only, which corresponds in position and

general relations to that upon the blind side of the Turbot.

Solea vulgaris.

The nostrils in this genus have been accurately described by

Bateson and Miss Pereyaslawzeff, and Kyle also gives a_ brief

notice of its accessory sacs.

Upon the eyed (right) side the lower wall of the olfactory

organ is much contracted, so that the tubular nostrils are approxi-

mated, and both point almost directly backwards. The olfactory

chamber is, however, of fair size, and is occupied by a long oval

rosette with its axis nearly vertical (directed towards the centre

of the left eye). The position of the rosette is evidently due to

the backward rotation of the anterior nostril consequent upon

the stunted growth of the ventral wall of the chamber referred

to above. The lamine of the rosette lie mainly at right angles

to a long central raphé, like those of the Eels; each has a gently

convex free border.

650

MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE

Text-fig. 212.

{May 25,

1909. | OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 651

Posterior to the rosette, just above the posterior nostril, is a

clearly defined oval hole that leads into a two-lobed accessory sac.

The tower and larger lobe runs backwards parallel to the margin

of the mouth, swelling slightly towards its distal end. The upper

lobe lies beneath the upper end of the rosette. These two lobes

obviously represent the ethmoidal and lachrymal sacs of more

normal genera.

Upon the blind (left) side, the nostrils are separated by a very

considerable distance, due almost entirely to a tubular elongation

of the nasal cavity between the rosette and the posterior nostril

(cf. Mullus). Both nostrils are tubular, the anterior stout and

bluntly conical, the posterior smaller and protected against ingress

by the thinness of its converging lip. This nostril opens and

shuts with a jerk synchronousiy with the respiratory movements

(Bateson).

The rosette is similar in form to that of the right side, but les

with its length parallel to the internarial axis. It occupies only

the anterior part of the nasal cavity; behind it a long tubular

empty passage leads to the posterior nostril. The lower wall of

this passage is dilated between the hinder limit of the rosette

and the ethmo-lachrymal articulation to form a long accessory

sac, that runs backwards and downwards with the adductor

mandibule and palatine arcade superficial to it, giving off a small

secondary diverticulum forward towards the lower end of the

maxilla.

Summary.

In considering the Zeorhomhi, Zews can be at once set aside

as differmg completely from the Pleuronectide in all the detaiis

of its nose structure.

The Pleuronectide examined can be separated into three groups.

1. Hippoglossus and Pleuronectes, in which the lamine of the

rosette are disposed longitudinally.

2. Rhombus and Arnoglossus, with a flat, leaf-like lobe to the

left anterior nostril.

3. Solea, with tubular nostrils and elongated Hel-like rosette.

In all the genera there are accessory sacs in connection with

the olfactory chamber, which are comparable to the ethmoidal

and lachrymal sacs found in other Acanthopterygians, although

they differ in number according to the genus and the side of the

face, and except in the Sole are more strongly developed on the

ocular than on the blind side.

Explanation of Text-fig. 212 (see opposite).

Rhombus maximus.

A. Nostrils of the blind (right) side.

B. Olfactory organ of the ocular (left) side, in position.

C. Olfactory organ of the blind side, in position, from above.

652 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [May 25,

In Hippoglossus and Plewronectes both sacs are present and

well developed on both sides of the face. In Rhombus the

lachrymal sac is absent on the blind side, and in Arnoglossus on

both sides. In the Sole the lachrymal sac is more developed

than the ethmoidal, and is present on both sides, being particularly

large on the blind side, the ethmoidal sac, or rather an indication

of it, occurring only on the ocular side.

SCLEROPAREL.

TRIGLIDA.

Trigla hirundo.

The nostrils lie in an area of soft skin surrounded by scutes,

high up on the face, slightly more than halfway from the eye to

the point of the snout. The anterior nostril is a small round

aperture surrounded by a low tubular lip. The posterior is

separated from it by a bridge some few millimetres in breadth,

and has the form of a vertical slit valved against inflow by special

membranous flaps attached to the inner surface of each of its lips.

The olfactory chamber occupies the usual position with regard

to the bones of the face, being lodged in a hollow between the

maxillary process of the palatine in front and the ethmo-lachrymal

articulation. It contains a clearly defined oval rosette consisting

of from thirty to forty lamine with gently convex free borders

arranged as usual around a linear axis.

Above and below the rosette the nasal cavity is extended

to form a pair of accessory sacs, which have the position and

arrangement common to the lachrymal and ethmoid sacs of other

Acanthopterygians. The lachrymal sac spreads out into the

hatchet-shape presented by that of Capros, reaching in front to

the maxilla, and backwards upon the jaw muscles. Both sacs

are compressed by the bones of the jaws as the mouth is closed.

CYCLOPTERID.

Cyclopterus lumpus.

The olfactory organ is in every way more extensive than

that of Zrigla. The nostrils lie very high up on the head, the

anterior slightly in front of the eye above the level of its

upper border, the posterior some considerable distance further

back about halfway between the anterior border of the eye and

the dorsal mid-line of the head. Both nostrils are circular,

the anterior slightly the larger of the two, and situated at the

end of a short conical tube ; the posterior a mere pin-hole, valved

against ingress by the thinness of its slightly protuberant lips.

The olfactory cavity is occupied by a circular rosette, consisting

of about fifteen feeble lamine radiating from a central boss, which

lies directly below the anterior nostril. The hinder part of the

chamber is prolonged backwards as a smooth tubular passage

to the posterior nostril (cf. Julius, Solea), and above and below

1909. | OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES, 653

the rosette is dilated to form two remarkably extensive accessory

sacs similar to those of Z’rigla except in size. . The lachrymal sac

Text-fig. 213.

Cyclopterus lumpus.

A. Left olfactory organ, in position.

B. Diagrain of valvular posterior nostril.

in particular is of enormous size, extending forward beneath the

head of the maxilla in front of the palatine, and backward along

654 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [May 25,

the border of the maxilla and upon the adductor mandibule to a

point below the eye.

It rests partly upon the palatine, but mainly upon the buccal

membrane. Both sacs are strongly compressed by the bones of

the upper jaw as the mouth is closed. The lachrymal sac pro-

bably is also directly affected by the sweliing of the adductor

mandibule, and the pressure of water against the buccal membrane

during the act of expiration.

Summary.

Except in the presence of large ethmoidal and lachrymal sacs

there is no very great resemblance between the olfactory organs

of the above two representatives of the Scleroparei. The rosette

in particular is very different, that of Zrigla being of the normal

oval type, and that of Cyclopterus rather of the type found in

Cotius and Bovichthys.

JUGULARES.

TRACHINID.

Trachinus vipera.

The nostrils lie close in front of the anterior border of the eye

surrounded at some little distance by the lachrymal and nasal

bones, and by the antorbital process of the ethmoid. Both are

small, the anterior slightly tubed with a small posterior hood-like

elevation, the posterior a vertical slit valved against ingress by

thin protuberant lips. The bridge of skin between the two

measures less than 2 mm.

The olfactory chamber lies directly below the nostrils, in the

normal position as regards the deeper bones of the skull. It is

occupied by a rosette of the normal oval type consisting of from

fifteen to twenty sharply convex lamin. Above the posterior

end of the rosette is a clearly defined oval aperture leading into

an ethmoidal accessory sac of normal type, which is compressed by

the backward process of the premaxilla when the mouth is closed.

NovroTHENIID&.

Bovichthys variegatus.

The nostrils lie in the posterior third of the distance between

the upper part of the eye and the snout. The anterior is in the

form of a short tube, the posterior is a vertical slit valved against

the entry of water by the thinness of its backwardly directed

anterior lip; between the two is a bridge of skin about 1 mm. in

breadth. The rosette is circular and composed of nine swollen

lamine radiating from a central circular boss, which has no

connection with the anterior nostril, as in most Fishes.

The olfactory chamber is expanded below and in front to form

an extensive though shallow accessory sac which lies under cover

of the lachrymal scute, and toa slight extent beneath the adductor

1909.] OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 655

mandibule. It reaches in front into the angle between the

maxillary process of the palatine and the maxilla, and is bounded

internally by the buccal membrane. A small ethmoidal sac is

also present, formed by an extension of the upper part of the

olfactory chamber forwards around the backward process of the

premaxilla.

The sacs are compressed by the premaxilla and maxilla as

these bones move in the closure of the mouth.

Summary.

In comparing these two representatives of the Jugulares the

difference in the structure of the rosette should be particularly

noticed. In Lovichthys this has the peculiar characters of that

of Cottus (Blaue), while in Trachinus it is of the normal oval

type.

PEDICULATI.

Lopaiip#.

Lophius piscatorius.

The olfactory organ of Lophiws has been described in detail by

Miss Pereyaslawzeff, so that it is sufficient to mention that it is

in a degenerate condition, consisting of only a small olfactory

chamber set on the end of a short tentacle standing up from the

dorsal surface of the face close behind the ethmo-palatine

articulation.

The cavity of the chamber is filled by a few (four or five) sharply

convex laminz set longitudinally parallel to one another. The

olfactory nerve takes a most unusual course between the base of

the olfactory tentacle and brain. It at first dips down between

the ethmo-maxillary ligament and the raised outer border of the

ethmoid, then passing outwards through this bone to the lateral

surface of the cranium, runs backwards within the orbit between

the roots of the oblique muscles, and finally enters the brain-case

just in front of the origin of the recti.

Morphological Summary.

The most important facts detailed in the above descriptions

ean be most clearly summarized in a table (pp. 656-7).

A consideration of the foregoing shows that the nose can be

divided into two parts, one of which is practically constant and

forms the essential part of the organ, while the other is of

secondary importance, and may be present or not. These are the

olfactory chamber with its rosette and the accessory nasal sacs.

The olfactory chamber differs comparatively little in shape and

relative size, and in nearly every case occupies a constant and

fixed position with regard to the bones of the skull, being lodged

in a hollow in the ethmoid between its points of articulation with

the palatine and the lachrymal bones. In nearly all cases it

(oP)

(or)

MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE

[May 25,

ANTERIOR.

Malacopterygil.

SalmOmey. sale cceneal

Osmenustee eee ees

CORESOMWS sos coecoscceccnl| ooo

Chupea aaron weet uals

Chirocentrus ...... .....| N

Mormyrus ...............| N

Gymnarchus ............| ...

22:

Ostariophysi.

BITIYeR Ys FodanseBa bea sosdaanl cue

JNOVRSTINS oo5cq0060 060 one ave nee

Cobitis Sota eee eee

WACO gree ese aete eth elle.

Clarias,.. Sera eeN aah eee

Malopteru (WEIS coo ooo on sas ieee

Pimelodus ............... ais

SUNETAWS 5.065000 don bono 000

Gymnotus ...............

Apodes.

INTERV sccoces00 cnconsonall use

Congereenatercen tans &

Scopelus .................. Ieee

ANTENDIE DS 22:5 c00000 00600000" ies

@restiastercet csi cone. | N

Catosteomi.

Gastrosteus (Solger) ...) ... | ...

Bistulaniaeees eens | N |

Percesoces.

Belone .. oe

Hemirhamphus sbshyeibareay |

Exocetus |

Mugil . ate ae ea ee | OND

Ophiocephalus neoeens ooo |) NT

SHOLONSREROE, sus cssonvossces | N

Anacanthini.

Gadus eet en set esal ee

Motella | leis Haney | aoe

ROSETTE.

NASAL SACS.

GENERAL

FORM.

: | T siya ar.

| With internal curtain.

| Oval with linear raphé.

| Simple perforation.

| With posterior hood.

SEE

eee

| a:

| Circular with central boss.

With lamine longitudinal.

| Elongated.

| Aavwaazas

rae eae

AaazZ |i:

AAA

Eo [sa ae

| aia: :

BD: Dna

Sle!

AiZ'A

With central linguiform process.

| Linguiform process predominant.

| Linguiform process absent.

| Slight indefinite extension.

ESI Sicgist

SlelSlelis!|

| Dorsal and ventral sacs.

os} O

Di a

= | @

2/2

Load

MNNM | Posterior sac.

1909.]

OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES.

657

Acanthopterygii.

Perciformes.

Pagellus Mae #

Scombriformes.

Scomber ....../...........

Zeorhombi.

CUS eee.

Hippoglossus se

| With internal curtain.

| Oval with linear raphé.

| Cireular with central boss.

| With lamin longitudinal.

| With central linguiform process.

NOSTRILS. ROSETTE. NASAL SACS.

Pos- GENERAL |

ANTERIOR, | TERIOR. Sai | LAMIN®. |

process predominant.

Linguiform process absent.

| Slight indefinite extension.

Pleuronectes ...........|...

Rhombus...........

Arnoglossus

Solea

Scleroparei.

Trigla

Cyclopterus........

Jugulares.

Trachinus

Bovichthys ........

Pediculati.

ophiusie eee ee

esas

5 S

= 5 4

cari) |e 5 Elsi gs

@ | |e | ro a | 2 s

Sale = = < “E\B\s

al | S| 2 ap A [e\Si\e

Eleleleie|2\|2\2 ||| 2) 8| 3

M\H/El\E > | Oo | | iS a >

HER Salar a, | aaeEssl ae | ms ire | op tac| eT

| | | |

NGI | N |R We | [eye pele

SL NGIN ee N |/R i ee

IN | N ||R bela |

\N Here ef ES | i}. |

N | N| HR | (eta |

N | N R i

N iN IIR Ee (cel alte

| | Peal | para tineiala ts

Nee Iceni ONE yn | eka Th §

N/|N Inaba OP NE RL

| N|N N RB ltites R | |

N/IN| | iN IIR |

\N | N least eae Ss

Le circled Pal ae

iN | N | R|. a | Lh

eax tay ee lx dee oem welaclies |

sy eee |) P54) S| ce PER ae i L |

aera etles aaa a re vee a

> | | |

| Hit |

| | | | | |

| Dorsal sac.

| Dorsal and ventral sacs.

| RNRNRNNRN

opens to the exterior by two nostrils, and contains a rosette in

which the component laminz are as a rule set radially around the

sides and hinder end of an axis which is attached in front to the

anterior wall of the anterior nostril (Rosette, Column 1).

An olfactory organ of this description occurs in most of the

lower Teleosteans, and is well represented in a generalized con-

dition in the Haddock, which, therefore, serves as a good central

type with which to compare the rest.

Minor variations occur to different degrees in all parts—in the

details of the nostrils, of the rosette, and of the cavity, some of

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1909, No. XLV.

658 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE _[ May 25,

which appear to be characteristic of families or even larger

groups.

The nostrils are perhaps the most variable part, and also that

in which variation is correlated least with natural affinities.

The position of the anterior nostril directly above the rosette

is almost universal, no doubt in order that the incurrent water

may play directly upon the olfactory membrane. This position

is also probably due in part to the close connection that there is

in almost every instance between the axis of the rosette and the

front lip of the nostril, which indicates that the rosette belongs

essentially to the anterior part of the olfactory chamber. When

the rosette is elongated, as in the Eels, Siluroids, and some

Pleuronectids (Rosette, Column IT.) the nostril opens in front of

and not above it.

The anterior nostril is very frequently, especially in the lower

Teleostei, more or less tubular (Nostrils, Column IJ.). The tube

is particularly well marked in the Eels, some Siluroids, Anableps,

and Ophiocephalus, but the tendency towards tube-formation is

so widely distributed and variable in its occurrence and extent

that it probably has little to do with natural affinity.

In certain groups, notably the Cyprinide and Gadide, the

hinder wall of the tube is elevated to form a valvular flap

(Nostrils, Column ITI.), and in other groups or separate genera

(Merluccius, Hsox, Salmonidee, Clupeidee) this may be augmented

or replaced by a similar downward prolongation or curtain that

dips into the olfactory cavity above the centre of the rosette

(Nostrils, Column IV.). Both these developments of the bridge

of skin between the nostrils are without doubt mainly of physio-

logical importance, although in restricted groups (e. g. Cyprinide)

they are also constant enough in their occurrence to be of

systematic importance.

Variations in the form of the posterior nostril seem also to

depend little upon affinity.

Broadly speaking this nostril is either a simple open perforation

flush with the surface of the skin (Nostrils, Column VI.), which

may show considerable differences in size, but commonly is either

circular, oval, or crescentic in shape; or it is a slit or pin-hole

closed by valves.

The crescentic type is highly characteristic of the Salmons,

Herrings, and Carps, though found also in Merluccius, Hsox, and

(Gn a bean-shape) in Zeus. It always more or less closely

embraces the hinder margin of the anterior nostril.

The oval or circular form occurs in many groups, but can

hardly be regarded as characteristic of any.

A valved condition (Nostrils, Column V.) is found chiefly

though not solely (some Siluroids) in fishes provided with acces-

sory nasal sacs, and forms part of a general mechanism for drawing

water forcibly into the olfactory chamber through the anterior

nostril. In their simplest condition the valves are merely the

thin converging lips of a minute perforation at the end of a short

1909.] OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 659

conical tube (Solea, Cyclopterus, Trachinus), or the thin back-

wardly directed anterior lip of a slit-like orifice (ugil, Sphyrena,

Scomber, Bovichthys), but when fully developed they are special

folds of membrane attached to the inner surface of one or both

lips of the nostril and directed outwards (Trigla, Pagellus, Anableps,

Orestias, Clarias).

Finally, there are cases in which there is one nostril only

present [Gastrosteus (Solger); Chromide, Labride (Milne -

Edwards)|. Or the nose may assume (apparently as a secondary

modification) the condition of a widely open pit without defined

nostrils at all (Scombresocide); or by the elevation of its floor

and the subsequent rupture of the bridge between the nostrils,

the cavity may be everted and the organ transformed to a bifoliate

tentacle (Tetrodons, Wiedersheim and Tate Regan).

Turning now to the rosette, it is noticeable that the axis is

most frequently linear and continued to the front lip of the

anterior nostril, as in the Haddock, the rosette being usually of

an oval form (Bateson’s type 3) (Rosette, Column I.).

In Cyclopterus, Bovichthys, Cottus, Hsox, Orestias, it is a central

circular boss from which the lamin radiate in all directions, the

rosette being circular (Bateson’s type 3) (Rosette, Column III.).

In the Eels, and to a less extent in the Siluroids and the Sole,

the axis is lengthened and the laminz are set in parallel series at

right angles to it (Bateson’s type 2) (Rosette, Column IT.); and

finally in Ophiocephalus, Hippoglossus, and Pleuronectes, the axis

lies transverse to the internarial line and the lamine are attached

to its posterior border in parallel series (Bateson’s type 4).

In the degenerate nose of Lophius the few lamine left are also

arranged parallel to one another and to the narial axis, and in

the Percesoces lamin are entirely wanting.

Considerable differences are apparent in the shape of the

individual lamine of the rosette. Starting from the type pre-

sented by Gadus as a centre (Rosette, Column V.), one line of

variation leads by the suppression of the peripheral part of tne

lamina and the exaggeration of the linguiform process (Rosette,

Column VI.) to the claw-like shape which is particularly charac-

teristic of the rosette of the Salmonidz and Clupeide. <A similar

though less pronounced modification is shown by the sharply

convex lamine of Mugil, Perca, Pagellus, or Sphyrena, and pro-

bably the triangular lamine of the Eels should be included in

the same series. On the other hand, suppression of the linguiform

process (Rosette, Column VII.) gives rise to a gently curved or

straight free border such as that seen in Wormyrus, Clarias, Esox,

Orestias, some Pleuronectids, Ophiocephalus, Bovichthys, Trigla,

and Cyclopterus. Except in the case of the Salmons and Herrings

the form of the lamine has apparently little dependence on

natural affinity, except in quite closely related forms.

Variations in the position of the olfactory chamber relative to

the framework of the face are very exceptional, being found only

in Motella, Zeus, and Lophius. Its shape also is very constant,

45*

660 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE _[ May 25,

and corresponds roughly to that of the rosette. In some genera

the cavity is extended to an appreciable extent beyond the rosette

(especially posteriorly) forming an empty space (Nasal sacs,

Column I.), which in many genera undergoes further development

to form a definite sac or saes accessory to the true olfactory

chamber.

The accessory sacs can be separated for convenience into three

series. (1) A single sac directed anteriorly from either above or

below the rosette (Nasal sacs, Columns III. & IV.). (2) A single

sac directed posteriorly towards the orbit (Nasal sacs, Column II.).

(3) Two sacs (ethmoidal and lachrymal nasal sacs) with very

definite relations to the ethmoidal and lachrymal regions of the

face, and constant also in their point of entry into the olfactory

chamber above and below the hinder end of the rosette (Nasal

sacs, Column V.). With regard to the two sacs of the third

group there is not much doubt that they are homologous in the

different genera in which they occur, but in the case of the sacs

grouped in Series I. it is very difficult to determine how far they

are homologous among themselves or to either of the sacs in

Series III. In some cases (Orestias, Anableps, Ophiocephalus, Tra-

chinus) the sac is possibly homologous with the ethmoidal sac,

in others (Gastrosteus (Solger), Solea) with the lachrymal, having

regard to its position, and especially to its mode and point of

connection with the olfactory chamber; but in other cases (Jer-

luccius, Zeus, Sphyrena, Clarias) the protrusion is of too general

a character to render the homology anything more than very

doubtful.

The backwardly directed sacs of the Salmons, Herrings, and the

Mackerel (Series II.) being little more than a general protrusion of

the hinder part of the olfactory chamber, should probably not in any

way be regarded as homologous with either of the sacs of Series ITI.

Their distribution is interesting, being restricted to fishes in

which there is a great development of mucoid tissue about the

eye and face, giving rise to a third eyelid against the base of

which the sac abuts.

The two sacs in Series ITI. are found in their typical form, with

one exception, in the Acanthopterygii. The exception is J/ugil,

which it should be noticed is in Giinther’s system of classification

included among the Acanthopterygii. Upon the other hand, the

presence of these sacs in the Pleuronectide appears to lend further

justification for the removal of these Fishes from close proximity

to the Gadids (Giinther) to the Acanthopterygii (Boulenger).

The least specialized form of the olfactory organ is undoubtedly

the rosette-filled hollow found in most of the non-Acanthopterygian

fishes (Physostomi, Giinther). From this as a starting point we

may justly assume that the development of accessory sacs com-

menced with a general expansion of the parts of the olfactory

chamber around the rosette, such as we find in Motella, and in a

slightly more accentuated form in Gymnarchus, the Siluroids, and

Fistularia.

1909. ] OLFACTORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. 661

Further specialization can be seen in the Salmons and

Herrings, where the sac, though still a general extension of a

great part of the olfactory chamber, is definite in shape, and enters

into functional relations with the skeleton of the jaws. The

next stage is shown by Orestias, Ophiocephalus, Anableps,

Bovichthys, the opening of the sac becoming restricted to a

definite circumscribed hole in a fairly definite and constant

position in the wall of the olfactory chamber. Finally, the

position and number of the sacs and their mode of connection

with the olfactory chamber became crystallized in the Acantho-

pterygu, resulting in the definite ethmoidal and Jachrymal sacs

more or less characteristic of this group.

In certain fishes the accessory sacs have apparently been further

specialized for the production of mucus. This point has been

specially dealt with by Kyle in the case of Pleuronectids. To the

fishes mentioned by him should be added Merlucciws and Zeus, in

both of which the accessory sac and olfactory chamber were filled

with an abundance of coagulated mucus.

Physiological Summary.

From our knowledge of the structure of the olfactory organ, it

may be concluded that there are at least three means by which a

current of water may be brought to play upon the lamine of the

rosette. The first is by the action of cilia within the anterior

nostril and upon the lining membrane of the olfactory chamber

(Bateson, p. 230). This seems to be the only way in the Eels,

which are among the few fishes shown by Bateson to hunt their

food by smell, and is probably also in many other cases one of the

agents, though not the most important, in ensuring a constant

gentle flow of water over the rosette.

The second method is by the deflection of water into the nose-

cavity during forward progression. This may be effected by the

position and slope of wide-open nostrils to the horizontal, as in

Esox, but more frequently it is brought about bya hood or screen

upstanding behind the anterior nostril (Gadids, Carps). In this

case the force of the current is under the control of the fish, and

varies directly with the pace at which it is moving. In noses of

this type a further refinement is frequently met with in the form

of an internal flap that conducts the water-current right down

into the centre of the rosette.

The third method is by the alternate dilatation and compression

of accessory sacs connected usually with the hinder Da of the

olfactory chamber.

In the majority of cases these are acted upon by the movements

of the premaxilla and maxilla, occasionally (Capros, Clupea) by

those of the mandible, or (Siluroids) of the palatine bar, and in

several cases (where the lachrymal sac extends upon the buccal

membrane) by the general pressure of the water in the mouth

during expiration.

662 ON THE OLFACIORY ORGAN OF TELEOSTEAN FISHES. | May 25,

The currents produced normally by these sacs are rhythmical *,

flowing in and out of the nose as the fish gently opens and closes

its mouth in breathing, and may be compared to the air-currents

in the Mammalian nose during ordinary respiration. The strength

of the current must, however, be quite under the control of the

fish, for sudden and energetic movements of the jaws would

naturally produce corresponding sudden and strong currents in

the nose, comparable to a sniff. In noses of this class it is gene-

rally arranged by means of valves that the water shall enter by

the anterior nostril and leave by the posterior.

A study of the anatomy of these parts leaves little doubt that

their action is somewhat as stated above, but the facts detailed by

Bateson from direct observation of the living fish make it difficult

to account for the presence of these different and often elaborate

mechanical devices. He states, and his experiments are quite

conclusive, that practically all Teleostei seek their food by sight,

and apparently have no appreciation whatever of what we term

smells, so that it still remains an open question what their olfactory

organ is sensitive to, and what part in their economy it fills.

Apart from the essential structural identity of the fish olfactory

organ with that of higher Vertebrates, the mechanisms by which

the surrounding medium is brought to play upon their sensitive

membranes gently or violently at will are so closely analogous that

one would be almost compelled to regard their functions as also

essentially the same, did not Bateson’s observations prove beyond

question that the sense of smell in the ordinary sense of the word

is absent in the vast majority of fishes, and it is to be noticed that

it is just in those cases where it is absent that the mechanisms

for regulating the water-currents within the nose are the most

efficient.

It should, on the other hand, be observed that in a large number

of the more highly specialized fishes there is a close connection

between the nasal water-currents and the respiratory movements

of the jaws, a fact that suggests that the nose may have more to

do with respiration than with the discrimination of food, and

possibly may be of some use in testing the water used for.

respiration.

The Relation between the Structure of the Nose and

General Habit.

Although it is difficult to obtain accurate information concerning

the habits of sea-fishes, enough can be ascertained (Day’s ‘ British

Fishes,’ Cunningham’s ‘ Marketable Fishes,’ &c.) to roughly group

* In many fishes (Bateson, 7.c. p. 230) oscillating currents keeping time with the

movements of the jaws in respiration have been directly observed, but they are not

a necessary result of these movements, for although under normal conditions the two

go together, the current may stop while the respiratory movements continue.

Whether this depends upon a voluntary closure of the nostrils or what its explana-

tion may be there is at present no evidence to show.

(2 VAS MSVONS), ILI I NO

J.G.deM. del, April, 1909. Huth. Lith® London.

ALPHREUS EBHLERSI pe Man.

1909.] ON A NEW SPECIES OF CRAB FROM THE BAY OF BATAVIA. 663

the fishes dealt with in this paper into Bottom Fishes, Sluggish

Shallow-water Fishes, and Free-swimming Open-water Fishes.

When tabulated thus there is seen to be practically no con-

nection between the structure of the nose, particularly as regards

the presence or absence of accessory sacs, and the general life-

habit. Thus fishes of all habits may have accessory sacs (J/ullus,

Pleuronectids, Scomber, Herrings, Perch), or not (Hels, some

Siluroids, Carps, Pike, Scopelus, Gadus, Hxocetus). This is a

conclusion somewhat at variance with Kyle’s generalization, that

accessory sacs are characteristic of bottom or sluggish fishes as

opposed to free-swimming forms and are in the main adaptive

structures determined by habit.

On the contrary, it would appear from the above that they are

rather part of a general advance in structure, and belong, at least

in their most characteristic development, to families that have

reached the highest all-round development.

EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS IN THE TEXT-FIGURES.

A.N., anterior nostril. ADD.M., adductor mandibule. AOR., antorbital scutes.

AX., axis of rosette; AX.', its connection with lip of anterior nostril. B.M., buccal

membrane. C., central segment of lamina. CT., curtain-like extension of bridge

between nostrils. E., eye. E.MX.L., ethmo-maxillary ligament. ETH.P.A.,

ethmo-palatine articulation. ETH.S., ethmoidal nasal sac. FR., frontal. H., hood-

like process of posterior lip of anterior nostril. L., linguiform process of lamina.

LAC., lachrymal seute. L.ETH., lateral ethmoid; L.ETH.’, its articular process

for the lachrymal. LM., lamina. L.S., lachrymal nasal sac. MD., mandible.

METH., mesethmoid. MX., maxilla. N., nasal. N.S.,nasalsac. OL.B., olfactory

bulb. OL.C., olfactory cavity. OL.N., olfactory nerve. P., peripheral segment of

lamina. PA., palatine. P.MX., premaxilla; P.MX.A., palato-maxillary articu-

lation. P.PMX.L., palato-premaxillary ligament. P.N., posterior nares. R., rosette.

R.MX., retractor maxille. R.PMX., retractor premaxille. T., tentacle.

4. Description of a new Species of the Genus Alpheus Fabr.

from the Bay of Batavia. By J. G. pe Man*.

[Received April 30, 1909. |

(Plate LXX. tT)

ALPHEUS EHLERSII, sp. n.

Syn.: Alpheus macrochirus de Man, in Archiv fir Naturg.

53 Jahrg. (Berlin, 1888), p. 519.

A re-examination of the two specimens of Alpheus from the

island of Edam, Bay of Batavia, described by me (/. c.) under the

name of A. macrochirus Richters, not only proved that they had

been wrongly referred to that species, but also that they are the

representatives of a hitherto unknown form. This new species,

which I have the pleasure to dedicate to Professor Ehlers of

* Communicated by R. I. Pocock, F.LS., F.Z.S.

+ For explanation of the Plate see p. 666.

664 DR, J. G. DE MAN ON A NEW SPECIES [May 25,

Gottingen, who kindly enabled me to study the two specimens,

apparently belongs to the group “insignis” of Coutiére and is most

closely related to A. paracrinitus Miers, to A. paracrinitus Miers,

var. bengalensis Cout., and to A. lanceloti Cout., three species

inhabiting the Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes, though

the first of them was originally discovered at Goree Island,

Senegambia.

The larger specimen is 16°5 mm. long, the other 15 mm.

Rostrum acute, reaching to the distal fourth of the visible part of

basal antennular article; rostral carina obtuse, extending backward

to the base of the rounded, unarmed, orbital hoods, from which

it is separated by rather deep, though narrow grooves. On each

side of the rostrum, the frontal margin (Pl. LXX. fig. 1) bears a

rounded prominence, nearly as in A. superciliaris, but glabrous and

with the outer margin more oblique. Antennal and antennular

peduncles with spines and appendages nearly as in A. paracrinitus

bengalensis (Coutiére, Alpheidee Mald. and Laccad. Archip. 1905,

pl. Ixxxii. fig. 37). Second antennular article once and a half

longer than wide distally, a little longer than the visible part

of the lst and of the 3rd, which are of equal length; stylocerite

acuminate, reaching to the second fourth part of median article.

Carpocerite surpassing the antennule almost by the whole length

of 3rd article; the terminal spine of the scaphocerite, the outer

margin of which is slightly concave, is slightly curved inward

and reaches almost to midway between the extremities of both

peduncles; the terminal spine exceeds by a little more than one

third of its length the tip of the scale, which isa little shorter than

the inner peduncle. Basicerite with a small spine on the lower

side, not visible from above. Telson (Pl. LXX. fig. 2) nearly as in

A. paracrinitus var. bengalensis, but the outer angles of the slightly

prominent posterior margin obtuse. The length of the telson

equals in both specimens 31 times the width of the posterior

margin; the greatest width anteriorly is, in the larger specimen,

1:93 times, in the other just twice the width of posterior margin ;

in both specimens the spinules of the upper surface, which are

0-2 mm. long, are situated asin the var. bengalensis of A. para-

crinitus, the anterior pair anterior to the middle, the proportion

between the length of the telson and the distance of that pair from

the posterior margin being, in the larger specimen, 1°73, in the

other 1:85; the proportion between the distances of both pairs of

spinules from the posterior margin is, in the larger specimen, 1°6,

in the other 1°7.

Meropodite of larger chelipede twice as jong as wide; upper

margin unarmed at its extremity, infero-internal margin with a

small acute tooth at the apex and with seven small movable spi-

nules, 0:117 mm. long, inserted from the proximal extremity to the

distal third. Chela 8:4 mm. long, one third longer than the cara-

pace, 2°8 times longer than high, and somewhat compressed, its

thickness being in proportion to the height as 2°3 ; upper and lower

borders of the palm (Pl. LXX. fig. 3) nearly parallel, lower border

1909. ] OF CRAB FROM THE BAY OF BATAVIA. 665

rounded, slightly concave at the base of the immobile finger, thou gh

not emarginate or notched ; upper border also rownded, but pre-

senting, just behind the truncate distal extremity of the palm, a

narrow groove, running obliquely inward, though not continued on

to the inner surface of the palm ; this groove (Pl. LXX. fig. 3) runs

parallel with the oblique anterior end of the elliptical area. The

dactylus, a little longer than the immobile finger, measures almost

one third of the palm and almost one fourth of the whole length

of the chela; the palm is sparsely though distinctly punctate,

the inner surface anteriorly, like that of the immobile finger,

hairy, the outer surface of the latter longitudinally grooved. But

for the oblique groove on the upper border, the larger chela much

resembles that of A. paracrinitus var. bengalensis.

Meropodite of smaller chelipede like that of the larger, but the

infero-internal margin, though also with a small acute tooth at

the extremity, with only four or five movable spinules. Chela

5°55 mm. long, the larger chela once and a half as long as the other ;

the smaller chela (Pl. LXX. fig. 4), the fingers of which are about

as long as the palm, is 3°7 times longer than high, the palm twice

as long as high, with the upper border entire and rounded, like

the lower.

Meropodite of 2nd legs in the larger specimen 6 times, in the

other 6°85 times, longer than wide. In the larger specimen the

1st carpal segment, 5:3 times longer than thick, is just twice as

long as the 2nd, the 2nd twice as long as the 3rd and as the 4th,

which are of equal length, and the 5th a little shorter than the 2nd ;

the chela, the fingers of which are a little longer than the palm, is

almost twice as long as the 5th segment. In the other specimen

(Pl. LXX. fig. 5) the 1st carpal segment, 6°3 times longer than

thick, appears 2-44 times longer than the 2nd, and the 2nd, which

is slightly shorter than the 3rd and the 4th taken together, is as

long as the 5th; the chela, finally, the fingers of which are slightly

longer than the palm, is 1°8 times longer than the 5th segment.

The proportions of the 5th pair (Pl. LXX. fig. 6) are: Carpus 1;

meropodite 1:18; propodite 1:07. Meropodite 5:2 times, carpus

6 times, propodite 7 times longer than wide, these members with

rather long sete, and the propodite with the usual bristles ;

dactylus, as in A. paracrinitus, tapering, acuminate, 4 times as

long as wide at its base, slightly curved, simple, without any trace

of a secondary claw, and measuring just two-fifths of the propodite.

Unfortunately the legs of the 3rd and 4th pairs are absent in

both specimens, except one leg of the 4th pair in the younger

individual ; the meropodite is quite unarmed, the propodite carries

6 spinules, and the simple dactylus agrees with that of the 5th legs.

Alpheus paracrinitus Miers differs by the upper border of the

larger chela being entire, without a groove, by the different shape

of rostrum and frontal margin, by the shorter stylocerite, and

probably by other characters; A. lanceloti is a more different

species; and A. macrochirus Richters, finally, differs at first sight

by the flattened, triangular rostrum, by the longitudinal groove

666 ON AN ABNORMAL SKULL OF SPHENODON. [June 15,

on the upper border of the larger chela, there being here, no

transverse groove, by the stouter shape of the smaller chela, by

the dactyli of the 3rd and. following legs being armed with two

accessory claws, etc.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE LXX.

Alpheus ehlersii.

Fig. 1. Frontal and antennal region of the larger specimen, X 23.

Fig. 2. Telson of the same, X 23.

Fig. 3. Larger chela and carpus of the larger specimen_looked at from the inner

side, X 85.

Fig. 4. Smaller chelipede of the same, X &.

Fig. 5. Second leg of the younger specimen, X 11.

Fig. 6. Fifth leg of the larger specimen, X 23.

June 15, 1909.

Dr. A. Surrg Woopwaprb, F.R.S., Vice-President,

in the Chair.

Mr. H. W. Unthank, F.Z.S., exhibited a skull of Sphenodon

with two bones on each side in the nasal region, and made the

Text-fig. 214.

Sphenodon skull with abnormal nasal region.

a. Left median bone in nasal region.

6. Left external bone in nasal region.

following remarks :—“ In place of the usual single nasal on each

side there appear to be two bones, one near the median line, the

other more external, the line of division running from before

1909. | ON THE EARS OF AN ELEPHANT. 667

backwards (text-fig. 214). On sawing across the middle of the

nasal region the anterior part of the median pair of bones came

away with the premaxille and vomers, leaving the external bones

in situ. These show bevelled inner edges where they were

slightly overlapped by the median bones, so that the surface-

marking is that of a suture in the middle of what is usually a

single nasal bone.”

——

The Ears of an Elephant from British East Africa.

The Secretary exhibited the ears of an Elephant shot by

Mr. Sutton Timmis, F.Z.S., on the Guaso Ngishu Plateau, east

of Mt. Elgon, British East Africa. The ears of this elephant

(text-fig. 215) were elongated vertically, with an arched upper

Text-fig. 215.

Right ear of an Elephant (Elephas africanus peelt) from the Guaso Ngishu Plateau,

British East Africa, from a specimen shot by, and in the possession of, Mr. Sutton

Timmis, F.Z.S.

border, and a long, relatively narrow, and pointed lappet. The

general shape corresponded closely with that of the ears of the

élephant from the Aberdare Mountains, British Hast Africa,

figured by R. Lydekker (P.Z.S. 1907, p. 393, text-fig. 114).

The vertical: length (4 feet 9 inches) and the greatest breadth

668 PHOTOGRAPHS OF A SPOTTED BULL BANTIN. [June 18,

(3 feet 2 inches) were greater than the corresponding dimensions

of Mr. Peel’s specimen, described by Mr. Lydekker, and the ear

was relatively not quite so narrow, but the general formation was

closely similar. This new example confirmed Mr. Lydekker’s

diagnosis of H. a. peeit.

Mr. J. C. White, C.LE., C.M.Z.S., exhibited photographs of

a living specimen of a young Takin (Ludorcas) from Ghassa,

N.W. Bhutan. The photograph (text-fig. 216) had been taken

on board ship at Calcutta and the animal was to be presented to

Text-fig. 216.

Young male Takin (Budorcas taxicolor whitei).

the Society. The Secretary added that he had ascertained that

the Takin had reached Genoa in good condition and might be

expected at the Gardens about June 21st. It was the first Takin

that had reached Europe alive.

On behalf of Mr. R. Lydekker the Secretary exhibited photo-

graphs of a spotted bull Tsaine or Bantin shot by Mr. Arthur

Porter in the great forest of Siam in November 1908. The

tawny-coloured hair of this bull is flecked all over with small

1909. | ON A NEW RAT FROM GUATEMALA. 669

white spots, as is shown not only in the photograph (text-fig. 217),

but by a piece of the hide presented by Mr. Porter to the British

Museum. When noticing this animal in ‘ The Field’ newspaper

Mr. Lydekker suggested that the spotting might be a “ sport,” or

due to senility ; but since that date a second spotted Tsaine has

been killed by Mr. Elwes, a friend of Mr. Porter, in the same

forest. This considerably alters the case, although there is no

Text-fig. 217.

Spotted Bull Tsaine from Siam, photographed by Mr. Elwes.

information as to whether all adult male Siamese Tsaine are

flecked with white. As no such flecking has been recorded in

Burmese Tsaine (Bos sondaicus birmanicus), Mr. Lydekker ven-

tured to provisionally propose the name B. sondaicus porteri for

the Siamese Tsaine, taking the piece of hide in the British

Museum as the type.

A new Rat from Guatemala.*

Mr. Oldfield Thomas, F.R.S., F.Z.S., exhibited specimens of a

new Rat which had been obtained by Mr. G. C. Shortridge during

the collecting trip to Central America on which he had been

* [The complete account of this new species appears here, but the name anda

preliminary diagnosis were published in the ‘ Abstract,’ No. 73 (June 15, 1909).—

EpiTor. |

670 ON A NEW RAT FROM GUATEMALA. [June 15,

recently sent by the Society. The trip had been mainly organized

to obtain live animals, but it had been a definite part of

Mr. Shortridge’s duties to collect what study-specimens he could,

-and these had now been presented to the National Museum by

the Society.

The species was described as follows :—

OTOrYLOMYS GUATEMALS.

Thos. Abstr. P. Z.8. 1909, p. 32 (June 15).

Allied to O. phyllotis, but considerably larger.

Fur soft and fine. General colour above uniform greyish-brown

(vather browner than ‘“‘ mouse-grey ”); back darkened by black-

tipped hairs. Under surface white, not sharply defined laterally,

the majority of the hairs white to the roots, but down the centre

of the chest and belly many have slaty bases. Ears not specially

enlarged, naked, greyish. Hands and feet parti-coloured, the

centre of the metapodials slaty-brown, their sides and the digits

white ; in O. phyllotis the whole of the hands and feet are white.

Tail not so entirely naked as in the allied forms, as there are a

few scattered hairs along its under surface; grey above, rather

paler below, not contrasted or mottled. ;

Skull markedly larger in all dimensions than that of O. phyllotis,

but showing all the characters used by Dr. Merriam to distinguish

that animal from true 7'ylomys. The brain-case is, however,

deeper and the palatal foramina are not so large.

Molars with a low but well-marked supplementary cingular

ridge running transversely across in front of the anterior cusps, a

structure also found in O. phyllotis, but not in T’ylomys, nor, so far

as I know, in any other genus of Cricetine.

Dimensions of the type, measured in the flesh :—

Head and body 170 mm.; tail 161; hind foot (s. u.) 28; ear 16.

Skull—ereatest length 40°7; basilar length 31:5; greatest

breadth 20°5; nasals 15; interorbital breadth 6°7 ; breadth ACLOSS

parietal ridges 16°2; palatilar length 16°6; diastema 11; palatine

foramina 81 x 3°5; length of upper molar series 6°8 (in another

specimen 7:2).

Hab. Tucuru, Polochie R., about 50 miles E. of Coban, Guate-

mala.

Type. Adult female. B.M.no.9.6.11.13. Original number 4.

Collected 24 January, 1909, by G. C. Shortridge, and presented

by the Zoological Society.

This species is at once distinguishable from O. phyllotis by its

larger size, greyer colour, and parti-coloured feet, in which

respects, as In its smaller palatine foramina, it tends to approach

the members of Zylomys. It is smaller than O. fumeus Allen.

Mr. Thomas expressed his pleasure that the discovery of so

marked a new form had resulted from the dispatch of Mr. Short-

ridge to Central America, and hoped that the Society would

undertake many such expeditions in the future.

1909. ] ON A THEORY OF ATOLL FORMATION. 671

The Coral Island Question.

Dr. F. Wood Jones, F.Z.S., exhibited lantern-slides, models,

and specimens to illustrate the formation of coral structures. The

following is an abstract of his remarks :—

The full communication upon which the demonstration was

based will be reproduced in its complete form elsewhere. The

present note consists merely of a brief résumé of the problems

requiring solution, a criticism of those theories already advanced,

and a proposal of some new suggestions arising out of the study

of the atoll of Cocos Keeling. ;

(i.) Zhe problems demanding explanation.

A theory that is to be satisfactory must not be limited in its

application to any one form of coral structure, but must account

for the origin of all those forms of reef and island that are built

up of coral. It must take notice not only of the larger land

masses, and the more obvious geographical structures, but must

embrace the actual growth tendencies of the coral colonies them-

selves, for it is merely by an aggregation of such colonies that

these structures are made up. The submerged coral bank, the

barrier reef, the fringing reef, and the atoll must all receive an

adequate explanation ; and this explanation must be compatible

with the actual processes that may be observed to take place in

the individual colonies of a reef.

In the case of the atoll—the most highly developed of all the

coral structures—the theory must satisfactorily account for the

presence, and development, of all the several parts that enter into

its composition. Finally, no explanation must be considered as

adequate that carries us only to the stage of the developed atoll,

for it must also agree with, and account for, the tendencies of its

known after-history.

The problems connected with the development of the atoll are

to be correctly gauged only from a proper appreciation of the

whole of its structure. The explaining of the origin of an

extensive coral reef situated upon a large ocean plateau, the

mere raised rim of which constitutes dry land, is a problem

different from that involved in accounting for a ring of islands,

when these islands are supposed to be the summit of an abruptly

rising oceanic peak.

The question of the actual contour of the elevation of the

ocean floor upon which the atoll itself takes origin, is a very

important one; and, in the case of the Cocos Keelings, the

soundings of the cable routes have accurately determined the true

proportions of this island basis. In this case, the bank that rises

from the bed of the ocean is by no means a steep one, and it is

only the drop from the reef edge into comparatively trivial depths

that may be termed at all abrupt. For the rest, the basis consists

of a gradually shelving slope of Globigerina and Radiolarian ooze

672 DR. F. WOOD JONES ON A [June 15,

which does not reach 3000 fathoms—or ocean depths—till over 100

miles are traversed from the atoll. The summit of this long ridge

is composed of Globigerina ooze, and for ten miles from the reef

edge—that is to a depth of 2000 fathoms—the gradient of the

bank is 1 in 5. From this point on, to a distance of 50 miles

from the reef, the slope is about 1 in 80, and then for the next

50 miles or so, at 1 in 100 to the ocean depths of Radiolarian

ooze. The presence of this great bank of ooze demands an

explanation. Upon this submarine plateau there is a coral-reef,

and it is necessary to explain how the bank becomes a suitable

site for coral growth—since we know that the bathymetrical

range of reef-building corals is slight ; and also to account for this

limitation of the extension of reef-coral life in the depths of

the sea.

We know that on such banks such reefs exist below the surface

of the sea, and (from the soundings of Admiral Sir J. W. L.

Wharton) we also know that, before they reach the surface,

their margins are raised above the level of their central area.

These are Darwin’s “drowned atolls,” and if his theory of the

development of coral structures be not accepted, any new theory

must take cognisance of these basin-shaped reefs. Another

typical feature is the level plateau of coral breccia that forms the

barrier reef and shore platform of the atoll, and that—although it

does not appear to be recognized—runs uninterrupted beneath the

surface of the islands, and outcrops upon the lagoon shore. To

this whole platform of consolidated coral conglomerate I have

given the name of the Lreccia Platform, for its subdivision into

barrier reef, shore platform, lagoon breccia, &c. is artificial, and

ignores the fact that these parts are all in continuity, being

really one level stratum upon which the islands rest as mere

débris piles. The breccia Platform of an atoll runs as a con-

tinuous structure round the whole extent of the ring, save where

the lagoon extrance exists.

The origin of the Breccia Platform must be made clear, and

its presence as a continuous layer beneath the surface of the

islands needs explanation. It is the normal state of affairs for

the entrance to the lagoon to be situated upon the lee side of the

atoll and this requires explanation, as do also the facts that some

atolls are perfect circles with no entrance to the lagoon, while

some have a pseudo-entrance to the windward.

In some atolls, each constituent island of the ring is itself an

atollon and encloses its own lagoonlet ; in others, certain of the

islands only become atollons, or some, er all, of the islands are

crescent-shaped, and are only approximations to the eircular form.

These conditions are obviously the outcome of the actions of

forces very similar to, or identical with, those that formed the

parent atoll, and the explanation of its formation should also be

applicable to the cases of the constituent islands.

Observations extending over a long period of time may be

recorded of several atolls, and in these cases it is usual to find

1909. ] THEORY OF ATOLL FORMATION. 673

that the lagoon tends to become steadily more shallow, while the

actual growth of coral upon its bottom actually diminishes. In

some cases, and in certain stages of atoll development, this change

takes place rapidly, so that in the human history of the atoll

great alterations have taken place in jagoon configuration. Again,

the lagoons of many atollons, and of some atolls, become entirely

obliterated and dry land joins island to island across the ring.

The theory that furnishes an explanation for the origin of these

structures must not be in opposition to this known fact of their

after history. Some high oceanic islands possess a reef that

surrounds their coast-line and is a mere outskirt to their land ;

while, in some cases, the reef stands out from the shore, and a

channel of shallow water intervenes between the shore-line and

the reef. These features must be accounted for, for the near-

shore reef and the outstanding reef are evidently very similar

formations to the reef that is seen as the seaward margin of the

breccia platform of atolls.

Finally, colonies of Porites, and other corals of a massive habit

of growth, tend, with their increase of size, to become first

flattened at the top and then basin-shaped,—only the outer edge

of the top of the colony being a raised rim of living coral. This

formation is strangely like an atoll in miniature, and its develop-

ment must be carefully studied.

(ii.) The theories put forward to explain these problems and a

discussion of some observed facts that tend to contradict

them.

(a) The Theory of Subsidence ; first brought forward by Darwin

in 1837 (Proc. Geol. Soc. vol. il. p. 552). In this theory the

sinking of the land basis was the cause of all the typical features

of fully developed coral structures.

The oceanic bank is assumed to be the remains of old land sunk

beneath the waves. The steps of development are as follows. An

oceanic island is situated in a sea the conditions of which, such

as constant temperature &c., permit the flourishing of the reef-

building corals. The coral colonies grow around its shores wherever

the submarine slope furnishes foothold within their bathymetrical

range. Theisland becomes surrounded by a reef. The process of

subsidence causes the island to sink slowly beneath the waves. The

reef continues to grow upwards, especially at its outer edge, for

Darwin said that better aeration by waves, and more abundant

food, nourished the outer colonies ; there is no compensation for the

_ sinking land, and the island becomes surrounded by a moat, girt

about by an outstanding coral-reef. The process goes on: the

land finally sinks within, and the reef—upon which islands are

afterwards developed—encloses a lagoon in which the original

island has disappeared. Finally, when subsidence is too rapid for

the upgrowth of the coral-reef to keep pace with it, the whole

structure sinks beneath the waves as a reef with raised margins—-

Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1909, No. XLVI. 46

674 DR. F. WOOD JONES ON A [June 15,

a “drowned atoll.” The theory is wonderfully complete and

embraces every form of coral structure. Many observed facts have,

however, been accumulated since its first proposal, and many of

these observations tend to make the theory untenable.

Atolls are known to exist on land areas actually rising—“ high

islands” and “low islands” exist in the same neighbourhood ;

and some atolls bear unmistakable signs in their own structure

of actual elevation having taken place during their formation.

(Semper.)

The undermining of trees and the denudation of shore-lines

do not necessarily indicate subsidence, for they are inconstant

effects, and an area of land denudation is compensated for by an

area of land construction at another part of the island rmg. The

lagoon does not tend to become deeper as time goes on, nor do

its shores tend to become constantly denuded by their sinking

beneath the waves; but lagoons tend to shoal, and lagoon shores

to encroach upon the waters of the lagoon. ‘‘ Drowned atolls”

are not necessarily final stages of atoll sinking, for they may be

early stages of atoll making.

It is not to be assumed that subsidence, like a conflagration,

obliterates its own evidences, for were subsidence to have been a

factor in the formation of the Cocos atoll, the Breccia Platform

would inevitably show its workings.

Since the outer edge of the Breccia Platform is the most

recently formed part, and its inner edge is its most ancient part ;

and since, in its whole extent, it embraces portions laid down

throughout an enormous period of time: it is evident that the

level of its outer edge should be higher than that of its inner

edge, if subsidence had occurred—and this is not found to he

the case.

The fact that atolls tend to be elongated along the line in which

the group to which they belong is stretched (Sollas, Brit. Ass.

1893) does not necessarily indicate that subsidence has caused the

sinking of a long ridge of oceanic land, for since the wind has a

great influence in atoll shaping (Kramer, Hedley, &ec.), the wind

that shapes the individual atoll tends to shape the whole group.

(b) The Theory of Solution; first brought forward by Sir John

Murray in 1880 (Proce. Roy. Soc. Edin. April 5th, 1880). Between

the date of the publication of Darwin's theory and the framing of

this hypothesis, several new observations had been made, and

some of these were of such a nature as to tend to disprove the

earlier theory, and some of them greatly simplified the problem.

Tt was known that banks did exist in the sea upon which reef-

corals might conveniently start their building. This knowledge

was not available in Darwin’s time.

In Sir John Murray’s hypothesis these banks are assumed to

be probably volcanic in origin and to be afterwards clothed with

Globigerina-ooze. The reef is formed upon the bank when the bank

is of a convenient depth, and the corals of the outer edge grow

more luxuriantly because they are better fed. The central parts

1909. ] THEORY OF ATOLL FORMATION. 675

of the reef are gradually removed by solution of dead coral-rock

owing to the action of carbonic acid gas dissolved in sea-water.

The lagoon is caused by the solution of the calcium carbonate

of the coral colonies within its limits, and so the atoll shape is

developed.

The existence of such banks in the open ocean is, of course,

undoubted, but the evidence that they are all volcanic seems to

be lacking: that they are clothed with Globigerma-ooze is well

known from many observations.

That carbonic acid gas in sea-water can dissolve calcareous

skeletons of coral colonies and other marine animals is a well

ascertained fact, but that the process forms atoll lagoons is a

mere hypothesis. The work of Murray, Irvine, and Ross shows

that at greater depths the power of solution of sea-water is greater

than at the surface: an explanation is therefore needed for the

non-solution of the base of the island bank, while the process

proceeds so rapidly at lesser depths as to form deep lagoons on its

summit.

That calcareous matter suspended (but not dissolved) in the

sea-water is swept in great quantities from lagoon outlets is true,

as Sir John Murray observed; but it is also true that at the

inlets it pours into the lagoon in such quantities that in Cocos

atoll Dr. H. B. Guppy (himself an advocate of the solution theory)

estimated that 5000 tons of sand and débris were washed in and

deposited about the lagoon margins every year.

The deposition of calcareous matter carried in suspension in the

water takes place more rapidly in the lagoon than does its removal.

It is true that coconut palms are seen to overhang the waters of

the lagoon as though the shore had been dissolved from about their

roots: the fallacy of this argument has long been made evident

when it is used as a support for the Theory of Subsidence, and is

no less evident when urged to support the Theory of Solution.

It is an accurate observation that the islets on a reef are

commonly situated nearer to the lagoon shore than to the seaward

edge, but this is the outcome of their method of making by the

waves, and by the outward extension of the reef, and does not

necessarily indicate that matter has been removed from within.

If it be granted that the waters of the lagoon might be specially

favourable to the action of the processes of solution: it remains

to be explained why the central portions of a reef, twenty fathoms

under water, are dissolved more rapidly than are the outer margins.

Until this explanation is supplied, basin-shaped reefs or “ drowned

atolls” do not become any easier to account for. The Solution

Theory is urged to account for the formation of lagoons, and to

explain how they become ‘widened and deepened”; but the

widening and deepening of lagoons is contrary to experience, for

narrowing and shallowing is the common fate of lagoons.

Granting that solution proceeds rapidly in lagoons, it still must

be remembered that calcium carbonate is deposited from solution

in large quantities within the lagoon area. Lagoon sandstone

46*

676 DR. F. WOOD JONES ON A [June 15,

is entirely a product of the lagoon, and so is the lagoon con-

glomerate ; and both of these substances depend for their construc-

tion on the deposition of calcium carbonate around particles held in

close contact. Again, fragments of dead colonies that are trundled

up and down the lagoon shores by every tide, are commonly made

more hard and more heavy by a rich deposit of calcium. carbonate

in the interstices of their structure. Finally, if solution of

calcium carbonate is taking place within the confines of the lagoon,

its action must be a feeble one, for in the Cocos lagoon are wide

areas covered by dead coral colonies, killed, as we definitely know,

in 1876; and these dead masses have resisted solution during the

past 30 years.

Gii.) Suggestions put forward by the Author to explain the

development of Coral structures.

Asan outcome of observations made on the Cocos-Keeling atoll,

it is suggested that the process of ‘‘Sedimentation” takes the

largest share in the production of most of the stages of an atoll’s

history. The bed of the open ocean is composed of matter that

has fallen from the surface ; sedimentation is always taking place

all over the ocean. In certain places, sometimes owing perhaps to

the influence of oceanic currents, sometimes to the presence of an

already existing elevation upon the ocean bottom, this sediment

will tend to make ridges or banks. Many such banks are known

to exist in the depths of the sea.

What may be the nature of the original elevation that has

become covered by this deposit of Globigerina and Pteropod ooze,

we do not know. Whatever their original nature they become

essentially ‘“‘ Sedimentation ” banks.

The question then arises as to where beneath the surface of the

sea will the building of banks by sedimentation become arrested.

The answer may be partly given by determining where wave

action ceases to be felt below the surface of the sea, and the data

to be derived from published observations on this point show the

level to be somewhat inconstant. Its variability would be con-

fidently expected, for waves vary enormously in their size and in

their power to stir the underlying water. Yet we know that there

is some point between the surface of the ocean and the bottom,

above which the action of waves is felt and sediment will not

come to rest in open ocean, and below which there is no wave

stirring and sediment may rest and build banks and raise the

ocean bottom. This point is considered important; and the plane

in which this' line of stasis occurs is named the limiting line of

sedimentation. It is therefore to the limiting line of sediment-

ation that banks formed by sediment may be raised. <A bank

so raised would rise to such a plane, but could not go beyond it,

for the wave motion would keep the particles moving, and thus

level out the top of the bank and flatten it, so that it formed a

plateau at the level of the limiting line of sedimentation. It is

1909. | THEORY OF ATOLL FORMATION. 677

claimed that the bathymetrical limit of the reef-building corals is

intimately associated, if not coincident, with the limiting line of

sedimentation, and that it is therefore a var iable plane depending

on the local conditions of the sea. The reasons for this coicidence

are to be found in the study of the living corals themselves ;

and I have come to the conclusion that the presence of matter

suspended in the water is the most potent factor in determining

the unsuitability of an environment for coral life. Where sedi-

ment is at all times liable to fall upon the living zooids, reef-corals

will not flourish : we would therefore not look for their luxuriant

presence below the limiting line of sedimentation. In the wave-

stirred area above this line, however, they can and do flourish.

We therefore arrive at the presumption that sediment can build

banks up to this hypothetical line, and reef-corals can build banks

from this line up to the surface of the sea. There is therefore no

reason why coral colonies should not settle upon the bank and

start the development of a reef. Asa matter of fact several other

forms of life that possess calcareous skeletons outrun the reef-

corals in bathymetrical range, and it is likely that they (calcareous

alge, deep water corals, &e.) first populate the summit of the

bank.

The process now becomes less a matter for hypothesis and more

one for actual observation, for the growth tendencies of reefs and

of colonies may be more easily studied. It is claimed that the

tendency is for such reefs to become “ basin-shaped reefs,” and

to develop as flat banks, with edges raised from their general

surface and abundantly covered with coral colonies. The chief

factor in this process is again the action of sedimentation. The

surface waters still drop their burden of suspended matter over

the reef, and it is deposited upon the uneven surface of the coral

colonies, for, though it could no longer come to rest upon the

open sedimentation bank, it more easily finds a lodgment upon

the broken coral surface of the reef. At the edges of the reef the

sediment becomes more easily washed off by wave action, and the

corals of the circumference of the reef flourish most.

To obtain a concrete picture of the process it is only necessary

to turn to the colonies to be found any day in quiet pools in which

sediment is accumulating. A colony of Porites grows as a

spherical mass. In time it develops to sucha size that its rounded

upper surface becomes sufficiently flat to afford a lodgment for

sediment. Then the activity of its central zooids wanes, and, by

the upgrowth of the peripheral ones, the flatteningincreases. At

length the central area dies—the zooids choked by sediment,—and

a raised ring of active living zooids surrounds a central depressed

area—an atoll in miniature.

That this process is not due to the colony reaching tide-level

(Darwin, Semper) is proved by the abundant finding of such

colonies developed many feet below the level to which the tide

ever falls.

The process that may be seen any day in the myriad colonies

678 ON A THEORY OF ATOLL FORMATION. [June 15,

around an atoll, is presumed also to occur on the reef as a whole,

for it is merely a question of substituting colonies for individual

zooids to picture the development of the submerged basin-shaped

reef.

The basin-shaped reef continues to grow upwards until tide

limit arrests the growth of its margins. At this stage the waves

begin to act upon it and hammer fragment against fragment

with the production of a quantity of coral débris at the point of

maximum intensity of the waves. This débris becomes cemented

into solid breccia by the deposition of calcium carbonate around

the particles that compose it. This is the beginning of the breccia

platform, and its origin may be looked for upon the windward side;

and on that side it will always remain best developed.

The breccia platform follows the raised rim of the reef in its

development, and forms a level, solid, conglomerate crescent, upon

which the waves break at low tide. Upon this platform some

waves of unusual violence will hurl fragments broken from the

reef margin, and these masses will be left stranded upon the

platform when the force of the waves can trundle them no

further.

This is the beginning of the island, and this process also may

be expected to originate at the windward side and to be always

most perfectly developed there. Any fragment thrown upon the

breccia platform is potent to bring about an important change,

for it initiates a process that may be seen anywhere when an

obstacle is placed in the line of a current of water that carries any

sediment in its stream. The current impinges on the impediment

and its burden of sediment is deposited in stream lines from its

extremities (Hadley and Dr. Guppy). In this way the form of

the island tends to hecome that of a crescent.

The piling up of fragments will follow the line of the breccia

platform, and so will take place asa part of the circumference of a

circle or a horse-shoe. At the lee side, the waves will not have

sufficient force to construct a breccia platform or pile débris upon

it, so the lagoon entrance is situated upon this side. When the

wind blows in opposite directions for two definite seasons, as in

the Monsoon area, the action may be equalised all round the reef-

edge, and so the atoll be a completed ring and each of its con-

stituent islands be perfect atollons. In the Trade area, how-

ever, the uniformity of the wind will produce a horseshoe-shaped

atoll, elongated in the line of the wind, with crescentic islands

on its windward side. When the atoll structure is once developed,

the enciosed lagoon tends to become the resting-place of a vast

amount of sediment, formed by the disintegration of coral frag-

ments by the force of the waves. The method of the deposition

of this sediment is important.

As waves rush over the breccia platform in the intervals between

adjacent islands, the current becomes slowed at the sides of the

inlet, and sand is deposited in stream lines from the extremities

of the islands, helping to increase more and more their crescent

1909. ] ON SKULLS OF SOUTH-AFRICAN FOSSIL REPTILES, 679

form. In the middle of the interval between two islands the

inrushing current sweeps on farthest, and its burden of sand is

dropped in the lagoon opposite the gap in the island ring.

This process accounts for the existence of those atolls that have

the most land upon their leeward side, and an entrance guarded by

a breccia platform upon their windward side. The sand swept in

at their windward side is deposited upon the lee side of the lagoon

(af it be a small one) and comes to rest in the original lagoon

entrance. The entrance becomes blocked up, and a wide belt of

land is formed upon the lee side of the atoll; but no barrier

reef exists upon the lee side.

As sand is deposited in the lagoon it tends to obliterate the

coral growth, and so a lagoon, that at first tended to become

shallow by the upgrowth of coral colonies, ultimately becomes

devoid of living coral, and to shoal entirely by the deposition of

sediment. In the Cocos-Keeling atoll, the history since 1825

shows a steady filling-in of the lagoon. The continuation of the

process that formed the perfect atoll, therefore, tends to obliterate

the lagoon. The lagoon shores gain on the lagoon water, and

banks rise up in its shallower parts; the windward side of the

lagoon, if it be of large size, being the first portion to become

obliterated. i

The explanation of the origin of fringing reefs follows the same

lines. On any platform that lies above the linviting line of sedi-

mentation, reef-corals will develop, when the conditions of the

water are suitable. Fringing reefs are merely reefs taking origin

upon the submarine slopes of oceanic land, when these slopes afford

a foothold in the wave-stirred area.

Barrier-reefs were explained in 1856 by Prof. Le Conte as being

fringing reefs of which the growth was “ limited on one side by

the muddiness of the water, and on the other by the depth.” In

1884 Dr. Guppy independently furnished the same explanation.

This explanation, which is an isolated and discordant thing when

“Subsidence” or ‘ Solution” is taken as accounting for atoll

formation, becomes of consequence, and falls into line with other

ascertained facts, when the importance of ‘‘Sedimentation ” is

appreciated.

Dr. R. Broom, C.M.Z.S., exhibited an unborn fetus of

Chrysochloris hottentota, and two young specimens of C. asiatica,

one probably only a couple of days old, and made some remarks

on the habits and life-history of the Cape Moles.

Dr. R. Broom, C.M.Z.S., also exhibited the skulls of two

South African fossil reptiles—Lycosuchus vanderrieti and Bauria

cynops. The former is from the Karroo Beds of Middle Permian

age, and is the most perfect Therocephalian skull as yet discovered.

Since Owen’s order Theriodontia was found to contain two well-

‘

680 DR. R. BROOM ON THE ORGAN [June 15,

marked groups of mammal-like reptiles, it has become necessary

to subdivide the group, forming either two new orders or two sub-

orders. The older group, which is confined to Permian beds, has

a single occipital condyle and a Rhynchocephalian palate, and has

been named Therocephalia. The other group, which is restricted

to Upper Triassic beds, has two occipital condyles and a mammal-

like secondary palate, and usually complex molars. This group

should retain Owen’s original name Cynodontia. Doubtless the

later group is descended from the earlier, and Bawria, though a

Cynodont, to some extent forms a connecting link. The

Cynodonts are of exceptional interest, as there is little doubt the

mammals have arisen from one of the members.

The following papers were read :—

1. On the Organ of Jacobson in Orycteropus.

By R. Broom, D.Sc., C.M.Z.S.

[Received June 3, 1909. |

(Plate LXXI.*)

About 1898, in studying the comparative anatomy of the organ

of Jacobson in Mammals, I observed that throughout whole groups

the structure and relations of the organ varied very little, and

that as the organ seemed to be less affected by change of habits

than almost any other, it was of great importance in revealing the

obscured affinities of aberrant forms. It was seen that, notwith-

standing the enormous differences in most points between the

Ungulates, the Carnivora, the Chiroptera, and the Insectivora, the

same type of organ is found in all, while a markedly different

type is found in all Rodents, and athird type in Dasypus. When

the aberrant Macroscelides was examined, it was found that the

organ was not at all like that of the normal Insectivores but

almost typically Marsupial, showing that though for convenience

the Elephant-shrew is placed with the Insectivora it has probably

little real affinity with them.

Owing to the apparently isolated position occupied by Orycte-

ropus, as shown by its dentition and numerous other characters,

I had long been anxious to examine its organ of Jacobson, but it

is only quite recently that I have had an opportunity of so doing,

when, through the kindness of Dr, Péringuey, of the South

African Museum, I obtained the head of a recently born

specimen.

The organ and its relations have been studied by means of

transverse sections, so that a comparison is easily made with the

large number of other mammals in which the organ has been

similarly studied.

* For explanation of the Plate see p. 683.

12 AS, UBIOG. Jel, Ib NOC.

R.B. del.

West,Newman chr.

ORGAN OF JACOBSON IN ORYCTEROPUS.

1909.] OF JACOBSON IN THE ANT-BEAR. 681

Owing to the absence of well developed incisors the pre-

maxillary bone is feeble and the palatine papilla far forward.

The papilla is rather small and has no trace of a supporting

cartilage. The naso-palatine, which is unusually long and passes

for some distance nearly directly backwards, opens by the side of

the papilla.

A transverse section through the plane of the papilla shows the

nasal cavity completely surrounded by cartilage, the nasal septum

below being continued into the nasal-floor cartilage and this

laterally into the alinasal.

Fig. 3 on Pl. LX XI. shows a section a little behind the papilla.

The nasal-floor cartilage is here seen still attached to the nasa!

septum but distinctly specialised. The lower glandular ridge of

the septum (/.g.7.) is seen cut across. The premaxilla has not yet

given off its palatine process. The naso-palatine canal is seen

under the inner part of the premaxilla.

Fig. 4 is some distance behind fig. 3. The nasal-floor cartilage

is free at its outer edge from the alinasal, and the palatine process

is now seen distinct from the premaxilla.

Fig. 5 is only a short distance behind fig. 4. The naso-palatine

canal is seen curving up to open into the organ of Jacobson, and

the nasal-floor cartilage is dividing into an inner and outer part.

The palatine process of the premavxilla is of large size. Above and

to the inner side is a small ossification which may be the remains

of the prevomer. It is, however, very closely connected with the

anterior end of the true vomer and may have no morphological

significance. The anterior end of the maxilla is seen between the

premaxilla and its palatine process.

Fig. 1 is a section across the whole nasal cavity a very short

distance behind the plane of fig. 5. The premaxilla is seen to be

well developed. At the upper part of the section the anterior

part of the nasal is shown, both parts of the bifurcated end being

seen. The nasal septum is slender and the alinasal continued

round the upper and outer part of the cavity. The inferior

turbinal is cut across near its anterior end. On the inner side

of the alinasal is a small plate of cartilage (r.w.t.) of doubtful

significance. It is not attached to any other cartilage and would

appear to bea rudimentary superior turbinal. Near the middle of

the nasal septum is seen a well-developed upper glandular ridge

which runs along the septum. The nasal-floor cartilage is now

seen in three portions, the middle one of which is the outer bar of

Jacobson’s cartilage. The anterior end of the organ is seen cut

across, and below it the naso-palatine canal passing on to the

nasal cavity.

A little behind this plane the outer bar is seen uniting with the

base of the inner part of Jacobson’s cartilage and giving rise to the

V-shaped section seen in fig. 6.

Fig. 6 shows the condition much behind fig. 1, and near the

middle of the organ.

Fig. 2 isa more enlarged figure of the organ and its related

682 ON THE ORGAN OF JACOBSON IN THE ANT-BEAR. [June 15,

structures taken some little distance behind fig. 6. It will be

seen that in both figures the organ is oval in section and that

the ciliated epithelium is found all round, the most specialised

portion being on the upper and inner sides. The greater part of

the cartilaginous groove is filled by a huge venous plexus quite

irregularly arranged. There is a fairly large artery, numerous

nerves and a little glandular tissue. On passing further back the

gland-tissue becomes much more abundant and the organ becomes

reduced to a narrow duct. Jacobson’s cartilage near the posterior

end is reduced to a flat plate.

In the relations of the organ perhaps the most striking point is

the absence of any developments of the nasal-floor cartilage to

support the naso-palatine canal. Thus Orycteropus differs from

all the Kutheria except the Edentata as exemplified by Dasypus,

and the aberrant Insectivore J/acroscelides. Even from the pri-

mitive Ungulates such as Procavia or Sus it differs so greatly as

to suggest that any supposed Ungulate affinities must be extremely

remote.

The Rodents form, so far as the organ of Jacobson is concerned,

a group by themselves, but this group also must be very remote

from Orycteropus. We are thus forced to seek for the affinities

among the more primitive mammals—the Edentates, Marsupials,

and Monotremes.

Besides agreeing with these early mammals in the absence of

cartilaginous developments for the support of the naso-palatine

canal, it further agrees with them in having preserved the outer

cartilaginous bar which is probably the remains of the turbinal

of the organ.

In the Edentata the organ has been described only in Lasypus

and a few notes have been made in the ease of Manis. Dasypus

differs entirely from Orycteropus in having the organ opening into

the nasal cavity and not into the naso- palatine canal and in many

other details. J/anis agrees with Orycteropus in having a long

naso-palatine canal and in the organ opening into it, but in the

absence of figures or detailed description it is impossible at present

to say how far the agreement extends.

On the whole the condition in Orycteropus comes nearest to that

in the Marsupials, but there are many points of difference, of which

the most important are (1) the absence of the papillary cartilage,

and (2) absence of a cartilaginous support to the lower glandular

ridge. Less important are the shape of the organ, its mode of

opening into the naso-palatine canal, and the very irregular venous

plexus. In the structure of the nasal-floor cartilage there is some

resemblance to Hehidna, but this latter has the organ and its

cartilages so much better developed that comparisons become

difficult.

The evidence from the study of this region would seem to point

to Orycteropus being descended from a line of ancestors the earlier

members of which were probably allied to Marsupials, whilst the

later members branched off from the Eutherian stem before any

1909. ] ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE LESSER ANTEATER. 683

of the higher Eutherian types had been specialised. If the

Orycteropus line ever coincided with that of Dasypus the two

must very early have diverged.

My thanks are due to Dr. Péringuey for the specimen, and to

Prof. Graham Kerr for the use of his laboratory while making

the sections.

References to Literature.

R. Broom.—‘ A Contribution to the Comparative Anatomy of the

Mammalian Organ of Jacobson.” Tr. Roy. Soc. Edin., 1898.

R. Broom.—“ On the Comparative Anatomy of the Marsupial

Organ of Jacobson.” Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8. W., 1897.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE LXXI.

Fig. 1. Transverse section of snout of Orycteropus afer. X 5.

Fig. 2. Transverse section of Organ of Jacobson of Orycteropus afer. X 40.

Figs. 3-6. Transverse sections of lower part of snout of Orycteropus afer. XX 7.

a., artery; g., gland; g.d., gland-duct ; z.¢., inferior turbinal; J.c., Jacobson’s

cartilage; J.o., Jacobson’s organ; /.d., lachrymal duct ; /.9.7., lower glandular ridge ;

Mze., maxilla; 2., nerve; Wa., nasal; 72.p.c., naso-palatine canal; 2.s., nasal septum ;

0.b.J.c., outer bar of Jacobson’s cartilage; Pma., premaxilla; p.Pmex., palatine pro-

cess of premaxilla; 7.w.¢., rudimentary upper turbinal; w.g.7., upper glandular

ridge; Vo., vomer.

2. On some Points in the Structure of the Lesser Anteater

(Tamandua tetradactyla), with Notes on the Cerebral

Arteries of Myrmecophaga and on the Postcaval of

Orycteropus. By Frank E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.,

F.Z.S., Prosector to the Society.

[Received May 20, 1909. |

(Text-figures 218-225.)

In April of the present year I dissected an example of this

Edentate in which the blood-vessels were filled with blood, and

which was so little diseased that all the viscera and their con-

necting ligaments were in a perfectly normal state. The excellent

condition of the animal led me to take comprehensive notes con-

cerning the principal viscera ; and as there are still some lacune

in the published accounts of the anatomy of this little Anteater,

and a few organs have not, so far as I can ascertain, been examined

at all, I have prepared a short account of such facts as appear to

me to be new. Although the anatomy of Zamandua has not up

tothe present been exhaustively studied, we are in possession of a

good deal of knowledge concerning its structure. Duvernoy*,

* Mém. Soc. Hist. Nat. Strasbourg, 1830, vol. i. This memoir is only descriptive

of the tongue of Tamandua (and of the tongues of some other animals, e. g., Echidna,

Chameleon).

684 MR. F, E. BEDDARD ON THE [June 15,

Chatin *, W. A. Forbes Tt, Rapp <, and Flower § have dealt with

various points in its anatomy, the first three having occupied

themselves chiefly with the salivary glands, tongue, and associated

structures, while Flower has given in his well-known lectures at

the Royal College of Surgeons. a general account of the alimentary

canal in which a number “of facts. are mentioned for the first time.

A good many anatomical details are given in the monograph of

Rapp; but only the external form, the skull, and the tongue are

figured by that anatomist. In fact it is the tongue and the

salivary glands which have engaged the attention of most of

those who have occupied themselves with the structure of this

Edentate. As to the intestine, the folds which are so cha-

racteristic of this animal and J/yrmecophaga are apparently not

mentioned by Rapp. He does refer, however, to the fine net-

work of a more minute character which is formed by the mucous

membrane of the intestine. Of this he remarks that it cannot be

altered by stretching the gut. I shall refer in the proper place

more particularly to the memoir of Hyrtl|| upon the arterial

system, who figures the arteries of the brain and of the limbs.

The results obtained by Hyrtl from his examination are referred

to by Tandler 4 in his important memoir upon the arteries of the

brain in a series of TATUNG. The placenta of Tamandua is

described by Milne-Edwards**. I have myself tt referred tothe

alimentary canal of this enunes which is formed upon a simple

plan like that of certain other lower mammals, the continuous

mesentery of the reptiles being preserved without any of the

secondary connections which are found in most other mammals.

The gut had been also, and previously, described by Mitchell £2

The muscular anatomy is fully described by Windle and Parsons$$§,

who quote previous literature. It is noteworthy that these authors,

although they naturally include Zamandua and Myrmecophaga in

the same family, find, nevertheless, some myological differences

between them.

The brain is described by Elliot Smith |||, and some of its

arteries by myself 4%. Upon this matter I have an additional

observation to make, and am able to compare the arterial system of

the brain in the genus Zamandua with that of Wyrmecophaga. The

specimen of Z’amandua which I described is in the Museum of the

Royal College of Surgeons. I have now some notes to offer upon °

a second example, which died in 1905, and of which the brain was

* Ann. Sci. Nat. (5) xiii.

+ “On some points in the Anatomy of the Great Anteater (IZyrmecophaga

Jubata),” P. Z.S. 1882, p. 287.

t{ ‘Die Edentaten,’ Tubingen, 1852. § Medical Times and Gazette, 1872.

i Denkschr. k.-k. Akad. Wien, vi. 1854. @ Tbid. \xvu. 1898.

** Comptes Rendus Acad. Sci. Paris, 1xxiii. 1871, p. 1386.

++ P.Z.S. 1908, p. 570.

it Trans. Z. 8S. xvi. 1905, p. 455 & p. 457, fig. 11.

S§ P.Z.S. 1899, pp. 314 & 990.

||| Cat. Phys. Series Mus. Roy. Coll. Surgeons, vol. 11. ond ed. (London, 1902)

p. 288; and Trans. Linn. Soc. vil. 1899, p. 293.

qq “On the Arteries at the Base of ae Brain in certain Animals,” P. Z.S. 1904,

vol. 1. p. 188.

1909. ] STRUCTURE OF THE LESSER ANTEATER. 685

injected. Iam able to compare this brain with that previously

described. It is interesting to notice that there are no important

differences between the two brains in respect of their arterial

system, which tends to inspire confidence in the fixity of this

character. The rhcmboidal space at the end of the medulla,

formed by the division and subsequent reuniting of the basilar

artery, was identical in the two specimens. In his figure of the

cerebral arteries of this animal, Hyrtl* has not represented the

space referred to; so that there may be some variation. He has,

however, noted-—and I find that the second specimen examined

by myself agrees with that figured by Hyrtl and with that figured

by myself r—that the anterior communicating artery gives off a

strong forwardly-running branch, which immediately loses itself

between the hemispheres as the callosal artery. I shall refer to

some further details in considering the corresponding arteries in

Myrmecophaga jubata, of which I possess a well-injected brain.

The cerebral arteries of this species have been described and

figured by Pouchet?. This paper is not referred to by Tandler§ or

Me de Vriese||, who have mentioned a great many other important

papers upon the cerebral arterial system of the Mammalia. I find

myself in general agreement with Pouchet’s figure, though my

specimen shows some differences from the individual studied by the

French anatomist. I find that the circle of Willis is distinctly

hourglass-shaped—more markedly so than in Tamandua. The

carotids enter at the ‘‘ waist” of the hourglass, as among Artio-

dactyles, where the circle of Willis has, as is well known, the same

hourglass-shape. Anteriorly the arch of Willis is completed by

the anterior communicating artery. This runs perfectly straight

across the intervening space, and gives off no strong callosal

artery like that of Zamandua. There are only some quite small

branches. The Sylvian arteries (or middle cerebrals) arise from

the circle of Willis asymmetrically. The right-hand artery arises

exactly opposite to the anterior communicating artery; the left-

hand artery (which arises by two roots, which immediately join)

is behind the corresponding point on the left side. Between

these arteries and the posterior cerebrals are two smaller arteries,

on each side, of which the first arises just behind the exit of the

carotids. The latter artery (on the left side only; there was not

enough of it preserved on the right to permit of a statement)

gives off immediately before it reaches the circle of Willis an artery

running anteriorly, which I take to be the ophthalmic artery.

The posterior cerebral arteries are rather asymmetrical, as will be

seen from an inspection of text-figure 218 (p. 686). On the right

side there is only one large artery, which, however, very shortly

divides into two branches. On the left side three fair-sized arteries,

* Beitrage z. vergleichenden Angiologie, v.; Denkschr. k.-k. Akad. Wien, vi. 1854,

a iP 2 tom. cit. p. 189, text-fig. 19.

t ‘Mém. sur le Grand Fourmilier,’ Paris, 1874, pl. xiv. fig. 1.

Denkschr. k.-k. Akad. Wien, Ixvii. 1898.

|| Arch. de Biol. xxi. 1904, p. 449.

686 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [June 15,

of which, however, the anterior is considerably the larger, corre-

spond to this. There is also here an asymmetry in the origin of

the arteries, the chief artery of the left side arising anteriorly to

the single posterior cerebral artery of the right side. The anterior

Text-fig. 218.

Cerebral arterial system of Myrmecophaga jubata.

a.c. Anterior communicating artery. O. Optic nerves. v. Vertebral arteries.

cerebellar arteries are also asymmetrical, thus contrasting with the

arrangement met within Zamandua. Theright artery arises from

the circle of Willis; the left arises just at the junction of the

1909. | STRUCTURE OF THE LESSER ANTEATER. 687

basilar artery with the circle of Willis. The basilar artery of

Myrmecophaga jubata is represented by Pouchet as having three

spaces, where the artery divides and then shortly rejoins, instead

of the single area of this kind which exists in Zamandwa and

which I have figured in the paper upon the cerebral arteries of

mammals to which I have already referred. He also figures the

basilar artery as remaining of considerable calibre for two or three

inches down the spinal cord. The brain in my possession has not

a sufficiently long piece of spinal cord attached to it to show the

end of the wide region of the basilar artery. But it is nearly as

long, and reaches as far as between the influx of the last two pairs

of arteries figured by Pouchet. I imagine that the point where

the basilar artery suddenly alters its calibre and receives two

lateral arteries 1s really to be regarded as the junction of the

basilar with the anterior spinal, and that the two lateral arteries

ave vertebrals. In that case the suggestion which I formerly

made with regard to Tamandua will be wrong, and the space

included along the course of the basilar artery will not be due to

the anterior bifurcation of the anterior spinal artery to meet the

two vertebral arteries, such as I have figured for example in

Chinchilla lanigera*. There will be in both these genera

(Tamandua and Myrmecophaga) a basilar artery which retains

either in one place only (Zamandua) or in more than one place

a trace of being primitively a double vessel. Pouchet finds three

of these double tracts of the anterior spinal, of which he

represents the first as lying immediately behind the circle of

Willis. In my specimen the first of these double tracts lay just

behind the Pons Varolii, and the second, which was very incon-

spicuous, at the extreme end of the medulla. Just in front

of the first double tract arise the middle cerebellar arteries, which

are symmetrical. They arise in front of the sixth nerves. The

posterior cerebellar arteries, which are not symmetrical, lie

between the first and second of the duplicatures of the basilar.

Further back still the basilar receives two arteries on either

side, which anastomose as is shown in the annexed figure (text-

fig. 218,v). These are, as it appears to me, the vertebral veins,

in which case this is the end of the long basilar.

§ Alimentary Canal.

The general form of the Stomach in this Anteater is, as known,

like that of the Great Anteater, Myrmecophaga jubata. I may,

however, mention that the entire length of the stomach, measured

in a slightly oblique line owing to the form of the pylori 1¢ region,

was 85 mm., of which 35 mm. “belonged to the pyloric part. The

breadth of the stomach—i. e., the diameter parallel with the long

axis of the body—was 68 mm. The thickness of the walls of the

* Loe. cit. fig. 16, p. 184.

+ I hardly know where to delimit the basilar from the anterior spinal.

688 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [June 1d,

gizzard-like pylorus was at least 12 mm., a thickness which is

quite as great as that of the other Anteater, I imagine.

The hepato-gastric ligament or lesser omentum presents one or

two features of interest. The greater part of this hgament was,

as in other mammals, horizontal in direction, roofing-over that

section of the ceelom which communicates with the larger section

of the abdominal ecelom by the foramen of Winslow. The edge

of this hepato-gastrie ligament, lying just over the foramen of

Winslow, was raised into a deep vertical membrane fully three-

quarters of an inch deep, which passes dorsally of the right central

lobe of theliver. This is of course all part of the lesser omentum

or hepato-gastric ligament; but the vertical part seems to me to

represent the primitive ventral mesentery, connected directly with

the middle line of the ventral parietes and not via the liver. The

greater omentum is but little developed and, as Flower has

mentioned, is not attached to the colon anywhere; it is indeed

not visible when the animal is opened for dissection, being

covered by rather than covering the coils of the intestines. The

splenic omentum is short, and just laps loosely over the pancreas.

It can be stretched out straight quite easily, and is inserted

on to the esophageal border of the stomach, along which runs

one of the important gastric branches of the portal. It

connects the pancreas and the spleen with this region of the

stomach. A remarkable fact about the stomach of this Kdentate

is the large number of lymphatic glands which are found in the

region of the stomach and, as I shall explain later, of the

intestine. As to those which occur in the region of the stomach,

there are first of all three, one above the other, which lie on the

side of the junction between duodenum and stomach—that side

which faces the abdominal cavity. These glands are in close con-

nection with the portal branch, which passes from the cesophageal

border of the stomach to join the main portal trunk as it passes

dorsally to the duodenum on its way to the liver. Two other

lymphatic glands lie in the lesser omentum, one near to the

cesophagus and the other close to the vertical membrane already

described. Finally there are two other lymphatic glands on the

pancreas side of the vertical membrane—to the right, therefore,

of the expanse of membrane which connects the stomach with the

liver and may be termed, and is termed, lesser omentum. An

eighth gland is partly imbedded in the tip of the pancreas, where

it runs towards the liver in close connection with the cystic duct

of the gall-bladder.

The Small Intestine in my specimen measured at least 97 inches

in length. This is rather understating the length, I imagine,

for I was anxious not to stretch it unduly. Sir W. Flower gives

100 inches as the length of the small intestine in the example

measured by himself. In the latter example of Zamandua the

colon was only 52 inches long; I found that from the cecum to

the anus was quite 7 inches in my specimen. Sir W. Flower

remarks that the duodenum has no mesentery attaching it to the

1909.) STRUCTURE OF THE LESSER ANTEATER. 689

dorsal middle line; and I also have failed to find this duodeno-

caval ligament, as I suppose that mentioned by Flower to be.

Flower has called attention to the fact that this Anteater, like

Myrmecophaga, possesses a ventral longitudinal fold in the jejunum

and ileum, which is a fixed fold and cannot be obliterated by

stretching the walls of the gut. I have examined this structure

carefully in Zamandua, and am able to give arather more detailed

account of it than was given by Flower. In the duodenum there

is some longitudinal corrugation of the walls of the gut. But the

continuous ventral ‘‘ typhlosole ” does not commence until about

35 inches behind the stomach. In front of this the fold is occa-

sionally seen to the extent of about an inch. The fold is not

absolutely continuous from its commencement 35 inches below the

stomach. There are two slight gaps at first, two or three fourths

of an inch wide. Thereafter this typhlosole is quite continuous

as a conspicuous raised fold for a distance of 28 inches. There

are in this tract occasional and short branches of the fold, and

also short subsidiary and parallel folds. The main fold is

fairly deep and very conspicuous. Then follows a gap of

7 inches, where the internal surface of the intestine is smooth.

After this there is a tract of 20 inches where the typhlosole is

again visible; but it is here, except indeed for very short distances,

not nearly so well-marked as it is anteriorly, and there are more

subsidiary folds and anastomosing branches. The different

appearance will be readily gathered from an inspection of text-

fig. 219 (p. 690), which represents pieces from different regions of

the small intestine. The rest of the ileum, 7 inches in length,

has not any ventral typhlosole. It is clear from the descriptions

of both Owen* and Forbest that the arrangement of this

typhlosole in Zamandua differs in detail from that of M/yrmeco-

phaga. For both of these anatomists write of a continuous fold

throughout the ileum which, according to Forbes, occupies.

15 feet 3 inches out of a total intestinal length (of the small

intestine) of 24 feet 10 inches. In front of this are at intervals

detached tracts of this typhlosole-like fold. In Zamandua, on

the other hand, the fold is best developed and continuously so in

the middle region of the small intestine.

In writing of the intestinal coil of Mammals ¢ it had escaped

my attention that Sir Richard Owen had already referred to the

* Reptilian” character of the gut of JMZyrmecophaga, though I

duly noted that Sir W. Flower had described the condition of the

eut in that Edentate. It is possible that Flower’s statement was

taken from Owen’s paper, to which he referred. Owen wrote of

Myrmecophaga§ that ‘one common duplicature of peritoneum,

continued from the middle of the back part of the abdomen, and

18 inches in extent where it is broadest, at the junction of the

ileum with the colon, supports the whole intestinal canal, as in

* Trans. Z.S. vol. iv. p. 122. + P. Z. S. 1882, p. 290.

t P. Z.S. 1908, p. 570 footnote. § Trans. Z. S. iv. p. 121.

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1909, No. XLVII. AT

690 MR. F, E, BEDDARD ON THE [June 15,

most reptiles—mesentery, mesocolon, and mesorectum being one

and the same fold.” I can confirm my former statement that

Tamandua agrees in this particular, a confirmation being im-

portant in view of the fact that this condition of the gut appears

Text-fig. 219.

b. dh.

Three pieces of small intestine of Tamandua tetradactyla.

The upper figure is a portion of the duodenum showing papilla of bile-duct (b.d.)

and absence of “typhlosolar” fold. The two remaining figures are from the

jejunum, and the “typhlosole” (f) is present.

to vary in Centetes. I take this opportunity of adding that in an

example of MJyrmecophaga jubata dissected subsequently to the

date of my paper quoted below, there was no ligamentum} cavo-

TIOIN STRUCTURE OF THE LESSER ANTEATER. 691

duodenale. The gut was in fact quite “ Reptilian,” Owen has

remarked * upon a huge mesenteric gland 16 inches long which

lies parallel with the puckered coils of the small intestine, on

the rectal side of which, and therefore parallel to it, hes a row

of detached glands. I find a quite similar series of glands

in Tamandua tetradactyla. There is one gland more or less —

crescentic in shape which extends from close to the pancreas

anteriorly to near the commencement of the colon posteriorly.

Besides this there is a chain of detached glands seven or eight in

number which lie to the colic side of the large gland and are

also disposed in a crescentic form, thus following the curves of

the large gland. All these lymphatic glands are dark in colour,

as Owen states them to be in Myrmecophaga jubata. The

number of the smaller glands is not stated in Myrmecophaga.

The detailed agreement between the two Anteaters is, however,

remarkable, even if the exact number of the smaller glands does

not tally in the two cases.

The Liver is, as Sir W. Flower has pointed out, like that of

Myrmecophaga in the disposition of the lobes. I may mention

that when this viscus is viewed from the diaphragmatic aspect it

is seen to consist of three definite iobes only; for the right and

left central are not so definitely distinguishable from each other

on this view as are either the left lateral or the right lateral from

the conjoined centrals. The falciform ligament shows a peculiarity

which I have not observed elsewhere. It divides (see text-fig. 220,

p. 692) of course the right and left central lobes, marking the

central fissure of the liver. It gives off three seams which traverse

the surface of the liver, of which two, those on the right side, run

to the clefts separating the right central into three subdivisions,

one of which is the cleft in which lies the gall-bladder. The third

seam arises in front of these, and passes to the left just above the

end of the cleft which separates the left central from the left

lateral lobe. On the under (abdominal) surface of the liver there

is a series of membranous seams visibly connected with ligaments

in the same way.

The edge of the right lateral lobe of the liver is fixed down to

the diaphragm, just in front of the suprarenal body, by a sheet

of membrane which towards the median side slightly covers the

suprarenal body, and is attached to the postcaval vein. This

part of the ligament is of course the equivalent of the hepatocaval

membrane of other mammals. This membrane is continuous

with a semicircular seam which, as it were, cuts off a semicircular

piece from the lower part of the right lateral lobe of the liver.

On the median side (i.e., the left side) this seam gives off a

branch which runs forward and to the left, and branches once or

twice on the caudate lobe. The latter lobe splits into two at its

connection with the entering postcaval vein, and it is here closely

adherent to that vein. It should be mentioned also that the

* Toe. cit. p. 121.

A7*

692 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [June 15,

gall-bladder is just visible on the diaphragmatic surface of the

liver. The ductus choledochus, which receives the pancreatic .

duct just before its entry into the duodenum, is not specially

dilated, as I have found it to be in Myrmecophaga, before its

Text-fig. 220.

Liver of Tamandua.

The upper figure represents the diaphragmatic surface of the organ.

a. Umbilical ligament with its branches. J.c. Left central lobe of liver. 1.7. Left

lateral. R.c. Right central.

The lower figure represents a portion of the right lateral lobe showing the

seams (i.) described in the text.

D. Diaphragm. pe. Postcaval vein where it enters liver. s. Ligament running

from liver to diaphragm, which bears, as is shown in the figure, the supra-

renal body. .

1909. } STRUCTURE OF THE LESSER ANTEATER. 693

termination on the extremity of a long low fold of the duodenal

mucous membrane which has a recess (text-fig. 219, 6.d., p. 690

round the opposite extremity. It is about 2 inches from the

pylorus.

The Spleen is rather different in form from that of Myrmeco-

phaga, and is represented in the accompanying figure (text-

fig. 221), which will serve in lieu of an elaborate description. It

is nearly of the form of an isosceles triangle with a base line of

84 mm.; the two sides measure respectively 54 mm."and 67 mm. ;

the shorter side lying to the left of the body has two rounded

lobate projections.

Text-fig. 221.

The spleen of Tamandua tetradactyla.

The Pancreas from the duodenum to the spleen is 4 inches in

length ; on the other side of the duodenum it extendsa long way

towards the liver. A lieno-caval ligament arises from the edge

of the spleen and is attached along the posterior border of the

pancreas for about half of the length of the latter; it is not

inserted anywhere upon the left kidney. Arching over and

nearly concealing the left suprarenal body, it is inserted upon

the postcaval vein of its side, and can be traced down that vein

and along the spermatic vein right down to the left testis, on

which it ends.

694 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [June 15,

§ Heart and Vascular System.

The cavity of the right ventricle of Zamandua showed two

interesting features which deserve comment. ‘There is, in the

first place, a very strongly developed moderator band which is

represented in the annexed text-figure (text-fig. 222). This

consists of a somewhat slender muscular band which arises just

below the great septal papillary muscle of the auriculo-ventricular

valve. The muscular band from the septal wall of the ventricle

enters this moderator band from above. On the posterior side it

seems mainly formed as a process of the endocardial lining.

Near to the free wall of the ventricle it separates into many

tendinous branches shown in the figure, which would take too

long a space to describe individually. These spread out in their

abundant ramifications and anastomoses over a considerable area

Text-fig. 222.

A portion of the heart of Tamandua, with the right ventricle opened to

display the moderator band (m.).

of the free wall of the ventricle. A single tendinous thread

arising near to but independently of the moderator band also

connects the septal with the free wall of the ventricle. Moderator

bands are not uncommon * in the right ventricle, and are known

in birds as well asmammals. It appears that a similarly situated

moderator band occurs in the Great Anteater also. For in a

figure of the interior of the right ventricle of that animal, Sir E.

Ray Lankester has represented ta muscle cut off short which

arises from the septal wall of the ventricle close to and behind

the chief muscle of the auriculo-ventricular valve. He has not,

however, given any description of this structure, with which

indeed he was not concerned in the paper quoted. The right

* Cf. e. g. Bindo de Vecchi, Anat. Anz. xx. 1902, p. 374, where some literature is

cited.

t+ P. Z.S. 1882, pi. xli. fig. 20.

1909. ] STRUCTURE OF THE LESSER ANTEATER. 695

auriculo-ventricular valve, which is incompletely shown in the

same text-figure (text-fig. 222), has a very complicated series of

papillary muscles, as is better shown in text-fig. 223. As in the

Great Anteater *, the tricuspid valve is attached at the extreme

left directly to the septal wall of the ventricle; there is here no

development of a papillary muscle or muscles. The great or

anterior papillary muscle (‘“‘@” in Sir E. Ray Lankester’s figures)

is partly divided into two, but not so markedly as he figures it in

the genus Myrmecophaga. From the collar of the valve exactly

opposite to the anterior papillary muscle arise two muscles which

appear to be represented but are not lettered in the drawing of

Lankester already referred to. These are fixed to the free wall

of the ventricle. The right-hand one of them, which is the

Text-fig. 223.

The same heart with the moderator band removed to show more plainly the

structure of the right auriculo-ventricular valve.

a. The left (great) anterior papillary muscle. 61. The right (lesser) papillary

muscle. 6. Muscle arising from the free wall of the ventricle and attached

(the other cut end is also shown) to the actual collar of the annular valve.

smaller, is nevertheless the more conspicuous, since it is attached

farther towards the apex of the heart upon the free wall of the

ventricle. The arrangement of these muscles is very suggestive

of the muscles lettered ‘m” and “2” in Lankester’s figure of

the heart of Ornithorhynchus.

The right anterior papillary muscle in Tamandua is a very

slender muscle attached to the free wall of the ventricle. To

this series may be also referred a double muscle situated more to

the right, and also arising from the free wall of this ventricle.

* Cf. Lankester, loc. cit. fig. cit. “ e.”

696 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [June 15,

Finally, the anterior cusp or cusps of the tricuspid valve are also

attached by chordz tendineze to the right-hand of the two

papillary muscles, which are connected with the septal cusps of

the valve. It is to be noted that these muscles also spring from

the free wall of the ventricle. They correspond, I take it, with

those lettered “‘c” in Lankester’s figure of the human heart.

My illustration also shows the remainder of the papillary muscles

of the septal flap of the valve, of which still another is attached

mainly to the free wall of the ventricle. It appears to me that

the chief features of interest in the structure of the right

auriculo-ventricular valve of Zamandua are, in the first place,

the very great amount of its attachment by papillary muscles to

the free wall of the ventricle, in which it contrasts very markedly

with such a type as Lepus* ; and, in the second place, the inser-

tion of papillary muscles which are fleshy throughout upon the

actual collar of the annular valve—a state of affairs which is

closely paralleled in Ornithorhynchus, but is at least not always

found among the Eutherian Mammals.

The Aorta has, at any rate, no perforate or partly perforate

ductus Botalli between itself and the pulmonary artery, where

they cross. J could, indeed, see no definite separate ligament

representing this former arterial connection in the specimen

which I dissected. On cutting open the thoracic aorta the

orifices of the intercostal arteries could be counted. I examined

nearly the whole of this region of the aorta; but, through an

oversight, omitted to ascertain exactly the topographical limits of

the section of artery which I cut open. It had been already

removed from the body. In this section of aorta the first five

intercostal orifices were single apertures into the aorta, though

they divided at once only just below the orifice into the aorta.

The sixth orifices were paired. But the two intercostal arteries

opened into the aorta, one a little nearer to the heart than the

other. I have already called attention to a similar asymmetry

in the case of Chiromys madagascariensis +, where one of several

pairs of intercostals opened into the aorta a little in advance of

its fellow. After this pair of intercostals I counted seven single

orifices into the aorta. This animal, therefore, contrasts with

Chiromys and some other mammals, to which I have referred in

the memoir quoted below, in the prevalently unpaired character .

of the intercostal arteries. The intercostal arteries, moreover,

have a relationship to the azygos vein which varies in different

mammals. It differs, for example, in Zamandua very much

from the conditions which I have described in Chiromys already

referred to. In Yamandua the right azygos vein, as in other

Edentates, is the only azygos, and it extends through the whole

of the thoracic cavity, down to nearly the diaphragm. It isa

large vein, and gives off its branches, on the right side at least,

* Lankester, loc. cit. pl. xxxviil. figs. 3, 4.

_ + “Some Notes upon the Anatomy of Chiromys, &c.,” P. Z.S. 1908, pp. 698 & 699,

text-fig. 152.

1909.] STRUCTURE OF THE LESSER ANTEATER. 697

with perfect regularity, a branch on the posterior side of each

rib. There are eleven such branches behind the point where the

azygos in front opens into the anterior caval to form the ductus

Cuvieri. To each of these also of course corresponds an inter-

costal artery. Throughout the whole of its course the intercostal

arteries underlie the azygos when viewed in the ordinary position

of dissection. That is to say, they are dorsal to it. The azygos

ends, after the last branch already mentioned, without any

diminution of calibre by plunging into the thickness of the body- -

wall. It is only after this point that the intercostal arteries

are visible throughout their whole extent from their origin from

the aorta to their entering the body-wall. This state of affairs

contrasts with that of, at any rate, a large number of mammals

including, as already mentioned, Chiromys. In all mammals

which I have hitherto examined as to this point, the first set of

intercostals, varying in number in different mammals, underlie

the azygos, and then at a fixed point, varying for the species or

genus, they cross over the vein overlying it in the position in

which they are seen on dissection. So that the intercostal

arteries can be divided into two series, of which one set are

dorsal and the other ventral to the azygos. This difference in

the conditions found among mammals has no relation, as it

would appear, to the length of the azygos. They sometimes

eross the azygos some way from its end in cases where the vein

extends quite as far back towards the diaphragm as it does in

Tamandua tetradactyla. Posteriorly the aorta divides into two

branches, each of which at once divides again to form external

and internal iliacs. The caudal artery arises from the right-hand

inner iliac.

Postcaval veins and their branches.—In a recent paper upon

the postcaval vein in Mammals I have, I believe, quoted the

authorities for the principal facts known about the main venous

trunks of the Edentata. I need not, therefore, recapitulate the

literature here. It is not, however, certainly known whether

Tamandua agrees with other Edentates in the double postrenal

section of the postcaval. It might well be inferred, however,

that this was the case on account of its close resemblance in other

characters to Myrmecophaga. As a matter of fact Zamandua

tetradactyla has double postrenal postcavals, which I am now able

to describe together with their principal branches. The postcaval

vein is double from quite the beginning of the kidney region, as

is also the case with Myrmecophaga. The renal veins, which are

single, are given off from the divided part of the postcaval, in

both of which particulars this Edentate differs from some others,

for example from Zatusia peba*. The divided postcaval, after the

origin of the renals, closely embraces the aorta which just fills up

the gap.

The spermatic veins, as in other Edentates, arise from the

* Beddard, “On the Postcaval Vein,” P. Z.S. 1909, p. 509, text-fig. 135.

698 _ MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [June 15,

renals on each side. They run straight to each testis, and the

vessels appear to form a rete in the suspensory membrane of

the testis in which they lie. This formation of a rete is seen

in other cases among the Edentata—for example in various

Armadillos, where it has been figured by Hochstetter and by

myself. There is, however, in this no essential difference from

what is seen in other mammals; for generally the spermatic

veins in the neighbourhood of the testes or ovaries form a rete.

It is only more conspicuous, and commences further away from

the testes, in the Edentata now under consideration. The veins

which pass between the testes and the postcaval vein seem to me

to be limited to the equivalents of the anterior spermatic veins

of other mammals. I could find no trace in Zamandua of a

posterior spermatic vein joining the anterior on each side and

flowing into the postcaval in the lumbar region, such as does

occur-in some Armadillos and in most Marsupials in addition to

the anterior pair. I feel quite convinced that this is really the

case in Tamandua, for after searching for the vein I carefully cut

the suspensory ligament of each testis and observed no bleeding

or the slightest trace of the smallest vessel in this ligament other

than those already referred to. It will be remembered that the

Armadillos vary from species to species in the presence or

absence of a posterior spermatic vein.

There are no lumbar parietal veins given off until some way

after the two postcavals have diverged greatly from each other

towards the thighs in the pelvic region. Here two such veins

are given off, at any rate on the right side where I studied them

most carefully. The two veins anastomose just before entering

the postcaval. Owing to the position of the vein where they

arise, the lumbar parietals run anteriorly parallel with the long

axis of the body. Each vein lies one on each side of a corre-

sponding artery. On the opposite side of the postcaval is

corresponding pair of small veins which run in exactly the

opposite direction, 7. e. towards the pubic symphysis. Here

again the two veins lie one on each side of a corresponding

artery. The position of the lumbar parietal veins is quite

suggestive of the lateral abdominal vein in Lizards.

The double character of these lumbar veins is to be noted, since

in other mammals, for instance among the Carnivora*, these veins

are frequently double from the very first, or begin to be so at a

very short distance away trom their orifice into the postcaval

vein or veins.

Although there is no direct affluent into the postcaval below

the orifice of the renal veins of a spermatic vein on either side

comparable to the posterior spermatic vein of other mammals,

Tamandua possesses on each side of the body a peculiar longi-

tudinal vein, which I have studied more exactly on the right

side of the body; I have, however, ascertained that the vein

* Beddard, “ Anatomy of Galidia, &c.,” P.Z.S. 1909, p. 486, text-figs. 129 & 130.

1909.] STRUCTURE OF THE LESSER ANTEATER. 699

exists on the left side and has substantially the same origin and

course, though I can give no details so minute as I am able to

give of the right-hand vein, The right suprarenal body emits

a short vein which runs rather backwards and opens into

the undivided section of the postcaval. The lower part of the

suprarenal body behind that part which is connected with the

suprarenal vein proper gives off some twigs which are connected

with two or three slender veins supplying the parietes in front of

the kidney. These various veins collect into a stronger vein

with which their exact connections are shown in the accompanying

figure (text-fig. 224), This vein is twice connected with the

Text-fig. 224.

Diagram of persistent right postcardinal (?) of Tamandua.

v. Right renal vein. &. Outline of kidney. sz.b. Suprarenal body. sp. Spermatic

vein, which represents persistent cardinal and opens into renal vein &c.

posteaval by short branches and it runs close to the postcaval

vein and ventrally to it, 7.e. on top of it as seen in dissecting

the animal. The vein crosses over the renal and passes into the

mesorchium, joining the spermatic plexus In a way which I have

not exactly ascertained. Here then is a vein which lies on the

whole to the outside of the postecaval and which conveys blood

from the testis, not only directly to the postcaval, but also to the

suprarenal body and to the parietes in its immediate neigh-

bourhood. There are at present no embryological data as to the

veins of the Edentata. But it is to be assumed in the meantime

that like other Mammals the postrenal sections of the postcavals

700 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [June 15,

are to be referred to the subcardinals. And also that the

postcardinals partly persist as a portion of the spermatics. If

this be so, then the vein which I have just described will be

referable to a more largely persisting postcardinal on each side.

The orifices into the postcaval will be the remains of the

frequent junctions between the postcardinal and the subeardinal.

Tnnumerable such junctions, for instance, are figured by McClure

in the embryo Dasyure*. Moreover, a vein connecting in its

course the gonad and the suprarenal bodies and the parietes is

suggestive of the suprarenal parietals of the lower Vertebrata,

which are perhaps to be looked upon, as I have suggested, as

remnants of the postcardinals in that region. It will be noted,

of course, that this longitudinally running vein cannot possibly

be regarded as the missing posterior spermatic ; for it opens into

the postcardinals on each side in a region too anterior to permit

of a comparison with that vein in other Mammals.

T did not find any caudal plexus of veins such as is to be met

with in many but not in all (?) Dasypodide.

The portal vein on reaching the pancreas received a strong

gastro-splenic branch consisting of a short vessel from the stomach

and a long vein running along the whole length of the pancreas

to the spleen. The main gastric branch entered nearer to its

entry into the liver.

On the Postcaval Vein and its branches in Orycteropus capensis.

In completing an account of the double postcaval vein and its

branches in Armadillos and in Manis gigantea, Dr. Hochstetter T

observed that ‘Das Vorkommen einer doppelten hinteren Hohl-

vene scheint demnach bei den Giirtel- und Schuppenthieren die

Regel zu sein, und es wiire nicht uninteressant, zu erfahren, wie

sich in dieser Richtung die anderen Hdentaten verhalten.” This

expectation was realised by the same writer, who later = described

these veins in the Bradypodide. I have myself § dealt with a

few Armadillos which were not known to Hochstetter, and in

the present communication to the Society with the double post-

caval vein of Zamandua ||.

T am now able to add an appendix descriptive of the postcaval

vein and its branches in Orycteropus, which have not, as I believe,

been described, unless my predecessors in this department of

anatomy have overlooked some earlier account. Even in that

case a redescription of veins, which are known to vary at times

from individual to individual, will not be without its use.

The specimen of Orycteropus capensis which I dissected was a

male which died on May 31st last; it was not an old individual

for the testes were completely abdominal {], lying not very far

* Am. Journ. Nat. 1906, vol. v. p. 176, fig. 9.

+ Morph. Jahrb. Bd. xx. 1893, p. 622.

~ Morph. Jahrb. Bd. xxv. 1898, p. 362.

§ P.Z.S. 1909, p. 505. || Supra, p. 699.

@ See Flower, “On the Edentates,” P. Z.S. 1882, p. 364.

1909. | STRUCTURE OF THE LESSER ANTEATER. 701

behind the kidneys, whereas in the adult they are at least inguinal

and even descend it is alleged into a scrotum during the breeding

season. The animal measured about 4 feet 6 inches and was,

therefore, obviously not full grown. On the other hand, it was

as clearly in no way ‘‘newborn,” and thus the long retention of

the testes within the abdomen must be a character of the animal

and not a mark of juvenility.

Text-fig. 225.

Postcaval veins of Orycteropus.

a. Point of junction of left posteaval and left iliac vein. i.c. Intercostal veins.

il. Iliac artery. e.l. Left (smaller) postcaval. 7. Renal veins. sv. Supra-

renal veins. sp. Spermatic veins.

The veins were quite full of blood and in consequence easy to

follow. I am able therefore to give, with some confidence, the

following results of my examination of this specimen of Orycteropus

capensis. ‘The postcaval vein at first sight appeared to be single.

For in the middle line (text-fig. 225), or nearly so, to the right of

the aorta, lay a large turgid vein of the full calibre that such a

vein would be expected to possess in an animal of this size. A

closer examination, however, soon showed that on the opposite

side of the aorta, 7. e. on the left side, lay another vessel, parallel

702 ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE LESSER ANTEATER. [June 15,

to the first mentioned and not more than one third of its calibre,

which was also distended with blood. I believe that so marked a

difference in size between the two postcaval veins, when there are

two, is not an even exceptional occurrence among Mammals. It

recalls the unequal postcavals in the Lacertilian genus Viliqua.

In Lizards the two postcavals are apt to be equal, but among the

Skinks are at least sometimes unequal in calibre. There is no

question, it will be noted, in Orycteropus of a minute dis-

agreement in size between the two postcavals. The difference is

so great that the left-hand vein was in the first place altogether

overlooked and regarded as being merely the proximal end of the

spermatic vein of that side of the body. It is thus important to

recognise a well-marked difference between Orycteropus and other

Edentates at the very first. Still there remains the more

important fact of the double nature of the postrenal section of

the postcaval. The less important part played by the left-hand

division in the venous system of this Edentate as compared with

other Edentata is also shown by the posterior ending of the

left postcaval and by the origin of the intercostal veins. As to

the former point, it is to be noted that the large right-hand post-

caval, arrived at the posterior end of the abdominal cavity, divides,

as usual in animals with but a single postcaval vein, into the

two iliacs. ‘These in the usual way underlie the aorta and its

posterior bifurcation, as is shown in the accompanying illustration

(text-fig. 225, p. 701). When the left-hand postcava is followed

backwards it is seen to open into the left iliac vem. Of this vein

it is clearly a rather unimportant atHuent, for the main trunk

reaches the right postcava.

The arrangement of the two postcave is thus different from

that of other Edentates, where the independence of the two

trunks is emphasized by the fact that each is concerned with the

iliac vein of its own side, or if there be a communication between

them it is of such a kind as not to interfere with the equal

importance of the two veins, such as, for example, the two

communications which I have figured in the Insectivore Centetes

ecaudatus*. The remaining point of difference between the two

posteaval veins concerns, as has been stated, the intercostal veins.

Of these there are three lying between the point of bifurcation of

the veins and the right-hand spermatic vein. The intercostal

veins, however, have nothing whatever to do with the left post-

caval trunk. They all open into the large right postcaval

and rather to the left of the vessel so that their position is very

nearly, if not actually, median. They were of small size although

they were full of blood, and the first of the three divided

immediately after, or rather before, its entrance into the right

postcaval into two branches, an anterior and a posterior. The

veins, in fact, are not paired as right and left trunks.

There is thus in Orycteropus an approach to the more usual

* P.Z.S. 1909, p. 511, text-fig. 136, A.

deny Apc yamine AO) co) lies yO.

G.M.Woodward del.et lith. West, Newman imp.

123 HIOXANTHODES ALCOCK 4555 SHS AR MAS MUR aie

6, 7, HYASTENUS ANDREWSI. 8, 9, H.UNCIFER:

1909.] ON DECAPOD CRUSTACEA FROM CHRISTMAS ISLAND. 703

Eutherian condition of the postcaval vein. Furthermore the two

veins may be compared with the Didelphys embryo figured by

McClure *, where the right cardinal collateral is immensely larger

than the left-hand vein. This is one among many variations

which occur in the venous system of the embryos, as well as the

adults, of that marsupial. Both this variation in Didelphys and

the adult condition in Orycteropus appear to me to be an inter-

mediate step in the reduction of the two veins found in

Monotremes and Edentates to the single right-hand postrenal

postcaval of other Kutheria.

I now turn to the branches of the postcaval vein. The renals

are as is usual asymmetrical, the right-hand veins flowing into

the postcaval a little anteriorly to those of the left side. There

are two renal veins on each side, and those of the left are

connected by an obliquely running joining vessel. Of these two.

latter vessels the anterior arises from the postcaval vein, where it

is single, and the posterior from the slender left postcaval. It is

very important to notice, from the point of view of a comparison

with other Edentates, that the renals are quite unconnected with

the spermatic veins. No recognisable branch appeared accom-

panying the ureter. The spermatic veins themselves, as is shown

in text-figure 225, are quite symmetrical with each other and

arise each from its own postcaval vein about half-way down

between the renal and the posterior bifurcation of the postcaval.

There is no caudal plexus and the veins are not so massive as

in various Armadillos; nor is there any tendency to form

plexuses, such as are often met with in the Armadillos. In fact

the venous system of Orycteropus is in its entirety more

approaching that of other Eutherian Mammals.

3. On Decapod Crustacea from Christmas Island, collected

bys @rCanWigAndrews,, EOR.S.55 EZ. Sie) Bya Wl

Catman, D.Sc., F.Z.8.+

[Received May 22, 1909. ]

(Plate LX XIT.7)

I. Introductory.

This paper deals with the Decapoda collected by Dr. Andrews

on his second visit to Christmas Island in 1908. The names of a

few specimens obtained during his stay on the island in 1897-98

but not hitherto determined are also included in the list given

below.

Dr. Andrews has pointed out (P. Z. S. 1900, p. 116) that “the

shores of Christmas Island are singularly unfavourable for the

collection of marine animals,” and practically all the marine

* Am. Journ. Anat. vol. v. no. 2, 1906, p. 193, fig. 15.

+ Published by permission of the Trustees of the British Museum.

t+ For explanation of the Plate see p. 713.

704 DR. W. T. CALMAN ON DECAPOD [June 15,

species here recorded were obtained in one place, at Flying-fish

Cove. In addition to collections made on the reef a rich

fauna was found sheltering in crevices of the wooden piles of

the pier, and many of the smaller Decapoda, as well as Isopoda,

Amphipoda, and Pyenogonida, were got in this way.

It would be of much interest to determine whether the littoral

fauna of Christmas Island shows any peculiarities correlated with

its very isolated geographical position. The present collection, at

all events, gives no clear evidence of any such peculiarities ; the

larger Decapods, without exception, belong to well-known and

widely-ranging Indo-Pacific species, while the few new species

which I have to describe belong to the groups of the smaller and

less conspicuous forms among which novelties may be expected

anywhere. On the other hand, the restricted opportunities for

collecting forbid us to attach any importance to the absence

of many widely-distributed species from the collection. It must

be borne in mind also that our knowledge of the Indo-Pacific

littoral Decapods is still far from adequate for discussion of zoo-

geographical problems.

The terrestrial and fresh-water species in the following list are

distinguished by an asterisk. All of these have been already

recorded from the island (although sometimes under different

names) except the two species of Geograpsus which, Dr. Andrews

tells me, are abundant on the shore terrace at Flying-fish Cove.

Ptychognathus pusillus was found only in the pool above the

waterfall on the east coast, where it was collected by

Dr. Hanitsch*, but Palemon lar (apparently identical with the

variety described by Dr. de Man, J. c.) was found not only in

that locality but also in Hugh’s Dale and Sidney’s Dale on the

west coast.

A few minute crabs and a larger number of small Caridea

remain over which I cannot identify with any described species

but which, from the imperfection of the specimens or for other

reasons, I do not attempt to describe as new. The Alpheide, of

which a number were collected on the reef, are omitted altogether

for the present.

Il. List of the Species.

XANTHIDA,

Carpilodes rugatus (Latr.).

vaillantianus A. M.-H.

id cariosus Ale.

Lioxanthodes alcocki, g. et sp. n.

Zozymus ceneus (Linn.).

Lophozozynus dodone (Herbst).

Xantho bidentatus A. M.-E.

Leptodius sanguineus M.-H.

i cavipes (Dana).

* See de Man, P. Z.S. 1905, p. 587.

1909.] CRUSTACEA FROM CHRISTMAS ISLAND. 705

XANTHIDE (continued).

Acta tomentosa M.-E.

» rufopunctata M.-H.

» speciosa (Dana).

Daira perlata (Herbst).

Xanthodes lamarckii (M.-E.).

notatus Dana.

Ohlorodius niger (Forsk.).

levissimus Dana.

Pha ymodius sculptus (A. M.-E.).

Chlorodopsis areolata (M.-E.).

venusta Rathbun (°).

C yclodius gracilis Dana.

Cy ymo melanodactylus de Haan.

Eriphia levimana Laty.

» scabricula Dana.

Trapexia cymodoce (Herbst).

i Serruginea Laty.

. ferruginea, var. areolata Dana,

digitalis Latr.

93 rufopunctata (Herbst).

Tetralia glaberrima (Herbst). *

Domecia hispida Kydoux & Souleyet.

Melia tessellata Latr.

PORTUNID,

Thalamita sp. (juv.).

OcyPoDID&.

Ocypoda ceratophthalma (Pallas).

GRAPSIDE. _

Grapsus grapsus (Linn.).

», strigosus (Herbst).

s | ae Upsus grays (M.-E.).

" erinupes (Dana).

* Ptychognathus pusillus Heller.

Sesarma murrayt, sp. 0.

Liolophus planissimus (Herbst).

GECARCINID2.

* Cardisoma hirtipes Dana.

* Gecarcoidea lalandii M.-E.

Matin.

Acheeus spinosus Miers (2).

Oncinopus aranea de Haan.

Camposcia retusa Latr.

Hyastenus andrewst, sp. n.

- uncifer, sp. n.

Tylocarcinus gracilis Miers.

Perinea tumida Dana.

Schizophrys aspera (M.-E.).

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1909, No. XLVITI. 48

706 DR. W. Tf. CALMAN ON DECAPOD [June 15,

DyNOMENIDA,

Dynomene sp.

PORCELLANIDA,

Petrolisthes dentatus (M.-E.).

coccineus (Owen) (2).

Pach ycheles sculptus (A. M.-E.).

GALATHEID&.

Galathea affinis Ortmann (?).

PAGURIDA.

Calcinus herbstii de Man.

C@NOBITIDA.

* Cenobita rugosus M.-E.

- 5 clypeatus Latr.

* Birgus latro (Linn.).

PALINURIDA,

Panulirus penicillatus (Olivier).

a versicolor (Latr.).7

5 longipes (M.-H.) (2 juv.).

SPENOPIDA,

Stenopus hispidus (Olivier).

HIPpoLytiDé.

Lysmata seticaudata (Risso).

PANDALID.

Thalassocaris lucida (Dana).

PALMMONID&.

* Palemon lar Fabr., var.

Coralliocaris graminea (Dana).

superba (Dana) (?).

PP]

III. Systematic Notes and Descriptions of New Species.

Family XANTHID &.

LIOXANTHODES, gen. nov.

Carapace extremely broad, strongly convex antero-posteriorly,

smooth ; antero-lateral borders thick, with only traces of division

into three lobes ; postero-lateral borders very strongly convergent,,

straight.

Front one-third of width of carapace, strongly deflexed, slightly

notched. Orbits large, without suture-lines. Fronto-orbital

border about two-thirds of width of carapace.

Antennules folded transversely. Basal antennal segment short

+ I have described elsewhere some young stages of this species obtained by

Dr. Andrews (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8) i. p. 441, 1909).

1909. ] CRUSTACEA FROM CHRISTMAS ISLAND. 707

and broad, not reaching front; the short flagellum standing in

orbital hiatus.

Endostomial ridges very slightly developed, not reaching to

anterior margin of buccal frame.

Chelipeds massive, unequal in both sexes; fingers not hollowed

at tip.

Agee of male with third to fifth somites coalesced.

Type species, LZ. alcocki, sp. n.

The little crab described below presents a combination of

characters which seems to exclude it from any of the existing

genera of Xanthide. The great width of the carapace gives it

the facies of a Liomera, but it differs widely from that genus and

its immediate allies in the proportionate width of the fronto-

orbital border, a character which would refer the species to the

neighbourhood of Yanthodes in the sub-family Chlorodine of

Alcock’s classification. The massive chelipeds recall those of the

Trapezioida, but in this character Liomera longimana A. M.-H.

(Crust. Miss. Sci. Mexique, p. 240, pl. xlvi. fig. 1) makes some

approach to the new species.

Lt.-Col. Alcock, F.R.S., to whom I have fortunately been able

to submit the specimens of this crab, tells me that he considers

Liomera sodalis Alc. (Jour. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, Ixvii. (2) p. 88,

1898) to be probably congeneric with it.

LIOXANTHODES ALCOCKI, sp.n. (Plate LX XII, figs. 1-3.)

Carapace a little less than twice as broad as long, strongly convex

antero-posteriorly, slightly so from side to side; surface smooth

and polished, without inter-regional markings except fora shallow

meso-gastric groove and a pair of crescentic depressions parallel to

the inner edges of the orbits. The greatest width is well in front

of the middle of the carapace and the straight postero-lateral mar-

gins are strongly convergent. The strongly arched antero-lateral

margins slow the faintest possible traces of three teeth or lobes,

and in front of the second and third of these on the dorsal surface

is a Shallow pit in which are set a few hairs. The front is very

much deflexed and its margin is one-third of the width of the

carapace or a little less ; there is a shallow median notch, and the

lateral lobes are nearly straight and not separated from the inner

supra-orbital angles. The orbits are very large, and the eyes,

when retracted, are incompletely hidden ; the fronto-orbital width

is about two-thirds of the width of the carapace.

The basal antennal segment is short and broad, reaching to the

inner sub-orbital angle but not to the front. It appears to touch

a small downward process from the front.

The endostome has a pair of very slight ridges which do not

nearly reach its front margin.

The exopod of the third maxiilipeds is about half as wide as the

ischium ; the merus is broader than long; the ischium has a longi-

tudinal groove.

The chelipeds are very massive and very unequal in both sexes ;

48*

708 DR. W. T. CALMAN ON DECAPOD [June 15,

a considerable part of the length of the merus projects beyond the

carapace and its margins are smooth; the carpus has a blunt

inner angle; in the larger cheliped the palm is slightly com-

pressed, about three-fourths as high as long, its outer surface with

longitudinal rows of low, smooth tubercles ; the fingers are short,

the immovable one only about one-fourth as long as the lower

edge of the palm ; both fingers are furrowed and toothed, with a

good deal of hair on the inner edges, not excavated at the tips.

The smaller cheliped is more slender, its outer surface nearly

smooth.

The walking legs have the segments rather broad and flattened

and beset with longish hairs, especially distally.

In the male the third, fourth, and fifth abdominal somites are

coalesced.

Colour (in spirit) dark brown, marbled on the posterior part of

the carapace and on the limbs with yellowish; under parts

yellowish. The chelipeds have a longitudinal whitish band on

the outer surface of the hand.

In the larger of two ovigerous females the carapace measures

only 2°2 mm. in length by 4:2 mm. in breadth, so that the species

is one of the smallest of the Brachyura. The eggs are about °35

mm. in diameter.

Family GRAPSID&.

SESARMA MURRAYI, sp. n. (Plate LX XII. figs. 4, 5.)

Carapace moderately convex, much broader than long, the four

post-frontal lobes not prominent, sub-equal; except for a deep

transverse groove between the gastric and cardiac regions the

inter-regional grooves are not defined; the whole surface is

covered with sharply-marked transverse strize, becoming oblique

on the branchial regions and breaking up into rows of minute

granules anteriorly. Front more than half the width of the

carapace, nearly straight as seen from above. Lateral margins

strongly convergent posteriorly, without teeth behind the

orbital angle.

Chelipeds a little larger in the male than in the female. The

anterior margin of the merus is expanded, finely serrated for the

greater part of its length and cut into two or three large teeth

distally. The outer surface of the merus and carpus is transversely

striate, the striz microscopically beaded. The outer surface of

the hand is nearly smooth except for a fine longitudinal line near

the lower border; the upper surface has a longitudinal line

running along its whole length with a number of oblique lines

on the inner side. In some specimens a few fainter oblique lines

are also present on the outer side. Al] these lines, although sharply

cut, are very fine and are microscopically beaded. The upper

surface of the dactylus is rounded and quite smooth except for a

few very fine oblique beaded lines near the base in both sexes.

1909. | CRUSTACEA FROM CHRISTMAS ISLAND. 709

The merus of the walking legs has two or three strong teeth at

the distal end of its hinder edge and, in addition, the merus of the

last pair has two smaller teeth side by side near the proximal end.

The legs carry rather long hairs and the dactylus is strongly

spined.

Measurements :—

Male. Female (ovigerous).

Length of carapace........... . 4:5 mm. 3°75 mm.

Breadthvotae: 3) |i so.cceses G:Gue.. BPTI, ap

(between orbital angles)

Breadthvot Auomb)..ps-seesers se: 31053 BHO

Remarks :—Assuming that the fine beaded lines on the upper

surface of the hand represent the “ pectinated ridges” found in

the males of some other species of Sesarma, this little species will

fall into the third section or sub-genus (Parasesarma) in de Man’s

classification of the genus. Within this section it comes into

relation with a group of species, all of small size, which are

distinguished by the toothed meropodites of the walking legs. So

far as I am aware only four species of this group have been

described—S. vestita Stimpson*, S. andersoni de Man, S. eda-

mensis de Man, and S. batavica Moreira (= S. barbimana de

Man, nec Cano). In all of these the pectinated ridges on the

upper surface of the hand are more strongly developed than in the

new species and are differently arranged ; the upper edge of the

dactylus of the chelipeds is strongly “milled” in all except

S. vestita, where it is stated to be acute; and none of the species

possesses teeth at the proximal end of the merus of the last pair

of legs. Further, S. batavica is distinguished by the tufts of

hair on the fingers, S. edamensis by the much broader legs,

SS. andersoni by having the carapace smooth and the sides much

less strongly convergent posteriorly, and S. vestita by having the

carapace only a little longer than broad (breadth-ratio 1:03 as

against 1:46 to 1:53 in the new species). Outside of de Man’s

third section, the only species of Sesarma which are described as

having the meropodites of the legs toothed are S. minuta de Man

and §. barbimana Cano, both of which are separated from the

species here described by the presence on the lateral margin of a

tooth behind the orbital angle.

The specimens of this crab were collected on the shore at

Flying-fish Cove.

The specific name is chosen in compliment to Sir John Murray,

K.C.B., F.R.S., by whom the specimens described in this paper

have been presented to the British Museum.

* This is referred by de Man to his first section (Zool. Jahrb. ii. p. 644, 1887), but

the recently published description and figure (Stimpson’s Rep. Crust. N. Pacific

Expl. Exp., Smithsonian Miscell. Coll. xlix. p. 136, pl. xiii. fig. 6, 1907) show that

the species possesses pectinated ridges on the upper surface of the hand and must be

referred to de Man’s third section.

710 DR. W. T. CALMAN ON DECAPOD [June 15,

Family GECARCINIDA,

GECARCOIDEA LALANDII Milne-Edwards.

G. lalandii Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., Abth. Syst. vii. p. 738

(1893).

To the synonymy given by Ortmann the following are to be

added :—

Hyleocarcinus natalis Pocock, P. Z.8., 1888, p. 561.

Pelocarcinus humet (Wood-Mason) Alcock, Jour. Asiatic Soc.

Bengal, Ixix. pt. 2, p. 449 (1900).

Gecarcinus lagostomus (in error) Andrews, Monogr. Christmas

Island, p. 163 (1900).

An examination of the Museum collection of Gecarcinide gives

no reasons for dissenting from the synonymy which Ortmann has

established for this species. The specimen recorded under this

name from ‘“S. America” by Adam White in the “ List of

Crustacea in the British Museum,” p. 32 (1847), cannot now be

traced, but a Museum copy of the List contains a note in the

handwriting of Mr. Miers, ‘“ Certainly not this species,” so that no

confirmation is afforded of Milne-Edwards’s statement that the

type of the species came from Brazil.

With reference to the erroneous determination of the specimens

recorded in the ‘Monograph of Christmas Island’ (a deter-

mination for which Dr. Andrews was not responsible) it is

desirable to point out that there is no trustworthy evidence for

the occurrence of Gecarcinus lagostoma outside the Atlantic area.

Milne-Edwards indeed originally described that species as

‘“rapporté de )Australasie par MM. Quoy et Gaimard” (Hist.

Nat. Crust. ii. p. 27, 1837), and Miers refers to a series in the

British Museum obtained in the same region during the voyage

of the ‘ Erebus’ and ‘ Terror’ (Challenger Rep. Brachyura, p. 219

footnote, 1886). With regard to the latter I can obtain no

confirmation of the locality from the Museum registers. The

specimens date from a time when the records of locality were less

strictly kept than they are now, and it seems possible that

specimens arriving at the Museum without indication of locality

may have been assumed to come from the same region as the type-

specimens. Miers also mentions a specimen from the Cape of

Good Hope, and I may add that there is another in the collection

labelled ‘“‘ Madagascar” but in neither case can the history of the

specimens be traced.

Dr. Andrews has described (J. c.) the annual migration of G.

lalandii to the sea during the rainy season for the purpose of

hatching off the eggs. On his visit to the island in 1908, he

obtained specimens of a large Megalopa-larva which occurred in

enormous quantities in the sea shortly after the migration, and

also of a small crab which appeared in similar numbers at a

slightly later date. It seems practically certain that these larve

and young can belong to no other species than G. lalandi, and it

1909. ] CRUSTACEA FROM CHRISTMAS ISLAND. (out

is hoped that it may be possible to obtain the earlier stages and

to give a complete account of the life-history.

CARDISOMA HIRTIPES Dana.

Cardiosoma hirtipes Alcock, Jour. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, lxix.

pt. 2, p. 447 (1900).

Cardisoma carnifea (Herbst) Andrews, Monogr. Christmas

Island, p. 164 (1900).

Miss Rathbun has recently employed for this species the

name C. rotundum Quoy & Gaimard (Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for

1903, pt. iii. p. 838, 1906), but, so far as I know, she has not

explained in detail her reasons for doing so. The figure to which

she refers (Freycinet’s Voyage autour du Monde, Atlas Zool.

pl..77. fig. 1, 1825) is very poor, and there seems no obvious

reason for taking it to represent this species rather than

C. carnifex.

The account which Dr. Andrews has given (J. c.) of the habitat

of this species—in deep burrows by the side of freshwater

streams—agrees with what Ortmann has recorded (Zool. Jahrb.,

Abth. Syst. x. p. 339, 1897) of the closely allied C. carnifex in

East Africa. Dr. Andrews tells me that he never saw this species

at or near the sea (in marked contrast to Gecarcoidea), which also

coincides with Ortmann’s experience. Since nothing appears to

be recorded of the breeding habits of the species of this genus, it

may be worth while to mention that in the West African

C. armatum (the only species of which the Museum possesses an

ovigerous female) I find the young within the minute eggs to be

in the zoea stage. There can be little doubt therefore that in this

genus also the young stages are passed in the sea.

Family MAIID.

HivASTENUS ANDREWSI, sp. n. (Plate LX-XII. figs. 6, 7.)

Carapace and limbs closely covered with long, thick, soft hairs

which, on the walking legs and especially on the merus and carpus

of the first two pairs, fringe the anterior and posterior margins

and make the limb appear broad and flat. The carapace is tri-

angular, with a convex posterior margin and, when denuded of

hair, is smooth and polished, with a single low tubercle on each

side of the gastric region. The gastric, cardiac, and intestinal

regions are strongly convex, defined by well-marked grooves. The

rostral spines are less than a quarter of the total length, coalesced

for some distance in front of the orbits, deflexed at the base and

curving upwards at the tip. The supra-orbital margin is not very

prominent and its anterior corner is rounded off. The basal

segment of the antenna is little expanded so that the floor of the

orbit is very incomplete, and is without tubercle or spine at its

anterior end; the free segments of the antenna are visible at

the side of the rostrum and are beset with long hairs. The first

712 DR. W. T. CALMAN ON DECAPOD [June 15,

pair of walking legs are a little longer than the carapace and

rostrum. The dactyli are slender, curved, and very sharp-pointed,

with two or three teeth near the base on the lower edge.

An ovigerous female specimen measures 12 mm. in length to

base of rostral spines, by 9 mm. across the widest part of the

carapace.

Remarks :—This little crab, which I have failed to identify with

any described species, differs from the usual type of Hyastenus by

the comparatively slight development of the supra-orbital margin.

In this character and in the narrowness of the basal antennal

segment it seems to approach the American genus Pelia, from

which, however, it differs in the absence of a tooth at the distal

end of the same segment. As there are considerable differences

in the relative development of these parts in the various species of

Hyastenus, the new species may provisionally be placed in that

genus.

HYASTENUS UNCIFER, sp.n. (Plate LX XII. figs. 8, 9.)

Carapace sub-pyriform, pointed behind, tomentose, tuberculate.

There is a transverse row of five tubercles (the outer pair the

largest) on the gastric region and, behind this, a single median

tubercle ; the cardiac region is convex and the intestinal region

bears two tubercles, the posterior one acute and recurved; there

is a very prominent hepatic spine, and the branchial regions bear

each several tubercles and a procurved epibranchial spine. The

rostral horns are equal to, ora very little shorter than the carapace

(in the male), slender, divergent, and gently decurved. The supra-

ocular eave is acutely produced anteriorly; there is no inter-

mediate tooth between it and the post-ocular process, which is not

expanded distally. The basal antennal segment has a sharp spine

at the antero-external angle.

The chelipeds (in the female) are slender, with two or three

spines on the carpus; the fingers are less than half the length of

the palm and meet for the greater part of their length.

The walking legs are slender, with a few granules on the carpus,

and with the dactylus armed with a row of stout recurved spines.

A female specimen measures 11 mm. in length to the base of

the rostral spines.

Remarks:—In the length of the rostral horns this species.

approaches H. brockii de Man, but has the carapace more tubercu-

late and more pointed behind. The very prominent hepatic

spine and the strong hooked teeth on the dactyli of the walking

legs are unlike those of any species with which I have been able

to compare it.

TYLOCARCINUS GRACILIS Miers.

T. gracilis Miers, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) iv. p. 15 (1879).

In describing this species, Miers suggested that it might

“perhaps prove to be only a variety” of 7. stya (Herbst). The

numerous specimens collected by Dr. Andrews, however, show no

1909. | CRUSTACEA FROM CHRISTMAS ISLAND. 713

perceptible approximation to 7’. styx as compared with Miers’s

type specimens. The long, straight, rostral spines, divergent from

the base, and the more numerous and longer spines on the legs,

are characters which seem to justify the separation of the species.

I do not find, however, that the carapace is “much narrower ”

than in 7’. styx, and the rostral spines are not always more than

half the length of the carapace. Dr. Andrews’s collection includes

some males in the breeding phase, with enlarged chelz and widely

gaping fingers.

PERINEA TUMIDA Dana.

Perinea twmida Dana, Crust. U.S. Expl. Exp. i. p. 114, pl. iv.

figs. la—f (1855); Rathbun, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm. for 1903,

pt. 111. p. 881 (1906).

Parathoé rotundata Miers, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) iv. p. 16,

pl. v. figs. 2, 2a (1879); Haswell, Cat. Austral. Crust. p. 30 (1882) ;

Klunzinger, Spitz- und Spitzmundkrabben des Roten Meeres,

p. 45, pl. i. figs. 7 a—d, text-fig. 10 (1906).

About 18 specimens of a little crab collected by Dr. Andrews

are identical with the types of Miers’s Parathoé rotundata from

Port Curtis and Fiji. The rostral teeth, although short, are much

more prominent than in Miers’s figures and are separated by

a rounded notch, and there is a small tooth at the distal end of

the basal segment of the antenna unnoticed by Miers.

There can be little doubt, however, that Miers’s genus and

species are synonymous with those of Dana, quoted above. By

the courtesy of Miss Rathbun I have been able to examine a

specimen from Laysan recorded by her (/. c.) as Perinea twmida

Dana. It is a large male in which, as in the large female from

the Gulf of Suez mentioned by Miers, the tubercles on the cara-

pace are rather less prominent than in smaller specimens, but it

undoubtedly belongs to the same species. In addition to the

differences from Dana’s account mentioned by Miss Rathbun, it is

to be noted that the rostral teeth are much less prominent than in

the original figures and the notch between them is rounded instead

of angular. The tooth at the end of the basal segment of the

antennules is also less prominent. I see no reason, however, to

dispute Miss Rathbun’s identification of the Laysan specimen with

Dana’s species and if this be accepted the name given by Miers

must be placed as a synonym.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE LXXII.

Fig. 1. Lioxanthodes alcocki, g. et sp.n. Female, dorsal view. X 9.

2. 3 * Anterior part of body, ventral view. x 18.

3. a 3 Larger chela of male, from outer side.

4, Sesarma murrayi, sp.n. Male, dorsal view. X 6.

i, 5 Upper surface of chela.

6. Hyastenus andrewsi, sp.n. Male, dorsal view. X 3.

7 35 Orbital region from below.

o bb)

. Hyastenus uncifer, sp.n. Female, dorsal view. X 3.

% % Dactylus of leg of last pair.

714 MR. H. L, HAWKINS ON [June 15,

4. An Abnormal Individual of the Echinoid Amblypneustes.

By H. L. Hawkins, B.Sc., Mark Stirrup Scholar in

the University of Manchester”.

[Received June 2nd, 1909. |

(Text-figures 226-230.)

A series of the recent Echinoid Amblypneustes from Australian

waters, preserved in the Manchester Museum, includes an in-

dividual, apparently of A. ovwm, with a particularly fundamental

abnormality, which seems worthy of brief description.

Abnormalities in the symmetry of species of Amblypneustes

were described in 1880 by F. J. Bell and C. Stewart in the Journal

of the Linneean Society (vol. xv. pp. 126 & 130, pl. v.), and it would

appear that the genus is one the members of which are especially

lable to irregularities of development. The structural peculiarities

of my specimen, however, are of a type distinct from those described

in the papers referred to, and resemble those in the Hchinus

esculentus figured by Messrs. J. Ritchie and D. C. McIntosh in the

Proceedings of the Zoological Society for 1908 (p. 646, pl. xxxiil.).

Text-fig. 226.

Lateral view of test of an abnormal Amblypneustes.

The outward form of the specimen is strikingly irregular.

Instead of the regular ovoid shape of other specimens of

the species, it is much elongated along a line almost corresponding

with the antero-posterior axis. The lateral view (text-fig. 226)

shows the test to be abruptly truncated adapically, while the

apical system of plates rises boldly above the partly concave

slopes of the corona.

The adapical view (text-fig. 227) shows the remarkable feature

that only three ambulacral areas reach the apical system, the two

* Communicated by F. A. Barner, F.R.S.

1909.] AN ABNORMAL ECHINOID. 715

others, the anterior and left-posterior, being rounded off a little

above the ambitus. The apical system is elongated in two

directions as though to meet the defaulting ambulacra, but in

each case a considerable length of non-poriferous plates intervenes

between the adapical extremities of the two ambulacra and the

plates from which they should spring.

The other three ambulacra show no departure from the normal

type, except that the left-anterior (IV) is sensibly wider than

either of the others, and less convex in longitudinal outline.

The right posterior interambulacrum (1) is the only one of

normal character throughout, the other four being more or less

modified adapically to counteract the absence of the ambulacra.

The adoral region of the test is perfectly normal, and the peri-

stomial aperture regularly decagonal.

Adapical view of test of an abnormal Amblypneustes.

The apical system (text-fig. 228, p. 716), besides the lengthening

already referred to, shows marked departures from the normal type.

There are five genital plates, the inner margins of which enclose the

elongated periproct, but they are of very unequal dimensions.

The madreporite is large, and perforated on the right side by a

small genital pore. The two adjoining genital plates on the

right and left sides are elongated and depressed. The plate on

the right is normally perforate, but that on the left bears two large

gonopores, one near each end. The two posterior genital plates

are short and convex, and closely applied to each other, forming

an elevation that matches the anterior prominence of the madre-

porite. The right posterior plate is perforated in the usual way,

716 MR. H. L. HAWKINS ON [June 15,

but its fellow on the left is imperforate. There are thus five

genital pores distributed over four of the genital plates,

There are three ocular plates, corresponding with the termina-

tion of the three complete ambulacra; each is perforated by a

minute pore. The ocular on the left is almost spherical in shape,

since it abuts against the middle of the large genital (3), and

not, as usual, against the two genitals (4 and 5). There is no

trace of the other two ocular plates. The periproct is covered by

numerous irregular plates of small size.

Text-fig. 228.

Apical system of an abnormal Amblypneustes.

The composition of the interambulacral areas (text-fig. 227, p. 715)

differs in the two affected portions of the test. The two inter-

ambulacra 4 and 5 meet above the truncated end of ambulacrum V,

and, except that the suture between the two areas is somewhat

irregular, continue side by side up to the apical system as a

compound area of four columns of plates.

The adaptation of interambulacra 2 and 3 to the changed

conditions is different. Here column 6 of area 2, and column a

1909. ] AN ABNORMAL ECHINOID. 717

of area 3 are discontinued after they have wrapped round the

adapical end of ambulacrum III, and their place is taken by a

single median series of heptagonal and hexagonal plates, so that

a compound area of three columns of plates abuts on the hyper-

trophied madreporite.

The structure of the ambulacra at and towards the ends of the

truncated areas is shown in text-figures 229 and 230. The pori-

ferous plates are seen to curve round the extremities of the zones

with considerable regularity, leaving a regularly rounded outline

rather than an abrupt break in the course of the growth of the

area,

Text-fig. 229. Text-fig. 230.

Abnormal ambulacra of Amblypneustes.

Counting from the peristome there are about 25 sets of plates

in ambulacrum ITI, and about 28in V. Ina normal ambulacrum

there are about 56.

The abnormal development, or rather, lack of development, in

this specimen is quite similar to that noted by Messrs. Ritchie

and McIntosh in Eehinus esculentus, except that the retardation

of ambulacral growth has affected two areas instead of one only.

The development of fresh ambulacral plates seems to have been

checked at a different period in the life of the animal in the case

of each ambulacrum, and no such corresponding irregularities at

about the same region of the other areas are to be found in the

Amblypneustes as there were in the case of the Hchinus. Thus

the hypothesis of a uniform and temporary wound or disease

affecting the growth of new plates round the apical system, which

could account for the latter’s abnormalities, does not seem

tenable in this case. Moreover, the great irregularity in the

numbers and proportions of the plates of the apical system seem

to point to a more radical morbidity than is compatible with the

idea of mere local injury.

It seems probable that the two missing ocular plates of the

718 MR. S. KEMP ON DECAPOD [June 15,

apical system may have been resorbed, as they should have

existed at the adapical extremities of the truncated ambulacra in

the early and normal phase of the animal’s existence. There is

no sign of their having been carried down to remain in their

terminal position at the ends of the ambulacra.

There is a small hole in the middle of interambulacrum 2

which does not look like a mere chance puncture inflicted after

the death of the animal, as it seems to have been partly healed

up by a fresh deposition of calcite from within. The hole may

be the result of the activity of some boring parasite, but whether

such an agent could cause the remarkable irregularities that

exist in the test seems very doubtful.

The following are a few important measurements of the test :—

mm.

Length (ant. rad. to post. interrad.) .......... 36

Breadth (at right angles to above) ............ 31

Height (including apical system). ............ 30

jNtrin EUS gl coche et Bee ee ee Cree 115

Diameter ot peristome «-.... eee eae ee 10

lLenouh) Oh apicallysyebem ) (ai mienereer a 7:75

Breadtheor apical system lire iii. ae: 5

From rad. III to nearest point of apical system . 14°5

” ”? Ve SS ” ”? ” ” ” 10

5. The Decapods of the Genus Gennadas collected by

H.M.S. ‘ Challenger.’ By Sranney Kemp, B.A.*

[Received June 7, 1909. |

(Plates LXXIIT.-LXXV.7)

In 1881 ¢, Spence Bate established the genus Gennadas for the

reception of certain abyssal Penzide found by the ‘ Challenger’

Expedition. He recognized two species, G. parvus and G. inter-

medius, but his descriptions and figures, viewed from the stand-

point of our present knowledge, are hopelessly inadequate.

Since 1888, when the full Report on the ‘ Challenger’ Crustacea

Macrura appeared, several authors have recorded Gennadas parvus,

but owing to the imperfections in the original description it

may be doubted whether much reliance can be placed on their

determinations.

Only quite recently has any good basis been formed for future

work. Bouvier, in 1906 §, outlined a scheme for the identification

of six Atlantic species and emphasized the value of several

characters as specific determinants ; by means of these species he

* Communicated by Dr. W. T. Catman, F.ZS.

+ For explanation of the Plates see pp. 729 & 730.

t Ann. Mag, Nat. Hist. Sept. 1881, p. 91.

§ Bull. Mus. Océanog. Monaco, 80, 1906.

Ze op LOOM E EI ain eile:

‘ — Ss \S Y

SSS SS :

LEB

West, Newman imp.

G.M.Woodward del.et lith.

1-6. GENNADAS PARVUS.

Y-i2. GENNADAS INTERMEDIUS.

oak

teas amie aS

Ease

VG Site

PZ.8.1909.PL LXXIVv.

“iy Z

— ip te Z

4 FT QOS

if LQ? SSN

G.M.Woodward del.et lith.

West,Newman imp.

1-4. GENNADAS BOUVIERT.

ee og GON NAD AS Alvi ANT

1274, Se OlS) IE IB. OV).

KE : ra a x20

G.M Woodward del.et lith. West,Newman imp.

i) (CIB INUINGNIDUAGS: IEVNIROWV US) Sg (GJ INN AID ANIS) 7 UNE UIE ID LOLS

ace NNADAS SCUMAIU S 4-5 GENNADAS CALMANI.

S= 7 (Gla ININYMIDVATS, BO) U) WAL IRI

1909. | CRUSTACEA OF THE GENUS GENNADAS. 719

was able to trace the derivation of the genus from the more

primitive Benthesicymus. This short paper was followed in 1908 *

by a lavishly illustrated memoir on the Peneide collected by the

Prince of Monaco, containing fuller treatment of the same species

in addition to valuable information on other genera, These two

papers have greatly facilitated any further work on the subject

and the revision of the ‘ Challenger’ material has in consequence

been robbed of much of its difficulty.

Before going further it is, however, necessary to refer to the

generic status of the species belonging to this group. In 18827

S. I. Smith described, under the name of Amalopeneus, a genus

which differs from Spence Bate’s Gennadas only in the total

suppression of the podobranchs on the first three pairs of pereiopods.

For some time it was thought that Spence Bate’s determination

of the branchial formula was incorrect—a not unreasonable

hypothesis ; Alcock, however, stated in 1901 that these gills were

present in certain specimens of Gennadas from Indian waters,

and an examination of the type species in the British Museum

establishes the correctness of Spence Bate’s observation.

On the other hand, specimens of Amalopencwus elegans from the

N.E. coast of America show no trace of these gills, thus confirming

Smith’s determination and that of several subsequent writers.

The question now arises whether the presence or absence of

these gills is of itself a factor of sufficient importance to justify

the retention of two distinct genera—for it is almost certain that

no other characters are available for their separation. Although

the literature of the subject contains numerous references to

this question, Bouvier, strangely enough, makes no mention of it £

in his memoir on the material collected by the ‘ Princesse-

Alice.’

The nomenclature of the species is perhaps a matter of minor

importance, if the relationships of the various forms are fully

understood. Podobranchs are rarely found on the thoracic limbs

of Decapoda Natantia; they are most frequently present in the

Penezidea, and in such a-tribe, which abounds in primitive

characters, the absence of these gills is rightly regarded as a

feature of great importance, for it indicates in no uncertain way

the degree of specialization to which the species has attained §.

I have consequently retained Amalopencus as a distinct genus

and consider Bouvier’s group, Benthesicyme, to comprise three

* Rés. Camp. Sci. Monaco, xxxiii. 1908.

+ Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard, vol. x. 1882.

{£ Bouvier (loc. cit., 1908) regards Amalopeneus as a synonym of Gennadas and,

in reference to the gill formula, merely states that it is the same as that of

Benthesicymus. This is certainly inaccurate for at least one of the species he was

dealing with, viz. Amalopeneus (Gennadas) elegans.

§ Although the determination of the complete gill formula in these species is a

matter of some difficulty, the presence or absence of podobranchs on the first three

pereiopods can be observed with the greatest ease. The podobranch in Gennadas

(Pl. LX XIV. fig. 6) is an outgrowth from the base of the epipod; in Amalopeneus

a considerable space intervenes between the epipod and the lowest gill (an arthro-

branch).

720 MR. §. KEMP ON DECAPOD [June 15,

genera, Benthesicymus, Gennadas, and Amalopenceus, the first

being the most primitive and the last the most highly specialized.

The species of Gennadas and Amalopeneus are by no means

easy of determination. The best characters are undoubtedly

those afforded by the membranous expansion of the endopods of

the first pleopods of the male (known as the petasma) and by the

sternal plates of the cephalothorax (the thelycum) in the

female.

These characters are of course of little value in very young

specimens, but they appear to afford trustworthy indications im

all examples upwards of one half the maximum length of the

species.

So far as at present known there is extremely little variation

in the form of the adult petasma, but this is not necessarily the

case with the thelycum, for Bouvier (1908, Joc. cit.) has instanced

several variations in the case of Amalopeneus valens, Smith.

Although it might be expected that seasonal variations depending

on the degree of sexual maturity of the individual would be

manifest in both thelycum and petasma, it must be noticed that

there is no evidence of this in the case of Amalopeneus elegans, a

species of wide Atlantic distribution and of common occurrence.

Bouvier has indicated other characters of great value in the

determination of the different species. Of these, the most im-

portant are the form of the antennary and infra-antennary angles,

the proportional length of the second and third joints of the

antennular peduncle, the proportional lengths of the ultimate

joint of the mandibular palp and of the merus, carpus, and chela of

the first three pairs of pereiopods. Valuable information is also

afforded by the form of the antennal scale and by the presence or

absence of a stout median spine on the first abdominal sternum.

The specimens referred by Spence Bate to Gennadas parvus and

G. intermedius are for the most part fairly perfect ; the majority

of those recorded in the ‘ Challenger’ Report are preserved in the

British Museum, and the types of both species are extant. The

specimens missing are four in number, viz. :—

St. 137. 35° 59'S., 1° 34’ E. Recorded as G. intermedius.

St. 159. S. of Australia. |

St. 250. N. Pacific. Recorded as G. parvus.

St. 289. S. Pacific.

The result of an investigation of the remaining specimens,

seventeen in number, is indicated in the table on p. 721.

If these results be accepted, it will be seen that Spence Bate

was quite as unfortunate in his treatment of this genus as Hansen

has shown him to have been with Sergestes.

In the following systematic notes no attempt has been made to

correct the many inaccuracies which disfigure Spence Bate’s work.

The condensed descriptions and figures will, it is hoped, prove

sufficient for the recognition of the type species and the two forms

described as new. The various shapes assumed by the lobes and folds

1909. } CRUSTACEA OF THE GENUS GENNADAS. 721

} |

Spence Bate’s DAperar| sic lets Author’s

identification. | Station. Lowen. [Dex identification.

(C 45 | M. of Delaware R. | ¢ Amalopeneéus elegans, Smith.

101 | Off Sierra Leone. | 2 | Not determined.

- 120 ‘| Off Pernambuco. rei Gennadas intermedius, Sp. Bate. |

| 206 | Off Manila. Q

220. | N. of New Guinea. |} 9 Gennadas bowvieri, n. sp.

CO, | do. Q

do. | do. Q Not determined.

Gennadas parvus ...... 230 |S. of Japan. By WYGDD,

232 | do. Q

do. do Q

ge, de : ¢ Gennadas calmani, Nn. sp.

235 do. Q

237 | Off Yokohama. 2 |

Uy 267 N Pane. 3 Gennadas scutatus, Bouvier.

i : 106 ff Sierra Leone. 3S TYPE

Gennadas intermedius § ies Off Bermuda. 3 Not determined.

of the petasma are so complicated that they almost defy adequate

textual treatment; the necessary information is consequently

conveyed solely by the figures.

All that is at present known of the habits of Gennadas and

Amalopenceus goes to prove that they are free-swimming forms

which never live on the ocean bottom, It is probable that all the

specimens found by the ‘Challenger’ were caught during the

ascent of the net; the depths given can therefore be accepted only

as indications of the soundings at the different stations.

GENNADAS PARVUS Spence Bate. (Plate LXXIII. figs. 1-6;

Plate LXXYV. fig. 1.)

Gennadas parvus, Sp. Bate, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Sept. 1881,

p- 192, and ‘ Challenger’ Crustacea Macrura, 1888, p. 340,

ple lixe

? Gennadas parvus, Wood-Mason, Ann. Mag. Nat, Hist. Feb.

1891, p. 189, and Oct. 1891, p. 286,

MY Gennadas parvus, Alcock, Desc. Cat. Indian Deep Sea Maer ura,

1901, p. 46.

2 Gennadas parvus, Rathbun, U.S. Fish Comm, Bull. for 1903

(publ. 1906), p. 907, fig. 60.

St. 230. S. of Japan. 26° 29’ N., 137° 57’ EH. Trawl. 2425

fathoms. One male, the type specimen, 25 mm.*

The rostral crest (Pl. LX XIII, fig. 1) is elevated above the

dorsal carina of the carapace ; its frontal margin is rather strongly

convex. It bears the usual fringe of setz between the apex and

the dorsal spine, while behind the latter there is a small tubercle

situated on the dorsal carina of the carapace. Both the antennary

* Measured from the apex of the rostrum to the tip of the telson.

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1909, No, XLIX. 49

722 MR. S. KEMP ON DECAPOD [June 15,

and infra-antennary angles are strongly acute and a very small

branchiostegal spine is present. The distance between the

cervical and post-cervical grooves, measured dorsally, is about

one-third the distance from the post-cervical groove to the hinder

edge of the carapace. The mid-dorsal carina is not evident

behind the latter groove.

The eyes are in very poor condition, one missing and the

other badly damaged. The second jomt of the antennular

peduncle is very short; measured dorsally it is less than half the

length of the ultimate segment. The antennal scale (Pl. LX XIII.

fig. 4) is three times as long as broad and not much narrowed

apically ; the convex outer margin terminates in a minute spine,

which hardly extends as far forward as the lamella.

The ultimate joint of the mandibular palp (Pl. LX XIII. fig. 5)

is fully as long as the width of the first joint. In the second

maxilla the anterior lobe of the internal lacinia is not constricted

behind its apex and is not narrower than the adjacent lobe of the

external lacinia. In the latter lacinia the anterior lobe is about

one and a half times the width of the posterior. The endopod

(Pl. LXXIII. fig. 2) is furnished with two stout curved spines

behind the apex, beyond which the narrow distal prolongation

bears four sete on the inner margin. The endopod of the first

maxillipede reaches slightly beyond the exopod. ‘The third seg-

ment is one and a quarter times the length of the second; the

fourth segment is extremely minute. Three stiff curved spines

are situated on the inner distal margin of the basal joint. In the

second maxillipede the merus (Pl. LX XIII. fig. 3) is rather less

than twice as long as broad; its anterior prolongation (7. e. the

portion extending beyond the insertion of the carpus) is about

one-third the total length of the segment.

The first pair of pereiopods is missing. In the second pair the

carpus is nearly half as long again as the chela, and the dactylus

is distinctly shorter than the palm. The carpus of the third pair

is exactly the same length as the merus and more than twice the

length of the chela; the dactylus is slightly shorter than the

alm.

" The abdomen is carinate only on the sixth somite and the median

spines on the sterna are all very blunt and inconspicuous. On

the lower margin of the telson there are basally two rounded

lobes. The apex (Pl. LX XIII. fig. 6) is rather broad and convex.

A short stout spine marks each outer angle ; between these there

are nine plumose sete of which the middle one is the longest.

The petasma is very complex ; its numerous lobes and folds are

shown in P]. LXXV. fig. 1.

This species bears a close superficial resemblance to Amalo-

pencus eleyans*. Apart from the generic character—the presence

* My statement (Fisheries, Ireland, Sci. Invest. for 1905, V. 1906) that G. parvus

and A. elegans are synonymous I now regard as erroneous. The mistake is probably

traceable to the close resemblance of the two forms and to the fact that an authentic

example of A. elegans occurs in the collection under the name of G. parous.

1909. ] CRUSTACEA OF THE GENUS GENNADAS. 723

of podobranchs on the first three pairs of pereiopods—G. parvus

is distinguished by the greater distance between the cervical and

post-cervical grooves, by the strongly acute infra-antennary angle,

by several details in the oral appendages, and by the form of the

petasma.

GENNADAS INTERMEDIUS Spence Bate. (Plate LX XIII. figs. 7-12 ;

Plate LX XV. fig. 3.)

Gennadas intermedius, Sp. Bate, ‘ Challenger’ Crustacea

Macrura, 1888, p. 343, pl. lviil. fig. 3.

St. 106. Off Sierra Leone. 1° 47’ N., 24° 26’ W. Trawl. 1850

fathoms. One male, the type specimen, ca. 48 mm.

St. 120. Off Pernambuco. 8° 37'S.) 34° 28’ W. Trawl. 675

fathoms. One male, ca. 46 mm.* (sub G. parvus

Sp. Bate.)

This species is evidently one of the more primitive species of

Gennadas, and is closely allied to G. alicei Bouvier. Both the

specimens are unfortunately in bad condition.

The rostral crest (Pl. LX XIII. fig. 7) is only slightly elevated

above the dorsal carina of the carapace, presenting a marked

contrast to that found in the preceding species. The inferior

margin is not convex. The fringe of sete between the apex of

the rostrum and the dorsal spine was evidently present originally,

although scarcely a trace of it now remains. The antennary and

infra-antennary angles are both bluntly rounded and very obtuse ;

the emargination between them is shallow, but not altogether

missing as in G. alicet. The branchiostegal spine is wholly absent

in the type specimen, but an exceedingly minute point is visible

on one side of the second example. The hinder part of the cara-

pace is distorted and crushed in both specimens; the distance

between the cervical and post-cervical grooves (measured dorsally)

is however great, probably one-half the distance from the post-

cervical groove to the hinder margin of the carapace. The mid-

dorsal carina is traceable throughout the length of the carapace,

although faint in the posterior half.

The eyes are in bad condition, but the width across the cornea

seems to be less than in G. alicet. The second joint of the an-

tennular peduncle, measured dorsally, is equal in length to the

third joint. The antennal scale is broken in every instance, but

it is evident that it is not strongly narrowed apically.

The distal joint of the mandibular palp (Pl. LX XIII. fig. 8) is

slightly longer than the width of the first joint. In the ‘second

maxilla the anterior lobe of the internal lacinia is constricted

behind its apex, and is distinctly broader than the adjacent lobe

of the external lacinia. In the latter lacinia the anterior lobe is

fully one and a half times the width of the posterior lobe. The

apex of the endopod has not exactly the same character in the two

* Tn the bottle with this specimen there is a label in Dr. Hansen’s writing, which

reads—“ Agrees with the type of G. intermedius, Bate, not with G. parvus.

124 MR. 8S. KEMP ON DECAPOD [June 15,

specimens. In the type (Pl. LX XIII. fig. 9) there are four curved

dorsal spines, two long setz at the apex of the short distal prolon-

gation and one short spine on the inner margin. In the second

example (Pl. LX XIII. fig. 10) there are three dorsal spines, a

much longer distal prolongation, and six short spines on the

inner margin.

The endopod of the first. maxillipede falls short of the apex of

the exopod. The oval third joint is twice the length of the

second; the fourth joint, when present, is very minute. The

basal joint bears two curved spines on its inner distal margin.

The merus of the second maxillipede (Pl. LX XIII. fig. 11) is

rather less than .twice as long as wide, and its anterior prolonga-

tion is not more than one-quarter the total length of the joint.

In the first pair of pereiopods the carpus, which is about the

same length as the chela, is three-quarters the length of the

merus, In the second pair the carpus is one and a half times as

long as the chela, while the dactylus is evidently shorter than

the palm. ‘The carpus of the third pair is fully as long as the

merus, the chela is about half the length of the carpus, and the

dactylus is considerably shorter than the palm.

Each of the abdominal sterna bears a blunt and incenspicuous

tubercle; the sixth somite alone is dorsally carinate. The lower

margins of the telson are bluntly bilobed at the base. The apex

is broken in the type; in the second specimen (Pl. LX XIII.

fig. 12) it is narrow, truncate, and is armed with a pair of stout

spines at each outer angle, between which are four plumose sete.

The petasma (Pl. LX XV. fig. 3) is almost identical in the two

specimens.

The resemblance of this species to Gennadas alice: is very

marked, and it is by no means improbable that the two forms

will eventually turn out to be specifically identical; in this case

the name given by Spence Bate claims priority. :

The chief points of difference between Gennadas intermedius

and Bouvier’s description and figures of G. alicer lie in the

presence of a rather obscure infra-antennary angle in the former

species, and in the forms assumed by the internal lacinia of the

second maxilla and by the merus of the second maxillipede. The

petasmata of the two species are similar.

GENNADAS CALMANI™, sp. un: (Plate LXXIV. figs. 5-11;

Plate LX XV. figs. 4 & 5.)

St. 232. S. of Japan. 35° 11’ N., 139° 28’ KH. 345 fathoms. Two

males, two females, 49-56 mm.

St. 236. S. of Japan. 34° 7'N., 138° HE. Trawl. 565 fathoms.

One female, 55 mm.

St. 237. Near Yokohama. 34° 37’ N., 140°.32' E. Trawl. 1875

fathoms. One female, 53 mm.

% This species is associated with the name of my friend Dr. W. T. Calman, to

whom I am indebted for much valuable advice and for every facility for work during

my visit to the British Museum.

1909. ] CRUSTACEA OF THE GENUS GENNADAS. 725

The rostral crest (Pl. LX XIV. fig. 5), except for the greater

prominence of the dorsal and apical spines, agrees closely with that

of G. parvus. The antennary and infra-antennary angles are both

acute: the latter is rather more bluntly rounded than the former.

The branchiostegal spine is prominent. The distance between

the cervical and post-cervical grooves, measured dorsally, is less

than one-third the distance from the post-cervical groove to the

hinder margin of the carapace. Both the grooves are faint

dorsally and do not interrupt the strong median carina which

extends the whole length of the carapace.

The second joint of the antennular peduncle, measured dorsally,

is fully three-quarters the length of the ultimate joint. The

antennal scale (P]. LX XIV. fig. 9) ‘is rather less than three times

as long as its greatest width and is remarkable for its extremely

narrow apex. The convex outer margin terminates in a rather

strong spine, which scarcely reaches as far forward as the

lamella.

The ultimate joint of the mandibular palp (Pl. LX XIV. fig. 10)

is a little shorter than the width of the basal joint. In the second

maxilla (Pl. LX XIV. fig. 8) the anterior lobe of the internal lacinia

is very strongly constricted behind the apex, but is not broader than

the adjacent lobe of the external lacinia. The anterior lobe of

the latter lacinia is very broad—about twice the width of the

interior lobe. The tip of the endopod is long and narrow; it

bears four terminal sete and four curved dorsal spines behind

the apex. The endopod of the first maxillipede reaches a little

beyond the exopod. Thethird joint is practically twice the length

of the second, and the fourth joint is extremely minute. The

basal joint bears three curved spines on its inner distal margin.

The merus of the second maxillipede (Pl. LX XIV. fig. 7) is lest

than twice as long as wide; the anterior prominence measures

about two-sevenths the total length of the joint.

In the first pair of pereiopods the carpus and chela are of equal

length ; each is about two-thirds the length of themerus. In the

second pair the palm is almost one and a half times as long as the

dactylus, the whole chela being rather more than three-quarters

the length of the carpus. The carpus of the third pair is four-

fifths the length of the merus; the chela is exactly half the length

of the carpus and the palm is not appreciably longer than the

dactylus.

The sixth somite alone is dorsally carinate. All the abdominal

sterna bear a blunt and inconspicuous median tubercle with the

exception of the first, which carries a very strong sharply

pointed spine in the same position. This character, which is

equally definite in both sexes, will probably prove of considerable

specific value: it does not seem to occur in any of the specie

described by Bouvier.

The apex of the telson is rounded and furnished with a series

of long plumose setz (eleven in one fairly perfect example). One

specimen (Pl. LX XIV. fig. 11) bears a pair of stout spines as

726 MR. 8. KEMP ON DECAPOD [June 15,

each of the outer angles; in another only a single spine is found

in this position.

The petasma (Pl. LXXYV. fig. 4) is a comparatively simple

structure and is remarkably small for such a large species. The

thelycum (Pl. LX XV. fig. 5) bears some resemblance to that of

G. alicet. The triangular plate between the bases of the third pair

of pereiopods is not traceable in one of the females examined.

This species occupies a somewhat primitive position in the

genus Gennadas. It is readily distinguished from all forms

hitherto described, by the use of the characters suggested by

Bouvier, by the prominent spine on the first abdominal sternum,

and by the extremely narrow apex of the antennal scale.

GENNADAS BOUVIERI*, sp.n. (Plate LX XIV. figs. 1-4; Plate

LXXYV. figs. 6 & 7.)

StaZ06. AW ole Manilas Plies TINE allie ele: eRe duran:

2100 fathoms. One female, 28 mm.

St. 220. N. of New Guinea. 0° 42’ S., 147° BE. Trawl. 1100

fathoms. Two females, 26 and 28 mm.

The rostral crest (Pl. LX XIV. fig. 1) is of much the same form

as in G. parvus; the apical and dorsal teeth are, however, rather

less prominent and the inferior margin is not so decidedly convex.

The carapace is dorsally carinate throughout its length. Both

the antennary and infra-antennary angles are acute and strongly

pronounced, and the branchiostegal spine is distinct though very

small. The cervical and post-cervical grooves are very closely

approximate dorsally, the distance between them is scarcely more

than one-fifth the distance from the post-cervical groove to the

hinder margin of the carapace.

The second joint of the antennular peduncle, measured dorsally,

is about the same length as the ultimate joint. The antennal

scale (P]. LX XIV. fig. 2), which is rather narrower distally than

in G. parvus, is a trifle less than three and a half times as long as

wide. The outer margin terminates in a short spine which

extends slightly beyond the apex of the lamella.

The ultimate joint of the mandibular palp (Pl. LX XIV. fig. 3)

is rather shorter than the greatest width of the basal joint. In the

second maxilla the anterior lobe of the internal lacinia is slightly

constricted behind its apex and is rather narrower than the

adjacent and similarly constricted lobe of the external lacinia.

The anterior lobe of the latter lacinia is one and a half times the

width of the posterior lobe. The endopod is produced to a

narrow apex furnished with two terminal setz and four curved

spines on the dorsal aspect. The endopod of the first maxillipede

is about the same length as the exopod. The third joint is almost

twice the length of the second; the fourth joint, though small, is

rather more evident than in the preceding species. The basal

joint bears three curved spines on its inner distal margin. The

* Professor H. LU. Bouvier.

1909. ] CRUSTACEA OF THE GENUS GENNADAS. LOA

merus of the second maxillipede (Pl. LX XIV. fig. 4) is not quite

twice as long as wide; the anterior prominence is almost one-third

the total length of the joint.

In the first pair of pereiopods the carpus, which is slightly

shorter than the chela, is three-fifths the length of the merus.

In the second pair the dactylus is equal in length to the palm,

the whole chela béing a little shorter than the carpus. The

merus of the third pair is very distinctly shorter than the carpus,

the chela is rather more than half the length of the carpus, and

the dactylus is almost as long as the palm.

The sternum of the first abdominal somite bears a large and

stout median spine; on the succeeding somites this is reduced to

a blunt tubercle. The sixth somite alone is dorsally carinate.

The telson is squarely truncate apically and is furnished with five

plumose setze between the usual pair of stout lateral spines.

The three females differ slightly in regard to the thelycum.

One example (Pl. LX XV. fig. 6) shows the dark yellow and toughly

chitinized spermatophores partially inserted beneath the large

rounded plate, lying between the third and fourth pairs of legs.

A second specimen is as nearly as possible identical with this,

but the spermatophores are wholly covered by the thelycal plate.

In the third example, which shows no spermatophores, the pos-

terior plate is much shorter than the other two (Pl. LX XV. fig. 7),

but it is possible that this is due, at least in part, to the contracted

condition of the specimen.

Attempts to remove the spermatophores proved unsuccessful,

for their inner ends are very firmly fixed (probably cemented) in

a pocket or spermatheca lying beneath the plate.

Gennadas bowviert differs from all the other species in the

‘Challenger’ collection in the proportional lengths of the merus

and carpus of the third pair of pereiopods. It takes rank in the

second section of Bouvier’s synoptic table, along with Gennadas

talismani, G. tinayrei, and G. valens. We have no precise in-

formation concerning the branchial formule of these three species,

but from Smith’s account * it seems probable that valens is a true

Amalopencus.

GENNADAS scuTATUS Bouvier. (Plate LXXV. fig. 2.)

Gennadas scutatus, Bouvier, Bull. Mus. Océanog. Monaco, no. 80,

1906, figs. 8 & 13, and Rés. Camp. Sci. Monaco, xxxii. 1908,

p. 42, pl. vii.

St. 267. N. Pacific. 9° 28’ N., 150° 49° W. 2700 fathoms.

One male, 21 mm.

_ The ultimate joint of the mandibular palp is only a trifle

shorter than the width of the basal joint. The third joint of the

endopod of the second maxillipede is wider than in Bouvier’s

figure, and the fourth joint is much less prominent. With the

* Rep. U.S. Fish Comm. for 1882 (1883), p. 402.

(28 MR. 8. KEMP ON DECAPOD [June 15,

exception of these details the specimen agrees in every respect

with the French author's account. The petasma (Pl. LXXV.

fig. 2) is almost identical with the text-figure published in 1906.

The presence of podobranchs on the first three pairs of pereio-

pods indicates that this form, like the four species already

described, is a true Gennadas.

AMALOPENZUS ELEGANS Smith.

St. 45. Off the mouth of the Delaware R. 38° 34’ N., 72° 10’ W.

Trawl. 2500 fathoms. One male, 24 mm.

The solitary specimen, which is without trace of podobranchs

on the first three pereiopods, is in all respects typical of this

well known Atlantic species.

Three of the specimens present in the collection have not been

determined :—

St. 101. Off Sierra Leone (sub G. parvus Sp. Bate).

This specimen, which is partially devoured by a parasitic worm,

is figured in the ‘Challenger’ Report. Its condition is so bad

that any attempt at identification is out of the question.

St. 220. N. of New Guinea (sub G. parvus Sp. Bate).

A single female from the above station is easily recognized as

distinct from the two G. bowviert occurring in the same haul. It

appears to represent an undescribed species, but it does not seem

advisable to attempt a description without more abundant

material.

St. ? Off Bermuda (sub G@. intermedius Sp. Bate).

The petasma of this small specimen, which was caught at the

surface, does not appear to have assumed its adult form.

The following list of references may be of value to future

workers at this group. So far as I am aware, it comprises all

species referred to Gennadas (sensu lato) which have not been

noticed in the present paper or in Bouvier’s memoir :—

Gennadas carinatus Smith. N.E. Atlantic and Arabian Sea.

Smith (sub Benthesicymus ? curinatus), Rep. U.S. Fish Comm.

for 1882 (1884), p. 396, pl. x. figs. 6 & 7.

Alcock & Anderson, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, ]xiii. 1894, p. 147.

Alcock, Dese. Cat. Indian Deep Sea Macrura, 1901, p. 46.

McGilchrist (@. carinatus ?), Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., March

1905, p. 236.

Gennadas borealis Rathbun. Aleutian Is.

Rathbun, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. xxiv. 1902, p. 887.

Rathbun, Harriman Alaska Exped. x. 1904, p. 147, figs.

88 & 89.

Gennadas propinguus Rathbun. Hawaiian Is.

Rathbun, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm. for 1903 (1906), p. 907,

fig. 61.

1909. ] CRUSTACEA OF THE GENUS GENNADAS, 729

Gennadas sp. Ecuador.

Faxon, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, xvii. 1895, p. 207.

Gennadas sp. Hawaiian Ts,

Rathbun, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm. for 1903 (1906), p. 907,

fig. 62.

It is much to be regretted that so little is known concerning

the branchial formule of many of the species. At present only

one undoubted species of Amalopeneus is known—4dA. elegans

Smith, though it is probable that the form described by Smith as

valens also belongs to the same genus. — Six species, viz., the four

described in this paper along with G. scwtatus Bouvier and

G. carinatus Smith belong to Gennadas (sensu stricto). In all the

remaining species precise information concerning the branchial

formula is lacking. Even those who are not disposed to admit

the existence of two distinct genera will recognize the value

of the character for splitting the group into workable sections.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Prats LXXIII.

Gennadas parvus Sp. Bate.

. Lateral view of the anterior part of the type specimen. X 10.

. Apex of the endopod of the second maxilla. X 65.

. Second maxillipede. xX 113.

. Antennal scale. X 11.

. Mandibular palp. x 24.

. Apex of telson. X 26.

Oak whore

Gennadas intermedius Sp. Bate.

Fig. 7. Lateral view of the anterior part of the type specimen. X 6.

8. Mandibular palp. x 53.

9. Apex of the endopod of the second maxilla of the type specimen. X 30.

10. Apex of the endopod of the second maxilla of the second specimen. X 30.

11. Part of the endopod of the second maxillipede. X 53.

12. Apex of the telson. X 26.

Prats LXXIV.

Gennadas bouvieri, sp. 0.

1. Lateral view of the anterior part of the carapace. X 73.

2. Antennal scale. X 83.

3. Mandibular palp. x 105.

4. Second maxillipede. xX 14.

Gennadas calmani, sp 0.

. Lateral view of the anterior part of the carapace. X 52.

Part of the second pereiopod, showing the epipod, “podobranch, and two

arthrobranchs in situ. X 9.

. Part of endopod of second maxillipede. X 6.

. Second maxilla. X 65.

. Antennal scale. X 4.

. Mandibular palp. X 7.

. Apex of the telson. X 21%.

HOOmM aT an

730 DR. CHALMERS MITCHELL ON [June 15,

Prats LXXV.

Gennadas parvus Sp. Bate.

Fig.1. Petasma, right side. X 17.

Gennadas scutatus Bouvier.

Fig.2. Petasma, left side. X 25.

Gennadas intermedius Sp. Bate.

Fig.3. Petasma, right side. X 16.

Gennadas calmani, sp. n.

Fig. 4. Petasma, left side. x 19.

5. Thelycum. X 73.

Gennadas bowvieri, sp. n.

.6. Thelycum, showing spermatophores in situ. X 20.

7. Thelycum of another specimen. X 20.

6. Notes on a Young Walrus (Odobenus rosmarus) recently

living in the Society’s Gardens. By P. CHALMERS

Mircnetz, M.A., D.Se., Hon. LL.D., F.R.S., Secretary

to the Society.

[Received June 11, 1909.]

(Plate LXXVI.*)

The Society received on Nov. 23, 1908, two young examples of

the Atlantic Walrus, Odobenus rosmarus. The animals came

from Franz Josef Land and were cubs born in the spring of the

same year, and probably, therefore, under nine months old. It

was stated that whilst the whaling ship, which brought them

from the Arctic region, was in harbour, the animals were allowed

to go to the bottom, ropes being tied round their shoulders to

prevent their escape, and the sailors were of the opinion that they

fed themselves there although they had no views as to what the

food was. On the other hand, they had been fed on the voyage

until their arrival in England, on whale’s blubber. On their

arrival at the Gardens, the only food that they would take at

first, and which afterwards they appeared to prefer, was horses’

fat. They took this from the hand in small pieces, and as they

sucked it in, made a slobbering sound with their protruded lips.

Whatever food they took, either from the hand, or from the

ground, or from a bucket mixed with salt and water, they always

sucked in small pieces, and would take only when it was soft

and slippery. As fat is not a sufficient diet, every effort was

made to get them to take something more nutritious. After a

good deal of persuasion they were induced to take fresh fish,

cleared of bones and cut into strips; they preferred cod to haddock

or whiting, and would not touch filleted herring. They ate

greedily the soft viscera of cod, such as liver and roe, and portions

of the intestines. They also took mussels and scallops removed

* For explanation of the Plate see p. 732.

P.Z.S. 1909 PL. LXXVI.

From a water-colour by Cartoz Moore-Park. Bemrose, Derby.

YOUNG WALRUS (ODOBANUS ROSMARUS).

1909. ] A YOUNG WALRUS. 731

from the shells, but showed no knowledge of how to extract them

for themselves, although they would bring up*mussels from the

bottom of their pond. They also ate slices of squid readily, but,

although they would turn them over as if hunting for something,

they would not eat edible seaweed, green laver (Ulva), ordinary

seaweed (Hucus vesiculosa), or laminaria.

Walruses have been stated by Malmgren to subsist for two

years almost solely on the milk of the mother, but it seems

probable from the way these young animals would suck up soft

food from the hand or seek it out when it was placed on the

ground, that in the natural condition they subsist partly on

chewed food accidentally or designedly dropped from the mouth of

the mother*. Whether their diet in the Society’s Gardens was

natural or not, it was evidently sufficient. One of the two speci-

mens died as the result of a most unfortunate accident after it had

been with us for about a week, and the other died of a severe

double-pneumonia after a few weeks, but in each case the body

was thoroughly well-nourished.

These young Walruses were extremely docile and intelligent.

They made friends with the keeper very quickly and would

follow him about, and would readily come out of the water to be

fondled by anyone who took an interest in them. On one

occasion a Sea-Lion, by a remarkable feat of agility climbed the

barrier and came into the small portion of the pond occupied by

the surviving Walrus. In the morning, the two animals were

found peacefully sharing the sleeping-den. But the sea-lion had

bitten the Walrus, although not seriously, and for a day or two

afterwards no persuasion would induce the Walrus to leave its

den and go out where it could hear and see the Sea-Lions.

It has been suggested that the pads of strong pellucid bristles,

which form the drooping, whisker-like masses depending from the

upper lip on either side of the nostrils, may serve as a kind of

strainer. However this may be, they certainly must serve to

protect the muzzle from injury. The young Walruses constantly

rubbed their muzzles over the surface of the ground or against

the sides and bottom of the tank. In moving on land, they not

infrequently used the muzzle in progression, raising themselves

partly from the ground with a considerabie portion of their

weight resting on these bristly pads. Moreover, in the rather

laborious task of climbing out of the water on to the rocky edge

of the pond, they almost invariably raised the head out of the

water, pressing these bristles flat against the rock, and so to speak

heaving themselves up as if with the aid of the fore-flippers they

were on the way to stand on their heads. The rough bristles not

only protected their muzzles but gave them a better hold on a

slippery surface.

* [Since reading the above paper I have been informed by Mr. B. C. Johannesen,

who has frequently been to Franz Josef Land and who has watched Walruses in

their natural state, that the young stay with the mother for about three years, and

that they are fed on food which she chews and throws on the ground. He added

that mussels and other shell-fish are the staple food. |

732 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE [June 15,

My friend and predecessor Dr. P. L. Sclater having called my

attention to the want of a good figure of the young Walrus, taken

from a living specimen, I was fortunate enough to enlist the interest

of Mr. Carton Moore Park, F.Z.S., who made a series of careful

studies from the living animal, one of these being reproduced

in Plate LXXVI. The figure shows the animal in a characteristic

attitude. The general coloration is a dull rusty black approaching

to mahogany over the body generally, and with a strongly marked

bluish tint on the naked parts of the face and flippers. The hair

of the fur was nearly bluish black when dry. The eyes were

brown and very soft and intelligent. The whiskers were trans-

lucent, and varied in colour from white or yellow to light-blue

according to the incidence of the light falling on them.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE LXXVI.

Young Walrus, Odobenus rosmarus, drawn from a living example by Mr. Carton

Moore Park, F.Z.S.

7. Notes on the Viscera of a Walrus (Odobenus rosmarus).

By R. H. Burns, M.A., F.Z.S.

[Received May 24, 1909. ]

(Text-figures 231-234.)

Through the kindness of Mr. Beddard, some of the viscera of

the young female Walrus, lately living in the Society’s Gardens,

were sent to the College of Surgeons for use in the Museum.

Several preparations were made from them by the Prosector

(William Pearson), and although the anatomy of the Walrus

is fairly well known, particularly from the researches of Dr. Murie

published in the Transactions of this Society for 1872, some few

points worthy of record are shown by these new specimens.

The diaphragmatic sphincter of the vena cava inferior.

Among the viscera supplied to the Museum were the heart and

lungs, and in connection with them the upper part of the vena

cava inferior and a minute fragment of the diaphragm. In making

this preparation the Prosector observed that the lower 3 cm. of

the thoracic segment of the vena cava inferior was surrounded

by a sheath of circularly disposed striated muscle directly con-

tinuous with the muscles of the diaphragm (text-fig. 231). The

sheath is from 1-2 mm. thick and terminates towards the

heart in a sharp, well-defined edge. For some distance from

this edge it could easily be freed from the underlying wall of

the cava, but was more firmly adherent to it near the diaphragm.

A similar muscle has been described in Phoca vitulina and

Phocena communis*, and apparently forms part of a mechanism

for controlling the blood-stream in aquatic mammals.

* Weber, Arch. f. Anat. (Miller) 1840, p. 236.

1909. | VISCERA OF A WALRUS. 733

In Cetacea and Pinnipedes the vena cava and hepatic veins

combine to form an enormous reservoir between the liver and the

diaphragm (Barkow, “ Die Blutgefiisse”) in which an immense

quantity of blood can be stored. The exit from this reservoir is

comparatively narrow and can obviously be still further decreased

or possibly completely closed by such a sphincter band as that

described above.

Text-fig. 231.

The thoracic vena caya inferior of a Walrus, showing the diaphragmatic

= sphincter band, Sph.

There seems little reason to doubt that the venous reservoir

and the sphincter of the vena cava form parts of one mechanism,

the use of which is possibly to restrict the flow of venous blood

to the heart and so to keep up the average purity of the blood

when the animal is immersed. For it is clear that the more the

aeration of the blood is confined to that necessary for the action

of the central nervous system and the voluntary parts of the

animal, the further the oxygen stored in the lungs will go in

carrying on the absolutely necessary activities of the body and

the longer the animal will be able to stay immersed. It would

thus seem to be of decided advantage to a diving mammal to be

able to prevent, temporarily, the blood returning from the alimen-

tary canal and liver (which forms a very great part of the blood

carried by the vena cava inferior) from reaching the heart and

lungs, for if this mass of impure blood were poured into the

lungs, as in the ordinary course of circulation, it would tend to

very greatly hasten the general fouling of the blood.

But during immersion the action of the vegetative as opposed

734 MR. R. H. BURNE ON ‘THE [June 15,

to the voluntary organs might without much disadvantage be

held more or less in abeyance, and their circulation be stopped

or retarded for the time. As a matter of fact the visceral

circulation, even if the venous sphincter were completely closed,

would probably not become quite stagnant, at least for some

considerable time, for the returning venous current would be

accommodated in the sub-diaphragmatic sinus. When the animal

returns to the surface and breathes again, the temporary block

on the vena cava inferior would be removed and the normal

circulation restored.

In this connection it should be noticed that in the Walrus

(Murie, J. c. p. 431) the arteries for the head and fore part of

the body and for the alimentary canal are remarkably large in

comparison with those for the hind limbs, so that evidently the

two most important venous return currents are from the viscera

by the inferior cava and from the fore part of the animal by the

superior cava, that from the hind end of the body being insigni-

ficant. ‘The removal of one of these chief sources of impurity

from the circulation would necessarily greatly enhance the

effective purification of the other.

Although this may be, and I think is, the primary function of

this muscle, there is also the probability, as pointed out to me by

my cousin (Mr. T. W. Burne), that the temporary closure of the

vena cava inferior would help to relieve the pressure in the right

heart consequent on the suspension of respiratory movements.

This pressure must be very great in diving creatures, and the

paramount importance of its reduction is shown by the presence

even in animals not aquatic, including man, of a well-known

mechanism in connection with the tricuspid valve designed to

act as a safety-valve and allow of the backflow of blood into the

veins when the right ventricle becomes unduly distended through

cessation of active respiration or by an increased flow of venous

blood to the heart. This mechanism was exhaustively described

many years ago by Mr. T. W. King* (for the knowledge of whose

paper [am much indebted to Dr. James Mackenzie), and his argu-

ments, as he himself emphasizes, apply with added force to diving

air-breathing creatures, for not only is the pulmonary circulation

checked by the cessation of the respiratory movements while the

animal is still otherwise in full activity, but as has been shown

by Mr. Houston + the great pressure of the surrounding water

tends to drive the blood from the surface of the body and con-

centrate it upon the heart. To obviate this and to retard the

return flow of the blood, there are in most if not all diving

air-breathing animals (both birds and mammals) great sinuses

in connection with the chief veins in which the blood may collect

on its way to the heart and into which it may regurgitate through

the imperfectly closed tricuspid when the over-distended right

ventricle contracts. But except in the case of: the inferior vena

* King, Guy’s Hospital Reports, vol. ii. 1837, pp. 104-178.

+ Houston, Brit. Assoc. Reports, 1836, p. 81.

1909. ] VISCERA OF A WALRUS. 735

cava in Pinnipedes and Porpoises there is, so far as I know,

no sphincter for cutting off the venous reservoirs from the heart,

and in fact if there were, it would to some extent diminish their

efficiency as receptacles to receive the backflow thrown into the

veins through the tricuspid and auricle. One is therefore led to

suppose that the function of the sphincter is primarily not so

much to relieve the pressure on the heart, as by restricting the

quantity of venous blood returning to the heart to prolong the

time during which such blood as is absolutely necessary for

the voluntary activities of the animal can be efficiently aerated.

The generative organs.

In the ‘ Journal of Anatomy’ for 1900 (p. 159) Professor Cleland

describes the reproductive organs of a young female Walrus and

draws attention in particular to the condition of the cervix and

corpus uteri—the part extending from the opening into the

vagina to the point of separation of the two cornua. This part,

except in those mammals in which the uteri are quite separate

Text-fig. 232.

Clitoris and prepuce, seen from the side.

and open by distinct ora into the vagina, is normally a single or

partly divided chamber opening below by a single os into the

vagina and branching above into the two cornua. This, however,

was not the condition found by Professor Cleland in his Walrus.

On the contrary the cervix uteri was divided throughout its

length into two distinct channels, lying side by side, separated

by a thick median partition and opening into the vagina by

separate ora situated upon a single swollen eminence. Distally

each uterine chamber passed without interruption, except for a

slight kinking of its rugee, into the cornu of the same side. This

exact condition is so seldom met with in mammals, although it

occurs occasionally as a rare anomaly in man, that Prof. Cleland

was doubtful whether he might not possibly have chanced upon

an abnormal individual. This, however, seemed less likely, as he

736 MR. R. H. BURNE ON THE [June 15,

found in Ofaria and Phoca signs of a similar though less perfect

subdivision of the cervix uteri, Nevertheless it seemed to him

highly desirable that this point should be confirmed whenever

the opportunity should arise.

The specimen now examined fully confirms Prof. Cleland’s

observation, so closely that any description of the uteri beyond

the above abstract from his paper is unnecessary.

Text-fig. 233.

The ovary and ovarian sac of a Walrus, seen from the dorsal aspect, with the

sac cut open.

F. Bundle of fimbrie running forward from the lower edge of the Fallopian

tube, F.7. O. Ovary. S. Wall of ovarian sac. S.O. Opening of ovarian sac

into body-cavity. U. Horn of the uterus.

Complete duplicity of the uterus combined with complete

superficial fusion of the lower ends is recorded in some of the

larger Bats*, but I have not found a record of it elsewhere and

there is no example showing such a condition in the large series

preserved in the Museum 7, although several Rodents with com-

pletely separate uteri suggest it. The next stage, in which the

lower part of the uteri are completely fused to form a ‘“ body ”

separated more or less in its upper parts by a septum, but opening

by a single os, is extremely common and naturally leads to the

single chamber of the Primates.

This specimen also agrees with Prof. Cleland’s in the large

size of the urogenital sinus (6 cm. in length) and in its separation

from the vagina by a strong hymeneal fold projecting from its

* Robin, Ann. Sci. Nat. ser. 6, t. xii. p. 137.

+ R. Coll. Surgeons.

1909.] VISCERA OF A WALRUS. 737

dorsal wall. The clitoris also is of great size, forming a large

twisted prominence upon the ventral surface of the urogenital

sinus and terminating ina swollen trifid glans that projects freely

from the upper part of a deep preputial recess (text-fig, 232,

p. 735).

The ovary, like that of the Seal and Sea-Lion, lies in a

voluminous ovarian sac which communicates with the body-cavity

by a small aperture upon the dorsal aspect opposite the uterine

extremity of the ovary (text-fig. 233). The Fallopian tube is

short and, so far as could be seen, straight, and opens into the

ovarian sac by a crescentic aperture situated upon the roof of the

ovarian sac just to the anterior side of its opening into the body-

cavity. From the posterior lip of the Fallopian funnel a series

of parallel ridges (fimbriz) pass forward along the roof of the

ovarian sac close to the line of attachment of the ovary. In the

small size of the opening of the ovarian sac the Walrus more

nearly resembles Otaria than Phoca.

The bile and pancreatic ducts.

Murie in his description of the bile duct and alimentary canal

(J. c. p. 429) describes a curious and very extensive (54 in. long)

dilatation of the common bile duct within the walls of the

intestine between its point of contact with the gut wall and its

Text-fig. 234.

Bile and pancreatic ducts and their mode of entry into the intestinal

cul-de-sac.

B.D. Bile duct. C. Fold encircling the papilla by which I.C., the intestinal cul-

de-sac, opens into the cavity of the intestine, J. P.D. Pancreatic duct.

communication with the intestinal cavity. The preparation made

from this present individual in most respects fully bears out

Murie’s description, but to it should be added the mode of entry

of the pancreatic duct; and I wish also, upon the suggestion

of Prof. Keith, to put forward another interpretation of the

nature of the dilatation of the bile duct within the intestinal

wall.

The bile duct enters the intestine at a very acute angle close to

the beginning of the duodenum. After running for 3 cm. without

change within the substance of the wall, it opens suddenly by

a well-defined circular aperture through the side wall of the

elongated chamber described by Murie as the terminal part of

the duct. This is not quite the same thing as “ enlarging into

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1909, No. L. 50

738 ON 'THE VISCERA OF A WALRUS. [June 15,

a capacious duct.” ‘The pancreatic duct enters the intestinal wall

upon its concave aspect 1 cm. below the bile duct; it passes,

within the substance of the wall, diagonally downwards towards

the convex border of the gut superficial to the bile duct and opens

into the elongated chamber upon a prominent papilla, just to the

colic side of the opening of the bile duct.

The relative size of the elongated chamber and its coarse

structure and appearance agree in every respect with Murie’s

description. It may be mentioned, however, that the papilla

on which it opens is circumvallate, bemg surrounded by a sharp

circular fold of mucous membrane.

Sections through the bile duct, elongated chamber, and intestine

show that in minute structure the elongated chamber resembles

the intestine rather than the bile duct ; and there is little doubt,

both on this ground and from the mode of entry into it of both

the bile and pancreatic ducts, that this chamber is really a diver-

ticulum of the intestine and not a dilated part of the bile duct.

The Sea-Lion, from Murie’s description and figure*, has a

similar intra-mural bile receptacle; but I do not know of its

occurrence elsewhere except in the Chelonia, especially Dermo-

chelys, and, as I am told by Mr. Beddard, in the Edentate

Myrmecophaga.

The stomach.

The curious U-shaped superficial appearance of the stomach

has been already fully described, but at present there is no

record of the histological structure.

Sections taken at three points, (1) close to the entry of the

cesophagus, (2) in the middle of the U-shaped curve, (3) an inch

from the pylorus, show that the histological structure agrees

fairly well with that of the stomach of Otarcay. In localities

1 & 2 the submucosa was occupied by a number of peptic glands

arranged in bundles separated from neighbouring bundles by

connective tissue. In locality 1 the glands were only slightly

more than half as long as in locality 2, but had very much the

same structure, the parietal cells being very numerous in both.

In locality 2 the deep ends of the gland tubes were inclined to

be contorted. In locality 3 the glands were pyloric, and were

large and much contorted, more so apparently than in either the

Sea-Lion or the Seal. Their terminal parts formed a series of

large lobules in the deeper parts of the submucosa, separated from

each other by connective tissue, but near enough to one another

to constitute an approximately continuous layer.

* Maurie, Trans. Zoel. Soe. vol. vil. p. 565.

+ Pilhet, C. R. Soc. Biol. ser. 10, t. i. 1894, p. 743.

fF yt es =

ConTENtS (continued).

June 15, 1909.

Page

Mr. H. W. Unthank, F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a skull of Sphenodon with

abnormal nasal region ........- TEmosEa dead oon Oo Cobos LoDo desman Scone eeee 666

The Secretary. Exhibition of the ears of an Elephant from the Gees Ngishu Plateau, east

of Mt. Elgon, British Hast Africa

Mr. J. C. White, C.I.E., C.M.Z.8. Exhibition of photographs of a young living specimen

of the Takin (Budorcas)

}

v. R, Lydekker. Exhibition of photographs of a spotted bull Tsaine or Bantin from Siam.. 668

r. Oldfield Thomas, F.R.S., F.Z.8. Exhibition and description of a new Rat (Ozotylomys

guatemal@) from Guatemala .. 000.0. eee ne ws reece es nee enc tens Ose erat fats 669

Dr. F. Wood Jones, F.Z.8.- On a theory of Atoll formation ............... seo ee rate 671

Dr. R. Broom, ©.M.Z.8. Exhibition of an unborn feetus of Chrysochloris hottentota, and two

POM AS HEciIMENnshon O. \MSLAAiCUNe cera. e tease s| atin e wide’ ex ns ecjebins aclow-aclee eo cee eewO TO

Dr. R. Broom, C.M.Z.8. Exhibition of the skulls of two §. African fossil reptiles—

Lycosuchus vanderrieti and Bawria Cynops ...+ cece cere er weet rece eceeve cee es OFF

1, On the Organ of Jacobson in Orycteropus. By R. Broom, D.Se., C.M.Z.S. (Plate LXXI.) 680

2. On some Points in the Structure of the Lesser Anteater (Zamandua tetradactyla),

with Notes on the Cerebral Arteries of Myrmecophaga and onthe Posteaval of Orycteropus.

By Frank EH. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.8., Prosector to the Society ............+. 683

3. On Decapod Crustacea from Christmas Island, collected by Dr. C. W. Andrews, F.R.S.,

Zon yal CAUMAN, DESC r aH Zi Se CE laberiXeXslo)ec\c.0c 6')+:sksleneleics aes sjovus el «ls 703

4, An Abnormal Individual of the Echinoid Amblypneustes. By H. L. Hawxins, B.Sc,

Mark Stirrup Scholar in the University of Manchester ..............08--..3...5, 714

5, The Decapods of the Genus Gennadas collected by H.M.S. ‘Challenger.’ By Srantuy

dai AS (ele tres bY. MUL D0") Heese oopaeh baad dn wvae Gamo poo e aos edt eK S 718

6. Notes on a Young Walrus (Odobenus rosmarus) recently living in the Society’s Gardens.

By P. Cuaumers Mircuzut, M.A., D.8c., Hon. LU.D., F.R. 8., Secretary to the Society.

(GEN BD. C.Q'a IA ehe Alea en ace cei rea isrers » Pechhetaeheleteegele allepscaray he egeeene ey aia era gaat 730

7. Notes on the Viscera of a Walrus (Odobenus rosmurus), By R. H. Burne, M.A., F.Z,S. 732

LIST. OF PLATES;

1909, pp. 545-738.

Plate : Page

LXIX. Sze-chuen Hangul (female), Cervus cashmirianus macneiwli .. 588

OX Alpheus chlersiade Nia nar sscier iinet tense keller rele 663

LXXI. Organ of Jacobson in Orycteropus .. 0.2.02. see. es nceees 680

LXXII. 1-3. Lioxanthodes aleocki. 4,5. Sesarma murrayt. 6,7. Hy-

astenus andrewst, 8,9. H. uncifer ....-..0..+.200----.- 703:

LXXIII. 1-6. Gennadas parvus. 7-12. Gennadas intermedius ...... )

UXXIV. 1-4. Gennadas bouviert. 5-11. Gennadas calmani .......-

rProQ.

LXXV. 1. Gennadas parvus. 2. Gennadas scutatus. 3. Gennadas ris

intermedius. 4, 5. Gennadas calmant. 6, 7. Gennadas |

BOUVET UE OR 6 Ae Oe OUST SEE Re SSE IO Ee

LXXVI. Young Walrus (Odobenus rosmarus) oi oes. eee ee ce ence cece 730:

NOTICE.

The ‘ Proceedings’ for the year are issued in four parts, paged consecutively,

so that the complete reference is now P. Z. §. 1909, p. .... The Distribution

is as follows :—

Papers read in January and February, issued in June.

* » March and April, » >, August.

May and June, » 97 October.

November and December,,, ,, April.

73° a”

be 99

‘ Proceedings,’ 1909, pp. 201-544, were published on August 23rd, 1909.

The Abstracts of the papers read at the Scientific Meetings in

May and June are contained in this Part.

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

GENERAL MEETINGS FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS

OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY

OF LONDON,

1909.

Pages 739-952.

Part LV: contTAINING PAPERS RBAD IN

NOVEMBER ann DECEMBER.

APRIL 1910.

PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY,

SOLD AT THEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER SQUARE.

LONDON :

MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO.,

PATERNOSTER ROW.

[Price Twelve Shillings.]

LIST OF CONTENTS.

1909, pp. 739-952.

November 9, 1909.

' Page

The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society's Menagerie during the months of

May, June, July, August, and September, 1909....... 1 Di, ROR eae yas Susie a deans eet 739

The Secretary, Exhibition of the frontlet of a Mishmi Takin (Budorcas taxicelor). Also

of a carved wooden figure of a Takin .....000...0.. 0.0006. PM ermtariitore BON, Uae)

Prof. E. A. Minchin, M.A., V.P.Z.S. Exhibition of microscopic preparations of the

Cysticercus-stage of a Cestode found in the body-cavity of rat-fleas (Ceratophyllus

WCSCULELLS) te tehe fereePn tate late SRY eRe seaser day ee TRL AEN rina REMERON ea picre promos Bre fie!

Dr. Robert T. Leiper, F.Z.S. Tetcbition and description of a new Nematode Worm ;

(Lagochilascaris minor) from Trinidad .. +. 1... 0.6 see e eee ee eee ee WEES 8s ch «« 742

Mr. R. Lydekker. Exhibition of an old coloured print of the chief room of Bullock's

AMIS erate leycsasstee Fonidn conosdcosnooDoLeds uso ispetegeisiisl aeons cencierefecenete he nthe aaa 744

I. Some Living Shells, their recent Biology and the Light they throw on the Latest

Physical Changes in the Earth—I. Mya arenaria. By Sir Henry H. Howorrn,

USC SUA OP DM On Day IS Se INGA: aa deine anu avert teres Gans oeuctedenoonab sce cS one (40

2. The Asiatic Fishes of the Family Anaban hee, By C. Tare Reean, M.A., F.Z.S.

(Ebur os) ByO.C ULE Ep. O.0 0.0) oes e nan Geir os CREME OM Mte AAC ERE = Sidley Skea 767

3. On a Small Collection of Mammals from Egypt. By J. Lewis Bonnorn, M.A., F.LS.,

JEW ZROMS eat shat De pick p on Cn aus OO lSidc Cin acs ECA CIs ROCA nce crete onions o Ma arocn fes

November 23, 1909.

The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of

WetaberwlOOOs Seer rete aretirectale ete ahaa vayiar dict Uae a\olatatel Gtd,jare'a.cUeks]Miaho op eteeste he) Ta lee 798.

Prof. William Ridgeway, M.A., D.Sc. A letter from, correcting an error in his paper on

“ The Differentiation of the Three Species of Zebras” .......+2++2....0- PARES aio 798

Dr. F. D. Welch, F.Z.8. Bal OE oa ot photographs of a male Gayal (Bzbos frontal living

in the Society’s Gardens ........ Re a APOIO COURT Ooo Be operate tevfetesexel (cede 800

Mr. William Bickerton, F.Z.S., M.B.O.U. Abstracf of a lecture, illustrated with lantern-

slides, on the nesting haunts and habits of the five species of British Nesting Terns .. 800

1. An Account of the Geographical Distribution of the Marsupials and Monotremes of

South-West Australia, haying special reference to the Specimens collected during the

Balston Expedition of 1904-1907. By G. C. SHoRTRIDGH «26... 6.+e cece cee e ees: 803

2. Notes on some Amphipoda from the North Side of the Bay of Biscay. Families

Puixustip# and Husrrip#. By Mrs. E. W. Sexron. (Plates LXXX. & LXXXI.).... 848

3, Notes on some Aberrations in Oriental Lepidoptera, and on a new Form of Huschema

from Sumatra. By Lt.-Col. J. Mancoum Fawcerr. (Plate LXXXIT.) .........--- 880

4. Note on the Cetacean Sotalia borneénsis. By R. LyDEKKER ....--..-+..-2+++- +++ ee 883

Contents continued on page.d of Wrapper.

1909.] THE SECRETARY ON ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 139

November 9, 1909.

S. F. Harmer, Hsq., M.A., Sc.D., F.R.S., Vice-President,

in the Chair,

The Secretary read the following report on the additions made

to the Society's Menagerie during the months of May, June,

July, August, and September, 1909 :—

May.

The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the

month of May were 201 in number. Of these 63 were

acquired by presentation, 5 by purchase, 42 were received on

deposit, 83 in exchange, and 8 were born in the Gardens.

The total number of departures during the month, by death

and by removals, was 199.

Amongst the additions special attention may be called to the

following :—

A pair of Sable Antelopes (Hippotragus niger), from South

Africa, purchased on May 8th.

A male Chamois (L’upicapra tragus), born in the Menagerie on

May 17th.

A Collection of Mammals and Birds from Venezuela, including

a Brazilian Tree- Porcupine (Coendu prehensilis), a Green Hang.

nest (Ostinops viridis), new to the Collection, and a Sun- Bittern

(Hurypyga helias), presented by Albert Pam, EKsq., F.Z.S.,

May 19th.

A large Collection of Reptiles, including 3 Water-Vipers

(Ancistr odon piseworus), 2 Diamond Rattlesnakes (Crotalus

adamanteus), 4 Texan Rattlesnakes (Crotalus atrox), 2 King

Snakes (Ophibolus getulus), and 2 Say’s Snakes (Pitwophis Lop

received in exchange from the Zoological Society of New York on

May 18th.

JUNE.

The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the

month of June were 311 in number. Of these 75 were acquired

by presentation, 159 by purchase, 37 were received on deposit,

23 in exchange, and 17 were born in the Gardens.

The total number of departures during the month, by death

and by removals, was 144.

Amongst the additions special attention may be called to the

following :—

1 Aard Wolf (Proteles cristatus), 1 Brindled Gnu (Connochetes

taurina), and 1 Ground-Hornbill (Buceros capensis), from South

Africa, received in exchange on June 7th.

1 Dziggetai (Equus hemionus) 3, new to the Collection, from

Mongolia, deposited by the President on June 10th.

2 Bantings (Bos sondaicus) g 2, from Further India, received

in exchange on June 3rd.

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1909, No LI. 51

740 THE SECRETARY ON ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. | Nov. 9,

1 Bhutan Takin (Budorcas taxicolor whitei) 3, new to the

Collection, from N.W. Bhutan, presented by J. C. White, Esq.,

O.M.Z.S8., on June 22nd.

2 Ursine Tree-Kangaroos (Dendrolagus wrsinus) 3 2, new to

the Collection, purchased on June 25th.

JULY.

The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the

month of July were 123in number. Of these 72 were acquired

by presentation, 16 by purchase, 21 were received on deposit,

6 in exchange, and 8 were born in the Gardens.

The total number of departures during the month, by death

and by removals, was 225.

Amongst the additions special attention may be called to the

following :—

2 Crowned Duikers (Cephalophus coronatus), presented by

Major H. F. Searight on July Ist; 2 Grecian Ibex (Capra cega-

grus), presented by A. Trevor-Battye, Hsq., F.Z.8., on July 17th;

and 2 Baillon’s Aracaris (Andigena bailloni), received in exchange

on July 18th.

AUGUST.

The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the

month of August were 226 in number. Of these 144 were

acquired by presentation, 9 by purchase, 56 were received on

deposit, 4 in exchange, and 13 were born in the Gardens.

The total number of departures during the month, by death

and by removals, was 151.

Amongst the additions special attention may be called to the

following :—

1 Siamang Gibbon (Symphalangus syndactylus), from Perak,

presented by E. M. Hawes, Esq., F.Z.5., on Aug. 7th.

2 Bonteboks (Damaliscus pygargus), from Swellendam, Cape

Colony, purchased on Aug. 5th.

1 Honduras Turkey (Jeleagris ocellata), from Guatemala,

deposited on Aug. 30th.

2 Goliath Herons (Ardea goliath), from Africa, presented by

Frederick Burgoyne, Esq., F.Z.8., on Aug. 11th.

A large collection of Mammals and Birds, including 1 Great

Ant-eater (Myrmecophaga jubata), 1 Capybara (Hydrocherus

capybara), 1 Hairy Tree- Porcupine (Coendu prehensilis), 1 Harpy

Eagle (Thrasaétus harpyia), | Helmeted Curassow (Pauxis galeata),

and specimens of several species of Tanagers and other birds from

Venezuela, presented by Albert Pam, Esq., F.Z.S., on Aug. 11th.

A Collection of Birds and Reptiles, including 3 Burrowing-

Owls (Speotyto hypogea), new to the Collection, 1 American

Tantalus (Zantalus loculator), and 2 Terrific Rattlesnakes (Cro-

talus terrificus), new to the Collection, from Venezuela, presented

by J. E. Aikman, Esq., C.M.Z.S., on Aug. 11th.

A large Collection of Birds, including 1 Great Black Cockatoo

1909. ] ON CYSTICERCUS OF A TAPEWORM IN RAT-FLEAS. 741

(Microglossus aterrimus), 8 King Birds-of-Paradise (Oicinnaurus

regius), 2 Greater Birds-of-Paradise (Paradisea apoda), and 5

Black Manucodes (Manucodia atra), new to the Collection, from

the Aru Islands, deposited on Aug. 17th.

SEPTEMBER.

The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the

month of September were 150 in number. Of these 101 were

acquired by presentation, 27 by purchase, 7 were received on

deposit, and 15 were born in the Gardens,

The total number of departures during the month, by death

and by removals, was 161.

Amongst the additions special attention may be called to the

following :—

1 Humboldt’s Saki (Pithecia monachus), from Mafaos, pur-

chased on Sept. 28th.

1 Maxwell’s Duiker (Cephalophus maawelli), from Portuguese

Guinea, presented by Dr. W. J. Ansorge, F.Z.8., on Sept. 8th.

1 Sabre-horned Oryx (Oryx algazel), from the Sudan, presented

by G. G. Chetwynd, Esq., F.Z.8., on Sept. 16th.

1 Monkey-eating Hagle (Pithecophaga jefferyi), from Luzon,

purchased on Sept. 2nd.

1 Horned Tragopan (Ceriornis satyra), from the Himalayas,

presented by F. Naumann, Esq., on Sept. 9th.

The Secretary, Dr. P. Chalmers Mitchell, F.R.S., exhibited

the frontlet of a Mishmi akin (Gudorcas taxicolor), killed in 1903

in the country of the Mishmi tribe, N.E. of Saikwa, Upper Assam,

and lent by Mr. J. D. Berrington, of Abergavenny. The front-

let was in very fine condition and was that of an adult, although

the measurements were rather less than those of any specimens of

the same species given in the fifth edition of Rowland Ward’s

‘Records of Big Game.’ ‘The formation of the horns conformed

in every way with those of the typical Mishmi Takin as deseribed

by Mr. R. Lydekker in the Society’s Proceedings (P. Z. 8. 1908,

2 (ON

: The ee also exhibited a carved wooden figure of a

Takin, presented to the Society by Mrs. Brian Hodgson, widow

of Mr. B. H. Hodgson, who first named the Takin and made it

known to science. The horns in the figure were well represented

but the modelling of the body was inexact. The carving was

made by the Khamti who killed the animals on which

Mr. Hodgson described the genus, and is referred to in the original

memoir (Journal Asiatic Soc. Bengal, 1850, p. 75).

Professor E. A. Minchin, M.A., V.P.Z.S., exhibited two miecro-

scopic preparations of the Cysticercus-stage of a Cestode found

by him in the body-cavity of rat-fleas (Ceratophyllus fasciatus),

which he had dissected while investigating the problem of the

51*

742 DR. R. T, LEIPER ON A NEW [ Nov. 9,

transmission of the rat-trypanosome (Zrypanosoma lewisi). He

stated that he had found no flagellate parasites in any rat-fleas

which had not been fed on rats infected with 7. lewisi, but

had found incidentally various other parasites im the fleas in the

course of his investigations, namely, a Protozoan parasite which

infested the Malpighian tubes, another which was found in the

heart and in the body-cavity, and lastly the Cysticerci which were

exhibited. The Cysticerci were found free in the body-cavity and

were of fairly common occurrence. In one flea three Cysticerci

were found. They probably represented the larval stage of some

species of tapeworm occurring in the rat. The fleas had been bred

in special cages into which tame white rats were introduced to feed

them. It wastherefore certain that the fleas must have acquired

them from the rats, probably in the young stages, by the flea-larvee

feeding on the feces of the rat, and so ingesting the eggs of the

tapeworm. It was proposed to institute some experiments in

order to discover, by feeding young rats bred in captivity with

food containing fleas, to what species of tapeworm these Cysticerci

gave rise in the rat.

A new Nematode Worm from Trinidad *.

Dr. Robert T. Leiper, F.Z.S., Helminthologist to the London

School of Tropical Medicine, exhibited specimens of

LAGOCHILASCARIS MINOR

(Leiper, Abstract P. Z.5. 1909, No. 74, pp. 35, 36),

a new Nematode causing abscesses in natives of Trinidad, which

had been kindly given to him for investigation a considerable time

ago by Dr. George C. Low, to whom they had been forwarded

by Dr. Dickson, Medical Officer of Health, Trinidad.

The parasites occurred in the discharges of subcutaneous |

abscesses in two hospital patients, and were preserved in weak

formalin. In this fluid they were white in colour, and resembled

short pieces of thin twine. With the aid of a hand lens three

well-developed lips could be seen guarding the mouth. Their

presence is a sufficient indication that the specimens belonged to

the family Ascaridw, and rendered it probable that they were

immature stages of the common Ascaris that had wandered into

the connective tissues from the gut. This supposition proved

incorrect, for in spite of their small size the worms were found

on microscopical examination to be sexually mature. The females

contained a large number of eggs. Moreover, the peculiar shape

of the individual lips, and the presence of a narrow keel-like

ridge of cuticle on either side of the body throughout its length,

distinguished this form from the three species of Ascaride

known to occur in man, viz. Ascaris lwmbricoides, Belascaris

mystax, and Toxascaris marginata.

* [The complete account of this new species appears here; but the name and a

preliminary diagnosis were published in the ‘ Abstract,’ No. 74 (Nov. 9, 1909).—

Ep1ror. | 3

1909. | NEMATODE WORM FROM TRINIDAD. 743

Description.—The male worms are easily distinguished from the

females by their smaller size—being 9 mm. in length by ‘4 mm.

in breadth, as compared with 15 mm. in length by *5 mm. in

breadth.

The posterior part of the body in the male is bent ventrally

like a pot-hook—in the female it is straight.

The integument is marked transversely by fine striz, there are

no alz at the anterior end of the body asin the species mystax and

marginata, but the cuticle projects from the two lateral bands as

a narrow ridge for almost the whole length of the body.

Alimentary Canal.—A deep furrow in the cuticle sharply

defines the junction of the lips with the rest of the body. Hach

lip is separated from its neighbour by a short horn-lhke pro-

jection of cuticle, that arises from the floor of this groove. The

cuticular covering of the individual lips is exceedingly strongly

developed, and little can be seen of the pulp. Each lip is ver-

tically split along its inner, or biting surface, giving that appear-

ance of “ hare-lip”’ which suggested the name Lagochilascaris.

The Gsophagus is a simple muscular bulb resembling that of

other Ascaride, and measures in length in the male 1:1 mm., in

the female 1-2 mm., its diameter increasing from ‘1 mm. to‘15 mm.

The chyle intestine is a wide thin-walled tube ending in a

short straight and chitinous rectum *15 mm. long.

Genitalia.—In the male the cloaca opens *15 mm. from the tip

of the tail. The testicular tube is differentiated into three

portions : (1) the ejaculatory duct about *8 mm. in length and

attaining a greatest diameter of 13 mm. This gradually dilates

to become (2) the seminal vesicle which extends forwards for a

distance of 2 mm. and maintains through the greater part of its

course a diameter of -2 mm., and terminates in (3) the testicular

tubule which, with a diameter of -1 mm. or less, follows a much

coiled course as far forward as the junction of the cesophagus

and chyle intestine. There are two solid curved and colourless

spicules measuring 3°5 mm.and 4mm. in length. The pre-anal

papille number over 24 pairs and there are apparently five pairs

of post-anal papille, but these could not be ascertained satis-

factorily.

The female measures 15 mm. in length. The vulva, guarded

by slightly protruding lips, opens 6 mm. from the anterior end.

The vagina passes forwards for a short distance, then turns back-

wards. The ovarian and uterine tubules occupy the middle third

only of the body. The ova are round and pitted like those of

A. mystax, thick-shelled and colourless, 065 mm. in diameter.

Habitat.—The alimentary canal is undoubtedly the normal

habitat of this worm, and its occurrence in abscesses under the.

skin in the two cases from which it was obtained renders it likely

that some other animal—probably one of the carnivora—and

not man, is its normal host.

Text-fig 235,

744 ON AN OLD PRINT OF BULLOCK’S MUSEUM

[Nov. 9,

On behalf of Ma. R. Lydekker, Dr. A. Smith Woodward, F.R.S.,

V.P.Z.S., exhibited an old coloured print (text-fig. 235) of the chief

room of Bullock’s Museum, in the building subsequently known

as the Heyptian Hall. The print was in an old serap-book,

formerly in the possession of Mr. Lydekker’s family, and bore

the printed legend ‘ Bullock’s Museum.” Its authenticity 1s

assured by the representation of the statue of the Black Prince,

Bullock’s Museum, 22 Piccadilly.

No, 18 of ‘Ackerman’s Repository of Arts, &c.,’ vol. 3. pl. 35, 1810,

1909.] ON THE RECENT BIOLOGY OF SOME LIVING SHELLS. 745

which is one of the items mentioned in the catalogue of the sale of

the collection, of which a copy is preserved in the British Museum

(Nat. Hist.). William Bullock originally had a museum in

Liverpool, but moved his collection to London about 1809, and

apparently built the Egyptian Hall for its reception. The

collection was sold by auction in London in the spring of 1819,

when a number of specimens were purchased for the British

Museum by Dr. Leach. Large extracts from the sale-catalogue

are given in the second volume of the ‘ History of the Collections

of the British Museum (Nat. Hist.).’ The source of the plate,

which was not known to the exhibitor, is indicated in the legend

to the illustration.

The following papers were read :—

1. Some Living Shells, their recent Biology and the Light

they throw on the Latest Physical Changes in the

Harth.—I. Mya arenaria. By Sir Henry H. Howorrs,

RCE DC wie oN S.. i Zi.

[ Received June 5, 1909. }

(Text-figures 236-243.)

In his paper on the proofs of a general rising of the land in

certain parts of Sweden, published in the ‘ Philosophical Trans-

actions’ for 1835, p. 10, Lyell, in speaking of the living testacea

of the Baltic, says :—‘‘ In regard to the shells I may observe that

the Mya arenaria is the only one found by me in great abundance

in any part of the Baltic which I did not see among the fossils of

any of the localities already mentioned or those afterwards to be

alluded to further to the North,” 7. ¢., in the raised beds. This

notable observation, then made for the first time, lay dormant

for many years, and it was not until 1872, when engaged in ex-

ploring the coast of Skiine, the southern province of Sweden, that

Nathorst remarked of an old raised beach situated 8 or 10 feet

above the sea-level at Alnarp, near Malmé, in which the lttoral

shells, then living in the adjoining Sound, were found, that Mya

arenaria, Which is now common there as a living shell, did not

occur, and he went on to suggest that it may have been a recent

immigrant into the Baltic.

Nathorst’s suggestion was presently confirmed in a remarkable

manner by C. G. J. Petersen on Danish ground. In Rérdam’s

memoir on the raised beaches of Zealand he in 1892 called

attention to the fact that Mya arenaria, although such a tooth-

some mollusc, had never been found in the kitchen-middens of

Denmark, nor in the raised beaches of the Isefiord, &c., which

synchronize with them, and he concluded very reasonably that

746 SIR HENRY H. HOWORTH ON THE [Nov. 9

the shell had in fact invaded the Baltic since the kitchen-midden

men lived along the fiords of Denmark. Petersen’s view is now

generally accepted. It is possible, however, and important, to

define more definitely the period when the shell first invaded the

Baltic. It is first referred to by its recognised name in the tenth

edition of the ‘Systema Nature’ of Linnzus, in which, however,

he mentions that, in his work on his travels in West Sweden, he

had already described it under the name Concha arenaceo marino.

On turning to this reference, which has not been sufficiently

appreciated, I find that he describes the shell at some length

among the discoveries he made while at Oerost, an island in the

district of Bohuslan, in West Gothland (see ‘ Wiastgéta Resa,’

1747, p. 187). He adds that he had never found it in any part of

Sweden, and clearly implies that he had not seen it until he went

to Oerost. In his description of the discovery of the shell he tells

us how, in searching the tide-washed sands at Oerost, he noticed a

number of twin holes here and there unaccompanied by the little

mounds of sand thrown up by burrowing worms, and, having put

the stem of his long tobacco-pipe in some of them, was sur’ prised

to find it had struck against something hard. On burrowing

with his hands he came upon the molluse we call Mya arenaria,

and that occasion was apparently the first time it had been

noticed that molluscs in shells as well as freely moving worms

dig holes of this kind. He goes on to say that the shell was

found always buried under the sand-floors and never thrown

upon the beach. This is confirmed by the habitat he gives the

shell in his ‘ Fauna Suecica,’ where he says of it: ‘ Habitat in

Oceano Bohuslan alluente.” As the visit of Linnzeus to Oerost was

made in 1747, when he was familiar with the zoology of Eastern

Sweden, it amounts to a fair ly complete proof that the shell was

not living in the Baltic in 1747, and that it was only when he

explored the coast of the Cattegat that he first found it.

Lyell, in the memoir already eited, and writing in 1835, goes

on to say that it did not then live in the Bothnian Gulf as far as

Sddertelji, that he could not find it even at Calmar, while further

south, at Sdlvitzborg, it was rare and of very small size (op. cit.

» IK).

: oes writing in 1892, says that all the specimens he had

found were young, by which he perhaps means they were dwarfed.

He mentions its present distribution in the Baltic thus—Riigen,

Stralsund, Greifswald, Stolpe, the Bay of Dantzig, Calmarsund,

Gotland, near Memel, Libawa, Windawa, near Riga, Dago, Oesel,

Hapsal, Matzalwick, Réval, near Narva, and the Bothnian Gulf

as far north as 62°35 N. This proves how widely and rapidly it

had spread in the Baltic since its introduction, aun how much at

home it now is in brackish water.

Long ago Dr. J. E. Gray had already said of the species that it is

often found so high up the rivers that the water in which it lives

is brackish only during high tides, adding that it is found more-

over with freshwater shells on the coasts of the Baltic, while all

1909. | RECENT BIOLOGY OF SOME LIVING SHELLS. (47

the other species of the genus are found only where the water is

quite salt (Phil. Trans. 1835, p. 309).

Although it can live where the salinity of the water is com-

paratively slight, and is found in brackish water in the inlets on

our own coast where the marine molluscan fauna is poor, it shares

the feature of all marine shells transported to less salty water in

_ being dwarfed and having a thinner shell. Thus in proceeding

eastwards in the Baltic, where the water gradually grows fresher,

we find its normal length in the Harbour of Kiel to be 100 mm.,

in the Gulf of Finland 55-70, and in the Bothnian Gulf 36:5.

The fact that so far as is known it does not oecur anywhere in

the Baltic in a raised beach however slightly elevated, or in a

subfossil condition, makes it plain that since its introduction, there

has been no appreciable elevation of the coasts of the lands

bordering that sea. This may be said with some confidence of

the period since Lyell wrote his Bakerian lecture in 1835, 7. e.,

about seventy-five years ago when we know it was living in the

Baltic.

We will now turn to the Danish waters. There the evidence

is equally plain that the shell we are discussing has only arrived

recently. In his memoir entitled “‘ Kartbladet Skamlingsbanke,”

describing the district on each side of the Little Belt, published

by the Geological Survey of Denmark in 1907, A. Jessen has a good

deal to say about the shells found in the north-western part of the

island of Funen at the entrance of the Belt. Among the shells

there found he mentions especially M/ya arenaria as occurring in

two places in what the Scandinavians call Cardiwn deposit, or

what we should call estuarine mud. These places are both situated

in what was lately the upper part of the Gamborg Fiord, but which

has been recently embanked and laid dry. The extreme recency

of this deposit is shown by an excavation Jessen made in the

soil and by the table he gives of the depths at which the various

shells in it occurred. The Mya only occurs in the surface layer

at from -40 to -75 of a metre in depth, and is not found at any

lower horizon in this estuarine deposit. It is plain, therefore,

that it has only arrived in the Little Belt quite lately.

The only other part of Denmark in which the shell has been

found on dry land is in the extreme north of Jutland, on the

shores of the Limfiord and in ‘ Wendsyssel,” north of that inlet.

In another Danish Survey memoir also written by Jessen, and

dated 1905, describing the eastern part of the Limfiord and some

of its islands, he publishes some interesting tables of distribution

of the shells found in the most recent beds, which he classes in

five series. In two of them, namely the raised oyster-beds, of

which he describes 22, and in the lagune deposits still in progress

(Lagunedannelser), of which he describes 8, the Mya does not

occur at all. Among a series of 20 beds which are found

bordering fiords and sounds with a stagnant and sluggish water,

one only, situated $8.K. of Broust, contained Mya arenaria. This

deposit was at the sea-level. At Vejlen, north of the island of

748 SIR HENRY H. HOWORTH ON THE [ Nov. 9,

Giol, and on the south coast of the island of Oeland, in two

instances only: out of twenty-nine citations of beds from the

broader part of the fiord did the shell occur. Jn both cases at

the sea-level. Lastly, at Korsholm, south of Normandshage, an

island situated in the mouth of the Limfiord, where it opens into

the Cattegat, and subject therefore to considerable wave-action, the

Mya occurred in a beach now being formed from the sea-level up

to 1-3 metre in height. This was the only case out of eleven

sunilar deposits quoted where the Mya occurred.

It is plain that in all these four cases the deposit may really

have taken place within a few years only, and that it has done so

certainly since any alteration in the level of the land has taken

place.

Turning from the Limfiord to Wendsyssel, we have a more

notable occurrence of the shell and one showing how easy it is in

these matters to be misled. This was also originally published

by Jessen in 1899, in the first volume of the Records of the Danish

Survey, Raekke 3, p. 279. He mentions finding the Mya arenaria

south-east of Nabstjert, in the south of Wendsyssel, at a distance

of 300 metres from the present sea-shore, and at a depth of 0°6 of

a metre under the sea-level.

Professor Brogger seems to have attached rather more import-

ance to this discovery as qualifying his views of the quite recent

arrival of the shell in these seas than it deserved, for in the later

memoir already quoted, and published in 1905, Jessen points out

that in comparing the map of this district published by the General

Staff in 1883 with other maps dating from 1785-1787, it becomes

clear that the coast has greatly altered here by silting, and that

in the course of 100 years it has advanced 300 metres at Aalback,

north of Nabstjert, while the mouth of the river Jerup, south of

Nabstjert, had advanced eastwards 600 metres (Jessen’s Memoir

on the geological map of Aalborg and Nibe, northern part, p. 158

note). This shows that all the discovery at Nabstjert proves is,

that Mya arenaria was living on the northern coast of Jutland a

century and a quarter ago, for the place where it is now found at

300 metres inland was then in fact on the shore.

The Danish evidence, therefore, is perfectly consistent with

that of Sweden in regard to the fact that the Wya arenaria, which

now so abounds in both areas, is quite a recent addition to their

marine Mollusca, and has only lately entered the Baltic, the

Cattegat, of which the Limfiord is a mere inlet, and the Belts.

Let us now turn to Norway. Mya arenaria, according to Sars,

now occurs living on all the Norwegian coasts from the Christiania-

fiord to the North Cape. It has also been reported from the

warmer part of the White Sea. Professor Brogger is strongly of

opinion, however, that as in Sweden and Denmark so in Norway,

the mollusc is a recent arrival, a conclusion he bases on its absence

from the raised beaches. (Brogger, ‘“‘Om de senglaciale og post-

glaciale Nivaforindringar,” Norges Geol. Unders., N. 31, p. 605.)

Sars, who in 1863 had claimed that it occurs in a raised beach in

1909. ] RECENT BIOLOGY OF SOME LIVING SHELLS, 749

the island of Oeland, afterwards in 1867 withdrew the statement,

and in the first part of his ‘ Bidrag til Kundskaben om Norges

Arktiske Fauna,’ p. 92, he says: ‘“Derimod er den ikke hos os

forefunden fossil i vor glaciale Formation, idet Angivelserne om

dens Forekomst her, som mins Fader senere har oplyst, grunde

sig paa en Forverling med den i Form og Storelse meget lignende

Lutraria elliptica Lamarck.”

De Geer overlooked this correction when he cited Sars as an

authority for the occurrence of the shell in shell-beds at Trondhjem.

Gwyn Jeffreys was similarly misled when he claimed that it occurs

in the beds of the “glacial formation” at Christiania 50-200 feet

above the sea-level, quoting Sars, ‘Norges geologiske Underségelse.’

It is true that in a posthumous MS. work of Professor Miinster

he quotes the shell from a shell-bed at Smedholm, near Brevik,

but inasmuch as this bed is only -66 m. above the water-level, it

would seem from the observations of Oyen at the neighbouring

place called Davo, where the conditions are similar, that at

Smedholm the Mya arenaria has recently been washed up by the

tide and been mixed with shells from the other shell-beds. Brogger

similarly explains the finding of the shell at the level of the sea at

Vallé, where again it does not occur in the raised shell-beds, no

more than it does in those in the shell-beds at Storeng, Trom6 and

Arendal (op. cié. pp. 606-607) ; so that it is clear that it does not

occur in any of the true raised beaches of the Christianiafiord or

the Langesundfiord, or in any place on those fiords where there is

any evidence that the land has changed its level since its arrival.

On this Brogger and his colleagues are quite agreed.

There only remains one other place in Norway where J/ya

arenaria has been stated to occur in a raised beach, and to which

Professor Brégger attaches more importance. This is at Kadland,

at the south-west point of Norway.

In a notice by H. Rasch of a journey he made thither in 1833,

he mentions going from Mandal along the river to Kadland. He

found on the western bank of the river, where it rises in a kind of

precipice 24 feet high, that the upper 16 feet of this was a coarse

sand containing no remains, under which lay a bed of vegetable

leaves, etc., matted together, inter alia hazel, birch, aspen etc.

This bed was sharply defined above and below ; ; the lowest 5 feet

consisted of a bed of ‘ leerblandet,”’? sand, in the upper part of

which were a few scattered shells, and in the lower, shells in

great numbers, consisting of the ordinary mollusca living on the

coast, ex. er. Ostrea edulis, Venus islandica, exoleta and litterata,

Mya arenaria, truncata and arctica, Buceinwm reticulatwum and

capillus, Mande littoralis, Trochus cinereus, Turritella terebra and

edule. The river at this point was a rapid one. (Mag. f. Natur-

vidensk. etc. 1836, pp. 299 & 300.)

Keilhau, who visited the place in 1838, confirmed the descrip-

tion of Rasch, giving more details. He reported further that

he had been told that when the tide in the sea was high there

was a large indraft of salt-water up this river, so that it became

750 SIR HENRY H. HOWORTH ON THE [ Nov. a

brackish as high as Kadland. (Nyt Mag. f. Nat. vol. i. (1838)

p. 187.)

It is unfortunate that no one has visited and critically described

this important section since 1838, for the facts as reported seem

very hard to explain. That a peculiarly littoral molluse like Mya

arenaria should have lived with a number of others whose habitat

was several feet under water seems incredible. It appears to mea

great deal more likely that, like other cases before cited, the Mya

was an adventitious stranger in the shell-bed, and either had come

up from the sea with the inrushing salt-water as above mentioned

and got mixed with shells of an earlier date, or had been able to live

at Kadland for a while during some period when the access of salt-

water was more continuous. It seems further incredible, from

what we know of the habits of the molluse and its adaptability,

that if it had reached the Skawe, in Norway, before the coast

had risen several metres at that point, that it should not have

occurred in other raised beaches somewhere in Scandinavia, and

should not also have found its way into the Christianiafiord and

thence into the Baltic until so lately, and I cannot square Brégger’s

statement on page 556 that at Kadland the Mya may date from

the time of the upheaved shell-bed, with his statement on page 605

where he says: ‘“ Ogsi e Norge var Mya arenaria hidtil ikke

anfort fra postglacial forekomst.” The only other explanation of

this Kadland shell-bed is that it may be of a different age to the

other raised beaches of Scandinavia, and may perhaps represent

an earlier horizon than is represented by those shell-beds. Hereby

hangs an important issue.

Professor Brégger is very emphatic about the Mya arenaria not

occurring inany of the raised beds of Norway, perhaps with the

single exception of Kadland, and, as we have seen, the same view

is generally held in tiie North in regard to the raised beds of

Sweden and Denmark, and, with one notable exception, this seems

incontrovertible. That exception has been overlooked by the

northern malacologists and geologists. It is that of the famous

shell-beds at Uddevalla and Capellbacken. The evidence is

very strong, if not conclusive, that it occurs in the Uddevalla

beds, although Brégger does not mention it in his account of

them (op. cit. pp. 312-322). Hisinger long ago quoted it as

found there, together with J/. truncata (see Anteckningar i

Physik och Geognosie, 1831, v. p. 83). Gwyn Jeffreys, in his

account of the Mollusca of these beds published in the Report

of the British Association for 1863, in which he describes all

the collections in the then accessible northern Museums and in

private hands, and in which he enumerates 83 species, distinctly

mentions J/ya arenaria, which is numbered 20 on his list.

Again, in the British Museum, there is a valve of a typical

Mya arenaria with the critical hinge perfectly preserved which

came from the Thuden collection, and is labelled Uddevalla.

Lastly, so far back as 1747, Linneus seems directly to imply

that the shell was found in the same place. This evidence

1909. ] RECENT BIOLOGY OF SOME LIVING SHELLS. 751

appears to me nearly conclusive, and it would seem to require us

either to revise the decision of Brégger and A.S. Jensen that the

shell does not occur in the Scandinavian raised beaches at all or

to put the Uddevalla shell-beds in a different category to all the

other raised beaches in the North, with the possible exception of

the Kadland bed, which is a quite possible solution.

In some papers I have lately published in the ‘Geological

Magazine’ on the recent history of the Baltic, I have tried to

bring together the conclusions of the Scandinavian geologists on

the subject, with some additional views of my own. I will shortly

condense their main conclusions. The Northern geologists have

shown that the raised beds on the shores of the Baltic consist of

two entirely different series, one containing marine shells and the

other freshwater and land shells only.

The marine shells in these raised beds correspond to the present

marine fauna of the Baltic, except only that they show a change

in their range due, as is virtually certain, to the water of the sea

having become increasingly fresh. The typical shells in these

raised beds are two species of Littorina—Littorina litorea and

Littorina rudis, both of them greatly dwarfed. Hence they are

known as Littorina beds.

The freshwater beds, which immediately preceded them in time,

are specially marked by the presence of Ancylus fluviatilis, and

are hence called Ancylus beds.

The inevitable conclusion from the position and succession of

these beds is that the Baltic was formerly a great inland fresh-

water lake (the dAneylus sea) and in course of time was converted

into a brackish-water sea (the Littorina sea), which still subsists

although less saline than it once was.

The accepted explanation of this change, a most reasonable

and inevitable one, confirmed by much evidence, is that after the

human period known as the Kitchen-midden period there was

a breach made in the land-bridge connecting Southern Scania

with Denmark and Denmark with Mecklenburg, by which the

Sound and the two Belts were opened, and the salt water of the

North Sea for the first time made its way into the previously

fresh Ancylus lake, converting it into a brackish-water sea and

supplying it with the marine fauna which now occupies it.

‘The northern archeologists on very reasonable data have roughly

calculated that the Kitchen-midden men lived some 8000 years ago.

Whether more or less, it follows that every raised beach in the

Baltic containing a marine or brackish-water fauna has been laid

down since the above-named breach took place. In other words,

the Littorina period in the history of the Baltic extends roughly

from 8000 years ago down to our own time. This means that

during the last 8000 years there have been great changes of level

in the Baltic lands involving their upheaval, and the elevation of

the highest of these shell-beds is a measure of the amount of this

elevation. They show that the movement has not been continuous

but differential, the highest recorded instance being at a height

152 SIR HENRY H. HOWORTH ON THE [ Nov..9,

of 330 feet above the sea at Hernésand (‘Sounnar Kursernai,’

Upsala, 1893, p. 16), whence the highest range gradually sinks

northwards to 51 metres at Neder Kalix at the head of the Gulf of

Bothnia (De Geer, G. F.iStock. For. xii. p. 104). From Hernésand

the maximum elevation similarly falls gradually as we proceed

southward, until in Southern Scania it is not more than 2 or

3 metres. The amount of elevation is similarly differentiated when

measured transversely, being highest in the upper country and

sinking gradually as we proceed towards the coast on either side.

It has been made out further that this movement extends west-

wards also, and that we can draw isobaric lines along various

parallels of latitude, showing that the rise of the Baltic coast of

Sweden was paralleled by a corresponding elevation on its western

coast, where it is similarly marked by raised shell-beds. These

shell-beds on the shores of the Cattegat correspond in time to,

but differ generally in contents from, those of the Baltic, just as

the Cattegat differs and has always differed from the Baltic in its

salinity and consequently in its wealth of marine life.

The raised marine shell-beds of Western Sweden have been

divided into two sections—one at a much lower level than the

other and separated more or less by a blank interval. The con-

tents of the lower beds correspond in the main to the living fauna

of the Cattegat, while the upper beds are markedly different.

The famous beds at Uddevalla near Trolhiitten on the River

Gotha, already referred to, apparently differ in an important

respect from the other beds of similar elevation on the West

Coast of Sweden. The peculiarity I refer to was first pointed

out by G. Jeffreys, who in 1862 visited Uddevalla and collected

83 species of molluscs there. He showed that in these beds we

have a curious collocation of molluscs from deep water with those

from shallow water. What is most paradoxical about them,

however, is the fact that the deep-sea shells lie over the shallow-

water shells. This paradox was reasonably explained by Lyell by

the suggestion that, previous to the deposition of the upper shell-

stratum, there had been a depression of the ground by which

the lower stratum or shallow-water stratum had been greatly

depressed, the result being that the deeper-water mollusca

invaded an area where the bottom was strewn with a dead fauna

composed of shallow-water species. Afterwards both were uplifted

together, the deep-water forms necessarily lying above the others,

over whose old shells they had travelled when feeding.

Tt is a curious confirmation of such a movement having taken

place, that in certain parts of the Cattegat two species of molluscs

of a type which prevails specially at Uddevalla, each one being

consequently qualified as wddevallensis, are found in dead and

semi-fossilized specimens strewn over the floor of that fiord.

These are Mya truncata var. uddevallensis, and Saxicava rugosa

var. uddevallensis, both having been doubtless killed by the

elevation of the sea-bottom which caused their brothers further

east to be uplifted 200 feet.

1909. | RECENT BIOLOGY OF SOME LIVING SHELLS. 753

Here then we have a possible explanation of the problem we

are seeking to solve, namely the presence of Mya arenarva at

Uddevalla. It would seem that this very littoral shell belongs to

the older and lower bed at Uddevalla, which consists of shallow-

water and littoral shells, and that it was possibly exterminated in

these northern waters by a sudden subsidence of their feeding-

ground, which introduced conditions of much greater depth in

the sea-bottom, or by some other similar revolution ; and that

the bed on which they lie represents a phase of the recent history

of the marine fauna of Scandinavia not recorded in the books

Text-fig. 236.

Lateral and dorsal views of shell of Mya arenaria ; from Prof. W. C. Brégger’s

“Om de senglaciale og postglaciale Nivatérindringar i Kristianiafeltet,’ by kind

permission of the author.

and perhaps older than some would credit. It seems to me, in

fact, to represent the penultimate stage in the history of the

submarine fauna in the Swedish and Norwegian waters, answer-

ing probably to the later Crag beds of England. It is possible

that the bed at Kadland may represent the same horizon. In

this way, and in this way only, can T explain the former presence

at Uddevalla of a shell like Mya arenaria, which after having

been extinct in these waters for at least 8000 years has now

invaded them again and has rapidly occupied a much wider area.

Suppose we accept this view as a tentative one, and proceed a

1 r

754 SIR HENRY H. HOWORTH ON THE [Nov. 9,

little further on our way and see how far the conclusion is borne

out by other facts in the history of this remarkable shell. The

question I would next ask is: Whence did Mya arenaria come

Text-fig. 238.

Text-fig. 239.

Lateral and dorsal views of shell of Mya truncata; from Prof. W. C. Brégger,

op. cit., by kind permission of the author,

Text-fig. 240.

Lateral view of left shell of young Mya truncata; from A. 8. Jensen, in ‘ Vidensk.

Meddel. naturhist. Foren. 1 Kjébenhavn,’ 1900, by kind permission of the

author.

when it invaded the Scandinavian seas? There are two species

of Mya inhabiting the Scandinavian seas at present—JZ. arenaria

1909. ] RECENT BIOLOGY OF SOME LIVING SHELLS. 755

(text-figs. 236 & 237) and MW. truncata (text-figs. 238 & 239).

They differ very obviously in external contour. ‘The former is an

oval shell with its ends curved, one end being more obtuse than

Text-fig. 241. Text-fig. 242.

Text-fig. 241.—Hinge of Mya arenaria.

a, vight valve; 6, left valve; p, tip of diagonal keel.

From A. S. Jensen, op. cit., by kind permission of the author.

Text-fig. 242.—Hinge of Mya truncata.

ce, locking-tooth; other letters as in text-fig. 241.

From A. 8. Jensen, op. cit., by kind permission of the author.

: Text-fig. 243.

Hinge of Mya truncata, var. ovata.

Letters as in text-figs. 241 & 249.

From A. 8. Jensen, op. cit., by kind permission of the author.

the other, while the other species has one end (that through

which the siphon of the mollusc is protruded and answering to

the more pointed end of the other species) sharply cut off, whence

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1909, No. LIT. 52

756 SIR HENRY H. HOWORTH ON THE [ Nov. 9,

its name of truncata. This feature is exaggerated in a variety

found in the Uddevalla shell-beds and known as wddevallensis, in

which the shell is cut down to only half its normal size.

This truncation was apparently not a primitive feature of the

species, for in young specimens it is hardly marked at all (text-

fig. 240), nor is it present in the striations marking the stages of

evowth of the older shells in their earlier stages. Jensen was the

first to point out clearly the important fact “that the contours of

the two species are really secondary and unimportant features

compared with the character of their hinges, which he minutely

describes. This can be better seen from the figures annexed

(text-figs. 241-243), which he has kindly permitted me to re-

produce from his epoch-making paper published in 1900 in the

Vidensk. Meddel. naturhist. Foren. i Kjobenhavn, p. 133.

Testing the specimens of Myas which are contained in the

Northern Museums by this character of the hinge, he was able to

show that all the Myas which from their oval outlines had been

treated as M. arenaria,and which had come from Iceland, Green-

land, Spitzbergen, Nova Scotia, the Kara Sea, and Siberia, are

shown by their hinges to be really Mya truncata and not JM. aren-

aria, and he accordingly gave them the name of JV. truncata, var.

ovata. This discovery, which has been fully accepted by Brogger

and other unimpeachable judges, was very important, since it

was on the evidence of these Arctic specimens that J/. arenaria

had been treated as a typically Arctic shell.

Not only so, but the alleged presence of MZ. arenaria in certain

shell-beds in Britain had in many memoirs and books devoted to

the cultivation of extreme glacial views been treated as a very

special touchstone of glacial conditions. AIl this will now have

to be revised as will the labels on many museum specimens.

Jensen’s emphatic statement, which I will quote in his own

words, is conclusive :—‘‘ Resulttatet af den forudgaaende Under-

sdgelse kan i al Korthed udtrykkes saledes at Mya arenaria ikke

er nogen héjnordisk art” (op. cit. p. 149).

What is plain, therefore, is that Mya arenaria is in no sense an

Arctic shell but only a boreal one, and that G. Jeffreys was quite

mistaken when he made it so, and when he made the further

inference, which has been copied into several geological works

and is contained in the following sentence :—‘“ The occurrence of

this cireumpolar shell-fish so near the tropic of Cancer probably

indicates the most southern limit in space of the glacial epoch”

(‘ British Conchology,’ iii. pp. 65, 66).

-It is further plain that when ‘Ma ya arenaria recently invaded

the Scandinavian waters it could not have come from the North.

Did it then come from the South-west, from the British seas

where it abounds, or from the coasts of Belgium and Northern

France, where it occurs as far south as Rochelle? The fact that

it does not occur further south in the Bay of Biscay and on the

Lusitanian coast is curious. It is not less curious that its very

recent history on the British coasts points to its having only

1909.} RECENT BIOLOGY OF SOME LIVING SHELLS. 757

lately spread over the English seas. The first person to write on

the English Mollusca in a scientific way was Dr. M. A. Lister,

F.R.S., who in his book entitled ‘Hist. Anim. Angliz, etc.,’

published in 1678, was the first to mention our shell, which he

refers to as ‘“concha longa lataque.” He gives an excellent figure

of the inside of one valve showing the distinctive hinge (plate iv.

fig. 19), and tells us it was found in sandy ground near Philo

(probably Filey in Yorkshire) and very abundantly at the mouth

of the Tees (op. cet. pp. 170-171). In the series of plates of

English shells dated 1687, entitled ‘Hist. Conch.’, and apparently

not published till 1770, he figures two varieties of the shell, one

more ovate than the other (see nos. 262 and 263), and gives their

habitat as “ Mar. Nor.,” by which he meant the North Sea, and

it would appear that it was only as a North Sea shell that he

knew it.

In his Hist. Nat. Test. Brit., published in 1778, p. 232,

Da Costa calls the shell Chama arenaria. He says of it: “The

species is not common. I have received it from the Isle of Wight,

near Newport, and from Hearne Bay, near Faversham, in Kent.”

This points clearly to the shell being then an uncommon one m

the Channel. This ts confirmed by the fact that it is not named

by Pulteney in the first edition of his ‘ Catalogue of Birds, Shells,

and Rare Plants of Dorsetshire,’ published in 1799, but is men-

tioned and figured in that of 1813 in one of the notes: initialed

“TT. RB.” (2. €. “Rey. Thomas Rackell), p. 28, where he speaks of it

as found in Studland Bay, but says it is rare.

It would seem, therefore, that the shell had not been a long

time in the Channel when these writers wrote at the end of the

18th century, and that there is a certain probability that it was

in fact a newcomer to our seas. ‘This is greatly strengthened

when we examine the most recent deposits on our coasts.

It is almost certain that since the Christian era the land has

been virtually quiescent in these realms. I know of no evidence

to show that it has either risen or sunk during the last 2000 years.

The coast has been eaten back in places, estuaries have been silted

up and deltas enlarged, and there has been considerable alluvial

accession and growth of shingle-beaches, &c., in others; but in

regard to any vertical change up or down, I know of no reliable

evidence. All the evidence, on the contrary, points the other

way and in favour of the level of the land having been stationary

since the Christian era.

The only way. therefore, by which it might be possible to trace

any changes in the fauna of the adjoining seas during the interval

from the Christian era until to-day, would be an examination of

the estuarine deposits and grey loams or buttery clay which have

been deposited in such estuaries as the Wash and various inlets

such as those on the coasts of Essex, Hampshire, &c., correspond-

ing to the Cardiwm deposit in the now desiccated Gamborg Fiord

above referred to. In regard to most of these inlets the available

evidence is negative. The geolcgical surveyors report no marine

5O*

758 SIR HENRY H. HOWORTH ON THE [ Nov. 9,

mollusca from the marine alluvia of those portions of the Essex

inlets which have silted up, except an occasional Scrobicularia. In

their paper on the new dock excavation at Southampton in 1889,

Messrs. Shore & Elwes give a list of the marine shells found in

the estuarine mud there, which they say are similar to those of the

numerous mud harbours on the south coast of Hampshire. The

list includes 15 lamellibranchs and 23 gasteropods, but the Myas

do not occur in it (Proc. Hants. Club, pp. 49, 50).

In the estuarine deposits at Rhyl the only shells found were

Scrobicularia piperata and Pholas candida (see Survey Mem.

Rhyl, &e., p. 41).

The evidence is the same from tle marsh and fen deposits

of Lincolnshire, from which Scrobiculuria piperata, Ostrea edulis,

Cardiwm edule, Tellina solidula, Solen siliqua, Fusus antiquus,

Purpura lapillus, Littorina litorea, Murex erinaceus, and T'rochus

cinerarius have been forthcoming, but not Mya arenaria (see

Memoir on the Map of East Lincolnshire, pp. 105-111).

The same is true of the estuary of the Humber, in the alluvium

and warp of which we find Scrobicularia piperata, Tellina soli-

dula, Cardium edule, Littorina litorea, and Hydrobia, but not Mya

arenaria (Ussher & Reid, Memoir on Sheets 86, 185, and 189).

The same is true again of the estuarine deposits in the Firth of

Forth. More interesting because much more extensive are the |

similar Fen deposits round the Wash.

The Wash is clearly the shrunken remnant of what was

formerly a great arm of the sea occupying the greater portion of

the Fenlands, which has been gradually silting up for a long

period by deposition of marine alluvium, and, as Skertchley

showed, is in no way a delta deposit. In the now enclosed and

desiccated parts of the primitive Wash, Skertchley divides the

surface-deposits into what he calls Fen gravels and alluvium. He

gives several sections of each, and in his list of the marine shells

found in the Fen gravels the Mya does not occur. The alluvium

he divides into two kinds—namely, clay and warp. In the clay

he describes finding Scrobicularia piperata, many in single valves,

but a fair average with both valves in sitw; a few shells of

Tellina balthica and dwarfed specimens of Cardiwm edule, Mytilus

edulis, and Ostrea edulis ; occasionally little Rissoas being plentiful.

‘‘T have never,” he adds, ‘found or seen a Mya or a Solen,

although they are common enough in the Wash, neither does the

Cyprina islandica occur, though it also lives in the Bay” (Survey

Memoir on the Fenlands, p. 176).

On a later page, after giving a formal list of the fauna of

the inland silts, he continues :—‘ The silt beds forming on the

shores contain the same species, but with the addition of Mya

arenaria and Mya truncata, both of which are common” (ibid.

p. 182). This is surely a very interesting and notable fact, for

this warp and marine alluvium of the Fens is the only deposit

on a considerable scale in these realms where the latest history of

1909. ] RECENT BIOLOGY OF SOME LIVING SHELLS, 759

the English seas can be followed step by step and year by year ;

and it is a most eloquent fact that while Mya arenaria abounds

in the present Wash, it does not occur, like the other shells from

the same estuary, in the beds deposited in the immediately

preceding period, and is very strong evidence of the recent

addition of the mollusc to the fauna of the Eastern Coast.

This English evidence may be paralleled by that of Belgium.

Thus Dr. Raeymaekers, who describes its common occurrence on

the shores of the Low Countries, notably at Ostend, Heyst, and

Blankenberg, speaks of it as a recent immigrant. ‘“ Malgré toutes

nos recherches,” he says, ‘‘ nous n’avons pu découvrir I/ya arenaria

L. dans les dépéts supérieurs a la tourbe. Aucun des géologues

qui ont publié des travaux concernant les terrains quaternaires

dAnvers n’a signalé la présence de cette espece dans les forma-

tions modernes ; celle-ci ne devait pas encore avoir apparu dans

ces parages.” He then describes a recent excavation made near

Kruyschaus, not far from the redoubt of Oorderen, where he

carefully studied all the layers above the turf (tourbe): “‘ Malgré

d’actives recherches, nous n’avons pu y trouver des exemplaires de

Mya arenaria dans la tourbiére encore ouverte ; au nord au dessus

de Doel, nous n’avons pas été plus heureux.”

In the turf, he says, there are argillaceous sands, very damp

and contatnine trunks of trees and shells of Car Gium edule,

Scrobicularia piperata, and Tellina baltica, and then the so-called

Polder clay, but no traces of Mya arenaria, and he concludes :

“Pour notre part, nous croyons que |’époque de l’apparition de

Mya arenaria L. ainsi que la date de sa disparition du Bas Escaut

sont relativement récentes et postérieures a la période espagnole.”

Dr. Raeymaekers further showed that the sand covering the

ditches at Lille rests on the Polder clay. These ditches he proved

were made at the same time as the fortress of Lille, and could be

emptied or filled at will by a series of sluices. The sand in

question, a thin layer, contains shells of Mya arenaria so fresh

that their epidermis is still preserved, as is the ligament uniting

the valves of the Cardium edule. In the war of 1830 the Dutch

opened the sluices and the country north of Antwerp was

inundated. This continued till 1849-1850, when the Polders

were again laid bare and cultivated, and it was during these

twenty years that the Myas had invaded the ditches, thus explain-

ing their being now found in dry ground and otherwise so fresh

(Annales de la Société Malacologique de Belgique, xxx. pp. 5-11).

The evidence, therefore, is very consistent and complete that

they have only come to the shores of Belgium in recent times.

If we turn from these estuarine silts, the next deposits we

come to are the raised beaches. Raised beaches do not, of course,

occur on coasts which are being eaten back by the sea. We

do not, therefore, find them on the east coast of England any

more than on the western coast of Jutland. They do occur, how-

ever, in numerous places on the south and south-west coasts of

this island, and afford good evidence that these coasts have not

760 SIR HENRY WH. HOWORTH ON THE [ Nov. 9,

materially altered in position since they were deposited, for

although in the recessed portions of the various bays on the

south coast the non-occurrence of raised beaches probably proves

that their continuity has been broken at many places, yet their

occurrence on the headlands shows that substantially the coast-

line remains where it was when they were laid down, while the

raised beach on the Thatcher Rock in Torbay is another palpable

evidence of the same fact.

As I have said above, there is at present no reliable evidence

that the relative level of land and water on our shores has altered

since the Christian era, and it would seem almost certain that all

our true raised beaches—that is, those which represent old beach-

surfaces and not mere deposits of pebbles and shells by high tides

—are older than Roman times. They may be of different ages,

but the persistence of one very notable raised beach at a level

of 20 to 40 feet in Scotland seems to point to one particular

upheaval having a wider range than could be caused by merely

local causes, while the quiescence of the level since the Christian

era seems to support the view that the upheaval was rapid

and cataclysmic in Britain, as I have tried to show it was m

Scandinavia.

The discovery of a number of dug-out boats of a very primitive

type in connection with the raised beaches of the Clyde pro-

bably points to the relative date of the upheaval as having been

in what is called the Neolithic age. A similar mfterence may

perhaps be drawn from the finding of flint tools im connection

with the raised beaches in the Isle of Man, in regard to which my

friend Mr. Lamplugh writes :—‘‘ We gain a valuable clue to the

approximate age of this beach in the presence of Neolithic

chipped flints on its surface in places. The shingle seems to have

been resorted to by the inhabitants for the sake of its pebbles of

flint derived from the drift, which have sometimes been struck

into flakes on the spot. .. . I found in the outer part of the beach

a single artificial flake which had been partially worn down by

marine attrition, and must therefore have been in existence as a

flake during the accumulation of this portion of the beach.

Between Rue Point and Blue Point I found these chips, in one

place, in the blown sand covering the inner part of the old shore.

These facts denote that at any rate part of the platform was in

existence in Neolithic times, but that it may not have attained its

full breadth until after the close of that period” (Survey Mem.

Isle of Man, p. 403).

Let us now turn to the mollusca of the raised beaches. A

monograph on the raised beaches of the southern coast was

published by Prestwich in the Q. J. Geol. Soc. xlviii. p. 263. In

this paper he gives several lists of shells fonnd in them. In one

case only does Mya arenaria occur, although the shell is such a

common living shell in the Channel, namely on the Thatcher Rock

in Torbay, which has a peculiar history and is probably much

older than the other raised beaches of the Channel: Pengelly

LOO] RECENT BIOLOGY OF SOME LIVING SHELLS. 761

thought it “ pre-glacial”*. It is surely singular that Mya

arenaria should be absent from all these raised beaches in

England save one, as it is from all the raised beaches of

Scandinavia save one also, or perhaps two.

Let us now turn to another group of raised beaches and kitchen-

middens, namely those in the south-west of Scotland. In his

account of the kitchen-midden on the coast of Ayrshire known

as the Ardrossan shell-mound, Mr. John Smith tells us that

among the shells found in it the genus J/ya was entirely absent.

It is singular notwithstanding this that the most abundant

living species at the present day in this district is Wya arenaria.

In the lower estuary of the Gare Loch it was very abundant in

muddy or gravelly sand twenty years ago, but has been almost

exterminated for food by the people. (Trans. Geol. Soc. Glas. ix.

p. 357.)

In the same writer’s account of the whale-bed in Ayrshire he

does not mention Mya arenaria as occurring either in the so-called

glacial beds at Stevenston, Kilwinning, and Troon, or in the

raised-beach beds at Shewalton Moor, while he says it is frequent

on the present beach from Stevenston to Troon (ibid. x. p. 42).

It is remarkable, he adds, that Mya has not turned up in the

raised-beach beds, although one of the species (1. e. truncata) 1s

common in the glacial beds and the other (i. e. arenaria) is

frequent in the estuary of Gare Loch (ibid. p. 46).

The so-called Carse clays of the valley in which Stirling and Fal-

kirk lie (which prolong the Firth of Forth westwards) and in which

the skeletons of several whales have occurred, are probably of the

same age as the lower raised beaches and kitchen-middens of the

West Coast. Shell deposits occur in several places in these Carse

beds. Thus, that at Cockmalane yielded Tellina balthica (vay.

solidula), Mytilus edulis, Cardiwm edule, C. nodosum (¢) young

specimen ¢ Buccinum undatum, Littorina litorea, of large size,

L. rudis, Nucula nucleus, Trophon truncata. Klsewhere oyster -

beds occur, and also Tapes pullastra, Mactra subtruncata, Cardium

echinatum, Trochus cinerarius, Purpura lapillus, Scrobicularia

piperata, Rissoa ulve, and Fusus antiquus. (‘ The old estuarine

beds of the Carse of Stirling,” Haswell, Trans. Edin. Geol. Soc.

x1. p. 58.) Here it will be seen there is no mention whatever of

Mya arenaria.

These facts make it almost certain that in the British seas, as

in Scandinavia, Mya arenaria is quite a recent addition to the

marinefauna. ‘The fact that the shell has only quite recently been

reported from the Italian seas points to its having also wandered

very recently into the Mediterranean. These facts could not

well have been known to Professor Brogger, who nevertheless, in

trying to find the home from which the shell went to Scandinavia,

suggests that 1t had come not from Britain, but from the Atlantic

* On its occurrence on the Thatcher Rock, see Hunt, Trans. Devon Assoc. 1888"

vol. xx. p. 227. The shells in the raised beach here were determined by G. Jeftreys’

D, Pidgeon, and J. J. Marshall; among them is Iya arenaria.

762 SIR HENRY H. HOWORTH ON THE [Nov. 9,

coast of America, where it occurs as far south as Carolina and north-

wards to Labrador. Brogger classes it in fact with those other

shells in the Christianiafiord which are also recent immigrants and

have been very probably derived from America, e. g. Acmea testudi-

nalis, Lophyrus albus, Scalaria greenlandica, Cerithiopsis costulata,

and Vucula delphinodonta (Brogger, op. cit. p.595 &e. and p. 712).

The history of Mya arenaria in America is a curious one. Its

old home there is on the Atlantic coast of Canada and the United

States, where it is a favourite edible mollusc, known as the

Clam, but it has quite recently (about 1874) been transported to

California to be fattened and has since spread rapidly in San

Francisco Bay (see Stearns, Mya arenaria im San Francisco Bay,

American Naturalist, xv. p. 362).

Let us, however, return to Kurope, for we have not yet exhausted

the interest of this shell.

While it seems plain that Mya arenariais not found in any of the

deposits in Europe later than the drift except in the currently

deposited alluvium, there can be no doubt that it occurs, and occurs

abundantly, in the Crag beds both in the Red orSuffolk Crag and in

the Upper or Norwich Crag and its several divisions. It is quoted

by Whitaker from the Red Crag at Beaumont (Mem. on Sheets

48 8.E. and 48 N.E. p. 30). It is also named from the Cray at

Bulehamp Pit, Dunwich Chiff, and Southwold (Geology of South-

wold, p. 83), from the so-called Chillesden Beds at East Barent

by Prestwich (Q. J. Geol. Soc. xxvii. p. 345), and from the so-called

Weybourne Crag at Trimmgham, Sidestrand, Overstrand, Runton,

Sheringham, and Weybourne, and generally as very common by

Mr. Clement Reid; and locally from the Norwich Crag at Burgh

near Aylsham by Mr. Harmer, who in another place reports the

shell as common in the Norwich Crag (Proc. Geol. Assoc., Later

Tert. hist. of East Angtia, p. 466).

It is also reported from the shell-bed on the shore at Selsea

(see R. Bell, Yorks. Phil. Soc. 1892). This bed is clearly older

than the drift, that is to say, is what is generally called pre-glacial,

since it underlies the famous gravel-bed which contains very large

boulders. G. Jeffreys also quotes it from the Crag of Belgium.

In regard to the Chillesford beds there are some fine, perfect

and very typical examples of the true Vya arenaria in the British

Museum.

It is perfectly plain, therefore, that Mya arenaria was living

in the British Seas in the period of the Red and Norwich Crag,

as it is plain that 1t is an abundant shell on our coasts now, but

that between these two periods it became extinct here and

was reimported. This involves some interesting issues. The

only marine beds lying between the Norwich Crag and the raised

beaches are the drift or so-called glacial beds. What is the

testimony of these beds on the question, and what is the exact

meaning of that testimony? <A very great change has come over

geological opinion in regard to the fossil contents of the drift

beds during the last thirty years. It was Searles Wood who first

separated the so-called Middle Sands of Norfolk from the Crag.

1909. | RECENT BIOLOGY OF SOME LIVING SHELLS. 763

Before hin, these sands were treated as true Crag. The difficulty

of separating them is in fact very considerable,and it must be

allowed that the separation was made on most unsatisfactory

grounds, and Mr. Whitaker quite admits in a letter to myself

that much which was once thought to be drift has been shown to

be Crag.

When Wood and Harmer separated the so-called Middle Sands

of Kast Anglia from the Norwich Crag and its several subordinate

divisions, the Weymouth Crag, Chillesford Crag, etc., they pro-

ceeded to constitute them a new biological horizon and to treat

their molluscan contents as glacial shells. This view Wood sub-

sequently somewhat modified. It was Mr. Horace Woodward

who first threw a flood of light on the subject by his suggestion

that the shell-fragments, &e., of the drift beds of Kastern England

were in no sense at home there, and did not constitute a special

biological horizon, but were in every case derivative. In his

various papers and memoirs on the Kast Anglian drifts he has

emphasized the point, and I have been indebted to him for much

information on the subject. :

In his paper on the Glacial Drifts of Norfolk he calls attention

to the fact that the fragments of shells found in them represent

more than a hundred species identified by Messrs. Wood and

iiarmer as Crag shells, a considerable number of them belonging

to the Coralline Crag. It was this discovery, which seemed to

point to warmer conditions, that first started the notion of warm

inter-glacial periods interposed in the so-called glacial age.

Mr. Woodward entirely disputed the cogency of this evidence.

He said: “ The aspect of the shells alone makes one sceptical, and

it is admitted that they did not live on the spots where they have

been accumulated.” These beds, he says, ‘“ pass southward into

gravels which underlie the chalky boulder-clay” ; and he urges

that the fragmentary shells in them have been largely derived

from old Crag formations which were entirely destroyed or buried

beneath the waters of the North Sea. Mr. Clement Reid, who

once held a different opinion, wrote to me many years ago saying :

“The fauna of the Middle Glacial sands of Norfolk, I now have

no doubt, is entirely derivative,” and proceeded to show very

clearly that Searles Wood’s theory about their contemporaneitiy

would not hold water. See the whole subject discussed at greater

length in my ‘Glacial Nightmare,’ p. 430; ‘Ice and Water,’ ii.

pp. 104-106 and p. 206. If derivative, I cannot for a moment

doubt that they were derived, as Gunn and the earlier Norfolk

geologists urged, from the Crag beds, being merely redeposited

Crag shells. Wood himself was constrained to admit that they

were derived, but argued that they came from some other

otherwise unknown glacial beds.

What is true of the Kast Anglian drifts is almost certainly

true also of the drift of Lincolnshire, the shells in which are very

fragmentary and rubbed: see Survey Memoir on East Lincoln-

shire, p. 91, for a long list and description of them; see also the

764 SIR HENRY H. HOWORTH ON THE [Nov. 9,

Memoir on Sheet 86, and pp. 177-183, where the mollusca in

several pits are described, apparently in all cases very fragmentary

and much broken, and in no case in situ.

The drift beds of East Yorkshire tell the same story.

Mr. Lamplugh has conclusively shown that none of the shells

in the shell-bed at Bridlington nor those found at Dimlington

near Spurn Point had been obtained from beds “in place,” but

from ‘masses of sand and clay occurring as boulders in the base-

ment boulder-clay.” That is, that the shells were transported.

Dr. G. Jeffreys at the reading of the paper said he believed

from personal inspection that this was a remanié deposit

(Q. J. Geol. Soc. xl. p. 326). In his ‘ Geology of Holderness’

Mr. Clement Reid fully admitted the fragmentary and transported

character of the shell-beds, and Mr. Lamplugh again remarks on

the inclusion in the so-called basement clay of stratified patches

of transported sand containing shells. It is clear, therefore, that

the Mollusca in the Yorkshire drifts. like those in the Kast Anglian

ones, are derivative and so could only have been derived from the

later Crag beds.

Again, Mr. E. T. Newton has expressed the opinion that the

whole of the fish-remains at Bridlington are either Norwich Crag,

Red Crag, or London Clay ; and seeing that so many of the Crag

Vertebrata have been originally derived from the London Clay, it

is quite possible that all the Bridlington fishes have been derived

directly from the Crags. He adds the very important sentence :

“T should doubt if any of them were contemporaneous with the

Bridlington deposits, and the mineral condition and polished

surface of the specimens are characteristic of Crag fossils. This

would seem to point to the destruction of older Tertiary beds

during the formation of the gravelly sand containing the Arctic

fauna.” (Q. J. Geol. Sce. xl. p. 322.) Mr. C. Lewis says that the

character of the shells in the Weybourne Crag accords well with

that of the shells at Speeton.

Travelling further north, we find similar broken and much

comininuted shells in the drift beds of Durham and Berwick-

shire whose condition similarly proves their derivative character.

Further north again we find that in the drift beds of Kastern

Scotland the shells are precisely in the same condition, comminuted,

striated and smoothed, and very seldom whole. Professor Geikie

describes them as scattered confusedly through the mass, like the

boulders with which they are associated. This is especially the

ease with the shelly drift covering a large part of Caithness.

Moreover, Peach anid Horne found numbers of smoothed and

striated shell-fragments in the Orkneys. This all points unmis-

takably to the shells in question being derivative and not in situ

in the drift beds, and belonging in fact to an earlier horizon.

I presume that most people who have seen them as they are found

would in fact claim that they are older than the drifts in which

they occur, or, to use the language of the glacialists, that they

are pre-glacial. According to my view, the marine horizon

1909. | RECENT BIOLOGY OF SOME LIVING SHELLS. 765

immediately preceding the drift was that of the so-called Norwich

Crag. I hold, in fact, as I said previously, that there is no such

thing as a biological horizon represented by the drift beds of

Eastern England and Scotland ; that, whether distributed by ice

or water, all their biological contents are older than themselves

and remanié. ‘This is important in respect of the subject matter

of the present paper, since Mr. Lamplugh mentions that Mya

arenaria has been found in the lower Bridlington beds, although

he has not verified the discovery himself.

Tn one instance I find Mya with a query cited from the drifts

of Lincolnshire (see Survey Memoirs, Linc. p. 182). Mya arenaria

has been repeatedly reported as discovered in the drift beds of

Eastern England. Wood mentions it in ‘The Crag Mollusca.’

Tt is named from Corton by Mr. Harmer in his memoir on the

country round Norwich, and by Mr. Blake from Gorleston Cliff in

his account of the country round Yarmouth and Lowestoft. The

comminuted and water-worn condition of the fragments (whole

shells being very rare) makes it often uncertain about the identi-

fication of the species of Mya, since, as we have seen, it is only

the hinge that is of importance. Mr. Blake, speaking of Gorleston,

says: ‘Some of the loamy bands contained finely comminuted

shell-fragments, whereas in other places fragments from an inch to

more than two inches in length of such shells as Cyprina islandica

and Mya arenaria were seen mixed with smaller fragments, all

water-worn” (op. cit. p.39). It is clear that in view of Dr. Jensen’s

discovery these fragments of MW. arenaria should be re-examined.

What is plain, however, is that, whether they be true WV. arenaria

or not, they have come from re-arranged Crag deposits and have

nothing to tell us of any horizon subsequent to the Crag.

Let us now turn to the Trish Sea. It has always seemed to me

strange that the writers on the Crag beds should have so entirely

limited their investigations to the two sides of the southern part

of the North Sea. For it is quite clear that Britain in the time

of the Crag was washed by seas on the west as well as on the east

as it is now. It startled some people greatly when Jamieson

discovered true Crag deposits in Aberdeenshire as late as 1862,

and when similar deposits were discovered at St. Erth in Cornwall.

Now that we know that the fragmentary shells in the drift of

Eastern England are ali derived from Crag beds, the problem has

become more interesting and important.

It is at least @ priori probable that what is true of the frag-

mentary shells in the drifts of Eastern England and Scotland is

true also of the broken shells of the drifts of Western England

and Scotland, and it has been generally urged that these broken

and rubbed shell-fragments are also devivative. Those who know

them best are allof this opinion. In my ‘Ice and Water’ I have

quoted Forbes, Meilard Read, Darbishire, Kendall, Crosskey,

G. Jeffreys, and the British Association Committee on the beds of

Kintyre, for the drifts of Macclesfield, Lancashire, the Isle of

Man, Arran, and Kintyre (op. cif. ii. pp. 113-119). They are all

766 ON THE RECENT BIOLOGY OF SOME LIVING SHELLS. [Nov. 9,

agreed on the subject that these fragmentary shells are trans-

ported, re-arranged and derived from earlier beds. Now the beds

preceding the drift in Western England, just as in Eastern

England, must have been deposited in the Crag sea. The shells

are no doubt not precisely the same on both sides of England,

but the conditions were not quite the same either. It is ex-

ceedingly probable that Ireland and Scotland were united at some

point during the Crag time, so that the shells in the southern

part of the Irish Sea and those in the northern part would have

been somewhat different, there being no access in the south to the

northern indraft of cold water. This would not affect the con-

temporaneousness of the shell-beds, however, on either side of the

island any more than the present divergent fauna of the Baltic

and the Cattegat do so.

While the contents of the drift beds show every sign of being

derivative, this does not mean that all the later beds in the

western parts of Great Britain are so. Just as there is every

reason for thinking the shell-beds in Nairnshire to be in situ and

to be, as I have urged elsewhere, older than the drift which over-

hes them (see op. cit. 11. p. 118), so also is it the case with the low-

lying shell-beds in the Kyles of Bute and some other sites in

Western Scotland. Mr. James Smith, of Jordan Hill, was the

first to discriminate two sets of shell-beds in this district (see

Smith, ‘ Newer Pliocene Geology,’ p. 79). These seem certainly

im sitw and to be older also than the drift, and in my opinion

they represent the later Crag of the West Sea just as the beds

at Aberdeen represent the Crag of the North Sea.

Here again our shell J/ya arenaria comes to our assistance.

Just as 1t abounds in the Norwich Crag so does it abound also in

the Bute beds.

Two splendid valves of typical Mya arenaria from the shell-beds

of the Kyles of Bute are in the British Museum from the Richmond

Collection, and are labelled Glacial (see number 35020).

Crosskey and Robertson found the shell in the same place.

They in fact presented some specimens of it from the Kyles of

Bute to Professor Sars in 1866. Brogger describes them as of the

typical form and they still preserve their original label, J/ya

arenaria, glacial clays, Kyles of Bute. To which Sars added in

his own handwriting, “ glacial” with a query. The shell is

named from the same locality in the appendix to Sir A. Geikie’s

Memoir on the Glacial Drift of Scotland (Trans. Geol. Soc. Glas.

1G [Ola 5 Jn LUD),

Robertson and Crosskey also name a single valve of Mya aren-

aria as having been found in the Lochgilp beds (267d. iii. p. 122).

These several beds I deem to be what are generally called pre-glacial

or, as I prefer to call them, late Crag; and it was from similar

late Crag beds that the fragmentary shells in the Isle of Man and

the Lancashire drifts were derived and among them the Mya

arenaria, which is mentioned from the Isle of Man beds at Glen

Wyllin by Mr. Kendall.

Je oe Oe) Sei LOCI.

A.H.Searle del.et lith. Se

J.Green imp.

1. BETTA RUBRA 2.B.MACROPHTHALMA. 3.B.AKARENSIS.

4.B.FASCIATA 5.POLYACANTHUS SIGNATUS.

ley Apr) Nhe) 2M ILA CVA,

A.H.Searle del.et hth. d.Green imp

PB) PAS PAIN TATAS 2) 5) PU SiGAS

3.B.MACROSTOMA.4.B.ANABATOIDES.

WWOIS) LEAS WI OleClS SIS" s, SG “SieanRsIOMWoaleal Slelarosvomi omen 1

“duit useay’p “UR 72 T2P e989 HV

RENTS

BS S

NBO Wel COG SZ a

1909.] ON ASIATIC FISHES OF THE FAMILY ANABANTIDS. 767

To sum up shortly the result of this induction. It seems fairly

proved that Mya arenaria, one of the very commonest shells in

the present seas of Scandinavia, Britain, and Belgium, where the

conditions are singularly favourable for it, has only recently invaded

those shores. Secondly, that it is not an Arctic shell as has

been supposed, but a boreal one. It has not been found living in

Arctic waters, and its alleged occurrence there has been due to a

mistaken inference. Hence, all deductions as to glacial climate

deduced from its having occurred in certain beds must fall to the

ground, It may well be, as Brogger suggests, that when it

recently invaded the European seas it came from North America.

On the other hand, the same shell existed abundantly in Britain in

the times of the Middle and Later Crag, and has been found in

Scandinavia at Uddevalla, affording some evidence that a portion

at all events of the Uddevalla shell-beds are what is called pre-

glacial or late Crag. So that the mollusc must have died out for

a considerable time or been exterminated. Meanwhile it becomes

a very good test to discriminate between the shells of the Crag

and those derived from it, on the one hand, and the subsequent

fauna of the raised beaches ete., down to recent times, on the other.

The cause of its extinction and the explanation of its reintro-

duction, unless the latter was due to human agency, are equally

puzzling. The notion that IM/ya arenaria was the victim of that

Deus ex machina, the Ice Age, is excluded by the fact that the

companions of this shell in our modern estuaries suffered no such

extinction, but survived all through the period from the Crag

age until our own day.

2. The Asiatic Fishes of the Family Anabantide.

By C. Tate Reean, M.A., F.Z.8.*

[Received September 27, 1909. ]

(Plates LX XVIT.-LXXIX.7)

In my classification of the Teleostean Fishes (Ann. Mag. N. H.

(8) iii. 1909, pp. 75-86), the Anabantoidei are placed as a sub-

order of the order Labyrinthici, which includes also the Ophio-

cephaloidei.

The Labyrinthici form a terminal group which has attained a

considerable degree of specialization; they are physoclistic, the

parietal bones are separated by the supraoccipital, there is no

orbitosphenoid, the protractile preemaxillaries exclude the tooth-

less maxillaries from the oral border, there is no mesocoracoid, the

vertebral centra are solid and coossified with the arches, and the

pelvic fins are placed well forward. Characteristic is the presence

on each side of a supra-branchial cavity which contains a laminar

* Communicated by permission of the Trustees of the British Museum.

+ For explanation of the Plates see p. 787.

768 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON ASIATIC [Nov. 9,

expansion or process of the first epibranchial; also the continu-

ation backwards of the abdominal cavity, supported by ribs,

nearly to the caudal fin, this caudal extension containing only

the posterior part of the air-bladder. Another feature of some

importance is the presence of teeth on the parasphenoid, between

and just in front of the upper pharyngeals; in some genera these

teeth form quite a well-marked patch, in others they are less

prominent; in the very aberrant Luciocephalus I find only two

or three minute teeth on the parasphenoid. The cranium of ail

the Labyrinthici is remarkably solid, the nasals are firmly united

by suture to the frontals, the preeorbitals to the prefrontals, and

the postorbitals to the frontals and post-frontals ; the suborbital

ring is fixed and rigid; the supra-branchial cavities hollow out

the otic region; as a rule they are bordered above by the laminar

supra-temporal (pterotic) and opisthotic, and within mainly by

the exoccipitals, but in Ophiocephalus they reach the pavietals,

and in Anabas the supraoccipital and post-frontals also take

part in roofing the suprabranchial cavities, which are only

separated from each other in this type by a thin median septum,

the cranial cavity being pushed forward. The post-temporal is

forked, attached to the epiotic above and the opisthotic below ;

the ribs are inserted on strong transverse processes.

The Ophiocephaloidei are undoubtedly the most primitive sub-

order; in them all the fin-rays are articulated and the 6-rayed

pelvic fins are subabdominal in position, the pelvic bones being

remote from the cleithra. The suprabranchial organ is not

labyrinthic and the long simple air-bladder extends back for the

whole length of the anal fin, the basalia of the latter being

attached not to hemal spines, but to the distal ends of the ribs.

In the Anabantoidei the pelvic fins are composed of a spine

and five or fewer soft rays or may be reduced to a single fila-

mentous ray, and the pelvic bones are attached to the ligament

which connects the cleithra above their symphysis, either loosely

or more or less firmly. The suprabranchial lamina is often

branched and convoluted and the air-bladder is divided poste-

riorly by the hemal spines which support the basalia of the anal

fin.

The Ophiocephaloidei probably originated from fishes very

similar to the Cyprinodontide, which hke them are soft-rayed

fishes with 6-rayed pelvic fins and with a scaly head, and which

resemble them in the structure of the mouth and in many details

of the cranium, vertebral column, and pectoral arch.

I follow Bleeker and Giinther in recognizing two families of

the Anabantoidei, viz. Anabantide, with the mouth moderately

protractile and the gill-openings restricted by the broad union of

the scaly gill-membranes, and Luciocephalide, with the mouth

very protractile and the gill-openings wide, the naked gill-

membranes not being united.

The Labyrinthici inhabit the Ethiopian and Oriental Regions,

but two species, Anabas scandens and Ophiocephalus striatus, cross

g°5

1909. | FISHES OF THE FAMILY ANABANTID. 769

Wallace’s Line into Celebes, Amboina, and Halmahera*. As a

group they are remarkable for the time they can live out of water

and for their habit of migrating overland from one pond or

stream to another. One species, Anabas scandens, is said

habitually to climb trees.

Family ANABANTID4&.

Synopsis of the Asiatic Genera.

I. Each pelvic fin of a spine and 5 soft rays.

A. First soft ray of pelvic fin bifid ; two lateral lines,

the lower commencing below the end of the upper

and separated from it by a series of scales; dorsal

spines numerous.

1. Jaws with fixed conical teeth.

Vomerine teeth; pelvic fins inserted a little behind the

base of the pectorals.........

eae erty AU ee Rie auallaedin bas:

Palate toothless; pelvic fins inserted below the base of the

ECHO TALS eee eee ee ico eeec ete uciettar arena wasn) li) Sa eOLY MC OMLELUS.

2. Jaws with small movable teeth attached to the

HWONGIE INOS cevcooanbosoncegecosarancococosacecsosecsdasapes | | Gb Jalelesvonnd

B. First soft ray of pelvic fin produced into a single

filament.

1. Lateral line present, complete and continuous ... 4. Osphromenus.

2. Lateral line vestigial or absent.

D. XITI-XVII 5-8. A. XVI-XX 9-15; preorbital ser-

rated; dorsal and anal scaly at the base .................. 5. Macropodus.

D. XIII 7. A. XIII 9; prexorbital entire; dorsal and

ema GEASS 8a dbs bcclosaceodbigedoooede obo pdapos hes poadeEecsaan ous

D. VIII-XII 7-10. A. VII[-X 18-22; prexorbital and

lower limb of praoperculum serrated; origin of dorsal

OCA? FUMOUS PAPO! GA sconcocascdacsadeonerseseenne eeccoorse OF

D. II-VI 6-8. A.IV-—VIII 24-28; preorbital and pra-

operculum serrated ; origin of dorsal over soft part of

6. Parosphromenus.

. Spherichthys.

Girt see ae epee te ee ae Sen mE PENT Rn Bea GUD EEA ERE aA banat Memnnst am GUC HEY he

D. 17-10. A. LV 20-37; przorbital and preoperculum

CTTEAT CL eas Mon Hak Ron ag-ce niece eee re acre tony MOS OeLba.

II. Each pelvic tin of a vestigial spine adnate to a long

filamentous ray, which has 2 or 3 small branched rays

ATRL ESHER eet CHL. een HOE Les renee OME sechopodiuss

Ill. Each pelvic fin reduced to a single long filamentous

THEI? asblnSeadin bortoe denim alscras ERG ada GLACE ABH MELO nae Moracaamabenenee WMA A Col oN Ia

* All available evidence is strongly against the supposition that these three

islands have been connected with each other and with Borneo or the Philippines

during the life-time of these two species. Both are common and widely distributed

fishes, much appreciated as food, and are so easily kept alive that the natives carry

them about in jars, either with or without water, in order to have a supply of fresh

fish ready. ‘Thus nothing is more likely than that both species were introduced

into Celebes, Amboina, and Halmahera by man; once introduced their peculiar

powers of migration would soon enable them to spread all over these islands.

hese remarks apply also to Monopterus javanensis, another Indian species found

in Celebes, an important food-fish able to live for a long time out of the water,

which is kept alive in jars by the natives of the countries in which it occurs.

An Indian Symbranchoid eel, Symbranchus bengalensis, is known not only from

Celebes but from Western Australia; this is essentially a brackish-water fish and

there can be little doubt it sometimes descends to the sea. i

An endemic Cyprinodont, Haplochilus celebensis, is the only remaining fish

which has been supposed to indicate the Indian affinities of the freshwater fish fauna

770 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON ASIATIC [Nov. 9,

1. ANABAS.

Anabas, Cuv. Régne Anim. 11. p. 310 (1817); Giinth. Cat. Fish.

iii. p. 374 (1861); Bleek. Verh. Akad. Amst. xix. 1879, p. 4.

Body oblong, subcylindrical anteriorly and compressed poste-

riorly. Small fixed conical teeth in the jaws and on the vomer.

Preorbital, operculum, sub- and inter-operculum serrated. Dorsal

with XVI-XIX 7-11 rays; origin im advance of that of the

anal, which has [IX—XI 8-12 rays; soft dorsal and anal scaly at

the base and with the rays branched. Pelvics inserted a little

behind the pectorals, of a spine and 5 branched rays; first

branched ray only bifid. Scales large, regularly arranged; lateral

line interrupted below the posterior part of the spinous dorsal,

commencing again lower down.

The African genus Spirobranchus appears to me to be well

distinguished from Anabas by the strongly compressed head and

body, the presence of teeth on the palatines, the exposed maxil-

lary, the entire preorbital and opercular bones, and the fewer

fin-spines. Ctenopoma is much nearer to Anabas, but the Asiatic

genus is well distinguished from both the African ones in that

the postorbitals are large plates which cover the cheeks and are

united by suture with the preoperculum, whilst the supra-

branchial cavities are so large that they are roofed in by the

parietals and supraoccipital and are only separated from each

other by a thin septum formed by the supraoccipital and ex-

occipitals.

A single species from India, the Malay Peninsula and Archi-

pelago.

of Celebes, but as it belongs to a family and a genus which includes many marine

forms it has little significance.

To illustrate the geographical distribution of freshwater fishes a primary division

must be made separating the Australian Region, including Celebes, from the rest of

the world. With the exception of (1) archaic types, Ceratcdus and Scleropages,

aud (2) introduced species, such as Anabas scandens, the freshwater fishes of the

Australian region belong to marine families, genera, or species. Ostariophysi are

entirely absent except Siluroids of the marine groups Plotoside and Ariine; the

perches are Serranide, Kuhliide, etc. ; peculiar genera and species of Atherinide,

Mugilid, Gobiide, etc., form an important element in the freshwater fish fauna.

The contrast between Borneo with its hundreds of species of Cyprinoids ana fresh-

water Siluroids, Ophiocephalide, Anabantidee, Luciocephalide, Nandide, and Mas-

tacembelide, and Celebes from which these groups are entirely absent except for

two species which cannot be regarded as indigenous, is most striking. The con-

clusion is that Wallace’s Line indicates where the severance of Australia from Asia

took place not later than the beginning of the Eocene.

I have been led to make these remarks by Prot. Max Weber’s conclusion that the

fish-fauna of Celebes has no Australian, but an impoverished Indian character

(Zool. Ergebn. Reis. Ned. Ind. iii. 1894, p. 472). As I have shown above, the

Indian element consists of three species which have probably been introduced by

man and two which may have journeyed by sea. Prof. Max Weber also lays stress

on the absence from Celebes of true Australian freshwater fishes, but I am unable to

recognize this element in Australia itself; the Dipneusti and Osteoglosside, which

are also absent from New Guinea, but one of which is represented in Borneo,

are to be regarded, wherever they may occur, as survivals of an ancient fauna. Of

the other genera mentioned by Prof. Max Weber, Galawias is southern and marine,

and:is not found within a thousand miles of Celebes, whilst Oligorus is a perch

found in the rivers of Eastern Australia, and belongs to the marine family

Serranide.

—T

—

1909.) FISHES OF THE FAMILY ANABANTIDA.

1. ANABAS SCANDENS.

Perca scandens Daldorff, Trans. Linn. Soe. iii. 1797, p. 62.

Anthias testudineus Bloch, Ausl. Fisch. vi. p. 121, pl. ccexxii.

(1795).

Amphiprion testudineus Schneid. Bloch’s Syst. Ichth. p. 204

(1801).

Amphiprion scansor Schneid. t.c. p. 570.

Lutianus testudo Lacep. Hist. Nat. Poiss. iv. p. 235 (1803).

Lutianus scandens Lacep. t.c. p. 239.

Sparus testudineus Shaw, Zool. iv. p. 471 (1803).

Sparus scandens Shaw, t.c. p. 475.

Cojus cobojius Buch. Ham. Fish. Ganges, pp. 98, 370, pl. xiii.

fig. 33 (1822).

Anabas testudineus Cuv. Regne Anim. ii. p. 310 (1817); Bleek.

Atl. Ichth. pl. ccexevi. figs. 2, 3 (1878), and Verh. Akad. Amst.

abe IMS De Toate

Anabas scandens Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. vii. p. 249,

pl. exci. (1831); Giinth. Cat. Fish. ii. p. 375 (1861); Day, Fish.

Ind. p. 370, pl. Ixxviii. fig. 3 (1878).

Anabas spinosus Gray, Ill. Ind. Zool. ii. pl. Ixxxix. fig. 1 (1834).

Anabas variegatus Bleek. Nat. Tijdschr. Ned. Ind. ii. 1851, p. 220.

Anabas macrocephalus Bleek. Nat. Tijdschr. Ned. Ind. vii.

1854, p. 430: Giinth. t.c. p. 376.

Anabas oligolepis Bleek. Nat. Tijdschr. Ned. Ind. viii. 1855,

p- 161; Atl. Ichth. pl. ccexev. fig. 5 (1878), and Verh. Akad.

Amst. xix. 1879, p. 5; Giinth. l.c.

Anabas microcephalus Bleek. Act. Soc. Sci. Ind. Neerl. ii. 1857,

No. 7, p. 58; Atl. Ichth. pl. ccexev. fig. 2, and Verh. Akad. Amst.

Se USGS Jos O'R (Eaiaatl ae Mey os 711

Anabas trifoliatus Kaup, Arch. f. Nat. 1860, p. 124, pl. vi. fig. A.

Dorsal with XVI-XIX 7-11 rays; anal with [X—XI 8-12.

27 to 32 scales in a longitudinal series. Greenish olive; usually

two dark stripes from the eye to the opercles; sides of the body

sometimes with dark cross-bands, sometimes with longitudinal

stripes; often a blackish spot, which may be ocellated, at the

base of the caudal fin; markings disappearing with age, the

adults uniform or nearly so.

Hab. India; Ceylon; Malay Peninsula and Archipelago, to

the Philippines, Celebes, Amboina, and Halmahera.

Ginther in 1861 recognized four species, A. sewndens, macro-

cephalus, oligolepis, and mucrocephalus. Bleeker in 1879 united

macrocephalus with scandens and expressed doubt as to the

validity of mzcrocephalus. These three supposed species were

based only on differences in form and proportions, but 4. oligolepis

was said to differ in the fewer scales, 27 instead of 30 to 32.

Day (Fish. India, p. 370) gave it as his opinion that a regular

gradation existed between these numbers. I find the number of

scales varies considerably, but I am unable to recognize more

than one species after examination of a large series of specimens.

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1909, No. LIII. 53

772 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON ASIATIC [ Nov. 9,

2. PoLYACANTHUS.

Polyacanthus (part.) Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. vil. p, 353

(1831); Ginth. Cat. Fish. ii. p. 378 (1861).

Polyacanthus Bleek. Verh. Ak. Amst. xix. 187, p. 12.

Body oblong, compressed. Jaws with fixed conical teeth ;

palate toothless. Preeoperculum serrated. Dorsal with XIV-—

XIX 8-11 rays; origin in advance of that of the anal, which has

XIV-XVIT 10-13 rays; soft dorsal and anal scaly at the base

and with the rays branched. Pelvics inserted below the pectorals,

of a spine and 5 branched rays, the first of which is produced into

two filaments. Scales large, regularly arranged ; lateral line

interrupted below the posterior part of the spinous dorsal, com-

mencing again lower down.

Two species from Ceylon and the Malay Archipelago.

1. PoLYACANTHUS HASSELTII.

Polyacanthus hasseltv Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. vii. p. 353,

pls. exev., cev. (1831); Giinth. Cat. Fish. iii. p. 378 (1861) ; Bleek.

Atl. Ichth. pl. ecexevi. fig. 7 (1878) and Verh. Ak. Amst. xix.

LST ps 12"

JE: olyacanthus kuhlii Bleek. Nat. Gen. Arch. Ned. End. ii. 1845,

p- 520.

Polyacanthus einthoventti Bleek. Nat. Tijdschr. Ned. Ind. ii

1851, p. 423; Gunth. 1. e.

Polyacanthus helfrichit Bleek. Nat. Tijdschr. Ned. Ind. viii.

1855, p. 162; Ginth. t.c. p. 379.

Preorbital not serrated; maxillary extending to the vertical

from between the nostrils; interorbital width more than 3 the

length of head. Dorsal XVI-XIX 10-13. Anal XV-XVII

i1-13. 31 to 33 scales m a longitudinal series. Olivaceous ;

young with darker eross-bars ; sometimes a blackish spot at the

base of the soft dorsal; soft vertical fins sometimes with series of

small dark spots or with reticulating lines.

Hab. Java, Sumatra, and Borneo.

A single specimen, 160 mm. in total length.

. PoLYACANTHUS sienaTus. (Plate LX XVII. fig. 5.)

et signatus Gunth. Cat. Fish. iii. p. 379 (1861); Day,

Fish. Ind. p. 371 (1878).

Preeorbital serrated ; maxillary extending to the vertical from

the anterior margin of eye; interorbital width 3 or a little more

than 4 the length of head. Dorsal XVI-XVIII 7-10. Anal

XIV-XVIT 9-12. 29 to 32 scales in a longitudinal series.

Olivaceous; usually a dark spot at the base of the soft dorsal fin.

Hab. Ceylon.

Twelve specimens, measuring up to 130 mm. in total length,

including the types of the species.

1999. ] FISHES OF THE FAMILY ANABANTID&. V7

3. HELosTOMA.

Helostoma Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. vii. p. 341 (1831);

Cunestr. Verh. Zool.-Bot. Gesallsch. x. 1860, p. 705; Gimth.

Cat. Fish. 111. p. 377 (1861); Bleek. Verh. Ak. Amst. xix. 1879,

p. 14.

Body rather deep, compressed. Lips thick, with small movable

teeth; palate toothless. Preorbital serrated; preoperculum

entire. Dorsal with XII-X VIII 13-16 rays; origin in advance

of that of the anal, which has VITI-XV 17-19 rays; soft dorsal

and anal sealy at the base and with the rays branched. Pelvics

inserted below the pectorals, of a spine and 5 branched rays, the

first of which is bifid and somewhat produced. Seales of moderate

size, regularly arranged ; lateral line interrupted below the soft

dorsal, commencing again lower down.

One species from Siam, the Malay Peninsula and Archipelago.

1. HELOSTOMA TEMMINCKII.

Helostoma temmincku Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. vii. p. 342,

pl. exciv. (1831); Gunth. Cat. Fish. ii. p. 377 (1861); Bleek.

Atl. Ichth. pl. ccexevi. fig. 5 (1878) and Verh. Ak. Amst. xix.

ISDS Tos ILS).

Depth of body 3 ora little more than 3 the length. Dorsal XVI-

XVIII 13-16. Anal XIII-XV 17-19. 43 to 48 scales in a

longitudinal series. Dark longitudinal stripes along the series of

scales.

Hab. Siam; Malay Peninsula; Java, Sumatra, and Borneo

Five specimens, measuring up to 200 mm. in total length.

A specimen from Java with XII 14 dorsal and VIII 17 anal

rays received the name /#. oligacanthwm, but was afterwards

regarded by Dr. Bleeker as merely an abnormal example (Verh.

Ak. Amst. xix. 1879, p. 16).

4, OSPHROMENUS.

Osphromenus Lacep. Hist. Nat. Poiss. iii. p. 117 (1802); Cuv.

& Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. vu. p. 377 (1831); Canestr. Verh. Zool.-

Bot. Gesellsch. x. 1860, p. 706; Bleek. Verh. “Ak. Amst. xix.

Is); JO. ALM

Osphromenus (part.) Gunth. Cat. Fish. iii. p. 382.

Body deep, compressed. Jaws with fixed conical teeth ; palate

toothless. Preeorbital, preeoperculum, and interoperculum serrated.

Dorsal with XI-XIIT 11-13 rays; origin above that of the anal,

which has [X—XII 16-22 rays; anal scaly at the base and with

most of the rays branched. Pelvics inserted below the pectorals,

of a spine and 5 soft rays; first soft ray produced into a,

filament. Scales large, regularly arranged; lateral line complete,

continuous.

A single species from the Malay Archipelago.

774 MR. C, TATE REGAN ON ASIATIC [ Nov. 9,

1. OSPHROMENUS GOURAMI.

Osphromenus gouramt Lacep. Hist. Nat. Poiss. ii. p. 117, pl. i.

fig. 2 (1802); Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. vil. p. 377, pl. exeviil.

1831).

: Bbiimnedie olfax Cuv. Régne Anim. i. p. 336 (1817); Cuv. &

Val. J.c.; Giinth. Cat. Fish. ii. p. 382 (1861); Day, Fish. Ind.

p. 372, pl. Ixxix. fig. 6 (1878); Bleek. Atl. Ichth. pls. ecexev.

fig. 6 and ccexevi. fig. 6 (1878); and Verh. Ak. Amst. xix.

SOs peli

Osphromenus notatus Cuv. & Val. t. c. p. 386.

Body deep, compressed. Dorsal XI-XTIT 11-13. Anal [X—

XII 16-22. 30 to 35 scales in a longitudinal series. Adult

uniformly olivaceous ; young with oblique darker cross-bands, a

blackish spot at the base of the pectoral and another above the

posterior part of the anal.

Hab, Java, Sumatra, and Borneo; introduced into various

tropical countries.

Numerous examples measuring up to 450 mm. in total length,

from Borneo (Hose, Cator) and Sumatra (Joesch), and also from

Penang (Cantor), Madras, Mauritius, and the Seychelles.

The species attains a large size and a weight of more than

20 Ibs.; it is an excellent food-fish.

5. Macroropus.

Macropodus Lacep. Hist. Nat. Poiss. ui. p. 417 (1802).

Pseudosphromenus Bleek. Verh. Ak. Amst. xix. 1879, p. 17.

Body oblong, compressed. Jaws with fixed conical teeth ;

palate toothless. Preeorbital and preeoperculum serrated. Dorsal

with XIII-X VII 5-8 rays; origin nearly above that of the anal,

which has XVI-XX 9-15 rays; a scaly sheath at the base of

dorsal and anal fins; rays branched. Pelvic fins inserted below

the pectorals, of a spine and 5 soft rays; first soft ray produced

into a filament. Scales large, regularly arranged ; lateral line

vestigial or absent.

Two species from China, India, and the Malay Peninsula.

1. MAcROPODUS OPERCULARIS.

Labrus opercularis Linn. Ameen. Acad. iv. p. 248 (1788).

Chetodon chinensis Bloch, Ausl. Fisch. pl. cexviii. fig. 1

(1790).

Macropodus viridiauratus Lacep. Hist. Nat. Poiss. iii. p. 417,

pl. xvi. fig. 1 (1802); Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. vii. p. 373

(1831); Giinth. Cat. Fish. 11. p. 382 (1861).

Polyacanthus chinensis Cuv. & Val. t. c. p. 357; Richards.

Ichth. China, p. 250 (1846).

Macropodus venustus Cuv. & Val. t. c. p. 375, pl. exevii.

Macropodus ocellatus Cant. Ann. Mag. N. H. ix. 1842, p. 484.

Polyacanthus opercularis Richards. 1. e.; Giinth. t. ¢. p. 379.

Polyacanthus paludosus Richards. 1. c.

1909. ] FISHES OF THE FAMILY ANABANTIDE. 775

Depth of body 3 or more than 4 of the length. Dorsal XIII-

XVII 6-8. Anal XVII-XX 11-15. Small scales on the fins in

addition to the basal sheath; soft vertical fins sometimes pro-

duced, when the caudal becomes bilobed. 28 to 31 scales in a

longitudinal sevies. A round black spot on the extremity of the

operculum ; body with or without dark cross-bars, sometimes

with irregular silvery bays.

Hab. China; Cochin China; Formosa; Loo Choo Islands.

Several specimens, measuring up to 80 mm. in total length,

including the types of J. ocellatus.

2. MACROPODUS CUPANUS.

Polyacanthus cupanus Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. vii. p. 357

(1831); Giinth. Cat. Fish. iii. p. 381 (1861); Day, Fish. Ind.

p- 371, pl. Ixxviii. fig. 4 (1878).

Depth of body about 3 the length. Dorsal XITV—XVII 5-7.

Anal X VI-XIX 9-11. Fins scaleless except for the basal sheath ;

soft vertical fins sometimes produced, when the caudal becomes

pointed. 29 to 32 scales in a longitudinal series. A dark spot

on each side at the base of the caudal fin; body sometimes with

two dark longitudinal bands, rarely with irregular cross-bars.

Hab. India; Ceylon; Malay Peninsula; in lowland streams

and estuaries.

Eighteen specimens, measuring up to 45 mm. in total length.

6. PAROSPHROMENUS.

Parosphromenus Bleek. Verh. Ak. Amst. xix. 1879, p. 19.

Body rather elongate, compressed. Jaws with fixed conical

teeth ; palate toothless. Preeorbital and opercular bones, except

the preoperculum, not serrated. Dorsal with XIII 7 rays;

origin in advance of that of the anal, which has XIII 9 rays;

dorsal and anal fins scaleless and with simple rays. Pelvics

inserted below the pectorals, of a spine and 5 soft rays; first soft

ray produced into a filament Scales large, regularly arranged ;

lateral line vestigial or absent.

A single species, from Sumatra.

1. PAROSPHROMENUS DEISSNERI.

Osphromenus deissnert Bleek. Nat. Tijdschr. Ned. Ind. xviii.

1859, p. 376.

Polyacanthus deissnert Giinth, Cat. Fish. 111. p. 881 (1861).

Parosphromenus deissneri Bleek. Atl. Ichth. pl. eccxev. fig. 1

(1878), and Verh. Ak. Amst. xix. 1879, p. 20.

Depth of body 3% in the length. Dorsal XIII 7. Anal

XIII 9. 30 scales in a longitudinal series. Body with blackish

longitudinal stripes, a mid-dorsal and a mid-ventral and two

broader ones on each side.

Hab. Bangka, Sumatra.

Total length 34 mm,

776 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON ASIATIC [Nov. 9,

7, SPH#RICHTHYS.

Spherichthys Canestrini, Verh. Zool.-Bot. Gesellsch. x. 1860,

p. 707.

Body deep, compressed. Jaws with very small, fixed teeth;

palate toothless. Preorbital and lower limb of przoperculum

serrated. Dorsal with VIII-XII 7-10 rays; origin a little

behind that of the anal, which has VITI-X 18-22 rays; anal

scaly at the base and with the rays simple. Pelvics inserted a

little in advance of the pectorals, each of a spine and 5 soft rays,

the first somewhat produced; scales large, regularly arranged ;

lateral line vestigial or absent.

A single species from the Malay Peninsula.

1. SPHHRICHTHYS OSPHROMENOIDES.

Spherichthys osphromenoides Canestrini, Verh. Zool.-Bot.

Gesellsch. x. 1860, p. 707.

Osphromenus malayanus Duncker, Monatsb. Mus. Hamburg,

sts SOAS 705 MOS, jal, te ates, th

Body deep, compressed. Dorsal VIITI-XIT 7-10. Anal

VITI-X 18-22. 26 to 29 seales in a longitudinal series.

Brownish; four whitish nearly vertical stripes on the posterior

part of the fisb, of which one connecting the posterior dorsal and

anal spines and a second running downwards from the end of the

dorsal fin are the most conspicuous, the third and fourth bordering

a dark spot on the upper part of the base of the caudal; scme-

times a similar stripe on the head, running obliquely from the

temporal region to the base of the pelvic fins.

Hab. Malay Peninsula.

‘Two specimens, types of O. malayanus, 40 mm. in total length,

from Kuala Lumpur (Robinson).

8, CYrENOPS,

Cterops McClelland, Cale. Journ. Nat. Hist. v. 1844, p. 281.

Trichopsis (Kner) Canestr. Verh. Zool.-Bot. Gesellsch. x. 1860,

p- (08.

Rody oblong, compressed. Jaws with fixed conical teeth.

Preorbital and preoperculum serrated. Dorsal with II-VII 6-8

rays, commencing above the anal, which has ITV—VIII 24-28

rays; anal scaly at the base, with simple rays. Pelvics inserted

a little in advance of the pectorals, each of-a spine and five soft

rays, the first produced into a filament. Scales large, regularly

arranged ; lateral line vestigial or absent.

Two species from India, Cochin China, Siam, and the Malay

Archipelago.

1. CrenoPs VITTATUS.

Osphromenus vittatus Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. vil. p. 387

(1831).

1909. ] FISHES OF THE FAMILY ANABANTID&. Cb

Trichopsis striatus Bleek, Verh. Batav. Genootsch. xxiii. 1850,

NOWSs os" ;

Osphromenus striatus Giinth. Cat. Fish. iii. p. 386 (1861).

Ctenops striatus Bleek. Atl. Ichth. pl. ccexevi. (1878), and

Verh. Ak. Amst. xix. 1879, p. 24.

Depth of body 24 to 3 in the length. Snout shorter than eye.

Dorsal II-IV 6-8. Anal VI-VIT 24-28. 28 scales in a longi-

tudinal series. Body with dark longitudinal stripes, on each side

two from the eye to the caudal fin, the upper bearing a humeral

spot; usually two more stripes on each side, one above ending

just behind the dorsal fin, the other from the chin through the

base of the pectoral to the end of the anal.

fab. Cochin China, Siam, Java, Sumatra, and Borneo. Seven

specimens, measuring up to 60 mm. in total length, from Cochin

China (Paris Mus.), Siam (Mowwhot), and Java.

2. CTENOPS NOBILIS.

Ctenops nobilis McClell. Calc. Journ. Nat. Hist. v. 1844, p. 281,

Ole sore thee, Jl

Osphromenus nobilis Day, Fish. Ind. p. 372, pl. lxxviii. fig. 5

(1878).

Depth of body 23 to 3 in the length. Snout longer than eye.

Dorsal V—VII 7-8. Anal IV—V 24-28. 29 to 33 scales in a

longitudinal series. Brownish, with darker stripes along the

series of scales and with scattered blackish spots; a silvery white

stripe, more or less interrupted, from eye to base of caudal ;

below it two similar stripes or series of oblong spots; fins with

small dark spots; an ocellus on the upper part of the base of the

caudal.

Hab. North-eastern Bengal and Assam.

Hight specimens, measuring up to 75 mm. in total length,

from N.E. Bengal (/erdon).

9. Berta.

Betta Bleek. Verh. Batav. Genootsch. xxiii. 1850, no. 8, p. 12,

and Verh. Ak. Amst. xix. 1879, p. 26; Ginth. Cat. Fish. 111.

p. 388 (1861).

Parophiocephatus Popta, Notes Leyden Mus. xxv. 1905, p. 184,

and xxvii. 1906, p. 9.

Bodv moderately elongate, more or less compressed. Jaws

with fixed conical teeth; palate toothless. Preorbital and

opercular bones entire. Dorsal without or with a single spine

and with 7 to 11 soft rays; origin above the anal; anal without

or with 1 to 4 spines and with 20 to 37 soft rays; pelvics inserted

below or a little in advance of the pectorals, of a spine and 5 soft

rays, the outermost of which is more or less produced. Scales

large, regularly arranged ; lateral line vestigial or absent.

Fourteen species from Siam, the Malay Peninsula and

Archipelago.

778 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON ASIATIC

[ Nov. 9,

Micracanthus Sauvage, from the Ogowe, with III 7 dorsal and

IV 23 anal rays, appears to be closely allied to Ctenops and Betta,

but differs in having only 4 soft rays in the pelvic fin.

‘ynopsis of the Species.

J. All the rays of the dorsal and anal fins articulated

Ngee Far

. Anal with 26 to 30 rays.

Maxillary extending beyond middle of eye ......................... 1. maecrostoma.

‘ak not extending beyond anterior edge of eye” Suen aan 2. unimaculata.

. Anal with 34 to 37 rays sie 36 NG FUSER BERUA uk bh LUC EIs

ne fe fin with one to four spines Wpereay |

A. All the rays of the dorsal fin flexible. articulated ;

maxillary extending to below nostrils or anterior

edge of eye.

Th, Amel Watn LP FAIS — csocno osc codnonececossoseraencacases 2 CIRORREAS-

2. Anal with II 25-29 rays.

Length of head 3 to 3% (adult) in the length of the fish ...... 5. pugnar.

Ler ath of head 33 (young) to 33 (ede) in the length of the

fish . Joscooessencabuoageoscscasquseon 0s GHAINAEDOLIER

3, Loe well Ir 21-24 rays ts aL RR ETc eee dian ULSCOs

3. First dorsal ray a more or Tete piheent spine.

1. Maxillary extending to below anterior part of

eye .. 8. bleekeri.

2. Maxillary extending to below ‘posterior nostril or

anterior edge of eye.

Anal with I 20 rays; 26 scales in a longitudinal series ;

diameter of eye 4 in the length of head (in a specimen of

42 mm.) ... gonbaH vod BaGnadapp anoAdéosn Dee AgE bos TeesEamuaoaG, ib NERY MEAN EO CI Gee

Anal with I 23° rays ; 28 scales in a longitudinal series ;

diameter of eye 3 in the ee of head cas a specimen of

50mm.) . : 10. macrophthalma.

Anal with II 20-22, rays ; 28 or 29 ‘scales _ in a “longitudinal

series ; ; diameter of eye 35 to 35 in the length of ahead AGn

specimens of 50 to 60 mm.).. ie . 11. teniata.

Anal with III 21 rays; 30 scales in a 1 longitudinal SerIes 5

diameter of eye 33 in the length of head le a specimen

of 47 mm.) .. eecdeeie ., 12. rubra.

3. iMaxillane ertonding te lng verieall in om sober meen

the nostrils.

Anal with TIAIV 22-24 rays) 2.0.0.0. .eecee cesses censor ereeeeseeees 13, splendens.

Anal with II 30 rays . 14. fasciata.

1. BETTA MACROSTOMA, sp. n.

(Plate LX XVIII.

Depth of body 4 in the length, length of head 3.

fig. 3.)

Snout

shghtly longer than eye, the diameter of which is 43 in the

length of Tisai interorbital width 24 in the length of head.

Maxillary extending a little beyond the middle of eye. Dorsal 11.

ATA YO, BY ities in a longitudinal series. Two blackish

longitudinal bands from eye to caudal fin; dorsal with series of

dark spots and with a large black ocellus near’ ‘the base posteriorly ;

caudal with two blackish cross-bars; other fins dusky.

Hab. Sarawak.

A single specimen,

Dr. C. Hose.

80 mm. in total length, collected by

1909. | FISHES OF THE FAMILY ANABANTID&. 779

2. BETTA UNIMACULATA.

Parophiocephalus unimaculatus Popta, Notes Leyden Mus. xxv.

1905, p. 184, and xxvii. 1906, p. 10, pl.i. fig. 1.

Depth of body 4 in the length, length of head 35. Snout as

long as eye, the diameter of which is 44 in the length of head ;

interorbital width 23 in the length of head. Maxillary extending

to below posterior nostril or anterior edge of eye. Dorsal 9.

Anal 30. 33 scales in a longitudinal series. Olivaceous; a

blackish spot at the base of the caudal fin; fins dusky, the dorsal

and caudal with series of small blackish spots.

Hab. Borneo.

A single specimen, 70 mm. in total length, from the River

Bongon, N. Borneo, collected by Mr. A. Everett.

Popta’s description is based on numerous specimens from the

Howong and Kajan Rivers, 38 to 82 mm. in total length. She

gives the following numbers :—Dorsal 7-8. Anal 27-30. 32

scales in a longitudinal series.

3. BETTA BELLICA.

Betta bellica Sauvage, Bull. Soc. Zool. France, ix. 1884, p. 217,

fi “

Depth of body 4 in the length, length of head about 43.

Dorsal 10. Anal 37 (34 according to the figure). 35 scales in

a longitudinal series. Anterior half of each scale emerald-green,

the rest bronze; fins dusky.

Hab. Perak.

Total length, 90 mm.

4, BETTA AKARENSIS, sp.n. (Plate LX XVII. fig. 3.)

Depth of body 34 in the length, length of head 38. Snout

shorter than eye, the diameter of which is 34 in the length of

head and nearly equal to the interorbital width. Maxillary

extending to below the posterior nostril. Dorsal 8. Anal I 27.

31 scales in a longitudinal series. Brownish, with darker stripes

along the series of scales; a dark longitudinal band on the head,

passing through the eye; fins dusky.

Hab. River Akar, Sarawak.

A single specimen, 52 mm. in total length, collected by

DrCstlose:

5. BETTA PUGNAX.

Macropodus pugnax Cantor, Cat. Malay Fish. p. 84, pl. 1.

figs. 1-8 (1850).

Betta pugnax Ginth. Cat. Fish. ii. p. 389 (1861).

Depth of body 3} in the length, length of head 3 to 33.

Snout shorter than eye, the diameter of which is 32 in the length

of head; interorbital width 21 in the length of head. Maxillary

extending to below posterior nostril or anterior edge of eye.

780 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON ASIATIC [Nov.9,

Dorsal 9-10; origin equidistant from head and base of caudal.

Anal IT 26. 30 to 32 scales in a longitudinal series. Olivaceous,

with darker cross-bands; each scale on the side with a silvery

dot; a blackish longitudinal stripe on the head, passing through

the eye; fins, except the pectoral, pale reddish ; margin of dorsal

and anal, and pelvic filament greenish or golden.

Hab. Pinang.

Three specimens, including two skins, types of the species,

75 to 90 mm. in total length, from Dr. Cantor’s collection.

6. Berra ANABATOIDES. (Plate LX XVIII. fig. 4.)

Betta anabatoides Bleek. Nat. Tijdschr. Ned. Ind. i. 1850,

p. 269.

Depth of body 3 to 3% in the length, length of head 33 to 32.

Snout as long as or shorter than eye, the diameter of which is

37 to 43 in the length of head; interorbital width 21 to 24 in

the length of head. Maxillary extending to below posterior

nostril or anterior edge of eye. Dorsal 8-10; origin a little

nearer to caudal fin than to head (in the adult). Anal Il 25-29.

31 to 33 seales in a longitudinal series. Brownish; usually a

dark stripe on the head passing through the eye, sometimes

continued on the body and with another above it; fins dusky,

the dorsal and caudal usually with series of dark spots.

Hab. Borneo.

Twenty specimens from Sarawak (Cutter, Doria, Hose, Everett),

55 to 120 mm. in total length, seem to belong to the species

described by Bleeker from Bandjermassing, S.E. Borneo.

7. Berra Fusca, sp. n. (Plate LX XVIII. fig. 2.)

Depth of body 33 to 33 in the length, length of head 34.

Snout shorter than eye, the diameter of which is 3} to 34 in

the length of head ; interorbital width 2+ to 24 in the length of

head. Maxillary nearly or quite extending to below the posterior

nostril. Dorsal 9. Anal I] 21-24. 31 or 32 scales in a longi-

tudinal series. A dark longitudinal band through the eye;

scales with dark edges; fins dusky.

Hab. Sumatra.

Two specimens, 82 mm. in total length, collected by Mr. W.

Morton.

8. BETTA BLEEKERI, sp. n.

Betta picta (non Val.) Bleek. Atlas Ichth. ix. pl. ccexev. fig. 3

(1877), and Verh. Ak. Amst. xix. 1879, p. 26.

Maxillary extending well beyond the vertical from anterior

edge of eye. DorsalI 9. Anal II 27. 34 scales ina longitudinal

series. Olivaceous; dorsal with longitudinal stripes.

Bleeker’s description is evidently chiefly based on specimens of

the species figured in the Atlas. .

1909. ] FISHES OF THE FAMILY ANABANTID HZ. 781

9. BErra TRIFASCIATA.

? Panchax pictum Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. xviii. p. 385

(1846).

Betta trifasciata Bleek. Verhandl. Batav. Genootsch. xxii.

1850, no. 8, p. 12; Ginth. Cat. Fish. iii. p. 388 (1861).

Snout short; mouth small; diameter of eye 4 in head. Dorsal

17. Anal TI 20. 26 scales ina longitudinal series. Three black

stripes from operculum to caudal fin.

Hab. Ambarawa, Central Java, 1500 ft.

Total length, 42 mm.

10, BEYTA MACROPHTHALMA, sp.n. (Plate LX XVII. fig. 2.)

Depth of body 33 in the length, length of head 3. Snout

shorter than eye, the diameter of which is 3 in the length of

head and nearly equal to the interorbital width. Maxillary

extending to below posterior nostril. Dorsal I 8. Anal I 23.

28 scales in a longitudinal series. Traces of dark longitudinal

stripes on the body.

Hab. Singapore.

A single specimen, 50 mm, in total length, from Prof. Peters’s

collection.

11. Berra Tanita, sp.n. (Plate LX XVIII. fig. 1.)

Depth of body 34 to 3% in the length, length of head 3. Snout

shorter than eye, the diameter of which is 31 1 to 32 in the length

of head; imterorbital width 3 to 3; in the length of head.

Maxillary extending to below posterior nostril. “Dorsal I 8.

Anal IT 20-22. 28 or 29 scales in a longitudinal series. Brownish;

2 or 3 blackish longitudinal bands on the side; fins dusky.

Hab. River Senah, Sarawak.

Four specimens, 50 to 60 mm. in total length, collected by

Mr. A. Everett.

12. Berra RuBRA. (Plate LXXVII. fig. 1.)

Betta rubra Perugia, Ann. Mus. Genova (2) xiii. 1893, p. 242.

Depth of body 32 in the length, length of head 3}. Snout

shorter than eye, the diameter of which is 33 in the length of

head; interorbital width 3+ in the length of head. Maxillary

extending to below the posterior nostril. Dorsal I 7. Anal

III 21. 30 scales in a longitudinal series. Upper half of the

body dark brownish ; five or six dark vertical bars of the same

colour descending on to the pale ground colour of the lower part

of the side ; vertical and pelvic fins reddish.

Hab. Lake Toba, Sumatra.

A single specimen, one of the types of the species, 47 mm. in

total length.

782 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON ASIATIC [Nov. 9,

13. BETTA SPLENDENS, sp. n.

Betta pugnax, var., Cantor, Cat. Malay Fish. p. 86, pl. ii. fig. 4

1850).

ae pugnax Waite, Rec. Austral. Mus. v. 1904, p. 293,

pl. xxxvili.

Depth of body 22 to 32 in the length, length of head 32 to 33.

Snout as long as or shorter than eye, the diameter of which is 34

to 4 in the length of head; interorbital width 22 to 3 in the length

of head. Maxillary extending to the vertical from between the

nostrils. Dorsal I 8-9. Anal II-IV 21-24. 30 to 32 scales in

a longitudinal series. Dark greenish olive above, red below ; all

the scales edged with black; a dark oblique stripe from eye to

suboperculum; sometimes two dark longitudinal bands, with a

pale band between them, from eye to caudal fin; gill-membranes

blackish ; dorsal rays black, membrane greenish with black undu-

lating stripes ; caudal rays red, membrane greenish; pelvics and

anal red, with dark edges ; pectoral pale.

Hab. Siam; Malay Peninsula.

Nine specimens, 35 to 55 mm. in total length, from Bangkok,

the Menam River, and Pinang, collected by Captain 8. 8.

Flower.

14. Berra FasciaTA, sp.n. (Plate LX XVII. fig. 4.)

Depth of body 33 to 4 in the length, length of head 32 to 42.

Snout shorter than eye, the diameter of which is 3 to 34 in the

length of head ; interorbital width 22 to 3 in the length of head.

Maxillary extending to the vertical from between the nostrils.

Dorsal I 9-10. Anal II 30. 34 to 36 scales in a longitudinal

series. Brownish, with several somewhat oblique darker cross-

bars; fins dusky, the dorsal with series of small dark spots, the

pelvics and anal blackish.

Hab. Deli, Sumatra.

Two specimens, 65 and 90 mm. in total length, collected by

Mr. Iversen.

10. TrRicHOPODUS.

Trichopodus Lacep. Hist. Nat. Poiss. iii. p. 129 (1802);

Canestrini, Verh. Zool.-Bot. Gesellsch. x. 1860, p. 708; Bleek.

Verh. Ak. Amst. xix. 1879, p. 21.

Trichopus Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. vii. p. 388 (1831).

Osphromenus (part.) Giinth. Cat. Fish. ii. p. 382 (1861).

Body deep or moderately elongate, compressed. Jaws with

fixed conical teeth ; palate toothless. Preeorbital, pree-, sub- and

inter-operculum serrated. Dorsal with IIJ-VIII 8-11 rays;

origin above the anal, which has IX-XIV 25-39 rays; anal

covered with scales except near the edge and with most of the

rays simple ; pelvics inserted a little in advance of the pectorals,

with a vestigial spine adnate to the long simple ray, which has

1909. } FISHES OF THE FAMILY ANABANTID. 783

2 or 3 small rays in its axil. Scales of moderate size, irregularly

arranged ; lateral line complete, but not continuous.

Four species from Cochin China, Siam, the Malay Peninsula

and Archipelago.

Synopsis of the Species.

Dorsal with V-VII 8-10 rays, anal with XII-XIV 25-30;

30 to 36 scales in the lateral line and 44 to 50 in a longi-

tudinal series above the lateral line .. 1. leeri.

Dorsal with VI-VIII 8-9 rays, anal with xe XU 33- 37; "30 to

40 scales in the lateral line and 40 to 52 ina longitudinal

series above the lateral line .. 2. trichopterus.

Dorsal with VII 10-11 rays, anal with Ise XI 36-— 38; “42° to

47 scales in the lateral line and 55 to 63 in a longitudinal

series above the lateral line .. 3. pectoralis.

Dorsal with III-IV 8-10 rays, anal with as exon 34-39; 35 to

42 scales in the Jateral line and 48 to 68 in a longitudinal

series above the lateral lime ...,............2.........cccusssee-s 4. microlepis.

1. TricHoropus LEERI. (Plate LX XIX. fig.-2.)

Trichopus trichopterus (part.) Cantor, Cat. Malay. Fish. p. 89

1850).

Trichopus leerii Bleek. Nat. Tijdschr. Ned. Ind. iii. 1852,

[oe OU.

Ophromenus trichopterus var. leerit Giinth. Cat. Fish. iii.

p. 384 (1861).

Trichopodus trichopterus (part.) Bleek. Verh. Akad. Amst. xix.

1879, p. 21.

Depth of body 27 to 22 in the length. Diameter of eye 12 in

the length of postorbital part of head (in adult specimens of

100 to 110mm.). Dorsal V-VII 8-10. Anal XII-XIV 25-30.

Pectoral as long as the head. 30 to 36 scales in the lateral line,

44 to 50 in a longitudinal series above the lateral line. Body and

vertical fins with pale greenish spots enclosed in a reddish-brown

network ; a dark longitudinal stripe from the snout through the

eye, ending in a spot at the base of the caudal fin.

Hab. Malay Peninsula ; Sumatra.

Hight specimens, measuring up to 110 mm. in total length,

from Pinang (Cantor) and Sumatra (Moesch, Merrem).

2. TRICHOPODUS TRICHOPTERUS.

Labrus trichopterus Pall. Spicil. viii. p. 45 (1777); Gmelin,

Linn. Syst. Nat. p. 1286 (1789); Bloch, Ausl. Fische, pl. cexey.

fig. 2 (1792).

Trichopodus trichopterus Lacep. Hist. Nat. Poiss. iii, p. 129

(1802); Bleek. Atlas Ichth. ix. pl. ecexev. fig. 4 (1878).

Trichopus trichopterus Cuy. & Val. Hist. Nae Poiss. vii. p. 388,

pl. excix. (1831).

Trichopus trichopterus (part.) Cantor, Cat. Malay Fish. p. 89

(1850).

784 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON ASIATIC [ Nov. 9,

Osphromenus trichopterus vars. koelreuteri and cantoris Giinth.

Cat. Fish. ui. p. 384 (1861).

Osphromenus siamensis Ginth. t. c. p. 385.

Trichopodus trichopterus (part.) Bleek. Verh. Akad. Amst. xix.

INSTA, fon Palle

Depth of body 2 to 22 in the length. Diameter of eye 2 in the

length of the postorbital part of head (in adult specimens of

100 to 120 mm.). Dorsal VI-VIII 8-9. Anal X—XIT 33-37.

Pectoral as long as the head. 30 to 40 scales in the lateral line

and 40 to 52 in a longitudinal series above the lateral line. Head

and body with or without somewhat oblique dark brown cross-

bands, which may be broken up into spots; a round black spot

on the middle of the side and another at the base of the caudal

fin; sometimes a blackish lateral band through the spots, from eye

to eaudal fin; dorsal, caudal, and posterior part of anal with

alternate series of pale and dark spots, the latter sometimes

forming reticulations.

Hab. Cochin China; Siam; Malay Peninsula and Archipelago.

Here described from numerous specimens, measuring up to

i120 mm. in total length, from Cochin China (Paris Jfus.), Siam

(Mouhot, Day, Flower, Siamese Mus.), Pinang (Cantor), Sumatra

(Moesch) and Java.

3. TRICHOPODUS PECTORALIS, sp. n. (Plate LX XIX. fig. 1.)

Depth of body 24 to 3 in the length. Diameter of eye a little

less than 4 the length of the postor Bital part of the head. Dorsal

VII 10-11. Anal IX—-XI 36-38. Pectoral longer tnan the

head. 42 to 47 scales in the lateral line and 55 to 63 in a longi-

tudinal series above the lateral line. Head and body with oblique

dark cross-bands; an interrupted lateral band from eye to caudal

fin, sometimes present on the head only ; fins without spots, or a

few pale spots on the basal part of the caudal.

Hab. Siam; Malay Peninsula.

Six specimens, 140 to 160 mm. in total length, from Siam

(Jamrach, Siamese Mus.) and Singapore (Vipan).

4, TRICHOPODUS MICROLEPIS.

Osphromenus microlepis Giinth. Cat. Fish. ii. p. 385 (1861).

Trichopus parvipinnis Sauv. Nouv. Arch. Mus. (2) iv. 1881,

p. 165, pl. vi. fig. 3.

Depth of body 2 in the length. Diameter of eye 2 in the

length of postorbital part of head (in adult specimens of 150 mm.).

Dorsal IJI-ITV 8-10. Anal X—XIT 34-39. Pectoral longer than

the head. 35 to 42 scales in the lateral line and 58 to 65 m a

longitudinal series above the lateral line. Silvery ; back greenish ;

dorsal and caudal fins with little blackish spots.

Hab. Siam and Cambojia.

Three specimens, 90 to 150 mm. in total length, including the

1909.] FISHES OF THE FAMILY ANABANTID&. 785

types of the species and of 7. parvipinnis, from Bangkok

(Paris Mus.), the Menam River (Siamese Mus.), and Cambojia

(Mouhot).

11. TricHOGASTER.

Trichogaster Schneid. Bloch’s Syst. Ichth. p. 164 (1801) ; Giinth.

Cat. Fish. 111. p. 387 (1861).

Colisa Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. vii. p. 359 (1831) ; Canestr.

Verh. Zool.-Bot. Gesellsch. x. 1860, p. 705.

Body oblong, compressed. Jaws with fixed conical teeth ;

palate toothless. Preeorbital and preeoperculum serrated. Dorsal

with XV—XIX 6-14 rays; origin above or a little in advance of

that of the anal, which has XTV—XXIT 11-20 rays; anal scaly

at the base and with the soft rays branched. Pelvics inserted in

advance of the pectoral, reduced to a single filamentous ray.

Scales large, regularly arranged. Lateral line sometimes absent

or vestigial, usually present and comprising an upper anterior

and a lower posterior portion, which may be connected by | to 4

pierced scales of the intermediate series.

Five species from India and Burmah.

Synopsis of the Species.

J. Anal fin more or less scaly, the scales not covering the fin

to the tips of the spines.

Dorsal XV-XVII 9-14. Anal XV-XVIII 14-19. 29 to 31

scales in a longitudinal series ... 1. fasciatus.

Dorsal XVII-XVIII 7-9. Anal XVII-XX 11-13. 27 to 29

Scalesmmualonpabiudinalesentes) pases seer eet ee nseeeee ea ecee eee 2. sota.

If. Anal fin densely sealy, the scales covering the fin to the

tips of the posterior spines.

Dorsal XV-X VIII 8-10. Anal XVI-XVIII 17-20. 29 to 31

scales in a longitudinal series .... 3. labiosus.

Dorsal XV-XVII 7-10. Anal XVII-XVIII 13-17. 27 or 28

scales in a longitudinal series . 4. lalius.

Dorsal XVII-XIX 6-7. Anal XXI-XXII 13. 28 or 29 scales

impar lone itudinalltseriest.-scsneees -saeeet ese cee terinee eee neo oe 5. chuna.

1. TRICHOGASTER FASCIATUS.

Trichogaster fasciatus Schneid. Bloch’s Syst. Echth. p. 164,

pl. xxxvi. (1801); Giinth. Cat. Fish. mi. p. 387 (1861); Day,

Fish. India, p. 374, pl. Ixxviii. fig. 6 (1878).

Trichopodus colisa Buch. Ham. Fish. Ganges, pp. 117, 372,

pl. xv. fig. 40 (1822).

Trichopodus bejeus Buch. Ham. t. ec. pp. 118, 372.

Trichopodus cotra Buch. Ham. t. c. pp. 119, 372.

Colisa vulgaris Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. vii. p. 362

(1831).

Colisa bejews Cuv. & Val. t. c. p. 365.

Colisa cotra Cuy. & Val. t. c, p. 366,

786 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON ASIATIC [Nov. 9

Polyacanthus fasciatus Cuv. & Val. t. c. p. 369.

Colisa ponticeriana Cuv. & Val. t. c. p. 370.

29 to 31 scales in a longitudinal series. Dorsal XV—-XVII

9-14. Anal XV-XVIII 14-19, scaly at the base. Greenish,

with orange or bluish bars descending obliquely downwards and

backwards from the back to the anal fin; vertical fins with

alternate dark and pale spots or bars; anal often with a red

margin.

Hab. Northern India, Assam, and Upper Burma.

Numerous specimens, measuring up to 100 mm. in total

length.

2. TricHocaster soTa. (Plate LX XIX. fig. 3.)

Trichopodus sota Buch. Ham. Fish. Ganges, p. 120 (1822).

Colisa sota Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat, Poiss. vil. p. 367 (1831).

27 to 29 scales in a longitudinal series. Dorsal XVII-X VIII

7-9. Anal XVIII-XX 11-13, scaly at the base. Brownish,

sometimes with darker stripes along the series of scales; fins

immaculate.

Hab. Ganges.

Nine specimens, measuring up to 45 mm. in total length, from

Debroo (Day).

3. TRICHOGASTER LABIOSUS.

Trichogaster labiosus Day, Fish. Ind. p. 374, pl. Ixxix. fig. 4

(1878).

29 to 31 scales in a longitudinal series. Dorsal XV-X VIII

8-10. Anal XVI-XVIII 17-20, densely scaly, the scales

covering the fin to the tips of the posterior spines. Greenish,

with some darker somewhat oblique cross-bars on the side; fins

immaculate.

Hab. Burma, Shan States, and Tenasserim.

Several specimens, measuring up to 90 mm. in total length,

from Burma (Day), Sittang River (Oates) and Tenasserim (JVood-

Mason).

The thick papillose lips from which the species takes its name

occur only in the males; in 7’. fascratus also the males may have

the lips more or less swollen and papillose.

4, 'TRICHOGASTER LALIUS.

Trichopodus laliuws Ham. Buch. Fish. Ganges, pp. 120, 372

(1822).

Colisa lalius Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. vil. p. 366 (1831).

? Colisa unicolor Cuv. & Val. t. c. p. 368.

? Trichogaster unicolor Ginth. Cat. Fish. 111. p. 388 (1861).

Trichogaster laliws Day, Fish. Ind. p. 375, pl. Ixxix. fig. 5

(1878).

27 or 28 seales in a longitudinal series. Dorsal XV-X VII

1909.] FISHES OF THE FAMILY ANABANTID&. 187

7-10. Anal XVII-XVIII 13-17, densely scaly, the scales

covering the fin to the tips of the posterior spines. Body scarlet,

crossed by somewhat oblique bands of pale blue; fins with scarlet

spots or bars; anal with a red margin.

Hab. Northern India and Assam.

Several specimens, measuring up to 50 mm. in total length,

from India (Waterhouse), Calcutta (Day), and Cachar (Playfair).

Colisa wnicolor was described from Calcutta as a uniformly

coloured fish with XV 6 dorsal and XIV 12 anal rays. Day

examined the types at Paris, and says they appear to belong to

T. lalius.

5. TRICHOGASTER CHUNA.

Trichopodus chuna Ham. Buch. Fish. Ganges, pp. 121, 372

1822).

ae chuna Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. Poiss. vil. p. 368 (1831).

Trichogaster chuna Day, Fish. Ind. p. 373, pl. Ixxix. fig. 3

(1878).

28 or 29 scales in a longitudinal series. Dorsal X VITI-XIX

6-7. Anal XXI-XXIT 13, densely scaly, the scales covering the

fin to the tips of the posterior spines. Greenish; a blackish

longitudinal band from the eye to the caudal fin,

Hab. N.K. India and Assam.

Two specimens, less than 40 mm. in total length, from Calcutta

(Day) and from Jerdon’s collection.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Prate LXXVIL.

. Betta rubra.

» macrophthalma.

> akarensis.

b gy Sramsedaira

. Polyacanthus signatus.

Fig.

Oo bo et

Prate LXXVIII.

ig. 1. Betta teniata.

2 SUS COs

3. 4, macrostoma.

» anabatoides.

Prate LXXIX.

Fig. 1. Trichopodus pectoralis.

2. es leeri.

3. Trichogaster sota.

Proc. Zoo. Soc.—19(9, No. LIV. 54

788 MR. J. LEWIS BONHOTE ON A SMALL [ Nov. 9,

3. Ona Small Collection of Mammals from Egypt.

By J. Lewis Bonnore, M.A., F.LLS., F.Z.8.

[Received July 15, 1909. |

The following is an account of a small collection of Mammals

brought home from Egypt. It was made up partly of a

few skins and skulls which Capt. 8. S. Flower had brought

together, chiefly those of animals that had died in the Giza

Zoological Gardens or had been killed as vermin, partly of

animals brought in from the district by natives, whom Capt.

Flower had commissioned on my behalf, and lastly of specimens

collected by myself. Unless otherwise mentioned the specimens

came from near Cairo.

The collection contains some 28 species, of which one (Dipodillus

marie) is new to science, in addition to which I have been

enabled to resuscitate the name Procavia burtoni for the Egyptian

Hyrax, which is quite distinct from both the Sudan and Palestine

species. An example of Acomys russatus, a very rare species,

which has hitherto only been found locally in Palestine and Syria,

was procured within a short ride of Cairo. The material has also

enabled the range of other and commoner species to be extended,

e. g. Gerbillus mackilligini, Lepus imnesi.

I must acknowledge my indebtedness to Messrs. Oldfield

Thomas, R. C. Wroughton, and K. Andersen, who have given me

much help in the working out of the collection, which is now

in the British Museum, and lastly to Capt. Flower, who is doing

so much for the Zoology of Egypt and without whose kind co-

operation this collection would never have been brought together.

Rovuserrus aeyprracus (BH. Geoffr.).

Pteropus cegyptiacus BK. Geoffr. St. Hil. Ann. du Mus. xv.

p. 96 (1810).

Rousettus egyptiacus de Wint. in Anders. Zool. Egypt, Mamn.

p. 84 (1902).

I found this Fruit-Bat extremely abundant in the Zoological

Gardens. ‘They have never been found roosting there in the

daytime, but arrive as soon as it is dark and commence feeding

on the fig-trees. Later in the year, as other fruits ripen they

change their diet. Although most of my specimens were obtained

in February and March, the reputed breeding season, none of the

females were gravid. Several young about three-quarter grown

were shot. The White Ow! (Stria flammea) occasionally preys

largely on these bats.

RHINOLOPHUS ACROTIS BRACHYGNATHUS K. Anders.

Rhinolophus acrotis brachygnathus Anders. Ann. Mag, N. H.

ser. 7, vol. xv. p. 73 (1905).

One male from the Giza Gardens.

1909. | COLLECTION OF MAMMALS FROM EGYPT. 789

NYcTERIS THEBAICA HK. Geoffr.

Nyeteris thebaica BK. Geoftr. St. Hil. Ann. du Mus. xx. p. 20,

pl. i. (1813); de Wint. in Anders. Zool. Egypt, Mamm. p. 107

(1902).

A single specimen of this species was obtained in the Fayum.

PIPISTRELLUS KUHLII (Natt.).

Vespertilio kuhlii Natt., in Kuhl, Deutsch. Flederm., Wetterau

Ann. iv. p. 55 (1817).

Pipistrellus kuhli Natt.,de Wint. in Anders. Zool. Egypt, Mamm.

p. 124 (1902).

A common species near Giza, also obtained in the Fayum.

PIPISTRELLUS RUEPPELLII (Fisch.).

Vespertilio riippellit Fischer, Syn. Mamm. p. 109 (1829).

Pipistrellus rueppelli Fisch., de Wint. in Anders. Zool. Egypt,

Mamm. p. 127 (1902).

A single example obtained in the Fayum.

RHINOPOMA MICROPHYLLUM (Briinn.).

Vespertilio microphyllum Briimnich, Dyrenes Hist. og Dyre-

Sam. Universit. Natur-Theater, i. p. 50, pl. vi. figs. 1-4 (1782).

Rhinopoma microphyllum (Briinn.), de Wint. in Anders. Zool.

Egypt, Mamm. p. 143 (1902).

Of the two specimens of Rhinopoma from Aburoash, one

proved to belong to this species. Except for skull characters and

length of forearm this and the following species seem to be

identical, and to live side by side in the same caves.

RurNopoma cystors ‘Thos.

Rhinopoma cystops Thos. Ann. Mag. N. H. ser. 7, vol. xi.

p- 497 (1903).

In visiting a cave at Aburoash in which Capt. Flower had told

me that bats of this genus were abundant, I was surprised at

seeing only about half-a-dozen specimens, of which I secured two

examples. Possibly these bats were hibernating in the cracks

and fissures, as I was unable to procure some owing to their

running into clefts. These bats are able to crawl about easily

and with considerable alertness (for a bat) on the sides and roof

of the cave. In all the examples procured there was no sign of

any accumulation of fat on the tail and thighs. Thinking that

the scarcity of these bats was due to hibernation, I again visited

the cave about a month later on the 8rd of April, and then only

saw three individuals, but possibly I was still too early.

NyctTrvomus THNIOTIS (Rafinesque).

Cephalotes teniotis Rafinesque, Précis decouv. somiol. p. 12

(1814)=W. cestontt (Savi).

One example from Aburoash.

54*

790 MR. J. LEWIS BONHOTE ON A SMALL [Nov. 9,

CrocipurA (Crocidura) onrvieri (Less.).

Sorex oliviert Lesson, Man. Mamm. p. 121 (1827).

Crocidura oliviert (Less.), de Wint. in Anders. Zool. Egypt,

Mamm. p. 166 (1902).

1 brought back two specimens from Giza, colleeted by Mr. M.

J. Nicoll. The male is slightly greyer in colour than the female.

The dimensions (in the flesh) were as follows :—

3. 22. 9.08. Head and body 107 mm., tail 69, hindft. 21, ear 10.

@. 12.12.06. “3 110 mm., tail 65, hindft. 16, ear 4.

CrocipurA (Crocidura) RELIGIOSA Is. Geoftr.

Sorex religiosa Is. Geoftr. Mem. Mus. xv. p. 128, pl. iv. fig. 1

(1827).

Crocidura religiosus (1s. Geoffr.), de Wint.in Anders. Zool. Egypt,

Mamm. p. 168 (1902).

Through the kindness of Capt. Flower I was able to bring back

a spirit specimen of this rare and little known species, which had

been taken alive at Giza.

FELIS CHAUS NILOTICA de Wint.

felis chaus nilotica de Wint. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 7,

vol. 11. p. 292 (1898) ; id. in Anders. Zool. Egypt, Mamm. p. 176

(1902).

The Wild Cat is by no means uncommon at Giza and in the

course of the year does considerable damage to the animals and

birds in the Gardens. During my stay one killed a nearly full-

grown sheep, and after dragging it to the edge of the enclosure,

devoured a whole fore-quarter. Capt. Flower gave me the

following notes as to their weight. The heaviest known was

procured at Benha and weighed 21 pounds. On this estate, where

many are destroyed every year, the average weight is said to be

16 pounds. An oid male caught in the Gardens during my stay

weighed 17-6 pounds. The measurements of this specimen were :—

Head and body 725 mm., tail 280, hind-foot 178, ear 70.

The following are skull measurements of this example and of

two others.

Breadth across

Greatest | palate outside | Pm.2. Pm. 3.

length. pm. 3.

: mm. mm. mm. | mm.

@aCappunedswal dat Gian! 2109harysee ene ene ree 134 54 ~ IO |) LES<®

b. At least 6 years old, died in capt., 18.5.08. g¢.| 140 59 9 =

Oe SMO HUG ene, Cava, HOG BY ccrcoccoococssoccane-|| 50 9 | 11x75

1909.] COLLECTION OF MAMMALS FROM EGYPT. 791

Fenis typica Meyer.

I never met with this species, but a variety of the domestic cat

frequently seen is, at a rough glance, almost exactly like this

species.

VULPES VULPES £GYPTIACA (Sonn.).

Cams egyptiacus Sonnini, Nouv. Dict. vi. p. 524 (1816).

Vulpes vulpes cegyptiacus de Wint. in Anders. Zool. Egypt,

Mamm. p. 227 (1902).

Foxes were fairly plentiful and occasionally seen by day in the

desert bordering the cultivation near Aburoash.

PUTORIUS AFRICANUS (Desm.).

Mustela africana Desm. Nouv. Dict. Hist. Nat. xix. p. 376

1818).

Putorius africanus (Desm.), de Wint. in Anders. Zool. Egypt,

Mamm. p. 235 (1902).

The Stvat is very common in Cairo and the neighbouring

villages, where it inhabits houses, preying presumably on the rats.

The amount of white on the underparts shows much variation,

but the chin and throat are nearly always white although broken

up with patches of brown. Along the rest of the body there is

frequently only a narrow median line of white which broadens

out on the inner sides of the thighs.

GERBILLUS PYRAMIDUM Geoftr.

Gerbillus pyramidum Is. Geoffr. Dict. Class. N. H. vii. p. 321

(1825); de Wint. in Anders. Zool. Egypt, Mamm. p. 255 (1902).

Two specimens of this species were brought in by local

Bedouins. They show considerable variation in colour though

the measurements are alike. One is of a pale buff with the dark

tips to the hairs largely predominating, the other is much more

rufous and the dark tips are minute and hardly affect the general

colour. The British Museum collection contains several examples

intermediate between these two.

GERBILLUS TARABULI Thos.

Gerbillus pyramidum tarabuli Thos. P. Z. 8. 1902, p. 5.

Gerbillus tarabuli Thos., Schwann, Nov. Zool. xii. p. 3 (1905).

Mr. Thomas in his original description has regarded this species

as a form of G. pyramidum, but as we find it now in company

with this species, I am inclined to regard it as a form of

G. pygargus, to which also it approximates in general appearance.

Our knowlege of these forms is, however, still so limited that, for

the present, it seems best to adhere to binomial classification.

I brought back four skins as well as several living examples, and

for the present have followed Mr. Schwann in assigning them to

792 MR. J. LEWIS BONHOTE ON A SMALL [ Nov. 9,

the above species. My specimens agree very well with those

brought back by Mr. Rothschild from the Wadi Natron, but seem

to differ slightly from the typical series from Tripoli. In the

subsequent working out of this race note should be taken of

G. burtow (F. Cuv. Trans. Zool. Soc. ii. p. 145, 1838), which

Lataste has placed as a synonym of G. pygargus. The material

at my disposal is at present too scanty to allow of a decided

opinion, but I am inclined to the belief that pygargus, burtoni,

and tarabuli will prove to be forms of one and the same species.

GERBILLUS PYGARGUS F. Cuv.

Gerbillus pygargus F. Cuv. Trans. Zool. Soc. 1. p. 142, pl. 25.

figs. 10-14 (1838); de Wint. in Anders., Zool. Egypt, Mamm.

p. 256 (1902).

One specimen brought home from No. 5 Station on the Sudan

Railway by Capt. Flower.

GERBILLUS GERBILLUS (Oliv.).

Dipus gerbillus Olivier, Bull. des Sc. Phil. Paris, 11. p. 121

(1801).

Gerbillus gerbillus (Oliv.), de Wint. in Anders. Zool. Egypt,

Mamm., p. 252 (1902).

This pretty little Gerbille, which may at once be distinguished

by its bright reddish colour, seems to be very common near Cairo.

I have a specimen collected by Capt. Flower in the Sudan which

does not differ much from typical Cairo examples.

DIPODILLUS WATERSI de Wint.

Dipodillus watersi de Wint. Nov. Zool. viii. 4, p. 399, pl. xx.

(1901); id. in Anders, Zool. Egypt, Mamm. p. 263 (1902).

Two examples of this species were brought back by Capt.

Flower from Atbara, Sudan.

DIPoODILLUS MACKILLIGINI Thos.

Dipodillus mackilligint Thos. Ann. Mag. N. H. ser. 7, vol. xiv.

p. 158 (1904).

A single specimen of a Gerbille closely resembling this species

was brought in from near Cairo. The type locality is on the

Sudan frontier many miles to the south.

DIPODILLUS MARL&, sp. Nn.

While working a tract of country for further specimens of

Acomys russatus, we caught two specimens of a small species of

Dipodillus which is apparently undescribed. I have pleasure in

naming this species after my wife, who has accompanied me on

all my excursions and to whose keen eyesight I owe many of my

captures.

Mostly nearly allied to D. henleyi but rather larger and much

greyer in general tone of coloration.

1909. ] COLLECTION OF MAMMALS FROM EGYPT. 793

Colour above yellowish buff, the hairs being slate-coloured at

their bases and with blackish tips. On the flanks the hairs are

white to their bases. The underparts, feet, sides of the face, a spot

above and behind each eye and behind each ear white.

The skull differs from that of henleyi in the larger size of the

bullz and teeth, though the skull itself is but very little larger.

The bulle in size approximate to those of D. amenus, a much

larger species.

Measurements of type (in flesh):—Head and body 60 mm. ;

tail 87; hind-foot 18; ear 8.

Skull. Greatest length 21:5 mm.; basal length 19; greatest

breadth 12; length of palate from hensehon 2; diastema 5;

greatest length of bulle 7; length of molar series 2-7.

Type. Coll. J. L. B. No. 288. Ad. Mokattam Hills near

Cairo, 25th March, 1909.

One of the two specimens obtained was kept alive to ensure it

being full grown, but it unfortunately escaped.

MERIONES CRASSUS Sundevall.

Meriones crassus Sundev. K. Vet.-Ak. Handl. p. 233, pl. 11.

fig. 4 (cranium) (1843).

Meriones crassus sellysti Pomel, H. Schwann, Nov. Zool. xii.

p- 3 (1905).

Four skins of a Jeriones were brought back, two from Atbara,

Sudan, where they were procured by Capt. Flower, and kept

alive in the Giza Gardens, and two that were brought in alive by

natives. It is impossible on this material, even combined with

that at the British Museum, to work out this very difficult group.

As they have large bulle I have provisionally placed them under

Sundevall’s name, as the type of crassws came from Sinai. Those

from the Sudan appear to be rather larger and greyer in colour,

and have in life a rather more pointed snout.

PSAMMOMYS OBESUS Cretzschmn.

Psammomys obesus Cretzschm., Riipp. Atlas, p. 58, pl. 22

(1828); de Wint. in Anders. Zool. Egypt, Mamm. p. 270 (1902).

A single example of this form was given me by Dr. Todd, of

the Public Health Department. It belongs to the typical form,

and came from Abu Homos in the Delta near Alexandria.

Mus rattrus Linn.

Mus rattus Linn. Syst. Nat. x. p. 61 (1758); de Wint. in Anders.

Zool. Egypt, Mamm. p. 274 (1902).

Mus alexandrinus Desm. Nouv. Dict. Hist. Nat. xxix. p. 47

(1819).

Mus tectorum Savi, Nov. Giorn. Pisa, Feb. 1825.

A very abundant species throughout the country.

794 MR. J. LEWIS BONHOTE ON A SMALL [ Nov. 9,

Two forms of this species occur :-—

a. Mus rattus tectorum,

in which the fur of the underparts is white to its base.

Average hind-foot measurement 35 mm.

b. Mus rattus alexcandrinus,

in which the fur of the underparts is wholly or partially

slate-coloured. Average hind-foot measurement 33 mm.

I made a considerable study of the variations of this species,

the results of which I am now working out and hope to publish

In a separate paper.

Mus norvecicus Erxl.

Mus norvegicus Erx]. Syst. Reg. Anim. p.381 (1777); de Wint.

in Anders. Zool. Egypt, Mamin. p. 276 (1902).

This rat is now becoming very common in some districts though

at present its distribution seems rather erratic. It is said not to

occur in Cairo itself, though on the other (western) side of the

Nile it is very numerous. Capt. Flower tells me that it has been

found in the Zoological Gardens only within the last eight years,

and in that time it has completely ousted Arvicanthis which used

formerly to abound there, and quite fifty per cent. of the “rats”

caught in the Gardens now belong to this species. I procured

two specimens in the Fayum.

Mus muscuuus Linn.

Mus gentilis Brants, Muizen, p. 126 (1827).

Mus orientalis Cretzschmar, Riipp. Atlas, p. 76, pl. 30 (1828).

Mus musculus Linn. Syst. Nat. x. p. 62 (1758); de Wint.

in Anders. Zool. Egypt, Mamm. p. 277 (1902).

Two forms of this species are apparently found in the Giza

Gardens. One form may, I think, be known as Mus m. gentilis

(Brants), in which the hairs of the under parts are white to their

bases and the whole animal is of a more fulvous tint.

The other is Mus m. orientalis Cretzschm. In this form the

hairs of the under parts have slate-coloured bases. The general

colour is greyer than in Mus m. gentilis, and a clear line of fawn

along each side separates the colour of the upper from that of the

under parts.

ARVICANTHIS NILOTICUS (Desm.).

Arvicola wiloticus Desmarest, Ency. Meéthod., Mamm. Suppl.

p- 281 (1822).

Arvicanthis niloticus (Desm.) de Wint. in Anders. Zool. Egypt,

Mamm. p. 279 (1902).

This species is extremely common throughout the country.

It lives almost entirely in the open fields except during the

1909. | COLLECTION OF MAMMALS FROM EGYPT. 795

inundation, when it is forced to take refuge in the villages, Some

specimens procured on the southern shores of Lake Meeris in the

Fayum were indistinguishable from Cairo examples.

ACOMYS CAHIRINUS (Desm.).

Mus cahirinus Desm. Nouv. Dict. Hist. Nat. xxix. p. 70(1819).

Acomys cahirinus de Wint. in Anders. Zool. Egypt, Mamm.

p. 282 (1902).

This is the common House Mouse of Cairo, far outnumbering

Mus musculus. A large series (86) was examined: they prove

very constant in coloration, and with the exception of the fingers

and toes they are of a uniform slaty blue all over. Slight traces

of white are sometimes visible on the breast and along the

median line. The sexes are alike in size and the average 1s :—

Head and body 101 mm.; tail 105; hind-foot 18; ear 17. The

largest individual (a male) measured :—Head and body 109 mm. ;

tail 119; hind-foot 19; ear 19.

Acomys Russatus Wagn.

Acomys russatus Wagner, Abh. Akad. Munich, ii. p. 195,

pl. 3. fig. 2 (1840); Tristram, Fauna Palestine, p. 11, pl. 3. fig. 1

(1884).

I procured a single example of this species within half an hour's

ride of the Citadel on the Mokattam Hills, and it seems certainly

strange that it should not previously have been recorded from

Egypt.

_ It is an extremely well-marked species, and may easily be

distinguished by the hairiness of the ears on both their inner and

exterior surfaces and by the colour of the under parts being of a

greyish white with no sharp line of demarcation from the colour

of the upper parts. In all other species of Acomys the ears are

naked and the under parts (except in A. cahirinus) are snowy

white divided sharply from the colour of the upper parts.

The colour of the upper parts is a uniform reddish fawn, the

brown tips to each spine being so minute as not in any way to

affect the general colour. The feet are thickly covered with short

spines and the tail is well clothed with stiftish hairs.

The skull differs from that of its allies in having the snout

rather shorter and broader, the bullz considerably larger and thus

tending to constrict the basi-occipital and to make it more concave.

The most noticeable point, however, is the size of the teeth and

the length of the molar series, which latter measures 5 mm. as

against 4 mm. in the other species. A. nesiotis Bate has a molar

series of 4°5 mm. and in this measurement comes nearest to the

present one, but the whole animal is larger, so that the increase in

size of the teeth is merely in proportion to the general increase

in the size of the animal. In other respects the skull of nesiotis

agrees with that of dimidiatus.

For many details of this group I am indebted to Mr. R. C.

796 MR. J. LEWIS BONHOTE ON A SMALL [Nov. 9,

Wroughton, who kindly allowed me to look over MS. notes of

his on the genus.

The measurements of my specimen, an adult female, are :—Head

and body 97 mm.; tail imperf. 60 (certainly shorter than head

and body when complete); hind-foot 18; ear 16-5.

Skull. Greatest length 29 mm.; basal length 24; greatest

breadth 15; length of molar series 5; length of diastema 7 ;

length of palate to henselion 23; length of nasals 11-5,

This is apparently a very scarce and local species. The type

locality is Sinai, and Tristram found it near Massada at the

southern end of the Dead Sea but not elsewhere in Palestine, and

since then it does not seem to have been brought home by any

collector. ‘There is a specimen of Burton’s in the Museum which

has been referred to this species, but it is in such a bad state that

identification is quite impossible.

It is certainly curious that this species, occurring so near Cairo,

should never have been brought in by local Bedouins, but the

fact that a second visit to the locality with two men to dig did not

result in any further examples of this species, but brought to

light two individuals of the new Dipodillus described in this

paper, tends to show that the particular locality is certainly

unworked either by natives or collectors and that such mammals

may escape observation even when searched for *.

J ACULUS JACULUS (L.).

Mus jaculus Linn. Syst. Nat. x. p. 63 (1758).

Jaculus jaculus (Linn.), de Wint.in Anders. Zool. Egypt, Mamm.

p-. 305 (1902).

This species is frequently brought in from the desert near

Cairo. It is smaller and yellower in general coloration than the

next species.

J ACULUS JACULUS GORDONI Thos.

Jaculus gordoni Thos. P. Z. 8. 1903, p. 299.

The southern form of this species seems paler and rather larger

than the typical race from Egypt. A single specimen from

Khartoum, the type locality, was brought back.

LEPUS INNESI de Wint.

Lepus innesi de Winton, Nov. Zool. ix. p. 445 (1902).

A single example of this Desert Hare was shot by Mr. M. J.

Nicoll in the desert near Aburoash. It was originally described

from Gattah in the Fayum, so that this record extends its range to

the north. One of the most distinctive points of this species is

the long white hairs on the flanks and sides of the body.

The measurements of this specimen (a female) were :—Head and

* Since the above was written Mr. Nicoll informs me that he has procured another

example of this species in the Wadi Hof near Helouan.

1909.] COLLECTION OF MAMMALS FROM EGYPT. 797

body 453 mm. ; tail 77; hind-foot 96; ear from notch 102, from

crown 128; breadth of ear 57.

PROCAVIA BURTONI (Gray).

Hyrax burtoni Gray, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, 1. p. 43

1868).

Hyraa ruficeps Thos. P. Z. 8. 1892, p. 63; de Wint. in Anders.

Zool. Egypt, Mamm. p. 324 (1902).

During my stay in Egypt the Zoological Gardens received,

through the kindness of Capt. Burnet Stuart and Mr. Russell,

three specimens of a Hyrax from the Wadi Abu Kalifa, east of

Sohag, Upper Egypt. These animals lived only a day or two, and

on their death were handed over to me by Capt. Flower together

with a skull and flat skin collected near the same locality by

Mr. Russell the previous autumn.

A careful comparison of these examples with the British

Museum collection shows that while they agree with the cotypes

of Gray’s H. burtont, they are easily distinguishable from spe-

cimens occurring in the Sudan and which are undoubtedly

referable to P. rujficeps.

P. burtoni differs from ruficeps in having the crown of the head

similar in colour to the rest of the upper parts and not markedly

darker. The hairs surrounding the dorsal gland are also con-

colorous with the back, so that the yellow spot so conspicuous in

ruficeps and some other forms is absent.

Skull. Mr. de Winton, referring to Burton’s types, notes that

they show considerable variation but agree in the length of the

molar series. A comparison of a series of eight skulls from the

Sudan with the three cotypes of burton, shows that the teeth in

the first mentioned are constantly smaller than in the burtont

specimens.

All the examples now brought back, as well as the one from

Etbai presented a few years ago by Capt. 8. 8. Flower, and

Measurements of Skulls.

Palate | Length

length. | breadth.| length. | to hens.| series.

mm. mm. mm. mm. mm. mm.

Cotype burtoni. 120@ ......... 0... 93 54 ve 42 35 11

- THO © crcdrrcnoeclt 0 52 83 42 35 9

1D 5 120% © .. 84, 52 nae 38 36 9

ree Capt. Flower ........ soos! tel) 52 77 40 35 9

adi Abu Kalifa. Burnet Stuart. 2

oe } 86 50 79 39 35 9

Burnet Stuart

” eae } 88 51 80 49 35 10

Wadi Fertili. Russell ............... 84. 50 aS 39 35 10

Length

of nasals.

mm.

22°5

798 A LETTER FROM PROF. RIDGEWAY, [Nov. 23,

mentioned by Mr. de Winton, agree with burtont in having the

large teeth as well as in the external characters mentioned above,

so that I have no hesitation in separating burtoni from ruficeps.

P. syriaca from Palestine and Sinai also has the large teeth ;

the series available, however, is too small to allow a comparison

between the Egyptian and Palestine species to be made. The

latter appear to be darker and more washed with fulvous.

The measurements of an adult female of burtoni taken in the

flesh are :—Head and body 460 mm.; hind-foot 72; ear 30.

I have since received from Capt. Flower the fresh skin of a

specimen of P. syriaca from Sinai, which died in the Giza Gardens.

It agrees well with skins of P. syriaca in the Museum. There

is a clear yellow patch round the dorsal gland and a median

dorsal stripe,of the same colour runs towards the tail. In my

opinion, therefore, this species is quite distinct from P. burtoni.

November 23, 1909.

Dr. A. Smiru Woopwarp, F.R.S., Vice-President,

in the Chair.

The Secretary read the following report on the additions

made to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of October

1909 :-—

The number of registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie

during the month of October last was 148. Of these 94 were

acquired by presentation, 16 by purchase, 16 were received on

deposit, 2 in exchange, and 20 were born in the Gardens.

The number of departures during the same period, by deaths

and removals, was 161.

Amongst the additions special attention may be directed

i) Ss

A Walrus (Odobenus rosmarus), from the Arctic Seas,

purchased on October Ist.

A Grey Seal (Hdlicherus grypus), from the North of Ireland,

deposited on October 23rd.

A Brazilian Tapir (Zapirus terrestris), born in the Menagerie

on October 6th.

The Secretary read the following letter addressed to him by

Prof. William Ridgeway, M.A., D.Sc. :—

In my paper on “The Differentiation of the Three Species

of Zebras” in the last volume of the P. Z.8., p. 556, when

writing about Ward’s Zebra, I mentioned the doubts respect-

ing the provenance of the type specimen presented to Prof.

Cossar Ewart, F.R.S., by Mr. Rowland Ward. It was originally

said to have been “traded out of Somaliland.” But later

Prof. Ewart gave me the information that its habitat was

1909. | A LETTER FROM PROF. RIDGEWAY. 799

probably the Lombori Hills not far from Naivasha, which I

embodied in the Appendix to my ‘Origin and Influence of the

Thoroughbred Horse,’ p. 508. In his paper on this specimen

published later (P. Z.8. 1904, vol. 11. p. 181), Prof. Ewart states

in his footnote that “It probably inhabits part of the area

between the upper reaches of the Tana River and Lake Rudolf.”

As it was very important to obtain full information, and, if

possible, more specimens of this most interesting animal, T had

inquiries made in British Hast Africa with a view to obtaining,

if possible, a skin. My friend, Mr. C. W. Hobley, C.M.G., who

has helped me much in such “Totes, endeavoured to fra out

the habitat of Ward’s Zebra. He was told by Lord Delamere

that he had shot near Baringo the animal, the skin of which had

been named after Mr. Ward.

Messrs. Ward & Co. have now written to inform me that

they most certainly did not acquire the skin from Lord Delamere,

but that “the type . wardi was purchased in the flesh from

Barnum and Bailey’s Menagerie.”

Prof. Ewart, in a letter dated 9 Nov. 1909, writes to me as

follows -— About the provenance of ‘Ward’s Zebra’? I am still

ignorant. The zebra in question was, I believe, accidentally

strangled by Barnum and Bailey’s people when they were, for

some purpose, putting on a halter. After correspondence with

the owners all that Mr. Ward could learn was that, as I originally

told you, the zebra was ‘traded out of Somaliland.’”

IT am of course responsible for any mistake in the matter,

and, as I am anxious to have the error corrected as soon as

possible, I will be very grateful if you will read this note at

the next meeting of the Zoological Society and print it in the

Proceedings.

Flendyshe, Fen Ditton,

Cambridge. WiiiiAmM RipGEway.

13 Nov., 1909.

Yours sincerely,

Postscripr, 19th Feb., 1910.—My friend Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.Z.S. (¢ Field,’

20th Noy. 1909, p. 889) suggested that “ Ward’s Zebra is nothing but a hybrid

between a Mountain Zebra (Z#. zebra) and Chapman’s Zebra.” He substantiated this

view in the ‘ Field’ (18th Dec. 1909) by a letter from Dr. Heck, the Director of the

Berlin Zoological Garden, who states that he saw a hybrid Zebra resembling Ward’s

Zebra in Hagenbeck’s Menagerie in 1902. He adds an extract from a letter from

Mr. Hagenbeck, who speaks of this Zebra as a hybrid between Hquus zebra and

Equus chapmani that came from the Jardin des Plantes in Paris. “The photo-

graph of this specimen,” says Mr. Pocock, “taken by Hagenbeck and also kindly

submitted to me by Dr. Heck, represents an animal differing in no important par-

ticulars from Ward’s Zebra. It is therefore highly probable that Messrs. Barnum

and Bailey procured Ward’s Zebra from the Jardin des Plantes.”

Mr. Pocock seems to have got the real provenance. If from the outset it had

been stated that it was procured from Barnum and Bailey’s, much unnecessary

propagation of error would have been avoided. This story shows the immense

importance of getting specimens direct from Africa, as is the case with the series of

skins figured in my paper.—W. R.

800 MR. W. BICKERTON’S EXHIBITION OF [Nov. 23,

Dr. F. D. Welch, F.Z.8., exhibited photographs of a male

Gayal (Bibos frontalis) living in the Society’s Gardens, in which

the lower halves of both fore and hind legs were almost entirely

black instead of pure white as in the normal adult.

British Nesting TERNs.

Mr. William Bickerton, F.Z.S., M.B.O.U., gave a lecture

illustrated with about 120 lantern-slides showing the nesting

haunts and habits of the five species of Terns which nested in

the British Islands. These, given in the order in which they

arrive during the Spring migration, are:—-Sandwich Tern (Sterna

cantiaca), end of March; Common Tern (S. fluviatilis) and

Arctic Tern (S. macrura), latter part of April; Roseate Tern

(S. dougalli), very end of April; Little Tern (S. mnata), early in

May. He contributed the following notes on these Terns,

arranged in the order in which the birds were photographed—

Sandwich Tern, Common Tern, Little Tern, Roseate Tern,

Arctic Tern. The three first-named he had photographed in a

haunt where they all nested in the same locality, namely an

area of sand-hills on the coast at Ravenglass in Cumberland.

Sandwich Tern (Sterna cantiaca).—This is the earliest to arrive

in spring, and the first to nest. The Sandwich Terns at Raven-

glass did not all nest in one area, but chose four or five different

areas in different portions of the Sand-hills District. Some of

these nesting areas were on quite bare sand; others amongst the

long marram grass, and others in intermediate areas partly sandy

and partly grass-covered. They are probably the most social of

all the five species in that the nests are more concentrated in any

particular nesting area. The eggs were always either one or two

in number. On no occasion were three eggs found in any one

nest, although the colonies were visited in three successive nesting-

seasons—1905, 1906, and 1907. The young birds began to hatch

out during the last week in May. The Sandwich Tern is the

most insanitary of all the five species, inasmuch as the droppings

of the birds always seemed to be deposited immediately round

the outside of the nest—a point that had not been noticed with

regard to any other species. In fact the condition of the sur-

roundings of the nest was, roughly speaking, a test of the length

of time that had elapsed since incubation commenced.

Common Tern (Sterna fluviatilis)—This was the latest of the

three species to nest at Ravenglass—very few eggs being found

before the end of the first week in June, at which date large

numbers of the Sandwich Terns were hatched out. He had been

ou the nesting area as late as July 7th and failed to find a singie

young bird hatched out. At that time the Sandwich Terns had

absolutely completed their nesting season. There were probably

1000 to 1500 pairs of Common Terns nesting, and the following

1909. ] LANTERN-SLIDES OF BRITISH TERNS. 801

result was noted in a casual walk across their nesting area on

July 2nd, 1907 :—

Total.

102 nests contained 1 egg each = 102 eggs

WAAL ee i 2eggs ,, — eee

wae ” ” 3 ” ” =S 27 ”

232 nests contained 371 eggs

He had observed very considerable variation in the position

and surroundings of the nests. Some of these were made in long

grass; some in short grass; others on quite bare sand, and others

on a bank of shingle. The materials of the nests also showed

great variation, but generally speaking it was the exception to

find a bulky nest of this species. The large majority were simply

holes scratched in the sand or grass without either structural or

lining material. He had noticed very considerable variation in

the colour of the eggs, and this applied both to the ground-colour

and markings. As a rule the ground-colour was much duller

than that of either the Sandwich or the Little Tern.

Lesser or Little Tern (Sterna minuta)—This was the least

numerous of all in the locality named—the colony including not

more than about half a dozen pairs. The Lesser Terns were

generally less social in their habits than any of the others. They

also nested further apart, and he never found it possible to in-

clude two nests in the same half-plate photograph. Moreover,

the Little Terns always seemed to choose a nesting area quite

near to the sea, or river estuary, and for the most part on a sand-

bank only just above high-water mark. The white crescentic

band on the forehead characteristic of this species was clearly

shown in the photographs. Most of the Lesser Terns seemed to

use small stones and broken fragments of shell as nest material,

and in this respect they were quite characteristic.

Roseate Tern (Sterna dougalli).—The series of photographs of

these birds shown by the Lecturer were unique, being the only

series ever taken within the British Isles. He did not give the

locality in which the photographs were obtained, as he wished

to do what was possible to protect this rarest and perhaps most

beautiful species of the group. Roughly speaking there were in

the nesting area referred to about 10,000 pairs of Arctic Terns

and 1000 pairs of Common Terns. So far as he could judge,

there were not more than from fifteen to twenty pairs of Roseates,

and of these he managed to find eight distinct and clearly iden-

tified nests, each of which contained only one egg. From the field

naturalist’s point of view there were four marks of distinction of

the Roseate Tern, viz., the roseate colour of the breast, the black

bill reddish just at the base, the harsh ery “ crrark-errark,” and

the long streamers of the tail. He cited Mr. H. E. Dresser’s

statement that “the wing of this species was nine inches in length

and the tail nine inches in length, and that the lateral feathers of

the tail extended nearly six inches beyond the central ones.”

He had found that the Roseate Terns seemed to prefer

802 EXHIBITION OF LANTERN-SLIDES OF BRITISH TERNS. [ Nov. 23,

association with the Common rather than with the Arctic Terns

although individually the pairs of Roseate Terns seemed to select

more isolated. and somewhat concealed nesting sites than any

other species. Four of the eggs found he had carefully measured

and found the largest to be 147 inches long and the smallest 133.

On July 3rd, 1908, the last day of his visit, none of the Roseate

Terns or Common Terns in this area had hatched out, but quite

a number of young Arctic Terns were found in the nests, some of

which were photographed. He found it rather difficult to

understand the statement of Dr. Louis Bureau with regard to the

date of departure of this species (see report of the Ornithological

Congress held in London 1905) :—

“The Roseate Tern arrived on the coast (of France)

about the 15th of May, commenced nesting about the 5th of

June, and departed on the 10th of July approximately.”

He hardly thought it possible for the young Roseate Terns to

leave their nesting islands within say a fortnight of being hatched,

and if Dr. Bureau’s statement were to be accepted, it could only

mean that the old birds departed, leaving their nestlings in an

almost helpless condition.

Arctic Tern (Sterna macrura).—He estimated that there were

10,000 pairs of this species on the nesting area, which was pro-

bably one of the largest colonies in the British Isles. They evinced

a marked preference for nesting just where the grassy portions of

the island intermingled with ridges and areas of bare rock. For

instance, he had marked out an area roughly rectangular in form,

140 yards long by 30 yards across. On each of the long sides of

this area a ridge of bare rocks protruded through the grass, and

walking along each of these two rocky ridges and finally walking

down the central line of the grassy area, he had noticed nests of

the Arctic Terns as follows :—

Along Eastern rock ridge 82 nests with 133 eges.

» Western ,, i oo: 5 oO

Total 175 293

—— a

Along the central line of the grassy area there were 34 nests with

62 eggs.

Again he had found extraordinary differences both in the sites

chosen for nests and in the materials of which the nests were

made, and a type series of such nesting sites and materials was

well shown in the photographs. A series of very beautiful slides

showing the Arctic Terns alighting at their nests with extended

wings was also shown. He had noticed that the Arctic Terns

were not only more vocal, but bolder and more vicious than any

of the other species. They would not only swoop at a passer-by

but would in many instances actually strike him as well. He

had noticed that both sexes shared in the duties of incubation.

The first young bird was hatched out on June 29th and on

July 1st he counted thirteen young ones, although this number

was by no means exhaustive.

1909.] GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF MARSUPIALS ETC. 803

The following papers were read :—

1. An Account of the Geographical Distribution of the

Marsupials and Monotremes of South-West Australia,

having special reference to the specimens collected

during the Balston Expedition of 1904-1907. By

G. C. SHORTRIDGE *.

[ Received May 7, 1909. |

(Text-figures 244-277.

List of Western Australian Marsupials and Monotremes

South of the Tropics.

Macropus GIGantEeus Zimm. S.W.

35 ROBUSTUS CERVINUS Thos. N.W. €.

K is robustus erubescens* Sclat. S.E.]

Fy RuBUS Desm. N.W. C. S.H.

a IRMA Jourd. S.W.

5 EUGENIT Desm. 8.W.

3 BRACHYURUS Quoy & Gaim. S.W.

PETROGALE LATERALIS Gld. S.W. (N.W.?)

5 LATERALIS HACKETTI Thos. S.W. (insular).

OnycHoGaLE tuNnatTa Gld. S.W.

Lagostropnts Fascratus Pér & Les. N.W. (insular).

‘ FASCIATUS ALBIPILIS Gld. S.W.

LAGORCHESTES HIRSuTUS Gld. S.W.

Bs HIRSUTUS BERNIERI Thos. N.W. (insular).

3 HIRSUTUS DORREH Thos. N.W. (insular).

BETTONGIA PENICILEATA Gray. S.W.

Pr LESUEURI Quoy & Gaim. N.W. (insular).

Fe LESUEURI GRAYI Gld. S.W.

PororowUs GILBERTI Gld. S.W.

5 pLaTyors Gld. S.W.

TARSIPES SPENSER® Gray. S.W.

Dromicra concrnna Gld. S.W. C.

PsEUDOCHIRUS OCCIDENTALIS Thos. S.W.

TRICHOSURUS VULPECULA Kerr. S.W. (C., a rare straggler.)

[Phascolomys sp.~ 2?) | $.E.?

THaLAcomys LaGcotis Reid. S.W. N.W. C.

Tsoopon oBESULUS Shaw. S.W.

PERAMELES BOUGAINVILLEI Quoy & Gaim. N.W. (insular).

5 BOUGAINVILLEI MyosuROS Wagn. S.W.

[Cheropus castanotis + Gray.| (S.W.?) (N.W.?)

DASYURUS GEOFFROYI FoRTIS Thos. S.W.

PHASCOGALE FLAVIPES LEUCOGASTER Gray. S.W.

catura Gld. S.W.

* Communicated by Mr. OrprreLp Tuomas, F.R.S., F.Z.S.

+ Occurrence in South-Western Australia not yet confirmed.

Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1909, No. LV. 55

EOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION | Nov. 23,

804 MR. G. €. SHORTRIDGE ON G

(C.:

S.W.

PHASCOGALE PENICILLATA Shaw.

APICALIS Gray.

C.?

N.W.?

blighi®* Woodward ? |?

SMINTHOPSIS MURINA Waterh.

S.W.

N.W.

S.W.

CRASSICAUDATA Gld.

| Antechinomys

i Thos.| ?C.?

cratus Waterh.

spencei

5.W.

MyRMECOBIUS FAS

| Notor

“yh

S.E.?

g.]?

Stirlin

HYGLOSSUS ACULEATUS IN

* Oc

ctes typhlops”*

Cc. NW.

S.W.

EpPrus Thos.

onth-Western Australia not yet confirmed.

currence in

“BUN B, URILRUTUTB CL

eeRy. JSo AA JO (SOUT [ROI}.10.A) OSMBL TOLLLOF ee oe Ce Bee) asued yuesoid Sarmoys dey

oro buDyy

AANGASS . : Peg sudonsvpyy 9

opPSBIMa Aungqung

aureus y

MUOLLIAD

NOISIAIG N Hi } "ill sartonng

vrivest v. f waco FEES

Jotun:

LSaM | tf Huh

0] Modmog

VWidvaeLSNnW HLNOS

ayjMAsamoy: eae esterase

e e “AIG

| ABAY Senin

107900) P—

our bbe our 0 oor

Sof, YSU Je STEPS

VITIVYLSNY

eriejuedse)

Fo z1ng ®.

FPG PUTO,

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN S.W. AUSTRALIA, 805

Text-fig. 245.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles.

0 100 f 200

: —

GW Coy eG ik

Carrarvon Ra.

qlorthame ton _Y

Geraldton

Margaret RUS

Augusta ve

ose

F\,

tea,

Pe:

Map showing Mammalian Faunistic regions of Western Australia.

Macropus GigantEus Zimm. (Text-fig. 246, p. 806.)

Confined to the South-Western districts: plentiful except in

the neighbourhood of towns—being replaced in the North-West,

Central, and South-East by Wacropus rufus—extending along the

coast as far north as Geraldton, inland from which town, how-

ever, the Red Kangaroo is said to be the more plentiful species.

55*

806 MB. G. C. SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Nov. 23,

Not occurring beyond, if as far, as Esperance in the South-Kast,

where it is again replaced by the Red.

Text-fig. 246 *.

WESTERN

TRALIA e I

AUS L Sa, aS Wyndham

H} Pe: p be !

it Scale of English Miles. C.Bordal ©” Z, 1

\ 109 0 100 200 390 % 7 ‘

> , KI wma fe R Le

Cay v/v) fern i

Hi Broome NG i

i Cowar i

| HOM GR ow Mian rn a ama iy (ob) Nie fai Wee a pate ieee pe J

i = 7 —-——- oe i

i) “

| i {Sy 4

! sa H Johanna. Base. buiton i

i es fare nut

ey Ny enh &) {

Beate M- Macpherson &

L.Macdonald (QR

(salt L. Wrgshen Sete OSL

Bernier eS “2 Carnarvon Ra. i

Io S Gi ilps i

ea S Dy “tl, EV eS, LON. H

Hara ‘2 0

i 355 os, . i

: SS ‘2 Laverton. !

Wallabi ; = i

roup* peeen ; !

Geraldton & Pl 5 }

= — E Se J

! pong a ar i

Piciote = iI

qi t a H

1) d | Kracla ||

1! — Southern Cross kb | Lis ! [p

| : ie |

i PERTH i= tat Parkers ) Eyre

| Fremantle a vd

Map showing distribution of Macropus giganteus.

As with most of the species common to both States, the area in

which it occurs in the West is separated from that in South

* On this and following maps the dotted area indicates ascertained present range,

horizontal lines—probable range, vertical lines—extinct, and crossed lines—dying

out.

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN 8.W. AUSTRALIA. 807

Australia by a wide tract of dry desert country from six to eight

hundred miles in width.

In the extreme South-Western coastal districts there appears

to be a somewhat darker race, which is particularly noticeable in

immature individuals,—the head, limbs and tail being frequently

almost entirely black, possibly corresponding with J/acropus

giganteus melanops of Kastern Australia.

19 specimens collected. Albany (King River); Beverley (Stock

Pool); Brookton (Dwaladine); Pinjelly (Woyaline Wells) ;

Margaret River (Burnside) (caves).

Grey Kangaroo ( ¢ ‘ Boomer’) of Colonists.

‘Konga’ 3,‘ Woyre’ 2 (S.W.); ‘Eowit’ (Moore River), of

natives.

Macropus Ropustus CERVINUS Thos. (Text -fig. 247, p. 808.)

Frequenting rocky hills and mountain ranges in North-Western

and parts of Central West Australia, extending south to Southern

Cross and inland as far as Laverton, in which places, however, it

seems to be less abundant.

Most plentiful towards the North-West, where in favourable

situations it extends to the coast. Said to occur as far north as

Port Hedland.

Known to colonists as the ‘ Hill Kangaroo,’ to distinguish it

from the ‘ Red’ or ‘ Plain Kangaroo.’

3 specimens collected. Gascoyne River (Wyndham Range)

(Clifton Downs station).

‘ Bigodar’ (N.W.), ‘ Euro’ (C.), of natives.

MACROPUS ROBUSTUS ERUBESCENS Sclat. (‘Text-fig. 248, p. 809.)

Of South Australia, is said to occur in the extreme South-East

of Western Australia to the east of the Fraser Range.

Macropus ruFus Desm. (Text-fig. 249, p. 810.)

Distributed throughout the North-West, Centre, and South-

East.

Not occurring in the South-West, where MJacropus giganteus

takes its place, as it does in the southern districts of South

Australia, the two species rarely, if ever, frequenting the same

areas.

Particularly abundant in the North-West.

The Red and Hill Kangaroos (IZ. robustus cervinus) seem to be

less dependent on fresh water than the Grey, although in dry

seasons they will collect around pools and ‘ gnamma holes,’ or even

dig for water in the beds of dry creeks. However, in many

places they exist where water is quite unobtainable.

The females, although normally blue, are frequently of the

808 MR. G. C, SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Nov. 23,

Text-fig. 247,

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles.

R Lz

ern

Fe ao erecaeesso—ad]

— = mse

— 3

Wallabv

Group®

{

Comandien Ne

Map showing distribution of Macropus robustus cervinus.

same sandy-red colour as the males; the males themselves being

very rarely, but occasionally, blue.

18 specimens collected. Laverton (Hawksnest) ; Gascoyne

River (Wyndham Range).

Red or Plain Kangaroo of Colonists.

‘Marlo * (N.W.) of natives.

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN S.W. AUSTRALIA. 809:

Text-fig. 248.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles.

a 100 200

L.Macdonald A> ‘

Zz Yh Sov Ee mR mM

v0 sae

Carnarvon Ra.

Margaret Ree

Augusta

Map showing distribution of Wacropus robustus erubescens.

= di

Macropts trma Jourd, (Text-fig. 250, p. 811.)

Range almost identical with that of Wacropus giganteus, except

that it does not seem to occur in the southern coastal districts

between Cape Naturaliste and the Leeuwin. Resembling the

large Kangaroos rather than the smaller Wallabies in habits.

Very fast, and quick in its movements when hunted, when it will

810 MR. G. C, SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION | Noy. 23,

turn and double like a have. Generally considered to be the best

sporting animal in Western Australia.

Text-fig. 249,

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles.

100 100 200 3g0

4 ,

K I MAN JE OR Le

rby o/ if on

Barrow 1G

Map showing distribution of Wacropus rufus.

Not apparently dying out or disappearing even in the more

thickly populated districts to the same extent as the smaller

marsupials.

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN 8.W. AUSTRALIA. 811

Extending northwards beyond Watheroo, its range probably

ends at some point to the south of Geraldton.

Text-fig. 250.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles

0 100 200

L. Macdanald

ore

a Ne VAELSIR TIED IRIN

« " Carnarvon Ra

nub?

Map showing distribution of Wacropus irma.

19 specimens collected. Albany (King River); Mt. Barker ;

Beverley (Boyadine—Dale River) (Stockpool); Brookton (Dwala-

dine) ; Pinjelly (Woyaline Wells).

Brush Kangaroo of Colonists.

‘ Quoyrer ’ of natives.

812 MR. G. C. SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Noy. 23,

Macropus EuGENII Desm. (Text-fig. 251.)

Very plentiful in. many parts of the South-West, but rapidly

disappearing in the cultivated districts, especially towards the

Text-fig. 251.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of cae Miles.

g 100 200 3g0

L.Macéanald

Se A 8S or & RW

i, eos

44, Carnarvon Ra.

s outhern. Cross

Lt ie Parkers

Map showing distribution of Jlacropus engenii.

northern end of its range. Not occurring in the coastal country

between Albany and Cape Leeuwin, although extending to the

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN 8.W. AUSTRALIA, 813

coast at the Margaret River and Cape Naturaliste. Said still to

exist in isolated patches in the North between the Swan River

and Gin-Gin, Also occurring on the Abrolhos (Wallabi Group),

Garden, and some of the islands off Esperance. Although not

extending on the South Coast much beyond Phillips River, it

reappears on the Southern mainland and on islands off South

Australia.

The small Wallabies with the exception of Lagorchestes are

eregarious, frequenting thickets and dense undergrowth.

34 specimens collected. Wagin (Arthur River); Beverley

(Boyadine—Dale River) (Stockpool); Brookton (Dwaladine) ;

Pinjelly (Woyaline Wells); Margaret River (Ellensbrook); Twin

Peak and Middle Islands, off Esperance (in Perth Museum).

*Tammar’ (S.W.), ‘ Bonnan’ (Margaret River), of natives and

Colonists.

Macropus BRACHYURUS Quoy & Gaim. (Text-fig. 252, p. 814.)

Very plentiful among the coastal thickets and swamps of the

South-West, not extending inland. Said to occur sparingly as far

north as Moore River. Numerous on Rottnest, where J/acropus

eugentt is equally plentiful, but not found on Garden Island.

Also occurring on Bald Island to the east of King George’s

Sound, and on Twin Peak and probably other islands off

Esperance.

38 specimens collected. Albany (King River) (Big Grove) ;

Busselton (Yallingup); Margaret River (Burnside); Rottnest

and Bald Islands Gn Perth Museum).

‘Quokka,’ ‘ Bungeup, of natives.

PETROGALE LATERALIS Gld. (‘Text-fig. 253, p. 815.)

Fairly plentiful on low rocky hills around Beverley and York.

Said to occur sparingly in suitable localities, at least as far north

as the Wongan Hills. Distribution apparently very local and

patchy. Although not found among the Stirling ranges, it is

said to reappear on the coastal hills between Phillips River and

Esperance, occurring again on the South Coast and some of the

islands off South- Australia, which last might be referable to

lateralis hackettt.

I do not think that this species is likely to occur in the extreme

north, although a Rock Wallaby described from around Port

Hedland, Cossack, and doubtfully from the Murchison River,

may be this species.

10 specimens collected. Beverley (near Stockpool) (Boyadine-—

Dale River).

Rock Wallaby of Colonists.

‘ Boggile’ of natives (8. W.)

814 MR. G. C, SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Nov. 23,

Text-fig. 25

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles

o 100 200 300

L. Macdonald (

= A Oy & & Ik

a Cardaten Ra.

Beak nubt

ona

A’

Ht aret R:

Augusta | res \

Map showing distribution of Wacropus hrachyurus.

PETPROGALE LATERALIS HACKETTI Thos. (Text-fig. 253.)

The insular form seems hitherto to have been found only on

Modrain Island, off Esperance, although two skins examined from

Pearson’s Island, Investigator Group, South Australia, seem

referable to it, except that they were less distinctly marked than

the Modrain Island specimens.

2 specimens collected. Modrain Island (in Perth Museum).

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN S.W. AUSTRALIA, 815

Text-fig. 253.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of Englsh Miles.

0 100 200

L. Macdonald (Q,

SY PNR ap tS. Se

17 1 i Carnarvon Ra

Peak Hill

= As

F :

Te tal

Wallahi

Group*

;

Geraldton

sede H* y

L Olgardie

mp aa

Southern Cross

Margaret R e. oh ‘Barker

Augusta

Map showing distribution of Petrogale lateralis and P. 1. hacketti.

ONYCHOGALE LUNATA Gld. (Text-fig. 254, p. 816.)

Within a more limited area this species seems to have much

the same range as Jlacropus eugeni, both forms frequently

occurring together, although generally less plentifully—not ex-

tending far, if at all, beyond Beverley in the North, or near

the coast; its western boundary apparently being the Darling

Range.

816 MR. G. 0. SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Nov. 23,

Also oceurring in the southern interior of South Australia,

where, however, it is little known and probably rare.

Gregarious, resembling Kangaroo Rats in occasionally hiding or

running into hollow logs or burrows when disturbed.

Text-fig. 204.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles.

0 400 200

bs Ganuatvan Ra.

‘

Wongan H®

by jane

EERE) us

Bun

C. Wat aerLate =

Margaret R

Augusta ‘E a

Map showing distribution of Onychogale lunata.

23 specimens collected. Wagin (Arthur River); Pinjelly

{Woyaline Wells).

‘Wurrine’ or ‘ Wurrung’ of natives and Colonists.

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN 8.W. AUSTRALIA. 817

Lacostropuvs Fascrarus Pér. & Les. (Text-fig. 255.)

. Confined to Dirk Hartog, Dorrée and Bernier Islands, off

Sharks Bay.

Text-fig. 255.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles

Q 100 200

K 1 owiiB ie ROL

(Phe ad

stilt

Geraldton

% rca

pong?

Map showing distribution of Lagostrophus fasciatus and L. f. albipilis.

Observed on Bernier Island to be particularly abundant, where

they had bred to such an extent that in times of drought, when

food is scarce, 2 number would probably have to die.

818 MR. G. C. SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Nov. 23,

While on the island during a very dry season, I noticed that

both this species and Lagorchestes were thin and apparently in a

very unhealthy condition, while numbers were lying about dead.:

It may be noted that sheep had been temporarily introduced

there, while in the south of Dirk Hartog there is a large sheep

station, and the wallabies are said to have entirely left that end

of the island.

14 specimens collected. Bernier Island,

LAGOSTROPHUS FASCIATUS ALBIPILIS Gld. (‘Text-fig. 255, p. 817.)

Existing in a few isolated localities to the east of Pinjelly and

Wagin, and according to natives the Pellinup and Salt River

districts in the neighbourhood of the Stirling ranges.

Plentiful enough in the restricted areas in which they occur,

frequenting thick prickly serub.

22 specimens collected. Pinjelly (Woyaline Wells).

‘Merrnine’ or ‘ Munning’ of natives (S.W.).

Up to quite recently—within the last twenty-five or thirty

years—from abundant evidence many of the Western Australian

mammals had a much wider range than at the present time,

thei disappearance, which is said to have been first noticed

about 1880, being most sudden and unaccountable. Their former

existence is still remembered both by natives and old colonists

around Port Hedland, Cossack, Carnarvon, Peak Hill, Laverton,

Huela, and many other widely separated localities. The following,

and other less easily recognised species, are said to have been

very abundant throughout the Western, South-Eastern, and

Central districts :—Lagostrophus fasciatus, Lagorchestes hirsutus,

Bettongia lesueurit, and Trichosurus vulpecula (wherever trees

occurred), To which might be added most of the other mammals

common to South Australia.

The above areas are now, with a few exceptions, entirely devoid

of indigenous mammals. This is said partly to account for the

way in which the natives have been disappearing from the

Western and Central districts of late years.

In the North-West even the Red Kangaroos were said to have

decreased considerably, although they have since been recovering

in numbers: while a few Wallabies are said to still exist to the

north of the Ashburton River.

Lagostrophus fasciatus was recorded from South Australia many

years ago by Gould, and although unknown there now, it might

easily have extended into that region.

The entire disappearance of so many species, over such large

tracts of country, is generally considered to be due to some

epidemic or disease, which IT have been told appeared to be a kind

of marasmus, perhaps brought into the country by introduced

mammals. It may be noted, however, that they have died out

chiefly in the drier parts of the country, where, except for the

introduction of sheep, there has been very little alteration in

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN S.W. AUSTRALIA. 819

the natural conditions. Rabbits, although already very numerous

in the Centre and South-East, have not yet found their way to

the North-West.

The mammals of the South-West, to about as far north as the

Moore River, have not disappeared in the same extraordinary

way, although they are rapidly retreating before civilisation,

being already very rare to the north of the thickly populated

districts around the Swan River, as well asaround all the settled-

in and agricultural areas. The burning of forests and general

clearing of the country, together with constant raids of dogs and

domestic cats, are among the chief causes.

On account of isolation from enemies and disease, the abun-

dance of native mammals on the small islands off the coast,

compared in most instances with their scarcity, or in many cases

non-existence, on the adjoining mainland, is very marked, and

forms a key to the original distribution of many of them. Insular

forms of South-Western mammals extend as far north as the

Sharks Bay Islands in the West; while in the South several

occur on the islands off Esperance, reappearing again on the

mainland as well as on islands off the coast of South Australia.

The mammals on the islands off Sharks Bay correspond with

the originally widely spread “ sand-plain fauna” of the South-

West; those on the islands farther south resembling the kinds

confined to the coastal and forest districts. On the islands to the

north of Bernier, the mammals seem to show a similar likeness

to those on the extreme northern mainland, while there would

seem to be absolutely no mammals peculiar to the North-W est,

those that do occur being stragglers from the South-West, North,

and Centre.

LAGoRCHESTES HIRSUTUS Gld. (Text-fig. 256, p. 820.)

Mainland form almost, if not entirely, extinct. Said possibly

to still occur very sparingly on sand-plains to the east of Beverley

and York—where within quite recent times it was fairly plentiful.

A single specimen was recorded from Hastings, near Kojonup,

in 1896, by the Perth Museum.

Described as being very swift and to give a distinct sharp

whistle when put up, although I did not notice this on Bernier

Island.

Whistler of Colonists.

‘Wurrup’ of natives (S.W.).

LAGORCHESTES HIRSUTUS BERNIERI Thos. (Text-fig. 256.)

Plentiful on Bernier Island in heathy and spinifex country.

Unlike the other small Wallabies Lagorchestes is not gregarious,

frequenting more or less open country, where it lies up in a form

similar to that of a hare, which on Bernier Island is rather deep

and generally half hidden beneath a bush or tuft of spinifex.

24 specimens collected. Bernier Island (south end).

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1909, No. LVI. 56

820 MR. G. C. SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Nov. 23,

Text-fig. 256.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles

100 o 100 200 390

—— + + ———+ 9

Lory Hea

L. Macdonald

ED RAGE Sony were Rein:

= Carnarvon Ra.

Talla hi

Group®

PERTH od nei) (

ae) 9

Y ache

Margaret REBee RMIT ‘ "oe “Se Mader

Augusta Ye ee ae

ty we

Map showing distribution of Lagorchestes hirsutus, L. h. bernieri, and

Lh. dorree.

LAGORCHESTES HIRSUTUS DORREM Thos. (Text-fig, 256.)

Dorée Island. As the red Kangaroo Hares on Bernier and

Dorée Islands differ subspecifically, it would be interesting to

compare specimens from Dirk Hartog Island.

’

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN §.W. AUSTRALIA. 821

BETTONGIA PENICILLATA Gray. (Text-fig. 257.)

Very plentiful in the South-West, where, unlike Bettongia

leswewrt, 1b occurs near the coast, extending as far north as the

Text-fig. 247.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of Enghsh Miles.

a 100 200

—

L. Macdonald (Q

EY Sh oe Eg i ois

? *% i

rh 3 fs i ¢ “® Carnarvon Ra.

Dorresp % Ke one® oak Hill Pell! Me til She

fae ewe asco WE ods

\ i a: _t

YY 2% % Xo

cf < i) Vine oMahnine

iT at

| : 7 Hawks Nest

fy Day D t (eo Laverton

ae ( Naas ton Beat Yh

Geraldton &f||||te aif

tl ANG a ne

Map showing distribution of Bettongia penicillata.

Moore River, becoming very rare at its northern limit. Formerly

recorded from Sharks Bay, as so many of the other South-

Western marsupials have been.

Although getting scarce in the more settled districts, both

a6*

822 MR. G.C.SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Nov. 23,

species of Lettongia are sufficiently numerous in many places to

be rather destructive to crops, on which account they are often

trapped and poisoned off in large numbers.

Omnivorous, and toa great extent scavengers, often collecting

around camps at night in order to pick up any scraps that might

be lying about, and, unless specially frightened, they become very

fearless, often approaching within a foot or two of where people

are sitting. If startled, however, they are wonderfully quick, being

even more agile in their movements than the smaller wallabies.

More exclusively nocturnal than the kangaroos and wallabies :

lying up by day in a grass nest, which is generally hidden either

beneath a thick bush or tuft of grass, and when put up, bolting

into the nearest hollow log or patch of cover. Although it has

been said that this species carries about bundles of grass or small

sticks with its tail, [ do not think that such a thing is possible with

an animal whose tail is not in the slightest degree prehensile.

Tail occasionally tipped with white like that of “leswewri.”

31 specimens collected. Albany (King River); Brookton

(Dwaladine) ; Pinjelly (Woyaline Wells); Busselton (Yal-

lingup); Margaret River (Burnside).

The Kangaroo-rat of Colonists.

‘Woylyer’ or ‘ Woyre’ of natives.

BETTONGIA LESUEURI Quoy & Gaim. (Text-fig. 258.)

Typical form, confined to Bernier, Dorrée, and Dirk Hartog

Islands off Sharks Bay, where it is very plentiful, making

burrows among the cliffs along the sea-shore. Feeding to a great

extent on marine refuse and dead matter, even dead sheep being

occasionally partly eaten.

18 specimens collected. Bernier Island.

BETTONGIA LESUEURI GRAYI Gld. (Text-fig. 258.)

Very abundant in many parts of the South-West, differing

curiously from the insular form in not occurring near the coast.

It is possible that some of the mammals that do not occur to

the west of the Darling Ranges extend to the coast between

Albany and Esperance, and when they existed in the dry

districts of the North-West and South-East, there is no doubt

that they were coastal there, as this species is still said to be in

South Australia. Differing from Betiongia penicillata, which it

resembles in most of its habits, in being a burrowing animal,

numbers often collecting together and making small warrens

similar to those of rabbits. The two species of Bettongia frequently

occur in the same localities.

Not appearing at the present time to exist on the mainland to

the north of the Swan River.

Tail very shghtly incrassated.

At night the Kangaroo-rats make a peculiar grunting noise as

they hop about.

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN $.W. AUSTRALIA. $23

24 specimens collected. Wagin (Arthur River); Pinjelly

(Woyaline Wells); Beverley (Boyadine-Dale River); Brookton

(Dwaladine).

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles

100 100 200

” L. Macdonald (Q

EAA eS) Th eee Oe

7 & oe

2£ Carnarvon Ra.

Map showing distribution of Bettongia lesueuri and B. 1. grayi.

Boodee Rat of Colonists.

‘ Boodee’ of natives (S.W.).

(The ‘ Boodee’ of the Central districts is Thalacomys lagotis.)

824 MR. G. C. SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION | Nov. 23,

WESTERN

Scale of English Miles.

0 100 200

@ lt os

D, ¥) fern

Dd,

‘

i M* Mac pherson

(Salt L. Wyaghor ay

(ee 8s Q

Ue 3

Peak Hilb-

wey

. aN

(essen a paper eion A

Geraldton &

pong”

C. Nataraliste \~#\,

Margaret Rega f

Augusta QW

ob oe 9G.

forge St

Map showing distribution of Potorous platyops.

(1) Pororovs piatyors Gld. (Text-fig. 259.)

(2) Pororovs citgerti Gld. (Text-fig. 260.)

Neither of these species has been recorded since 1840, when

Gilbert secured both near King George’s Sound, obtaining

platyops again in the Walyema swamps (Victoria), which probably

has some reference to the Victoria plains near Northam.

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN 8.W. AUSTRALIA, 825

It is quite possible that they are now entirely extinct, although

I picked up six old skulls of Potorous gilberti near the entrances

of some caves in the Margaret River district, and they may still

Text-fig. 260.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles

100 © 0) 100 200 390

SSS ee

Ziyi

Me, tale

>= Carnarvon Ra.

woe c. sae | im 2 Hs 2 Ve

y H : Laverton

Northampton / \ Riad ra

a aan Sank VSN 5

OY.

pongo” ; : i

Augusta Q

Map showing distribution of Potorous gilberti.

exist sparingly in that and other localities, as they are very liable

to be overlooked on account of their great external resemblance

to Maecropus brachyurus.

826 MR. G..C. SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Nov. 23,

The animal known to natives as ‘ Wurrark’ around the

Margaret River is probably Potorows gilberti, said to frequent

marshy country, and although formerly numerous, it is thought

to have almost, if not entirely, died out. A few may still occur

towards Cape Leeuwin.

A small gregarious wallaby is said to have been at one time

plentiful in the coastal scrub to the east of Albany; from the

description it was probably one of these species. It was known

to the natives as ‘ Moort,’ and according to them has entirely

disappeared there. Described as being rather similar to J/acropus

brachyurus in habits, but more sluggish in its movements,

on which account cats and bush-fires have probably caused its

disappearance.

6 skulls collected (Potorous gilberti). Margaret River caves.

TARSIPES SPENSER® Gray. (Text-fig. 261.)

As yet known to occur only in the extreme coastal districts of

the South-West, although the natives around Beverley speak

of a striped mavsupial mouse occurring there which they call

‘ Deed.’

Apparently very local, most of the specimens known having

been obtained around Albany; the only other known locality is

Wagerup, about thirty miles north of Bunbury, from which place

the Perth Museum has a single specimen—deser ibed as from

the Margaret River. Said to fr ‘equent low-lying and often swampy

country, making small round grass-nests, like a dormouse, among

the thinner branches of 'Ti-tr ees or Paper-barks. The small

marsupial mice are very difticult to secure on account of their

rarity, and their noctur nal, arboreal, and to a great extent insec-

tivorous habits, beg chiefly known from cats killing and bringing

them into houses.

8 specimens collected (Albany); (6 in Perth Museum),

DrRomIcrA CoNCINNA Gld. (‘Text-fig. 262, p. 828.)

Rather widely distributed throughout the South-Western and

Central districts ; obtained as far lem as Parker’s Range, near

Southern Cross, where it is said to be fairly plentiful, and is

well known owing to its frequently dropping down the shafts of

mines. A pouched mouse, that probably belongs either to this

species or Sminthopsis crassicaudata, is also described from

Kurrawang (near Kalgoorlie) and eperton! Tt oceurs in South

Australia, Senae however it seems to be little known.

Arboreal, hiding by day among dead timber, or in nests built

either in hollow stumps or among the branches of low trees and

bushes.

4 specimens collected. Southern Cross (Parker’s Range) ;

Bunbury ; Albany (in Perth Museum).

“Possum Mouse of Colonists.

‘ Nyeranit’ (Margaret River) of natives.

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN 8.W. AUSTRALIA, 827

Text-fig. 261.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles.

100 200

Es Aw Si Eye reeN

a3 Ca precio Ra.

apt

Peak Hib: Day,

Margaret R| ee €

Augusta & :

bys

Map showing distribution of Tarsipes spensere.

PSEUDOCHIRUS OCCIDENTALIS Thos. (Text-fig. 263, p. 829.)

Chiefly confined to the banks of rivers and swamps in the

South-West ; local, and apparently disappearing in many places.

Fairly plentiful near the Margaret River, where they occur

among Ti-trees and peppermint gums, making nests of grass and

sticks among the bushes, although occasionally hiding in hollow

trees like the Common Opossum.

828 MR. G.C. SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Nov. 23,

Text-fig. 262.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA aw

fe ey

Scale of Enghsh Miles yale i *

100 0 100 200 300 Y

jews ae a raat

Derby

° Broome

Cowan

; ‘ i

‘ Jehanna i

! Spring

x Mt Macpherson

.Macd

L. Macdonald \Q, |;

Wyndham Ee AS oily Ee ERIN 1

rey

S os Peer: !

Bernier 7 os ae Carnarvon Ra. Se !

4 0 Grase, Vs . Ss

Dorresy XS Oy Ne y !

| ie | 1 a H

| Dirk % 4» GAS CP NE pcctes. wy = S NGA |

Hore Vet, a ce ce ee

“e. Do’ v.. oNahnine y !

si CRN —— {

Woke a atenes 1 ns i

oR uy Hades :

we e Day Daw \ Sfaverton !

Wallabi S ; = 1

Groups \QNorthampton “|p >? >? 22k

Geraldton ee i

Oo . 5 dD 4 OU Ne gee eo Jj

ov = Ve yo es i

yor) ries Nee = = 2 | MN '

ee } CC ——————————— | $ 5 . ae 29 t

SS amigas YS og

SSS J ‘

a ate : 1 Eucla j

Re eel coy

< 12? ae Lyre

He ves) E

2? \~%

y Pipempster 9

———a J.

C.Neturaliste 3 FAY eEOPERERD Rae Oat Diane

Margaret R Pale Bday 4 pital as eS Middle P

ANaaaee Vee ¢ GM Barker EY ye :

Augusta Cy eo AFbaly 3 sf gcc

ee Bre AS *Bald is = Tee yet rs

gL ’ Rec

| 8 George si

Map showing distribution of Dromicia concinna.

During -life this species has a slight but distinct musky smell

which is noticeable also in Sminthopsis. Tt is curious that both

with Jrichosurus and Pseudochirus melanism should be of such

frequent occurrence in the coastal districts, while comparatively

rare inland.

22 specimens collected. Margaret River (Burnside) ;} Busselton

(Yallingup).

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN S.W. AUSTRALIA, 829

Ring-tail or Rat-tail Opossum of Colonists.

‘Wormp’ (Beverley), ‘ Moilyer, or ‘Ngnuara’ (Margaret

River), of natives.

Text-fig. 263.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of Enghsh Miles

0 100 200 E ; y ;

———— nel bs

Aik

x D/¥ Mew ni

Johanna

Sprug

L. Macdonald

EO Al Sot, Soe Rain

"4 Carnarvon Ra,

Vere ypR ERIE

: ii

« 7

outhern Cross

q ss

Map showing distribution of Pseudochirus occidentalis.

TricHosurus vuLPEcULA Kerr. (Text-fig. 264, p. 830.)

Plentiful and occurring generally throughout the South-West,

except in the neighbourhood of towns, although far less abundant

and widely distributed than formerly, getting very much thinned

830 MR. G. OC, SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Nov. 23,

out in many places by trappers. Also it seems to be subject to

some epidemic that at times almost clears them out of districts

where they were plentiful previously; when this occurs it often

takes years for them to recover in numbers.

Text-fig. 264.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles.

100 ROO 300

£;

van

Map showing distribution of Trichosurus vulpecula.

They appear at one time to have extended over the dry North-

Western and Central Districts to as far inland as Laverton,

1909. ] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN S.W. AUSTRALIA. 831

wherever belts of eucalypti fringed the banks of creeks, but now

almost, if not entirely, confined to the south-western corner of

the State, a few stragglers only being found as far north as

Gin-Gin, and inland.

The red patch on the throat appears only in adult individuals

(not visible from the underside of the skin), often becoming more

ov less suffused over the fur of the whole body with age, and

similar to the throat-gland of Jf yrmecobius in being very much

less distinct and often entirely absent in the females.

Old males will occasionally take to living in deserted burrows

or crevices among rocks, being known to Colonists as Ground

Opossums.

Melanism, which is apparently more common in the females,

seems to be of far more frequent occurrence in the coastal

districts of the extreme South-West, where almost twenty per

cent. of the Opossums obtained are black.

Albinos occasionally occur, while specimens with white tail-tips

are very common, being in many localities even more plentiful

than the normal variety. The black- and white-tailed varieties

are said to be very rare in South Australia.

Although not as a rule very active among the branches of trees,

when disturbed at night they will generally climb to the topmost

branches, evidently with a view of getting as far from danger as

possible, cals than of hiding among ainsi foliage, so that it is

easy to discover and shoot them on moonlight nights. They have

a distinct and rather peculiar cry which is often heard at night,

very much resembling that of the South African Tree-dassie

(Procavia arborea).

The usual method of trapping ’possums is by fastening a wire

snare on a stick placed against a tree on the sloping side by

which they invariably descend; as the stick is in a still more

slanting position, they leave the tree for the easier means of

descent and get caught in the snare.

88 specimens collected. Mt. Barker ; Albany (King River) ;

Beverley (Boyadine-Dale River) (Stockpool); Brookton (Dwala-

dine); Pinjelly (Woyaline Wells); Busselton (Yallingup) ;

Margaret River (Burnside).

Grey or Black ’Possum of Colonists.

‘ Koomaal’ of natives.

THALACOMYS LAGOTIS Reid. (Text-fig. 265, p. 832.)

The only true burrowing marsupial in the South-West with

the exception of Bettongia lesweuri (the Bandicoots dig pits in the

ground in search of roots and insects, but they do not make or

live in burrows). Zhalacomys makes a larger and deeper burrow

than DLettongia; the entrance also is almost perpendicular for

about two feet and then takes a side turn at right angles. Like

a badger, it is difficult to dig for, and will often burrow as fast as

a man can dig.

832 MR. G. C., SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION | Noy. 23,

As with Bettongia penicillata, its tail during life has a peculiar

downward curl, although possessing no prehensile power.

Text-fig. 265.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles.

100° 200+ 390

Serre

D ty a in

(Macdonald

Group*

Geraldton %&

pong?”

PERTH =

Preece!

Fremantle o|

Map showing distribution of Thalacomys lagotis.

Nocturnal. Not saltatorial, resembling a rabbit in its move-

ments. Tail tipped with a small sharp pointed horny spur

rather like that of Onychogale.

Although widely distributed throughout the South-West (except

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN 8.W. AUSTRALIA, 833

near the coast), North-West, and Centre, it has within recent years

become extremely rare in the far interior. Most plentiful in the

inland districts of the South-West, rather frequently caught in

traps set for rabbits along the rabbit-proof fence. In the dry

North-Western and South-Eastern divisions, where it is rare, it

extends to the coast. |

Said to be widely distributed in South Australia.

21 specimens collected. Wagin (Arthur River); Southern

Cross (Parker’s Range); Pinjelly (Woyaline Wells); Watheroo.

Native Rabbit or Pinkie of Colonists.

‘ Dalgyte’ (8.W.), ‘ Moyer’ (N.W.), ‘ Boodee’ (C.), of natives.

TsooDoNn OBESULUS Shaw. (Text-fig. 266, p. 834.)

The Common Bandicoot of Western Australia.

Confined to the South-West, extending as far north as the

Moore River, where however it is said to have become very

scarce.

Generally frequenting damp and marshy localities, where it

hides among reeds and thick scrub.

It makes a nest on the ground of dry grass and sticks, rather

like that of Bettongia penicillata, only much flatter, generally

either hidden beneath a fallen tree or in the middle of a bush:

the animal making for the nearest hollow log or thick patch of

scrub when disturbed.

Although generally nocturnal this species frequently comes

out in early evenings, and occasionally during the day. The

stomachs of all specimens examined contained wing-cases and

legs of beetles and other insects, but the animals also feed freely

on roots and other vegetable matter.

33 specimens collected. Albany (King River) (Big Grove) ;

Wagin (Arthur River); Brookton (Dwaladine); Pinjelly (Woya-

line Wells); Margaret River (Burnside); Busselton (Yallingup).

Bandicoot or Native Pig of Colonists.

‘Quaint * or ‘ Waint’ (Beverley), ‘Queenda’ (Margaret River),

of natives.

PERAMELES BOUGAINVILLEI Quoy & Gaim. (Text-fig. 267, p. 835.)

Occurrring on the islands off Sharks Bay. Probably owing to

the introduction of a number of cats on Bernier Island, it has

become very rare there.

The Perth Museum has a very old specimen from Dorrée

Island. It appears to be a smaller and less distinctly marked

animal than the South-Western subspecies.

1 specimen (skull) collected—Bernier Island.

PERAMELES BOUGAINVILLEI MyosuROS Wagn. (Text-fig. 267.)

Apparently not plentiful in the South-west, although described

by natives as being fairly numerous in the Salt River district.

834 MR. G. C, SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Nov. 23,

Text-fig. 266.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles

o 190 200 390

Bes)

“sy Hawks Nest

Ny c Day Dax l bs Weertors

Wallabi \Yn Na, ae

a Northampton _/ i

Group Q ee

Geraldton eA CR Ne RNs ‘

, Ar

i sini oe

cree MD scoisally a

30 uthern C

“Parkers

C. Naturaliste >

| Margaret RAE

Augusta %&

ose

Map showing distribution of Tsoodon obesulas.

A species of Bandicoot, probably this species, is said to have

formerly extended as far north on the mainland as Sharks Bay.

Said to lie up by day in a small nest on the ground, like Zsoodon

obesulus.

2 specimens collected. Pinjelly (Woyaline Wells). Kojenup

(Darton) (in Perth Museum),

‘Marl’ (Beverley) of natives.

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN S.W. AUSTRALIA. 835

Text-fig. 267.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Niles

100 100 260 300

Johanna

Spruw

L. Macdonald

ERAS ego eas RN

Carnarvon Ra

{southern Cross

tty | yak

lit Parkers

OV!

Fremantle of

Map showing distribution of Perameles bougainvillei and P. b. myosuros.

CH@ROPUS CASTANOTIS Gray. (Text-fig. 268, p. 836.)

I was not able to find out anything definite about the distribution

of this species in Western Australia. It is evidently very rare.

The specimen obtained by Gilbert in 1843 seems to have been the

only one ever secured in this State : it is labelled “ Boorda (Kirl-

tana),” a place I could find no record of except that it may refer

Proc. Zoot, Soc.—1909, No. LVII. 57

836 MR. G. C. SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Nov. 23,

to Cape Borda in the extreme North-West, near Cape Levéque at

the entrance of King Sound.

A small Bandicoot, doubtfully described from around Port

Text-fig. 268.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of Enghsh Miles.

UV) 700 200 390

Sw 8 yw & | W

% Pea

44, Carnarvon Ra.

Margaret RVG om C Is "Middle P

ugusta ani P wy por

we = i GV em

Map showing distribution of Cheropus castanotis.

Hedland, said to frequent rocky situations, may be this species ;

while an animal that is said to be now extremely rare, if not

entirely extinct in the district, described to me from around

Beverley and York, may be the same. Known to the Colonists

as the Camel-foot.

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN S.W. AUSTRALIA. 837

‘ Buddile ’ of natives (Beverley).

Dr. G. C. Stirling, of the Adelaide Museum, tells me that,

although extremely scarce in South Australia, Chwropus has been

obtained in the interior, both to the north and south of the

Macdonnell Ranges, and inland from Fowler’s Bay on the south

coast.

DasYURUS GEOFFROYI FoRTIS Thos. (Text-fig. 269.)

Fairly numerous in many parts of the South-West to as far

Text-fig. 269.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of Enghsh Miles.

u 100 290 300

4 M* Macpherson

FENN eng, \

“ as

Salt L. “eens

ye & ae

lie 2 Carnarvon Rae

Peck Hilti

ie ef Y

Map showing distribution of Dasyurus geoffroyi fortis.

57*

838 MR. G. C. SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION | Nov. 23,

north as Watheroo or Geraldton. Originally recorded from

Sharks Bay, where it no longer exists, frequenting rocky and

well timbered country ; plentiful along the sea-coast in the Mar-

garet River district, where, judging by the number of their tracks

along the sea-shore, they feed largely on marine refuse.

Text-fig. 270.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of Enghsh Miles

106 0 100 200 300

: t + = J

Johanna

Spring

=e A & w EH i NW

Ms 7

-& Carnarvon Ra

B Northan: ton

, Oo

Margaret R

Augusta %

Map showing distribution of Phascogale fiavipes leucogaster.

Killed off as much aa possible in the agricultural and more

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN S.W. AUSTRALIA. 839

thickly populated districts on account of being so destructive te

poultry.

Not extending far inland. Arboreal and nocturnal, hiding by

day In crevices among rocks, deserted burrows , hollow. logs, &e.

Very much resembling Viverrine animals in habits.

30 specimens collected. Wagin (Arthur River); Beverley

(Avon River); Brookton (Dwaladine) : Pinjelly (Woyaline

Wells); Enesco (Beachlands; Yallingup); Margaret River

(Burnside).

Native Cat of Colonists.

‘Chuditch’ (Beverley), ‘Gnuljargneet’ (Busselton), ‘ Barry-

git’ (Moere River), of natives.

PHASCOGALE FLAVIPES LEUCOGASTER Gray. (Text-fig. 270.)

Confined in the South-West to the coastal and well-watered

forest districts.

The specimens obtained near Albany were —— in rough

ironstone country timbered with Jarrahand Red Gum. For merly

obtained in the Victoria Plains near Northam by Gilbert, where

it is now without doubt extinct; nearly all the small marsupials

appear to have died out in that district.

6 specimens collected. Albany; Kojonup.

PuascoGaLe cALURA Gld. (Text-fig. 271, p. 840.)

Very rare, seeming hitherto to have been recorded only four

times from Western Australia: once from the Williams River,

where it was originally obtained by Gilbert, and three times since

from around Kojonup.

The British Museum has an old specimen from Adelaide, which

seems to be the only known instance of its capture in South

Australia.

1 specimen collected. Kojonup (in Perth Museum).

PHASCOGALE PENICILLATA Shaw. (Text-fig. 272, p. 841.)

Although not plentiful this species seems to have a more

general range in South-Western Australia than the smaller

Phascogales.

Doubtfully recorded from as far inland as Kalgoorlie, where it

would probably only bea straggler. Said to be generally distri-

buted throughout the southern parts of South Australia.

Arboreal. Very active among the branches of trees. Occa-

sionally frequenting the neighbourhood of farms, where according

to natives they come after mice.

_ 4 specimens collected. Busselton (Yallingup); Margaret River

(caves) (skull).

Squirrel of Colonists.

‘Coming-coming’ (Beverley), ‘Wambgner’ (Busselton), of

natives.

840 MR. G. Cc. SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Nov. 23,

PHASCOGALE APICALIS Gray. (Text-fig. 273, p. 842.)

Confined to the forest districts of the South- West, where it is

apparently a rare species.

3 specimens collected. Albany (in Perth Museum).

Text-fig. 271.

WESTERN ,

AUSTRALIA el eee

KS,

Seale of English Males €.Bordaf \*

100 200 10

mines fe RLe

mm Yew

L. Macdonald (XX

N15

Apso ;

Kealt L. Syatos EAS Tee RN

Wallabi

Group*

Lat sa

Avolgardie

Southern Cross

Aad if Parkers

Ne Pia dne a PF,

Woyaline Ke

jou ees

Cina

son

Map showing distribution of Phascogale calura.

PHASCOGALE BLIGHI Woodward. (Text-fig. 273.)

A medium sized species with a distinctly incrassated tail,

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN S.W, AUSTRALIA. 841

recently described from the Pilbarra district, where several

specimens were secured, and since obtained in the far interior a

little to the south of the Kimberley district, near the spot where

“ Notoryctes” was found. Probably occurring at least as far

south as latitude 25°; a small marsupial said to occur very

sparingly on the Upper Gascoyne probably being referable to

this species.

I believe that the smaller Phascogales resemble Sminthopsis in

Text-fig. 272.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of Enghsh Miles

0 100 200 300

Condon

‘ Ve

Barrow lQ E ssa’ w. Div |

~eseu,

3 pe

POn slow it

Laverton

Map showing distribution of Phascogale penicillata.

842 MR. G. C. SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRBUTION [ Nov. 23,

spending a great deal of their time on the ground, while P. bligh,

occurring in comparatively treeless country, would seem to be

almost if not entirely terrestrial.

Text-fig. 273.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles.

100 joo 200 LO

L. Macdonald (TY,

Lee. reas 8 a

Sati Il A Nyadnam 4 y [= A VS at jE GROIN

{ : é ? a >| £5 pee

- ~ ) ae (4, Carnarvon Ra.

a scoyne %

ot ets

Vode

Bs _, Hawks Nest

iH Laverton

PERTH Mh

Fremantle »

ie)

agar?

Margaret K

Augusta bv,

(em

Map showing distribution of Phascogale apicalis in S.W. and’

P. blight n N.W.

SMINTHOPSIS MURINA Waterh. (T'ext-fig. 274.)

Occurring throughout the South-West; appears to be more

plentiful in the coastal districts wherever grass-trees (Xanthor-

rhea) occur.

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN S.\. AUSTRALIA. 843

Arboreal to a certain extent, occasionally making their nests or

hiding in the hollow stumps of dead grass-trees or eucalypti.

Text-fig. 274.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Seale of English Miles.

jov 200

¢ “E Carnarvon Ra

Peak Hil

O Goats CPV NE orhoe

[oy ty WY

‘y., Hawks Nest

. “> View yi i a >

a :

: i = ee ie

Wallaby a.

Group’ \@ ion

Geraldton &

¢ oa thern Cross

Hil

ee o zat y

Margaret R| sg

ASSES LANs ;

. . . . . OY . . -

Map snowing distribution of Sminthopsis murina.

6 specimens collected. Albany (King River); Margaret River

(Burnside).

Pouched Mouse of Colonists.

‘ Dunnart * (Margaret River) of natives.

844 MR. G. C. SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Nov. 2 25

On account of their habit of hiding among fallen timber or

tree-stumps, the marsupial mice must invariably g get exterminated

wherever bush fires occur. This species, as well as Dromicia

and the small Phascogales, has consequently become very scarce,

especially in the agricultural and more thickly populated areas.

In addition it is probably to a great extent killed off by the cats

that have run wild in large numbers.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Niles.

N00 me nO, 100 200

L. Macdonald (Q

= ois Sor 1S Es IN

a ycarnaiven. ‘Ra

Poak Hilbe

Be SIS TeOn Nes

PERTH ia eae

Augusta

Map showing distribution of Sminthopsis crassicaudata.

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN 8.W. AUSTRALIA. 845

The numerous recent remains at the bottoms of the circular

precipices around the mouths of many of the Margaret River

caves, even of the large marsupials, including Jacropus giganteus,

M. brachyurus, Potorous gilberti, Trichosurus, Pseudochirus,

Lsoodon, (Canis dingo), as well as small rodents and marsupial

mice, give an idea of the enormous destruction caused by bush

fires. In the same district, while walking through a tract of

country that had been burnt off, 1 picked up 18 burnt bodies of

Pseudochirus, as well as odd individuals of other species.

SMINTHOPSIS CRASsICAUDATA Gld. (Text-fig. 275.)

Apparently rare in Western Australia where, however, it seems

to have a wide range.

Differing from S. murina in frequenting dry sandy and often

treeless districts.

The Perth Museum has two specimens from Day Dawn and

Dongarra, while it was originally obtained by Gilbert in the

Wilhams district.

Occurring, according to natives, on the coastal sand-plains to

the east of Albany.

2 specimens collected. (In Perth Museum—from Central

South Australia, where it also occurs.)

MyrmMecosits Fasciatus Waterh. (Text-fig. 276, p. 846.)

Diurnal, Fairly numerous, although rather scattered, through-

out the inland forest districts of the South-West, especially where

the prevailing trees are the White Gum (Lucalyptus redunca) and

the Jam (Acacia acuminata).

Not extending to the West Coast.

Becoming rare to the north of Beverley, a few being said, how-

ever, to still occur as far north as Watheroo.

According to natives this species at one time extended into the

interior, while the Perth Museum has an old specimen obtained

from near Coolgardie.

Although a forest animal it is not arboreal, never climbing

trees; when alarmed generally making for the nearest hollow

log. Its habit of sitting up to watch anything gives it a great

resemblance to an African Meerkat.

Not naturally timid, and unless startled by a sudden movement,

it is often possible to approach within a few yards. If caught alive,

it does not attempt to bite.

The natives say that during the breeding-season it makes a

rather shallow perpendicular hole in the ground which the female

lives in when she has young, and that when they begin to grow

big she does not carry them about with her.

Dr. G. C. Stirling, of the Adelaide Museum, tells me that the

South Australian specimens were mostly obtained near the north-

west bend of the River Murray, where it was formerly plentiful,

but that it must be now either very rare or entirely extinct, as

it has not been obtained there for many years.

846 MR. G. C. SHORTRIDGE ON GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION [ Nov. 23,

12 specimens collected. Wagin (Arthur River); Beverley

(Boyadine-Dale River) ; Busselton (Dwaladine) ; Pinjelly

(Woyaline Wells).

Ant-Kater of Colonists.

‘Numbat’ of natives (8.W.).

Text-fig. 276.

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA cz gS. aignctuail

oNeae!

S ?

Scale of English Miles nase? oes

100 0 me 200 i 300 C. Borda a, 4 (x |

rete! wins fe ke LF \

ELYY D/Teun®

° Broome St if

Seal =

aus

Macpherson

L. Macdonald \7,

== BAST BRN

% re

<4 Carnarvon Ra.

Wallabv

Group*

Geraldton & Ss

_Norkhampton

Map showing distribution of IZyrmecobius fasciatus.

NororyctEs TYPHLOFS Stirling.

This species has not yet been discovered in Western Australia

1909.] OF MARSUPIALS AND MONOTREMES IN 8.W. AUSTRALIA, 847

south of the tropics, although there is little doubt that it occurs

throughout the far central districts.

In South Australia it has been obtained near Fowler’s Bay in

the extreme south, and around Charlotte Waters telegr: aph-station

(about latitude 26°), while it was quite recently secured in North-

Western Australia about a degree south of the Kimberley district,

in Spinifex country, between Johanna Springs and the spot where

Col. Warburton’s track cuts that of Carnegie made in 1897,

Text-fig. 277

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

Scale of English Miles.

100 200

Geraldton

pong?

Map showing distribution of Tachyglossus aculeatus ineptus.

848 MRS. E. W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA [ Noy. 23,

Other Central-Australian mammals most probably occur in the

Spinitex country of the far interior of Australia. Antechinomys

spencer has been obtained from Central South Australia. A

small jumping pouched mouse, said to exist in the rocky hills

round Laverton, might be referable to this species.

TACHYGLOSSUS ACULEATUS INEPTUS Thos. (Text-fig. 277, p. 847.)

Widely distributed over Western Australia except in the

extreme south-west ; recorded from Kojonup, but seldom seeming

to extend south of the rocky country around York and Beverley.

Although nowhere plentiful it appears to be more numerous in

the North-West than elsewhere.

Generally frequenting dry and rocky situations. Sluggish in its

movements, curling up like a hedgehog if irritated. Apparently

a great wanderer, often turning up in districts where it has

seldom if ever been observed before, even by natives.

Although the claws are very powerful and well adapted for

digging, they seem to be used chiefly for tearing up anthills, and

the animal does not seem to be truly fossorial ; but when disturbed

in sandy country it is said to be able to bury itself underground

like a mole, quickly disappearing from sight, while if the country

happens to ‘be hard or rocky, it will cling to the surface so tightly

that it is quite difficult to dislodge it. If placed in water it is a

quick and powerful swimmer.

anes described from Barrow Island.

5 specimens collected. Southern Cross (Parker's Range) ; Ga

coyne River.

‘Native Porcupine of Colonists.

‘Ningan’ (8S.W.), ‘ Bokaboi’ (N.W.), of natives.

2. Notes on some Amphipoda from the North Side of the

Bay of Biscay. Families PLeustiIpa and Husirip«.

By E. W. Sexroy *.

[Received September 20, 1909. |

(Plates LAXX. & LXXXI.7, and Text-figures 278 & 279.)

Tam indebted to Dr. Allen for the opportunity of examining

the collection of Amphipoda taken by the 8.8. ‘ Huxley ’ from the

north side of the Bay of Biscay in August, 1906 ; and for specimens

most kindly sent me for comparison I have to thank Dr. Hansen,

Professor Sars, Dr. Scharff and the Trustees of the Dublin

Museum, Mr. Tattersall, and Dr. Vanhoffen.

Variations due to Sex and Age.

The collection, though small, proved of great interest.

In some species several stages of development were found,

* Communicated by Dr. W. T. Cauman, F.Z.S.

+ For explanation of the Plates see p. 878.

Huth, London.

PS) Meo Mei sh eSy ia Sy 3edsU-ANGANENESy wenetcd aula feliz,

ese, 7S) ME IE IE )UNS AS GRANDIMANUS, Ghevr eux.

ras

oO)

“Q

N |

Lencon

EW. Sexton del.

33>

45, EUSIRUS BISCAYENSIS, Bonnier.

RHACHOTROPIS ROSTRATA, Bonnier.

49-65. RHACHOTROPIS HELLERI, Boeck.

mvEy

1909. | FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY, 849

which appear to prove conclusively that not only do these animals

become sexually mature before attaining their full growth,

but that i both sexes the secondary sexual characters undergo

considerable modification after sexual maturity is reached, the

character most affected being the second gnathopod. Hitherto it

has been accepted as a general rule amongst Amphipods that the

male only has been modified, and that it is subject to variation in

a far greater degree than the female; but an examination of this

material shows that the female undergoes quite as much modi-

fication as the male, though owing to the usually smaller size of

its gnathopods, the changes are less noticeable. (For an example

of diversity in the shape of the gnathopod hand of an ovigerous

female see Sympleustes grandimanus, Pl. LX XX. figs. 11 & 12.)

In some species the degree of difference between the stages of

development is negligible; in others it is of remarkable extent,

so much so that the two extremes of a series of stages might be

taken for absolutely distinct species. Further knowledge on this

point will lead to a considerable revision of specific nomenclature.

The variation in the gnathopod of the male has been noted

by many writers, the first to discuss it being Fritz Miiller (20)

pp. 16-18. Muller figured two forms of the hand of the male of

Orchestia darwinii, and stated that there were “nur zwei durch

keinerlei Zwischenglieder verbundene Formen.” He considered it

a case of true dimorphism. Darwin quoted Miiller’s observations

in support of his argument for Sexual Selection, (12) vol. i. p. 332,

vol. ii. p. 215. Faxon also refers to them, (14) p. 43, (15)

pp. 12 and 111, and suggests as explanation, that the two forms

may be, as in Cambarus, alternating periods in the life of the

individual, one form being assumed during the pairing season,

and the second form during the intervals between the pairing

seasons. Della Valle (13) p. 508, attributes the differences in

the two forms of the male of Orchestia darwinii to development ;

so also Stebbing (40) p. 545, where the animal is described from

Miiller’s drawings. Geoffrey Smith (33) in a series of obser-

vations on Orchestia deshayesii and O. gammarellus has made

the important discovery “that the males of these species, when

breeding is not going on, assume a semi-hermaphrodite condition

of a quite indubitable kind”; and that it is during this period

of sexual suppression that active growth takes place. He states

(p. 91) that ‘the antagonism that exists between the functional

activity of the sexual organs and growth of the body . . . appears

to result in the phenomena of high and low dimorphism only in

the male sex.” It should be noted, however, that Boulenger (5)

has recently questioned these conclusions.

The development of the female would appear to proceed on

totally different lines, and to follow a steady course from im-

maturity to full growth. In one species, Rhachotropis helleri

Boeck (infra, p.869), I was able to examine a large number of speci-

mens, about 250, and to trace a continuous series of stages of

development. The stages are easily observed in this species because

850 MRS. E. W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA [Nov. 23,

of the great modification of the chitimous cuticle of the body

with age. In the young from the incubatory pouch, 2°25 mm.

long, the dorsum is perfectly smooth, but, under a high power, a

microscopic sensory setule can be seen, inset at each point where

later either a carina or a hump is developed. The first dorsal

hump of the pereon does not develop till the animal has

attained a length of 5 mm., and not until two stages later, when

it is a little more than half-grown, can the sexes be distinguished.

At this stage, 8-9 mm. in length, with three dorsal humps

developed, the young female shows the incubatory lamelle just

budding as small excrescences, and the young male carries the

characteristic masses of sensory filaments on the antenne. At the

next stage in the female, 10 mm. length, with four dorsal humps

developed, breeding has commenced, the eggs are extruded and

carried in a large mass attached to the 5th segment, but the

lamelle are not more than half-grown, and only cover about

half the egg-mass. In other animals at this same stage,

presumably older, measuring 10°5 mm., the incubatory lamell

are fully expanded and closed to form the pouch. All the

remaining stages, to the full-grown female with seven well-

marked dorsai humps, carry eggs, and all have the lamelle fully

expanded.

Sexual dimorphism is a common feature of the Amphipoda,

the second gnathopod being the organ generally affected. One

species in the ‘ Huxley’ collection, Sympleustes grandimanus

Chevreux, displays a very unusual and marked type of di-

morphism, the side-plates and pereopods differing widely in the

sexes, as well as both the gnathopods (tfrra, p. 857).

An examination of the present material shows that the mouth-

organs are practically constant through the various stages, only

the number of spines and setz increasing with age; they would

appear to be the safest characters on which to base specific

distinctions. The antenne and gnathopods, from which such

characters are usually drawn, are the parts always the most

affected by sex and development. But it is in the sensory

equipment of the animal that most change is to be seen after

sexual maturity is reached: the ommatidia increase in number ;

the flagella of the antenne increase in length, those of the male

to a far greater degree than those of the female; the calceolli,

sensory filaments (“olfactory cylinders,” ‘“ Riechzapfen”), de.

develop in both sexes; and the peduncles of the antenne in the

male become covered with masses or thick tufts of sensory

filaments or sensory sete.

There seems to be surprisingly little individual variation in the

different stages, taken under the same conditions, though animals

in the same stage of development but captured in different

localities show considerable variation in size. I examined over

100 individuals of one stage of hachotropis helleri Boeck, from

the S.W. of Ireland, taken in one haul, and they differed from

each other neither in size, nor proportions, nor even in the

1909. ] FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 851

number of the sete and spines with which they were provided ;

but on comparing them with Norwegian specimens at the same

stage, taken in shallower water, a difference in size was at once

perceived, the Norwegian specimens measuring 12 mm. in length

as against the 10 mm. of the Irish ones.

The classification followed is that of Stebbing’s ‘ Das Tierreich :

Amphipoda.’

The measurements of the whole animal in all eases are taken

from the tip of the rostrum to the tip of the telson.

Fam. PLEUSTID4.

Genus PARAPLEUSTES Buchholz, 1874.

Syn. 1859. Paramphithoé (part) Bruzelius (7).

1860. “3 Boeck (1).

1865. “fi Goés (16).

1870. is Boeck (2).

1874. Parapleustes Buchholz (8).

1876. Pleustes Boeck (8).

1882. Paramphithoé G. O. Sars (27).

1887. és Hansen (17).

1893. ve G. O. Sars (29).

1906. Neopleustes Stebbing (40).

In 1874 Buchholz founded the genus Parapleustes on the type

species P. gracilis. He recognised its near relation to the older

genus Paramphithoé Bruz., and stated (p. 337) that he had

hesitated as to the identity of his species P. gracilis with Boeck’s

species Paramphathoé glabra, but had decided that the differences

in the form of the body and more particularly of the mandibles

justified the institution of a new genus for it *, His account of

the genus, apart from the description of the mandibles which was

founded on error, agrees in every particular with Paramphithoé.

The type species was later identified by Hansen (17) with

Paramplatheé brevicornis Sars. 'That this identification is

correct, and that Buchholz’s description and figures of the

mandibles are erroneous, I have been enabled to prove, thanks

to the courtesy of Dr. Vanhoffen and Dr. Hansen, by dissecting

one of Buchholz’s type specimens of Parapleustes gracilis and

comparing 1 with one of Sars’s type specimens of Param-

phithoé brevicorms. Sars, however, identified P. gracilis with

Boeck’s species glaber, altering Buchholz’s generic detinition of

the mandibles from ‘“ vollig ohne Spur eines Kauhéckers ” to

* “JTch muss gestehen, dass es mir etwas zweifelhaft bleibt, ob die nachstehend

beschriebene kleine Art von Ostgrénland mit den angeftihrten Synonymen [? an:

Amphithopsis glaber Boeck ; ? Paramphithoé exigua Goés ; Paramphithoé glabra

Boeck] identisch ist, da die sehr kurzen Angaben von Boeck und Gos hieriiber

betrachtliche zweifel bestehen lassen. Ich ziehe daher vor, sie als neue Art zu

beschrieben und glaube sie mit der vorigen, wegen der ziemlich betrachtlichen

Abweichungen in der Bildung der Mandibeln und Kérperformen, nicht in derselben

Gattung vereinigen zu kénnen.” Buchholz (8) p. 387.

Proc. Zoou, Soc.—1909, No. LVIII. 58

852 MRS, E. W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA [ Nov. 23,

“molar expansion well-developed and of cylindrical form,

exhibiting the usual fluted triturating surface” (29) p. 357.

The two species are, however, absolutely distinct, as will be seen

on comparison of the detailed figures of P. gracilis given below

with Sars’s figures of P. glaber in vol. i. of the ‘ Crustacea of

Norway’, pl. 126. fig. 1, gracilis having the typical molar of the

Paramphithoé degraded and almost rudimentary, while that of

glaber is well-developed and cylindrical.

Stebbing (40) has retained the generic name of Paramphithoé

Bruz., for Acanthosoma hystrix Owen and allied species, substi-

tuting the new generic name of Neopleustes for Paramphithoé

pulchella Kroyer and its allies. The type species of Parapleustes

Buch. being now proved to be a true Paramphithoé in the sense

in which Sars uses the name, and the genus Parapleustes thus

becoming a synonym of Paramphithoé, the generic name

Parapleustes must take precedence over Veopleustes Stebbing,

and this latter name must therefore be cancelled.

The species glaber Boeck falls into line with the Amphithcé

latipes M. Sars, and for these, with AmpAithopsis pulchella G. O.

Sars, 4. olrikii Hansen, and A. grandimana ieee Stebbing

(39) proposed in 1899 the generic name of Sympleustes.

PARAPLEUSTES GRACILIS Buchholz, 1874. (Plate LX XX. figs. 1-7.)

Syn. 1874. Parapleustes gracilis Buchholz (8), pp. 269, 299, &

398, Taf. vu. fig. 1.

1882. Paramphithoé brevicornis Sars (27), p. 98, Taf. iv.

ee Ils

1887. Ms gracilis Hansen (17), p. 124.

1893. a brevicornis Sars (29), pp. 353, 359, pl.

124. fig. 2.

1906. Neopleustes brevicornis Stebbing (40), p. 313, and

Parapleustes gracilis p. 320.

The specimen described below is an adult ovigerous female,

measuring 6°75 mm.; the specimen of Paramphithoé brevicornis

Sars, with which I have been able to compare it, is also an

ovigerous female but smaller, measuring only 3°75mm. Sars gives

the average length of the adult female as “scarcely attaining

4mm.,” but he appears to have had only young specimens to

examine, which, while sexually mature, were not full-grown.

Hansen (17), p. 124, says that the single specimen he ex-

amined agreed with both Buchholz’s and Sars’s descriptions and

figures, excepting in one or two trifling details: viz., the superior

antennz were rather longer than these authors stated, and the

2nd joint of the peduncle was very little shorter than the Ist,

agreeing with Buchholz’s figure, Sars on the other hand showing

it as considerably shorter than the first joint. The same

difference occurs in the two specimens I have examined, and

the proportions of the joints of the first gnathopod also differ

somewhat, but apart from these small details, due entirely to age

1909. ] FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 853

and development, the specimens are in absolute agreement on

every point.

The mouth-parts are figured afresh, Buchholz’s figures and

descriptions not being accurate. In my opinion a great many

inaccuracies arise from the custom some authors have of mount-

ing their specimens before describing or figuring them. This

appears to be a case in point. I could not at first discover how

Buchholz could possibly have overlooked the molar (which, small

and degraded as it is, can be plainly seen under the 1 in. obj.),

until I tried placing the mandible in the position represented by

him and mounting it. The exact effect of his figure was

immediately obtained, through the weight of the cover-glass

flattening and depressing the delicate pellucid molar ridge to

such an extent as to render it indistinguishable from the body

of the mandible.

Sode-plates.—The hind margin of the first three side-plates is

entire with 3 or 4 setules inset, and a single denticle at the

inferior angle, not 3 sharp teeth as described by Buchholz who

apparently mistook the insertions of the setules for incisions of

the margin.

Head (fig. 1).—Lateral corners more pointed in Buchholz’s

specimen.

Antenne. Superior.—I|st and 2nd joints of the peduncle sub-

equal; 3rd joint half the length of the 2nd. In Sars’s specimen

the Ist joint equals in length the 2nd and 3rd combined. ‘The

first two joints carry extremely fine ciliated hairs. Primary

flagellum.—Buchholz gives 15-16 joints; Sars, 12 articulations

only.” Buchholz’s co-type had 12 joints, Sars’s, 13 joints. The

Ist joint of the flagellum is shorter than the 2nd. All the joints

carry delicate sete, with long thread-like tips, and in addition

to these sete, the alternate joints beginning with the 2nd are

each provided with a very long, hyaline sensory filament, inset on

the imner surface in a line with the accessory flagellum. The

accessory flagellum (fig. 2) is present in both co-types, but quite

rudimentary and microscopic in size. It consists of a minute

pellucid flat joint carrying one ciliated hair and one long thread-

tipped seta. I have found this microscopic accessory flagellum in

all the other members of the family I have examined, distinct in

Sympleustes latipes, but too small to be of any value in classi-

fication in the others.

Inferior.—The proportions of the peduncle joints are as given

by both authors, but the peduncle is longer in proportion to the

flagellum in Buchholz’s specimen. lagellum 6-jointed.

Oral parts.— Upper lip unequally bilobed, incision oblique.

Lower lip.—Outer lobes very large and rounded; inner lobes

not projecting. Both lips covered with fine downy hair; the

outer lobes of the lower lip each with a cluster of 5 or 6 stronger

hairs.

Mandibles (figs. 3 & 4).—The anterior portion of the man-

dibles forms a scoop-like projection, almost triangular, with the

58*

854 MRS. E. W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA [| Nov. 23,

apex of the triangle at the insertion of the palp; the strong

ridge which runs down from this point to the posterior end of

the spine-row carries the molar on its inner surface at the base.

When the mandible is in position, this ridge hides the molar from

view; in the figures both mandibles are turned to show the

molar. The molar is oval, the crown indented in the middle,

with faintly marked but distinct transverse ridges. Cutting-plate

on the right mandible (fig. 3) strong and curved, divided into

8 teeth, the terminal tooth broad and truncate, the 2 above large

and pointed, and the 5 upper ones small and rounded ; no

accessory plate. On the inner surface the cutting-plate is so

ridged as to give the appearance of the teeth being coalesced for

nearly the whole length of the plate; the apices of the teeth are

considerably bevelled also, presenting a broad, ridged edge. Buch-

holz considered the formation to be due to the accessory plate

having become coalesced with the cutting-plate in both mandibles.

The left mandible (fig. 4) possesses a well-developed accessory

plate, the margin of which is divided into 9 teeth, the lowest

tooth being the largest. The cutting-plate is strongly curved,

the upper half arching over almost at right angles to the lower

portion ; the upper portion has 5 or 6 very small rounded teeth,

the lower being divided into 3 large, rounded teeth, bevelled and

ridged as in the right mandible. The two plates are set very

closely together; Buchholz in his figure confused them, and

represented them as one plate, with 2 rows of teeth on the

margin. There are 4 spines in the left spine-row; 6 in the

right. The spines are short, stout, and have a downy appear-

ance, being covered with microscopic spinules ; behind each spine

a few fine hairs are inset. The palp is exceedingly large; the

2nd joint lightly curved, with 2 strong spines; the terminal joint

the longest, falciform, and covered on the outer surface with

minute spinules. It carries on the inner margin 5 feathered

spines in the right mandible, 4 in the left.

Mawilla 1 (fig. 5).—Outer plate broad, with 2 rows of strong

spines at the apex; 5 in one row, graduated in size, curved and

bifureate; 4 in the other row, longer, more slender, and finely

serrated. The inner plate is small and rounded, widening at the

apex, and provided with 1] plumose seta, in place of 5 sete

figured by Buchholz. Palp long and slender; the apex of the

terminal joint carries 7 simple spines, 4 on the margin and 3 inset

submarginally.

Mazilla 2 (fig. 6).—Buchholz’s description is incorrect. Both

plates are broad and rounded; the owter is longer and only

slightly narrower than the inner, and carries 1 short and 5 long

stiff sete apically ; the anner plate has shorter curved sete on the

inner margin and a few fine hairs.

Mazillipeds (fig. 7)—Plates small and narrow. The inner

plate has the inner margin straight, with 1 strong tooth inset,

the outer margin convex, and the apex truncate and beset with

2 small teeth and 2 small setiform spines. The outer plate only

1909. ] FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 855

reaches to a little above the base of the 2nd joint of the palp, not

to the middle, as Buchholz says; it is furnished with 9 lightly

curved setiform spines, the apical ones inset considerably within

the margin. The palp is long, the joints not greatly differing

from each other inlength. The 2nd isa little longer than the Ist;

the 3rd and 4th are subequal, and longer than the 2nd; the 3rd is

slightly attenuated distally ; the 4th forms a strong, almost straight

claw, with a row of spinules along its inner margin. ‘The

greater part of the claw and the upper half of the 3rd joint are

covered with these spinules, and, in addition, the 3rd joint carries

a number of strong sete on the inner surface, the apical ones

nearly as long as the succeeding joint.

Gnathopods—exactly alike in both specimens with the exception

of a slight difference in the length of the joints of the first

gnathopod in Buchholz’s specimen, due, I consider, to age and

fuller development. In this specimen the first gnathopod is

slightly longer than the second ; the 2nd and 6th joints are sub-

equal to each other in length (as in Sars’s specimen) but longer in

proportion to the side-plate; the hand is a little longer than the

hand of the second gnathopod, but agrees with it in all details.

Perewopoda—exactly alike in both specimens. The terminal

joints are more curved in the hinder pereopods than in the

anterior: all are provided with a plumose seta proximally. The

2nd joints of the hinder perzopods are beset with small spines

anteriorly and are serrated posteriorly, each serration having a

setule inset.

The incubatory lamelle are attached to the second gnathopod

and the first three perzeopods. The two anterior lamelle are

exceedingly large and wide, and deeply hollowed; that of the

3rd pereopod is very small and narrow, with the hind margin

straight.

The branchial vesicles are small, that attached to the second

gnathopod being the smallest ; they increase rapidly in size to the

Ath perzeopod.

Pleopods.—First pleopod ; the outer margin of the peduncle is

fringed with long plumose sete, about 14 in number; outer

ramus 9-jointed, inner ramus 8-jointed, with 2 cleft spines on the

Ist joint; Ist joint very large in both rami. Second pleopod with

only 1 or 2 sete on the peduncle; outer ramus 8-jointed ; inner

7-jointed, with two cleft spines. Third pleopod with | cleft spine.

Uropods.—First uropod; rami subequal to the peduncle in

length; inner ramus scarcely longer than the outer. Outer ramus

in second and third wropods two-thirds the length of the inner.

Telson.—Exactly as figured by Sars, in both specimens. It

carries 2 simple setz near the apex, and a pair of long mobile

ciliated hairs on either side.

856 MRS. E. W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA [ Nov. 23,

Genus SyMPLEusTES Stebbing.

Syn. 1860. Amphithopsis (part) Boeck (i), p. 661.

1893. Parapleustes Sars (29), p. 357.

1899. Sympleustes Stebbing (39), p. 209.

1900. Dautzenbergia Chevreux (10), p. 73.

1906. Sympleustes Stebbing (40), p. 317.

Two species of this genus were taken by the ‘ Huxley “—

S. latipes M. Sars, 3 specimens; and S. grandimanus Chevreux,

5 specimens,

SYMPLEUSTES LATIPES M. Sars.

For synonymy see Stebbing (40), p. 317.

Three specimens, measuring respectively 7°5 mm., 4-5 mm., and -

2°59 mm.

This species has been recorded once before from the Bay of

Biscay, one specimen, an adult male, having been taken by the

‘Caudan’ Expedition of 1895.

The ‘ Huxley’ specimens are all young forms, the largest, 7°5 mm..,

agreeing very closely with Sars’s description and figures of the

adult (29. p. 360); the other two differing im degree only.

These latter have the palm margin of the second gnathopod

hand almost straight and the dorsal processes scarcely perceptible.

As Hansen pointed out (17. p. 135) the development of the

dorsal proeesses, and the emargination of the palm of the second

gnathopod are characters of maturity; to these may be added

another character, taken from the epimera of the 3rd_pleon

segment: in the adult the postero-lateral corner is produced to an

obtuse angle, while in the young form it is deeply notched with a

setule inset. The accessory flagellum of the superior antenna,

first noted by Bonnier (4. p. 646) is well-developed in all three

specimens,

Distribution :—

Norway: M. Sars, as Amphithoé latipes (30. p. 139), Hammerfest

and Troms06, 30-60 fms., on Hydroids ; largest, 13 mm.

A. Boeck, as Amphithopsis latipes (3. p. 355) : Jargest, 9 mm.

G. O. Sars, as Parapleustes latipes (29. p. 362), from Finmark

to the Trondhjemsfjord : 30-100 fms., on Hydroids ;

largest, 12 mm.

Norman, as Parapleustes latipes (23. p. 481), Lang Fjord :

5-15 fms.

Greenland: Norman, as Amphithopsis latipes (22. p. 208), 175 fms.

Hansen, as 4 mphithopsis latipes (17. p. 135), Disko ete.; 100-

160 fms., on Hydroids; and on clay bottom; largest, 16 mm.

Great Britain: Shetland Isles: Bate, as Calliope fingalli (adult)

(35. p. 377) = Amphithoé latipes, p. 380.

Norman, as Calliopius ossiani and C. fingalli (21. pp. 280

281); 40-90 fms.

East coast, Banff, Berwick, Yorkshire :— Bate, as Calliope

ossiani (young form) (36. p. 262).

1909. ] FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 857

Channel Is.: Norman, as Sympleustes latipes (24. p. 366).

S.W. of Ireland: Bourne, as Amphithopsis latipes (6. p. 317).

N. America: off Grand Manan: Holmes, as Sympleustes latipes

(19. p. 490); 45 fms.; 1 specimen, 15 mm.

Bay of Biscay : Taken by the ‘Caudan’: Bonnier, as Parapleustes

latipes (4. p. 645): 45° 57’ N., 6° 21’ W.; in 1410 m.;

bottom deposit ‘‘coraux et vase”; 1 specimen, male, 10 mm.

Taken by the ‘ Huxley’, 26. vii. 06 ; 48° 74’ N., 8° 123’ W.;

with the Agassiz trawl in 412 fms.; bottom—sand, mud,

and hard ground ; 3 specimens, immature.

SyMeLEUSTES GRANDIMANUS Chevreux. (Plate LX XX. figs. 8-32.)

Syn. 1887. Amphithopsis grandimana Chevreux, 2, (9) pp. 570—

580.

1893. Acanthozone latipes (part) Della Valle (13), p. 608.

1897. Parapleustes megacheir Walker, 3 , (42) p. 230, pl. 18.

figs. 4-4 ¢.

1899. Sympleustes Stebbing (39), p. 209.

1900. Dautzenbergia gr aunts Chevreux (10), pp. 78-75,

jolly oe seed

1906. Sympleustes megacheir Stebbing (40), p. 217

Sympleustes grandimanus ,, ag OF 318.

Dautzenbergia grandimana ,, oe pal28.

This species furnishes a remarkable example of the modification

of the “secondary sexual characters” after maturity is reached,

especially in the female (see figures 11.& 12.) It is interesting

also as an unusually pronounced type of sexual dimorphism. The

male and female, which have been described as separate species,

differ not only in both the gnathopods, but, what is more note-

worthy, in the shape of the first four side-plates. These in the

female are practically subequal, while in the male the 4th is

nearly twice as deep as the Ist. Other unusual points of differ-

ence will be found in the pereeopods; the 4th joint in the female

is shorter, in the male longer, than the 5th joint ; and the inner

margins of the fingers are dentate in the female, entire in the

male.

Sympleustes grandimunus is distinguished from the other

known species of the genus by the comparatively small side-plates ;

the great inequality in size of the gnathopods; the serrate fingers

of both gnathopods ; and the incised telson.

In 1887 Chevreux described the female of this species under the

name of Amphithopsis grandimana, placing it near Amphithopsis

pulchella Sars, among the Paramphithoide. In his later work,

however, he formed a new genus Dautzenbergia, for its reception,

classing this genus provisionally in the family Calliopide, pro-

visionally because of the great inequality in size between the first

and the second gnathopods. This same character and the differ-

ence in the form of the telson, are the reasons given for its

removal from the Paramphithoide.

Sars afterwards, in his ‘ Crustacea of Norway,’ placed his species

A. pulchella in the genus Par apleustes Buchholz (now Sympleustes

858 MRS. E. W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA [ Nov. 23,

Stebbing). Between the characters of this genus, as given by

Sars, l.c. p. 857, and those given by Chevreux for Daatzenbergia

I can find no essential difference; on two points only do the

accounts vary—viz., the lower lip and the telson, and of these,

the first is due to misapprehension on Chevreux’s part, and the

second, the difference in the shape of the telson, is only a cha-

racter of specific value, and not of sufficient importance to justify

the creation of a new genus. Chevreux founded his genus on a

single specimen, always an unsafe proceeding, for even if, as in

this case, the specimen be sexually mature, yet as these animals

pass through several stages of development after reaching maturity

(see Rhachotropis helleri), the presence of the incubatory pouch is

no guarantee of its being fully adult. All the parts undergo more

or less modification, and therefore characters drawn from a young

specimen are of no value as distinguishing specific features.

Description.—) specimens were taken by the ‘ Huxley,’ measur-

ing 3 mm.,5 mm., 5 mm., 5°5 mm., and 7-5 mm., respectively, all

females. Three marked stages of growthareshown: 1 immature ;

3 young females about the same stage of development as Chevreux’s

specimen (as will be seen by a comparison of his figures with

mine); and 1 larger specimen older than the others, as shown

by the further modification of the second gnathopod. The

description of the male is taken from the type specimens of

Parapleustes megacheir Walker, which, through the kindness of

Dr. Scharff, I have been able to examine; the larger specimen

measured 11 mm., the smaller 7 mm.

The body is compressed, smooth, almost pellucid, cuticle

exceedingly thin; segments well-defined. Pereon and Ist

three pleon seoments evenly rounded; 4th pleon segment

with a marked dorsal depression. Chevreux in his first account

says ‘‘les trois premiéres segments de l’abdomen présentent une

légére carene”: this statement is omitted in his later work, and

the pleon is figured as perfectly smooth and rounded. Owing to

the transparency of the cuticle permitting the underlying terga of

the 2nd and 3rd pleon segments to show through the ov erlapping

posterior edges of the segments preceding them, a curious de-

ceptive effect of dorsal teeth is produced with transmitted light

(see fig. 8). Walker in describing the male (P. megacheir) says

“second segment of pleon (metasome) having a small dorsal

tooth,” but in both sexes all the posterior margins are evenly

curved and entire.

In the young specimens the first three pleon segments have

each a small tooth at the postero-lateral corner; in the large

specimens only the 2nd and 3rd are thus provided, and in a less

degree than in the young; inferior margin of the 3rd segment

in all, strongly curved.

Side-plates.—In the female the first four are subequal in

depth; 1st produced anteriorly in an acute lobe, covering the post-

antennal corner; the 4th the broadest, lightly excavate behind ;

dth and 6th bilobed, much wider than deep. In the male, the Ist

1909. ] FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 859

and 2nd are small; the 3rd is considerably longer, but not much

wider than the 2nd; and the 4th is the largest, inferior margin

strongly curved, hind margin only a little concave (fig. 19).

Head nearly as long as the first two pereonal segments ;

rostrum very small, recurved, more so in the female than in the

male; lateral corners truncate, not much produced ; post-antennal

corners small and rounded.

Hyes large, oval; quite colourless in spirit specimens, and

difficult to trace though they show clearly enough in photographs of

the animal. Walker’s statement, “‘ eyes wanting,” is not correct.

Antenne.—Superior antenne over two-thirds the length of

the body, but the proportion varies with the age of the animal.

Pedunele: 1st joint stout, as long as the 2nd and 3rd together ;

3rd joint shorter and much more slender than the 2nd; in the

young female 5-5 mm. long, and in Chevreux’s first description the

3rd joint is only half the length of the 2nd. The peduncle carries

some fine hyaline hairs, as well as 3 or 4 ciliated ones, but the

construction of these and of the filaments and sete of the

flagellum is exceedingly difficult to observe, even when magnified

500 times, because of their fragility and transparency; this

probably accounts for Chevreux’s description ‘“ presque absolument

glabres.”. Primary flagellum.—AlIl the flagella of the larger

specimens were unfortunately broken, 34 joints remaining on one;

lst joint almost double the length of the 3rd joint of the

peduncle, carrying 3 or 4 clusters of sensory filaments; the 10

succeeding joints short, each with a cluster of filaments; the

remaining joints longer and thinner, provided each with small

sete, and a long sensory filament. The rudimentary accessory

flagellum is characteristic of the family ; it consists of one minute,

pellucid joint, flat and leaf-like, tipped with 2 or 3 hyaline cleft

setze (fig. 18).

Inferior antennce much shorter than the superior. Pedwnele :

antennal cone large; 5th joint about one-sixth shorter than the

4th. This proportion appears constant, being the same in all

the specimens examined; Chevreux in his second account has

‘beaucoup plus court ” instead of the more correct “‘ un peu plus

court” of the original description. /lagellwm in the young female

with 14 joints; both flagella broken in the large female and in

the males, 15 joints remaining in young male.

Oral parts.—Upper lip (fig. 20): Alike in both sexes. Apex

unevenly bilobed, with the rather oblique incision characteristic

of the genus ; inner margin of the right lobe minutely crenate.

Lower lip (figs. 21, 22, and 23).—Inner lobes much broader

than the outer lobes; a figure (fig. 23) is given to show the

proportions as seen from above. In the older specimens the lip

is flatter and the inner lobes larger in proportion to the outer

ones than in the young animal. Sars gives as a generic character

“posterior lip with the inner lobes scarcely projecting,” while

Chevreux has “lévre postérieure simple, sans lobes internes.” In

the young animal the lower lip has a tendency to curl in on

860 MRS. E. W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA [ Nov. 23,

itself, the outer lobes thus completely hiding the small inner

ones; it requires to be straightened out before its true construction

can be seen, and this, because of its extreme tenuity, is a diffi-

cult matter. This appears to be the explanation of Chevreux’s

statement; the specimen he examined was a young animal with

the lower lip contracted.

Mandibles strong (figs. 24, 25, 26, & 27). Cutting-plate of the

right mandible in the large female with the margin divided into

7 teeth, the two below very large; accessory plate (fig. 26) Jarge,

almost as large as that of the left mandible, but of more delicate

structure, produced below to a curved tooth, upper portion of the

margin crenulated, with 2 small teeth. In the young female the

cutting-plate has 6 teeth (the two uppermost ones being very

small) and the margin of the accessory plate is much more

dentate than in the older animal, probably less worn (fig. 25). The

accessory plate being pellucid and lying flat against the cutting-

plate, is no doubt the reason it escaped Chevreux’s notice. Jn

the male the cutting-plate is divided into 6 teeth; the accessory

plate is of the same construction as that of the female but with

the inferior margin straight, not curved (fig. 27).

Left mandible (fig. 24).—In both male and female the cutting-

plate is divided into 6 teeth, the second lowest being the largest ;

the accessory-plate margin into 5 teeth. The figure given by

Chevreux is scarcely accurate. The right spine-row, male and

female, contains 7 spines, the left 8, each with a plumose brush-

like seta behind; the spines have a downy appearance, being

covered with microscopic spinules. Molar prominent, cylindrical ;

the crown is ridged transversely with small rows of teeth; it is

surrounded with fine hairs, and carries a long ciliated hair pos-

teriorly. In the female the crown of the left molar is ridged all

over, but the anterior portion of the crown of the right molar

is smooth. Palp very large; 3rd joint unusually long, much

longer than the Ist and 2nd taken together; the distal half of

its anterior margin is bordered with strong bristles (19 in the

female, 17 in the male), the 5 apical ones set at a different angle

from the others, and feathered on both sides, while the remaining

ones are feathered on one side with cleft tips; the middle bristle

in the apical group is twice the length of the others. In

addition to these a diagonal row crosses the joint proximally on

the outer side; and the tip of the joint is covered with minute

spines. The 2nd joint is produced a little anteriorly, like, but in

a less degree, to that of S. latipes; it carries a group of bristles

distally.

First maxilla (fig. 29).-—Inner plate small, with 2 long, and 2

minute plumose hairs; outer plate in the female with 7 spines,

4 large, strong, furcate, and the other 3 longer, each with about

6 small teeth. The male has the same number of spines, but

fewer teeth on the spines. Palp biarticulate, longer than the

outer plate; apex with a row of 5 feathered spines on the margin

and 3 feathered sete submarginally.

1909. | FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 861

Second maxilla (fig. 30).—Both plates covered with fine hairs ;

inner plate slightly the smaller, with a row of 4 plumose hairs on

the inner surface, the proximal one the longest. The apices of

both plates are provided with long stiff sete, serrated for half their

length.

Maxillipeds (fig. 28).—Female. Inner plate, apical margin

straight with 2 small, broad teeth, and 5 setiform feathered spines ;

the inner margin carries 2 stout feathered spines. Outer plate

reaching to the middle of the 2nd joint of the palp; a short,

curved, flat spine with serrate edges is inset at the apex, with 3

setiform feathered spines on the right maxilliped and 4 on the left ;

the inner margin is produced beyond the row of spines into a

delicate crenulated border (similar to that of the second gnathopod

palmar border of the male). Male exactly as in female, except for

an increased number of spines and sete ; 3 along the inner margin

of the inner plate; and 5 setiform spines on the apical margin of

both outer plates in addition to the curved spines. The immature

specimen 3 mm. long has 3 on each outer plate and the curved

spine at the inner angle is more slender; the construction and pro-

portions are the same as in the adult. Palp, 2nd joint very large,

much larger than the 3rd; 3rd produced a little anteriorly over

the finger: 4th joint or finger longer than the 3rd, with a distinct

nail, anterior margin edged with rows of minute spinules.

Gnathopods very unequal in size in the full-grown animal,

though in the young there is not much difference between them.

Tn the ‘ Huxley’ specimens, the small 3 mm. one has the hand of

the second gnathopod only one-fourth longer than the hand of

the first; in the intermediate specimens 5-5°5 mm. the difference

increases, the second being twice the length of the first; and

the inequality is still greater in the largest specimen 7°5 mm. Of

the two males examined the smaller one, 7 mm., has the second

gnathopod hand twice the length of the first ; the difference is

greater in the larger specimen of 11 mm.

First gnathopod (figs. 9 & 10).— Female. 2nd joint large, curved,

carrying proximally, on either side, several extremely long and

delicate sete; 4th joint cup-shaped; 5th large, produced to a

transparent lobe at the posterior distal angle on the outer side,

the anterior margin shorter than that of the 6th joint in all the

specimens, more markedly so in the young. The shape of the 6th

joint or hand varies with age; in the small 3 mm. specimen, the

posterior margin is convex, palm defined by a sensory spine ; but

in the larger specimens the palmar angle is well produced, the

hind margin is straight and about the same length as the palm.

Chevreux, however, describes it thus, ‘‘son bord palmaire se

confond avec le bord postérieur, et forme avec lui une courbe

reguliére.” -In examining the ‘ Huxley’ specimens I found that

the hand in the natural position is held turned inwards at an

angle to the rest of the limb, bringing the palmar angle under-

neath, thus masking the real shape of the joint, and giving it the

convex appearance described by Chevreux. In the figure (fig. 10)

862 MRS. E, W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA [ Nov. 23,

I have bent the hand back to the level of the other joints, in

order to show its true contour. The palm has a submarginal row

of small setz on the outer surface, and 2 or 3 clusters of longer

sete, and carries besides in all the specimens (male and female) a

regular fringe of minute spinules on the margin, extending round

the palmar angle. ‘The sensory spines at the angle are notable

for the great length of their apical filaments; the young female

has 2 spines on the outside and 3 on the inside of the angle, the

larger specimen more. Similar spines occur on the palm of the

second gnathopod hand and on the pereopods. The posterior

margins of the 5th and 6th joints are deeply inset with clusters

of sensory sete, and the under surfaces of both joints carry two

longitudinal rows of groups of these sete. The finger (fig. 14)

is broad, curved, and serrated in all the stages, a setule being

inset in each serration ; the number of the serrations increases

with age. ‘The tip of the finger fits into a small groove on the

inner surface of the palm between the two groups of spines at the

angle.

Male (fig. 9)—The proportions of the 5th and 6th joints differ

in the male. The anterior margin of the 5th joint is half as long

again as the 6th, instead of only slightly longer as in the female ;

and the posterior margin of this joint is convex and not produced

to a lobe at the distal angle. The shape of the hand is different

in the two sexes, the hind margin being shorter than the palmar

margin in the male, longer in the female. The finger also is

longer in proportion, with more serrations.

Second gnathopod (figs. 11, 12, & 138) powerfully developed.

2nd joint broad and curved, with some of the long delicate setz

proximally on either side; both this and the succeeding joint are

prolonged at the anterior angles in large rounded pellucid lobes.

The 4th joint is produced posteriorly to a subacute lobe tipped

with sensory sete; the 5th is also produced posteriorly, to the

same width as the 6th joint, its contour in the female forming

one continuous line with the 6th; posterior margins of both

inset with groups of sensory sete, more In number in the larger

specimens. The hand undergoes a remarkable amount of modifi-

cation with the growth of the animal, especially in the female.

Both the hand and the finger differ in the two sexes.

Female (figs. 11 & 12).—In the immature specimen 3 mm.,

the whole of the posterior margin is evenly curved, the palm,

defined by 2 sensory spines, being the same length as the hind

margin. In the young female 5°5 mm., sexually mature but not

full-grown, the posterior margin is still convex, but the palm is

half as long again as the hind margin, and the palmar angle is

developed ; while in the large female 7-5 mm., the palm is concave

instead of convex, with the palmar angle acutely produced, and is

more than twice the length of the hind margin. The palmar margin

in the young female projects in a small subacute lobe at about

one-third of its length from the finger articulation ; the whole of

the margin is crenate; and the tip of the finger fits into a small

19093] FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 863

hollow at the angle between the two large sensory spines. In the

large female the palm is greatly elongated, the projecting lobe

being one-fifth of the distance from the finger-articulation, with a

deep indentation immediately following it; equidistant between this

lobe and the palmar angle is a slighter indentation with a small

projection following; the whole of the margin crenate. The

palmar angle projects considerably beyond the palm-level, the tip

of the finger impinging against the under surface of the palm

some distance from the angle instead of meeting it, as in the

young animal. The palm is bordered on either side with the

sensory spines characteristic of this species, and with long cleft-

tipped sete, the under surface thickly setose. The finger is

strong, curved and serrate; the serrations are very distinct in the

immature specimen, 4 in number with a setule inset in each, as

in the first gnathopod ; much less distinct in the young female,

6 in number; and only visible in the large specimen under a high

power, when they show as oblique incisions.

Male (fig. 13).—The hand in the young male is about twice as

long as broad, with the palm half as long again as the hind margin,

As in the female, transverse rows of sensory set are deeply imcee

along the hind margin, 5 in the female, 8 in the male. The

palmar angle is as in the young female, the tip of the finger

meeting it and fitting between the groups of sensory spines.

Walker describes the palm margin (p. 231) as ‘‘divided into three

lobes with crenate edges by two deep sinuses.” The edges of

these lobes are of very delicate structure, pellucid, with the

sensory spines and sete inset considerably within the margin.

The finger is large, stout, with a deep indentation proximally on

the inner edge; it has 14 of the oblique incisions in the young

male. The larger male agrees with the one described, with the

accentuation of the lobes and sinuses natural to the greater

development.

Perceopods.—The 1st and 2nd pereopods are practically sub-

equal in length ; basal joints with some of the long sete on either

side, as in the gnathopods. Hinder pereopods not differing

much in length, basal joints expanded, rounded oval, carrying

small spines on the anterior margins, and minute setules on the

posterior ; 4th joints produced downwards at the posterior angle

to long triangular lobes ; 5th jomts also produced but in a less

degree. The female differs from the male in having the 4th joints

shorter than the 5th, instead of longer; this difterence’is very

slight in the first two pereopods, but marked in the hinder ones.

Another difference lies in the terminal joints ; those of the female

being provided with two small teeth on the inner margin, while

those of the male have the margin entire (figs. 15, 16, and 17). All

the terminal joints carry a plumose hair on the outercurve. The

finger of the 3rd perzopod in the female differs a little in form

from the others; it is more hollowed underneath, and has the

second auxiliary tooth much produced. The sensory spines are

as in the gnathopods.

864 MRS, E. W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA [Nov. 23,

Branchial vesicles and incubatory lamelle comparatively small.

The large female had four eggs remaining in the incubatory pouch ;

the eggs very large in proportion to the animal’s size, exceeding

in leagth the hand of the first gnathopod.

Pleopods very long. All the peduncles are provided with fine

hairs ; coupling-spines very small, apices recurved, with 2 small

teeth on one side and 3 on the other. In the Ist and 2nd pairs

the rami are longer than the peduncle, 12-jointed ; 4 cleft spines

on the inner ramus of the lst pair, 3 on the 2nd. In the 3rd

pair the rami are subequal in length to the peduncle, 10-jointed,

3 cleft spines on the inner ramus.

Uropods (fig. 31).—Apices reach to nearly the same level. The

rami of the Ist pair are about subequal to the peduncle in length;

the rami of the 3rd pair twice as long as the peduncle: inner

rami of the 2nd and 38rd pairs longer than the outer; all the

margins edged with small spines,

Telson (figs. 31 & 32) in the female cleft for one-quarter its

length ; apices each with a setule inset. In the male the cleft is

slightly oblique, with the apices dehiscent. Just above the cleft

on either side, a pair of mobile plumose hairs is inset, with a few

scattered ones proximally. Chevreux first described the telson

as rounded, but in the later account he describes and figures it

as cleft.

Fam. HUSIRID®.

For synonymy see Stebbing (40), p. 338.

Three of the four species of Husiride collected by the ‘ Huxley’

were taken in one haul at Station XII. in 246 fathoms. Two of

these, Husirus biscayensis Bonnier, and Mhachotropis rostrata

Bonnier, are recorded for the first time since their discovery by

the ‘Caudan’ Expedition in 1895. One specimen of the hitherto

unknown male of Husirus biscayensis was taken. Owing to

the method of capture, the Agassiz trawl, all the specimens are

more or less mutilated, the slender fragile perzeopods especially

suffering. The specimens of Husirus longipes Boeck, the fourth

species, taken at a much less depth, 109 fms., and by a different

method, are in a good state of preservation; these were caught

in a tow-net attached to the dredge working on the bottom.

Genus Eusirus Kroyer, 1845.

For synonymy see Stebbing (40), p. 338.

Evsirus LonGIPEsS Boeck, 1861.

Syn. Stebbing (40), p. 341.

Three specimens, males, the largest measuring 8 mm., were taken

at Station IV. near La Chapelle Bank, 23. viii. 06, lat. 47° 48’ N.,

long. 7° 25° W., in 109 fathoms; bottom deposit, coarse sand and

broken shell.

This species has been recorded twice before from the Bay of

1909. | FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 865

Biscay, trawled by the ‘ Hirondelle’ at two closely adjoining

stations about 110 miles to the 8.E. of the ‘Huxley’ Station.

(Chevreux (10), pp. 65, 171, 172.)

Distribution. Coast of Norway, 30-300 fms. Boeck (3), p. 504;

Sars (29), p. 420.

Shetland Isles, 40-50 fms.; bottom deposit, sand. Norman

as H. helvetic, (21) p. 281.

Scotland, W. coast, 10-12 fms.; bottom—mud, gravel, broken

shell. Robertson (25), p. 42; Scott (31), p. 173.

Channel Islands, off Guernsey, 25 fms. Walker & Hornell (41),

D. D3.

is of Biscay, 166 & 180 m.; bottom deposit, muddy sand.

Chevreux (10), pp. 65, 171, 172.

Bay of Naples. Della Valle as #. cuspidatus (13), p. 669.

Adriatic. Heller as H. bidens, (18) p. 32.

KUSIRUS BISCAYENSIS Bonnier, 1896, (Plate LX X XI. figs. 33-45.)

1896. Husirus biscayensis Bonnier (4), pp. 651-653, pl. xxxix.

mer, Je

7 specimens, one male measuring barely 13 mm., and six females

12-13°5 mm. in length.

The original description was made by Bonnier from one spe-

cimen, a mutilated female, to which were lacking the superior

antenne (except the Ist joint), the terminal joints of the 5th

pereopods, and the 3rd uropods. The description of a species

from a single specimen is always a difficult matter, and with the

arrival of fresh material, a modifying of the original account

becomes necessary. Seven specimens were taken by the ‘ Huxley’:

one male, the first hitherto recorded, and six ovigerous females,

all mutilated, as was to be expected from the method of capture,

the Agassiz trawl. ‘Two of the specimens, however, retained the

antenne and uropods in good condition, but in all, the hinder

pereeopeda were missing. A curious point is that two of the

females have the 2nd gnathopod on the right side abnormal,

much smaller than the corresponding gnathopod on the other side.

In one the side-plate and 2nd joint are normal, the 5th, 6th and

7th joints very small; but in the other, though the branchial

vesicles and incubatory lamelle are the normal size, both the 2nd

and 3rd side-plates are small and malformed, the 2nd gnathopod

is much smaller (text-fig. 278, p. 866) and the Ist pereopod is

only half the size of the one on the left side. It would almost

appear to be due to some injury received while immature,

before the development of the incubatory lamelle. The male is

easily distinguished from the female by its more slender form;

by the antenne with their dense fascicles of sensory bristles; the

much shorter pereon; and by the 4th pleon segment (fig. 37),

the anterior dorsal depression of which is more marked and the

dorsal carina more developed.

The whole animal (fig. 33) is covered with microscopic spines

and fine hairs, these last especially numerous on the pleon.

es ;

866 MRS. E. W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA — | Noy. 23,

Superior antenna. Female (fig. 34).—First joint of the peduncle

broad, with several dentiform apical projections; it carries a fan

of fine sete distally, and several sensory ciliated hairs; 4 long

sensory hairs above and 7 or 8 small ones, and a transverse row

of the small ones on its inner surface. The 2nd joint is longer

than the Ist, also apically dentate, with curved spines; the 3rd

Text-fig. 278.

Eusirus biscayensis Bonnier.

Second gnathopods of the female, showing the abnormal right gnathopod.

joint small, widening distally, spines curved. Primary flagellum.

In the two specimens examined the tips were broken, 32 joints

remaining. ‘The lst joint is the largest; from the 9th—27th the

joints vary in length, short ones carrying the long sensory fila-

ments alternating with longer ones provided with small sete only.

The filaments are set in groups of 3 to 5 on the outer side of

the antenna, the middle filament of each group being double the

length of the others, equalling in length the six succeeding joints.

1909.4 FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 867

These groups occur on each joint from the Ist to the 9th, then on

alternate jomts to the 27th. The accessory flagellum (fig. 35) :

1-jointed, narrowly laminar, with a large cleft spine and two

divergent setz at the apex.

Male (fig. 36).—Only the Ist joint of the peduncle remaining.

This has the dentiform projections and sensory ciliated hairs as

in the female, but is furnished posteriorly with 8 transverse rows

or tufts of fine sensory bristles, extending partway round the

inner side.

Inferior antenna. Female (fig. 34)—The 2nd and 3rd joints

of the peduncle apically dentate; the 4th long and broad, with

sinuous upper margin, thickly setose on its anterior surface, and

produced at the posterior angle to a setiferous lobe; the Sth,

subequal to it in length, is much narrower, with numerous small

sete anteriorly and several long fine ones distally. The flagellum

consists of about 20 joints, each furnished anteriorly with a

cluster of small setze, those on alternate joints being longer than

the others. I found no trace of the calceoli mentioned by

Bonnier.

Male (fig. 36).—Only four joints of the peduncle remaining.

The upper margin of the 3rd joint has four tufts of the sensory

bristles in the right antenna, five in the left; the 4th joint

carries twelve of these in the right and thirteen in the left

antenna, the apical group being the largest, and containing also

several long sensory ciliated hairs. This joint is produced at the

posterior angle, as in the female, to a lobe bordered with long

fine sete; on the posterior margin are several clusters of the

ciliated hairs, with a longitudinal row of 7 or 8 of the small ones

proximally, each set in a little depression similar to those on the

1st joint of the superior antenna.

Upper and lower lips. Female (figs. 38, 39).—The figures given

by Bonnier are not of the same magnification. Jnner lubes of the

lower lip covered with fine hairs.

Mandibles. Female (figs. 41, 42, 43, 44).—Cutting-plates greatly

curved, with a strong obtuse tooth above, bidentate below in the

right mandible, rounded and recurved in the left. These plates

appear subject to great variation. Bonnier gives (loc. cit. p. 651)

“apex allongé, robuste, sans denticulations; le processus acces-

soire est élargi et présente cing a six dentelures sur lun des

appendices, tandis que sur l’autre il est rudimentaire, et tridente ;

il est accompagné d’une rangée de cing petits poils courts.” In

the three specimens examined I found the accessory plate of

the left mandible with 8 teeth in two specimens (fig. 44), 9 in

the other, 5 or 6 spines in the spine row, the accessory plate

following the deep curve of the cutting-plate. In the right

mandible the accessory plate is of a more complicated structure,

divided below, the inner portion tuberculate with 3 or 4 strong

teeth; the other portion variable as regards the number of teeth

but with one above and one below strongly produced (figs. 41, 42).

In one specimen the accessory plate was broken, leaving only the

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1909, No. LIX. 59

868 . MRS. E. W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA [Nov. 23,

inner tridentate portion intact; from Bonnier’s description and

figure I should imagine the same accident had occurred to his

specimen. ‘The spine-row in all three contained 4 spmes. The

bristles of the 2nd joint of the palp are plumose; those of the 3rd

serrate, the two apical ones much longer than the others.

Maxilla 1. Female-—J/nner plate with 2 large plumose sete and

several fine hairs; owéer plate with 11 strongly denticulate spines,

arranged in two rows on the apex, 6 in one row, longer than the

others, with 4 or 5 teeth on each spine; the spines of the other

row have only 1 or 2 teeth apiece (cf. Ahachotropis rostrata,

fic. 55). Bonnier’s specimen had “huit dents barbelées toutes

semblables.” On the inner margin of the palp the sete are

arranged in two parallel rows, bases contiguous, apices widely

divergent.

Mawxilla 2. Female.—Both plates nearly covered with fine hairs.

Mawillipeds. Female (fig. 40)—Resembling 1. propinquus, as

figured by Sars; easily distinguished from all the other species of

Eusirus by the fan-shaped groups of exceedingly long, flexible,

plumose setze on the outer surface of the Ist and 2nd basal joints.

Each seta has a broad pellucid shaft, with several longitudinal rows

of delicate hairs running the whole length. There are two groups

on each joint; those on the Ist joint containing 16 sete i each

fan and extending to beyond the middle of the 2nd joint of the

palp; those on the 2nd joint each with 14 sete, much smaller, set

more closely together, only reaching to the Ist joint of the palp.

Gnathopods | & 2. Female.—The figure given by Bonnier is that

of the first enathopod, but through an error it is marked as the

second. ‘The second gnathopod (see text-fig. 278, p. 866) is longer

than the first, the 2nd joint, for example, being as long as the

2nd and 3rd taken together of the first. The 4th joint is more

produced posteriorly, forming a distinct lobe; both this and the

more acute lobe of the 5th joint are provided with numerous

finely serrate cleft bristles. The hand is longer though no wider

than that of the first, the palm with a densely crowded row of

small sete on either side of the margin, about 60 on the inner

side and 40 on the outer, with a few widely spaced set above.

The posterior angle of the palm is bordered with 6 or 7 large

sensory spines, and at the articulation of the finger is a large

plumose specialised bristle (cf. also #. longipes, Rhachotropis

rostrata, R. helleri, &e.). In the abnormal specimen there are

only 25 small sete on the inner margin and 27 on the outer.

First and second perceopods. Kemale.—Bonnier says of his

specimen (p. 652): “le méropodite n’est pas plus long que le

carpopodite”; the ‘Huxley’ specimens differ from this, having

the 4th jomt longer than the 5th, as in all the other known

species of Husirus.

Third pleon segment. Kemale.—Hind margin nearly straight,

with 23 down-turned serrations turning the corner; posterior

angle rounded; lower margin produced to a strong denticle

behind ; 11 spinules inset submarginally.

1909. ] FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 869

Third uropods (fig. 45).—The peduncle as long as the telson ;

rami broad, subequal in length to the peduncle, the outer ramus

a little.the shorter; margins bordered with sensory spinules.

The peduncle has three rows of these spinules.

Distribution. Taken by the ‘Caudan’ Expedition, 1895, 44°

17’ N., 4° 38’ W., in 940 metres; bottom deposit, mud.

By the ‘ Huxley,’ August 26, 1906, at Station XTI., 48° 72’ N.,

8° 13’ W., about 240 miles to the N.W. of the ‘Caudan’ station,

in 246 fathoms; bottom deposit, fine sand.

Genus Ruacuorroris 8. I. Smith, 1883.

For synonymy see Stebbing (40), pp. 347, 729.

RracHorroris rostrata Bonnier, 1896. (Plate LXXXI.

figs. 46-48.)

Rachotropis rostrata Bonnier (4), p. 653.

4 specimens, all males, measuring respectively: 10, 10, 9°5,

and 9 mm.

I have only one or two points to add to the excellent descrip-

tion and figures given by Bonnier. On p. 655, he states: “la

mandibule a un apex sans denticulations, avec un processus

accessoire denticulé, bien développé sur lun des appendices et

rudimentaire sur l’autre.” In these specimens, however, as will

be seen by the figures (47, 48) the cutting-plate is elongate,

ineurved, with a strong tooth above, regularly crenulate in the

right mandible, the lower end of which is bidentate, and having

several irregular crenulations on the left mandible with the lower

end rounded and deeply incurved. Both accessory plates are well

developed; the margin of the left divided into 8 teeth; the

right, as in #. biscayensis, of a more complicated construction,

forming distally 2 strong broad teeth, with 15 serrations above,

and having the upper part of the plate divided and its inner

portion produced to a long falciform tooth (cf. R. helleri, fig. 54).

The left spine-row has 3 spines, the right 2, each with a plumose

brush-like bristle behind.

Distribution. Taken by the ‘Caudan,’ 1895, 44° 17’ N., 4°

38’ W., in 950 metres; bottom deposit, mud. 3 specimens male.

By the ‘ Huxley,’ August 26, 1906, at Station XII., 48° 72'N.,

8° 13’ W., in 246 fathoms; bottom deposit, fine sand.

RHACHOTROPIS HELLERI Boeck. (Plate LX XXI. figs. 49-65.)

For synonymy see Stebbing (40), p. 351.

20 specimens: 1 male measuring 8:75 mm.; 19 females from

10-12°5 mm. in length, one specimen with a young one 2:25 mm.

long still remaining in the incubatory pouch.

These specimens showed several points of difference from the

R. hellert figured by Sars (29), pl. 150, viz., all the segments of

the pereon dorsally raised, the 7th pereonal segment with

lateral carine, and the first three pleon-segments with the

59*

870 MRS. EB. W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA [Nov. 23,

postero-lateral margins firmly serrate. On consulting Prof. Sars

and Mr. Tattersall on the matter, they most kindly sent me

specimens which prove these differences.to be due to age. Mr.

‘Tattersall’s specimens, about 250 in number, all taken at one

station by the ‘ Helga,’ show a very interesting regular series

of the stages of development, from the young in the incubatory

pouch with the dorsum smooth to the full-grown female with all

seven perzon-segments dorsally raised.

In this species the completion of sexual maturity in the female

coincides with the development of the fourth dorsal perzeon-hump

at 10 mm. length. A previous stage, 8 mm., shows the incubatory

lamellz just starting as very small glabrous plates, but none of

the specimens of this size had the lamelle further expanded, nor

carried eggs. Specimens 10 mm. long, with the Ist, 2nd, 3rd,

and 7th pereon-humps produced, had the lamelle half-grown,

with two or three minute hairs near the apices, and carried large

rounded masses of eggs protruding considerably beyond the

lamelle and flattened underneath against the body-wall. The

eggs, about 60 in number, each measuring “25 mm., are supported

on long bulbous stalks, branching from a short central stem by

which: the mass is attached to the 5th segment (see fig. 51).

Specimens of 10°5 mm. length show the lamelle fully developed,

bordered with long hairs and closed to form the pouch. The

eggs enclosed are separate from each other, fewer in number, and

large, some measuring as much as | mm.

Most of the Irish specimens are at this latter stage of develop-

ment, answering exactly to the description and figures given by

Sars (pl. 150); the Norwegian specimens at this same stage are

larger, averaging 12 mm. About 40 of the Irish spectmens were

larger than the rest, all ovigerous, all with the Ist, 2nd, 3rd,

6th, and 7th humps, and the lateral carine of the 7th segment,

and in most cases with the 4th and 5th humps perceptible as

slight swellings of the posterior margins.

Of the ‘ Huxley’ specimens, 18 of the 19 females were full-

grown, with all seven dorsal humps produced. The remaining

female, of 10 mm. length, had only six humps, that of the 5th

segment not being developed. This specimen is younger than

the others, as is proved by the fact that the antenne had only

10 joints in each flagellum, instead of the 12 joints of the larger

animals.

The males are distinguishable from the females at a glance by

the shorter, more compressed perzon, and the long filiform

flagella of the antenne. Unfortunately, none of them are full-

grown, though sexually mature, as shown by the development of

the antenne. Of the Ivish specimens, 14 measure 10mm. In

all these the 7th hump is large and the Ist very small, the other

segments smooth; no trace of the lateral carinze on the 7th;

the antennal joints as Sars has figured them, the 4th joint of the

peduncle of the inferior antenna being three-quarters the length

of the 5th.

1909. ] FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 871

The single male specimen taken by the ‘Huxley’ measures

8:75 mm. and has apparently just undergone ecdysis, the integu-

ment being exceedingly thin and transparent and easily crumpled.

The whole animal is much more slender and compressed than the

Irish specimens, probably owing to its condition; it differs also

in having well-marked carine on the 7th segment, while all the

other segments are smooth, and in the number and proportions

of the antennal joints. This latter point is probably due to

immaturity, the length of the joints of the peduncle and the

number of joints in the flagella increasing with age.

Integument (fig. 50)—The whole animal is covered with

minute scale-like plates, with pectinate margins.

Perwon.—In the young from the incubatory pouch, 2°25 and

3 mm. long, the perzon is perfectly smooth, the dorsal processes

and lateral carine of the 7th segment being represented by

mobile sensory setules, each inset in a little depression of the

cuticle. The 7th dorsal process appears to develop first, followed

by the Ist, 2nd, and 3rd consecutively, then the 6th and Ath, the

5th bemg the smallest and the last to arrive. At about 5 mm.

length the 7th hump commences as a slight rounding of the

margin behind. At 7 mm. it is well developed and elevated as

in the adult, and the Ist also can be seen. At 8-9 mm. the

hump on the 2nd segment has appeared ; and at 10 mm. the Ist,

2nd, 3rd, and 7th are well-marked, and the lateral carine of the

7th segment indicated by a rounding of the margin. In only

the largest specimens, 11-13 mm., are all seven humps developed ;

lateral carinee ending in denticles. The posterior angles of the

hinder segments are produced backwards, those of the 7th acute

and slightly serrate.

Side-plates overlapping considerably. Anterior lobe of the 5th

broader than_posterior ; anterior lobe of 6th very small; 5th and

6th ridged laterally; in the young from the incubatory pouch the

lateral ridges are distinctly though faintly indicated; 5th, 6th,

and 7th serrate behind.

Pleon.—The postero-lateral margins of the first three segments

firmly serrate, the serrations turning the corner; segments | and

2 more rounded in the female than in the male, the teeth of

the lateral carine and the serrations downcurved; segment 3

rounded quadrate, evenly serrated, the lateral denticles and the

12-14 serrations upcurved. The 3rd segment in both male and

female carries a row of long, plumose sensory hairs, set just under

the projecting tooth of the dorsal carina of the 2nd segment. In

the young the dorsal carinew of segments 1-4 are indicated, as

also the lateral carine of the 3rd, and in the place of the denticles

which develop later, minute sensory setules, sunilar to those of

the perzon, are inset. The apices of the telson and of the uropods

are likewise provided with these setules.

Head about the length of the first two pereonal segments in the

female, of the first three in the male; rostrum broad and deflexed,

not quite half the length of the Ist joint of the superior antenna,

872 MRS. E, W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA [Nov. 23,

yes large and prominent, and pyriform in the adult, with

numerous small dark ommatidia. In the young the eyes are

round ; in gone specimen, 4 mm., the very dark ommatidia

eavanen ed 22, arranged in 5 rows; in another, 8 mm., the shape

was a rounded oval, the ommatidia numbering about 80.

Antenne: superior antenna, full-grown female.—Ilst joint of

the peduncle not so long as the 2nd and 3rd together; 3rd nearly

two-thirds the length of the 2nd; Ist and 2nd with apical teeth.

Primary flagellum scarcely as long as the peduncle, each joint

carrying a calceolus and a long sensory filament; 12-jointed in

the largest specimens, 12°5 mm. long, with all 7 pereon-humps

well dev eloped, as in fig. 49. In slightly smaller specimens,

11 mm., with the 4th and 5th segment humps minute, the joints

of the flagellum numbered 11, while in the smallest ‘Huxley’

specimen, 10 mm., there were ‘only 10 joints in each flagellum.

The accessory flagellum consists of 1 small joint with 1 long ciliated

hair and | sensory cleft seta (fig. 52); the ciliated hair being inset

on the under side, much lower than the seta, gives the appearance,

when in position, of a minute apical joint.

Male. ‘ Huxley’ specimen, 8°75 mm.— Ist joint as long as the

2nd and 3rd together; 3rd not quite half the length of the 2nd.

Primary flagellum 23-jointed ; accessory flagellum as in female,

tipped with long ciliated hair and 2 cleft sete. The Ist joint of

the primary flagellum is long and broad; the 2nd short; the

following 8 successively a little longer and thinner, each with a

calceolus and a dense group of sensory filaments (fig. 61) on the

inner side; the next 4 joints are alternately long and short, the

long ones with a cluster of setz only, the short ones with a

calceolus and sensory filaments. This alternation of long and

short joints occurs also in the inferior antenna (cf. also Husirus

biscayensis). The remaining 9 joints are of equal length, with

clusters of small filaments. The ciliated hairs on the peduncle

are remarkable for the great length of the ‘“ feathering.”

In the Ivish specimens, 10 mm., the Ist jot of the peduncle

is shorter than the 2nd and 3rd combined; 3rd joint about half

the length of the 2nd. The primary flagella are all broken,

31 joints remaining on one.

The young in the ineubatory pouch has the 1st and 2nd joints

subequal in length, the 3rd half as long as the 2nd; primary

flagellum of 4 joints not nearly so long as ihe peduncle; accessory

flagellum (fig. 53) 1-jointed, tipped with 2 setz and 1 sensory

filament.

Inferior antenna. Fall-grown female.—Agrees with Sars’

description.

Male. ‘ Huxley’ specimen.—4th joint of the peduncle broader

and slightly shorter than the 5th; 3rd, 4th, and 5th posteriorly

laminar. The flagellum subequal to the peduncle in length, 24-

jointed; the first 4 joints each carry a calceolus and a cluster of

long sete; the next 8 are alternately long and short, the short

ones with a calceolus and long sete; the 14th, 17th, 20th, and

1909.) FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 873

apical joint with long sete, the others with only 3 or 4 small sete

apiece.

The Ivish specimens of 8-9 mm. agree with the ‘ Huxley’ one;

the sensory filaments and calceoli are developed, though in much

less degree than in the adult. The larger males, 10 mm., have

the peduncle joints of the inferior antenna as figured by Sars;

the 4th joint being three-quarters the length of the 5th, instead

of subequal to it, as in the younger animals; flagellum 36-jointed.

In the young in the incubatory pouch the 4th and 5th joints

of the pedancle, taken together, much exceed the flagellum in

length.

The caleceoli are of exactly the same construction as those

figured by Bonnier for 2. rostrata, but with the “ cupule” much

smaller in proportion to the “ tube.” They are a character of

sexual, maturity, appearing simultaneously with the incubatory

lamelle in the female, and with the antennal sensory filaments in

the male, and increasing in size and number with the animal’s

growth.

Oral parts : upper lip.—The apex appears to be more produced

in the male than in the female; apical margin covered with fine

minute hairs, with a cluster of longer ones on either side.

Mandibles. Female (fig. 54): Right mandible.—Cutting-plate

greatly curved; margin divided into 8 rounded teeth, with 1 large

obtuse tooth above, and 2 very large teeth below. Accessory

plate tridentate, upper tooth at a different level from the others,

as appears usual in this genus. Left mandible.— Cutting-plate

with 1 large tooth above, 7 small rounded ones, and 2 strong

incurved teeth below. Accessory plate much stronger than that

of the right mandible, margin divided into 6 teeth. 5 spines in

the spine-row, each with a delicate brush-like seta behind. The

spines are stout, and being covered with minute spinules, have a

downy or furry appearance. J/olar prominent, the small spines

edging the crown of the same construction as those of the spine-

row ; crown surrounded with numerous long fine sete.

. Male.—Cutting-plates tridentate below, margin divided into

9 rounded teeth ; accesscry plates asin female. 4 spines in spine-

row in ‘ Huxley” specimen, 5 in Irish specimens of 10 mm.

length.

The terminal joint of the palp is covered on the outer side

with a fur-like spinose armature. The margin is bordered with

three series of spines; an apical group of 3 or 4, long and seti-

form; then a group of short, flat, strongly dentate spines (fig. 59),

usually 5 on the right palp and 6 on the left; the third series

extending along the rest of the margin, containing 18-20 spines

of varying length, similar to but smaller than those at the apex

(fig. 60). The spines of the 2nd joint are of the cleft-tipped

variety, feathered for half their length.

Maxilla 1. Female and male.—Outer plate with 9 spines set

in two rows; 5 with from 1-3 large auxiliary teeth; the other 4

longer, with from 4-12 small teeth (fig. 55). The number of spines

874 MRS. E. W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA [ Nov. 23,

is the same on both maxille, but the number of the auxiliary teeth

varies. Both plates and palp covered with fine hairs.

Maaillipeds—The 2nd and 3rd basal joints with fan-shaped

groups of long stout bristles on the outer side. 2nd and 3rd

joints of the palp each carrying on the inner side a longitudinal

row of cleft-tipped bristles and a number of small curved sensory

spines, similar to those on the gnathopods; terminal joint in

the male ending in a distinct nail.

Gnathopods.—Practically no difference between the gnathopods

of the full-grown specimens and those figured by Sars. The basal

joints in both gnathopods are considerably wider at the distal

end; posterior margins convex, densely crowded with small

curved sensory spines, with 6-9 longer ones at the distal angle.

These spines develop at maturity, together with the calceoli and

sensory filaments of the antenne; young specimens, 4-5 mm.,

have none; older animals, 8 mm., carry a single row; while in

the full-grown specimen the margin is thickly covered with a

band of them, one overlapping the other. In the second gnatho-

pod the 4th and 5th joints are produced to a strong denticle at

the posterior angle. The curved finger is longer than the palm,

the tip fitting mto a groove on the inner side of the hand. The

feathered spines on the outer side of the palmar margin are

shorter and twice as numerous as those of the inner side, and

are set in graduated oblique rows, the longest spine of each row

the farthest from the margin; those of the inner side are also

graduated in size, but set in a continuous line. The curious

specialised bristles, characteristic of this family, are to be found

on either side of the finger articulation, the dentate one on the

outer side, and the plumose on the inner. These bristles are

among the first to appear; in a small specimen, 4 mm., both

ave well developed.

Percopods. Full-grown female.—Agreeing with Sars’ figures ;

sensory armature more complete, as is to be expected. The 2nd

pereeopod is longer than the Ist; basal joint wider, the posterior

margin densely crowded with sensory spines, as in the gnathopods,

that of the lst with only a single row. In the hinder pereopods,

the anterior margins of the basal joints are armed with numerous

small spines; the 4th and 5th joints carry a row of small deeply

inset spines (fig. 56) on the outer side, in addition to the marginal

grovps, a double row on the 5th joint of the 5th pereopod. The

under surface of some of the joints—4th of pereeopod 3, 4th and

5th of perzopod 4, and the 4th, 5th, and 6th of perzeopod 5—is

provided with rows of very delicate, mobile, plumose hairs

(fig. 57), about 6-8 in a row; a few scattered smaller ones occur

on the basal joints. The terminal joints of all the perseopods are

extremely long and slender, the first four with the tip recurved

(fig. 62), the fifth with a disdact nail (fig. 63); all carry the long,

stiff, feathered seta proximally, longest on the 5th. The Ist and

5th fingers are subequal to each other 4 in length, the 2nd and 3rd a

little longer, the 4th the longest.

1909. ] FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 875

Male. ‘Huxley’ specimen.—The basal joints of the hinder

pereopods differ from those of the female in having the anterior

portion much more produced downwards, forming in the 3rd and

4th persopods, a large rounded pellucid lobe extending consider-

ably beyond the level of the posterior expansion, and nearly

covering the succeeding joint (text-fig. 279). On the under side

of these joints is a slight longitudinal expansion setting out at

right angles to the joint, and terminating distally in an acute

projection tipped with 3 sensory spines, one of great length. The

Text-fig. 279.

Rhachotropis helleri Boeck.

Fourth pereeopod of the male, showing the anterior lobe of the basal joint.

basal joint of the 5th pereopod is much larger than the pre-

ceding, with anterior and posterior lobes at the same level. A

ciliated hair is found midway on the hind margin of pereeopods

3-5, and perzopod 4 also carries a remarkably long ciliated hair

proximally.

Pleopods. Male. ‘ Huxley’ specimen.—Rami but little longer

than the peduncle in the Ist pleopod, half as long again in the

3rd ; coupling-spines large, more dentate on the left pleopod than

on the right (see figs. 64, 65). The peduncle of the lst pleopod

876 MRS. E. W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA [ Nov. 23,

carries a row of 25 delicate plumose hairs along the outer margin ;

on the 2nd pleopod the hairs are smaller and fewer in number.

In the full-grown female the outer ramus has 20 joints, the inner

17; 4 cleft spines on the 1st pleopod, 3 on 2nd and 3rd.

In the young in the incubatory pouch the outer ramus has

4 joints, 1 large and 3 small; the inner ramus, 3 joints, with

1 cleft spine on the Ist. The coupling-spines have the two large

upper teeth, but none of the small ones.

Uropods and telson.—In the female the proportions are as in

Sars’ figure. The young male has the inner ramus of the 2nd

uropod half as long again as the outer; all the margins pectinate.

The telson in the female is cleft for half its length, in the young

in the pouch, and in the young males, 8-10 mm., to rather more

than half the length. It carries proximally a pair of large,

mobile, ciliated hairs, as do most of the Rhachotropis; another

much smaller pair near the cleft; a submarginal irregular row of

sensory spinules; and a setule inset in either apex. Both pairs

of ciliated hairs, and the apical setules are to be found in the

young in the pouch.

Distribution. Kava Sea. Stebbing (38), p. 38.

North Atlantic. Stebbing (37), p. 955.

Norway, 8. and W. coasts, 50-100 fathoms. Sars (29),

p. 427.

Theale: ‘‘Common on the Atlantic slope off the West Coast

of Ireland, at depths from 200-400 fathoms.” (Mr. Tatter-

sall, in a letter dated 31. x. 08.)

Bay of Biscay: Taken by the ‘ Huxley’ at Station XII.,

48° 73’ N., 8° 13' W., August 26, 1908, in 246 fathoms;

bottom deposit, fine sand.

Other localities doubtful.

Bibliography.

1. Borcx, AxeL.—“ Bemerkninger angaaende de ved de Norske

Kyster forekommende Amphipoder.” Forhandl. Skand.

Naturf., 8° mgde. Kjobenhavn, 1860.

. Borck, AxEL.—‘‘ Crustacea Amphipoda borealia et arctica. ”

Vidensk.-Selsk. Forhandlinger, 1870.

Borck, AxeL..—De Skandinaviske og Arktiske Amphipoder.

Christiania, 1876.

. Bonnier, JuLes.—‘‘ Edriophthalmes”: Rés. Scient. Camp.

‘Caudan.’ Ann. Univ. Lyon, 1896.

. Boutencer, C. L.—“ On the Hermaphroditism of the

Amphipod, Orchestia deshayesit Audouin.” Proc. Zool. Soe.

London, 1908.

6. Bourne, G. C.—“ Report of a Trawling Cruise in H.M.S.

‘Research’ off the S.W. Coast of Ireland.” Journ. Marine

Biol. Association, New Ser. vol. i. no. 3, 1890.

7. Bruzevius, R. M.—Bidrag till Kannedomen om Skandi-

naviens Amphipoda Gammaridea. Lund, 1859.

ono Bm wo

1909.] FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 877

8. Bucutoiz, R.—Crustaceen. Die zweite Deutsche Nord-

polaifahrt, Bd. ii. Abth. 1. Leipzig, 1874.

9. Cuevreux, Epovarp.—‘“ Crustacés amphipodes nouveaux

dragués par |’ Hirondelle, 1886.” Bull. Soc. Zool. France,

tome xi., 1887.

10. Cunyrevx, Epouarp.—‘ Amphipodes provenant des cam-

pagnes de l Hirondelle.” Res. Camp. Sci., fase. xvi. Monaco,

1900.

11. Cuimron, Cuartes.—“ On an example of Polymorphism in

the Amphipoda.” Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xvi.,

1885.

12. Darwry, Cuartes.—Descent of Man and Selection in

Relation to Sex. London, 1871.

13. Detia Vattz, Antonio.—‘* Gammarini del Golfo di Napoli.”

Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel, Monogr. xx.

Berlin, 1893.

14. Faxon, Watrer.—“ The so-called Dimorphism of the genus

Cambarus.” Amer. Journ. of Science. New Haven, Conn.,

1884.

15. Faxon, WAtTeR.—“‘ Revision of the Astacide.” Mem. Mus.

Harvard, vol. x. No. 4, 1885.

16. Gos, A.—‘‘ Crustacea amphipoda maris Spetsbergiam

alluentis” K. Vet.-Akad. Forh., No. 8, 1865.

17. Hansen, H. J.—‘“ Oversigt over det vestlige Gronlands Fauna

af Malakostrake Havkrebsdyr.” Vidensk. Meddel. Naturf.

Foren. Kjobenhavn, 1887.

18. Hetter, C.—Beitriige zur niheren Kenntniss der Amphi-

poden des Adriatischen Meeres. Wien, 1866.

19. Hotes, 8. J.—‘“‘ Amphipoda of Southern New England.”

Bull. Bureau Fisheries, vol. xxiv. Washington, 1904,

20. Miuyer, Frrrz.—Fiir Darwin. Leipzig, 1864.

21. Norman, A. M.—Last Report on Dredging among the

Shetland Isles. Rep. Brit. Assoc. Advance. Science, 1868.

22. Norman, A. M.—“ Biology of the ‘ Valorous’ Cruise, 1875.”

Proc. Royal Soe., vol. xxv. London, 1877.

23. Norman, A. M.—“ Notes on the Natural History of East Fin-

mark.” Extr. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 1902-5. London, 1905.

24. Norman, A. M.—‘‘ Notes on the Crustacea of the Channel

Islands.” Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, vol. xx., 1907.

25. Roserrson, Davip.—‘“‘ Jottings from my Note Book.” Proce.

and Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow, vol. ii. pt. 2, 1887-88.

Glasgow, 1890.

25. Sars, G. O.—Histoire naturelle des Crustacés Veau douce de

Norvége. Christiania, 1867.

27. Sars, G. O.—“ Oversigt af Norges Crustaceer.” Vidensk.-

Selsk. Forhandl., No. 18. 1882.

28. Sars, G.O.—The Norwegian North Atlantic Expedition,

1876-78. Zoology: Crustacea, i. Christiania, 1885.

29. Sars, G.O.—An Account of the Crustacea of Norway. Vol. i.

Amphipoda, Christiania, 1893.

878 MRS, E, W. SEXTON ON AMPHIPODA [ Nov. 23,

30. Sars, Micwann.—“ Oversigt over de i den norsk-arctiske

region forekommende Krebsdyr.” Vidensk.-Selsk. For-

hand., Christiania, 1859.

31. Scorr, THomas.—‘ Report on a Collection of Marine Dredg-

ings and other Natural History Materials made on the West

Coast of Scotland by the late George Brook, F.L.8.” Proc.

Roy. Phys. Soc. Edinburgh, 1896.

32. Smrra, Georrrey.—“ High and Low Dimorphism, with an

account of certain Tanaide of the Bay of Naples.” Mitth.

Zool. Station Neapel, 17 Bd. Berlin, 1906.

33. SmirH, GEorrrEY.—Rhizocephala. Fauna und Flora des

Golfes von Neapel, Monogr. 29. Berlin, 1906.

34. Spence Barr, CHARLES.—‘“‘ On some new Genera and Species

of Crustacea Amphipoda.” Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3,

WOM, ta, JUS

35. Spence Bare, CHARLES.—Catalogue of the Specimens of

Amphipodous Crustacea in the Collection of the British

Museum. London, 1862.

36. Spence Bare and Westwoop.—A History of the British

Sessile-eyed Crustacea. London, 1863.

37. Sreppine, T. R. R.—Report on the Amphipoda collected

by H.M.S. ‘Challlenger’ during the Years 1873-76.

‘Challenger’ Reports, vol. xxix., 1888.

38. Sruppine, T. R. R.—“ The Amphipoda collected during the

Voyage of the ‘Willem Barents’ in the Arctic Seas in

the Years 1880-84.” Bijd. tot de Dierkunde, vol. xvii.

Amsterdam, 1894.

39. Sressine, T. R. R.—“ Revision of Amphipoda.” Ann. Mag.

Nat. Hist. ser. 7, vol. iv., 1899.

40. Sreppinc, T. R. R.—Amphipoda. I. Gammaridea. Das

Tierreich, Lief. 21. Berlin, 1906.

41. Waker, A. O., and Hornett, J.—‘ Report on the Schizo-

poda, Cumacea, Isopoda, and Amphipoda of the Channel

Isles.”. Journ. Marine Zool. and Microscopy, vol. 11. no. 7.

Sept. 1896.

42. Watker, A. O.—‘*On some new species of Edriophthalma

from the Irish Seas.” Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool. vol. xxvi.

no. 167. 1897.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Prats LXXX.

Fig. 1. Head and antenne, 9. Parapleustes gracilis Buchholz. x 44.

2. Accessory flagellum, superior antenna, 2. P. gracilis. .X 28.

3. Right mandible, 2. LP. gracilis. X 44.

4. Left mandible, 2. 53 x 44.

5. First maxilla, 9. Fe x 44.

6. Second maxilla, 2. eo x 44.

7. Maxilliped, 2. S x 44,

8. Wholeanimal, 2. Syimpleustes grandimanus Chevrenx; actual size 75 mm.

9. First gnathopod, young @, Ivish specimen. S. grandimanus. X 28.

10. First gnathopod, young 9, ‘ Huxley’ specimen. 33 x 44.

FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 879

. Second gnathopod, young 9. S. ea x 44,

. Second gnathopod, large "2. _ &K 44.

. Second gnathopod, young ¢, Irish specimen. S. DE a x 28.

. Finger of first enathopod, under surface, young 2. 3< I7/

; Finger of first pereeopod, a 6. SS. grandimanus. 49.

” x 84.

. Finger of third pereopod, young Q. 3 x 84.

{ Accessory flagellum, superior antenna, young 2. S. grandimanus. X 109.

19. Side-plate 4, young g. S. grandimanus. X 28.

20. Upper lip, large 9. %3 Xx 38.

21. Lower lip, ,, a x 50.

22. FA young 2. x 50.

23. 35 young 6, taken from above to show relative proportions.

S. grandimanus. X 38.

24. Left mandible, large 9. S. grandimanus, X 50.

25. Cutting-plate and accessory plate, rightmandible, young 2. ,, X 176.

26. ” ” » ” 2 ” large 2 ” x 176.

27. x young ¢. ,, x 176.

28. Right maxilliped, lar are OF s. grandimanus. x 85.

29. First maxilla, young B 5 ee x 50.

30. Second maxilla, young 3. X 38.

31. Second and third uropods and telson, young 2. S. grandimanus. X 50.

. Apices of telson, young g. S. grandimanus. x 50.

Pirate LXXXI.

All the figures, except fig. 51, from the ‘ Huxley ’ specimens.

. Whole animal, 2. Eusirus biscayensis Bonnier; actual size 13°5 mm.

. Antenne, 2. 5 S<olle

: Accessory flagellum, superior antenna, 9. HE. biscayensis. X 28.

. Antenne, ¢. LH. biscayensis. X 11.

. Dorsal outline of 3rd, 4th, and 5th pleon segments, 3. E. biscayensis. X11.

. Upper lip, 2. Z. biscayensis. X 28.

. Lower lip, ¢. x 28.

. Mawxilliped, inner surface, Q. EH. biscayensis. X 28.

. Cutting-plate and accessory plate, right mandible, 9. H. biscayensis. X 96.

. Accessory plate, right mandible, 2. ” From another specimen. .,, x 96.

. Tooth from molar, right mandible, OF a X 333.

. Cutting-plate and accessory plate, lett mandible, 2. e x 96.

. Uropodsand telson, 9 . Oue side flattened to show the uropods. ,, x 11.

3. Upper lip, ¢. Rhachotropis rostrata Bonnier. X 22.

. Cutting-plate and accessory plate, left mandible, g. RR. rostrata. X 50.

° right mandible, g. X 96.

AE ’ ”

. Whole animal, full-grown 2. Rhachotropis helleri Boeck ; actual size

12°5 mm.

. Cuticle from side-plate of first gnathopod, 2. R. helleri. 176.

. Portion of egg-mass. from young 2, 10 mm. in length; taken from under-

neath, to show method of attachment, Irish specimen. R. helleri. X 33.

: Accessory flagellum, superior antenna, Ke) , with calceolus. 2 x 125.

8 young specimen from incubatory pouch. _,, X 50.

b Cutting- plate and accessory plate, right mandible, 2. s x 96.

. First maxilla, spines of outer lobe, a. R. helleri. X 176.

. Small sensory spine from under surface of 4th joint, 5th peropod, 92.

R. helleri. X< 290,

. Plumose hair, from the same, X 290.

. Sensory seta from distal angle of 6th joint, 5th pereopod, 9. R.helleri. < 176.

. Dentate spine, terminal ee of palp, right mandible, °. i; x 176.

. Spine 2 . 3 x 176.

. Sensory filament, "supe: ior antenna, 3. R. helleri. X 290.

5 Abii) oe ae ond perzopod, 2. s x 290.

Br 5th oF 2 x< 176.

. Coupling spines, right pleopod of first pair, 2, undersurface. R.helleri. X 176.

let

PP) 39 ef t by) bP) 23 33 33 rhs x 176.

880 LT.-COL, J. M. FAWCETT ON [ Nov. 23,

3. Notes on some Aberrations in Oriental Lepidoptera, and

on a new Form of Huschema trom Sumatra. By Lt.-Col.

J. Maucotm Fawcett *.

[Received July 2, 1909.]

(Plate LX XXII. 7)

During a fairly extensive experience in collecting Rhopalocera

T have not come across a more remarkable example of aberration,

or “sport,” as such are sometimes called, than the two here

described. The cause of these freaks of nature is somewhat

obscure ; I have even been told that a voyage across the ocean,

when in the pupal stage, has been supposed to have contributed

in some (unexplained) way to its appearance amongst specimens

sent from America to this country ; however this may be, it can

have nothing to do with the specimens under notice here, as they

were taken at Port Blair, in the Andaman Islands, in the perfect

state. ;

The general tendency of the exceptional modifications in their

coloration is decidedly towards melanism, which might, to a

certain extent, be accounted for by the heavy rainfall during the

monsoons in the Bay of Bengal; and yet, in a very large series

of each of the two species which I possess, nothing out of the

common typical form has turned up, excepting these two examples.

The almost indiscriminate conglomeration of the small distinctive

spots of the two species into large and comparatively shapeless

fuscous streaks and blotches, is such a striking feature in these

two specimens that it appears to me to be worth being placed

on record.

The descriptions are appended ; a reference to a figure of the

typical form is given in each instance.

KUTHALIA CIBARITIS. (Plate LX XXII. fig. 5.)

Hewitson (Adolias), A. M. N. H. (4) xiv. 1874, p. 358.

De Nicéville (Zanaécia), Butt. of Ind. 11. 1886, p. 223, pl. xix.

Ie, ly Che

Description.—This aberration differs from the typical form on

the upper side in the prominent white band being present only

on the fore wing, much reduced in breadth, pinkish white and

infuseated with black atoms. Inside the band the discal black

spots are lengthened into black streaks in every interspace.

The four black lines in the discoidal cell become two black

renal spots. Mind wing: the black Imes in the cell are reduced

to renal spots, as in fore wing; no white discal fascia, and the

rows of discal black spots lengthened into black streaks in

the interspaces.

* Communicated by Dr. P. Coatmers Mitcuett, F.R.S.

+ For explanation of the Plate see p. 883.

Was OS) PIL ILOOGUL,

West, Newman chromo

ABE RRATIONS IN ORIENTAL LEPIDOPTERA.

1909. | ABERRATIONS IN ORIENTAL BUTTERFLIES. — 881

Under side. Two black spots in discoidal cells as above ; a pro-

minent white spot between the discoidal nervules, and two

indistinct and much sullied white spots in the first and second

interspaces. ‘The remaining spots of both wings are enlarged into

long black streaks between the nervules.

This most extraordinary aberration is a male specimen and was

taken at Port Blair.

CETHOSIA NICOBARICA. (Plate LX XXII. fig. 4.)

Felder, Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien, xi. 1862, p. 484.

Bingham. Faun. Brit. Ind., Butterflies, vol. 1. pl. vil. fig. 53,

IQORY

Description.—Vhis aberration differs from the typical form as

follows :—

Upper side.— Fore wing. The three white elongate lunules which

are so prominent a feature in (’. nicobarica ave reduced to three

obscure white streaks, the white spot below them much sullied

with black atoms and reduced in size; the discal row of white

spots outside the afore-mentioned lunules is wanting, and the

marginal series of fine white lunules is obsolescent.

The spaces between the black lines in the cell are much infus-

cated, and there are two large black spots in the first and second

median interspaces.

Hind wing as in typical form, but the subcostal black spots are

enlarged, the discal black spots are almost obsolescent, and the

submarginal black spots and lunules are almost obsolete.

Under side. Cell of fore wing much infuscated between the

lines; no pale discal fascia bey ond the cell; the series of lanceolate

spots in C. nicobarica replaced by a ser ies of small white streaks

much sullied with black atoms.

Hind wing with the black markings of the two inner bands

somewhat enlarged, and without the adjoining white bands ; the

submarginal series of black spots in a white band obsolete, and its

place only indicated by a row of very indistinct and obsolescent

yellow lunules.

The specimen is a male taken at Port Blair.

ABERRATIONS OF PAPILIO CLYTIA, RACE PANOPE.

(Plate LX XXII. figs. 1, 2, & 3.)

Bingham, Faun. Brit. Ind., Butterflies, vol. i. p. 75 (1907).

Papilio clytia Linneus, Syst. Nat. ed. x. p. 479 (1758).

Papilio panope Linneeus, Syst. Nat. ed. x. p. 479 (1758).

Papilio papone Westwood, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1872, p. 94,

pl. i. fig. 2.

Papilio onpape Moore, P. Z. 8. 1878, p. 840.

Three aberrations of Papilio panope from the hills east of

Tounghoo, Burma, in the writer’s collection, are given here :—

No. I. aberration (fig. 1) has the usual buff-coloured spots and

882 ON ABERRATIONS IN ORIENTAL BUTTERFLIES. [ Nov. 23,

streaks replaced by fuscous of a different colour from the ground-

colour of the fore wing, with two very indistinct dark grey

subapical spots, and two minute spots of the same colour near

the tornal angle of the fore wing. Hind wing: the sagittate

internervular streaks are whiter and longer than in the normal

form.

No. If. aberration (fig. 2) has the fore wing absolutely con-

colorous; all spots and streaks have become obsolete. Hind wing :

the sagittate streaks are reduced to a minimum and _ thickly

irrorated with the hair-brown ground-colour. This form would

represent the var. papone Westw. if it did not entirely lack “the

bluish tint in certain lights.”

No. III. aberration (fig. 3) has the ground-colour much darker,

and similar to that of the form from continental India (true

panope Linn.), while all the buff-coloured spots and streaks are

greatly enlarged. Hind wing: the sagittate streaks are similar

to those in aberration I.

Papilio clytia and Papilio panope and their various forms are

now considered to be one and the same species, dimorphic in both

sexes. It is probable that the various forms have been gradually

developed in imitation of the forms of Danainz occurring with

them. It is suggested that the presence of Huplea alcathoé in

the same locality might be accountable for the disappearance of

the usual spots on the fore wing of figures 1 and 2; while, on the

other hand, Huplea distanti, with its broad white subapical spots

(or, perhaps, in a lesser degree, Hupleca godartz), may be the model

of the form shown at fig. 3.

EusCHEMA SUMATRENSIS, sp.n. (Plate LX XXII. fig. 6.)

Habitat. Sumatra (June 1896).

Description Head, thorax, and abdomen orange-yellow; a

black spot on each tegula; ground-colour of wings Indian red ;

markings similar to those of Javan specimens of 1. militaris, from

which it differs in being without the lower basal black streak ;

the black spots in interspaces 2 and 3 of fore wing larger and the

spot below the cell of the hind wing smaller, almost obsolescent ;

it also lacks the black bands across the thorax and abdomen, which

are such a prominent feature in that species; imner margin of

hind wing orange, fringed with orange hairs.

Some years ago the writer submitted the specimen from which

the accompanying fig. 6 is drawn to Sir G. Hampson for identifi-

cation. At that time (1907) there were no corresponding

specimens, or, indeed, anything approaching it more nearly than

E. isolata (which is a yellow insect), in the British Museum, and

Sir George was unable to identify it. When preparing figures for

this paper the writer made the accompanying drawing and sent it

to Sir George Hampson, who wrote as follows :—“ We now have a

1909. ] ON THE CETACEAN SOTALIA BORNEENSIS. 883

specimen from Java halfway between the yellow form (cuprina

Felder) and your drawing; it is named Huschema friihstorferi

Rober, yours being evidently an extreme form of that species.”

Though it may be only an aberration it seems desirable, for

convenience, that this form should have a name, so I propose to

call it “ sematrensis.”

EXPLANATION OF PLATE LXXXII.

Fig.1. Aberration of Papilio clytia, race panope.

2. Do. 5D 56 50 A

3 Do. ty) ” ” ”

A, Do. Cethosia nicoharica.

5. Do. EKuthalia cibaritis.

6. EHuschema sumatrensis.

4. Note on the Cetacean Sotalia borneénsis.

By R. LypdEKKER™.

[Received September 29, 1909. |

When describing in the Society’s ‘ Proceedings’ for 1901 (p. 88,

pl. vii.) an estuarine Dolphin from Borneo, under the name of

Sotalia borneénsis, 1 had no information as to the colour of the

type-specimen in life, but assumed that this was approximately

shown by the skin. In this I was wrong, for I have recently been

informed by Mr. Ernest Hose, who saw the specimen alive, that

the original colour of the upper surface was pale bluish slate, or

slaty blue, and that of the under-parts greyish white. This brings

it into much closer connection, so far at least as colour is con-

cerned, with Sotalia sinensis, which is described as being cream-

coloured with pines fins and bee eyes. The type-specimen

has, however, only 55 * teeth, against | = in the Bornean Dolphin,

and as the teeth are comoller in the Bornean than in the Chinese

specimen, the specific distinctness of the former may, at all events

provisionally, be still admitted. I may add that a plaster-model of

the type-specimen of S. borneénsis preserved in the British

Museum (Nat. Hist.) has been coloured from a sketch kindly

supplied by Mr. Hose.

* Communicated by permission of the Trustees of the British Museum.

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1909, No, LX. 60

884 ON SOME SKINS OF HYBRID PHEASANTS. (Dec. 14,

December 14, 1909. ‘ieee

G. A. BouLEeNGER, Esq., F.R.S., Vice-President,

in the Chair.

The Secretary read the following report on the additions

made to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of November

1909 :—

The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the

month of November were 176 in number. Of these 89 were

acquired by presentation, 24 by purchase, 22 were received on

deposit, 39 in exchange, and 2 were born in the Gardens.

The total number of departures during the month, by death

and by removals, was 199.

Amongst the additions special attention may be called to the

following :—

1 Reen Gazelle (Gazella marica) from Central Arabia, deposited

on November 20th.

1 Uvean Parrakeet (Vymphicus uvwensis) from the Loyalty

Islands, deposited on November 9th.

A collection of 35 birds, including 11 Blue Birds (Sialia sialis),

2 Red-tailed Buzzards (Buteo borealis), 6 Hermit Thrushes

(Hylocichla guttata pallasi), 4 Wood Thrushes (Hylocichla muste-

lina), and others from North America, received in exchange from

the New York Zoological Society on November 18th.

Mrs. R. Haig Thomas, F.Z.8., exhibited seven skins of Hybrid

Pheasants and made the following remarks :—

One of the pheasants exhibited here this evening is rather

interesting to students of Heredity. The following is a short

account of the pedigree of this bird :—

On March lst, 1907, two silver hens were mated with a

Swinhoe cock. Twenty F. 1 hybrids were reared, thirteen cocks

and seven hens.

On January 14th, 1908, the seven F. 1 hens were mated with

the same Swinhoe cock, and from these were reared five F. 2

hybrids, four cocks and one hen. It is about this hen I wish to

say a few words.

We have plenty of evidence of hens transmitting the cock

plumage of their kind to hybrid male descendants, but I am not

aware that any record of the converse happening has been

published.

The Mendelian theory that the male is a homozygote for

sex pure in maleness and the female a heterozygote carrying

both sexes in its germ cells, gives us a very clear interpretation

of certain recent sex experiments, but 1t must be admitted that

it is difficult to explain on this hypothesis how the Swinhoe cock

has handed down to his progeny the exact plumage of the hens

of his species. If you compare the ¥.2 hen with the pure

1909. | ON THE NESTING OF THE TUFTED UMBRE. 88)

Swinhoe and pure silver hens, you will see that is so. Although

amongst many birds the plumage of the young male often re-

seinbles that of the adult hen of his species, yet in the case we

are considering, at no stage of his existence does the Swinhoe

cock put on the plumage of the adult hen of his species, and at

three months he has already assumed part of the adult. male

plumage, though he does not appear in the brilliant full dress

until the following autumn. As the coupling of plumage and sex

is a pretty general rule, these facts seem to point to the Swinhoe

cock being possibly a heterozygote for sex.

The following is the method I adopt in my breeding experi-

ments :-—

Birds are mated in January in a padlocked pen wired all round

and all over, of which only the keeper and myself possess the

key. Each pen is numbered and recorded in a book with the

number of birds and their species. When gathering the eggs in

a pen these are marked with its number and dated before leaving

that pen. When the eggs are set under a hen the lid of her

sitting box 1s marked with the number of the pen from which the

eggs were gathered, the date of sitting, and number of eggs set.

When the “chicks are hatched they are ‘placed with the hen in a

coop with the pen number painted on it, having a small covered-

in run in front so that the chicks can never set away.

At six weeks old the chicks are ringed on ‘the leg : the ring has

the year, the number of the pen, and the generation ‘“ F. 1” or

““ F, 2.” stamped on it. This year they were also wing-labelled.

Records of all these matters are taken down in pencil in a note-

book at the pens with date of entry and copied into a large book,

a four-year diary.

Mr. D. Seth-Smith, F.Z.S., the Society's Curator of Birds,

exhibited a photograph (text-fig. 280), taken by Mr. W. 8.

Berridge, F.Z.8., of a nest of Scopus wmbretia, and made the

following remarks :—

A pair of South African Hammerkops or Tufted Umbres

belonging to the Society were placed in the Great Flying Aviary

last spring, and forthwith commenced to collect sticks and any

rubbish they could find with a view to nest-building. They first

selected a site about ten feet from the ground on the top of a

small kennel-shaped box, originally fixed up as a nesting-box for

Laughing Kingfishers. Here they constructed a large platform

of sticks which they cemented together with mud and commenced

to build a dome-shaped roof over it.

Apparently they came to the conclusion that the site was not

a very suitable one, as they left this nest when about half finished

and selected another site, this time on the ground inside a small

shelter shed some five feet in diameter. They built an enormous

dome-shaped nest in this, completely filimg up the shed to a

height of about two feet six inches. But this did not suit them,

60*

886 ON COCCIDIOSIS IN GROUSE CHICKS. (Dee we?

probably from the fact that rats soon discovered in this nest a snug

shelter of which they were not slow in availing themselves. The

nearly-finished nest was deserted and the roof of the shed next

chosen as a site for a third nest.

Here another huge structure, consisting of quite a cartload of

sticks and other rubbish, was constructed. But presumably on

account of the interference of the Ibises and other birds in the

aviary, this was again deserted and a fourth site chosen.

This time a large nesting-log, fixed twenty feet from the ground

in the fork of a dead, ivy-covered tree, was chosen as a base on

Text-fig. 280.

Nest of Scopus umbretta in the Society’s Gardens.

which to construct the nest. From the time it was commenced it

appeared to be complete in about six weeks, but the birds continue

daily to add to it. It is composed of sticks, cemented together

with mud. It measures four feet in diameter, is about three feet

in height, and the single compartment has an inside diameter of

nearly two feet. The entrance hole is five inches in diameter.

Curiously enough, so far as I am aware, no eggs have been laid

by these birds, although they have been nest-building throughout

the whole of the summer and autumn and have frequently paired.

Dr. H. B. Fantham, F.Z.S., Protozoologist to the Grouse

Disease Inquiry, exhibited microscopic preparations and sketches

12. . 9. WWOQ Pll. ILcocoul

C. W. Andrews, photo. Bale & Damelsson Lia

ROBBER CRABS (BIRGUS LATRO) CLIMBING A SAGO-PALM.

1909. | ON THE ROBBER CRAB (BIRGUS LATRO). 887

based on his original observations, illustrating the life-cycle of

the Protozoin, Himeria (Coccidiwm) avium Silvestrini and Rivolta

—also known as Coccidium tenellum Railliet and Lucet—a Sporo-

zoon parasitic in the alimentary canal of Grouse. The parasite

produces a fatal intestinal coccidiosis in Grouse chicks, especially

during the first month or six weeks of their hfe. The immediate

effect of coccidiosis in Grouse chicks is enteritis accompanied by

diarrhoea, and a similar disease in Fowl chicks is known among

poultry-men as ‘“ white diarrhea” or “ white scour.”

The life-history of a Coccidiam may be divided into two cycles :

(«) asexual multiplication, or schizogony, for the purpose of

increasing the numbers of the parasite within the host, (3) sexual

reproduction, or sporogony, for the purpose of infecting fresh

hosts by means of resistant spores adapted for extra-corporeal

existence. Schizogony and sporogony occur in both the duodenum

and cecum of the Grouse chicks, causing great destruction of the

epithelium of the gut. The merozoites, or daughter parasites

produced during schizogony, are arranged “en barillet,” like the

segments of an orange, within the epithelial cells. A thin cyst

wall is secreted precociously around the oval macrogamete ( @ )

while still within the epithelial cell, leaving a micropyle for the

entry of the microgamete ( ¢) later.

The ceea of Grouse chicks dying from coccidiosis are full

of oval spores (odcysts), which are passed out with the cecal

droppings, forming a source of infection on the moors. Each

odcyst gradually develops four sporocysts within itself, while stall

in the cecal droppings, and each sporocyst ultimately contains two

sporozoites. On the ingestion of the spores by other Grouse, the

sporozoites are liberated by the action of the pancreatic juice of

the new host, and proceed to penetrate the epithelium of its

gut-wall. —

Larve of Scatophaga, found in Grouse-droppings, swallow the

Coccidian spores and void them uninjured, thus aiding in the

dissemination of the spores in nature. Coccidian spores are very

resistant to varying conditions of weather and, being light, are

easily blown about by the wind, so that the moors are being

constantly contaminated during an epizootic of coccidiosis.

The coccidiosis of Grouse is transmissible directly to young

fowls and young pigeons by feeding these birds on food mixed

with feces of infected Grouse. Adult Grouse are much less

susceptible to coccidiosis than immature birds.

Dr. C. W. Andrews, F.R.S., F.Z.S., exhibited an enlarged

photograph (Pl. LXX XIII.) of the Robber Crab (Birgus latro)

on Christmas Island, and communicated the following account of

its habits :—

Tt is somewhat remarkable that although the Robber or Coco-

nut Crab (Birgus latro) has been known for some centuries and

888 ON THE ROBBER CRAB (BIRGUS LATRO). (Dec. 14,

its habits described by numerous observers, there is still con-

siderable doubt and difterence of opinion concerning it. This

uncertainty probably arises from two causes—first, that the habits

of this animal do actually differ considerably in different localities,

and, second, that the unreliable reports of natives have often been

accepted as authentic. The chief point on which observers differ

is whether this Crustacean can or cannot climb trees: thus Chun

(Aus den Tiefen des Weltmeeres (1900), p. 414) states that the

natives of Diego Garcia say they never have seen it do so, but

since on the same authority, it is stated that these crabs carry

coconut shells of sea-water with them into the woods, it does not

seem necessary toattach much importance to their tales. On the

other hand, most observers agree that Birgus can and does climb

palm trees, and that this statement is correct is proved by the

photogr aph taken by me in Christmas Island, showing two crabs

actually on the trunk of the native Sago-palm (Arenga listeri) :

the upper one is ascending and the lower descending. Numerous

other individuals are seen round the foot of the tree, taking

advantage of the fruit dropped by their more enterprising com-

panions which have ascended in search of it.

In climbing, the large claws are scarcely used at all, the animal

clinging to the tree trunk by the sharp points of the walking

legs; by the same means nearly vertical faces of rock, where there

is apparently little foothold, can be ascended and descended.

Although there is no doubt that these crabs can and do feed on

coconuts when they can get them, these are by no means their

only food as would seem to be implied by some accounts. In

Christmas Island during my first visit (1897-8) there were no

bearing coconut palms so far as I was aware, and though there

may have been a few on one small beach on the east coast, these

could only have supplied food fora few individuals. The ordinary

food included fruits of various kinds, particularly those of the

Sago- -palm (Arenga listeri) and of the Screw-pines (Pandanus),

and carrion of all sorts, even the bodies of their own relations.

Their discrimination is not very keen, for they will drag away

almost anything that has been handled, such as cooking utensils,

bottles, geological hammers, and clothes. In one case I had a

geological hammer practically ruined by having its handle

splintered in the powerful claws of one of these creatures.

It is usually stated that Birgus is nocturnal in its habits, and

probably this is usually the case, but in Christmas Island they

move about the forest and feed even in the brightest daylight (as

is shown by the photograph). Formerly, when the native rats

swarmed in the forest after dark, the crabs moved about com-

paratively little at night, and might often be seen clinging to the

trunk of a tree two or three feet from the ground. Now, the rats

having become extinct, the crabs wander about at night and are

a great nuisance, dragging from the camp anything they can get

hold of that seems edible. On one occasion I saw a large in-

dividual carrying off a coconut from which the husk had been

1909. ] ON COLOUR-CHANGE IN AN AFRICAN RATEL. 889

removed ; it held the nut under its body with some of its walking

legs while it walked off raised high on the tips of the others.

"These animes are easily frightened and scuttle off backwards,

propelling themselves with their long anterior legs in a series of

ungainly jerks. They seem quite conscious of ‘the comparative

defencelessness of the abdomen, which they endeavour to thrust

under logs or into holes among the roots of trees. They never

carry any protective covering onthe abdominal region, although in

the Cambridge Natural History (vol.iv.p. 174), it is stated that they

may sometimes employ an empty coconut shell for this purpose.

No authority is given for this statement, nor does there appear to

be any reference to it in previously published accounts, and from

what I have seen I should think that the thing is an impossibility.

A species of Cenobita, a closely allied genus, has been described

as using a coconut shell for this purpose, and a figure of it carrying

one is given in Prof. J. 8. Gardiner’s ‘ Fauna and Geography of

the Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes,’ vol. i. p. 69 ; probably

this has been confused with Birgus.

The photograph now reproduced (Pl. LXXXIIT.) has been

exhibited in the Natural History Museum (South Kensington)

for some time, but as there still seems to be some doubt as to the

climbing habits of these crabs, it has been thought desir ae | to

publish | it.

Dr. R. T. Leiper, F.Z.S., exhibited the original specimens of

the Nematode Worm <Acanthocheilonema dracunculoides Cobb.,

from the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons. The

characters of the genus, of which this is the type, he stated to

have been inaccurately interpreted, the posterior end of the

worm having been described as the head and the cuticular caudal

appendages regarded as “ lips.” The remarkable specific charac-

ters—viz., the entire absence of male forms and the lack in the

female of vaginal opening—had also to be repudiated, for both

are to be seen in the original material. The genus, as revised,

would admit a second species, the /ilaria perstans of Man.

The following papers were read :—

1. On Change of Colour in a Specimen of Mellivora ratel

living in the Society’s Gardens. By Dr. F. D. WEtcH,

F.Z.8.

[Received October 14, 1909.]

There is living in the Society’s Gardens at Regent’s Park a

male Ratel which has been mentioned by Mr. Pocock in the

Proceedings of the Zoological Society, 1909, p. 397, when referring

890. ! DR. F. D. WELCH ON [ Dec. 14,

to Mellivora cottoni, and the history of this animal during the

last twelve years is interesting.

I have had this animal under observation during that period,

and it is now very different from what it was when first ob-

served. The change I have noticed is, m Mr. Pocock’s opinion,

as well as my own, worth recording, especially as Mr. Pocock

does not remember the colour of the animal twelve years ago,

and also as no skin in the Natural History Museum, South

Kensington, shows the same coloration. The skins there exa-

mined by myself are twenty-six from Africa and South Arabia,

and three from India, and I have also seen five living animals

from Africa and Arabia, not one of these showing the colour of

the aged male J/ellivora.

Also I have some remarks to make on this specimen and on

WM. indica, which My. Pocock has omitted, as regards the locality

from which it came, and some notes on skull measurements.

The animal arrived at the Gardens in 1890 and was apparently

full-grown according to the keeper who first saw it, and is thus

over twenty years old, and the change in it in my opinion is

due to senility, as suggested by Mr. Pocock.

When I first knew it twelve years ago its colour was as

follows :—Scalp, back of neck, and dorsal surface were very pale

grey with a few black hairs scattered at intervals over the posterior

half of the back, no black hairs whatever on scalp, back of neck,

and anterior half of back; this dorsal patch of grey was very

sharply defined from the black of the under parts by a straight,

very distinct line. Tail was quite black on upper and under

surfaces, as I shall remark on later.

It was then as large as now, and much larger than a female

Mellwora ratel which lived with it many years and was adult.

It retained its original colour, not altering in any way till the

beginning of 1907, when the pale grey dorsal patch commenced

turning black, the change being very gradual and evenly distri-

buted over the posterior half of the back and not in patches, and

later on spreading to the anterior half of the back and neck.

This change went on very gradually, the well-defined margin

of the dorsal grey patch at its Junction with the black of the

under surfaces and limbs and tail becoming gradually lost; the

black of the under surfaces, limbs and tail becoming gradually

continuous with the new black of the back, leaving only scattered

grey hairs mixed with black where formerly there was the well-

defined line of all grey hairs.

At present all the back is “‘ black merely sprinkled with grey,”

as Mr. Pocock remarks, but on the scalp there are more grey

hairs in proportion to black than on the body, and the black of

the dorsal surfaces cannot now be distinguished from the black

of the under parts, all black bemg equally dark in colour, while the

dividing line at junction of grey and black, formerly so distinct

and continuous, is now broken up and ill-defined.

Mr. Pocock has suggested senility as the cause of this change,

1909. ] COLOUR CHANGE IN AN AFRICAN RATEL. 891

and as the animal is otherwise in good health, I do not think there

is any doubt on this point. x 5

The locality of this specimen is unknown, but from my

examination of the skins of Mellivora indica in the Natural

History Museum, from Nepal, Rajpootana and Hoshangabad,

Central Provinces, I am of opinion that this specimen came from

Africa or Arabia, and judging from its appearance twelve years

ago it isa Mellivora ratel. The M. indica skins above mentioned

have the upper surface of the tail white continuous with the

dorsal pale area, whereas this specimen twelve years ago had the

tail all black (see description above).

Also this specimen is much larger than another male Mellivora

ratel from 8. Arabia living with it, and also adult, and from mea-

surements of skulls of MW. indica and M. ratel taken by myself in the

Natural History Museum, apparently J/. ratel varies considerably

in size, much more so than M. idica.

This specimen, as already stated, is of the large variety of Melli-

vora ratel, and according to the living material seen by myself

and measurement of skulls as given below, there is in this species

considerable range of size, which in my mind raises the question

as to whether the skins hitherto regarded as M. ratel may not be

divisible into two species differing only in size. However, most

of the skulls have no sex stated, so no definite conclusion can

be come to on this latter point, as the male would be naturally

larger than the female skulls.

Skull measurements (from adult skulls).

M. ratel. M. indica.

Male. Grahamstown... 13°5 cm. Female. Rajpootana... 11° ‘ kine:

Male. SOLLailieeeee see eel io Norsex, | Nepali i..75: 12°7

Female. Somali............ 10°7 INowsexe, Nepali 12°7

Female. Suakin............ 10 No sex. N.W. Provinces 11°6

Female. Suakin............ 1ile7/

No sex. Khartoum ...... 1B Pi

Abyssinia ...... 12:0

Somalliteepeee sees 11°4

SINT nossenonene — LEAPE

Aden Me ee TG

Adent Sees eS

Kilimanjaro ... 13:1

Measured from central incisor tooth to anterior margin of foramen magnum.

[So far as can be seen in the living animal, the hairs are either

all black throughout or all grey throughout, and not variegated,

z.e. half black and grey. The black hairs are equally dark in

their whole length. Recently the animal has lost a large patch

of hair off the back of the neck.—F. D. W. ]

892 DR. F. D. WELCH ON SUMATRAN AND JAVAN TIGERS. [Dec. 14,

2. A Comparative Examination of three living Specimens of

Felis tigris sondaica, with Notes on an old Javan Male.

By Dr. F. D. Wercn, F.Z.S.

[ Received October 16, 1909.}

In the Society’s Gardens at Regent's Park is a young male

Sumatran Tiger, about which Mr. Pocock made some remarks in

December, 1908 (P. Z. 8. 1908, p. 890).

Since then I have seen two other living specimens of VYelis tigris

sondaica, one younger and one older than the Society’s male, and

as my old male shows peculiarities about the neck and ears which

I have never seen in any other race of Tiger living or dead, in-

cluding living examples of both Persian and Manchurian races,

a few remarks on the three animals, which were at very different

ages, Imay be interesting, especially as I can find no skins of Felis

tigris sondaica in the Natural History Museum, and as Mr. Pocock

informs me he has had no opportunity of seeing other Tigers of

this race, except the one he described.

Elliot in his ‘ Monograph of the Felide’ makes statements

about the distribution of white on the face which do not agree

with the three specimens I have seen, whilst all information I

can find about this race, with the exception of Mr. Pocock’s

remarks, is extremely scanty and vague.

My specimens are an old male from Java which lived in

Antwerp for eight years and was estimated to be four years old on

arrival, and a female from Sumatra about a year and a half old.

Writing last December Mr. Pocock stated that the Society’s male

had “ shorter hair on the cheeks and throat” than a Persian Tiger,

but since then this animal has developed large cheek-tufts and a

well marked beard, the cheek-tufts having white on their lower

and anterior surfaces and the beard being almost all white. In

my old Javan male these cheek-tufts and beard were very large

and well developed, and also in the young Sumatran female they

were well marked, which shows that Felis tigris sondaica grows

these at an early age in life.

When Mr. Pocock wrote, the Society’s male had not the cheek

hairs and beard so well developed as now, as it was then in poorer

condition, but from its condition now and from the cheek-tufts

and beards of my two specimens, I should certainly say that Felis

tigris sondaica was better developed in these points than the

Persian race.

My old Javan male had long and large tufts of hair growing

from the internal surfaces of the external ear, and projecting at

least three inches beyond the skin of the edge of the ear, and on

front view these tufts gave the animal an appearance somewhat

sunilar to that of an Kared Owl.

These tufts are much larger and quite unlike anything I have

seen in either the Manchurian or the Persian race.

Also the hair down the back and sides of the neck was very

Vebosso iC, (Pil ILS OT

€.c.u.

A. K. M. del. : André & Sleigh, Ltd,

1. NEST OF PHYLLOMEDUSA SAUVAGII.

2. P. SAUVAGII, 9. DISSECTED FROM THE SIDE.

1909.| ON NESTING-HABITS OF PHYLLOMEDUSA SAUVAGII. 893

long, forming a long and loose mane, the hairs being quite five

inches long, and this mane terminated suddenly at the junction of

the neck and body.

The hairs down the throat between the head and fore limbs

were also very long, quite four inches. On body and limbs my

Javan male had no longer hair than the Society’s male, and both

my animals had the white on cheek-tufts and beard as I have

described in the Society’s male.

I may remark that both my animals were as thickly striped on

the body as the Society’s male, which is a point of interest, as

Elliot in his ‘ Monograph of the Felidz’ says that this race is

striped as in the Indian race.

Mr. Pocock has pointed out, when remarking on Nepal specimens,

that the presence or absence of a few stripes is of no subspecific

value, with which statement I think all accurate observers will

agree ; and judging from a female J saw from North Persia, I think

that if a large number of skins were examined, the Persian race

as a whole would not be found to be more thickly striped than

Felis tigris sondaica,

These observations were from stuffed skins and living animals

seen by myself, and not from descriptions by other people er from

figures of either race. The living specimens were compared with

one another within seven days.

3. The Nesting Habits of the Tree-Frog Phyllomedusa

sauvagu. By W. H. Agar, M.A., D.Se., Glasgow

University *.

[Received October 16, 1909. |

(Plate LX XXIV.t)

I give here a few notes on the remarkable nesting-habits of a

Tree-Frog, Phyllomedusa sawvagii, which I found breeding in

great Pinanidemeen in the Paraguayan Chaco from October 1907 till

February 1908 ¢. This frog, like other members of its genus (e. g-

P. jheringu, P. hy ypochondr ride), makes a nest suspended from

bushes, ete. overhanging a pool into which the tadpoles drop when

they are hatched. The nest of P. sawva git, however, differs in a

noteworthy way from those of the other species of the genus

which have been described.

From the examination of the structure of fully formed nests

(Pl. LX XXIV. fig. 1), one of which was found half finished,

the female still being engaged in adding eggs, the method of

oviposition can easily be “deduced. First, the lower ends of a

number of leaves are drawn together and held so by a deposit of

* Communicated by G. A. Boulenger, F.R.S., V.P.Z.S.

t For explanation of the Plate see p. 896.

*~ The observations were made in the course of a zoological expedition to the

Chaco, the expenses of which were defrayed by the Gover nment Grant Committee of

the Royal Society and by the Managers of the Balfour Fund at Cambridge

University.

894 DR. W. E. AGAR ON THE NESTING-HABITS | Dec. 14,

empty gelatinous egg-capsules, forming together a stiff jelly.

These egg-capsules are of course secretions of the oviduct. ‘They

aie little solid spheres of jelly, made polygonal by mutual pressure,

and except that they area little smaller are exactly like the capsules

laid later and containing eggs.

As the act of oviposition continues, egg-containing capsules

begin to appear among the eggless ones, and the bulk of the

nest is filled with a mixture of full and empty capsules in about

equal numbers. Finally, as oviposition approaches its end, the

ege-containing capsules become fewer and fewer, and the last

addition to the nest isa mass of empty capsules as at the beginning

of the process.*

In order to confirm this view as to the way in which the mass

of spawn is made up, which was deduced from examination of a

number of nests, | made a dissection of a frog which I had preserved

in the act of oviposition, when the nest was about half filled.

The dissection (P]. LX XXIV. fig. 2) shows precisely the conditions

to be expected from the structure of the nests. Hach ovisac con-

tains a mass of encapsuled eggs and empty (7. e. eggless but solid)

capsules. The former occupy the postero- -ventral and the latter

the antero-dorsal portion of the ovisac, but the line of demarcation

between the two is not precise. A glance at the figure will show

that at the moment when the frog was preserved (in the middle of

Oviposition) if was laying a mixture of full and empty capsules,

but as oviposition continued the proportion of full to empty ones

would become less and less, and finally it would be laying empty

ones only. The contents of the ovisac of the other side are

arranged in a precisely similar way.

The mass of spawn when finished is thus lar gely, or often even

mainly, made up of empty capsules. The egg-containing capsules

are embedded im the mass in such a way that in well made e nests,

such as the one figured, not a single egg is exposed to the light

and air, the jelly plug of empty capsules at the top and bottom,

and the leaves at the sides forming a complete shield for them.

Each egg is of course enclosed in a vitelline membrane as well

as the gelatinous oviducal envelope. As the time for hatching

approaches a large quantity of fluid accumulates inside the vitelline

membranes, causing them to swell up to twice their proper size

and giving the embryos room to make violent movements within

the membranes and to give free play to their large external gills,

which may be seen moving to and fro.

The fluid inside the vitelline membranes has evidently been

extracted from the jelly of the oviducal envelopes, both of those

surrounding eggs and of the empty, solid ones; for whereas in

the newly laid ege-mass each vitelline membrane fits close round

its egg, and is separated from its neighbours both by its own and

their own thick oviducal capsules, and also by the empty capsules

* In the figure some of the leaves have been turned aside to expose the egg-mass.

In its natural condition none of the eggs were visible, only the mass of empty

capsules at the top and bottom being exposed.

1909. ] OF THE TREE-FROG PHYLLOMEDUSA SAUVAGII. 895

distributed among the egg-mass, at the time of hatching the

relatively enormously distended vitelline membranes fill a far

greater bulk of the nest, and the jelly capsules between them are

reduced to an insignificant remnant.

When about to hatch the tensely filled membranes burst at

the slightest touch, liberating both embryo and fluid. If a nest

is opened soon after the eggs have hatched, it presents a seething

mass of tadpoles wriggling about in a thick mucilaginous fluid,

formed by the clear liquid from the burst vitelline membranes

and the now dissolved remains of the jelly, in the interior of a

chamber the sides of which are formed by leaves, and the floor and

roof by the plugs of empty capsules.

In order that the larve should reach the water beneath them

it is necessary that the wall of this chamber should give way

somewhere. The fluid above has a softening effect on the gela-

tinous floor of the nest, and this gradually softens. At a period

of about 12-24 hours after the bulk of the larve are hatched

(there seems to be about a day’s interval between the hatching of

the first and last larva) a thick mucilaginous drop may be seen

to form at the bottom of the nest, and presently there is a steady

drip of the deliquesced jelly plug into the water below. After

a few minutes a larva slips through and falls into the pond beneath.

A few seconds later two or three more come through in the same

way and then they come faster and faster as the whole semi-fluid

contents of the nest continues falling drop by drop into the water,

taking the larve with it. One nest, in which I watched the

whole process, took five minutes to empty itself, in which time

over 300 tadpoles fell from it into the water.

It sometimes happens that a nest is hung a few inches from the

edge of the water. In this case the tadpoles suffer no inconyeni-

ence from falling on the dry earth, but being extremely agile

quickly flick themselves into the water. Budgett mentions this

happening in P. hypochondrialis also.

The larvee, like the aquatic young of so many other vertebrates,

exhibit a retraction of their chromatophores at night and an

expansion in the daytime.

The most interesting feature of this process is the part played

by the empty egg-capsules, which may be said to be three-fold.

First,—The plugs at the top and bottom of the nest provide

shields from the sun and air for the eggs, where the leaves do not

protect them. The eggs are quite unpigmented, and any that are

exposed to the surface, as happens often in less perfectly formed

nests, turn yellow and die.

Secondly,—The empty capsules mixed with the full ones in the

body of the nest providean extra source of fluid for the developing

embryo, and for the newly hatched larva, as already described.

Thirdly,—The plug at the bottom serves to keep the whole nest

intact, until the rather diffuse process of hatching is completed,

and all the larve are ready to fall into the water.

The large number of empty capsules mixed with the full ones

896 ON NESTING-HABITS OF PHYLLOMEDUSA SAUVAGII. [ Dec. 14,

is very striking, and still more so is the definite arrangement of

the proportions in which they are produced in different periods of

oviposition. We must suppose that at the beginning of the process

the oviducts secrete a large number of capsules before the eggs

begin to pass down them, and again at the end must continue to

do so after the last egg has passed. The actual production of

empty capsules is only what may be found, though to a very

much smaller extent, in probably any Anuran. If a batch of

Rana temporaria spawn be looked over, a few empty capsules—

perhaps 2 or 3 per cent.—will generally be found. P. sawvagi,

however, has developed this peculiarity to an enormous extent

and also controlled it in the way we have seen.

The nests are not always so perfect as the one figured. Often

gaps are left between the edges of the leaves, exposing some or

many of the eggs tothe light. Such exposed eggs if they are

near the surface die. Sometimes also the jelly plugs at top and

bottom contain a few eggs. Such eggs, being exposed, also die.

It is significant that the actual percentage of eggs hatched is

thus greater in perfect nests than in the less perfect ones often

found, for we see that the advantage in productivity of the frogs

which make the best nests—i. ¢., frogs in which the oviducts

secrete a sufficient number of empty capsules, especially at the

beginning and end of oviposition, and which also make the best

use of the leaves to cover the sides of the nest—must tend to

perfect the process.

The question of how rounded egg-capsules are formed without

eggs as nuclei to form round, is one to which I have not found

any clue by the dissection of the oviducts, which were nearly

empty in both females I opened. I can only say that I found

empty capsules far up in the glandular portion of the oviduct, as

well marked off from one another as in the ovisacs.

REFERENCES.

H. von JuHerinc.—‘ On the Oviposition in Phyliomedusa

jheringti.” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. xvii., 1886.

J. 8S. Bupererr.—‘ Notes on Batrachians of the Paraguayan

Chaco.” Quart. Journ. Micro. Sci. vol. xli., 1899.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE LXXXIV.

Both the figures were drawn from preserved specimens by Mr. A. K. Maxwell.

They are of natural size.

Fig. 1. A nest of Phyllomedusa sauvagii. It is hanging in its natural position.

Some of the leaves have been turned aside to expose the egg-containing

portion of the mass of spawn. e.c./., mass of empty egg-capsules, forming

the bottom of the nest. e.c.w., empty capsules forming the roof of the nest.

ov., egg-containing portion of the mass of spawn.

Fig. 2. Dissection of a female P. sawvagii preserved when it had about half filied

its nest. od., oviduct. ovs., ovisac, containing full and empty capsules

arranged as described in the text.

[ While the above was in the press, I have seen M. Siedlecki’s

. - ‘a a

a = . > 8

Hi ; e 4 : : ¥

* ps

. c * ’ =

. ¥ u

4 ‘ cr + a

. ¢ 3 = a .

: us E ; 5 oS) be

- ry ws 1 P

1 , : 7

z wit: : :

2 he yi - y a ~: * ;

F -

i € / < eae t : i

- y ’ ‘

: \ : :

pees | 2 o 1

‘ ¥ q . = , 2 t &

: F je * " i

MW ‘ see * 5 eG

1 0 f : ‘ J

. ‘ q ep

> “ ; fi , \

P, Z. 8. 1909, Pl, Sony.

Bale & Damelsson, Ltd

MADREPORARIA FROM MERGUI ARCHIPELAGO.

eZ. 8. 1909. Bl. ocean.

Bale & Damielsson. Lt?

MADREPORARIA FROM MERGUI ARCHIPELAGO.

1909. ] ON MARINE FAUNA FROM MERGUI ARCHIPELAGO. 897

paper “Zur Kenntnis des javanischen Flugfrosches,’ in the

Biologischen Centralblatt, Bd. xxix., Nov. and Dec. 1909, in

which he describes the nesting-habits of Polypedates reinwardtir.

These present some interesting points of comparison with those of

P. sawoagii. The general economy of the nests is the same, but

in Polypedates the protection for the eggs and the source of fluid

for the developing embryos are supplied by a stiff foamy substance

instead of by empty egg-capsules (though Siedlecki states that

empty egg-cases are often laid). This substance is distinct from

the oviducal egg-membranes, which are embedded in the frothy

mass, the whole being suspended in leaves as in Phyllomedusa.

The majority of the eggs are in the centre of the mass, the outer

layerscontaining comparatively few eggs. It is the foamy substance

which appears to give up its water to the developing embryos,

like the empty egg-cases in P. sauvagii. After hatching, the

tadpoles remain for twenty-four hours or more in the fluid thus

obtained, which now lies in the interior of the hollow nest formed

by the dried outer layers of the frothy mass. The tadpoles are

finally freed by the giving way of the wall of the nest under the

softening influence of the fluid inside, or of rain, or of both.—

Jan. | 910.]

4. Marine Fauna from the Mergui Archipelago, Lower

Barma, collected by Jas. J. Simpson, M.A., B.Sc., and

R. N. Rudmose- Brown, B.Sc., University of Aberdeen:

Mapreporaria. By Rura M. Harrison and Marcarer

POOLE™*.

[Received October 19, 1909.)

(Plates LXXXV. & LXXXVI.7)

The collection was made during the spring of 1907, and

entrusted to us for identification and description by Professor

Bourne. It contains one species of Turbinolide, one species of

Flabellide, two species of Fungiide, and ten species of Kupsam-

miide including one new species of Balanophyllia.

We wish to take this opportunity of thanking Dr. Bourne for

much help and advice, Professor Herdman for the loan of two

species of Balanophyllia, and Professor Jeffrey Bell for permission

to examine the Hupsammiide in the National Collection ; also

Dr. E. H. J. Schuster and Mr. Robinson for the photographs on

Plate LX XXYV.

Family TURBINOLID® Milne-Edwards & Haime.

By Marcarer Poors.

The collection contains 84 specimens of superficially very

different appearance, but Gardiner has recently shown [16] that

* Communicated by Prof. G. C. Bourns, D.Sc., F.Z.S.

+ For explanation of the Plates see p. 912.

898 MISS R. M. HARRISON AND MISS M. POOLE ON [| Dec. 14,

we are really dealing, not with several, but with a single species

which is highly variable.

Genus Hererocyaruus Milne-Edwards & Haime.

HererocyatHus azQguicosratus Milne-Edwards & Haime [24].

(Plate LXXXYV. figs. la—1f)

Stephanoseris rousseaut Milne-Edwards & Haime [27].

H. philippinensis Semper [34].

H. parasiticus Semper | 34],

H. pulchellus Rehberg.

H. oblongatus Rehberg.

H. equicostatus Gardiner [16].

The above list of synonyms of H. equicostatus is due to

Gardiner [16], with the exception of Stephanoseris rousseaui

which was subsequently added by Bourne [5].

The specimens fall into three main types, of which two are

identical with those described and figured by Gardiner [16] ;

while the third is rather markedly different and resembles more

closely the figure given by Semper of his now abolished species

H. philippinensis. The accompanying photographs (Pl. LAXXV.

figs. 1 af), however, show that this type is connected with the

second type of Gardiner by beautifully intermediate forms.

All the specimens are free with smooth bases, and have the

aperture of the Aspidosiphon chamber well at one side and often

on a slight protuberance.

Type I. 49 specimens. The corallum is _ pear-shaped,

14:5 10°5 mm.and 6 mm. in height. Lateral pores are confined

to the basal surface. The cost are equal in number tothe septa,

very clearly defined and extending well round on to the basal

surface. They are closely covered with small granules. The

septa form four cycles of six systems; the primaries and second-

aries are the largest and equal in size, the quaternaries come next

in size, the tertiaries being the smallest. Crenulated pali stand

before all the septa except those of the third cycle, and are

indistinguishable from the inner edges of the septa on one hand

and from the columellar trabecule on the other. Both pali,

trabecule and septa are covered with spiniform granules. The

calicular fossa is hardly 1 mm. in depth, and 2x3 mm. in dia-

meter owing to the crowded pal.

Type II. 22 specimens. The corallum is pear-shaped or round,

of the same size as type I., but generally slightly taller, 8 mm.

The lateral pores are distributed in an irregular manner round

the lower part of the wall of the corallum and not restricted to

the base as in type I. Cost as in type I., but tending to be less

regular in size. The septa are in four cycles of six systems, but

here the primaries are clearly marked off from the secondaries

by their greater prominence and larger size, and form, together

with their adjacent quaternaries, a well-defined six-rayed star,

alternating with the points of which the secondaries with their

1909. ] MARINE FAUNA FROM MERGUI ARCHIPELAGO, 899

quaternaries form a similar though less conspicuous figure. The

third cycle is here also the least developed. There are three crowns

of pali, which are usually well marked off from the septal margins

and the columellar trabecule ; both pali and trabecule are covered

with spiniform granules. The columella lies well below the

cealicular margin, so that in this type there is a distinct though

narrow fossa. Intermediates between types I. and IT. show less

obvious star figures, and the gradual reduction of the pali and

consequent development of the well-defined calicular fcssa.

Type III. 13 specimens. The “corallum is oval or round,

15 mm. in diameter and 10 mm. high, and somewhat compressed

in the middle. The lateral pores form an irregular ring a little

below the calicular margin. The costz are as in the two previous

types. The septa form five cycles of six systems, of which the

primaries and secondaries are very much exsert round the margin

and the remaining cycles of about equal size, except those members

of the fifth cycle on either side of the primaries and secondaries

which are shghtly enlarged. There are four crowns of nodular

pali clearly marked off from the septa and standing well above the

trabecular columella; all are ornamented with spines. The fossa

is large, 5x3 mm.and 2 or 3 mm. deep. Intermediate forms

connecting this type with type IT. have an incomplete fifth cycle

of septa, or all the quinaries are very much reduced so as to be

hardly visible.

Localities.— All three types occur at Station XXX. Fly Island,

Observation Island, and 8.W. of Domel Island. Bottom: rock

and sand, Depth: 8-15 fathoms. 48 specimens of type I., 18

of type II., 7 of type IIT.

Station XXXII. Christmas Island Group. Bottom : rock,

sand, and mud. Depth: 8-23 fathoms. 1 specimen of type I.

Family FuABELLID# Bourne [5].

In the present collection there are 29 specimens of the genus

Flabellum, which, since Gardiner’s [15] revision of the group, can

all be included in the highly variable species /. rubrum.

Genus FLABELLUM Lesson.

FLABELLUM RUBRUM Quoy & Gaimard.

F’. variabile Semper | 34 |.

I’, stokest \

FF. owent

F. aculeatum | Mil : .

Ve ec ne-Edwards & Haime [27].

aoe |

Ff. debile |

F. sumatrense )

All the specimens are free, but with large and clearly defined

basal sears. They are truncate in form, the height of the

corallum being in all cases less than the length of the calice.

The margin of the calice is entire, the ends of the long axis are

Proc. Zoor. Soc.—1909, No. LXI. 61

= Height of | | vy:,, | Basal | Number

Ee oetin Locality. | Cor allum | aie = scar of basal

a a [testa imnarae ieee ne nao | 1 mm. processes.

a Se Sat pen ELS Mir) SOLS

it Station XXV. Gregory Group. 27 29 X12) 8x4 4

Bottom: stones and |

broken shell.

Depth : 4-14 fathoms.}

2 Station XXV. Gregory Group.| )

Station XXIV. Cat Island.

Bottom: rock, sand,) - 25 35 X10! 11x5 2

and broken shell. | |

| Depth: 8-22 fathoms.) }

2 Station XVI. Alligator Rock.) )

Bottom: rock and sand

or mud.

Depth : 8-18 fathoms | ;

Station XVIII. Paye Island. r 19 Bs SMO RS 4

Bottom: sand, shell,

and rock.

Depth: 10-21 fathoms.| }

3 Station XVIII. Paye Island. 17 225 x7 8x4 2 or 4

6 Station XVIII. ,, 35 16 23°35 X8 8x4 2,4 or 6

A Station XVIII. ,, Re 15 195xX75 8X4 2 or 4

5 Station XVIII. ,, 45 14. 20 <8 8x3 | 2

) Station XVIII. ,, 3 13 17 X75) 9X35 2)

| Stnuiom SOVIOE, g, 12 18 x7 | 9x4 2

: | |

1 Station XVIII. ,, 5} 10 12 <6 | 10x4 —

900 MISS R. M. HARRISON AND MISS M. POOLE oN | Dec. 14,

from 2 to 10 mm. below the sides, and the latter may be straight,

convex, or slightly concave. The corallum is completely covered

by an epitheca marked by slight vertical ridges and horizontal

concentric lines of growth. There is almost always a root-like

process at either end of the basal scar, and often one or two pairs

nearer the calice. The septa, which are somewhat exsert round

the calicular margin, form generally five eycles of six systems; in

some the fifth cycle is incomplete. The primaries, secondaries,

and tertiaries are equal in size, with their inner edges slightly

thickened and sinuous before they unite by means of thick

nodular trabecule to form the loose parietal columella. Occasion-

ally two or three of the quaternaries are similarly thickened and

united with the columella. All the septa are ornamented with

radiating ridges bearing small spines.

Localities and the relation between the height of the corallum

and the calicular and basal measurements, with the variation in

the number of root-like processes of the epitheca, are given im the

accompanying table.

Flahellum rubrum.

1909. ] MARINE FAUNA FROM MERGUI ARCHIPELAGO. 901

Family Funeitp# (Milne-Edwards & Haime).

Genus Funera Lamarck.

Founera FuNGITEes Linneus.

Var. acaricirormis Doderlein [7].

Fungia agariciformis Lamarck.

Fungia tenvifolia Milne-Edwards & Haime [26, 27).

Fungia repanda Milne-Edwards & Haime (26, 27].

Fungia linnei Milne-Edwards & Haime [26, 27).

Madrepora fungites Forskal.

Doderlein [7] identifies F. fungites var. agariciformis with

F. agariciformis and F. tenuifolia, and F. repanda with F. linner.

Milne-Edwards [27], however, gives F'. repanda as synonymous

with Madrepora fungites and F. agariciformis, and £. linnei

also with J/. fungites; while /. tenuifolia he identifies with

F. agariciformis. ‘The descriptions given by Milne-Edwards of

these species show no marked differences beyond those one would

expect in a form which Déderlein has shown to be highly variable,

and they should therefore, I think, be absorbed into /. fungites.

There are in the collection two adult and three young specimens,

the latter having well-developed peduncles and being of irregular

shape, flat or sometimes slightly concave above. They measure

from 30x 22 mm. to 64x62 mm. The two adult specimens are

concave below and arched above to a height of 38 mm. in the

centre. They measure 11098 mm. The scar of attachment is

just to be distinguished.

Localities.—Station XXIX. High Peaked Island. Bottom :

coral-reef. 3 young specimens. Locality of adult specimens is

unrecorded.

Genus Diaseris Miine-Edwards & Haime.

DIASERIS DistorTA Michelin. (Plate LXXXYV. figs. 24, 5a.)

Fungia distorta Diaseris-form of Déderlein [7 '.

Bourne [5] has already criticised Quelch’s [33] opinion that

this species is really nothing more than abnormal specimens of

Cycloseris (Fungia), and shown that broken and repaired forms

of the latter differ very markedly from Diaseris. Déderlein,

however, says that he finds Cycloseris-form specimens of Diaseris

distorta, and Vaughan [37] describes a specimen of Cycloseris

from the Philippines which had “several sharply indented lines

radiating from the base.” ‘“ This specimen,” he says “ looks as if

its division in Diaseris segments had been initiated, but the

process not completed. The segments have remained attached,

but indications of the arrested division still persist. There are

suggestions in some of the other specimens of lines along which

division might take place.” He also says that while handling a

specimen of D. pulchella which was circular, a segment broke out ;

and therefore he considers Diaseris inseparable from Fungia.

§1*

902 MISS R. M, HARRISON AND MISS M. POOLE ON [ Dec. 14,

Nevertheless, I think more evidence is necessary before uniting a

form with so peculiar a method of reproduction as Diaseris with

the genus Pungia. Plate LXXXV. figs. 2a, 6, 3a, b, show a

photograph of a specimen of Fungia cyclolites from the Ceylon

collection described by Bourne [5}, which has been broken and

yepaired, and for comparison a specimen of Diaseris distorta with

two segments.

The collection includes one specimen measuring 30 x 27 mm.

and 20x 18 mm., and a few fragments.

Locality. Station XJIJ. Maria Island. Bottom: reck and

sand. Depth: 8-10 fathoms. One specimen.

Family EupsamMMirp® Bourne [5].

By Rurs M. Harrison.

Genus BALANOPHYLLIA Searles Wood.

BALANOPHYLLIA SOCIALIS Semper [34].

Rhodopsammia socialis Semper.

Six examples, of which the largest measures exactly 30 mm. in

height, calicee 10 x 8°5 mm., depth of calice 8 min.; the smallest

is a 10 mm. high, with a nearly circular calice, 6 x 5°5 mm.,

and 3°53 mm. in depth. The largest specimen shows two lateral

scars, one about halfway up the corallum, and the other on the

opposite side at a quarter of the entire length from the lip of the

ealice. Another specimen has two small swellimgs, the beginnings

of lateral buds on opposite sides immediately below the lip of the

ealice, and below these again on one side is the old scar of a former

bud, and on the other is a large lateral bud nearly as large as the

parent zooid, and having itself two very fresh lateral scars. The

remaining four specimens are obviously young individuals, the two

smaller have such very freshly-made basal scars as to suggest that

they may have been artificially broken off.

Table of measurements 1n mm.

| Height. Calice. | Depth of calice. |

WI galas ln a) | Ase Ga 6! 8

SENHA eG ane | 26 IE SLTKO 9-5

be FDA ly aca ie peli, 8) 8

eae ge Resco ene. Peet 85x 7 5

Aisaibe alee dahsi incre, Sa Lig Dey Ep Bale MORE 5

Eanes men Bec hal aae e ew pierina Sms ai dioha’ 5

Gee ee ee ee: | 10 Se Hb | Bw

The table of measurements illustrates the fact pointed out by

Semper, that in the young individuals the calice is circular, and

the tendency to become oval increases with the age of the in-

dividual. The columella is but poorly developed in very young

1909. j MARINE FAUNA FROM MERGUI ARCHIPELAGO. 903

individuals, becoming more pronounced in older specimens. In

all other characters the Burmese specimens agree very exactly

with Semper’s and Bourne’s descriptions of those from the Philip-

pines and Ceylon.

Locality.—Station IX. Bentinck Island and Court’s Island.

Bottom : sand and shell. Depth: 12-26 fathoms.

BALANOPHYLLIA STOKESIANA Milne-Edwards & Haime.

Leptopsammea stokesiana M.-Kdw. & H. [25].

Four individuals undoubtedly belonging to this species. The

resemblance in general form and mode of growth is borne out in

detail in the characters of the coste and septa. The columella is

rather less developed than in the Philippine species, but projects

upwards in the calicular fossa.

Locality.—Station XXII. Hastings Harbour. Bottom: rock

and sand. Depth: 3-20 fathoms, and shore.

BALANOPHYLLIA PROFUNDICELLA Gardiner [14].

Three specimens which, with much hesitation, I refer to this

species, as they do not appear to differ sufficiently from the de-

scription of the type-specimen to justify the creation of a new

species.

Table of measurements in mm.

Height. | Calice. | Depth of calice. |

Pe 9°5 x 8 | 6 |

16 115x9°5 | a) |

4 Oe Oat he ieee urea

In all three examples the corallum is straight and cylindrical,

attached by a spreading base. Epitheca absent ; coste correspond

to septa, broad, subequal, and are visible from the base upwards.

Calice oval, fossa not very deep, with a well-developed columella

which projects upwards slightly, and has a rounded, somewhat

dome-like appearance. Septa in six systems of four cycles, with

traces of an incomplete fifth cycle, Primaries and secondaries

somewhat exsert, but in all three specimens the lip of the calice

is more or less broken, and the character is not very obvious. The

quaternaries fuse over the tertiaries and again over the secondaries

deep down in the calice. The granulations on the septa of the

primary and secondary cycles are extremely fine in the tallest of

the three specimens; in the two others the granules have run

together to form fine radial ridges; the edges are entire; the

edges of the septa of the lower cycles are denticulate.

In the shallower calicular fossa and the denticulate edges of

the septa of the third and lower cycles, these forms resemble

B. parvula (Moseley [28]), which, as Gardiner has pointed out,

comes very near to the present species ; but the quaternaries are

904 MISS R. M. HARRISON AND MISS M. POOLE ON | Dec. 14,

not prominently exsert asin the ‘ Challenger’ specimen ; and as in

other respects the Burmese specimens resemble Gardiner’s speci-

men from Lifu, it is better to retaim them with this species.

Locality.—Station XXIV. Cat Island. Bottom: rock and sand

and broken shell. Depth: 8-22 fathoms.

BALANOPHYLLIA PARALLELA Semper [34].

B. parallela Bourne | 5}.

There are thirteen examples of this species, varying in height

between 9 and 25 mm., and another closely-allied specimen which

is notified below.

Table of measurements 1n mm.

Station. Height. Calice. Depth of calice.

WAV teense cee ne 22 16 8x 12°5 8

ONG ey cry ctrl te 25 ae OR cle 8

FIED ear pret or 24 WW «12 8

OS AR eS 2 acre ees 22 ra xa | 8

DOO 8 fe ks ape Adak 19 3.x 9°5 6

JD .OE Ras et aoe Par 19 WA Se) 6

EXOT or Ma ae) USoalan i ac TUNE Se 0 5

TORO Jenene ee eee 16 il ExrSso 5

Valpeseeiy Pets eRe it ey 15 PD <ue 5

PERSO 8 a Se 1] YS. 0 4

OX Naa Se eae: Kk lacomese: Sav ge Ce 4

I ae ee Su) aie ea 3

POW gs BOLO TL, nc 23 a LU ores} 8

RONG Reon sateen 26 peli Seal 6 |

The cost are not quite so clearly defined in the upper portion

of the corallum, but it is possible to trace one in connection with

each septum ; in the lower part of the colony they are very dis-

tinct and identical with those of the Ceylon specimen. The

septal characters are similar in every particular.

Localities—Station IV. King Island. Bottom: rock and sand.

Depth 8-25 fathoms. 1 dead specimen.

Station IX. Bentinck Island and Courts Island. Bottom:

sand and shell. Depth: 12-26 fathoms. 11 specimens.

Stations XXV. & XXVI. Gregory Group. Bottom: stones

and broken shell. Depth: 4-14 fathoms. 1 specimen.

Another specimen resembles B. parallela so closely that it seems

advisable to place it with that species. The coste are well

defined throughout the entire length of the corallum, in this re-

sembling the Ceylon specimen; but the costz corresponding to

the septa of the first two cycles are slightly larger and more

exsert ; this is more obvious on one side of the individual than

the other. The columella is compressed from side to side, and

1909. | MARINE FAUNA FROM MERGUI ARCHIPELAGO. 905

projects upwards as a long narrowridge. Other septal characters

are identical with those of B. parallela.

Locality.— Station XXII. Hastings Harbour. Bottom: rock

and sand. Depth: 3-20 fathoms and shore.

BALANOPHYLLIA IMPERIALIS Kent [19]. (Plate LXXXVI.

figs. 5a, b, & c.)

Two examples, one attached, the other broken off from its

attachment. Corallum straight, conical, one specimen increasing

in width much more than the other. Transverse outline of calice

elliptical, ends of long axis depressed.

Table of measurements in min.

| Height. Calice. |Depth of calice. |

26 20 x 14 | 7

An “ epitheca” covers the lower half of the broader specimen

and three-quarters of the narrower one; both were covered by

encrusting Polyzoa and Serpula tubes. Coste exactly corre-

sponding to and continuous with all septa; in some cases the

junction of the fifth to the fourth cycle of septa is marked ex-

ternally by a corresponding junction of the coste. All cost

slightly, but very distinctly, and equally exsert, the upper edges

where they pass into the septa rounded and entire; granulations

coarse, having the appearance of longitudinal rows of small spines.

Septa in five absolutely complete cycles, all covered irregularly

with numerous fine granulations; septa of the first two cycles

equal in size, reaching the columella, at which point they are

thickened ; edges of these septa, also the upper half of the septa

of the third cycle, entire ; septa of the third cycle also reach the

columella, and are thickened at the point of junction, lower

edges denticulate; septa of the fourth and fifth cycles grouped in

typical Balanophyllid manner round septa of the third cycle;

edges denticulate. Calicular fossa large and moderately deep.

Columella well developed, trabecular and spongy, with a convex

surface.

Localities. Station XVIII. PayeIsland. Bottom: sand, shell,

and rock. Depth: 10-21 fathoms. The larger specimen.

Station XXII. Hastings Harbour. Bottom: rock and sand.

Depth: 3-20 fathoms. The smaller specimen.

I refer this very beautiful coral to the species from Singapore

in the National Collection described by Saville Kent [19], in spite

of the following differences: the great difference in size, the

larger of the specimens in the present collection is only half the

size of the one from Singapore; the erect mode of growth; the

presence of an epitheca; the rougher, more spinose character of

the costee. However, none of these difficulties need be insuperable.

906 MISS R. M. HARRISON AND MISS M. POOLE ON _ [ Dec. 14,

Size is obviously a character which must vary, and within certain

limits cannot be regarded as a distinction between species ;

shape must necessarily be determined to a great extent by local

external conditions, concerning which there is no information ;

the “epitheca ” of the Burmese specimens may possibly have been

formed secondarily in self-preservation from the enerusting para-

sites which surround the lower portion of the corallites, and may

not be a true epitheca at all; and the coste of these smaller and

probably younger individuals have not yet become so smooth and

worn as those of the larger Singapore specimen.

The absolute symmetry of the internal structures, the characters

of the septa, and their entire edges passing into the coste, suf-

ficiently establish its identity.

BALANOPHYLLIA DIFFUSA, sp.n. (Plate LAXXYV. figs. 4a & 4.)

Two examples, both broken from their attachment ; slightly

curved, with slight circular swellings visible externally ay various

neights. Transverse outline of calice elliptical, lip of calice not

thickened.

Height LP ial, sh Calice. Depth of calice.

ee | iz

Bo | 1a ros, tl 3

20 | 12-5 <x 10 | 3

Kpitheca absent. Coste visible from the base upwards, but not

exsert, rather broad, and beset with low granulations; the junction

of the fifth to the fourth cycle of septa is, in some cases, accom-

panied by a corresponding junction of the costae exter nally. Septa

in six systems of four cycles, with an incomplete fifth cycle ; septa

of the first two cycles equal, somewhat exsert, edges smooth and

entire, slightly thickened peripherally, and inclined to become

fenestrated ; granulations tend to run in longitudinal and radial

rows ; septa of the lower cycles arranged in typical Balanophyllid

manner, edges very irregular and denticulate. Calicular fossa

shallow. Columella very highly developed, of a very delicate

spongy trabecular texture, and in some places extending between

the septa of the first two cycles up the septa of the third cycle to

the junction of the third to the fourth cycles. This encroachment

of the columella on the interseptal chambers is a character quite

distinet from any previously described species.

Locality.—Station XXII. Hastings Harbour. Bottom: rock

and sand. Depth: 3-20 fathoms and shore.

Genus HerrropsAmmuiA Milne-Edwards & Haime.

HETEROPSAMMIA MICHELINI Milne-Kdwards & Haime [25].

Numerous specimens, 322 in all, from different stations, varying

in size between small individuals 7 mm. in height, with calices

7x5 mm., to forms twice the size, 15 mm. high, and calices

13x9mm. The great majority have two calices, or else the

1909. ] MARINE FAUNA FROM MERGUI ARCHIPELAGO, 907

typical figure-of-8 form of two individuals in the process of

dividing. The joining of the septa of the fifth cycle over those of

the fourth is decidedly marked. At the pot where the junction

takes place the single septum formed by the union of the two

septa of the fifth cycle becomes strongly convex, as Milne-Edwards

has already pointed out, and the lower half projects inwards

towards the columella beyond the septa of the first three cycles.

Localities.—Station VI. Near Grant Island. Bottom: rock and

sand or rock and mud. Depth: 3-7 fathoms. 14 specimens.

Station XXX. Fly Island. Bottom: rock and sand. Depth :

8-15 fathoms. 307 specimens.

Station XX XIII. Christmas Island. Bottom: rock, sand, and

mud. Depth: 8-23 fathoms. 1 specimen.

Genus DENDROPHYLLIA Milne-Edwards & Haime.

In the present collection there are three species of Colonial

Madreporaria which have points in common with Milne-Edwards

and Haime’s original three genera Dendrophyllia, Cenopsammia,

and Lobopsamnua, and the difficulty of deciding to which they

belong is such that it will probably be convenient in the future to

— recognize but one genus instead of three. Inthe original diagnosis

of the genus Cuwnopsammia by Milne-Edwards and Haime, the close

connection between the three genera was pointed out; but Den-

drophylhia and Lobopsammia are distinguished from the former by

the star-like appearance of their calices (l’aspect étoilé des calices).

Klunzinger has remarked on the same difference; speaking of

Cenopsammia he says:—‘ Daher ist hier auch das ftir die Familie

charakteristische Zusammenlaufen der klemeren Septa hier nicht

oder wenig ausgesprochen (zum Unterschied von Dendrophyllia).”

Canopsammia has only three complete cycles of septa; Dendro-

phyllia and Lobopsammia have four complete cycles. Lobopsammia

propagates by fissiparity ; both Dendrophyllia and Cenopsammia

propagate by gemmation. Verrill has already placed Cano-

psammia with Dendrophyllia, and in this has been followed by

most subsequent authors, and the specimens in this collection not

only justify this conclusion, but make it seem advisable to include

Lobopsammia in one and the same genus with Cenopsammia and

Dendrophyllia. The species I identify as Dendrophyllia coccinea

(Cenopsammia coccinea M.-Kdw. & H.)in general appearance and

mode of growth is very like C. tenwilamellosa and C. ehrenberqiana

(M.-Edw. & H. [25. pl. 1. figs. 11 & 12]), and Wayland Vaughan’s

figure (37. pl. xlvi. figs. 6 & 6a) of Verrill’s original specimen of

Dendrophyllia manni (Cenopsammia manni Verrill). The septal

arrangement is very dendrophyllid in character, the star-like

appearance caused by the union of the fourth to the third cycle

of septa about halfway between the lip of the calice and the

columella being pronounced. ‘The septa are so irregular as regards

both cycles and systems that they afford no certain guide. In

the smaller colony of the East African species there is one

individual with a complete fourth cycle (Dendrophyllia and Loho-

908 MISS R. M. HARRISON AND MISS M. POOLE ON — [ Dec. 14,

psammia) fig. 7 @; another individual with an incomplete fourth

cycle (Cenopsammia) fig. 76; while a third individual which has

lately become separated off has not even the typical six systems of

cycles, fig. 7c, but four complete cycles of four systems. In the

larger colony is an individual which clearly proves that new zooids

are formed by fissiparity and not by gemmation (Lobopsammia),

fig. 7d; for here the lip of the calice has been drawn out into

an oval, a strong ridge has grown across the centre, and the

two individuals are incompletely separated ; the septal systems

are incomplete in both, but four systems can be distinguished

in one and two in.the other. A comparison of this figure

(fig. 7d) with fig. 7¢ throws a light on the interpretation of |

the septal arrangement of the latter ; the ridge that has grown

across the double calice divides it into two unequal parts.

The larger part contains four nearly complete systems of four

eycles, and it is here possible to trace rudiments of the two

remaining systems, which will ultimately complete the typical

zoantharian six systems; but in the other part, where only two

systems of four cycles are discernible, it is possible that the six

systems will never be complete, and that this has actually occurred

in the individual represented in fig. 7c. The process of fissiparity

has not gone far enough in the double-caliced individual to decide

that each zooid will ultimately have its full complement of septal

systems, and it has gone too far to be certain that the dividing-

ridge has grown, uot across the middle but rather across one end

of the calice ; nevertheless, considering the arrangement of the

septa of the zooid represented in fig. 7c, it seems probable that

this has been the case, and that this represents four cycles of four

systems rather than three cycles of eight ; for it 1s easier to believe

that an individual which has been formed by a process comparable

to simple binary fission will have a shortage rather than an excess

of the normal complement of characters.

From the above discussion it is clear that this species from the

Mergui Archipelago breaks down Milne-Edwards and Haime’s

original generic characters for the three genera Dendrophyllia,

Cenopsammua, and Lobopsammia ; and the same is true of Dendro-

phyllia robusta (Lobopsammia robusta Bourne). Of the three

colonies in the Burmese collection, one does not differ in any

particular from the original Ceylon specimen, but in both the

others it is quite obvious that new individuals are not formed by

fissiparity. One of these colonies is represented in fig. 6, but

whether the youngest zooid has been formed by gemmation or by

the process described and figured by von Koch (20. pl. ii. fig. 21) as

“ Theilknospung,” it is not possible to decide from the material

available ; but the fact that it has not been a process of fissiparity

breaks down an important generic character that separated Lobo-

psammia from Dendrophyllia and Cenopsammia.

The remaining colonial form appears to be Dendrophyllia gracilis

(M.-Edw. & H.) and offers no special feature that bears on the

present argument.

1909. | MARINE FAUNA FROM MERGUI ARCHIPELAGO. 909

DENDROPHYLLIA COCCINEA M.-Edw. & Haime. (Plate LXX XVI.

ESS, Cf (ai, Os al)

Cenopsammia coccinea M.-Edw. & Haime.

Two small colonies, one consisting of but four individuals, the

other of eleven. Colonies 10 to 20 mm. high respectively, indivi-

dual corallites rising from 2 to 6 mm. from the general corallum.

Costz well-marked on individual corallites, but lose definition on

the general corallum, coarsely covered with granulations. Lip of

calice nearly circular, not thickened. The columella is small and

is joined by the septa of the first two cycles. Septa in four cycles

of six systems, but the systems are very irregular and have

already been detailed in the discussion on the genus. Septa of

the first two cycles beset with longitudinal rows of conspicuous

granules and having irregular somewhat denticulate inner edges ;

those of the third and fourth cycles are porous and highly denti-

culated at their inner edges.

Locality.—Station XXIV. Cat and Kitten. Bottom: rock,

sand, and broken shell. Depth: 8-22 fathoms.

It is not without much hesitation that I identify this species as

Dendrophyllia coccinea (Cenopsammia coccinea M.-Kdw. & Haime).

The last-named authors have noted the similarity between C’. coc-

cinea, C'. ehrenbergiana, and C. gaimardi, also between C. urvillii

and C. tenwilamellosa. Klunzinger [21] does not distinguish

between C. coccinea and CO. ehrenberg giana : the species in question

from Burma, bearing as it does points of similarity with both

these and Ae with C. tenwilamellosa, suggests that all the above-

mentioned five species are varieties of one variable species.

In general appearance, septal arrangement, and the irregularity

of the orders of septa the Burmese species resembles C. tenwi-

lamellosa, but differs from it in having a very much reduced

columella and septa. covered with coarse granules; in these

characters it resembles C. coccinea, but the granules of the septa

of the latter are described as very small, which can hardly be said

of the species under discussion. Klunzinger has remarked great

variability in the development of the columella in individuals of

the same colony, and therefore discounts it as a distinguishing

specific character.

The Burmese species is intermediate between C. coccinea,

C. ehrenbergiana, and C. tenwilamellosa ; I therefore give it the

generic and specific names that have priority—Dendrophyllia

coccinea.

DENDROPHYLLIA ROBUSTA Bourne. (Plate LXX XVI. fig. 6.)

Lobopsammia robusta Bourne.

Three colonies, all considerably smaller than the original speci-

men described by Bourne, but, as has been already suggested in a

previous part of this paper, size cannot be regarded as a character

of any specific importance. The largest calice of the Burmese

spechnens measures 128 mm., the smallest 5°35 mm.; and

910 MISS R. M. HARRISON AND MISS M. POOLE ON [ Dec. 14,

the columella in no individual is as pronounced as that of the

Ceylon specimen [5. pl. i. fig, 10@]; but as it is so much

reduced as to be practically non-existent in the youngest individual,

and considerably more developed in older individuals, the fact

that if never reaches the dimensions of that in Bourne’s figure

may be due to immaturity.

Localities.—One colony from Station XVIII. Paye Island.

Bottom : sand, shell, and rock. Depth: 10-21 fathoms.

Two colonies from Station XXIV. Cat Island. Bottom: rock,

sand, and broken shell. Depth: 8-22 fathoms.

DENDROPHYLLIA GRACTLIS Milne-Hdwards & Haime.

A single individual 12 mm. high, and two young colonies 17

and 19 mm. high, consisting of three and four individuals

respectively. The calices of the younger individuals are practically

spherical ; the columella rises very slightly i in the calicular fossa,

and in the solitary specimen it 1s compre essed and narrow from side

to side. The septa of the first two cycles are not denticulate, but

in all other respects it is identical with M.-Kdwards and Haime’s

description.

Locality — Station XXIV. Cat and Kitten. Bottom: rock,

sand, and broken shell. Depth: 8-22 fathoms.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

1. Atcock, A.—‘“‘ Newly Recorded Corals from Indian Seas.”

Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, Ixii. p. 138.

2. Aucock, A.—‘‘ Natural History Notes from H.M. Indian

Marine Survey Steamer ‘ Investigator,’” ser. 1. 9. Journ.

Asiatic Soe. Bengal, Ixii. p. 169.

3. Ancock, A.—-An Account of the Madyreporaria collected by

the ee Indian Survey Ship ‘ Inv estigator.’ Calcutta,

1898, p. 2

4. Axcocx, Ae “ Report on the Madreporaria of the Siboga

Expedition.” Siboga-Expeditie, Monogr. xvi. a, 1902, p. 52.

5. BourNE, G. C_—“ Report on the Solitar: y Corals collected by

Prof. Herdman, at Ceylon, in 1902.” Report Ceylon Pearl

Oyster Fisheries, iv. 1905, p. 187.

6. Déperten, L.—‘t Die Korallen-Gattung Pungia.” Zool. Anz.

sory UO, jo awash.

. Doperter, L.—“ Die Korallen-Gattung Fungia.” Abh. v. d.

Senckenbergischen naturforschenden Gesellschaft, xxvii.,

1905.

8. Duncan, P. M.—“ On the Madreporaria of the Expedition of

H.M.S. ‘ Poreupine.’” Proc. Royal Soc. London, xviii. 1870,

p. 289.

9. Duncan, P. M.—‘: A Description of the Madreporaria dredged

up during the Expeditions of H.M.S. ‘ Poreupine.’” Trans.

Zool. Soe. London, viii. 1874, p. 303.

10. Duncan, P. M.—‘“ A Revision of the Madveporaria.” Journ.

Linnean Soe., Zoology, xviii. 1885,

1909. | MARINE FAUNA FROM MERGUI ARCHIPELAGO, Qil

11. Earenperc, C. G.—Die Koralltiere des Roten Meeres.

1834.

12. Fowier, G. H.—‘‘ The Anatomy of the Madreporaria.—I.

Flabellum, Rhodopsammia.” Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci. n. s.

xxv. 1885, p. 577.

13. Garpiner, J. S.—“ On the Fungid Corals collected by the

Author in the South Pacific.” Proc. Zool. Soc. 1898,

525.

14. Garpiner, J. S.—‘ On the Solitary Corals collected by Dr. A.

Willey.” Willey’s Zool. Results, 1899, p. 161.

15. Garpiner, J. S.—‘‘ South African Corals “of the Genus

Flabellum.” Mar. Investig. in 8. Africa, i1., Cape Town,

1904, p. 117.

16. Garpiner, J. S.—‘“ The Turbinolid Corals of South Africa.”

Marine Tnv estig. in 8. Africa, 111., Cape Town, 1904, p. 95.

17. GARDINER, J. 5. —The Fauna and G eography of the Maldive

and Laceadive Archipelagoes, I1., Suppl. 1., ‘* Madreporaria,”

Parts i. & iv.

18. Garpiner, J. 8.—‘ The Perey Sladen Trust Expedition to the

Indian Ocean in 1905, The Madreporarian Corals.—I. The

Family Fungiude.” Trans. Linnean Soc., Zoology, xii, 1909,

p. 257.

19. Kenr, W. Savinie.—-‘‘ On some new and little-known Species

of Madrepores, or Stony Corals, in the British Museum Col-

lection.” Proc. Zool. Sor. 1871, p. 285.

20. Koon, G. von.-—‘‘ Die ungeschlechtliche Vermehrung (Theil-

ung und Knospung)einiger Palaeozoischen Korallen.” Paleeon-

- tographica, Bd. 29, p. 329.

Kuunzrneer, C. B.—*: Die Koralltiere des Roten Meeres.” II.

Die Steinkorallen. 1879.

22. Lacaze-Dututers, H. pe.—‘‘ Faune du Golte du Lion.” Arch.

de Zool. exper, et gen., SoSern Va Sone

23. MARENZELLER, HK. v.——‘“‘ Steinkorallen.” Wissensch. Ergeb.

deutsch. filleloe- eguseltalam, ‘Valdivia,’ 1898-1899, vii.

1904, p. 263.

24. Mitne-Epwarps, H., & Hare, J.—‘‘ Mon. des Turbinolides.”

Ann. des Sci. Nat., 3° ser. ix. 1848, p. 211.

25. Miune-Epwarps, H., & Harmer, J.—‘*‘ Mon. des Eupsam-

mides.” Ann. des Sci. Nat., 3¢ sér. x. 1848.

26. Minne-Epwarps, H., & Harun, J.—‘ Mon. des Fongides.”

Ann. des Sci. Nat., 3° ser. xv. 1851.

27. Mitne-Epwarps, H., & Haime, J.— Histoire naturelle des

Coralliaires. 3 vols. Paris, 1857.

28. Mosetey, H. N.— Deep-Sea Corals.” ‘Challenger’ Reports,

Zoology, ii. 1881, p. 127.

29. Orrmann, A. K.—‘‘ Beobachtungen an Steinkorallen von der

Siidktiste Ceylons.” Zool. Jahrb., Syst. iv. 1889, p. 493.

30. Pourratks, L. F. pr.—‘ Contributions to the Fauna of the

Gulf Stream at Great Depths.” Mus. Comp. Zool., Bull. i.

No. 6, 1867, p. 103.

912

31.

32.

33.

34.

35.

36.

38.

39.

Fig.

ON MARINE FAUNA FROM MERGUI ARCHIPELAGO. [ Dec. 14,

Poorrarés, L. F. pn.—TIllust. Cat. Mus. Comp. Anat. Harvard.

Cambridge, Mass., 1871.

Pourrauks, L. F. pe.—‘‘ Corals. Report on the Dredging

Operations of the U.S. Coast Survey Ship ‘ Blake.” Mus.

Comp. Zool., Bull. v. No. 9, 1878, p. 197.

QueEtcu, J. J.—“ Reef Corals.” ‘ Challenger’ Reports, Zoology,

xvi. 1886, p. 203.

Semper, C.—‘‘ Generationswechsel bei Steinkorallen.” Zeit.

f. wiss. Zool. xxii., 1872.

Sruper, T.—‘“ Uebersicht der Steinkorallen aus der Familie

der Madreporaria aporosa, Hupsammia und Turbinaria, welche

auf der Reise S.M.S. ‘Gazelle’ um die Erde gesammelt

wurden.” Monatsb. k. preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1877,

p. 625.

VaucGuHan, T.W.—“ A critical Review of the Literature on the

simple Genera of the Madreporaria Fungida, with a tentative

Classification.” Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. xxviii. 1905, p. 371.

Vaucuan, T. W.—“ Recent Madveporaria of the Hawaiian

Islands and Laysan.” U.S. Nat. Mus., Bull. lix., 1907.

Verritt, A. E.—‘‘ Corals and Polyps of the North Pacific

Exploring Expedition, with Descriptions of other Pacific

Ocean Species.” Essex Instit. Proc. v. 1866, p. 17; 1867,

Peso 1868p) alo seve 18695 py aL:

VerriL, A. E.—“ Contributions to Zoology from the Museum

of Yale College. No.7. Descriptions of new Corals.” Amer.

Journ. Sci. Arts, 2nd ser. xlix., 1870.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PratvE LXXXV.

la. Heterocyathus equicostatus M.-Edw. & Haime. Type I.

16. * 5 Type II.

le. 4 3 Type II. approximating type ITT.

ld. ¥5 Ty pe ILI. with four cyeles of septa.

le. 3 55 Type Ill. with incomplete fifth

cycle of septa.

le s is Type II]. with five complete cycles

of septa.

2a. Fungia cyclolites. Upper surface ot broken and repaired specimen.

26. Diaseris distorta Michelin. Upper surface of specimen with two segments.

3a. 5 és Under surface of the same specimen.

36. Fungia cyclolites. Under surface of 2 a.

da. Balanophyllia diffusa, sp.n. Lateral view of the corallun.

4b. 3 us Diagram of the septal arrangement.

Pratt LXXXVI.

5a. Balanophyllia imperialis Kent. Lateral view of the corallum.

5b. op 5 Diagram of the septal arrangement.

5e. A os A single system of septa.

6. Dendrophyllia robusta Bourne. Jateral view of a colony.

) . - . . u

ie | Dendrophyllia coccinea M.-Edw. & Haime. Diagram of the septal arrange-

7 =i ment in three different individuals.

Cc.)

7d. The calice of an individual in the process of

dividing, viewed from above.

1909.] | ON MARINE FAUNA FROM KERIMBA ARCHIPELAGO. oy

5. Marine Fauna from the Kerimba Archipelago, Portuguese

East Africa, collected by Jas. J. Simpson, M.A., B.Se.,

and R. N. Rudmose-Brown, BSc., University of

Aberdeen: MApREPORARIA. By Rura M. Harrison

and Margaret Poor *,

{Received October 19, 1909. |

This Collection was made between September 1907 and May

1908, and contains two species of Turbinolidee, four species of

Fungiide, four species of Astraide and one species of Kupsam-

mild.

We are indebted to Dr. Bourne for much help and advice

during the progress of the work.

Family TURBINOLID# Milne-Edwards & Haime.

By Marcarer Poorer.

Genus HererocyatHus Milne-Edwards & Haime.

HererocyAtaus £Quricostatus Milne-Edwards & Haime [19].

This species has been fully described by me in the account of

the Turbinolide from the Mergui Archipelago, Lower Burma.

It contains three well-defined types differing from each other in

the number and characters of the septa and pali, the general

shape of the corallum, the depth and size of the calicular fossa

and the position of the lateral pores. All three varieties are,

however, connected by beautifully intermediate forms, as is

shown in a photograph in the paper referred to above.

The collection contains ten specimens, of which four belong to

type IT. and six to type III.; the first type being unrepresented.

Localities.—Station I. Tunghi Bay. Bottom: sand, mud, and

shell. Depth: 5-18 fathoms. 2 specimens of type II. and 4 of

type III.—Station VI. Kero-Nyuni Bay. Bottom: sand. Depth:

5-10 fathoms. 2 specimens of type I]. and 2 of type III.

Genus Paracyatuus Milne-Edwards & Haime.

ParacyaTuus cavatus Alcock [1}.

There is a single small and very irregular colony of five calices,

which with much hesitation I identify as the above species. The

whole measures 24X18 inm. and 14 mm. in height from the

broad encrusting base. The largest calice measures 11 x9 mm.

and 2 mm. in depth.

This is a new species established by Alcock, which he says is

very near the fossil form Paracyathus crassus of Milne-Edwards

and Haime.

Locality.—Station II. Maiyapa Bay. Bottom: sand, mud, and

coral, Depth: 10 fathoms.

* Communicated by Prof. G. C. Bourne, D.Sc., F.Z.S.

914 MISS R. M. HARRISON AND MISS M. POOLE ON | Dec. 14,

Family Fune@iip # (Milne-Edwards & Haime).

Genus Funera Lamarck.

Funcia PATELLA Milne-Edwards | 21, 22).

This is the 7. patella Cycloseris-form of Déderlein [7, pl. i.],

and is identical with the figures given by Gardiner of Cycloseris

hecagonalis [14, pl. xx.], which species the latter writer in his

recently published report of the Percy Sladen ‘Trust Expedition

to the Indian Ocean [18] has absorbed into 7. patella. ‘Lhe East

African specimens entirely justify his abolition of the species

Cycloseris hexagonalis.

There are eight specimens measuring from 26 x25 mm. to

56x55 mm. The younger specimens show a well-defined scar

of attachment.

6 specimens are from Station VI. Kero-Nyuni. Bottom: sand.

Depth: 5-10 fathoms. And 2 from Station XIII. Pemba Bay.

Bottom: muddy. Depth: 10-20 fathoms.

Funera cyciouites Lamarck.

Cycloseris cyclolites of Milne-Edwards [22| and Gardiner [13}

has recently been abolished by the latter, and Wayland Vaughan

[30], the characters by which it was originally distinguished

from the genus Hungia having proved to be of nothing more than

specific value.

There is one specimen from Station VI. Kero-Nyuni. Bottom:

sand. Depth: 5-10 fathoms. Measuring 62 x 53 mm.

The scar of attachment is entirely obliterated.

Funeria Funerres Linn., var. Acaricrrormis Déderlein [71.

There are four young specimens of irregular shape and with

well-marked seais of attachment.

Locality.—_Station II. Maiyapa Bay. Bottom: sand, mud, and

coral. Depth: 10 fathoms.

Genus DiaAserts Milne-Edwards & Haine.

DrAseERis Distorta Michelin.

Two complete specimens and some fragments,

In the account of the corals from the Mergui Archipelago

mentioned above, I have shown that more evidence is necessary

before the genus Diaseris can be absorbed by the genus Fungia,

and have had photographed for comparison a specimen of D. das-

torta with two segments, and one of Mungia eyclolites which has

been broken and repaired, to show the difference in the arrange-

ment of the septa.

Locality.— Station I. Tunghi Bay. Bottom: sand, mud, and

shell. Depth: 5-18 fathoms.

1909. ] MARINE FAUNA FROM KERIMBA ARCHIPELAGO. 915

Family AstTR £1DZ Dana.

Genus TracHYPHYLLIA Milne-Edwards & Haime.

TRACHYPHYLLIA AMARANTUM Milne-Edwards & Haime [22].

There are twelve young solitary specimens having calices from

17 X13 to 46 x 26 mm., coralla from 10 to 38 mm. in height.

There are also seven older specimens undergoing fissipar ity into

two or four parts. These have calices of 80 x48 mm., and the

coralla are 58 mm. in height.

Localities Station I. Tunghi Bay. Bottom: sand, mud, and

shell. Depth: 5-18 fathoms. 1 adult specimen.—Station III.

Mtundo Bay. Bottom: sand, shell, and coral. Depth: 6 fathoms.

5 young specimens.—Station VI. Kero-Nyuni. Bottom: sand.

Depth: 5-10 fathoms. 4 young specimens.—Station XI. Man-

angoroshi Point. Reets. 2 young specimens.—Station XIII.

Pemba Bay. Bottom: muddy. Depth: 10-20 fathoms. 1 very

young specimen. Locality of the remaining 6 dead adult

specimens is unrecorded.

Genus Mussa Oken, Milne-Edwards & Haime.

Mussa cristata Milne-Edwards [22].

The collection contains only a small dead colony, consisting of

one isolated and five united calices. The whole colony measures

about 120 x 90 mm. and rises to a height of 80mm. The separated

ealice measures 45 X 35 mm.

This species apparently differs from J, distans of Klunzinger

[17] only in possessing an incomplete fifth cycle of septa, a

character which seems insufficient for the establishment of a new

species.

Locality unrecorded.

Genus FayrA Oken, Milne-Edwards & Haime.

FaviA OKENT Milne-Edwards & Haime [22].

Parastrea radiata Milne-Edwards & Haime.

The collection contains a single almost circular colony of nine

distinct calices, measuring 25 mm. in diameter and rising to a

height of 17 mm. Klunzinger (17, t. 111. fig. 4) gives a photo-

evaph of this species under the name of /. cavernosa Forskal.

Locality unrecorded.

Genus GyrosmMiILIA Milne-Edwards & Haime.

GYROSMILIA INTERRUPTA Milne-Edwards & Haime [22].

There is a circular and smoothly convex colony of this species,

measuriug 90 mm. in diameter, and reaching a height of 60 mm.

at the centre of the colony. The under surface is covered by a

Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1909, No. LXII. 62

916 MISS R. M. HARRISON AND MISS M. POOLE ON | Dec. 14,

thin radially-striated epitheca, and is attached to the substratum

in the middle by an irregular, short peduncle. Klunzinger

also gives an excellent photograph of this species (17, t. i. fig. 8).

Locality unrecorded.

Family EurpsaAmMMirp# Bourne [5].

By Rutu M. Harrison.

Genus HerrropsammiA Milne-Edwards & Haime.

HETEROPSAMMIA MICHELINI Milne-Kdwards & Haime [20].

There are three specimens, of which one has two incom-

pletely separated calices, and both the others each two distinct

individuals.

Localities.—Station Ill. Mtundo Bay. Bottom: sand, shell,

andcoral. Depth: 6 fathoms. 2 specimens.—Station VI. Kero-

Nyuni. Bottom: sand. Depth: 5-10 fathoms. 1 specimen.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

1. Ancock, A.—‘‘ Newly Recorded Corals from Indian Seas.”

Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, xi. p. 138.

2. Aucock, A.—‘‘ Natural History Notes from H.M. Indian

Marine Survey Steamer ‘ Investigator,” ser. 11.9. Journ.

Asiatic Soc. Bengal, xu. p. 169.

3. Aucock, A.—An Account of the Madreporaria collected by

the Royal Indian Survey Ship ‘ Investigator.’ Calcutta,

1898, p. 29.

4, Atcock, A._—“‘ Report on the Madreporaria of the Siboga

Expedition.” Siboga-Expeditie, Monogr. xvi. a, 1902, p. 52.

5. Bourn, G. C.—“ Report on the Solitary Corals collected by

Prof. Herdman, at Ceylon, in 1902.” Report Ceylon Pearl

Oyster Fisheries, iv. 1905, p. 187.

6. Dopreruety, L.—-‘‘ Die Korallen-Gattung Pungia.” Zool. Anz.

xxiv. TIO paodo.

7. DoperLEIn, L.—‘ Die Korallen-Gattung /ungia.” Abh. v. d.

Senckenbergischen naturforschenden Gesellschaft, xxvii.,

1905.

8. Duncan, P. M.—‘‘On the Madreporaria of the Expedition of

H.M.S. ‘ Poreupine.’”” Proc. Roy. Soc. London, xviii. 1870,

52.89%

$), Decne P. M.—‘“ A Description of the Madreporaria dredged

up during the Expeditions of H.M.S. ‘ Porcupine.’” Trans.

Zool. Soe. London, vii. 1874, p. 303.

10. Duncan, P. M.—-“ A Revision of the Madreporaria.” Journ.

Linn. Soce., Zoology, xviii. 1885.

11. Enrenserc, C. G.—Die Koralltiere des Roten Meeres.

1834.

1909. ] MARINE FAUNA FROM KERIMBA ARCHIPELAGO. 917

12. Garpiner, J. S.—“ On the Fungid Corals collected by the

Author in the South Pacific.” Proce. Zool. Soc. 1898,

. 929.

13. Garpiner, J. S.—“‘ On the Solitary Corals collected by Dr. A.

Willey.” Willey’s Zool. Results, 1899, p. 161.

14. Garprner, J. 8.—‘‘ The Turbinolid Corals of South Africa.”

Marine Investig. in 8. Africa, 111., Cape Town, 1904, p. 95.

15. Garpiner, J. S.—The Fauna and Geography of the Maldive

and Laccadive Archipelagoes, II]. Suppl. 1., ‘‘ Madrepo-

raria,’ Parts 1. & iv.

16. Garpiner, J. S.—‘ The Percy Sladen Trust Expedition to the

Indian Ocean in 1905. The Madreporarian Corals: I. The

Family Fungide.” Trans. Linn. Soc., Zoology, xii. 1909,

p. 207.

17. Kiounzincer, C.. B.—‘‘ Die Koralltiere des Roten Meeres.”

II. Die Steinkorallen. 1879.

18. Lacaze-Duruters, H. pr.—‘* Faune du Golfe du Lion.” Arch.

de Zool. exper. et gén., 3° sér., v. 1897. ;

19. Mintne-Epwarps, H., & Haims, J.—‘ Mon. des Turbinolides.”

Ann. des Sci. Nat., 3° sér. 1x. 1848, p. 211.

20. Mitne-EHpwarps, H., & Harms, J.—‘“ Mon. des Eupsammides.”

Ann. des Sci. Nat., 3° sér. x. 1848.

21. Mitne-Epwarps, H., & Harmer, J‘ Mon. des Fongides.”

Ann. des Sci. Nat., 3° sér. xv. 1851.

22. Mitne-Epwarps, H., & Haims, J.—Histoire naturelle des

Coralliaires. 3 vols. Paris, 1857.

23. Mossney, H. N.—‘‘ Deep-Sea Corals.” ‘ Challenger’ Reports,

Zoology, ii. 1881, p. 127.

24. Pourraués, L. F. pe.—Llust. Cat. Mus. Comp. Anat. Harvard.

Cambridge, Mass., 1871.

25. Pourraues, L. F. pp.—‘“ Corals. Report on the Dredging

Operations of the U.S. Coast Survey Ship ‘Blake.’” Mus.

Comp. Zool., Bull. v. No. 9, 1878, p. 197.

26. Quetcu, J.J.—‘ Reef Corals.” ‘Challenger’ Reports, Zoology,

xvi. 1886, p. 203.

27. Semper, C.—‘‘ Generationswechsel bei Steinkorallen.” Zeit.

f. wiss. Zool. xxi., 1872.

28. Sruper, T.—‘‘ Uebersicht der Steinkorallen aus der Familie

der Madreporaria aporosa, Hupsamnua und Turbinaria,

welche auf der Reise 8.M.S. ‘Gazelle’ um die Erde gesam-

melt wurden.” Monatsb. k. preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin,

1877, p. 625.

29. Vaucuan, T. W.—“ A critical Review of the Literature on

the simple Genera of the Madreporaria Fungida, with a

tentative Classification.” Proce. U.S. Nat. Mus. xxviii. 1905,

2 Od Ike

30. yee T. W.—‘ Recent Madreporaria of the Hawaiian

Islands and Laysan.” U.S. Nat. Mus., Bull. lix., 1907.

918 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON TWO SPECIES [ Dec. 14,

6. Some Notes upon Boa occidentalis and Boa (Pelophilus)

madagascariensis. By Frank E. Bepparp, M.A.,

F.R.S., F.Z.8., Prosector to the Society.

[Received October 26, 1909.]

(Text-figures 281-285.)

Jn a series of papers recently communicated to this Society, to

which I shall refer in the course of the present communication,

I have dealt with a number of points in the anatomy of certain

snakes of the family Boide belonging to the following species :—

Eunectes murinus, HL. noteeus, Boa constrictor, B. diviniloqua,

Eryx conicus, EH. jaculus, EL. johni, Corallus cookii, C. madagas-

cariensis, C. caninus, Python spilotes, P. sebe, P. molurus,

P. regius, Hnygrus carinatus.

I have,recently had the opportunity of examining a specimen

apiece of the two species of Loa, B. occidentalis and B. madagas-

cariensis. The latter species has been referred to a genus

Pelophilus, and it is one of the species of Boa which occurs in

Madagascar. The distribution of this genus Boa is exactl

paralleled by the distribution of the allied genus Corullus.

For in both the majority of the species are Neotropical in range,

while one or two are confined to the island of Madagascar. It is

therefore of particular interest to be able to compare the charac-

teristics of the Madagascar Low with those of its Neotropical

allies, and to set side by side the facts thus obtained with those

resulting from the anatomical study of the Madagascar and

Neotropical species of Corallus. To some extent I am able, in

the present communication, to accomplish this comparison ; but

various reasons prevented me from being able to give so complete

an account of the facts as might be desired in the two species.

I can, however, direct attention to the more important among

these. I shall deal with them in a comparative fashion, describing

the conditions of the lungs and certain blood-vessels in the two

Species.

§ Lungs.

In Boa occidentalis the conditions of the two lungs differed

somewhat, as 1s the rule among these serpents. Not only are the

two lungs unequal in size, as is universal (?) among those Boide

(the vast majority) which possess two lungs, but the windpipe

divides into two bronchi, which are unlike in the case of the

right and the left lung. In this species the bronchus of the

smaller lung projects but a short way into its interior as a

flattened plate; its length was at most half an inch. At its

extremity the bronchus did not tail off into a seam running

along the lung substance such as occurs, as will be mentioned

presently, in the other lung. Its condition can be contrasted

1909.] OF SNAKES OF THE GENUS BOA. 919

with that of the larger lung, which is represented in the drawing

exhibited herewith (text-fig. 281). The bronchial gutter of the

Text-fig. 281. Text-fig. 282.

A a",

a r

Hae es ot ng

iE 8 aR

@ Syeeera grate

Pag Pe, e

Cee aT

Cereal pa a

Gane te areca ch 4

gee oe

de g P9988 oO BEES oe

OS ie ils rea ees

mins aibssaess tel

SEES

Ben et

pet

ate,

egg

ae 8

ee one

saa AS ake <

eat ke .

she | ieee ae

ee Pesap eas BaF k gay

fae, sue tA Ee Skee ae

ae 25 rose 884, ra:

Ay i, okey Br tae,

; uy is EOP iy

San Qe Peesethes wees

aut set gre ROG en

E 8G S BES Ae

a : Site este: eee

Me : << peice pare,

ue si

f %

ee sn Be &

fee ean a

Text-fig. 281.—Interior of anterior half of larger lung of Boa occidentalis, showing

. bronchial gutter within lung.

A. Orifice of bronchus of other lung.

Text-fig. 282.—A portion of the larger lung of Boa occidentalis immediately

following that illustrated in text-fig. 281. The end of the bronchial gutter

is shown and the “seam” continuous with it, which bifurcates distally.

larger lung extends along that lung for fully seven inches, the dis-

proportion between the two lungs in this respect being therefore

920 MR. F, E. BEDDARD ON TWO SPECIES [ Dec. 14,

enormous and bearing no possible relation to their relative size,

for the larger lung is at most twice the size of the smaller. At

its extremity the bronchial gutter narrows to almost thread-like

proportions. There was no trace that I could discover of a

condition like that of Corallus caninus*, where the semirings

become irregular in position and leave tracts of lung substance

between them. The bronchus was perfectly continuous as such

up to its very end. It is furthermore to be noted that the

gutter-like character of the imperfect bronchus is very marked

here. I should imagine, indeed, that it may become functionally

a tube within the lung under certain conditions. Under such

circumstances the rapid distention of the terminal anangious

region of the lung might be effected, for terrifying or other

purposes. As in some other snakes, of which particular mention

will be made presently, Boa occidentalis shows a seam running a

considerable distance along the lung which starts from the

termination of the bronchus in the larger lung. As is to be seen

from an inspection of the accompanying figure (text-fig. 283), this

seam appears to be quite independent of the partitions between

the alveoli of the lung. It is evidently a structure distinct from

them, for in some cases it crosses a definite alveolus at the middle.

The seam is, in fact, not merely the coalescence of the walls of a

series of alveoli. This fact (7. e. that it is an independent structure)

“seems to show that the view generally held as to the nature of

this seam, namely that it is a rudiment of the bronchus, is the

correct view. The seam extends far into the anangious region of

the lung, and, as already mentioned, it is only in this larger lung

that it occurs, being absent in the smaller.

This seam extends for a distance down the lung which is fully

as great as the length of the bronchial gutter. Its diameter is

about as great as that of the stouter alveolar walls. But this

fact does not permit of any confusion between the structures, nor

hinders the accurate tracing of the course of the bronchial seam.

For the latter is of a distinctly white colour as compared with the

brown colour of the inner surface of the lungs including the

walls of the alveoli—due to the formalin in which the lung was

preserved. Another reason which leads to the easy identification

of this fibrous seam throughout its whole course has already been

briefly mentioned. The seam appears to cross over the lung

alveoli, and is thus evidently not composed of a series of

coincident alveolar walls. But more than this can be observed

in its relations to the alveolar walls. It will be seen from an

inspection of the accompanying figure (text-fig. 283) that the .

seam does not fuse with the alveolar walls but passes above

them, and is indeed quite independent of them. All this of

course establishes on a very firm basis the view that this seam is

a real continuation of the bronchus as it appears to be. It has

already been mentioned that in the smaller lung there is no trace

* “<A Comparison of the Neotropical Species of Corallus, &c.,” P. Z. 8S. 1908,

p. 185 ; see text-fig. 27, p. 156.

1909. ] OF SNAKES OF THE GENUS BOA. 92)

of any such seam; the bronchus in this lung ends abruptly, and

there is no diminution towards or at the end in the calibre of its

semirings. On the other hand, in the larger lung the cartilages,

though continuing to the end of the intrapulmonary bronchus,

get successively narrower and narrower. JI have not observed in

other Boas and Pythons where a fibrous continuation of the

intrapulmonary bronchus occurs, any suggestion of a branching of

this seam, which I now proceed to describe in Boa occidentalis.

Text-fig. 283.

A magnified representation of the end of the bronchial gutter in the same lung as

shown in text-figs. 281 & 282, to show the double origin of the seam and its

independence from the walls of the pulmonary alveoli.

Ata considerable distance behind the termination of the intra-

pulmonary bronchus the seam gives off a branch (see text-fig. 282,

p. 919) which runs obliquely towards that wall of the lung which

is contiguous with the wall of the smaller lung. This seam is no

smaller than the main seam, of which it is a branch, and shows

the same characters that have been enumerated above. It ends

by bifurcating into two branches.

This fact appears to me to be of the most interesting

922 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON TWO SPECIES [ Dee. 14,

significance. If it be admitted that the fibrous seam connected

with the bronchus is the degenerate equivalent of a further

extension into the lung of the bronchus, it follows that the

branching of this seam is a trace of a former branching within

the lung of the bronchus. In fact, that we have in the snake’s

lung ev idence of a reduction to its present simplicity from a lung

more like that of a Tortoise or Crocodile, or—and this com-

parison may be better—a Varanus. For in these latter types

the intrapulmonary region of the bronchus is branched or shows

traces of branching. In this case the simple character of the

lung of the Boidz is not to be strictly compared with the simple

sac-like lung of, e. g., Hatteria. For the latter exhibits, as 1

believe, a primitive state of affairs, and is not much more evolved

than the lung of an Amphibian, while the former may have

returned to the simple condition through degradation.

We may now contrast the structure of the lung in Boa occiden-

talis with that of B. madagascariensis. In the latter species each

bronchus enters its lung, and there is thus, as in B. occidentalis, an

intrapulmonary bronchus. But the intrapulmonary bronchus is

very short in the case of both jungs, though the larger lung has

a rather longer intrapulmonary bronchus, I found that the

measurements were seven eighths of an inch in the case of the

larger lung and three eighths in the case of the smaller lung ;

aes the intrapulmonary bronchus was in the larger lung about

double the length of that of the smaller lung, It is clear, there-

fore, that there is here a very great difference both actually

and proportionately (as concerns the two lungs), between the

Madagascar species and the Neotropical species which are con-

sidered in the present communication. Furthermore, there is

not a marked seam continuing down the bronchus in the case of

either lung. There appears to be one; but when the lung tissue

is stretched the seam disappears. This is analogous to what

I have described in Corallus. We have therefore a second im-

portant difference in the structure of the lungs between Boa

occidentalis and its Madagascar ally.

I have already described or confirmed the description of the

intrapulmonary bronchi of the two American species* Boa

constrictor and B. diviniloqua. In both of these the bronchus

extends a long way down into the interior of the larger lung

exactly as I have just shown to be the case in B. occidentalis.

With regard to the extension of the bronchus into the smaller

lung, 1t would appear that Boa occidentalis occupies a position

exactly intermediate between the two other species. For in

B. diviniloqua the bronchus extends for a goodish way into this

lung, while in Bow constrictor there is no intrapulmonary

bronchus at all within the smaller lung. In any ease there is a

general agreement between the three Neotropical species of Boa

dealt with in the present communication, and a difference

* P. Z. S. 1906, p. 516.

1909. | OF SNAKES OF THE GENUS BOA. 923

between all of them and the Madagascar species. It is interesting

to note that while the corresponding species of Corallus also

differ in the structure of the lungs, the difference is of precisely

the reverse kind to that which we find in Boa. For in Corallus

it is the Madagascar species * which possesses the long intra-

pulmonary bronchus and the Neotropical forms which have a

short intrapulmonary bronchus.

§ Aorta and Intercostal Arteries.

The great variations which the system of intercostal arteries

shows among Serpents as contrasted with the Lacertilia is a

remarkable fact in the anatomy of the former order of Reptiles,

and is one of the many anatomical facts which prove their

comparative remoteness in affinity from the Lizards. Moreover,

the condition of these arteries appears to be quite constant

for a species, and even for groups of species, though the current

generic divisions among the Boide are not in entire harmony

with the arrangement of the intercostal arteries. In a series of

papers f dealing with these and other points in the anatomy of

the Boide, I have got together a considerable number of facts

relative to the distribution of the intercostal arteries in those

serpents.

I have in the present paper some new facts to add to those

already collected, which I shail describe before considering the

elassificatory results which appear to follow from a comparison of

the actual facts with those already known. In Bou occidentalis the

aorta in the region of the liver is by no means nearly in contact

with the dorsal parietes. It lies at some distance within the

body from the dorsal middle line of the body. It is possible that

this fact of position has something to do with the differig

arrangement of the intercostal arteries shown in this region of

the body as compared with the posterior region of the body of

the serpent. In any case, in the hepatic region the intercostal

arteries arise singly and at considerable intervals from the ventral

surface of the aorta. There are altogether very few of them.

They become connected at ashort distance from the dorsal middle

line with smaller trunks running fore and aft in close relation to

the middle line of the body. From these secondary longitudinal

arteries arise in regular pairs the actual intercostal twigs. In the

abdominal region of the body, as it may be termed, near to the

kidneys, the intercostal arteries are different in their arrangement.

* P, Z. 8. 1908, p. 151.

+ “Contributions to our Knowledge of the Circulatory System of the Ophidia,”

P. Z. S. 1904, vol. i. p. 331. “Notes upon the Anatomy of certain Snakes of the

Family Boide,” P. Z. 8. 1904, vol. ii. p. 107. “Contributions to the Knowledge of

the Vascular and Respiratory Systems in the Ophidia and to the Anatomy of the

Genera Boa and Corallus,” P. Z. S. 1906, p. 499. “A Comparison of the Neo-

tropical Species of Oorallus, C. cookii, with C. madagascariensis, and on some

points in the Anatomy of Corallus caninus,’ P. Z. S. 1908, p. 188.

994 MR. F. E, BEDDARD ON TWO SPECIES

Here there is no development of a series of secondary longitudinal

trunks. The aorta itself is in close apposition to the dorsal

middle line. And the intercostal branches arise in regular pairs,

Text-fio. 284,

Ss:

= We

carpe Ma Si

: = oe

Aa.

Two isolated pieces of the dorsal aorta of Boa madagascariensis.

A, From the region of the kidney. B. From the region of the liver.

Ao. Aorta. i.c. Intercostal arteries.

The arteries shown to the right of B are hepatic or gastric arteries.

one pair to each vertebra, from the aortaitself. The development

of secondary longitudinal trunks, which is so common a pheno-

menon in veins and arteries among the Ophidia, is, however, seen

[Dec. 14,

1909.] OF SNAKES OF THE GENUS BOA, 925

in this region of the body, though not in any way comparable to

the secondary longitudinal trunks already described in the more

anterior region of the body. Laterally,and here and there, there

are slender longitudinal arteries connecting a successive series of

intercostals at some distance from their origin from the aorta.

This, it will be seen, is quite a different thing to the conditions

described in the more anterior region of the body where the longi-

tudinal trunks occur before the intercostals are given off. This,

then, is the state of affairs which the intercostal arteries of Boa

occidentalis show. In the Madagascar species the intercostals are

different in their origin anteriorly. In the liver region of the

body the intercostals arise regularly from the aorta itself, and

vary as to whether they arise actually in pairs or from a single

branch which shortly divides ina Y-like fashion to form the

intercostal of each side. This is shown in the accompanying

figure (text-fig. 284), which represents a piece of the aorta in the

anterior region of the body. In the kidney region the inter-

costals are also given off in regular pairs from the aorta itself,

and are paired from the very first. Thus Bow madagascariensis

agrees with 4. occidentalis in the origin of the more posteriorly

situated set of intercostals, but differs in the origin of the more

anteriorly situated set. We find, therefore, that in the inter-

costal arteries, as in the structure of the lungs, the Madagascar

species of Boa differs from the Neotropical Boa occidentalis. It

is furthermore important to note that the Neotropical species of

Boa described in the present paper agrees in the points just

raised with the other two Neotropical species, viz., B. diviniloqua

and &. constrictor. A. difference in geographical position thus

corresponds with certain definite structural differences. Finally,

it is not without interest to observe that there is a very close

parallel between the New World and Old World Boas on the one

hand, and the New World and Old World Corallus on the other

hand.

The parallel, moreover, is more exact than that which can be

drawn in the case of the lung. For the difference in the inter-

costal vessels between the Boas of the Neotropical region and

that of Madagascar is quite the same as that between the two

Neotropical species of Corallws which have been studied and their

Madagascar representative. I have already described the latter

facts in some detail*, and refer to my description. Had the

parallel in the structure of the lungs been as close as that which

the arterial system shows, it might have been permissible to

consider the question whether the Madagascar Boines of both

genera were not better included in the same genus. At present,

however, this alteration of existing views seems to me to be

premature.

p. 135.

926 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON TWO SPECIES [ Dec. 14,

§ Renal Arteries.

In the series of papers dealing with the anatomy of the Boide,

to which I have referred in the course of the present communica-

tion, I have many times mentioned the fact that among the

Boide the existence of but a single artery to each kidney is the

rule, with but slight exceptions.

It may now be safely asserted that this diminution in the

number of the renal arteries, which never exceed two to each

kidney, and that only in the genus Hrya, is a characteristic of the

group. Boa occidentalis is no exception to this rule, and I found

in the case of one kidney but one renal artery, which was fol-

lowed carefully from its origin from the aorta down to the end

of the kidney, which it first touches at the anterior end of that

viscus. In the case of the other kidney, it seemed to me (and

though I am not quite positive as to the fact, I am very nearly

sure) that the single renal artery arose not independently from

the aorta, but as a branch of one of the intestinal arteries. Un-

fortunately, the condition of the renal arteries is one of the points

which I did not ascertain in the species Boa madagascariensis.

§ Alimentary Viscera.

There is frequently an inequality between the two lobes of the

liver in Serpents, and among them in the Boide. Up to the

present, I believe that the most marked case of inequality in

length between these two lobes occurs in Corallus madagas-

cariensis, where I have described it.

In that snake* the long thin “ tail” of the liver was some four

inches long. I have now to record the same kind of inequality

in Boa occidentalis, where, however, it is not so marked as in the

species of Corallus, but still very striking. In the example of

Boa occidentalis which I dissected, the ‘“ tail” measured about

3 inches, as is shown in the accompanying figure (text-fig. 285).

The stomach of the same snake, which was in a contracted con-

dition, showed on each side a very marked teenia.

It is well known that the small intestine of snakes is the only

region of the gut which is folded, the rest of the alimentary

canal being straight. As a contribution to our knowledge of the

extent to which this folding takes place, I made some measure-

ments of the small intestine of Boa madagascariensis. In this

snake the coiled small intestine lay between the pancreas and the

region of the testis. It measured no less than 31 inches. The

length of the body of the reptile between the points which lodged

this coiled gut was only 4 or 5 inches. I did not make a corre-

sponding observation upon oa occidentalis.

* “Contributions to the Knowledge of the Vascular and Respiratory Systems in

the Ophidia, &c.,” P. Z. S. 1906, p. 517.

1909. | OF SNAKES OF THE GENUS BOA. 927

There is some variation among the Boine Snakes in the

arrangement of the pancreas and spleen*. It is, therefore,

desirable to record the conditions that I have found in oa

occidentalis. I find in that snake that the large rounded pancreas

which lies in connection with the duodenal wall is connected with

the spleen by an isthmus of pancreatic tissue not of very great

Text-fig. 285.

Buc.

End of liver of Boa occidentalis.

ce. Celomic sac of liver partly removed. p.c. Postcardinal vein.

length, but slender and widening out at its contact with the

spleen. The latter organ is lobate, and in consequence somewhat

mulberry-hke in contour. I have no observations concerning

these various glands in Loa madagascariensis.

* For a summary of the facts see my paper upon Corallus already quoted in

P. Z.S. 1908, p. 147.

928 Mk. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE ANATOMY [ Dee. 14,

7. Notes upon the Anatomy of Monkeys of the Genus

Pitheaa. By Frank E. Brepparp, M.A., F.R.S.,

F'.Z.8., Prosector to the Society.

(| Received October 26, 1909. |

(Text-figures 286-294.)

(1) Pithecia pithecia.

A young male example of this monkey lived only for a short

time in the menagerie and came into my hands on September 3.

Inasmuch as our knowledge of the viscera of this genus is not

extensive, | took a number of notes upon certain organs which

were best studied in the fresh condition, and preserved for future

reference the remaining viscera. The present communication to

the Society is the result of the examination of these viscera, from

which I am able to compile some account of the principal organs

of the body.

So far as I am aware, there is but one paper dealing with the

general anatomy of the genus Pithecia, and that is by the late

Sir W. H. Flower (5). There are, however, notes upon other

species scattered through various publications dealing with the

New World Primates of which the accompanying bibliography

(see p. 943) includes those that I have consulted, as well as others

dealing with allied forms of Platyrrhines.

$ Brain.

The brain was carefully extracted (after noting the arrange-

ment of the sulci in the fresh brain) and preserved in alcohol.

The total length of the hemispheres is 48 mm.; the greatest

breadth of the cerebrum is 38 mm. ‘The cerebellum is com-

pletely hidden when the brain is viewed from above.

In its general features the brain of Pithecia pithecia very

closely resembles, as might be expected, that of Pithecia monachus,

figured by the late Sir W. H. Flower (5, p. 329, figs. 1, 2, 3), one

of which figures (fig. 1) is practically identical with Dr. Elhot

Smith’s representation (11, p. 415, fig. 61) of Pithecia, where the

brain is drawn from the dorsal aspect. Dr. Elliot Smith does not

mention the species referred to, at any rate in the legend beneath

the figure. It might, in my opinion, have been copied either

from Flower’s figure or from the actual brain from which that

figure was drawn. Another brain of this species is figured from

the lateral aspect by Dr. Elliot Smith in the “Catalogue of the

Royal College of Surgeons” (12, p. 392, fig. 230), in which work

there is also some description of the brains of P. satanas and

P. albinasa. Concerning the first of these two species, Mr. Forbes

has made some observations (3 a). All of these three species

of Pithecia have been dealt with by Drs. Kiikenthal and Ziehen,

1909. | OF MONKEYS OF THE GENUS PITHECIA. 929

whose observations (9) refer, as 1t would appear, to the actual

specimens upon which the facts described in the other memoirs

are based. These authors figure a lateral view of the brain of

P. albinasa and a mesial section of the brain of P. monachus.

As to previous observations upon the brain of the genus Pithecia,

they only mention Flower (5) and Turner (138).

In the brain of Pithecia pithecia the sulcus rectus was evidently

of much the same proportionate size, but each sulcus was a simple

obliquely running furrow. There was no branch upon the left-

hand furrow (or upon the right), such as is represented in all

these figures of the brain of P. monachus to which I have referred

above. It is interesting to note that in P. satanas (according to

Elliot Smith) it is also the left hemisphere which has a triradiate

sulcus rectus.

The sulcus centralis seems to be exactly as in Pithecia monachus.

Its inner end (some way distant from the mesial edge of the hemi-

sphere) 1s 23 mm. from the anterior end of the hemisphere and

25 mm. distant from the hinder end of the hemisphere. It is thus

situated very near to the middle point of the brain. These pro-

portions appear to agree very closely with those indicated in

Dr. Ellot Smith’s ficure of the brain of Pithecia monachus

(11, p. 415, fig. 61).

There are indications of a precentralis on each side; these

appear to be rather fainter than the occasional indications of such

a furrow in P. monachus and P. satanas.

The sulcus lateralis (ov intraparietalis) is curved like the letter

““S,” only in the reverse direction. Its anterior end is situated

almost exactly midway between the fissure of Rolando (centralis)

and the Sylvian. It is a little more extensive on the left side,

where it ends rather nearer to the middle interhemispheral

suleus. Posteriorly this suleus is quite unconnected with the

sulcus transverso-occipitalis, as will be seen by an inspection of the

accompanying figure (text-fig. 286, p. 930).

The sulcus parieto-occipitalis appears for some distance upon

the dorsal aspect of the brain, and the two furrows right and left

have to each other exactly the reverse relation to that which is

shown in the same furrows in Pithecia monachus by both Flower

and Eliot Smith. In the latter the left-hand furrow lies rather

in front of the right, while in the brain of P. pithecia examined

by myself the right-hand furrow is distinctly in advance of the

left. This position of the parieto-occipital fissure is obviously

related to the asymmetry shown by the lateral fissure, since in

both hemispheres the parieto-occipital exactly divides into two

the area of brain partly enclosed by the semicircle formed by the

posteriorly situated half of the lateral fissure.

The Sylvian fissure has the same relations to the postsylvian, or

parallel fissure, that it is represented to have in the specimen of

the brain of P. monachus figured by Elliot Smith in the “ Cata-

logue of the Royal College of Surgeons Museum”; that is to

say, the two fissures incline towards one another superiorly though

930 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE ANATOMY [ Dee. 14,

they do not meet. They more nearly meet, however, on the right

side than on the left.

The furrows on the mesial aspect of the hemispheres differ in

some small details from the corresponding furrows figured by

Flower and Elhot Smith in the brain of the species Pithecia

monachus.

Text-fig. 286.

Brain of Pithecia pithecia.

The upper figure represents the dorsal aspect, the lower figure the right-hand

lateral aspect.

s.c. Sulcus centralis. s.J. Sulcus lateralis. s.p. Postsylvian fissure. s.p.o. Sulcus

parieto-occipitalis. s.7. Sulcus rectus. sy. Sylvian sulcus.

The mesial parieto-occipital fissure differs rather on the two

hemispheres ; it is much deeper as well as longer on the left side

than on the right. The furrow is nearly vertical to the longi-

tudinal axis of the hemisphere, and at the lower end inclines

slightly forward on the left hemisphere and slightly backwards

on the right. It was not double as it is indicated to be in

Pithecia monachus by Elliot Smith.

The calcarine fissure also differs on the two sides of the brain.

In that of the right hemisphere the anterior limb of the Y is very

1909. | OF MONKEYS OF THE GENUS PITHECIA. 931

much reduced in length, as is represented to be the case in Flower’s

figure (5, p. 330, fig. 46) of the mesial aspect of the brain of

P. monachus. The backwardly running part of the Y, which is

parallel to the surface of the hemisphere, is very much the longer.

This part of the calcarine complex is moreover much nearer to the

surface of the brain than is that of the left hemisphere.

§ Larynx and Trachea.

The accompanying drawing (text-fig. 287) represents the larynx

and a portion of the trachea of Pithecia pithecia shown in due

relation to the adjacent structures. The body of the hyoid is

Text-fig. 287.

Larynx and a portion of the trachea of Pithecia pithecia seen in situ from

the ventral surface.

not exposed, being covered by the platysma muscle which is

represented as uncut. The enormously increased thyroid cartilage

is seen to occupy a very large space between the rami of the

Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1909, No. UXITT. 63

932 MR. F, E, BEDDARD ON THE ANATOMY [ Dec. 14,

mandible. More than one half of the cartilage, however, lies

posteriorly to the angle of the jaws. When the hyoid body is ex-

posed by cutting the superjacent muscles of the throat it is seen

to lie close to and even in contact with the thyroid cartilage.

The thyro-hyal hgament of course exists, and the hyoid can by

stretching be removed from its contiguity to the thyroid cartilage

of the larynx. But when the tension is relaxed the bone and the

cartilage are again brought into contact. It is especially to be

noted that there is no dilatation of the hyoid such as occurs in

Mycetes ; the bone in Pithecia pithecia is of quite normal form.

Text-fig. 288.

Hy.

Th.

Hyoid and larynx of Pithecia pithecia viewed from the ventral surface.

Hy. Hyoid. T. Thyroid body. Th. Thyroid cartilage of larynx.

Sir W. Flower’s account of the anatomy of Pithecia monachus

(5), which touches upon most of the viscera, contains no men-

tion of the laryngeal structures, with which species therefore I

am not able to compare Pithecia pithecia in this respect. The

thyroid cartilage, as already mentioned, is very large. It is of

spherical aspect and measurements confirm this; the length was

20 mm. and the breadth 21 mm. The texture of the inflated

bulla shows that it is entirely cartilaginous. I could find no

ossification anywhere. The animal, it is to be recollected, is a

male. It is important to take notice of the facts which have just

1909. | OF MONKEYS OF THE GENUS PITHECTA. 933

been mentioned, since the late Prof. Weldon observed (14) ina

female monkey of the genus Callithriz not only that the thyroid

cartilage was swollen but that there was a patch of ossification on

each side, which facts ‘“‘ seem to show the possible existence of a

howling apparatus in the male.”

It is obvious, however, from Weldon’s figure of the larynx of

Callithri« gigot (14, p. 9, fig. 4), that the thyroid cartilage, if

‘‘swollen,” is relatively small to the rest of the cartilage and bones

in the neighbourhood, when compared with Pithecia. So large

and swollen is this cartilage in Pithecia pithecia that there is

hardly any thyroid notch along the upper ventral border where

the cartilage is in contact with the body of the hyoid, nor is there

any marked ‘“* Adam’s apple.” The whole surface of the cartilage

ventrally is uniformly convex. The proportion between the

thyroid and ericoid pieces of the larynx and the body of the

hyoid are to be seen in the figure of the isolated larynx seen

from the ventral aspect (text-fig. 288). Although the thyroid

Text-fig. 289.

Th.

Hyoid and larynx of Pithecia pithecia viewed laterally.

Cr. Cricoid cartilage. Other letters as in text-fig. 288.

cartilage is smooth and almost bubble-like when viewed from the

ventral aspect, it is flattened and ridged laterally where the thyro-

hyoid muscle is attached. As in Callithrix (ef. Weldon), the an-

terior and posterior cornua of the thyroid cartilage are not very

pronounced. The posterior cornu is the most conspicuous. So far

it is clear that Pithecia resembles Callithrix more nearly than it

does Mycetes*. The cricoid is ossified in the middle line ventrally,

which fact is indicated by dots in the accompanying figures (text-

figs. 288 & 289) of the larynx of Pithecia pithecia. The lateral

regions of the cricoid are not ossified. The lateral view of the

laryngeal cartilages (text-fig. 289) may be compared with Weldon’s

figure of the same cartilages in Callithriz, when the differences

in their proportions will be very apparent. The hyoid bones are

correctly figured in the same dvawings. The anterior cornu is

cartilaginous. The tracheal rings present only one feature worthy

* The larynx, &c. of this genus is figured by Wiedersheim in the 1886 edition of

the Vergleich. Anat. der Wirbelthiere, p. 641.

63*

934 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON 'THE ANATOMY - [Dec. 14,

of special notice—and that is the partial fusion of the third and

fourth annuli, as is also shown in the figure to which reference

has been made.

§ Alimentary Viscera.

The tongue measures 36 mm. in length and 14 mm. in breadth.

The Mayer's organ on each side measures 8 mm. and is concave

upwards ; each organ consists of 10 or 11 folds. There are only

Text-fig. 290.

Cecum and adjacent regions of gut of Pithecia pithecia.

A, Sacculations of colon. B. Division between colon and cecum.

C. Band on colon related to sacculations.

three circumvallate papille disposed in the usual V. The fungi-

form papillz amount to fourteen or fifteen on each side, and all lie

well in front of the circumvallate papille. On the right side is a

single fungiform papilla just in front of the right-hand eircum-

vallate papilla. There is not a corresponding one on the left side.

1909. ] OF MONKEYS OF THE GENUS PITHECIA. 935

The general shape of the stomach calls for no particular comment.

It does not appear to me that the cardiac and pyloric orifices

are much approximated, as Flower has stated them to be in

Pithecia monachus.

Text-fig. 291.

Ceeum and colon of Pithecia pithecia partly cut open to show internal

structure.

A, Sacculations of colon shown as deep recesses. B. Opening of ileum.

C. Ceco-colic valve.

The small intestine measures 40 inches, the colon and rectum

together 14, and the cecwm 3 inches. The proportions are thus

rather different from those of Pithecia monachus as described by

Flower, in which species the small intestine is 50 and the large

intestine 22 inches. From some manuscript notes left by the late

936 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE ANATOMY [ Dee. 14,

Mr. W. A. Forbes, I find that the proportions of the various

regions of the alimentary tract of Pithecia albinasa are again very

different. The small intestine in a female of that species was

87 inches long and the large intestine 124 inches. Some

measurements of the two species P. monachus and P. satanas are

given by Mr. Forbes in his paper upon the Ouakari Monkeys

already quoted here. When the body of the monkey was opened

the omentum was seen to extend right down the abdominal

cavity. It is attached for the length of an inch and a quarter to

the end of the ascending and the beginning of the transverse

colon. The commencement of the omental attachment to the

colon is situated about 14 inch from the ileo-cxeal valve. The

relations of the omentum to the colon appear to vary considerably

among the Primates.

Liver of Pithecia pithecia seen from abdominal surface.

Ca. Caudate lobe. 2.0. Lett central lobe. 2.2. Left lateral lobe.

R.C. Right central lobe. R.L. Right lateral lobe. Sp. Spigelian lobe.

The cecum (see text-fig. 290, p. 934) shows a fixed and uniform

curve of a semicircle. The frenum attaching it to the ileum ex-

tends to within a sixth or an eighth of an inch from its extreme

end. It is marked off from the colon by a distinct oblique groove,

and the commencement of the cecum is of slightly greater calibre

than the adjoining colon. The cxco-colic valve, which corresponds

of course to the constriction distinguishing the cecum and colon,

superficially extends for rather more than halfway round the

periphery of the gut. A dense mass of tissue projecting into the

colon from about the middle of this bears the origin of the

ileum.

1909. | OF MONKEYS OF THE GENUS PITHECIA. 937

The first two inches of the colon are sacculated, and the

very deep sacculations are shown from the inside in the illus-

tration (text-fig. 291, p.935). There were three of these, the first

being ijarger than the two following. Along one side of this

sacculated region of the colon was a distinct tenia, but not on

the other.

The liver is represented in text-fig. 292 from the abdominal aspect.

It will be seen to present no very remarkable features, and is

very like those of other Platyrrhine Monkeys, e.g. Callithrix

(see Beddard, 1, pl. xi. figs. 1, 2). The left lateral lobe gives off

to the right two subsidiary outgrowths, of which one covers over

the cystic duct and nearly touches the right lateral lobe *.

The well marked Spigelian lobe is divided into three lobules.

The bzle-duct joins the cystic duct about half an inch from their

common orifice into the duodenum. There is practically no

hepato-renal ligament, and the hepato-caval ligament is very short,

lying just above the right kidney and not extending as far down

as it. These ligaments agree according to my experience with

the corresponding ligaments of Cebus flavescens.

$ Heart and Blood-vessels.

The accompanying illustration (text-fig. 293, p. 938) exhibits

the interior of the right ventricle with the auriculo-ventricular

valve and the papillary muscles attached thereto. The free wall

of this ventricle is beautifully sculptured, the sculpturing being

in excess of that which is sometimes met with in the same wall of

the right ventricle of other mammals. I do not, however, wish to

be understood as suggesting that this very marked sculpturing of

the free ventricular wall is a character of the species or of the

genus. The sculpturing forms a basketwork towards the middle

of the wall of this ventricle; superiorly, near to where the

auriculo-ventricular valve takes its origin, five or six strap-like

bands free themselves altogether from the meshwork and run

approximately parallel to each other to end upon the attached

margin of the valve. The three cusps of the tricuspid valve

itself are each provided with a papillary muscle, all of which are

shown in the figure referred to. The middle papillary muscle

arises, aS is sometimes the case in other mammals, from the free

wall of the ventricle. Im common with the moderator band

arises a slender papillary muscle which ends in chorde tendinese

attached to the septal half of the valve collar; and another

papillary muscle, also ending in connection with the septal half

of the valve collar, lies close by and is also indicated in the

accompanying text-figure.

The precise arrangement of the intercostal arteries varies so

much among mammals that it is always worth while to describe

* This almost free flap of hepatic tissue occurs in several monkeys. I have

myself recorded it in Callithrix (as has Weldon) and in the ally of the present

species, Pithecia albinasa (3, p. 364).

938 MR. F, E. BEDDARD ON THE ANATOMY [ Dec. 14,

them in any particular type with a view of gathering material

for a future generalisation. In Pithecia pithecia the arteries in

question arise from the aorta by paired orifices, as is shown in

the accompanying figure (text-fig. 294 A). Jn previous descrip-

tions of the intercostal arteries of a few mammals, I have

described the whole series of arteries which arise from the aorta

on the dorsal surface behind the origin of the great vessels of the

neck and in front of the celiac and renalarteries. These arteries

undoubtedly form a morphological series, though one or two

of the more anterior really are bronchial arteries, being the

nutritive arteries of the lungs. It is, however, impossible to

Text-fig. 293.

Interior of right ventricle of Pithecia pithecia.

A & D. Papillary muscles of septal half of valve.

B&C. Papillary muscles of outer flap of valve.

draw a hard and fast line between such arteries as are distributed

to the lungs and those which supply the dorsal parietes and are

thus more accurately to be termed intercostals. For some of the

arterioles which go to the lung tissue arise from intercostals,

while others are undoubtedly independent. A further proof of

the impossibility of absolutely distinguishing the two is to be

seen in the case of Colobus guereza, the intercostals of which

will be described later; and I refer to the ensuing description of

the arteries of that species. ‘aking this view, the first three

1909. | OF MONKEYS OF THE GENUS PITHECIA. 939

arteries of the series now under consideration in Pithecia pithecia

form a triangle with the apex pointing to the right, then follow

six pairs of arteries, the orifices of which are rather obliquely

set with reference to each other and which are rather wide apart.

Thereafter the intercostal arteries are more symmetrical and

perhaps closer together.

Text-fig. 294.

a i

° |

“4

A B C

The commencing aorta of several Monkeys cut open to expose the origins and

arrangement of the intercostal arteries, for an explanation of which see text.

° 4

}

;

A. Pithecia pithecia. B. Cebus fatuellus. C. Colobus guereza.

For the purpose of comparison, | have examined the corres-

ponding arteries in the New World Monkey, Cebus jfatuellus.

There is a general correspondence with Pithecia, but differences

of detail. Thus the triangle of presumably bronchial arterioles

(text-fig. 294 B) is nearly the same. After this is a series of five

pairs of intercostals which are closer together than in Pithecia,

but oblique in the same fashion with the exception of the first

pair which are oblique in the reverse direction, the right-hand

artery being in advance of the left-hand artery. After this series

the intercostals become symmetrical, and there are four pairs of

these in front of the celiac artery. An example of Colobus guereza

came to hand at the time that I was engaged in studying the

anatomy of Pithecia pithecia, and I have drawn up some notes

upon its intercostal arteries with a view of comparison on the points

dealt with in the present communication. Naturally there are

940 MR. F, E. BEDDARD ON THE ANATOMY [ Dec. 14,

differences, and this West African Monkey differs more from

Cebus and Pithecia than are those two genera from each other.

The intercostal series (text-fig. 294 C) are single arteries in their

origin, and only divide later to form the two intercostals of the two

sides of the body. The first two arteries of the series are closer

together than those which succeed, and I ascertained that they are

bronchial arteries, for I succeeded in tracing them into the tissue

of the lung. As I have already mentioned, the condition of

these arteries furnishes another argument in favour of regarding

the whole series of arteries as forming morphologically one series.

For each of these first two arteries was fully as large an artery as

the intercostals proper. The artery in each case continued for

some distance of the same calibre and then suddenly diminished

in calibre to a slender twig running to the lung tissue. It looks

indeed as if at the point of sudden diminution in calibre there

was originally an intercostal arising here which has become

‘aborted. And this seems to be the most probable explanation of

the anatomical fact which is illustrated in the accompanying

figure (text-fig. 294C,@). The number of intercostals in this animal

was nine after the two bronchials already referred to. All of

these followed each other at approximately equivalent intervals.

The first five were provided with a small arteriole to the right

side, which I do not regard as a small additional intercostal, but

as an cesophageal artery. After the ninth intercostal there was

a considerable vacant space, and then just in front of the large

visceral trunks a single pair of intercostals; in this region, there-

fore, alone are the intercostals paired trunks.

I fancy that the Primates generally will prove to possess

invariably a right azygos only; though, indeed, materials for

forming an opinion upon this point do not exist to any great

extent. My own experience, however, points in that direction ;

and in any case Pithecia pithecia has an azygos upon the right

side only which gives off nine branches. Of these the second,

which is correspondingly bifurcate, supplies two intercostal spaces.

I have a note by Mr. Forbes as to the azygos of Pithecia albinasa

which he describes as ‘“ trifid,” meaning, I take it, that the

anterior two branches are of equal calibre with the main longi-

tudinally running trunk.

Although I found the kidneys to be pretty well symmetrical,

the left renal vein flowed into the postcaval at a point a little

above the right renal vein—a converse asymmetry being the

rule among Mammals. This state of affairs appears to agree

with that recorded for Pithecia monachus by Flower (5, p. 332),

who remarks that the right kidney is placed slightly lower than

the left. On the other hand Forbes records the converse con-

ditions in Pithecia albinasa. As in other Primates, the right

spermatic vein flows into the posteaval a little below the right

renal, while the left spermatic enters the left renal. I may take

this opportunity of stating that in Colobus gquereza the spermatic

and renal veins were precisely as in Pithecia pithecia.

1909. | OF MONKEYS OF THE GENUS PITHECIA. 941

§ Lungs and Spleen.

Finally, I have to record that the right limg consisted of four

lobes and the left of two only ; and that the spleen was long and

narrow, 37 inches in length by 3 inch greatest breadth.

(2) Some Motes upon Pithecia monachus.

Since writing the above I have had the opportunity of dissect-

ing an example of Pithecia monachus, which died in the Society’s

Gardens on Dec. 11th, 1909. It was a young male, and I have

therefore been able to compare very particularly the structure of

the larynx with that of its congener.

Generally speaking, I quite confirm the account of the anatomy

of this species by the late Sir William Flower to which I have

referred in my description of Pithecia pithecia. There are, how-

ever, certain details to which he has not referred, and I am able

to compare the two species in respect of these and of other points.

The tongue appears to be almost exactly the same as in Pithecia

puheca. The three circumvallate papillze are present, and, as in

P. pithecia, the fungiform papille are mainly upon the flat lip of

the tongue extending backwards along its sides, the middle

dorsal surface of the tongue being free from them. A prominent

fungiform papilla les just in front of each lateral circumvallate

papula. In P. pithecia, as already noted, there is only this

fungiform papilla on one side. Mayer’s organ is equally con-

spicuous and of about the same size in the two tongues.

The palatal ridges differ shghtly in the two monkeys, showing

at the same time a general agreement. There are in both eight

ridges on each side of the palate of which the anterior series of

four are more complete than the posterior series.

I found that the proportions of the intestine in this young

male were rather different from those described by Flower in a

young female*. In my specimen the small intestine was

42 inches, the colon and rectum 14 inches, and the cecum

13 inch. In Flower’s specimen the same measurements were

50 inches, 22 inches, and 43 inches.

I have figured on a previous page the interior of the cecum of

Pithecia pithecia. That of P. monachus is rather different,

except of course in essentials. The same valve separates the

cecum from the colon, and the ileum opens on to the colic side of

this raised fold. But in P. monachus there are none of the

complications shown in the colon (7. ¢. the series of deep depres-

sions) of P. pithecia. The internal surface of both colon and

cecum is quite smooth and even.

The omentum extends right down the abdominal cavity, and is

attached for the distance of barely an inch to the ascending and

* The size of the two specimens appears to be about the same, 7. e. 11 inches of

body.

9492 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE ANATOMY [ Dec. 14,

transverse colon, this attachment commencing about an inch and

a quarter beyond the entry of the ileum into the colon. The

hepato-caval ligament is small, and at its extremity remote from

the liver just strays on to the kidney on one side and on to the

mesocolon on the other.

The posteaval vein and its branches are exactly as I have

described them in Pithecia pithecia.

The intercostal system of arteries however differs. As in

P. pithecia, there are first of all three branches which are pre-

sumably cesophageal and pulmonary in distribution. The first

two intercostals are unpaired at their origin, and the subsequent

series though paired are much closer together than in Pithecia

pithecia. Whether this is really a specific difference remains of

course to be proved.

I naturally paid very particular attention to the larynx of this

species for purposes of comparison with the rather abnormal

larynx of Pithecia pithecia, and discovered some differences which

however may be due to the greater immaturity of my example of

Pithecia monachus. In this specimen in fact the two posterior

molars of each side of each jaw were quite invisible, there being

thus only four grinding teeth present out of a total of six on

each side of each jaw. The canines were considerably smaller

than those of the Pithecia pithecia, in which all the molars were

present.

In general aspect the larynx of this monkey was like that

of Pithecia pithecia, but considerably smaller. This must be due

to youth, to some extent at any rate; for the interspace between

the rami of the lower jaw was less in this Pithecia than in the

other. The diameter of this interspace measured at the beginning

of the ascending part of the mandible was 34 mm. in P. pithecia,

and 28 mm. in P. monachus. The mandible is, however, alto-

gether much smaller in the P. monachus. But while the two

individuals differ in actual size and in the size of the parts

adjacent to the larynx, there is nothing like such an enormous

difference as that which exists between the larynges of the two

species of Pithecia, for the thyroid cartilage in P. monachus

measures only 9 mm. in length by 12 mm. in breadth. It is

therefore about half the size of that of P. pithecia. The propor-

tions of length and breadth are also, it will be observed, rather

different. The thyroid is broader in the younger P. monachus.

This may be a specific difference. I regard as a sign of imma-

turity the form of the thyroid cartilage. In the adult Pithecia

pithecia it will be remembered that the ventral surface of the

thyroid is smooth and rounded. In the present species there is

anteriorly but not posteriorly a distinct though low median ridge,

thus preserving the more usual form of the thyroid cartilage in

Mammals. This ridge easily escapes the eye owing to the fact

that it is but little pronounced. It is nevertheless present. It

is quite easy to suppose that the subsequent growth of the thyroid

1909. | OF MONKEYS OF THE GENUS PITHECIA. 943

cartilage might obliterate this ridge and lead to the conditions

observable in the adult Pithecia pithecia. On the other hand,

no positive facts exist with reference to the growth of the larynx

in any Pithecia, and it may well be that the differences which I

am describing are actually specific differences after all.

The body of the hyoid, I may remark, is quite as large and as

well ossified as in P. pithecia.

List of Literature referred to.

(1) Bepparp, F. E.—On Certain Points in the Anatomy of

Callithrix lorquata. Novit. Zool. viii. 1901, p. 362.

(2) Bepparp, F. E—On Brachyurus calvus. P. Z. 8. 1887,

0, WS)

(3) Beans D. C.—On the Abdominal Viscera of Cercocebus

fuliginosus and Lagothrix humboldti. Proc. Roy. Soc.

Edinb. xxiv. 1903, p. 505.

(3a) Forses, W. A.—On the External Characters and Anatomy

of the Red Uakari Monkey (Lrachyurus rubicundus), with

remarks on the other Species of that Genus. P.Z.S.

1880, p. 627.

(4) Fnarau & Jacossonn.—Handbuch der Anatomie und

vergleichenden Anatomie des Centralnervensystems der

Siiugethiere, Vol. i. Berlin, 1908.

(5) Frower, W. H.—On the Anatomy of Pithecia monachus.

P. Z.S8. 1862, p. 326.

(6) FLrowER, W. H.—On the Brain of Mycetes senienlus. P.Z.S.

1864, p, 335.

(7) Fuower, W. H.—Digestive Organs of Mammals. Med.

Times & Gazette, 1872.

(8) Huxuey, T. H.—On the Brain of Afeles panniscus. P.Z.S.

1861, p. 247.

(9) KukentHaL & ZreHEN.—Untersuchungen iiber die gross-

hirnfurchen der Primaten. Jen. Zeitschr. xxix. 1895,

page

(10) Rucre.—Die iiusferen Formverhiiltnisse der Leber bei den

Primaten. Morph. Jahrb. xxx. p. 42.

(11) Surrn, G. Eniior.—On the Morphology of the Brain in

the Mammalia, &e. Trans. Linn. Soc. (2) viii. 1903,

p. 319.

(12) Smrra, G. Eviior.—Descriptive and Illustrated Catalogue

of the Physiological Series of Comparative Anatomy,

Roy. Coll. Surgeons. Vol. ii. 2nd ed., 1902.

(13) Turner, W.—The Convolutions of the Brain. J. Anat.

Phys: xc. 1891p. 236:

(14) Wetpon, W. F. R.—Notes on Callithrix gigot. P.Z.S.

1884, p. 6.

944 MR. G. A. BOULENGER ON THE [ Dec. 14,

8. On the Ophidian Genus Grayia.

By G. A. Boursyenr, F.R.S., V.P.ZS.*

| Received October 29, 1909. |

(Text-figures 295-299.)

The progress in our knowledge of African Snakes due to

increased material has shown the genus Grayia, established by

Dr. Gunther in 18587, to be much in want of revision. The

discovery of Grayia tholloni has so completely bridged over

the gap separating this genus from Yenwrophis Gtinther, that

I no longer think the latter can be maintained. The two

species Grayia smithii Leach, and Grayia furcata Moecq., which

I retained as distinct in the Catalogue of Snakes (vol. ii., 1894)

were erroneously characterized, and the name of the latter

has to be altered to that of ormata proposed at an earlier date by

Barboza du Bocage. Thanks to the courtesy of my friend and

colleague Prof. Dollo, C.M.Z.S., I have received the loan of the

type specimen of his Grayia giardi, the true affinities of which I

had overlooked, and which I am now convinced should be referred

to the synonymy of Z'ropidonotus olivaceus Peters. Another

species more recently described as Grayia lubrica W. Sclater,

Ann. 8. Afr. Mus. i. 1898, p. 109, must also be withdrawn as

synonymous with Zropidonotus levissimus Giinther, the habitat

of which long remained unknown, but of which I have recently

received a specimen from Natal through Dr. E. Warren.

The genus Grayia, after these eliminations, embraces four

species—G'. ornata, G'. smythii, G. tholloni, of which revised de-

scriptions are here given, and G'. cesar.

GRAYIA ORNATA.

Macrophis ornatus Bocage, Joru. Sc. Lisb. 1. 1866, p. 67.

Glaniolestes ornatus Peters, Mon. Berl. Ac. 1877, p. 614.

Grayia furcata Mocquard, Bull. Soc. Philom. (7) xi. 1887,

p. 71; Bouleng. Cat. Sn. i. p. 287 (1894).

Grayia triangularis (non Hallow.), Ginth. Ann. & Mag. N. H.

(6) 1. 1888, p. 325.

Grayia smythu, part., Bouleng. Cat. Sn. ii. p. 286; Werner,

Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien, xlix. 1899, p. 138; Bouleng. Proce.

Zool. Soc. 1900, p. 453; Sternfeld, Mitth. Zool. Mus. Berl. iv.

1908, p. 231.

* Published by permission of the Trustees of the British Museum.

+ The name Grayia might be objected to as preoccupied in Zoology ; it had long

ago been changed by Cope (Glaniolestes) on the ground of its preoceupation in

Botany. However, on referring to the zoological paper in which the prior use of the

name occurs (C. R. Ac. Sci. xiii. 1856, p. 841), I find that Grayia, Bonaparte,

is merely a nomen nudum for a subgenus of Palapteryx, Owen.

1909. | OPHIDIAN GENUS GRAYIA. 945

Grayia ornata Bocage, Herp. Angola, p. 104 (1895); Mocquard,

Bull. Soc. Philom. (8) ix. 1897, p. 8.

Frayia smythii (non Leach) Sternfeld, Mitth. Zool. Mus. Berl.

iv. 1908, p. 409.

Eye moderate in the adult, shorter than its distance from the

nostril, as long as its distance from the oral border, larger in the

young. 22 to 27 maxillary teeth on each side. Rostral once and

a half to once and two-thirds as broad as deep, just visible from

above ; nasal divided or semidivided ; internasals as long as broad

or a little longer, as Jong as or a little shorter than the pre-

frontals ; frontal once and a half to twice as long as broad, as long

as or a little longer than its distance from the end of the snout,

as long as or slightly shorter than the parietals; loreal once and

Text-fig. 295.

Head of Grayia ornata.

one-third to twice as long as deep*; one pre-and two post-

oculars ; temporals 2+3, lower anterior not longer than its

distance from the loreal ; eight upper labials, fourth entering the

eye (rarely nine, third and fourth entering the eye‘), the last

about as long as the two preceding combined ; one or several of the

labials behind the eye usually divided into two, a-small triangular

shield being often intercalated between the fifth and sixth labials ¢ ;

four or five lower labials in contact with the anterior chin-shields,

which are not or but slightly shorter than the posterior. Scales

in 17 to 20 rows orrthe body, usually 19, in 6 rows on the greater

* Absent on the right side in spec. 13 (Kasayo, Congo).

+ In one specimen, No. 5 (Assobam, Cameroon) ; the type of G. triangularis is

also described as having nine upper labials.

+ No division of the upper labials in a specimen from Bitye (No. 3).

946 MR. G. A, BOULENGER ON THE | Dee. 14,

part of the tail. Ventrals 143-157; anal divided; subcaudals

71-84.

As regards the coloration, this species appears to fall into two

principal forms—the typical, originally described from Duque de

Braganga, Angola, and Mocquard’s G. furcata, from Brazzaville,

Congo, which Bocage also records from Duque de Braganga, and

which seems to be the common form in Cameroon and the

Gaboon.

G. ornata is thus described by Bocage from a specimen

1640 millim. in length :—Olive above, with numerous irregular

deep black spots, confluent on the tail and the posterior third of

the body, much better separated on the middle third, and again

confluent on the anterior third, where they form a broad longitu-

dinal band from the occiput to a distance of about 150 millim. ;

two parallel black bands along the side of the anterior third of

the body, the upper the broader, extending from the first upper

labial, the lower extending from the third ventral shield; head

olive above, irregularly spotted with black, the lateral shields

edged with black; two black streaks on the temporal region ;

greenish yellow beneath, the shields spotted and edged with

black,

A specimen from the Gaboon in the British Museum (no. 12)

appears to represent the young of the typical G. ornata. It is

dark brown above, with black spots having a tendency to form

longitudinal lines ; the sides of the head and of the body, and the

lower parts are black ; two broken-up white lines along the sides,

the upper the better developed and extending over the temple to

the eye; some white spots on the labial shields and under the

head; tail and posterior part of body uniform black.

Mocquard’s G. furcata is based on a specimen a little over a

metre in length, greyish brown above, with 25 black cross-bars,

not half as broad as the spaces between them, these bands bifur-

eating towards the ventrals, the sides showing very regular

A-shaped black figures ; the body turns to a uniform blackish brown

towards the tail; ventral region dirty white in front, blackish

brown towards the tail, which is black above and blackish brown

beneath ; the upper head-shields are blackish brown, except the

parietals, which are fulvous edged with black; sides and lower

surface of head grey, the shields edged with black.

This description applies tolerably well to specimens from South

Cameroon, the Gaboon, and Central Africa, in the British

Museum. The back bars number 21 to 25, exclusive of such as

may be present on the. tail, which is not always black; the

parietals are more or less distinctly lighter in colour than the

other head-shields, the sides of the head are brown or blackish

with white spots on the labials and temporals, these behind the

eye corresponding to the white line shown by the young specimen

of the typical form mentioned above; the belly is yellowish or

greyish white, at least the posterior ventral shields spotted,

freckled, or edged with black. A specimen from the Gaboon

1909.} OPHIDIAN GENUS GRAYIA. 947

(no. 11) is almost uniform brown above, the darker cross-bars

being very indistinct and not forked on the sides.

Young specimens are very remarkable in showing an inversion

of the markings of @. furcata, or rather, as pointed out by

Dr. Mocquard, being the negative of what is considered the posi-

tive in the adult. The snake may be described as black with

light, whitish, or greyish cross-bands (15 to 32 in number),

bifurcating on the side. I have long been at a loss to explain

how the change takes place, but I have now succeeded in bringing

Text-fig. 296.

Side view of body of Grayia ornata.

Diagrams showing changes in markings with age.

together enough material of different ages to throw satisfactory

light on this point. The black ground-colour gradually passes to

grey or brown, whilst a black bar develops and enlarges within

the light bars of the young, which later become reduced to a

narrow white margin to the former and finally disappear. The

three diagrams (text-fig. 296) will explain the change better than

a lengthy description.

The largest specimen examined by me measures 1030 millim. ;

tail 260.

This species is known from Cameroon, the Gaboon, the Congo,

and Angola.

Proc. Zoou. Soc.—-1909, No. LXIV. 64

948 MR. G. A. BOULENGER ON THE [ Dec. 14,

List of the specimens in the British Museum.

1. Her.?. Sc. 20; V.154; C. ? Efulen, S. Cameroon. G. L. Bates, Esq. (C.).

2. 6. Sc.19; V.151; C. ? Bitye, a rf

3. Her. d. Sc. 17; V. 145; C, 83. Ay 5 3

AMI’ Sc. 19; V. 157; C. 71. &: 4s ke

5. Yg. Se.17; V. 152; C.79. Assobam, ,, Bs

6. Ye. Sc. 20; V. 147; C. 84. Benito R., Spanish Guinea. ss

Hes he Sc. 19; V. 145; C.79. Ogowe, Gaboon. Dr. W. J. Ansorge (C.).

8. Ye. Se. 19; V.143; C. ? Nehali, nr. Fernan Vaz. :,

9. Ye. Sc. 19; V. 153; C. 80. Lambarene, Ogowe. Miss Kingsley (C.).

10. Yg. Se. 19; V.145; C. 2 Sette Cama, Gaboon.

ll. ¢. Se. 19; V. 147; C. ? Gaboon.

12. Yg. Sc. 17; V. 147; C. 82. a

13. Her.2. Sc. 17; V. 143; C.71. Kasayo, Congo. Dr. J. L. Todd (P.).

14. Yg. Se. 17; V.148; C. 74. Congo.

15. 3. Sc. 19; V. 150; C.83. C. Africa. Warrington Museum (E.).

GRAYIA SMYTHII.

Coluber smythii Leach, in Tuckey’s Explor. R. Zaire, App. p. 409

1818).

ie levis (non Lacep.), Hallow. Proc. Ac. Philad. 1844,

> HAN,

‘ Coronella triangularis Hallow. Proc. Ac. Philad. 1854, p. 100.

Heteronotus triangularis Hallow. Proc. Ac. Philad. 1857,

. 68.

i Grayia silurophaga Giinth. Cat. Col. Sn. p. 51 (1858); F. Miill.

Verh. Nat. Ges. Basel, vii. 1885, p. 683.

Leionotus schlegeli Jan, Elenco Ofid. p. 68 (1863), and Arch.

Zool. Anat. Phys. 11. 1865, p. 241.

Grayia triangularis Bocage, Jorn, Se. Lisb. i. 1866, p. 47;

Boettg. Ber. Senck. Ges. 1887-88, p. 51; Bocage, Herp. Angola,

p. 102 (1895).

Grayia smythii, part., Bouleng. Cat. Sn. 1. p. 286 (1894);

Werner, Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien, xlix. 1899, p. 138; Bouleng.

Proc. Zool. Soc. 1900, p. 453; Stermfeld, Mitth. Mus. Berl. iv.

1908, p. 231.

Grayia smythii Ginth. Ann. & Mag. N. H. (6) xv. 1895,

p. 925.

Kye rather small in the adult, shorter than its distance from

the nostril, as long as its distance from the oral border, larger in

the young. 22 to 25 maxillary teeth on each side. Rostral once

and one third to once and a half as broad as deep, just visible

from above; nasal divided or semidivided ; internasals as long as

broad or a little longer than broad, as long as or longer than the

preefrontals; frontal once and two thirds to twice as long as

broad, longer than its distance from the end of the snout, as long

as or a little shorter than the parietals; loreal as long as deep or

a little longer; one pre- and two postoculars; temporals 243,

lower anterior longer than its distance from the loreal, sometimes

as long as its distance from the rostral; seven upper labials

1909. ] OPHIDIAN GENUS GRAYIA, 949

(rarely eight through division of the last *), seventh (if undivided)

as long as the three preceding combined, fourth entering the eye;

four or five lower labials in contact with the anterior chin-shields,

which are shorter than the posterior. Scales in 17 rows on

the body, in 6 or 4 rows on the greater part of the tail. Ventrals

145-168; anal divided ; subcaudals 89-102.

Text-fig. 297.

Head of Grayia smythii.

Coloration of young.—Dark brown or black cross-bars, each

occupying 4 or 5 transverse series of scales on the upper part

of the body, separated by narrow whitish or pale brown lines,

less than a scale in width; these bands taper to a point or are

rounded off at the sides, where they stand out boldly on the

white colour which extends from the ventrals to the lower rows

of scales; head pale brown above, upper lip white, the sutures

between the shields dark brown or black; lower surface of head

and body white, with or without a more or less regular series of

small black spots on each side ; lower surface of tail white, with a

brown or black zigzag median line corresponding to the junction of

the pairs of subeaudals. The dark cross-bars on the body number

36 to 39.

Changes with age.—The brown or black cross-bars of the young

become generally lighter with age, turning to olive, greyish olive

or brown, retaining the dark colour on their edges, so as often to

form a zigzag line along each side, corresponding to the angles of

the extremities of the cross-bars, the light triangles between

them being often spotted with black; the light lines usually

become converted into more or less regular series of black and

yellowish spots. Some adult specimens, however, retain much

* Tn specimens No. 3 (Sierra Leone) and 7 (Cameroon).

64%

950 MR. G. A. BOULENGER ON THE [ Dec. 14,

the same colour-pattern as the young, except that the light bars

become divided and of a pale brown; others again differ in being

spotted all over with black, or blackish, with lighter, yellowish,

or pinkish spots or variegations. Head as in the young. Lower

Text-fige. 298.

Side view of body of Grayia smythii.

Diagrams showing changes in markings with age.

parts white, uniform or more or less spotted or freckled with

black, often with a lateral series of round black spots; posterior

ventrals and subeaudals often edged with black.

Grows to a length of 1650 millim.; tail 500.

Known from West and Central Africa and Uganda.

List of the specimens in the British Museum.

ly & V.154; C.101. Lahbé, French Guinea. Dr. E. Gendre (P.).

2. g . V. 164; C. ? iz) ” _ o~ ”

ah gic V. 148; C.97. Sierra Leone. Sir A. Kennedy (P.).

4. Ye. V. 158; C.93. Agberi, S. Nigeria. Dr. W. J. Ansorge (C.).

5. Her. V. 162; C.? W. Province, 8. Nigeria, A. EH. Kitson, Esq. (P.).

6. fo. V. 154; C.99. Oil River, Cameroon. Sir H. H. Johnston (P.).

72), V.161; C. 89. F, i é :

B, 2. W, 1@ls CL ? Cameroon, opposite Mrs. Burton (P.).

Fernando Po.

9. Yg. V. 150; €. 2 Mouth of the Loango. Mr. Duggan (C.).

1909. ] OPHIDIAN GENUS GRAYIA, 951

10. Hgr.. V.147; C.93. Boma, Congo. Dr. Leach (P.). (Type

of C. smythii and of G. silurophaga.)

ll. Ye. V.160; C.94. Zambi, Lower Congo. Capt. Lepez (C.).

1}, SE V.163; C.94. Leopoldville, Congo. Dr. J. L. Todd (P.).

13, @. V. 159; C.96. Monsembe,UpperCongo. Rev. J. H. Weeks (P.).

14. 3. V. 147; C.98,. District of Victoria Falls. M. J. Capart (P.).

16. Ye. Vv. 152; C. 91. ” 3” ” ”

Ws Qe V.161; C.94. Entebbe, Uganda. Sir H. H. Johnston (P.).

18. 9 V. 168; C.? sf Mr. E. Degen (C.).

19. Head & tail.

20. Her. V. 151; €. 97.

21. Her. V. 149; C. 101.

Uganda. Dr. Scott Elliot (P.).

: } (Types of G. silwrophaga.)

GRAYIA THOLLONI.

Grayia tholloni Mocquard, Bull. Soc. Philom. (8) ix. 1897, p. 11;

Bouleng. Ann. Mus. Congo, Zool. ii. 1901, p. 17; Werner, Rep.

Wellcome Res. Labor. iii. 1908, p. 170.

Grayia fasciata Bouleng. t. ¢. p. 9, pl. i11. fig. 3.

Kye rather large, as long as its distance from the nostril,

longer than its distance from the oral border. 27 to 30 maxillary

teeth on each side. Rostral once and a half to once and two

thirds as broad as deep, just visible from above ; nasal divided * ;

internasals as long as broad or a little longer, shorter than the

Text-fig. 299.

Head of Grayia thollont.

prefrontals; frontal once and three fourths to twice as long as

broad, longer than its distance from the end of the snout, as long

as the parietals; loreal once and one third to once and a half as

long as deep; one pre- and two postoculars; temporals 2+ 3 7,

lower anterior not longer than its distance from the loreal ;

eight upper labials, fourth or fourth and fifth = entering the eye;

* Resting on the first labial only in the two type specimens, a character to which

Mocquard attaches undue importance; the divided nasal rests on 2 labials in 3 out

of the 4 specimens examined by me.

5 1 “

+ Exceptionally TEE, according to Mocquard.

+ 4th and 5th entering the eye on the left side in a specimen from Barboi, on

both sides in one from Entebbe.

952 ON THE OPHIDIAN GENUS GRAYIA. [ Dee. 14.

four to six lower labials in contact with the anterior chin-shields,

which are as long as or a little shorter than the posterior. Scales

in 15 rows on the body, in 4 rows on the greater part of the tail.

Ventrals 130-143*; anal divided; subcaudals 100-128.

Young blackish above, with narrow white bars which are very

distinct on the anterior half of the body and generally disappear

further back ; upper lip and lower parts white, the labial shields

with black bars on the sutures, the ventral shields with a small

black spot on the outer end. Only three of the light bars,

bordered by black spots, are seen in the half-grown, and they

may vanish completely in the adult, which is olive, with small

black spots on the sides, and light outer edges to the scales ; the

black bars on the upper labials are very pronounced, and that

between the last two extends upwards on the temporals.

The two type specimens are described as from the French

Congo. A young specimen, type of G. fasciata, is from the

south-west of Lake Tanganyika. The three following specimens

are preserved in the British Museum. The largest measures

1200 millim.; tail 490:

1. Hgr. §. V.1385; C.? Entebbe, Uganda. Sir H. H. Johnston (P.).

BaD. V. 143; C.111. Polkom, Baro R., Mr. P.C. Zaphiro (C.); W.N.

(Sobat). MacMillan, Esq. (P.).

Bo Sie V. 184; C.? Barboi, White Nile. Dr. Wenyon (C.); Dr. F.

Werner (P.).

* 170, given by Werner, is probably a lapsus or misprint.

Abramis, 656.

brama, 625.

Acanthocheilonema

dracunculoides, 889.

Acanthosoma

hystrix, 852.

Acanthozone

latipes, 857.

Achzeus

spinosus, 705.

Acmza,

testudinalis, 762.

Acomys

cahirinus, 795.

dimidiatus, 795.

nesiotis, 79D.

russatus, 788, 792,

"9a:

Acta

rufopunctata, 705,

speciosa, TOD.

tomentosa, TOD.

Adolias, 880.

Agama

aculeata, 593.

atricollis, 590, 593.

distantt, 590, 595.

kirkii, 590, 593.

Alpheus

chlersii, 663, 666.

insignis, 664.

laneceloti, 664, 665.

macrochirus, 663.

paracrinitus, 664, 66d.

paracrimitus — bengal-

ensis, 664, 665.

superciliaris, 664.

Amalopenzeus

elegans, 719, 720, 721,

722, 729.

valens, 720, 729.

Amblypneustes, 714-718.

ovum, (14.

INDEX.

Ampbiprion

scansor, 771.

testudineus, 771.

Aimphithoé

latipes, 852, 856.

Ain phithopsis, 855.

glaber, 851.

grandimana, 852,

857.

latipes, 856.

olrikii, 852.

pulchella, 852, 857.

Anabas

macrocephalus, 771.

microcephalus, 771.

oligolepis, 771.

scandens, 768, 769, 770,

771.

spinosus, 771.

testudineus, 771.

trifoliatus, 7

vartegatus, 7

Anableps, 656, 658, 659,

660, 661.

microlepis, 630, 631.

Anarrhichas, 611.

Anas

boschas, 598.

melleri, 598.

pecilorhyncha, 598.

superciliosa, 598.

Ancistrodon

piscivorus, 739.

Ancylus

fluviatilis, TA1.

Andigena

hailloni, 740.

Anguilla, 612, 656.

* vulgaris, 628.

Antechinomys

spenceri, 804, 848.

Anthias

testudineus, 771.

71.

Aparallactus

capensis, 596.

Ardea

goliath, 740.

Arnoglossus,

657.

megastoma, 649.

Arvicanthis

nilotica, 794.

Arvicola

niloticus, 794.

Ascaris

lumbricoides, 742.

mystax, 743.

Aspidelaps

scutatus, 597.

Ateles

panniscus, 948.

651, 652,

Balanophyllia, 897.

diffusa, 906, 912.

imperialis, 905, O12.

parallela, 904, 905.

profundicella, 903.

socialis, 902.

stokesiana, 903.

Bauria

cynops, 679.

Belascaris

mystax, T42.

Belone, 611, 656.

vulgaris, 634.

Benthesicymus, 719, 720.

Beryx, 643, 657.

delphinus, 641.

Betta, 769, 777.

akarensis, 778, 779,

787.

anabatoides, 778, 780,

787.

bellica, 778, 779.

bleekeri, 778, 780.

XXV1

Betta

Jasciata, 778, 782.

787.

fusca, 778, 780, 787.

macrophthalmna, 778,

781, 787.

macrostoma, 778, T87.

picta, 780.

pugnax, 778, T79

782.

rubra, 778, 781, 7

splendens, 778, 78

tentata, 778, 781, 787.

trifasciata, 778, 781.

unimaculata, 778, 779.

Bettongia

lesueuri, 803, 818, 821,

$22, 823, 831.

— grayt, 803, 822,

823.

— penicillata, 803.

penicillata, 821, 822,

832, 833.

Bibos

Frontalis, 800.

Birgus

latro, 706, 887.

Bitis

arietans, 597.

caudalis, 597.

Boa

87.

925.

divinilogua, 918, 922.

madagascariensis, 922,

924, 925, 926, 927.

occidentalis, 918, 919,

920, 921, 922, 923,

925, 926, 927.

Boodon

lineatus, 595.

Bos

sondaicus, 739.

— birmanicus, 669.

— portert, 669.

Bovichthys, 654,

657, 659, 661.

variegatus, 654.

Brachyurus

calvus, 943.

rubicundus, 9438.

Breviceps

mossambicus, 591.

Buccinum

capillus, 749.

reticulatum, 749.

undatum, 761.

Buceros

capensis, 739.

Budorecas

taxicolor, 741.

655,

constrictor, 918, 922, |

INDEX.

Budoreas

taxicolor white?,

740.

Bufo

carens, 59).

regularis, 591,

Buteo

borealis, 884.

Calcinus

herhstii, 706.

Calliope

Jingalli, 856.

ossiani, 856.

Calliopius

fingalli, 856.

ossiani, 856.

Callithrix, 933, 937.

gigot, 933, 943.

torquata, 943.

Cambarus, 849.

Camposcia

retusa, TOD.

Canis

egyptiacus, 791.

dingo, 845.

Capra

egagrus, 740. -

Capros, 648, 652, 657,

661.

aper, 640.

Cardisoma

armatum, 711.

carnifex, T\i.

hirtipes, 705, Til.

rotundum, T11.

Cardium

echinatum, 761.

edule, 758, 759, 761.

nodosum, 761.

Carpilodes

cariosus, TO4.

rugatus, 704.

vaillantianus, 704.

Cassina

senegalensis, 592.

Causus

defilippit, 597.

Cebus

Fatuellus, 939.

Hlavescens, 9377.

Centetes, 690.

ecaudatus, 702.

Cephalophus

coronatus, 740,

maxwelli, 74.1.

Cephalotes

tentotis, 789.

Ceratodus, 770.

Ceratophyllus

fasciatus, 741,

668, |

Cercocebus

Suliginosus, 943.

Cercopithecus

e@thiops, 545, 546.

tantalus, 545, 546.

— alexandri, 545, 546.

— hudgetti, 546.

— tantalus, 546.

Ceriornis

satyra, 741.

Cerithiopsis

costulata, 762.

Cervus

affinis, 599.

cashmirianus, 589, 599.

— macneillt, 590.

Cethosia

nicobarica, 881, 883.

Cheetodon

chinensis, 774.

Chama

arenaria, 757.

Chamzeleon, 683.

dilepis, 594.

parvilobus, 594.

cuilensis, 594.

Chinchilla

lanigera, 687.

Chirocentrus, 656.

dorab, 621.

Chiromantis

werampelina, 592.

Chiromys, 697.

madagascariensis, 696.

Chlorodius

levissimus, 705.

niger, T05.

Chlorodopsis

areolata, T05.

venusta, TOA.

Chlorophis

wregularis, 595.

Cheeropus

castanotis, 803, 835,

836.

Chrysochloris

asiatica, 679.

hottentota, 679.

Cicinnurus

regius, 741.

Cinixys

belliana, 592.

Clarias, 625, 626, 627,

656, 659, 660.

lazera, 623, 624.

Clupea, 656, 661.

harengus, 621.

sprattus, 621.

Cobitis, 612, 656.

Coccidium

tenellum, 887.

Coendu

prehensilis, 739, 740.

Ceenobita, 889.

clypeatus, 706.

rugosus, 706.

Ccenopsammia

coccinea, 907, 909.

ehrenbergiana, 907,

gaimardi, 909.

tenuilamellosa, 907,

909.

urvillii, 909.

Cojus

cobojius, 771.

Colisa

bejeus, 785.

chuna, 787.

cotra, 785.

lalius, 786, 787.

ponticeriana, 786.

sota, 786.

aunicolor, 786, 787.

vulgaris, 785.

Colobus

guerezd,

940.

Coluber

levis, 948.

Conger, 612, 656.

vulgaris, 628.

Connocheetes

taurina, 739.

Coralliocaris

graminea, 706.

superba, 706.

Corallus

caninus,

923.

cookii, 918, 923.

988, 939,

918, —920,

madagascariensis, 918, |

923, 926.

Coregonus, 656.

oxyrhynchus, 620.

Coronella

triangularis, 948.

Cottus, 611, 612, 654,

655, 659.

Crocidura

olivieri, 790.

religzosa, 790.

Crocodilus

niloticus, 592.

Crotalus

adamanteus, 739.

atrox, 739.

terrificus, 740.

Ctenopoma, 770.

Ctenops, 769. °

nobilis, 777.

striatus, 777.

INDEX.

Ctenops

vittatus, 776.

Cyclodius

gracilis, 705.

Cyclopterus, 654, 657,

659.

Zumpus, 652, 653.

Cycloseris, 901.

cyclolites, 914.

hexagonalis, 914.

Cymo

melanodactylus, 705.

Oynoglossus, 612.

Cyprina

islandica, 758, 76d.

Dafila

acuta, 598.

Daira

perlata, 705.

Damaliscus

pygargus, 740.

Dasypeltis

scabra, 595.

Dasypus, 680, 682, 683.

Dasyurus

geoftroyt fortis, 803, |

837.

Dautzenbergia, 856.

grandimana, 857.

Dendraspis

angusticeps, 597.

Dendrolagus

ursinus, T40.

Dendrophyllia

coccinea, 907,

912.

gracilis, 908, 910.

mannt, 907.

robusta, 908, 909, 912.

Dermochelys, 738.

Diaseris

distorta, 901, 902, 912,

914.

pulchella, 901.

Didelphys, 703.

909

Diodon

maculatus, 612.

Dipodillus

amenus, 793.

henleyi, 792, 793.

mackilligini, 792.

marie, 788, 792.

watersi, 792.

Dipus

gerbillus, 792.

Dispholidus

typus, 596.

Domecia

hispida, T05.

XXVU

Dromicia

concinna, 803, 826, 828.

Dynomene

sp., 706.

Echidna, 682, 685.

Kehinus

esculentus, 714, 717.

Eimeria

(Coceidium) aviwm,887.

Elapechis

guentheri, 596.

Elephas

africanus peeli, 667,

Enygrus

earinatus, 918.

Equus

burchelli, 547, 551, 552,

564, 598.

— granti, 500.

chapmani, 799.

granti, 555-562, 588.

grevyt, 547, 548, 553,

554.

hemionus, 739.

hollisi, 588.

lorenzi, 578.

quagga, 563, 565, 566,

574

— burchelli, 569, 570.

— danielli, 565.

—- grevyt, 564, 569.

—- lorenzt, 565.

sivalensis, 554.

stenonis, DD4.

wardi, 799.

zebra, 547, 548, 587,

799.

Eriphia

levimana, 705.

seabricula, TOD.

Hryx, 926.

conicus, 918.

jaculus, 918.

johni, 918.

Esox, 611, 638, 656, 658,

659, 661.

lucius, 628, 629.

Eunectes

murinus, 918.

noteus, 918.

Eupleea

alcathoé, 882.

distantt, 882.

godartt, 882.

Eupsammia, 912, 91

Eur a

halos, 739.

Euschema

cuprina, 883.

XXVI1ll

Kuschema

Srithstorferi, 883.

isolata, 882.

militaris, 882.

sumatrensis, 882, 883.

Kusirus

bidens, 865.

biscayensis, 864, 865,

866, 869, 872, 879.

cuspidatus, 865.

helvetie, 865.

longipes, 864, 868.

propinguus, 868.

Kuthalia

cibaritis, 880, 883.

Hxoccetus, 611, 656, 663.

volitans, 635.

Favia

cavernosa, 915,

okent, 915.

Felis

chaus nilotica, 790.

lybica, 791.

tigris sondaica, 892,

893.

Filaria

perstans, 889.

Fistularia, 656, 660.

sp., 663.

Flabellum

aculeatum, 899.

debile, 899.

oweni, 899.

rubrum, 899, 900.

spinosum, 899.

stokesi, 899.

sumatrense, 899.

variabile, 899.

Fungia

agariciformis, 901.

eyclolites, 902, 912,914.

distorta, 901.

Sungites, 901.

— agariciformis, 901, |

914.

linnei, 901.

patella, 914.

repanda, 901.

tenuifolia, 901.

Fusus

antiquus, 758, 761.

Gadus,

663.

eglefinus, 613, 614, 615,

luscus, 615.

merlangus, 616.

morrhua, 615.

611, 656, 659, |

INDEX.

Galathea

affinis, 706.

Galaxias, 770.

Galidia, 698.

Gastrosteus,

659, 660.

Gazella

marica, 884.

Gecarcinus

lagostomus, 710.

Gecarcoidea

lalandii, 705, 710.

Gennadas

sp., 729.

alicet, 723, 724, 726.

borealis, 728.

bouviert, 721, 726, 727,

728, 729, 730.

634, 656, |

calmant, 721, 724, 729,

carinatus, 728, 729.

intermedius, 718, 720,

721, 723, 724, 7.

729, 780.

parvus, 718, 720, 72

122, 723, (25, 7.

(28, 729, 730:

propinguus, 729.

scutatus, 721, 727, 729,

730. |

talismani, 727. |

tinayrei, 727.

valens, 727. |

Geograpsus, 704. |

crintpes, 705. |

gray, 705.

Gerbillus

burtoni, 792.

gerbillus, 792.

mackilligini. "788.

pygargus, T91, 792.

pyramidum, 791.

— tarabuli, 791.

tarabuli, 791, 792.

Gerrhosaurus

flaviqularis, 590, 594.

validus, 590, 594.

Glaniolestes

ornatus, 944,

Glauconia

scutifrons, 595.

Gobius, 611.

Grayia

cesar, 944.

Jasciata, 951, 952. |

fureata, 944, 946, 947. |

grardi, 944. |

lubrica, 944. |

ornata, 944, 945, 946,

947.

silurophaga, 948, 951.

Grayia

smythiz, 944, 945, 948,

949, 950, 951.

tholloni, 944, 951.

triangularis, 944, 945,

948.

Gymnarchus, 656, 660.

niloticus, 621, 622.

Gymnotus, 656.

electricus, 627.

Gyrosmilia

interrupta, 9195.

Halicheeris

grypus, 798.

Haplochilus

celebensis, 769.

Hatteria, 922.

Helostoma, 769.

oligacanthum, 773.

temminckit, (73.

Hemirbamphus, 634,

635, 656.

Heterocyathus

equicostatus, 898, 912,

913

oblongatus, 898.

parasiticus, 898.

philippinensis, 898.

pulchellus, 898.

Heteronotus

triangularis, 948.

Heteropsammia

michelint, 916.

Hippoeglossus, 612, 648,

649, 651, 652, 657,

659,

vulgaris, 646, 647.

Hippotragus

niger, 739.

Homopholis

wahlbergu, 590, 592.

Hyastenus

andrewsi, 705, 711, 713.

brockit, ‘712.

uncifer, 705, 712. 713.

Hydrobia, 758.

Hydrocheerus

capybara, 740.

Hyleocarcinus

natalis, 710.

Hylocichla

guttata pallasi, 884.

mustelina, 884.

Hyrax

burtont. 797.

rupficeps, 797.

Ichnotropis

longipes, 594.

Tsoodon, 845.

obesulus, 8035.

Jaculus

gordoni, 796.

jaculus, 796.

— gordoni, 796.

Labeo, 656.

zoneus, 623.

Labrus

opercularis, TTA.

trichopterus, 785.

Lagochilasearis, 743.

minor, 742.

Lagorchestes

hirsutus, 803, 818, 819,

820.

— bernieri, 803, $19,

820.

— dorree, 803, 820.

Lagostrophus

Jasciatus,

$18.

803, 817,

— albipilis, 803, 817, |

818.

Lagothrix

humboldti, 948.

Latris, 648, 657.

ciliaris, 639.

Leionotus

schlegelt, 948.

Lepidogaster, 612.

Leptodira

hotambeia, 596.

Leptopsammia

michelini, 906.

stokesiana, 903.

Lepus, 696.

imnesi, 788, 796.

Liolophus

planissimus, TOD.

Liomera

longimana, 707.

sodalis, 707.

Lioxanthodes, gen. nov.,

704, 706.

alcocki, TOA,

713.

Littorima

litorea, 751, 758, 761.

rudis, T51, 761.

Lobopsammia

mannt, 907.

rohusta, 908, 909.

Lopbius, 657, 659.

piscatorius, 611, 659.

Lophozozymus

dodone, 704.

707,

INDEX.

Lophyris

albus, 762.

Luciocephalus, 768.

Lutianus

scandens, 771,

testudo, 771.

Lycophidium

capense, D95.

Lycosuchus

vanderrieti, 679.

Lygodactylus

capensis, 592.

Lygosoma

sundevalli, 59A.

Lysmata

seticaudata, 706.

Mabuia

quingueteniata,

594.

striata, 590, 594.

varia, 590, 594.

Macrophis

ornatus, 944.

Macropodus, 769.

cupanus, 7795.

ocellaius, 774, 775.

pugnax, 779.

venustus, T74.

viridiauratus, 774.

Macropus

brachyurus, 803, 813,

814, 826, 845.

eugenit, 803, 812, 813,

815.

giganteus, 803,

806, 809, 845.

— melanops, 807.

irma, 803, 809, 811.

590,

805,

robustus cervinus, 803, |

807, 808.

— erubescens, 803, 807,

809. -

rufus, 803, 805, 807,

810.

Macrorhinus

anaustirostris, 602, 606.

ansoni, 601.

byroni, 601.

crosetensis, 606.

falclandicus, 601. 606.

kergquelensis, 601, 606.

Zeoninus, 600, 606.

— crosetensis, 606.

— falclandica,

603, 606.

=- macquariensis, 603,

606.

601,

— typicus, 601, 603,

606.

XX1X

Macrorhinus

patagonica, 600.

peronii, 601,

proboscidea, 601.

Macroscelides, 680,

682.

Mactra

subtruncata, 761.

Madrepora

Fungites, 901.

Malapterurus, 656.

electricus, 625, 626.

Manis, 682.

gigantea, 700.

Manucodia

atra, 741.

Meleagris

ocellata, 740.

Melia

tessellata, 705.

Mellivora

cottoni, 890, 891.

indica, 890, 891.

ratel, 889, 890,

891.

Meriones

crassus, 793.

— sellysti, 793.

Merluccius, 639, 646,

656, 658, 660,

661.

vulgaris, 617.

ded

Micracanthus, 778.

Microglossus

aterrimus, T41.

Misgurnus

Jfossilis, 623.

Movopterus

javanensis, 769.

Mormyrus, 656, 659.

sp., 621.

Motella, 612, 656, 659,

660.

tricirrata, 616.

Mugil, 656, 659.

chelo, 635.

Mullus, 648, 645,

652, 657, 663.

barbatus, 642.

Murena, 656.

tigrina, 628.

zebra, 628.

Murex

erinaceus, TO&.

Mus

alexandrinus, 793.

cuhirinus. 7995.

gentilis, 794.

jaculus, 796.

musculus, 794, 795.

— gentilis, T94.

651,

XXX

Mus

musculus orientalis,7 94.

norvegicus, 794,

orientalis, 794.

rattus, 793.

— alexandrinus, 794.

— tectorwin, 794.

tectorum, 793.

Mussa

cristata, 915.

distans, 915.

Mustela

africana, 791.

Mya

arctica, 749.

arenaria, 745-750,

753, 754, 755,

758, 759, 760, 761,

762, 765, 766, 767.

truncata, 749, 750,

754, 755, 756, 758,

761.

— ovata, 755.

— uddevallensis, 752,

756.

Mycetes, 632, 933.

sericulus, 943.

Myrmecobius

fasciatus, 804, 845,

846.

Myrmecophaga, 683,

756,

684, 689, 692, 693, |

695, 697, 738.

Jubata, 684, 685, 686,

687, 690, 691, 740.

Mytilus

edulis, 701.

Naia

have, 596, 597.

— annulifer a, O97.

nigricollis, 597.

Neopleustes, 851, 852.

brevicornis, 852.

Notoryctes

typhlops, 804, 846.

Nueras

tessellata, 594.

Nucula

delphinodonta, 762.

nucleus, 761.

Nycteris

thebaica, 789.

Nyctinomus

cestonii, 789.

teniotis, 789.

Nymphicus

uveensis, B84.

Ocypoda

ceratophthalma, 705.

INDEX,

Odobzenus

rosmarus, 730-738,

798.

Oligorus, 770.

Oncinopus

aranea, 705.

Onychogale

lunata, 803, 815, 816.

Ophibolus

getulus, 739.

Ophiocephalus, 639, 656,

658, 659, 660, 661.

marulius, 636, 637.

striatus, 768.

Orchestia

darwinii, 849.

deshayesit, 849, 876.

gammarellus, 849.

Orestias, 633, 656, 659,

660, 661.

lesueurt, 632.

Ornithorhynchus, 695,

646.

Orycteropus, 680, 682.

683, 702, 703

afer, 683.

capensis, 598, 700,

701.

Oryx

algazel, 741.

Osmerus, 656.

eperlanus, 620.

Osphromenus, 769, 773,

782.

deissneri, 775.

gourami, 774.

malayanus, 766.

microlepis, 784.

nobilis, 777.

notatus. 774.

olfax, 7 iri

striatus, 777.

trichopterus, 783.

— cantoris, 784.

— koelreuteri, 784.

— leerti, 783.

vittatus, 776.

Ostinops

viridis, 739.

Ostrea

edulis, 749,

Otaria, 736,

Ototy lomys

fumeus, 670.

guatemale, 670.

phyllotis, 670.

737, 38

Pachycheles

sculptus, 706,

Pachydactylus

affinis, 590, 593.

Pachydactylus

bibronii, 590, 593.

Pagellus, 648, 657, 659.

centronotus, 643, 645.

Palzeimon

lar, 704, 706.

Palapteryx, 944.

Panchax

pictum, 781.

Panulirus

longipes, 706.

penicillatus, 706.

versicolor, 706.

Papilio

elytia, 881, 882.

— panope, 881, 883.

onpape, 881.

panope, 881, 882.

papone, 881.

Paracyathus

cavatus, 913.

crassus, 913.

Paradisea

apoda, 741.

Param phithoé

brevicornis, 851, 852.

exrigua, & 851.

glaber, 851

glabra, 851.

gracilis, 851, 852.

megacheir, 857.

pulchella, 852.

Parapleustes. 855.

gracilis, 851, 85

latipes, 856.

megacheir, 858.

Parasesarma, 79.

Parastrea

radiata, 915.

Parathoé

rotundata, 713.

Parophiocephalus,

778.

unimaculatus, 779.

Parosphromenus, 769,

774.

deissnert,

Pauxis

galeata, 740.

Pelia, 712.

Pelocarcinus

hume?, 710.

Pelophilus, 918.

Peraweles

bougainville’, 203, 833,

835.

— myosuros, 803, 833,

835,

Perea, 643, 657, 659

fluviatilis, 639.

scandens, 771,

2, 878.

775.

Perinea

tumida, 70), 713.

Petrogale

lateralis, 803, 813,

815.

— hacketti, 803, 813,

814, 815.

Petrolisthes

coccineus, 706.

dentatus, 706.

Phascogale

apicalis, 804, 840,

blight, 804, 840, 842.

calura, 803, 839, 840.

Havipes leucogaster,

803, 838, 839.

penicillata, 804, 839,

841.

Phascolomys

sp., 803.

Phoea, 736, 737.

ansoni, 601.

byroni, 601.

elephantina, 601.

proboscidea, 601.

vitulina, 732.

Phocena

communis, 732.

Pholas

candida, 758.

Phrynobatrachus

natalensis, 592.

Phrynomantis

bifasciata, 591.

Phyllomedusa

hypochondrialis, 893,

895. :

Jheringit, 893, 896.

reinwardtit, 897.

sawvagit, 893, 896, 897.

Phymodius

sculptus, 705.

Pimelodus, 628, 656.

sebe, 626.

Pipistrellus

kuhhi, 789.

rueppellit, 789.

Pithecia

albinasa, 928, 929, 936,

937, 940.

monachus. 741, 928,

929, 930, 931, 939, |

936, 940, 941, 942,

943.

pithecia, 928-943.

satanas, 929, 936.

Pithecophaga

Jefferyi, 741.

Pituophis

sayt, 739.

INDEX.

Platysaurus

guttatus, 590, 593.

Pleuronectes. 612,

652, 657, 659.

platessa, 648.

Pleustes, 851.

Polyacanthus, 769.

chinensis, (74.

deissnert, 775.

einthoventt, 772.

Sasciatus, 786.

hasseltii, 772.

hel frichii, 772.

kuhlit, 772.

opercularis, 77A.

paludosus, 774.

signatus, 772, 787.

Polypedates, 897.

Potorous

gilberti, 803, 824, 825,

826, 845.

platyops, 803, 824.

Procavia, 682.

arborea, 831.

burtoni, 788, 797, 798.

ruficeps, 797, 798.

syriaca, 798.

Proteles

cristatus, 739.

Psammomys

obesus, 793.

Psammophis

sibilans, 596.

subteniatus, 596.

Pseudaspis

cana, 595.

Pseudochirus, 845.

occidentalis, 805,

829.

Pteropus

egyptiacus, 788.

Ptychognathus

pusillus, 704, 705.

Purpura

lapillus, 758, 761.

Putorius

africana, 791.

Pycnonotus

nigricans, d98.

Python

molurus, 918.

regius, 918.

sebe, 595, 918.

651,

Rana

adspersa, 591.

angolensis, 591.

delalandii, 591.

mascareniensis, 592.

temporaria, 896.

XXX1

Rhachotropis

helleri, 849, 850, 858,

868, 869, 875.

rostrata, 864, 868, 869,

873, 879.

Rhinolophus

acrotis brachygnathus,

788.

Rhinopoma

eystops, 789.

microphyllum, 789.

Rhodopsammia

socialis, 902.

Rhombus, 612, 652, 657.

levis, 649.

maximus, 649, 651.

Rissoa

ulve, 761.

Rousettus

egyptiacus, 788.

Rupicapra

tragus, 739.

Salmo, 656.

salar, 618, 619.

Saxteava

rugosa

752.

Scalaria

grantandica, 762.

Seatophaga, 887.

Schizophrys

aspera, 705.

Scleropages, 770.

Scomber, 697, 659, 663.

scombrus, 645.

Scopelus, 633, 656, 663.

crocodilus, 629, 630.

Scopus

wnbretta, 885, 886.

Scrobicularia

ptperata,

761.

Sergestes, 720.

Sesarma

andersoni, 709.

barbimana, 709.

batavica, 709.

edamensis, 709.

minuta, 709.

murrayt, 705, 708, 713.

vestita, 709.

Sialia

stalis, 884.

Silurus, 656.

glanis, 626.

Simocephalus

capensis, 595.

Sminthopsis

crassicaudata, 804, 826,

844, 845

uddevallensis,

708, 759,

XXX11

Sminthopsis

murina, 804, 842, 843, |

845,

Solea. 612, 651, 652, 657,

659, 660.

ampar, OLL.

vulgaris, 649.

Solen

siliqua, 758.

Sorex

olivieri, 790.

religiosa, 790.

Sotalia

borneénsis, 883.

sinensis, 885.

Sparus

scandens, 771.

testudineus, 771.

Speotyto

hypoyea, TA.

Spheerichthys, 769.

osphromenoides, 776.

Sphenodon, 666.

Sphyrena, 656, 659,

660.

cameroonti, 638.

Spirobranchus, 770.

Spizaétus

bellicosus, 598.

Stenopus

hispidus, 706.

Stephanoseris

rousseaui, 898.

Sterna

cantiaca, 800.

dougalli, 801.

fluviatilis, B00.

macrura, 802.

minuta, 801.

Sternothxrus

magricans, 592.

Sus, 682.

Symbranchus

bengalensis, 769.

Symphalangus

syndactylus, TAO.

Sympleustes, 852, 856.

grandimanus, 849, 850,

857, 878, 879.

latipes, 858, 856, £60.

megacheir, 857.

Tachyglossus

aculeatus ineptus, 804,

847, 848.

Tachyphonus

caper, 598.

Tamandua, 684, 685, 686,

687, 688, 689, 692,

694, 696, 698, 699, |

700.

INDEX.

Tamandua

tetradactyla, 683, 690,

691. 693, 697.

Tanaécia, 880.

Tantalus

loculator, 740.

Tapes

pullastra, 761.

Tapirus

terrestris, 798.

Tarbophis

semiannulatus, 596.

Tarsipes

spensere, 803, 826.

Tatusia

peba, 697.

Taurotragus ,

oryx, d98.

Tellina

balthica, 758,

761.

— solidula, 761.

solidula, 758.

Tephrocorys

cinerea, 598.

Testudo

pardalis, 592.

Tetralia

glaberrima, 705.

Tetrodon

timmaculatus, 612.

nigropunctatus, 612.

papua, 612.

pardalis, 612.

Thalacomys

759,

lagotis, 803, 825, 831,

832.

Thalamita

sp., 705,

Thalassocaris

lucida, 706.

Thelotornis

kirtlandii, 596.

Thrasaétus

harpyia, 740.

Tiliqua, 702.

Tinea, 656.

vulgaris, 622, 625.

Toxasearis

marginata, (42, 743.

Trachinus, 655, 657, 659,

660.

viperda, 654.

Trachyphylha

amarantum, 915,

| Trapezia

cymodoce, 705,

digitalis, TOD,

Serruginea, 705.

— areolata, 705.

rufopunctata, TOS,

Trichogaster, 769.

chuna, 785, 787.

Sasciatus, 785, 786.

labiosus, 785, 786.

laius, '785, 786.

sota, 785, 786, 787.

wnicolor, 786.

Trichopodus, 769, 782.

bejeus, 785.

colisa, 785.

cotra, 785.

lalius, 786.

leert, 783, 787.

microlepis, 783, 784.

parvipinnis, 785.

pectoralis, 783, 784,

787.

sota, 786.

trichopterus, 783, 784.

Trichopsis, 776.

striatus, 777.

Trichopus, 782.

leerti, ‘783.

parvipinnis, 784.

trichopterus, 783.

Trichosurus, 845.

vulpecula, 803,

828, 829, 830.

Trigla, 611, 653, 654, 657,

659.

hirundo, 652.

Trimerorhinus

triteniatus, 596.

Trochus

cinerarius, 758, 761.

cinereus, 749.

Trophon

truncata, 761.

Tropidonotus

levissimus, 944.

olivaceus, 944.

Trypanosoma

lewisi, 742.

Turbo

littoralis, 749.

Turritella

edule, 749.

terebra, 749.

Tylocarcinus

gracilis, 70d, 712.

styx, 712, 713.

Tylomys, 670.

818,

_ Typhlops

delalandit, 595.

mucruso, OOD.

— varius, 595.

Umbra, 611.

Ursus

Jormosanus, 610.

Ursus

malayanus, 610.

tibetanus, 607, 609.

torquatus, 607, 608, |

609, 610.

— formosanus, 608,

610. °

— macneilli, 608, 609, |

610.

— typicus, 610.

Varanus, 922.

albigqularis, 595.

INDEX.

Varanus

niloticus, 593.

Venus

exoleta, 749.

islandica, 749.

litterata, 749.

Vespertilio

kuhlit, 789.

microphyllum, 789.

rueppellii, 789.

Vulpes

vulpes egyptiaca,

ioe

XXXIll

Xantho

bidentatus, T04.

Xanthodes

lamarckii, 705.

notatus, 705.

| Zeus, 639, 651, 657, 658,

659, 660, 661.

Faber, 645, 646.

Zonurus

cordylus, 593.

| Zozymus

eneus, TO4.

Printed by Taynor and Francrs, Red Lion Court, Fleet Street.

(ins hi by 1a aie

. + As

| eS natant

; al vt Sind eos vite.

unl Malle hate

? - ” ay id aepatne

Oat) ¥ ‘ ; at Ay ey nae

0 fd wok eu! at reba ' es :

. q a y 4 : fide i a ‘ je ‘ woe plan f f we ork!

(oR < Ay “ ‘ we bt

: ; . neha aed ei etage: Sawe hb

.- i Wie ' : Ley j i 4/

“ ath m3 Z - v

he,

rr atl se

iwi! ? a i Diplhe a dial fi ih oma on ia

Hl oe hana

No. 71.

ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON®*

May 11th, 1909.

Prof. E. A. Mincutn, M.A., Vice-President,

in the Chair.

Mr. R. H. Burne, M.A., F.Z.8., exhibited a series of specimens,

from the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons, of adaptive

structures for the respiration of air in some Aquatic Invertebrates

and tropical Freshwater Fishes.

Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.LS., F.Z.8., the Superintendent of the

Gardens, exhibited the skin of a monkey representing a new

subspecies of Cercopithecus, brought by Capt. Boyd Alexander,

F.Z.8., from Lake Chad. This he proposed to name C. tantalus

alexandri, separating it from the typical C. tantalus from Nigeria

because the whiskers were very long and almost wholly white,

a character in which it approached the Abyssinian species

C. ethiops.

My. W. F. H. Rosenpere, F.Z.8., exhibited a Rook in which

the upper mandible had overgrown the lower to a remarkable

extent. This abnormality was evidently caused by an injury to

the tip of the lower mandible having deprived the upper one of

the opposing surface necessary to check its growth.

Prof. Wintt1Am RipeEway, M.A., read the following papers,

communicated by the Secretary, entitled :—(a) “‘On hitherto

unrecorded Specimens of Hguus quagga” ; (b) “ Differentiation of

the Three Species of Zebras” ; (c) “ On a Portion of a Fossil Jaw

of one of the Equide”; and illustrated his remarks with a series

of lantern-slides.

* This Abstract is published by the Society at 3 Hanover Square, London,

W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will

be issued, free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications,

along with the ‘ Proceedings’; but it may be obtained on the day of publication

at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Stix

Shillings per annum, payable in advance.

Mr. R. Lypexker described a female Deer skin obtained by

Captain Malcolm McNeil from Sze-chuen, which he regarded as

representing a race of the Hangul distinguished by its very pale

colouring ; for this the name Cervus cashmirianus macneili was

suggested.

Mr. E. C. Couns, F.Z.S., presented a paper on “The Batra-

chians and Reptiles of Matabeleland,” based upon specimens in

the Rhodesia Museum, Bulawayo.

The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will

be held on Tuesday, the 25th May, 1909, at half-past Hight

o'clock p.m., when the following communications will be

made :—

1. Dr. J. G. DE Man.—Description of a new Species of the

Genus Alpheus Fabr. from the Bay of Batavia.

2. R. LypexKer.—On the Skull of a Black Bear from Eastern

Tibet, with a Note on the Formosan Bear.

3. R. H. Burne, M.A., F.Z.8.—The Anatomy of the Ol-

factory Organ of Teleostean Fishes.

The following communication has been received :——

G. C. SHortriper.—An Account of the Geographical Dis-

tribution of the Marsupials and Monotremes of South-west

Australia, having special reference to the specimens collected

during the Balston Expedition of 1904-1907.

Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings of the

ZOOLOGICAL SociEry oF Lonpon should be addressed to

P. CHALMERS MITCHELL,

Secretary.

3 HANover Square, Lonpon, W.

May \8th, 1909.

No. 72.

ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON

May 25th, 1909.

Dr. S. F. Harmer, M.A., F.R.S., Vice-President

in the Chair.

The Secretary read a Report on the additions that had been

made to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of April

1909.

Mr. J. L. Bonnors, M.A., F.L.S., F.Z.S., exhibited the skins

of an example of a tetragen hybrid Duck of the F, generation,

which he had bred in his aviaries, and pointed out that the

characters of this bird were a striking confirmation of the truth

of Mendel’s Law. Mr. Bonhote also exhibited a pair of pentagen

hybrids of the F,, generation, which were interesting as showing

to what extent cross-breeding could be carried among certain

species, the hybrids proving fertile to at least the fourth

generation since the last cross with a pure species.

Mr. L. Harpine Cox, F.Z.8., exhibited a living specimen of

the Amblystome or transformed Axolotl, and drew attention to

the following distinguishing points of the terrestrial batrachian,

viz.: alteration in dentition, possession of lungs and eyelids,

absence of gills and crest, and variation in colour.

Mr. R. Lypexxer exhibited the photograph of a young Stag

from Sikhim, now living in Nepal, which he believed to represent

* This Abstract is published by the Society at 3 Hanover Square, London,

W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will

be issued, free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications,

along with the ‘ Proceedings’; but it may be obtained on the day of publication

at the price of Stxpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Six

Shillings per annum, payable in advance.

the Shou (Cervus affinis), and, if so, to be the first picture of that

Deer which had been submitted to the Society since Brian

Hodgson’s time.

Mr. R. Lypexxsr described the skull-characters of three local

forms of the Southern Sea-EHlephant (Jacrorhinus leoninus). Of

these the Falkland race, which might be inseparable from the

Juan Fernandez W. 1. typicus, had been named JW, tl. falclandicus,

and is characterised by the length and flatness of the palate. In

the Crozet race, for which the name WM. l. crosetensis was sug-

gested, on the other hand, the palate is sharp, wide, and concave.

The Macquarie race, proposed to be called M. 1. macquariensis, is

somewhat intermediate in skull-characters between the other two.

Mr. R. Lyprexxker also directed attention to the skin and skull

of a Black Bear obtained by Captain Malcolm McNeil in Hastern

Tibet. The skull indicated a race of the Himalayan Black Bear

characterised by the small size of the cheek-teeth ; and for this

race the name Ursus torquatus macneilt was proposed.

Mr. R. H. Burne, M.A., F.Z.8., read a paper on “The

Anatomy of the Olfactory Organ of Teleostean Fishes,” in which

the chief structural variations were described in some fifty

genera, mostly of common British species, illustrating the

anatomical facts he presented by a series of coloured diagrams.

Dr. J. G. pe MAN presented a paper, communicated by Mr. R.

I. Pococx, F.Z.8., entitled ‘‘ Description of a New Species of the

Decapod Crustacean Genus Alpheus Fabr. from the Bay of

Batavia.”

The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business (closing

the Session 1908-09) will be held on Tuesday, the 15th June,

1909, at half-past Eight o’clock p.m., when the following com-

munications will be made :—

Demonstration, with lantern-slides, of a Theory of Atoll

Formation, by Dr. F. Woop Jonzs, E.Z.S.

PAPERS.

1. F. EH. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.8.—On some Points in

the Structure of the Lesser Anteater (Zamandua tetradactyla),

with a note on the Cerebral Arteries of Myrmecophaga.

2. Dr, W. T. Carman, F.4.8.—On Decapod Crustacea from

Christmas Island, collected by Dr. C. W. Andrews, F.R.S., F.Z.8.

3. P. Caatmers Mirvcnurn, M.A., D.Se, LLD., F.R.S..

Sec.Z.S.—Notes on a Young Specimen of the Walrus lately

living in the Society’s Gardens.

4. R. H. Borns, M.A., F.Z.S.—Notes on the Viscera of a

Walrus (T'richechus rosmarus).

The following communication has been received :—

G. C. SHortriper.—An Account of the Geographical Dis-

tribution of the Marsupials and Monotremes of South-west

Australia, having special reference to the specimens collected

during the Balston Expedition of 1904-1907.

Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings of the

AOOLOGICAL SOCIETY oF LonDoN should be addressed to

P. CHALMERS MITCHELL,

Secretary.

3 Hanover Square, Lonpon, W.

June 1st, 1909.

No. 78.

ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

AQOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON,

June 15th, 1909.

Dr. A. Smrrh Woopwarb, F.R.S., Vice-President,

in the Chair.

Mr. H. W. Unruank, F.Z.8., exhibited a skull of Sphenodon

with two bones on each side in the nasal region, and made the

following remarks :—“ In place of the usual single nasal on each

side there appear to be two bones, one near the median line, the

other more external, the line of division running from before

backwards. On sawing across the middle of the nasal region the

anterior part of the median pair of bones came away with the

premaxille and vomers, leaving the external bones in sitw.

These show bevelled inner edges where they were slightly over-

lapped by the median bones, so that the surface-marking is that

of a suture in the middle of what is usually a single nasal bone.”

The Secretary exhibited the ears of an Hlephant shot by

Mr, Sutton Timmis, F.Z.S., on the Guaso Ngishu Plateau, east

of Mt. Elgon, B. HE. Africa.

Mr. J. C. Wurrn, C.1.H., C.M.Z.S., exhibited photographs of

a young living specimen of a Takin (Budorcas taaicolor whitet)

from Ghassa, N.W. Bhutan. The photographs had been taken

on board ship at Calcutta and the animal was to be presented to

the Society. The Secretary added that he had ascertained that

the Takin had reached Genoa in good condition and might be

expected at the Gardens about June 2lst. It was the first

Takin that had reached Europe alive.

* This Abstract is published by the Society at 3 Hanover Square, London,

W.., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will

be issued, free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subseribe to the Publications,

along with the ‘ Proceedings’; butit may be obtained on the day of publication

at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Six

Shillings per annum, payable in advance.

On behalf of Mr. R. Lypexxer, the Secrurary exhibited photo-

graphs of a spotted bull Tsaine or Bantin, shot by Mr. Arthur

Porter in the great forest of Siam in November 1908, which

Mr. Lydekker proposed provisionally to name Bos sondaicus

porterr.

Mr, Ouprietp Tuomas, F.R.S., F.Z.S., exhibited specimens of

a new Rat which had been obtained by “Mr. G. C. Shortridge

during the Society’s collecting expedition to Central America.

It was distinguished as follows :—

OTOTYLOMYS GUATEMALA, sp. n.

Considerably larger than O. phyllotis, greyer in colour, and

with the feet parti-coloured, as in some species of J'ylomys.

Head and body 170 mm.; tail 161; hind foot 28; skull 40°7.

Hab. Tucuru, Guatemala. Type. B. M. No. 9.6.11.13.

Dr. F. Woop Jonzs, F.Z.5., gave a demonstration, illustrated

by specimens, models, ‘and laiere- slides, of the method of for-

mation of coral islands and reets.

The purpose of the demonstration was to show that the

theories of subsidence put forward by Darwin, and of solution

put forward by Sir John Murray, were both untenable in the

light of actual facts to be observed on coral islands.

A fresh hypothesis—-that sedimentation is the most important

factor—was substituted for these theories; and it was pointed

out that the atoll was in reality a structure analogous to the

Porites colonies the upper surfaces of which were made basin-

shaped by sediment obliterating the zooids of their central area.

That the deposition of sediment below the “ limiting line of

sedimentation ” probably accounted for the bathymetrical limit

of the reef-building corals, and for the formation of sedimentation

banks up to that line.

That in the making of the atoll from the basin-shaped reef the

winds and the waves played the greatest part, and that atoll

lagoons tended to shoal owing to the deposition of sediment

within them.

That Le Conte in 1856 had said that barrier reefs stood out

from shore because they were limited on one side by the depth

and on the other by the muddiness of the water, and that his

pronouncement accorded with every known fact.

That the question of the formation of coral structures was a

zoological one and was to be solved by a study of the living zooid

and that the chief agent inimical to the growth of the zooid was

the deposition of sediment.

Dr. R. Broom, C.M.Z.8., exhibited an unborn foetus of Chryso-

chloris hottentota and two young specimens of C. asiatica, one

probably only a couple of days old, and made some remarks on

the habits and life-history of the Cape Moles. Dr. Broom also

exhibited the skulls of two South African fossil reptiles, Lyco-

suchus vanderrieti and Bawria cynops, the former being the most

perfect Therocephalian skull yet discovered.

Dr. R. Broom, C.M.Z.8., presented a paper “On the Organ of

Jacobson in Orycteropus.”

Orycteropus has a long narrow organ of Jacobson which opens

into the naso-palatine canal. The arrangement of the cartilages

is quite different from the type found in the higher Hutheria,

and there is also a marked difference from the arrangement in

Dasypus. The general structure comes nearest to that of the

Marsupials, though there are a number of striking differences.

Mr. F. E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S., communicated a

paper entitled “On some Points i in the Structure of the Lesser

Anteater (Tamandua tetradactyla), with a note on the Cerebral

Arteries of Myrmecophaga.”

Dr. W. T. Cauman, F.Z.8., presented a paper ‘“‘On Decapod

Crustacea from Christmas Island, collected by Dr. C. W. Andrews,

FE.RB.S., F.Z.8.”

A paper was received from Mr. H. L. Hawkins, communicated

by Dr. F. A. Batuzr, F.R.S., F.Z.8., on “An Abnormal Indi-

vidual of the Echinoid Amblypneustes.”

Mr. Stantry Kemp, B.A., presented a paper, communicated by

Dr. W. T. Catan, F. VA Sic entitled “The Decapods of the Genus

Gennadas collected by H. MLS. § Challenger.’ ”

The Secretary, Dr. P. Coatmers Mironeny, F.R.S., presented

a paper entitled ‘“‘ Notes on a Young Walrus (Odobemus rosmarus)

recently living in the Societys Gardens,” and exhibited a sketch

made from the living animal by Mr. Carton Moore-Park, F.Z.S.

A paper was received from Mr. R. H. Burns, M.A., F.Z. Sen

entitled ‘“‘ Notes on the Viscera of a Walrus (Odobcenus r Ende us).”

This Meeting closes the Session 1908-1909. The next Session

(1909-1910) will begin in November next.

The following Papers have been received :—

1. G. C. Saorrripce.—An Account of the Geographical Dis-

tribution of the Marsupials and Monotremes of South-west

Australia, having special reference to the specimens collected

during the Balston Expedition of 1904-1907.

2. Sir Henry H. Howorta, K.C.1.E., D.C.L., F.B.S., F.Z.8.—

Some living Shells, their Recent History, and the light they

throw on the latest Physical Changes in the Harth.

Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings of the

ZOOLOGICAL Society oF Lonvon should be addressed to

P. CHALMERS MITCHELL,

Secretary.

3 Hanover Square, Lonpon, W.

June 22nd, 1909.

No. 74.

ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.*

November 9th, 1909.

S. F. Harmer, Esq., M.A., F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair.

The SECRETARY read a report on the additions that had been

made to the Society’s Menagerie during the months of May, June,

July, August, and September, 1909.

The Secretary exhibited the frontlet of a Mishmi Takin

(Budorcas taxicolor) obtained in 1903 in N.E. Saikwa, Upper

Assam, and lent by Mr. J. D. Berrington, of Abergavenny.

The Secretary also exhibited a carved figure of a Takin, made

by a Khamti who had shot the animal. The figure had been

presented to the Society by Mrs. Brian Hodgson, and was referred

to in the late Mr. B. H. Hodgson’s original description of the

Takin.

Prof. EK. A. Mrncuin, V.P.Z.S., exhibited two specimens of a

Cysticercus-stage of a Tapeworm found by him in the body-

cavity of the Rat-Flea (Ceratophyllus fasciatus).

Dr. R. T. Leterme, F.Z.8., exhibited specimens of some rare

Helminths of Man, including a new Nematode Worm found in

abscesses in natives of Trinidad, viz. :—

LAGOCHILASCARIS MINOR, Sp. n.

An Ascarid with three jaws split along their inner surfaces and

separated from body by a deep furrow. Small cuticular labia

intermedia. Narrow keel of cuticle projecting from body in

* This Abstract is published by the Society at 3 Hanover Square, London,

W.., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will

be issued, free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications

along with the ‘ Proceedings’ ; but it may be obtained on the day of publication

at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Six

Shillings per annum, payable in advance.

region of lateral bands. (Esophagus simple. Male 9 mm. in

length, witn over 24 pairs of preanal and with 5 pairs of post-

anal papille. Spicules solid at tips, sickle-shaped, measuring

0°35 mm. and 0-4 mm. in length. Female 15 mm. long. Vulva

6 mm. from mouth. Ova round, with thick and pitted shell_—

Types in London School of Tropical Medicine.

Dr. A. Smirg Woopwaprp, F.R.S., V.P.Z.S., on behalf of Mr. R.

LypDEKKER, exhibited an old coloured print of the chief room of

Bullock’s Museum (1809-1819) in the building subsequently

known as the Egyptian Hall.

A paper was read by Sir Henry H. Howorrs, D.C.L., F.B.S.,

Z.5.,on “Some Living Shells, their Recent Biology, and the

Light they throw on the Latest Physical Changes in the Harth._—

i. Mya ArnenariaA.” He stated that the Wya arenaria or Clam is

widely distributed in the North Boreal, European, and North-

American seas, and claimed to prove that it is a recent migrant

into the former, and has probably not been there more than 300

years. The notion that it is an Arctic shell is a mistake. Inthe

Arctic lists Mya truncata var. oblonga has been mistaken for it,

and the glacial character of the beds in which it has occurred,

which has been postulated from its occurrence there, has ac-

cordingly been a wrong inference. Brégger has argued that it

migrated from America. It was abundant in the Crag seas, and

occurs in derivative fragments in the Drift-beds, but it does not

occur in the estuarine deposits or raised beaches, proving that

after the period of the Crag it became extinct in Hurope and has

since been re-introduced. He regarded the cause of its extinction

as amystery, since the group of estuarine shells with which it is

found has lived continuously in Hurope since later Crag times.

Mr. C. Tare Recan, M.A., F.Z.S8., read a paper on the Asiatic

Fishes of the family Anabantide (including the Osphromenide).

He remarked that the order Labyrinthici was an isolated and

terminal group, probably derived from a Cyprinodontoid stock,

and that it comprised two suborders, Ophiocephaloidei and

Anabantoidei, the latter including the families Anabantide and

Luciocephalide. The Indian element in the freshwater fish-

fauna of Celebes, including two Labyrinthic fishes, was shown to

consist of (1) species which had travelled by sea, and (2) species

which had probably been introduced by man. The great im-

portance of Wallace’s Line for freshwater fishes was thus vindi-

cated. The Asiatic genera and species of Anabantide were

described, including several new forms of Betta and Trichopodus,

and the Asiatic genus Anabas was shown to differ markedly from

the African Ctenopoma and Spirobranchus.

Mr. J. Lewis Bonnorr, M.A., F.Z.8. communicated a paper

on some Mammals brought home from Egypt. The paper dealt

with about twenty-eight species, chiefly small rodents, and the

main points of interest were the recognition of Procavia burtoni,

the Egyptian Hyrax, as a valid species, the rediscovery of Acomys

russatus, hitherto only known from Palestine, and the description

of a small species of Dipodillus; the last two species having been

taken on the Mokattam Hills within three miles of Cairo.

The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will

be held on Tuesday, the 23rd November, 1909, at half-past Hight

o'clock p.m., when the following communications will be

mace :—

Exhibition of Lantern-slides illustrating the Haunts and

Habits of Our British Nesting Terns. By WititaAm BICKERTON,

F.Z.8., M.B.0.U.

1. G. C. SHoRTRIDGE.

An Account of the Geographical Distribution of the

Marsupials and Monctremes of South-west Australia, having

special reference to the specimens collected during the

Balston Expedition of 1904-1907.

2. Mrs. KE. W. Sexton.

Notes on some Amphipoda from the North Side of the

Bay of Biscay: Families PLEUstiD# and Husirnip#.

3. R. LypEKEKER.

Note on Sotalia borneénsis.

4. Col. J. M. Fawcett.

(cz) On two remarkable Instances of Aberration in

Nympuatin& from the Andaman Islands.

(0) Aberrations of Papilio clytia, race PANOPE.

The following communications have been received :—

(2) On change of Colour in a Specimen of Mellivora ratel

living in the Society’s Gardens.

(5) A comparative Examination of three living Specimens

of Felis ligris sondaica, with Notes on an old Javan male.

2. W. E. Acar, M.A., D.Sc.

The Nesting-habits of Phyllomedusa suuvayii.

3. Miss Ruvn M. Harrison and Miss Marcarer Poors.

(a) Marine Fauna from the Mergui Archipelago, Lower

Burma, collected by Jas. J. Simpson, M.A., B.Sc., and

R. N. Rudmose-Brown, B.Sc., University of Aberdeen:

MADREPORARIA.

(5) Marine Fauna from the Kerimba Archipelago, Por-

tuguese Hast Africa, collected by Jas. J. Simpson, M.A..,

B.Sc., and R. N. Rudmose-Brown, B.Se., University of

Aberdeen : MADREPORARIA.

(a) Some Notes upon Boa occidentalis and Boa (Pelophilus)

madagascariensis.

(6) Notes upon the Anatomy of Pithecia pithecia.

On the Ophidian genus Grayia.

6. The Hon. Pau A. METHUEN.

On a Collection of _Fresh-water Crustacea from the

Transvaal.

7. J. T. Cunnincuam, M.A., E.Z.8.

On the Marine Fishes and Invertebrates of St. Helena.

8. 8S. A. Nravu, M.A., B.Sc., M.B.O.U.

Zoological Collections from Northern Rhodesia and adjacen

Territories: LeprpoprerA RHOPALOCERA.

Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings of the

ZCoOLOGICAL Socrery or Lonpon should be addressed to

P. CHALMERS MITCHELL,

Secretary.

3 Hanover Square, Lonpon, W.

November 16th, 1909.

No. 75.

ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON*

November 23rd, 1909.

Dr. A. Surra Woopwarp, F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair.

The Minutes of the last Scientific Meeting were confirmed.

The Srcrerary read a report on the additions that had been

made to the Society's Menagerie during the month of October

1909.

The SEcRETARY read a letter from Prof. WinL1AM RIDGEWAY,

M.A., D.Sc., correcting an error which had occurred in his paper

on “The Differentiation of the Three Species of Zebras” (P. Z.S.

1909, p. 556). He had suggested that the type specimen of

Ward’s Zebra was the skin of an animal shot by Lord Delamere

near Baringo, but he was now informed by Messrs. Rowland Ward

that the specimen had been purchased in the flesh from Barnum

and Bailey’s Menagerie.

Dr. F. D. Wetcu, F.Z.8., exhibited photographs of a male

Gayal (Libos frontalis) living in the Society’s Gardens, in which

the lower halves of both fore and hind legs were almost entirely

black instead of pure white as in the normal adult.

Mr. Witi1Am Bickerton, F.Z.8., M.B.0.U., exhibited a very

remarkable series of lantern-slides illustrating the Nesting Haunts

and Habits of the five species of British Nesting Terns, of which

ne had made a special photographic study. Some of the slides

showed the fully expanded wings of the birds when alighting after

* This Abstract is published by the Society at 3 Hanover Square, London,

W., onthe Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will

pe issued, free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications,

along with the ‘Proceedings’ ; but it may be obtained on the day of publication

at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Siz

Shillings per annum, payable in adyance.

flight, and the pictures of the Roseate Terns were of special

interest, being the only series ever taken of this species within

the British Isles.

A paper was received from Mr. G. C. SHorrrincE, communi-

cated by Mr. Oupristp Tuomas, F.R.S., F.Z.8., entitled “An

Account of the Geographical Distribution of the Marsupials and

Monotremes of South-west Australia, having special reference to

the specimens collected during the Balston Expedition of 1904—

L9IOG

Dr. W. T. Catman, F.Z.S., communicated a paper by Mrs. E.

W. SEXTON, entitled ‘“‘ Notes on some Amphipoda from the North

Side of the Bay of Biscay.”

The paper contained notes on the development of the females

of certain Amphipoda, showing that structural modification con-

tinues even after sexual maturity is reached, and this may give

rise to differences of so striking a character that earlier and later

stages might easily be mistaken for distinct species. This

was illustrated by examples from the families PLeustip# and

EusiRipz.

The SECRETARY communicated a paper by Lt.-Col. J. M.

Fawcett on “ Aberrations in NympHauina from the Andaman

Islands, and of Papilio clytia from Burma.”

Mr. R. LypeKKer presented a “Note on the Cetacean Sotalia

borneénsis,” which contained a correction of his description of

this species published in the Society’s ‘ Proceedings’ for 1901

(p. 88, pl. vili.).

The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will

be held on Tuesday, the 14th December, 1909, at half-past Hight

oclock p.m. when the following communications will be

made :—

1. Dr. F. D. Wetcu, F.Z.8.

(a) On change of Colour in a Specimen of WMellivora ratel

living in the Society’s Gardens.

(6) A comparative Examination of three living Specimens

of Felis tigris sondaica, with Notes on an old Javan male.

2 Wi Hi. Acar MoA:.. D:Se.

The Nesting-habits of Phyllomedusa sauvagi.

3. Miss Rura M. Harrison and Miss Marcarer Poorer.

(a2) Marine Fauna from the Mergui Archipelago, Lower

Burma, collected by Jas. J. Simpson, M.A., B.Sc., and

R. N. Rudmose-Brown, B.Sc., University of Aberdeen :

MADREPORARIA.

(6) Marine Fauna from the Kerimba Archipelago, Por-

tuguese Hast Africa, collected by Jas. J. Simpson, M.A.,

B.Sc., and R. N. Rudmose-Brown, B.Sc., University of

Aberdeen: MADREPORARIA.

4. F. E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.8.

(@) Some Notes upon Boa occidentalis and Boa (Pelophilus)

madagascariensis.

(6) Notes upon the Anatomy of Monkeys of the Genus

Pithecia.

5. G. A. Bounencur, F.R.S., V.P.Z.S.

On the Ophidian Genus Grayia.

The following communications have been received :—

1. The Hon. Pauu A. Merauen.

On a Collection of Fresh-water Crustacea from the

Transvaal.

2. J. T. Cunnincuam, M.A., F.Z.8.

eA OSE OEY ET

On the Marine Fishes and Invericbrates of St. Helena.

3. 8S. A. Neave, M.A., B.Sc., F.Z.8.

Zoological Collections from Northern Rhodesia and adjacent

Territories: LepipopTERA RHOPALOCERA.

4. W. M. Smauiwoop.

Notes on the Hydroids and Nudibranchs of Bermuda.

5. Dr. W. T. Catan, F.Z.S.

On new or rare Crustacea of the Order Cumacea from the

Collection of the Copenhagen Museum.—Pt. II. The Families

NANNASTACIDE and DiaAsryLip”®.

Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings of the

ZOOLOGICAL Society oF Lonpon should be addressed to

P. CHALMERS MITCHELL,

Secretary.

3 HANover Square, Lonpon, W.

November 30th, 1909.

No. 78.

ABSTRACT OF THE PROCHEDINGS

OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON*

December 14th, 1909.

G. A. BouLencer, Hsq., F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair.

The Minutes of the last Scientific Meeting were confirmed.

The SecrRETARY read a report on the additions that had been

made to the Society's Menagerie during the month of November

1909.

Mrs. R. Hate Tuomas, F.Z.S8., exhibited seven skins of Hybrid

Pheasants, and remarked on the evidence they seemed to afford

of the transmission of female characters by the male.

Mr. D. Sern-Suirs, F.Z.8., the Society’s Curator of Birds,

exhibited a photograph of a nest built by a pair of Tufted Umbres

(Scopus umbretia) in the Great Flying Aviary at the Gardens.

The nest is composed of sticks, cemented together with mud, and

measures about four feet in diameter and three feet in height.

The interior consists of a single chamber nearly two feet in dia-

meter, with an entrance-hole five inches wide. No eggs have

been laid by these birds, although they have frequently paired.

Dr. H. B. Fantuam, F.Z.8., Protozoologist to the Grouse

Commission, exhibited microscopic preparations and sketches

illustrating the life-cycle of the Sporozoon Himeria tenellwi

(Coccidium avium), parasitic in the alimentary canal of Grouse.

The parasite produces a fatal coccidiosis in Grouse chicks, especially

during the first month or six weeks of their life. Schizogony and

* This Abstract is published by the Society at 3 Hanover Square, London,

W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will

be issued, free of extra charge, to ail Fellows who subscribe to the Publications,

along with the ‘ Proceedings’ ; but it may be obtained on the day of publication

at the price of Stapence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Siz

Shillings per annum, payable in advance,

sporogony occur in both the duodenum and the cecum of the

host. The ceca of Grouse chicks dying from coccidiosis are full

of spores (oécysts), which are passed out with the cecal droppings,

forming a source of infection on the moors. On the ingestion of

the spores by other Grouse, the sporozoites are liberated by the

action of the pancreatic juice. Larve of Scatophaga, found in

Grouse-droppings, swallow the Coccidian spores, voiding them

uninjured, and so aiding in the dissemination of the spores in

nature.

The coccidiosis of Grouse is transmissible directly to young

fowls and young pigeons by feeding these birds on feces of in-

fected Grouse.

Dr. C. W. Anprews, F.R.S., F.Z.S8., exhibited and made

remarks upon a photograph showing some Robber-Crabs (Birgus

lairo) climbing the trunk of the Christmas Island Sago-palm

(Arenga listert), He also made some observations on the habits

and food of these Crustaceans.

Dr. R. T. Leer, F.Z.S., exhibited the orginal specimens of

the nematode worm <Acanthocheilonema dracunculoides Cobb.,

from the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons. The

characters of the genus, of which this is the type, are found to

have been inaccurately interpreted, the posterior end of the

worm having been described as the head and the cuticular caudal

appendages regarded as ‘‘lips.” The remarkable specific charac-

ters—viz., the entire absence of male forms and the lack in the

female of vaginal opening—had also to be repudiated, for both

are to be seen in the original material. The genus, as revised,

would admit a second species, the Milaria perstans of Man.

Dr. F. D. Wetcn, F.Z.8., read two papers entitled: (a) “On

change of Colour in a Specimen of Mellivora ratel living in the

Society’s Gardens,” and (6) “A comparative Examination of

three living Specimens of felis tigris sondaica, with Notes on an

old Javan male.”

Mr. G. A. Bounencer, F.R.S., V.P.Z.S., communicated a paper

by Dr. W. HE. Acar, M.A., on “The Nesting-Habits of the Tree-

Frog, Phyllomedusa sauvagit.” This Frog makes a nest suspended

from bushes overhanging a pool, into which the tadpoles drop

when they are hatched. The nest is constructed from a number

of leaves, the lower ends of which are drawn together and held

so by a deposit of empty gelatinous egg-capsules, forming together

a thick jelly. After oviposition the nest is closed with a similar

mass of empty capsules, so that in a well made nest not a single

ege is exposed to the light and air.

Miss Rurn M. Harrison and Miss Marcarer Pooie jointly

presented two papers, communicated by Prof. G. C. Bourns,

D.Se., F.Z.8., on Madreporaria collected by Jas. J. Simpson,

M.A., B.Se., and R. N. Rudmose-Brown, B.Se., University of

Aberdeen, from the Mergui Archipelago, Lower Burma, and from

the Kerimba Archipelago, Portuguese Hast Africa.

Mr. F. E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S., Prosector to the

Society, presented two papers entitled: (a) ‘‘Some Notes upon

Boa occidentalis and Boa (Pelophilus) madagascariensis”; (b)

“‘ Notes upon the Anatomy of Monkeys of the Genus Pithecia.”

Mr. G. A. Boutencer, F.R.S., V.P.Z.8., read a paper “‘ On the

Ophidian Genus Grayia,” in which he contributed to the revision

of the genus made necessary by an increased knowledge of African

Snakes.

The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will

be held on Tuesday, the 18th January, 1910, at half-past Eight

o'clock p.m., when the following communications will be

made ;—

1_Dr WG, Pennie, F.LS. F.ZS., Pathologist to the Society

Report on Pathological Observations at the Society’s Gardens

during 1909.

2. 8. A. Nuavez, M.A., B.Sc., F.Z.S.

Zoological Collections from Northern Rhodesia and adjacent

Territories: LeprpoprTERA RHOPALOCERA,

3. J. T. Cunninenam, M_A., F.Z.S8.

.On the Marine Fishes and Invertebrates of St. Helena.

4. W. M. SMALLWoop.

Notes on the Hydroids and Nudibranchs of Bermuda.

5. Dr. W. T. Catman, F.Z.S.

On new or rare Crustacea of the Order Cumacea from the

Collection of the Copenhagen Museum.—Pt. II. The Families

NANNASTACID& and DiastTyLIpZz.

The following communications have been received :—

ee Hone EAE TURN:

On a Collection of. “Fresh-water Crustacea from the

Transvaal.

. Dr. JoszpH Parson, F.L.S.

(a) Littoral Marine Fauna: Kerimba Archipelago, Portu-

guese East Africa, collected by Jas. J. Simpson, M.A., B.Sc.,

University of Aberdeen. Sept. 1907 to May 1908. Hoto-

THURIOIDEA.

(6) Marine Fauna: Mergui Archipelago, Lower Burma,

collected by Jas. J. Simpson, M.A., B.Sc., and R. N. Rudmose-

Brown, B.Sc., University of Aberdeen : HoLorHuRIoIDEA.

. Rownann EK. Turner, F.Z.8., F.E.S.

Additions to our Knowledge of the Fossorial Wasps of

Australia.

_ 7. MANNERS-Suire, M.A... M.B.

The Limb Arteries of Primates.

. Dr. G. Strwarpson Brapy, LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., C.M.Z.S.

A Revision of the British Species of Ostracoda belonging to

the Subfamilies Canponin#£ and HeRPErOCYPHRIDINA.

6. Hamiuron H. Druce, F.L.S., F.Z.8.

Descriptions of new Lycanipa and Hersprrimp from Tro-

pical West Africa.

Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings of the

ZOOLOGICAL Society oF Lonpon should be addressed to

P. CHALMERS MITCHELL,

Secretary.

3 Hanover Square, Lonpon, W.

December 21st, 1909.

THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.

Tats Society was founded in 1826 by Sir Sramrorp Rarrins,

Mr. J. Sasrnz, Mr. N. A. Viegors, and other eminent Naturalists,

for the advancement of Zoology and Animal Physiology, and for the

introduction of new and curious subjects of the Animal Kingdom,

and was incorporated by Royal Charter in 1829.

COUNCIL.

HIS GRACH THE DUKE OF BEDFORD, K.G., President.

Grorce A. Bovutencer, Esa.,

E.R.S., Vice-President.

Pror. Joan Rosse BrapForp,

MDS = DSc.” PRS 8 7ece-

President.

Lr.-Cor. Sre R. Havetock

CuHarues, K.C.V.O., M.D.

AurreD H. Cocks, Hse., M.A.

Tue Rr. Hon. Eirt or Cromer,

PAC CeCab.

CHartes Drummonn,

Treasurer.

Ksa.,

Freperick Giniert, Esa.

F. DuCanz Gopman, KEsa.,

D.C.L., F.R.S., Vice-President.

Toe Marquis or MHamitton,

M.P.

Srpney F, Harmer, Ese., M.A.,

Sc.D., F.R.S., Vice-President.

Str Epuunp G. Lover, Br.

EK. G. B. Meavz-Watxpo, Ese.

Pror. Epwarp ALFRED MincaIN,

M.A., Vice-President.

P. Caaumers Mircuert, Ese.,

Wig, 0igsGhg Jelorgdblh JD).

F.R.S., Secretary.

W. R. Oeitvie-Grant, Ese.

ALBERT Pam, Hse.

Oxprietp THomas, Ksa., F.R.S.

Avusyn Trevor-Barrys, Ksa.,

M.A.

A.Surra Woopwar, Ksa.,LL,D.,

F.R.S., Vice-President.

Henry Woopwarp, Ksa., LL.D.,

E.R.S.

The Society consists of Fellows, and Honorary, Foreign, and

Corresponding Members, elected according to the By-Laws. It

carries out the objects of its foundation by means of the collection

of living animals at Regent’s Park, by its Library at 3, Hanover

Square, W., and by its scientific publications.

The Office of the Society (38, Hanover Square), where all

communications should be sent, addressed to “The Secretary,” is

open from Ten till Five, except on Saturdays, when it closes at

Two P.M.

The Library, under the superintendence of Mr. F. H. Waterhouse,

is open daily at the above hours.

The Meetings of the Society for General Business are held at the

Office on the third Wednesday in every month of the year,

except in September and October, at Five p.m.

The Meetings for Scientific Business are held at the Office twice

a month on Tuesdays, except in July, August, September, and

October, at half-past Hight o’clock p.m.

The Anniversary Meeting is held on the 29th. of April, or the

nearest convenient day, at Four p.m.

The Gardens in the Regent’s Park are open daily from Nine o’clock

until Sunset. Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.L.S., is the resident Superin-

tendent and Curator of Mammals and Reptiles. Mr. D. Seth-Smith

is Curator of Birds and Inspector of Works. The Prosectorium for

Anatomical and Pathological work at the Gardens is under the

charge of Mr. Frank KE. Beddard, M.A., F.R.S., Prosector, assisted

by Mr. H. G. Plimmer, M.R.C.S., Pathologist to the Society.

TERMS FOR THE ADMISSION OF FELLOWS.

Fritows pay an Admission Fee of £5, and an annual Contri-

bution of £3, due on the Ist. of January, and payable in advance,

or a Composition of £45 in lieu thereof; the whole payment,

including the Admission Fee, being £50. 3

No person can become a Frrtow until the Admission Fee and

First Annual Subscription have been paid, or the annual payments

have been compounded for.

- Fexzows elected after the 31st. of August are not liable for the

Subscription for the year in which they are elected.

PRIVILEGES OF FELLOWS.

Fettows have Personal Admission to the Gardens with Two

Companions daily, upon signing their names in the book at the

entrance gate.

The Wire or Huszanp of a Frttow can exercise these privileges

in the absence of the Fellow.

Every Fstrow is entitled to receive annually 60 undated Green

Cards, and, when no specific instructions are received, the supply

will be sent in this form. If preferred, however, 20 Green Cards

may be exchanged for a book containing 2 Orders for each

Saturday * throughout the year. A similar book of Sunday Orders

may also be obtained in lieu of 20 Green Cards. A Green Card

may also be exchanged for 2 Buff Cards for the use of Children

under 12 years of age.

It is particularly requested that Fellows well sign every Ticket

before it goes out of their possession. Unsigned Tickets are not

available.

Green and Buff Tickets may be used on any day and in any year,

but in no case can two Children be admitted with one Adult

Ticket, or an Adult be admitted with two Children’s Tickets.

The annual supply of Tickets will be sent to each Frttow on the

Ist. of January in every year, upon filling up and returning the form

of Standing Order supplied to Fellows.

Fettows are not allowed to pass in friends on their written

Order or on presentation of their Visiting Cards,

Frttows are exempt from payment of the fee for Painting,

Sketching, and Photographing in the Society’s Gardens.

Frttows have the privilege of receiving the Society’s ordinary

Publications issued during the year upon payment of the additional

Subscription of One Guinea. This Subscription is due upon the

Ist. of January, and must be paid before the day of the Auniversary

Meeting, after which the privilege lapses. Fxrttows are likewise

entitled to purchase these Publications at 25 per cent. less than

the price charged to the public. A further reduction of 25 per

cent. is also made upon all purchases of Publications issued prior

to 1881, if above the value of Five Pounds.

Fettows also have the privilege of subscribing to the Annual

Volume of ‘ The Zoological Record,’ which gives a list of the Works

and Publications relating to Zoology in each year, for the sum of

* The Saturday Orders are not available if the Fellow introduces friends

personally on that day.

One Pound Ten Shillings. Separate divisions of volumes 39 to

42 can also be supplied. Full particulars of these publications can

be had on application to the Secretary.

Frntows may obtain a Transreraste Ivory Ticker admitting

two persons, available throughout the whole period of Fellowship,

on payment of Ten Pounds in one sum. A second similar ticket

may be obtained on payment of a further sum of Twenty Pounds.

Any Fsttow who intends to be absent from the United Kingdom

during the space of one year or more, may, upon giving to the

Secretary notice in writing, have his or her name placed upon the

“dormant list,” and will be thereupon exempt from the payment of

the annual contribution during such absence.

Any Frtuow, having paid all fees due to the Society, is at liberty

to withdraw his or her name upon giving notice in writing to the

Secretary.

Ladies or Gentlemen wishing to become Fellows of the Society

are requested to communicate with the undersigned.

P. CHALMERS MITCHELL,

Secretary.

3 Hanover Square, London, W.,

April 1st, 1910.

MEETINGS

i OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON

FOR

SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS.

(AT 3 HANOVER SQUARE, W.)

1910.

Turspay, APRIL 5 & 19

Fs May 3 & 24

a JUNE 14

Sy NovemBerr 15 & 29

* DeceMBER 13

The Chair will be taken at half-past Light o'clock in the Evening

precisely.

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON,

THE ZOOLOGICAL RECORD.

Be object of the ZootogicaL Recorp is to give, by means of an

annual Volume, complete lists of the Works and Publications

relating to Zoology in all its branches that have appeared during

the year preceding the issue of the Volume, together with full

information as to the points they deal with, arranged in such a

manner as to serve as an Index to the literature of Zoology in all

parts of the globe, and thus to form a repertory that will retain its

value for the Student in future years.

The ‘ Zoological Record’ having been amalgamated with the

International Catalogue of Scientific Literature, Zoology, Volumes

from 43 onwards can now be obtained only from Messrs. Harrison

& Sons, except when purchasing complete sets from the Zoological

Society.

Under the scheme of amalgamation, Fellows of the Society, and

Institutions already on the subscription-list, have the privilege of

subscribing at the old rate of 30s. per annum, which covers the

cost of carriage of the volume. The subscription becomes due on

July 1st in each year, and lapses if not paid by the 1st of December

following.

The Society is able to supply complete sets of the Record on the

following terms :—

Vols. 1 to 37, Price £14 10s. net.

Vols. 38, 39, and 40 at 10s. net.

Vol. 41 and onwards at 40s. each.

The prices for separate volumes are as follows :—

Vols. 1 to 40 (except Vols. 4 and 6) 10s. each net.

Vols. 41 and 42 at 40s. each. The price of the ‘Zoological Record,’

Vol. 43. and subsequent volumes, published now by Messrs. Harrison

and Co., is 40s. each.

InpEx Zootocicus. An alphabetical list of names of genera

and subgenera proposed for use in Zoology, as recorded in the

‘Zoological Record,’ 1880-1900; together with other names not

included in the ‘ Nomenclator Zoologicus’ of 8. H. Scudder. Com-

piled (for the Zoological Society of London) by Cuarrzs Ownn

WarERHouse and edited by Davin Suarp, Editor of the ‘ Zoological

Record.’ London, 1902. Price to Fellows, 18s.; price to the

public, 20s., or if sold with a set, 10s.

Divisions of the ‘ Zoological Record’ of Vols. 39 to 42 can be

supplied by the Society, but after Vol. 42 they can be had only of

Messrs. Harrison & Sons, 46 St. Martin’s Lane, W.C.

[Pe Ts Os

SEPARATE DIVISIONS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL RECORD.

Divisions of the ‘ Zoological Record,’ Vols. 39-42, containing

the literature of the years 1902-1905, may be obtained separately

as follows :—

bo 2

List of abbreviations of journals, etc.

Special Records, viz. :— ;

TeiGeneral Subjects 2) eee oe 2

II. Mammalia eNeons

III. Aves crys eng!

IY. Reptilia and Batrachia. .

VY. Pisces oe et

XII.

XIII.

XIV.

DOVaE

. Tunicata

. Mollusca

. Brachiopoda . .

. Bryozoa

. Crustacea

. Arachnida

Myriopoda

Insecta ..

Echinoderma

Vermes ..

Coelenterata ..

XVIL. Spongize dF RRS ANeSL dates ea tala ie alta

XVIII. Protozoa Ten caer ep eae Me 2)

SO OCOA7eagqgQe ge Aa qgqge eg a oe @

Index of new names of genera and subgenera. 2

Divisions from Vol. 48 onwards are now supplied by Messrs.

Harrison & Sons, 46 St. Martin’s Lane, London, W.C.

P. CHALMERS MITCHELL,

Secretary.

3 Hanover Squarz, Lonpon, W.

April \st, 1910.

LIST OF THE PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON,

Tue scientific publications of the Zoological Society of London

are of two kinds—“ Proceedings,” published in an octavo

form, and “ Transactions,” in quarto.

According to the present arrangements, the ‘‘ Proceedings”

contain not only notices of all business transacted at the scien-

tific meetings, but also all the papers read at such meetings

and recommended to be published in the ‘‘ Proceedings” by

the Committee of Publication. A large number of coloured

plates and engravings are issued in the volumes of the

“‘ Proceedings,” to illustrate the new or otherwise remark-

able species of animals described therein. Amongst such

illustrations, figures of the new or rare species acquired in a

living state for the Society’s.Gardens are often given.

The “ Proceedings” for each year are issued in four parts,

on the first of the months of June, August, October, and

April, the part published in April completing the volume

for the last half of the preceding year. From January 1901

they have been issued as two half-yearly volumes.

The ‘‘ Transactions”? contain such of the communications

made to the scientific meetings of the Society as, onaccount of

the nature of the plates required to illustrate them, are better

adapted for publication in the quarto form. They are issued

at irregular intervals.

Fellows and Corresponding Members, upon payment of

a Subscription of One Guinea before the day of the Anni-

versary Meeting in each year, are entitled to receive-the

Society’s Publications for the year. They are likewise

entitled to purchase the Publications of the Society at 25 per

cent. less than the price charged for them to the Public. A

further reduction of 25 per cent. is made upon purchases of

Publications issued prior to 1881, if they exceed the value of

five pounds.

Fellows also have the privilege of subscribing to the

Annual Volume of the Zoological Record for a sum of 80s.

(which includes cost of delivery), payable on the Ist. of July

in each year; but this privilege is forfeited unless the

subscription be paid defore the Ist. of December following.

The following is a complete list of the publications of the

Society already issued.

TRANSACTIONS* OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.

4to. 19 vols. and Index. apricots Price to the

ellows. Public.

Vol. I., containing 59 Plates.... (1833-35) .... £313 6.,... £418 Ot

Fs is ss Coy Gros 1CLS30-4 eee ee 10 OY. a, Om

ye ue, 5 GOs e | mee (Cte LO) eee ORO ue: +. ANT Osy

eee ler a3 Mins Oe es LS ONO) ier ema Ome mea. J 2 (he

. NV. ‘ GZ Gy ee ce CLS62=66) ree moreso 619 O

el, 0 QD Fy a cs re CL SCG=09) > ie Om Oey s,, Lor Ola

eo te

é ee 3 aie pirical: aes :

Ibadlexe, WONG, L2G a neconasecelboo (S35 3— 79) teers O ae Onr 010 0

Vok XI; containing 97 Plates... (880-85) 3.5 9 12) 05... . 12650

ee elles me OS a a CII OD yy non5, 1OR tS 8. 811 0

XN ie) ee a USO veg Olle Gare G Met -@

ae XaV I; my Oa ge od (ROIEILOS) oo a SOs Al

oe Wille ay a ee (ISUERIOS) Co GS G.. 718 O

xXIX., pe DAs esas LOOS TOO) ae ORO) are nomilcsnsle? a0

PROCEEDINGS OF THE COMMITTEE OF SCIENCE AND

CORRESPONDENCE OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF

LONDON. 8vo. 2 vols. (Letterpress only). rice to Price tothe

Parte JL, WOROSBIL Il wol, SwOs sonsodcccccade Alaa eee OSE]

IL 1832. i Se eae As. 6a) 2 Gs:

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON,

8vo. 15 vols. (Letterpress only) and Index, (First Series.)

Price to Price to the Price to Price to the

Fellows. Public. Fellows. Public.

Part I. 1833. 1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d.... Gs.f | Part IX. 1841.1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d. .. 6s.

Peed 1854. % Asa Ogee OS: xX. 1842. 99 4s. 6d. .. 6s.

» LL. 18380. 2 48, Gt oo OS op XL 1843. 3 As6d. a5 Osst

ee LVinsleaG: x 4s, tb oo OS: 9 XI. 1844. v 4s. Gd. .. 6s.

+ V. 1837. 5 Aly. (Gh a (OB 3 XIU. 1845. 9 4s. 6d. .. 6s.

» VL. 1838. op AS. (Bils 50 OR ” XIV. 1846. op 4s. 6d. .. 68.F

» VII. 1889. 6p Me Gil, 96 WES aie HOVERS: os 43. Gd... Oseh

» VILL. 1840. op As. 6d. . .- 6saf Index 1830-1847. 09 4s. Gd. .. 6s,

8vo. 13 vols. and Index. (Second Series.)

Letterpress only. With Plates coloured.

Price to Price to the ie Price to Price to the

Fellows. Public. Fellows. 2 Public.

Part SOVIE WES, Wearail, Sivos Eas GR coo casos £1. OC 2ae Sl ea on

XVII. 1849. +p ais, Ow soo GSS Saoncsoc LO 48. % spe IE Sei enong

XIX. 1851. 39 AS NODE as a MOG in Sah iepenire O15 9 Wk Op

e XX. 1852. # AS GOS Much gOS stance naeye iets Olay 5g I Oh

a XXI. 1853. op AS IO dag eae OS Ae te HO Miley Woo lo 4 Op

3 X XH. 1854. mi As Cth go Oh cosadcor Oi GO 5, l G Oy

5, XM 1850. op ZIG) Cian OSG See Gib ool Wy ey OG! TKS Oyp

XXIV. 1856. 99 AOU een MOSia acute d estO) itor ares Leen Ge

is XXV. 1857. 65 ASNOGS eg oo OSseawer hentia LT eOsiSs Sa eee

XXVI. 1858. 0 aS (Ni ote O°. ooo v.c 000 Hh O35 2h 2 Oe

» SAVIT. 1859. p ASCO Ma eas, HOST eM aRiieteks LAL G24 2 2G

5, XXVIII. 1860. o “he, Bh ~ oo Oh ccscov00 He Sa I Op

Index 1848-1860. i As. 6d. 6s.

+ Out of print.

* In consequence of a re-arrangement of the stock of the ‘Transactions,’ the Society is

now able to offer for sale, at the reduced price of £30, sets of Vols. v.-xvi. inclusive, and

separate papers, of which a list ean be supplied, at about one-fourth their published price,

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF THE

ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 40 vols. and 4 Indices.

Letterpress only. With Plates uncoloured. With Plates coloured.

Price to Price to the Price to Price to the Price to Price to the

Fellows. Public. Fellows. Public, Fellows. Public.

TUS oi iss OTE io oeec Oe pig pee nastecew Mlb cats Sa Sas, Oh soon Waa

MSG eA sh G deme eS. tcc e 9s, Diageo S Segara chet Cos, Os soon 4S

US Gia ts Odes en OSSu etait 9s. panic cls oaiaiers Ta RSs, OWh caeo Aiur

USGL oo WSs Gis ocoo ORFs ocn56 OS. Mignien WASSER aren al OS SH OMe eras em OSL

WES so 4s GLE coos OSiisedoon OS ee bio gl DA Ninn, Rul a CGY 9 fas ap ian 'CUSYoR

IGGG 5.5 465 Ue Soho Oiieeeods Qs. Was LOSES a OOS MO Oke eA Se

WES Gimme ence) ace ataiotrere e's rasta 9s. DO LAs go. caawoe Ch a bidn . CH080

TGTSY 5b a Se Se i a 9s. Bee oni) Se MUN ha VSO Cine eee tele ase

SUD meee Ree ere er hr at ro ak Qs. yd Se ee ROSE RO EME eA OST

SOR ane tein pea yeanrsye cused ve sce Qs. Cele eke SOOS LO Oat onic 45s.

NadexcmlkS OLSUSTUS Pere. cs ba ns As. 6d. ..... 6s.

HS Aenea mes wen cus ca eddie ssa tra Rates 9s. Re aie DORE Ss 60 Bam, OV coos 45s.

DSi > mee gn cette aoe hildaicaye. ayia id 9s 12s.* 6 ee OE sooo Geer

MSG Somer aint me eect bece reais Sescene Sera Os SD Sieperraetoeass as. da 225. 455

TUS id LIV SO er et a eee ee 9s U264Po o 36s 48s.f

TCV eG IRR ea Re PER ieee cera 9s 1 eek 36s 48s

RS A Greatere toes aera tees are wi ocenoneka Gea 9s WS 368 48s,+

TSE eerie rc arse Cents uP Ian Naa 9s WS 6 36s 48s

ISG) Fe OG ORO AG ce ORs ca NOES EECCA MONS 9s LARS iene 368 48s

a SNAG) a aoe GR zara ef ah ere Re fe ss Polson Hate SOK fant CK

ASS Oban case Gewaleseteeave ai Mamet ose sees hs 9s. SMS See Re OSS Petes Choky,

Iindexs NS SS0 Teta snot 4s, Gd..... Gs.

ES Slat one a eae Paha hae atemre snare ware 9s, eee OS a ean OOS sooo. Ohekss

IS OO Bien, trun eater. drat Wry send 9s 5 IMs 36s 48s

TURES) Ie a oa aa ea eR CR 9s 5 Bs. 36s 48s

Weel 6 6 Been ou oes eae Fees 9s pv ee aie Ge 2 36s 48s

Thetis Ses GS ae ile oa con ete Gen OIG 9s neha 36s 48s

SSG rege re seen nice, 9s asa 36s 48s

NSS vice cenit css iota el ese oiade ante 9s be DS 36s 48s.

HIG SST niote anemic barn doy teins chersvens 9s W256 36s 48s

MS SOB arere aie eo ay oi sree oes ewtertas 9s. Re SH ie. ee BOS Ye 48s

NAO Sos oP eRe en CE Bie ens 9s. a ml She tae vae OSs Lease

Iidexemlis ol USS OR servicers erie BMS, (Gh 5500 6s

TOROS GLE Be cele a Rae te aa ee RU SER a re iPiceRUe a c Sa rneet AR tal Bet 36s. 48s

TS ee a a aS age ny ag i OR ee CeO ee ie LOMA IES 3Gs. 48s

TOR 5-6 ciel is Bea a ere eg eee en ton she seta St aan edn ba rae 56s. 48s

BIL OH aa ee See cheats hee ies co HOA ca re Pe pee rg iat Se 5 BOS ARs

BINS steerer aed nas tayhe onecty Sanaa strane gard wie vg avec cre a aaa man OU a 36s. . A8s

LS Cre WER rae co Ma eo ooo ces SIRT R GOR Sa We eI enn eet 368 . ASs,

MLS (Mae Sey MSS se Ry sm inne SHG Rte RA NY ROME en 36e 48s

SOS Re eet men eae reins ccumAiecne rn TR eee cea Boome ene ae ea ea 36s 48s

NSO See re Perm eecee cre tritt, SNR, | Lk! Scie ican gia Man se DUNN Te 36s. ee ass

BOO eapee gress San wae cenit Sasa ya casas cite cue RTE Uae Me 30s. sooo 443,

index, NS OIN900 = cee a 2 4s. 1Gd.ea ee ne 08

* No perfect copies in stock, + Out of print.

PROCEEDINGS or tor GENERAL MEETINGS ror SCIENTIFIC

BUSINESS or taz ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.

8vo. 18 vols.

Price to Price to the

Fellows. Public.

HOON Moll. caer meet haa h eens elt S08 oOo tets CRM EAIMC RI es 18s, eee aes

gs By dis rece Sots een SS ne sis See Ceo USsin eer 24s.

OO 2s Be Ms Ei cle: hiv cyigaceaci avid «cloaca eset eee VSs.5 . ck eel eee

. Bp ULL ghee eat eaten tals a Weigh aie Ree oes ee WS SE ices eae

MOOS, io baci ale, axe Meats, Sika isle ee elon Canepa eae a We et. . cic). ee

2 by ORD, Pike Meas Sea a Me Ss eh Pore ee Oe a or ee NOR 56s oe ws

HL OES Gace age axa fe avarice fe ate Son ST cont ae ren a LSS ire woe en, 24s,

5 BOD U eae Hasna Pay Se emer a SMS aaa dP aan hos 1Ssie. nee 24s.

HOOD). nia Wi dias wenee mess wie calaa chee ate nade ise an ieee a Om arn 24s,

53 apy Ped eae a We Ba nsatae ofan Paden cee OR ee GAR ne pea ete es epaied O53 2As.

BB QOG aes Let che or cathe hea Voce o's as BSCR coos Meas tne hE eae Ea TOs ares 24s.

SMBR rik. Ole Wenrue ete 4 RUM A iL ceetegem RN bE Ara ahs J nue 185. cee iss

BOOZ they urna tebe aioe kemvemeea ee ain Uae eS Ly gente Rane VSS hee 24s.

5 iy aL Ly otis Pec decal nn, Calepeh tigpeite es bone hao icc RRR ES eA 1Ss5 eae es 245.

QOS os tet lean tatty, vane ieee rae ae oo coe ete ae oem eT IRekep ees a cA 24s.

5 aes le Ce Arias crmmmerierern Sokal 5 Geng LSM os oc5u ama ISs peers ‘24s. -

TNSIOS ea eee LS oats en gre rarer rare MRP RR en he Rat A: i a AR oe les eee 24s,

eG yale her te os i ead Mae SS pA aM NO 8 Ode,

LISTS OF THE ANIMALS IN THE SOCIETY’S GARDENS.

List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens

of the Zoological Society of London. (Highth Edition.) 8vo.

1883. . Cloth, 4s. 6d.

List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens

of the Zoological Society of London. (Ninth Edition.) 8vo.

1896. Cloth, 6s.; Paper, 5s.

Catalogue of the Library of the Zoological Society of London

(Fifth Edition.) 8vo. 1902. Cloth, 6s.; Paper, 5s

THE OFFICIAL ILLUSTRATED GARDEN GUIDE—8th Edition

—with (1) a Street Map, showing a direct route to the

‘“‘Zoo” from all parts of London and Suburbs ; (2) a Plan of

the Grounds, showing at a glance the location of the animals ;

(3) a short description of some of the principal animals in the

Collection (now containing about 3000 specimens), together

with 48 Photographic Illustrations and Index, may now be

obtained at the Society’s Office, 3, Hanover Square, W.,

or at the Society’s Gardens in Regent’s Park, N.W., price -

6d. in Stiff Paper Cover, postage 13d., or in Art Cloth Cover

price ls. 2d. post free.

P. CHALMERS MITCHELL,

Secretary.

8, Hanover Square, London, W.,

April 1st,-1910.

These publications may be obtained at the Socrzry’s Orrice

(3, Hanover Square, W.), at Messrs. Longmans’ (Paternoster Row,

.C.), or through any bookseller. |

Contenrs (continued),

December 14, 1909.

; Page

The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month ot —

Igual? IDE) co pooatobo ese bbodeuacpos SopcancceMreer ENPRBANGROG ica aibiae Shan else:

_ Mrs. R. Haig Thomas, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, some skins of Hybrid

Pheasants ab ee ee reer eee eth sa eneed be Seed eden ence ee de oorse ed pDevees De wedboacd 834

Mr, D. Seth-Smith, F.Z.8. Exhibition of a photograph of, and remarks upon, a nest of

Scopus wmbretta ......-.-- SUBH ARG dooohbisoe Ageloustel sli -Vetevote fey iatetey ar vey tice Sapeheiens eters 88h

Dr, Hi. B, Fantham, F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, microscopic preparations

and sketches illustrating the life-cycle of the Protozoon Himeria (Coccidium) avium,

parasitic in the alimentary canal of Grouse .............20.5. ;

Dr. C. W. Andrews, F.R.S., F.Z.S. Exhibition of a photograph of the Robber Crab (Birgus

latro) on Christmas Island, with an account of its habits. (Plate LXXXIII.)........ S87

Dr. R. T. Leiper, F.Z.8. Exhibition of the original specimens of the Nematode Worm

Acantkocheilonema dracunculoides Cobbold .........-..0+- Ao co basco yncone sear . 880

1, On Change of Colour in a Specimen of Me//ivoru ratel living in the Society's Gardens.

1B Dk ANID): WN ASE MIDAS: o4 80 Go nto pablo doout ogo 6

CC ee rr ry

. A Comparative Examination of three living Specimens of Felis tigris sondaica, with

Notes on an old Javan Male. By Dr. F. D. Wetcn, F.Z.S. ...4 : 892

ferme ea Pheer beeen te

5. The Nesting Habits of the Tree-Frog Phyllomedusa sauvagii. By W. E. Agar, M.A.,

DiSes.Glasrow. University.n. (Plate nlexexexuiy® ie iieis cs. citeiiaunslajelajueie ere cicvele Spc cle ates 898

4, Marine Fauna from the Mergui Archipelago, Lower Burma, collected by Jas. J. Simpson,

M.A., B.Se., and R. N. Rudmose-Brown, B.S8e., University of Aberdeen : Mapreporaria.

By Rura M. Harrison and Margaret Pootn. (Plates LXXXV. & LXXXVL.)...... 897

5, Marine Fauna from the Kerimba Archipelago, Portuguese East Africa, collected by Jas.

J. Simpson, M.A., B.Se., and R, N, Rudmose-Brown, B.Se., University of Aberdeen ;

Manpruporaria. By Rutu M. Harrison and Maregarzer Poon ..............- pec na ale)

6. Some Notes upon Loa occidentalis and Boa (Pelophilus) madagascariensis, By Frank

BE BEDARD, Ml ANGE RS.5. b): 2,87, ME nOsec Lom bOnuesOCletyp cess 2c aicieie)-/c 7. Licketaeeiers 918

7. Notes upon the Anatomy of Monkeys of the Genus Pithecia. By Frank E. Beppaxp,

M.A,, F.R.S., F.Z.8., Prosector to the Society ............ SORES ee ciche ERe 925

8. On the Ophidian Genus Grayia. By G. A. Bouteyanr, F.R.S., V.P.Z.S, ..... te teeta eed

Mine pall tev ejereks stents sieves: MN aaa Geet inca A betre Artaos 5 Tbrid Allg A -oineney Geena ier GME ER Delis i

List of Council and Officers ........... Pipette eats eshte conde ae A Sine er eR rr rR CA rans ran Hae ere, ii

List of Contents ee Sue Fe ANCA Ey Or ata OLS IO EERO DING Or. aM Ce eerhe ie ee Ill

Mio aie tical is fOMMCOn triUCOUSE sastais mate atevahe ea Me coeE ets ie ore ps, 2s (Sile vals falas enenakars sete ne De

asta Omelatestay elects tienes a/nciars ses ae Reena el amet iehet ern ave Rrvedidy aoe p ei Fi ee leprae XVil

Dist, Of Mex tounessan ey aki cui ae cin sey salen peat Ce 1 tala Rae eer pean xix

iNew GenericuMermag nse sreieram ancl rapouiskatt Sia enaisetee edn eb geleriy ola NEN t RJ Dol te Na eh Sanaa yale ee KTV

JIE N RDS es CAUAC Hoe SOND WHOS etn aa md ab oma Bib ot Rat ece, Heesepenn ania RAT oh

Vignes, RG LUAU SA AL eR Se ta EO The ten ernie

oS 0.0 Pa an iS

1909, pp. 739-952.

. Plate Tage

LXXVII. 1. Betta rubra. 2. B. macrophihalma. 3. B. aharensis. \

4. B. fasciata. 5. Polyacanthus signatus ..++..-+.. |

LXXVIII. 1. Betta teniata. 2. B. fusca. 3. B. macrostoma. 767

ACR BY CLA DEEOLUES Wee Re mPa Vaiale aia atc) shu oteterera kena \

LXXIX. 1. Trichopodus pectoralis. 2. T.leeri. 3. Trichogaster sota.)

LXXX. 1-7. Parapleustes gracilis Buchholz. 8-82. ean

grandimanus ChevreuX .-.--... says paeenis

LXXXI. 33-45. Husirus biscayensis Bonnier. 46-48, Rhachotropis

rostrata Bonnier. 49-65. Rhachotropis helleri Boeck . )

LXXXII. Aberrations/in Oriental Lepidoptera ..-..........-..-- 880)

LXXXIII. Robber Crabs (Birgus latro) climbing a Sago-palm ...... 887

LXXXIV. 1. Nest of Phyllomedusa sauvagit. 2. P. sauvagii, 2.

Dissected from the side .....-....eeeeecere ee ees 895

ae \ Madreporaria from Mergui Archipelago ....-...+-+--- 897

NOTICE.

The ‘ Proceedings’ for the year are issued in four ee paged consecutively,

so that the complete USSD. is now P. Z. 8. 1909, p. -. . The Distribution

is as follows:—

a Papers read in January and February, issued in June.

y ue » March and Aovril, een St:

; 5p » May and June, » 9, October.

iF MA », November and December, ,, ,, April.

‘ Proceedings,’ 1909, pp. Pa tale were, fant October 19th, 1909.

Oe Re Q Gy

The Abstracts of the papers read at the Scientific Meetings in

November and December are contained in this Part.